9143i, 9480i, 9480i CT
and 5ii Seriies PPhhoonnees
SIP IP PHONE
41-001160-01
Rev 00
Administrator Guide
Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Software License Agreement
Aastra Telecom Inc., hereinafter known as "Seller", grants to Customer a
personal, worldwide, non-transferable, non-sublicenseable and non-exclusive,
restricted use license to use Software in object form solely with the Equipment for
which the Software was intended. This Product may integrate programs, licensed
to Aastra by third party Suppliers, for distribution under the terms of this
agreement. These programs are confidential and proprietary, and are protected as
such by copyright law as unpublished works and by international treaties to the
fullest extent under the applicable law of the jurisdiction of the Customer. In
addition, these confidential and proprietary programs are works conforming to the
requirements of Section 401 of title 17 of the United States Code. Customer shall
not disclose to any third party such confidential and proprietary programs and
information and shall not export licensed Software to any country except in
accordance with United States Export laws and restrictions.
Customer agrees to not reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble or display
Software furnished in object code form. Customer shall not modify, copy,
reproduce, distribute, transcribe, translate or reduce to electronic medium or
machine readable form or language, derive source code without the express
written consent of the Seller and its Suppliers, or disseminate or otherwise
disclose the Software to third parties. All Software furnished hereunder (whether
or not part of firmware), including all copies thereof, are and shall remain the
property of Seller and its Suppliers and are subject to the terms and conditions of
this agreement. All rights reserved.
Customer's use of this software shall be deemed to reflect Customer's agreement
to abide by the terms and conditions contained herein. Removal or modification
of trademarks, copyright notices, logos, etc., or the use of Software on any
Equipment other than that for which it is intended, or any other material breach of
this Agreement, shall automatically terminate this license. If this Agreement is
terminated for breach, Customer shall immediately discontinue use and destroy or
return to Seller all licensed software and other confidential or proprietary
information of Seller. In no event shall Seller or its suppliers or licensors be liable
for any damages whatsoever (including without limitation, damages for loss of
business profits, business interruption, loss of business information, other
pecuniary loss, or consequential damages) arising out of the use of or inability to
use the software, even if Seller has been advised of the possibility of such
damages.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Third Party Copyright Compliance
This product contains software provided under license to Aastra Telecom by one
or more third parties. In addition to the Aastra SLA shown above, use and
distribution of this product is subject to the following license terms:
Expat XML Parser
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd and Clark Cooper
Copyright (c) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Expat maintainers.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction,
including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense,
and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do
so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial
portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M5T SIP Stack - M5T
Portions of this software are © 1997 - 2006 M5T a Division of Media5 Corporation ("M5T( tm )").
All intellectual property rights in such portions of the software and documentation are owned by
M5T and are protected by Canadian copyright laws, other applicable copyright laws and
international treaty provisions. M5T and its suppliers retain all rights not expressly granted.
MD5 RSA
Copyright (C) 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc. Created 1991. All rights reserved.
License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as the "RSA Data
Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing this
software or this function. License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that
such works are identified as "derived from the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest
Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing the derived work.
RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations concerning either the merchantability of this
software or the suitability of this software for any particular purpose. It is provided "as is" without
express or implied warranty of any kind.
These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation and/or software.
OpenSSL
License Issues
The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of the OpenSSL License
and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit. See below for the actual license texts.
Actually both licenses are BSD-style Open Source licenses. In case of any license issues related to
OpenSSL please contact [email protected].
41-001160-00, Release 2.2 Rev 05
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OpenSSL License
/* ============================================================
* Copyright (c) 1998-2007 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
*
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
*
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
*
*
*
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this
*
*
*
*
software must display the following acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
* 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to
*
*
*
*
endorse or promote products derived from this software without
prior written permission. For written permission, please contact
* 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL"
*
*
*
nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written
permission of the OpenSSL Project.
* 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
acknowledgment:
*
41-001160-00, Release 2.2 Rev 05
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*
*
*
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY
* EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
* PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR
* ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
* NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT,
* STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
* ====================================================================
*
* This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
* Hudson ([email protected]).
*/
Original SSLeay License
* All rights reserved.
*
* This package is an SSL implementation written
* The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
*
* This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as
viii
41-001160-00, Release 2.2 Rev 05
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
* the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions
* apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,
* lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation
* included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms
* except that the holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]).
*
* Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in
* the code are not to be removed.
* If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution
* as the author of the parts of the library used.
* This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or
* in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
*
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
*
*
*
*
*
must display the following acknowledgement:
"This product includes cryptographic software written by
The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library
being used are not cryptographic related :-).
* 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from
*
*
*
the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
"This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected])"
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
41-001160-00, Release 2.2 Rev 05
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE
* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
* SUCH DAMAGE.
*
* The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or
* derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be
* copied and put under another distribution licence
* [including the GNU Public Licence.]
*/
x
41-001160-00, Release 2.2 Rev 05
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
libSRTP (SRTP) - Cisco
Copyright (c) 2001-2005 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
•
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
•
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
•
Neither the name of the Cisco Systems, Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION).
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
41-001160-00, Release 2.2 Rev 05
xi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wind River Systems - VxWorks software
The VxWorks Run-Time software module is Copyright (c) WindRiver Systems Inc, all rights
reserved. It is licensed for use, not sold. All use of this product and the VxWorks Run-Time
module is subject to agreement with the following EULA terms
With respect to the Run-Time Module, Wind River and its licensors are third party beneficiaries of
the End User License Agreement and that the provisions related to the Run-Time Module are made
expressly for the benefit of, and are enforceable by, Wind River and its licensors.
Activities expressly prohibited: (i) copying the Run-Time Module, except for archive purposes
consistent with the End User’s archive procedures; (ii) transferring the Run-Time Module to a
third party apart from the Target Application; (iii) modifying, decompiling, disassembling, reverse
engineering or otherwise attempting to derive the Source Code of the Run-Time Module; (iv)
exporting the Run-Time Module or underlying technology in contravention of applicable U.S. and
foreign export laws and regulations; and (v) using the Run-Time Module other than in connection
with operation of the Target Application.
Aastra Telecom and Wind River Systems: (i) Retain ownership of all copies of the Run-Time
Module; (ii) expressly disclaim all implied warranties, including without limitation the implied
warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, title and non-infringement; (iii)
exclude liability for any special, indirect, punitive, incidental and consequential damages; and (iv)
require that any further distribution of the Run-Time Module be subject to the same restrictions set
forth herein.
UPnP - Intel
INTEL SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (Final, Site License)
IMPORTANT - READ BEFORE COPYING, INSTALLING OR USING.
Do not use or load this software and any associated materials (collectively, the "Software") until
you have carefully read the following terms and conditions. By loading or using the Software, you
agree to the terms of this Agreement. If you do not wish to so agree, do not install or use the
Software.
LICENSE. You may copy the Software onto your organization's computers for your organization's
use, and you may make a reasonable number of back-up copies of the Software, subject to these
conditions:
xii
41-001160-00, Release 2.2 Rev 05
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. You may not copy, modify, rent, sell, distribute or transfer any part of the Software except as
provided in this Agreement, and you agree to prevent unauthorized copying of the Software.
2. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the Software.
3. You may not sublicense the Software.
4. The Software may include portions offered on terms in addition to those set out here,
as set out in a license accompanying those portions.
OWNERSHIP OF SOFTWARE AND COPYRIGHTS. Title to all copies of the Software remains
with Intel or its suppliers. The Software is copyrighted and protected by the laws of the United
States and other countries, and international treaty provisions. You may not remove any copyright
notices from the Software. Intel may make changes to the Software, or to items referenced therein,
at any time without notice, but is not obligated to support or update the Software. Except as
otherwise expressly provided, Intel grants no express or implied right under Intel patents,
copyrights, trademarks, or other intellectual property rights. You may transfer the Software only if
the recipient agrees to be fully bound by these terms and if you retain no copies of the Software.
LIMITED MEDIA WARRANTY. If the Software has been delivered by Intel on physical media,
Intel warrants the media to be free from material physical defects for a period of ninety days after
delivery by Intel. If such a defect is found, return the media to Intel for replacement or alternate
delivery of the Software as Intel may select.
EXCLUSION OF OTHER WARRANTIES. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED ABOVE, THE
SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY
OF ANY KIND INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
NONINFRINGEMENT, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Intel does not warrant or assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness of any
information, text, graphics, links or other items contained within the Software.
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. IN NO EVENT SHALL INTEL OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR LOST INFORMATION) ARISING OUT
OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF INTEL HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS PROHIBIT EXCLUSION OR
41-001160-00, Release 2.2 Rev 05
xiii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONSEQUENTIAL OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. YOU
MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER LEGAL RIGHTS THAT VARY FROM JURISDICTION TO
JURISDICTION. TERMINATION OF THIS AGREEMENT.
Intel may terminate this Agreement at any time if you violate its terms. Upon termination, you will
immediately destroy the Software or return all copies of the Software to Intel.
APPLICABLE LAWS. Claims arising under this Agreement shall be governed by the laws of
California, excluding its principles of conflict of laws and the United Nations Convention on
Contracts for the Sale of Goods. You may not export the Software in violation of applicable export
laws and regulations. Intel is not obligated under any other agreements unless they are in writing
and signed by an authorized representative of Intel.
GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The Software is provided with "RESTRICTED
RIGHTS."
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in
FAR52.227-14 and DFAR252.227-7013 et seq. or its successor. Use of the Software by the
Government constitutes acknowledgment of Intel's proprietary rights therein. Contractor or
Manufacturer is Intel Corporation, 2200 Mission College Blvd., Santa Clara, CA 95052.
xiv
41-001160-00, Release 2.2 Rev 05
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Third Party Copyright Compliance .......................................................................................v
Expat XML Parser .......................................................................................................v
MD5 RSA ................................................................................................................... vi
License Issues ........................................................................................................... vi
OpenSSL License ..................................................................................................... vii
.
.
.
.
Preface
About this guide ..............................................................................................................xvii
Audience ..................................................................................................................xvii
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 1
Overview
.
Description ...............................................................................................................1-3
Model 9143i IP Phone ..............................................................................................1-6
Model 9480i and 9480i CT IP Phones ...................................................................1-10
Model 51i IP Phone ................................................................................................1-15
Model 53i IP Phone ................................................................................................1-20
.
.
.
.
.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 57i and 57i CT IP Phones ...........................................................................1-27
Firmware Installation Information .................................................................................1-33
Configuration Server Requirement .........................................................................1-35
Description .............................................................................................................1-36
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 2
Configuration Interface Methods
.
Configuration Methods ...................................................................................................2-2
IP Phone UI ..............................................................................................................2-2
Configuration Files (Administrator Only) ................................................................2-17
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 3
.
Administrator Level Options ...........................................................................................3-3
IP Phone UI Options ................................................................................................3-3
Aastra Web UI Options ............................................................................................3-6
Restarting Your Phone ...........................................................................................3-13
Set Phone to Factory Defaults/Erase Local Configuration .....................................3-15
Basic Settings ........................................................................................................3-19
Account Configuration ............................................................................................3-34
Network Settings ....................................................................................................3-36
Line Settings ..........................................................................................................3-69
.
.
.
.
.
vi
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Server Settings ................................................................................3-73
Firmware Update Features ....................................................................................3-82
TLS Support ...........................................................................................................3-83
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 4
.
Basic Network Settings ............................................................................................4-4
Advanced SIP Settings (optional) ..........................................................................4-80
Autodial Settings ....................................................................................................4-99
Configuration Server Protocol ....................................................................................4-104
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 5
.
Administrator Passwords .........................................................................................5-9
Locking/Unlocking the Phone .................................................................................5-10
Defining an Emergency Dial Plan ..........................................................................5-16
Time and Date ........................................................................................................5-18
Backlight Mode (9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT only) .................................5-26
Live Dial Pad* .........................................................................................................5-29
.
.
.
.
.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Local Dial Plan .......................................................................................................5-49
Display DTMF Digits ..............................................................................................5-61
Call Waiting/Call Waiting Tone ...............................................................................5-63
Stuttered Dial Tone .................................................................................................5-66
Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing .............................................................................5-72
DND Key Mode ......................................................................................................5-87
.
.
.
.
Location Identification Number (ELIN) ...................................................................5-93
Key Mapping ........................................................................................................5-109
Ring Tones and Tone Sets ...................................................................................5-113
Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception) ...........................................5-125
Speeddial Prefixes ...............................................................................................5-160
Busy Lamp Field (BLF) ........................................................................................5-161
BLF Subscription Period ......................................................................................5-168
BLF/Xfer and Speeddial/Xfer Keys ......................................................................5-170
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) (for Sylantro Servers) .....................................5-176
ACD Subscription Period .....................................................................................5-186
BLA Subscription Period ......................................................................................5-188
.
.
.
.
.
viii
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do Not Disturb (DND) ..........................................................................................5-199
Bridged Line Appearance (BLA) ..........................................................................5-210
Park/Pick Up Key .................................................................................................5-219
Last Call Return (lcr) (Sylantro Servers) ..............................................................5-230
Callers List ...........................................................................................................5-273
Directory List ........................................................................................................5-282
Voicemail (9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT only) .........................................5-293
Audio Transmit and Receive Gain Adjustments ...................................................5-339
Centralized Conferencing (for Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers) ..........................5-341
.
.
.
.
Authentication Support for HTTP/HTTPS Download Methods, used with Broadsoft Client
.
.
Chapter 6
.
Boot Sequence Recovery Mode ..............................................................................6-9
Single Call Restriction (57i CT and 9480i CT only) ................................................6-11
Missed Call Summary Subscription .......................................................................6-13
As-Feature-Event Subscription ..............................................................................6-17
Blacklist Duration ...................................................................................................6-22
Whitelist Proxy .......................................................................................................6-24
.
.
.
.
.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Symmetric UDP Signaling ......................................................................................6-43
Multi-Stage Digit Collection (Billing Codes) Support (for Sylantro Servers) ...........6-45
Ignore Out of Sequence Errors ..............................................................................6-50
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 7
Encrypted Files on the IP Phone
.
About this chapter ...........................................................................................................7-1
Configuration File Encryption Method ......................................................................7-2
Procedure to Encrypt Configuration Files ................................................................7-4
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 8
Upgrading the Firmware
.
Upgrading the Firmware .................................................................................................8-2
Manual Firmware and Configuration File Update .....................................................8-4
Automatic Update (auto-resync) ..............................................................................8-6
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 9
Troubleshooting
.
Log Settings .............................................................................................................9-3
Module/Debug Level Settings ..................................................................................9-4
Support Information ..................................................................................................9-7
WatchDog Task Feature .........................................................................................9-12
Troubleshooting Solutions ............................................................................................9-15
Description .............................................................................................................9-15
Why does my phone display “Application missing”? ..............................................9-15
.
.
.
.
.
x
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How do I restart the IP phone? ..............................................................................9-18
How do I set the IP phone to factory default? ........................................................9-19
How do I erase the phone’s local configuration? ...................................................9-20
How do I lock and unlock the phone? ....................................................................9-23
.
.
.
.
Appendix A
Configuration Parameters
.
About this appendix ....................................................................................................... A-1
Network Settings ..................................................................................................... A-7
DHCP Option Settings .......................................................................................... A-12
Password Settings ................................................................................................ A-14
Configuration Server Settings ............................................................................... A-17
Network Address Translation (NAT) Settings ........................................................ A-27
Rport Setting ......................................................................................................... A-29
Local SIP UDP/TCP Port Setting .......................................................................... A-30
Type of Service (ToS)/DSCP Settings ................................................................... A-42
Time and Date Settings ......................................................................................... A-45
Custom Time Zone and DST Settings .................................................................. A-51
Backlight Mode Settings (9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, 57i CT) ................................. A-60
Live Dialpad Settings ............................................................................................ A-61
SIP Local Dial Plan Settings ................................................................................. A-62
.
.
.
.
.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
xi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SIP Basic, Global Settings .................................................................................... A-64
Advanced SIP Settings ......................................................................................... A-87
Missed Call Summary Subscription Settings ........................................................ A-96
As-Feature-Event Subscription Settings ............................................................... A-99
Autodial Settings ................................................................................................. A-114
Callers List Settings ............................................................................................ A-119
Customize Callers List and Services Key ........................................................... A-120
Ring Tone and Tone Set Global Settings ............................................................ A-135
Ring Tone Per-Line Settings ............................................................................... A-137
Stuttered Dial Tone Setting ................................................................................. A-143
Call Waiting Settings ........................................................................................... A-144
Message Waiting Indicator Settings .................................................................... A-145
DND Key Mode Settings ..................................................................................... A-146
Priority Alert Settings ........................................................................................... A-147
Bellcore Cadence Settings .................................................................................. A-152
.
.
.
.
.
xii
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Settings .............................................................................................. A-154
Language Pack Settings ..................................................................................... A-156
Suppress DTMF Playback Setting ...................................................................... A-165
Display DTMF Digits Setting ............................................................................... A-166
Intercom, Auto-Answer, and Barge In Settings ................................................... A-167
ACD Auto-Available Timer Settings ................................................................... A-178
Mapping Key Settings ......................................................................................... A-181
Softkey Settings for 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, 57i CT ......................................... A-185
Programmable Key Settings for 9143i, 53i, and 55i ............................................ A-194
Top Softkey Settings for 57i and 57i CT .............................................................. A-199
.
.
.
.
and 560M (for 55i, 57i, 57i CT) ........................................................................... A-208
.
.
.
.
.
Locking Softkeys and Programmable Keys ........................................................ A-214
Locking the SAVE and DLETE Keys (53i) ........................................................... A-217
Expansion Module 1 through 3 ........................................................................... A-219
Advanced Operational Parameters ........................................................................... A-221
Update Caller ID Setting. .................................................................................... A-221
Boot Sequence Recovery Mode Settings. .......................................................... A-222
Blacklist Duration Setting .................................................................................... A-224
Whitelist Proxy Setting ........................................................................................ A-224
Polling Action URI Settings ................................................................................. A-225
XML Key Redirection Settings (for Redial, Xfer, Conf, Icom, Voicemail) ............ A-226
Options Key Redirection Setting (Services key on 51i) ....................................... A-228
Off-Hook and XML Application Interaction Setting .............................................. A-228
XML Override for a Locked Phone Setting .......................................................... A-229
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
xiii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Encryption Setting ......................................................................... A-232
Troubleshooting Parameters ..................................................................................... A-233
Log Settings ........................................................................................................ A-233
WatchDog Settings ............................................................................................. A-236
.
.
.
.
Appendix B
About this appendix ....................................................................................................... B-1
.
.
.
Appendix C
.
.
About this appendix .......................................................................................................C-1
.
.
IP Phone at the Asterisk IP PBX ...................................................................................C-2
Appendix D
Sample Configuration Files
About this appendix .......................................................................................................D-1
.
Sample Configuration Files ...........................................................................................D-2
.
57i Sample Configuration File .................................................................................D-2
.
57i CT Sample Configuration File .........................................................................D-12
53i Sample Configuration File ...............................................................................D-29
.
.
Appendix E
About this appendix ....................................................................................................... E-1
.
.
.
BroadSoft BroadWorks BLF .................................................................................... E-3
.
.
Appendix F
Sample Multiple Proxy Server Configuration
.
About this appendix ....................................................................................................... F-1
.
.
Multiple Proxy Server Configuration .............................................................................. F-2
xiv
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix G
Creating and ManagingXML Applications
.
Creating Custom Softkeys ......................................................................................G-5
Text Screen Object (Text Screens) ........................................................................G-14
XML URI for Key Press Simulation .......................................................................G-60
Attributes/Options to Use with XML Objects .........................................................G-78
Support of Virtual Web Servers .............................................................................G-88
Non-Blocking HTTP Connections .........................................................................G-88
XML SIP Notify ......................................................................................................G-89
.
.
.
Limited Warranty
.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
xv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preface
About this guide
Introduction
This SIP IP Phone Administrator Guide provides information on the basic
network setup, operation, and maintenance of the IP phones, Models 9143i, 9480i,
9480i CT and the 5i Series IP Phones (51i, 53i, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT). It also
includes details on the functioning and configuration of the IP phones.
Note: Features, characteristics, requirements, and configuration that are
specific to a particular IP phone model are indicated where required in
this guide.
Audience
This guide is for network administrators, system administrators, developers and
partners who need to understand how to operate and maintain the IP phone on a
SIP network. It also provides some user-specific information.
This guide contains information that is at a technical level, more suitable for
system or network administrators. Prior knowledge of IP Telephony concepts is
recommended.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
xvii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
About this guide
Other Documentation
The IP phone documentation consists of:
•
•
<Model-specific> SIP IP Phone Installation Guide – contains installation
and set-up instructions, information on general features and functions, and
basic options list customization. Included with the phone.
Model 9143i, 9480i, 9480i CT, and 5i Series SIP IP Phone Administrator
Guide – explains how to set the phone up on the network, as well as advanced
configuration instructions for the SIP IP phone. This guide contains
information that is at a technical level more suitable for a system or network
administrator.
•
<Model-specific> SIP IP Phone User Guides – explains the most commonly
used features and functions for an end user.
This Administrator Guide complements the Aastra product-specific Installation
Guide and the Aastra product-specific User Guide.
xviii
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapters and appendixes in this guide
This guide contains the following chapters and appendixes:
For
Go to
An overview of the IP Phones and the IP Phone firmware installation
information
Chapter 1
IP Phone interface methods
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Chapter 8
Chapter 9
Appendix A
Appendix B
Appendix C
Appendix D
Appendix E
Appendix F
Appendix G
Administrator options information
Configuring the Network and Global SIP Features on the IP Phone
Configuring operational information on the IP Phones
Configuring advanced operational information on the IP Phones
Encryption information
Firmware upgrade information
Troubleshooting solutions
Configuration parameters
Configuration server setup
Configuring the IP Phones at the Asterisk PBX
Sample configuration files
Sample BLF softkey settings
Sample multiple proxy server configuration
Creating XML applications
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
xix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1
Overview
About this chapter
Introduction
This chapter briefly describes the IP Phone Models, and provides information
about installing the IP phone firmware. It also describes the firmware and
configuration files that the IP phone models use for operation.
Topics
Topic
Page
IP Phone Models
page 1-3
Model 9143i IP Phone
page 1-6
Model 9480i and 9480i CT IP Phones
Model 51i IP Phone
page 1-10
page 1-15
page 1-20
page 1-23
page 1-27
page 1-33
page 1-33
page 1-34
page 1-35
Model 53i IP Phone
Model 55i IP Phone
Model 57i and 57i CT IP Phones
Firmware Installation Information
Installation Considerations
Installation Requirements
Configuration Server Requirement
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
About this chapter
Topic
Page
Firmware and Configuration Files
page 1-36
page 1-38
page 1-39
Configuration File Precedence
Installing the Firmware/Configuration Files
1-2
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
IP Phone Models
IP Phone Models
Description
All Aastra SIP IP Phone Models communicate over an IP network allowing you to
receive and place calls in the same manner as a regular business telephone.
All phone models support the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP). The 9480i CT and
57i CT offers the base phone along with a cordless extension.
References
For more information about the features and installation requirements, see the
SIP IP Phone Installation Guide for your specific model.
The following illustrations show the types of IP Phone Models.
O
pti
o
ns
Dir
e
c
t
or
y
9
Sa
e
4
v
e
8
0
i
Co
n
Del
et
f
Xf
e
r
L3
L2
L1
M
ut
e
9480i
9143i
9
4
8
0
i
C
T
9480i CT
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone Models
51i
53i
57i CT
55i
57i
Optional Accessories
The following are optional accessories for the IP Phones.
Additional Ethernet Cable
(category 5/5e straight through
cable)
Power over Ethernet (PoE)
Inline Power Injector
1-4
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
IP Phone Models
A Power over Ethernet (PoE) inline power injector supplies 48V power to the IP
phone through the Ethernet cable on pins 4 & 5 and 7 & 8.
Warning: Do not use this inline PoE power injector to power other
devices. See your phone-specific Installation Guide for more information.
Reference
For more information about installing the PoE and additional Ethernet cable, see
your phone-specific Installation Guide.
536M Expansion Module
for 53i, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT
560M Expansion Module
for 55i, 57i, and 57i CT
The 536M module adds 36 additional softkeys to the IP phone models 53i, 55i,
57i, and 57i CT. The 536M provides paper labels for each softkey. Up to 3
modules can be piggy-backed to provide up to 108 additional softkeys for the
phone.
The 560M module adds 60 additional softkeys to the IP phone models 55i, 57i,
and 57i CT (using the 3 function keys on the bottom right of the unit). The 560M
module provides an LCD display for display softkey labels. Up to 3 modules can
be piggy-backed to provide up to 180 additional softkeys for the phone.
Reference
For more information about installing and using the expansion modules, see your
phone-specific Installation Guide and phone-specific User Guide.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone Models
Model 9143i IP Phone
This section provides brief information about the Model 9143i IP Phone. It
includes a list of features and describes the hard keys on the 9143i.
Options
Directory
Save
Delete
Conf
Xfer
ABC
J KL
TUV
DEF
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
MNO
WXYZ
L3
L2
L1
PQRS
#
*
Mute
9143i Phone Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
3-line LCD screen
3 call appearance lines with LEDs
7 programmable keys
Press-and-Hold speeddial key configuration feature
Full-duplex speakerphone for handsfree calls
Supports up to 9 call lines
Headset support (modular connector)
Built-in two-port, 10/100 Ethernet ports - lets you share a connection with
your computer
•
Inline power support (based on 802.3af standard) which eliminates power
adapters.
•
•
•
AC power adapter (included)
Enhanced busy lamp fields*
Set paging*
*Availability of feature dependant on your phone system or service provider.
1-6
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
IP Phone Models
9143i Symbol Key Descriptions*
Keys
Key Description
Navigation keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view
different status and text messages on the LCD display (if there is more than
1 line of status/text messages). These buttons also let you scroll through
menu selections, such as the Options List.
Pressing the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys lets you view the different line/
call appearances. While in the Options List, these keys allow you to exit or
enter the current option. When you are editing entries on the display,
pressing the LEFT arrow key erases the character on the left; pressing the
RIGHT arrow key sets the option.
Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open
list, such as the Options List, without saving changes.
Hold key - Places an active call on hold. To retrieve a held call, press the
call appearance button beside the light that is flashing.
Volume control key - Adjusts the volume for the handset, headset, ringer,
and handsfree speaker.
Callers List key - Allows you to access the Callers List that stores up to
200 of the last calls received.
Conference key - Allows you to begin a conference call with up to 3 active
call parties.
Conf
Xfer
Transfer key - Allows you to perform blind or consultative transfer of an
active call to another number. In blind transfer, you transfer the call without
waiting for the far end to answer. In consultative transfer, you wait for the far
end to answer before transferring the call.
Redial key - Redials a previously dialed number. The Redial key stores up
to 100 previously dialed numbers you can select from. Pressing the Redial
key twice simultaneously redials the last dialed number.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone Models
Keys
Key Description
Line/Call Appearance key - Connects you to a line or call. The Aastra
9143i IP Phone supports up to 3 line keys.
L3
L2
L1
Handsfree key - Activates Handsfree for making and receiving calls
without lifting the handset. When the audio mode option is set, this key is
used to switch between a headset and the handsfree speakerphone.
Options key - Accesses options to customize your phone. Specific options
are available to your System Administrator only and are password
protected. Contact your System Administrator for more information.
Options
Directory
Directory key - Accesses the Directory on the phone. The Directory List is
your personal phone book, conveniently stored within your phone. You can
enter up to 200 entries into the 9143i Directory by adding them manually, or
by saving the number and name from other lists stored on your phone.
Each entry can contain a maximum of 16 letters and
numbers.
Save key - Allows you to save entries when storing numbers and names in
Directory. Also allows you to save Option settings when using the
programmable keys.
Save
Delete key - Allows you to remove entries from the Redial, Directory, or
Callers Lists.
Delete
1-8
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
IP Phone Models
Keys
Key Description
Programmable keys - Allows you to use the feature configured for that
key. You can program up to 7 keys with a specific function. By default, there
are no functions configured on the programmable keys (keys are
configured as “None”).
Note: For more information about configuring the programmable keys 1
through 7 to perform specific functions, see Chapter 5, “Configuring
Operational Features” the section, “Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature
Keys/Expansion Module Keys” on page 5-137.
Mute key - Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you (the
light indicator flashes when the microphone is on mute).
Mute
*See the Aastra 9143i User Guide for more information about each of these keys.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 9480i and 9480i CT IP Phones
This section provides brief information about the Models 9480i and 9480i CT IP
Phones. It includes a list of features and describes the hard keys on these models.
35i
35i
Hoolldd
1
Rediiaall
Goooddbye
Oppttiioonnss
Hoolldd
1
Rediiaall
Goooddbye
Oppttiioonnss
ABC
D EF
2
3
ABC
D EF
2
3
GHI
JKKLL
MNO
WXYZ
4
7
5
6
9
GHI
JKKLL
MNO
WXYZ
4
7
5
6
9
PQ RS
TUV
8
PQ RS
TUV
8
0
#
Xfer
Icom
*
0
#
Xfer
Icom
*
Conf
Services
Conf
Services
L1
L4
L3
L2
L1
L4
L3
L2
9480i
9480i CT
9480i and 9480i CT Phone Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5 line graphical LCD screen with large backlit display
6 multi-functional, state-based softkeys
Press-and-Hold speeddial key configuration feature
4 call appearance lines with LEDs
Supports up to 9 call lines
Speakerphone for handsfree calls
Headset support (modular connector)
Built-in-two-port, 10/100 Ethernet switch - lets you share a connection with
your computer.
•
Inline power support (based on 802.3af standard) which eliminates power
adapters.
•
•
•
AC power adapter (included)
Enhanced busy lamp fields*
Set paging*
*Availability of feature dependant on your phone system or service provider.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
IP Phone Models
9480i and 9480i CT Key Descriptions*
Keys
Key Description
Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open
list, such as the Options List, without saving changes.
Goodbye
Options
Options key - Accesses options to customize your phone. Your System
Administrator may have already customized some of your settings. Check
with your System Administrator before changing the administrator-only
options.
Hold key - Places an active call on hold. To retrieve a held call, press the
call appearance button beside the light that is flashing.
Hold
Redial key - Redials up to 100 previously dialed numbers. Pressing the
Redial key twice simultaneously redials the last dialed number.
Redial
Volume control key - Adjusts the volume for the handset, headset, ringer,
and handsfree speaker.
Handsfree key - Activates Handsfree for making and receiving calls
without lifting the handset. When the audio mode option is set, this key is
used to switch between a headset and the handsfree speakerphone.
Mute key - Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you (the
light indicator flashes when the microphone is on mute).
Line/Call Appearance key - Connects you to a line or call. The Aastra
9480i and 9480i CT IP phones support up to 4 line keys.
L4
L1
L3
L2
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone Models
Keys
Key Description
Navigation keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view
different status and text messages on the LCD display (if there is more than
1 line of status/text messages). These buttons also let you scroll through
menu selections, such as the Options List.
Pressing the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys lets you view the different line/
call appearances. While in the Options List, these keys allow you to exit or
enter the current option. When you are editing entries on the display,
pressing the LEFT arrow key erases the character on the left; pressing the
RIGHT arrow key sets the option.
Transfer key - Transfers an active call to another number.
Xfer
Conf
Conference key - Begins a conference call with the active call.
Icom key - Begins an intercom call to a remote extension and answers
incoming intercom calls. The 9480i and 9480i CT IP Phones also have
default softkey 4 configured as Icom.
Icom
Services key - Displays a list of Services available to your phone, if
specific services have been configured. The available Aastra services
include Directory & Callers Log. The 9480i and 9480i CT IP Phones also
have default softkey 1 configured as Services.
Serviices
Note: Availability of the services feature is dependant on your phone
system and/or service provider.
Softkeys - 6 state-based softkeys on the 9480i and 9480i CT IP Phones.
By default, key 1 is assigned as WebApps. When you pick up the handset,
the following displays on key 1:
Dial - After entering a phone number from the keypad, you can press the
Dial softkey to immediately dial the number.
Note: For more information about configuring softkeys 1 through 6 to
perform specific functions, see Chapter 5, “Configuring Operational
Features” the section, “Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/
Expansion Module Keys” on page 5-137.
*See the Aastra 9480i and 9480i CT User Guides for more information about each of these
keys.
1-12
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
IP Phone Models
9480i CT Cordless Handset Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
5 line backlit display screen
2 multi-functional softkeys
Programmable function key supports up to 14 functions
Vibration Alerter
Headset Jack
Desk charging stand
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone Models
9480i CT Cordless Handset Key Descriptions*
Function #
Function Description
1
2
Receiver
Volume key
During Ringing: Adjusts ringer volume
During a call: Adjusts receiver volume
During text mode (not in a call): Moves cursor right/left
3
4
Display
Features ƒ Key List
Access key to the programmed Feature Key List
Scrolls up when in the various lists
Adds a space during editing
5
6
Softkeys
Activates feature or option shown on the display above
the keys
Call key
Used to obtain dial tone
Also used as a Hold key
7
8
Dial Pad
Mute Key
When used, prevents the caller from hearing you
9
Headset Jack
Status Light
10
11
Release key
To end calls and go on hook
Exits Menu and the various lists
12
Menu Key
Access key to the different Options
Scrolls down when in the various lists
Used as Backspace during editing
13
Redial Key
Displays the last 10 numbers dialed
14
15
16
Charging Jack
Charging Contacts
Microphone
*See the Aastra 9480i CT User Guide for more information about each of these keys.
1-14
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
IP Phone Models
Model 51i IP Phone
This section provides brief information about the Model 51i IP Phone. It includes
a list of features and describes the hard keys on the 51i. The 51i is available with a
symbol keypad or a text keypad.
Goodbye
Save
Delete
Swap
Services
Hold
Redial
Speaker
Mute
51i with Text Keys
51i with Symbol Keys
51i Phone Features
•
•
3-line LCD screen
1 call appearance line
•
•
Press-and-Hold speeddial key configuration feature
Supports 1 call line with transfer capabilities
•
•
Full-duplex speakerphone for monitoring calls
Built-in two-port, 10/100 Ethernet ports - lets you share a connection with
your computer
•
AC power adapter (sold separately)
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone Models
51i Symbol Key Descriptions*.
Keys
Key Description
Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open
list, such as the Options List, without saving changes.
Services key - Accesses services and options to customize your phone.
This keys also access the Directory List and Callers List. Your System
Administrator may have already customized some of your settings. Check
with your System Administrator before changing the administrator-only
options.
Hold key - Places an active call on hold. To retrieve a held call, press the
Hold key again.
Redial key - Redials up to 100 previously dialed numbers. Pressing the
Redial key twice simultaneously redials the last dialed number.
Volume control key - Adjusts the volume for the handset, ringer, and
handsfree speaker.
Save key - Saves names and numbers to the Directory List. Also saves
names and numbers from the Callers List to the Directory List.
Delete key - Deletes individual or all entries from the Directory List and
Callers List. Deletes all entries from the Redial List. You can also use this
key to backspace and delete a character when entering values for
speeddial softkeys.
Swap key - If you are on an active call and a second call comes in, you can
press the Swap key. This key places the first call on hold and answers the
second call. Pressing the Swap key again toggles between the two active
calls.
The Swap key works with two active calls only. A third call cannot be
accepted.
Speaker key - Activates Handsfree for receiving calls without lifting the
handset. Can be used on active calls to switch from the handset to
handsfree.
1-16
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
IP Phone Models
Keys
Key Description
Mute key - Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you.
Navigation keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view
different status and text messages on the LCD display (if there is more than
1 line of status/text messages). These buttons also let you scroll through
menu selections, such as the Options List.
UP Arrow - This key also acts as a Transfer Key, allowing you to transfer
calls when required.
DOWN Arrow - This key also acts as a Conference Key, allowing you to join
conferences when required.
Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view the lines on the LCD.
While in the Options List, the navigation keys allow you to exit or enter the
current option. When you are editing entries on the display, pressing the
LEFT arrow key erases the character on the left; pressing the RIGHT arrow
key sets the option.
*See the Aastra 51i User Guide for more information about each of these keys.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone Models
51i Text Key Descriptions*.
Key Description
Keys
Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open
list, such as the Options List, without saving changes.
Services key - Accesses services and options to customize your phone.
This keys also access the Directory List and Callers List. Your System
Administrator may have already customized some of your settings. Check
with your System Administrator before changing the administrator-only
options.
Hold key - Places an active call on hold. To retrieve a held call, press the
Hold key again.
Redial key - Redials up to 100 previously dialed numbers. Pressing the
Redial key twice simultaneously redials the last dialed number.
Volume control key - Adjusts the volume for the handset, ringer, and
handsfree speaker.
Save key - Saves names and numbers to the Directory List. Also saves
names and numbers from the Callers List to the Directory List.
Delete key - Deletes individual or all entries from the Directory List and
Callers List. Deletes all entries from the Redial List. You can also use this
key to backspace and delete a character when entering values for
speeddial softkeys.
Swap key - If you are on an active call and a second call comes in, you can
press the Swap key. This key places the first call on hold and answers the
second call. Pressing the Swap key again toggles between the two active
calls.
The Swap key works with two active calls only. A third call cannot be
accepted.
Speaker key - Activates Handsfree for receiving calls without lifting the
handset. Can be used on active calls to switch from the handset to
handsfree.
1-18
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
IP Phone Models
Key Description
Keys
Mute key - Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you.
Navigation keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view
different status and text messages on the LCD display (if there is more than
1 line of status/text messages). These buttons also let you scroll through
menu selections, such as the Options List.
UP Arrow - This key also acts as a Transfer Key, allowing you to transfer
calls when required.
DOWN Arrow - This key also acts as a Conference Key, allowing you to join
conferences when required.
Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view the lines on the LCD.
While in the Options List, the navigation keys allow you to exit or enter the
current option. When you are editing entries on the display, pressing the
LEFT arrow key erases the character on the left; pressing the RIGHT arrow
key sets the option.
*See the Aastra 51i User Guide for more information about each of these keys.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone Models
Model 53i IP Phone
This section provides brief information about the Model 53i IP Phone. It includes
a list of features, and describes the hard keys and default programmable keys on
the 53i.
53i Phone Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
3-line LCD screen
6 top keys - all 6 keys are programmable
3 call appearance lines with LEDs
Press-and-Hold speeddial key configuration feature
Supports up to 9 call lines
Full-duplex speakerphone for handsfree calls
Headset support (modular connector)
Built-in two-port, 10/100 Ethernet ports - lets you share a connection with
your computer
•
•
•
AC power adapter (included)
Enhanced busy lamp fields*
Set paging*
*Availability of feature dependant on your phone system or service provider.
1-20
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
IP Phone Models
53i Key Descriptions*
Keys
Key Description
Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open
list, such as the Options List, without saving changes.
Options key - Accesses options to customize your phone. Your System
Administrator may have already customized some of your settings. Check
with your System Administrator before changing the administrator-only
options.
Hold key - Places an active call on hold. To retrieve a held call, press the
call appearance button beside the light that is flashing.
Redial key - Redials up to 100 previously dialed numbers. Pressing the
Redial key twice simultaneously redials the last dialed number.
Volume control key - Adjusts the volume for the handset, headset, ringer,
and handsfree speaker.
Line/Call Appearance key - Connects you to a line or call. The Aastra 53i
IP phone supports up to 3 line keys.
Handsfree key - Activates Handsfree for making and receiving calls
without lifting the handset. When the audio mode option is set, this key is
used to switch between a headset and the handsfree speakerphone.
Mute key - Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you (the
light indicator flashes when the microphone is on mute).
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone Models
Keys
Key Description
Navigation keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view
different status and text messages on the LCD display (if there is more
than 1 line of status/text messages). These buttons also let you scroll
through menu selections, such as the Options List.
Pressing the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys lets you view the different line/
call appearances. While in the Options List, these keys allow you to exit or
enter the current option. When you are editing entries on the display,
pressing the LEFT arrow key erases the character on the left; pressing the
RIGHT arrow key sets the option.
Programmable keys - 6 Top Keys - all 6 keys are programmable.
Keys 1 and 2 are designated as the SAVE and DELETE keys, respectively.
These keys are locked but can be unlocked and made configurable if
required by the System Administrator.
The following are the default functions for the programmable keys on the
53i IP phone:
1 - SAVE
Allows you to save numbers and/or names to the
Directory. Using this key, you enter the number,
name, and line (or speeddial key) to record in the
Directory List.
2 - DELETE
Allows you to delete a single entry or all entries from
the Directory List and Callers List.
3 - DIRECTORY
Displays up to 200 names and phone numbers
(stored in alphabetical order).
4 - CALLERS LIST Accesses the last 200 calls received.
5 - TRANSFER Transfers the active call to another number.
6 - CONFERENCE Begins a conference call with the active call.
Notes:
1. For more information about programming the SAVE and DELETE
keys, see “Locking/Unlocking the SAVE and DELETE keys (53i)” on
page 5-46.
2, For more information about configuring keys 1 thru 6 to perform
specific functions, see Chapter 5 the section, “Softkeys/Programmable
Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module Keys” on page 5-137.
*See the Aastra 53i User Guide for more information about each of these keys.
1-22
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
IP Phone Models
Model 55i IP Phone
This section provides brief information about the Model 55i IP Phone. It includes
a list of features, and describes the hard keys, default programmable keys, and
default softkeys on the 55i.
55i Phone Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
8 line graphical LCD screen (144 x 75 pixels) with white backlight
12 programmable keys
6 Top keys:Programmable hard keys
6 Bottom keys:Programmable state-based softkeys
4 call appearance lines with LEDs
Press-and-Hold speeddial key configuration feature
Supports up to 9 call lines
Full-duplex speakerphone for handsfree calls
Headset support (modular connector)
Built-in-two-port, 10/100 Ethernet switch - lets you share a connection with
your computer.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
Inline power support (based on 802.3af standard) which eliminates power
adapters.
•
•
•
AC power adapter (included)
Enhanced busy lamp fields*
Set paging*
*Availability of feature dependant on your phone system or service provider.
55i Key Descriptions*
Keys
Key Description
Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open list, such
as the Options List, without saving changes.
Options key - Accesses options to customize your phone. Your System
Administrator may have already customized some of your settings. Check with your
System Administrator before changing the administrator-only options.
Hold key - Places an active call on hold. To retrieve a held call, press the call
appearance button beside the light that is flashing.
Redial key - Redials up to 100 previously dialed numbers. Pressing the Redial key
twice simultaneously redials the last dialed number.
Volume control key - Adjusts the volume for the handset, headset, ringer, and
handsfree speaker.
Line/Call Appearance key - Connects you to a line or call. The Aastra 55i IP phone
supports up to 4 line keys.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
IP Phone Models
Keys
Key Description
Handsfree key - Activates Handsfree for making and receiving calls without lifting
the handset. When the audio mode option is set, this key is used to switch between
a headset and the handsfree speakerphone.
Mute key - Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you (the light
indicator flashes when the microphone is on mute).
Navigation keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view different
status and text messages on the LCD display (if there is more than 1 line of status/
text messages). These buttons also let you scroll through menu selections, such as
the Options List.
Pressing the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys lets you view the different line/call
appearances. While in the Options List, these keys allow you to exit or enter the
current option. When you are editing entries on the display, pressing the LEFT arrow
key erases the character on the left; pressing the RIGHT arrow key sets the option.
Programmable keys - 6 Top keys: programmable hard keys (up to 6 programmable
functions)
By default, the top keys 1 through 4 are assigned as Services, Directory, Callers List,
and Intercom, respectively. Keys 5 and 6 have no assigned functions. All 6 keys are
programmable and can be assigned to perform specific functions.
The following are the default functions for the programmable keys on the 55i IP
phone:
1 - SERVICES
Accesses enhanced features and services such as XML
applications and voicemail, provided by third parties.
Displays up to 200 names and phone numbers (stored in
alphabetical order).
2 - DIRECTORY
3 - CALLERS LIST Accesses the last 200 calls received.
4 - ICOM
5 - NONE
6 - NONE
Accesses another extension on the network.
No assigned function.
No assigned function.
Note: For more information about configuring the programmable keys 1 through 6 to
perform specific functions, see Chapter 5, “Configuring Operational Features” the
section, “Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module Keys” on
page 5-137.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone Models
Keys
Key Description
Softkeys - 6 Bottom keys: programmable state-based softkeys (up to 20
programmable functions).
By default, keys 1 through 6 have no assigned functions. You can configure all 6
bottom softkeys to perform specific functions on the 55i IP phone. However, after
you lift the handset, there are specific static softkeys that display that cannot be
changed. These are as follows:
1 - DIAL
2 - CONF
3 - XFER
Allows you to dial out on the phone.
Begins a conference call with the active phone.
Transfers the active call to another number.
Note: For more information about configuring softkeys 1 through 6 to perform
specific functions, see Chapter 5, “Configuring Operational Features” the section,
“Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module Keys” on
page 5-137.
*See the Aastra 55i User Guide for more information about each of these keys.
1-26
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
IP Phone Models
Model 57i and 57i CT IP Phones
This section provides brief information about the Model 57i IP Phone. It includes
a list of features, and describes the hard keys and default softkeys on the 57i.
57i CT
57i
57i and 57i CT Phone Features
•
•
11 line graphical LCD screen (144 x 128 pixels) with white backlight
12 multi-functional softkeys
- 6 Top Keys: programmable static softkeys
- 6 Bottom Keys: programmable state-based softkeys
4 call appearance lines with LEDs
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press-and-Hold speeddial key configuration feature
Supports up to 9 call lines
Full-duplex speakerphone for handsfree calls
Headset support (modular connector)
Built-in-two-port, 10/100 Ethernet switch - lets you share a connection with
your computer.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone Models
•
Inline power support (based on 802.3af standard) which eliminates power
adapters.
•
•
•
AC power adapter (included)
Enhanced busy lamp fields*
Set paging*
*Availability of feature dependant on your phone system or service provider.
57i and 57i CT Key Descriptions*
Keys
Key Description
Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open list, such
as the Options List, without saving changes.
Options key - Accesses options to customize your phone. Your System
Administrator may have already customized some of your settings. Check with your
System Administrator before changing the administrator-only options.
Hold key - Places an active call on hold. To retrieve a held call, press the call
appearance button beside the light that is flashing.
Redial key - Redials up to 100 previously dialed numbers. Pressing the Redial key
twice simultaneously redials the last dialed number.
Volume control key - Adjusts the volume for the handset, headset, ringer, and
handsfree speaker.
Line/Call Appearance key - Connects you to a line or call. The Aastra 57i IP phone
supports up to 4 line keys.
1-28
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
IP Phone Models
Keys
Key Description
Handsfree key - Activates Handsfree for making and receiving calls without lifting
the handset. When the audio mode option is set, this key is used to switch between
a headset and the handsfree speakerphone.
Mute key - Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you (the light
indicator flashes when the microphone is on mute).
Navigation keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view different
status and text messages on the LCD display (if there is more than 1 line of status/
text messages). These buttons also let you scroll through menu selections, such as
the Options List.
Pressing the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys lets you view the different line/call
appearances. While in the Options List, these keys allow you to exit or enter the
current option. When you are editing entries on the display, pressing the LEFT arrow
key erases the character on the left; pressing the RIGHT arrow key sets the option.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone Models
Keys
Key Description
Softkeys - 12 softkeys on the 57i IP Phone.
- 6 Top Keys: programmable static softkeys (up to 10 programmable functions)
- 6 Bottom Keys: programmable state-based softkeys (up to 20 programmable
functions)
By default, the top softkeys 1 through 4 are assigned as Services, Directory, Callers
List, and Intercom, respectively. Keys 5 and 6 have no assigned functions. All 6 keys
are programmable and can be assigned to perform specific functions.
The following are the default functions for the top softkeys on the 57i IP phone:
1 - SERVICES
Accesses enhanced features and services such as XML
applications and voicemail, provided by third parties.
Displays up to 200 names and phone numbers (stored in
alphabetical order).
2 - DIRECTORY
3 - CALLERS LIST Accesses the last 200 calls received.
4 - ICOM
5 - NONE
6 - NONE
Accesses another extension on the network.
No assigned function.
No assigned function.
By default, the bottom softkeys 7 through 12 have no assigned functions. You can
configure all 6 bottom softkeys to perform specific functions on the 57i IP phone.
However, after you lift the handset, there are specific static softkeys that display that
cannot be changed. These are as follows:
7- DIAL
8- CONF
9- XFER
Allows you to dial out on the phone.
Begins a conference call with the active phone.
Transfers the active call to another number.
Note: For more information about programming the softkeys to perform specific
functions, see Chapter 5, “Configuring Operational Features” the section, “Softkeys/
Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module Keys” on page 5-137.
*See the Aastra 57i or 57i CT User Guide for more information about each of these keys.
1-30
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
IP Phone Models
57i CT Cordless Handset Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
5 line backlit display screen
2 multi-functional softkeys
Programmable function key supports up to 14 functions
Vibration Alerter
Headset Jack
Desk charging stand
57i CT Cordless Handset Key Descriptions
Function #
Function Description
1
2
Receiver
Volume key
During Ringing: Adjusts ringer volume
During a call: Adjusts receiver volume
During text mode (not in a call): Moves cursor right/left
3
4
Display
Features ƒ Key List
Access key to the programmed Feature Key List
Scrolls up when in the various lists
Adds a space during editing
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone Models
Function #
5
Function Description
Softkeys
Activates feature or option shown on the display above
the keys
6
Call key
Used to obtain dial tone
Also used as a Hold key
7
8
Dial Pad
Mute Key
When used, prevents the caller from hearing you
9
Headset Jack
Status Light
10
11
Release key
To end calls and go on hook
Exits Menu and the various lists
12
Menu Key
Access key to the different Options
Scrolls down when in the various lists
Used as Backspace during editing
13
Redial Key
Displays the last 10 numbers dialed
14
15
16
Charging Jack
Charging Contacts
Microphone
1-32
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Firmware Installation Information
Firmware Installation Information
Description
The firmware setup and installation for the IP phone can be done using any of the
following:
•
•
Phone User Interface via the keypad (Phone UI)
Aastra Web-based user interface (Aastra Web UI)
When the IP phone is initialized for the first time, DHCP is enabled by default.
Depending on the type of configuration server setup you may have, the IP phone
may download a firmware version automatically, or you may need to download it
manually.
Installation Considerations
network:
•
If you are planning on using dynamic IP addresses, make sure a DHCP server
is enabled and running on your network.
•
If you are not planning on using dynamic IP addresses, see Chapter 4, the
section, “Configuring Network Settings Manually” on page 4-20 for manually
setting up an IP address.
To install the IP phone hardware and cabling, refer to the model-specific
SIP IP Phone Installation Guide.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Firmware Installation Information
Installation Requirements
The following are general requirements for setting up and using your SIP IP
phone:
•
SIP-based IP PBX system or network installed and running with a SIP
account created for the IP phone.
•
Access to a Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP), File Transfer Protocol
(FTP), Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) server, or HyperText Transfer
Protocol over Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) (HTTPS).
•
•
•
Ethernet/Fast Ethernet LAN (10/100 Mb)
Category 5/5e straight through cabling
Power source
— For Ethernet networks that supply in-line power to the phone (IEEE
802.3af):
— For power, use the Ethernet cable (supplied) to connect from the
phone directly to the network for power. (No 48v AC power adapter
required.)
— For Ethernet networks that DO NOT supply power to the phone:
— For power, use the 48V AC Power Adapter (included) to connect
from the DC power port on the phone to a power source.
or
— (optional) - For power, use a Power over Ethernet (PoE) power
injector or a PoE switch. A PoE power injector is available as an
optional accessory from Aastra Telecom. Contact your Administrator
for more information.
1-34
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Firmware Installation Information
Configuration Server Requirement
A basic requirement for setting up the IP phone is to have a configuration server.
The configuration server allows you to:
•
•
•
Store the firmware images that you need to download to your IP phone.
Stores configuration files for the IP phone
Stores the software when performing software upgrades to the IP phone
To set the protocol for your configuration server, see Chapter 4, the section,
“Configuring the Configuration Server Protocol” on page 4-104.
For setting up your configuration server, see Appendix B, “Configuration Server
Setup.”
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Firmware and Configuration Files
Firmware and Configuration Files
Description
When the IP phone is initialized for the first time, DHCP is enabled by default.
Depending on the type of configuration server setup you may have, the IP phone
may download a firmware version and configuration files automatically, or you
may need to download it manually.
Note: Automatic download is dependant on your configuration server
setup.
The firmware consists of a single file called:
•
<phone model>.st (for example, 55i.st) - This file contains information about
the specific IP Phone model and contains the language packs to load to the
phone.
The configuration files consist of two files called:
•
aastra.cfg - This file contains configuration information about the IP Phone.
•
<MAC>.cfg (for example, 00085D1610DE.cfg) - This file contains
configuration information about the IP Phone.
The following table provides the files that the phone requests from the
configuration server during bootup of the phone:
IP Phone Model Associated Firmware Configuration Files
Language Files
9143i
9480i
9480i CT
51i
9143i.st
9480i.st
9480iCT.st
51i.st
aastra.cfg
<MAC>.cfg
(for example, 00085D1610DE.cfg)
lang_de.txt
lang_es.txt
(German)
(Spanish)
lang_es_mx.txt (Mexican Spanish)
53i
53i.st
lang_fr.txt
(French)
55i
55i.st
lang_fr_ca.txt
lang_it.txt
(Canadian French)
(Italian)
57i
57i.st
57i CT
57iCT.st
1-36
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Firmware and Configuration Files
The IP Phone firmware file includes all the necessary files you need for your
phone, including the language files. Loading the language files to your phone(s) is
optional. For more information about loading language files and using the various
languages on the IP phone, see Chapter 5, the section, “Language” on page 5-30.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Firmware and Configuration Files
Configuration File Precedence
Aastra IP phones can accept two sources of configuration data:
•
•
The server configuration most recently downloaded/cached from the
configuration server files, aastra.cfg/<mac>.cfg (or the aastra.tuz/<mac>.tuz
encrypted equivalents).
Local configuration changes stored on the phone that were entered using
either the IP phone UI or the Aastra Web UI
In the event of conflicting values set by the different methods, values are applied
in the following sequence:
1. Default values hard-coded in the phone software
2. Values downloaded from the configuration server
3. Values stored locally on the phone
The last values to be applied to the phone configuration are the values that take
effect.
For example, if a parameter’s value is set in the local configuration (via Aastra
Web UI or IP phone UI) and the same value was also set differently in one of the
<mac>.cfg/aastra.cfg files on the configuration server, the local configuration
value is the value that takes effect because that is the last value applied to the
configuration.
1-38
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Firmware and Configuration Files
Installing the Firmware/Configuration Files
files.
Step Action
1
If DHCP is disabled, manually enter the configuration server’s IP address. For details on manually
setting DHCP, see Chapter 4, the section “DHCP” on page 4-4.
2
Copy the firmware file <phone model>.st to the root directory of the configuration server. The IP
phone accepts the new firmware file only if it is different from the firmware currently loaded on the IP
phone.
Note: The <phone model> attribute is the IP phone model (i.e., 9143i.st, 9480i.st, 9480iCT.st, 51i.st,
53i.st, 55i.st, 57i.st, 57iCT.st).
3
4
Copy the Aastra configuration files (aastra.cfg and <mac>.cfg) to the root directory of the
configuration server.
Note: The <mac> attribute represents the actual MAC address of your phone.
(i.e., 00085D030996.cfg).
Note: Restart the IP phone as described in Chapter 3, “Restarting Your Phone” on page 3-13.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
Configuration Interface Methods
About this chapter
Introduction
This chapter describes the methods you, as an Administrator, can use to configure
the IP phones.
Note: Features, characteristics, requirements, and configuration that are
specific to a particular IP phone models are indicated where required in
this guide.
Topics
Topic
Page
Configuration Methods
IP Phone UI
page 2-2
page 2-2
page 2-6
page 2-17
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files (Administrator Only)
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Configuration Methods
Configuration Methods
Description
You can use the following to setup and configure the IP phone:
IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
•
•
•
Configuration files
Note: There are specific parameters you can configure using only the IP
Phone UI, only and Aastra Web UI, only the configuration files, or a
combination of any of these methods. For more information about
configuring the phone, see Chapter 4, Chapter 5, and Chapter 6.
The following paragraphs describe each method of configuring the IP Phone.
IP Phone UI
The IP Phone User Interface (UI) provides an easy way to access features and
functions for using and configuring the IP phone. An Administrator can configure
all features and functions on the phone. A User can configure a subset of these
features and functions. Users of the IP phones should see their Model-specific
User’s Guide for available features and functions to configure.
You use the phone’s hard keys and keypad to configure specific features on the IP
also access the Directory List and Callers List, and initiate transfers and
conference calls.
Reference
your phone model.
For more information about using the hard keys on each phone, see Chapter 5, the
section, “Locking IP Phone Keys” on page 5-45.
For more information about the softkeys/programmable keys, see Chapter 5, the
section, “Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module Keys”
on page 5-137.
2-2
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Interface Methods
Configuration Methods
Options Key
The Options key allows you to access the "Options List" on the IP phone.
Accessible options in this list are for both user and Administrator use. An
Administrator must enter a password for administrator options.
phones. An Administrator can also enable and disable the use of an
Administrator password protection in the IP phone UI. These features are
configurable using the configuration files only.
For more information about these features, see Chapter 3, the section,
“Simplified IP Phone UI Options Menu” on page page 3-5, and Chapter
5, the section, “Administrator Passwords” on page 5-9.
This document describes the administrator options only. For a description of the
user options in the "Options List", see your model-specific SIP IP Phone User
Guide.
The following illustrations indicate the location of the Options Key on each phone
model.
Options Key
Options
9480i
Directory
Hold
Redial
Goodbye
Options
Save
Delete
ABC
DEF
Conf
Xfer
1
2
3
ABC
JKL
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
WXYZ
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
4
7
5
6
9
GHI
MNO
WXYZ
PQRS
TUV
L3
L2
L1
8
PQRS
TUV
0
#
Xfer
Icom
*
Conf
Services
#
*
Mute
L1
L4
L3
L2
9480i/9480i CT
9143i
Options Key
9480i CT Handset
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Configuration Methods
Options Key
51i
53i
55i
Options Key
57i CT Handset
57i/57i CT
2-4
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Interface Methods
Configuration Methods
Using the Options Key
Step Action
1
Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List.
Note: Press the Services key on the 51i and then select Options from the list.
Use the r and s to scroll through the list of options.
2
3
On 9143i, 51i, 53i:
To select an option, press the Enter softkey, or select the number on the keypad that corresponds to
the option in the Option List.
On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, 57i CT:
To select an option, press the Select softkey, press 4 , or select the number on the keypad that
corresponds to the option in the Option List.
4
On 9143i, 51i, 53i:
Use the Set softkey after making a change to an option, to save the change.
On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, 57i CT:
Use the Change softkey to change a selected option.
5
6
Press the Done softkey at any time to save the changes and exit the current option.
Goodbye
Press the Cancel softkey, press 3 , press
, or press
any time to exit without saving
changes.
From the 9480i CT and 57i CT handset:
Step Action
1
2
3
4
Press the  key to enter the Options List when the phone is not in use.
Use the scroll keys  and Ï to scroll the options.
To select and change an option, press the r keys.
Press y when done.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Configuration Methods
Aastra Web UI
like Firefox, Mozilla or Netscape.
Note: An Administrator can enable or disable the Aastra Web UI for a
single phone or all phones in a network. For more information about
enabling/disabling the Aastra Web UI, see “Enabling/Disabling the
Aastra Web UI” on page 2-16.
HTTP/HTTPS Support
The Aastra Web UI supports both Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) and
Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer (HTTPS) client and server
protocols.
HTTP is the set of rules for transferring files (text, graphic images, sound,
video, and other multimedia files) over the Internet. When you open your
Web browser, you are indirectly making use of HTTP. HTTP is an
application protocol that runs on top of the TCP/IP suite of protocols (the
foundation protocols for the Internet).
HTTPS is a Web protocol that encrypts and decrypts user page requests as well as
the pages that are returned by the Web server. HTTPS uses Secure Socket Layer
(SSL) or Transport Layer Security (TLS) as a sublayer under its regular HTTP
application layering. SSL is a commonly-used protocol for managing the
security of a message transmission on the Internet. It uses a 40-bit key size
for the RC4 stream encryption algorithm, which is considered an adequate degree
of encryption for commercial exchange. TLS is a protocol that ensures privacy
between communicating applications and their users on the Internet. When a
server and client communicate, TLS ensures that no third party may eavesdrop or
tamper with any message. TLS is the successor to SSL.
Note: HTTPS uses port 443 instead of HTTP port 80 in its interactions
with the TCP/IP lower layer. Both the HTTP and HTTPS port numbers
are configurable using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, the Aastra
Web UI and DHCP Option 66. For more information about configuring
these ports, see Chapter 4, the section, “Configuring the Configuration
Server Protocol” on page 4-104.
2-6
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Interface Methods
Configuration Methods
HTTP/HTTPS Client and Server Support
The Aastra IP phones allow for HTTP request processing and associated data
transfers to perform over a secure connection (HTTPS). The IP phones support
the following:
•
Transfer of firmware images, configuration files, script files, and web page
content over a secure connection.
•
•
Web browser phone configuration over a secure connection.
TLS 1.0or SSL 3.0 methods for both client and server
HTTPS Client
When an HTTPS client opens and closes its TCP socket, the SSL software
respectively handshakes upon opening and disconnects upon closing from the
HTTPS server. The main HTTPS client functions are:
•
•
Downloading of configuration files and firmware images.
Downloading of script files based on an “HTTPS://” URL supplied by a
softkey definition.
HTTPS Server
The HTTPS server provides HTTP functionality over secure connections. It
coexists with the HTTP server but has its own set of tasks. The main HTTPS
server functions are:
•
•
Delivery of web page content to a browser client over a secure connection.
Execution of HTTP GET and POST requests received over a secure
connection
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Configuration Methods
Non-Blocking HTTP Connections
The IP Phones support a non-blocking HTTP connection feature. This feature
allows the user to continue using the phone when there is a delay during an
HTTP connection while the phone is waiting for the HTTP server to
respond. This feature also allows a user to abort the connection and perform other
operations on the phone (which will abort the HTTP connection automatically). A
user can also abort the HTTP loading by pressing the GOODBYE key while the
phone is displaying “Loading Page.......”.
Note: This feature impacts only the HTTP calls triggered by a phone key
(softkey or programmable key); the HTTP calls performed by action
URIs are still blocking.
Authentication Support for HTTP/HTTPS Download Methods for
Broadsoft Client Management System (CMS)
The IP Phones have authentication support per RFC 2617 when using HTTP or
HTTPS as download protocols. If a 5i Series phone is challenged by an HTTP or
HTTPS server when the server attempts to download the aastra.cfg file, the phone
automatically sends "aastra" as the default Username and Password back to the
server. For more information about this feature, see Chapter 5, the section,
“Authentication Support for HTTP/HTTPS Download Methods, used with
Broadsoft Client Management System (CMS)” on page 5-345.
2-8
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Interface Methods
Configuration Methods
Using HTTPS via the Aastra Web UI
HTTPS is enabled by default on the IP phones. When you open a browser window
and enter an IP address or host name for a phone using HTTP, a server redirection
occurs which automatically converts an HTTP connection to an HTTPS
connection. After the redirection, a “Security Alert” certificate window displays
alerting the user that information exchanged with the phone cannot be viewed or
changed by others. Accepting the certificate then forwards you to the phone’s Web
UI.
Notes:
1. The private key and certificate generate outside the phone and embed
in the phone firmware for use by the HTTPS server during the SSL
handshake.
2. Using the configuration files, the IP phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI,
you can configure the following regarding HTTPS:
- Specify HTTPS security client method to use (TLS 1.0 or SSL 3.0)
- Enable or disable HTTP to HTTPS server redirect function
- HTTPS server blocking of XML HTTP POSTS to the phone
Reference
For more information on configuring the HTTPS protocol, see Chapter 4, the
sections:
•
•
“Configuring the Configuration Server Protocol” on page 4-104
“HTTPS Client/Server Configuration” on page 4-36
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessing the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to access the Aastra Web UI.
Step Action
1
Open your web browser and enter the phone’s IP address or host name into the address field.
The following is an example of the Login screen that displays.
IP address or
host name
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Interface Methods
Configuration Methods
Step Action
2 Enter your username and password and click
.
Note: For an administrator, the default username is “admin” and the password is “22222”.
For a user, the default username is “user” and the password field is left blank.
The IP phones accept numeric passwords only.
The Network Status window displays for the IP phone you are accessing. The following illustration is
an example of a Network Status screen for the 9143i IP phone.
9143i Network
Status Window
3
You can logout of the Aastra Web UI at any time by clicking LOGOFF.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Configuration Methods
Depending on the model phone you are accessing, the following categories
display in the side menu of the Aastra Web UI: Status, Operation, Basic
Settings, Advanced Settings.
Note: Programmable Keys apply to the 9143i, 53i, and 55i. Softkeys
apply to the 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT. Expansion Modules
apply to the 53i, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT only.
Status
The Status section displays the network status and the MAC address of the IP
phone. It also displays hardware and firmware information about the IP phone.
The status window also displays the SIP Account information for each account on
the phone. The information in the Network Status window is read-only.
Operation
The Operation section provides the following options:
Heading
Description
User Password
Allows you to change user password.
(Applicable to User and Administrator).
Phone Lock
Allows you to assign an emergency dial plan to the phone,
lock the phone to prevent any changes to the phone and to
prevent use of the phone, and reset the user password.
Note: You can also configure a softkey to use for locking/
unlocking the phone.
(Applicable to User and Administrator).
Programmable Keys
9143i - 7 multi-functional programmable keys
53i - 6 Top, multi-functional, programmable keys
55i - 6 Top multi-functional, programmable keys
(Applicable to User and Administrator).
2-12
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Interface Methods
Configuration Methods
Heading
Description
9480i/9480i CT6 state-based, multi-functional softkeys
Softkeys and XML
55i
6 Bottom, state-based, multi-functional
softkeys
57i/57i CT
6 Top, multi-functional, static softkeys
6 Bottom, state-based, multi-functional
softkeys
(Applicable to User and Administrator).
Expansion Module <N>
The 536M has up to 36 configurable keys. The 560M has up
to 60 configurable keys. You can have up to 3 expansion
modules attached to a single phone allowing you to
configure keys for Expansion Module 1, Expansion Module
2, and Expansion Module 3.See your Model-specific User
Guide for applicable expansion modules for your model
phone.
Note: Expansion Modules apply to the 53i, 55i, 57i, and 57i
CT only.
(Applicable to User and Administrator).
Handset Keys
Allows you to configure up to 15 softkeys on the handset.
(9480i CT and 57i CT only)
(Applicable to User and Administrator).
Keypad Speed Dial
Allows you to configure up to 9 speeddial keys. These fields
map to the keypad digits 1 through 9 on the phone. You can
also configure additional speeddials on the programmable
keys, softkeys and expansion modules. See your
model-specific User Guide for more information about this
feature.
(Applicable to User and Administrator).
Directory
Reset
Allows you to copy the Callers List and Directory List from
your IP phone to your PC.
(Applicable to User and Administrator).
Allows you to restart the IP phone when required.
(Applicable to User and Administrator).
This setting also allows you to set the IP phone back to its
factory default settings or remove the local configuration.
(Applicable Administrator only).
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Configuration Methods
Basic Settings
The Basic Settings section provides the following options:
Heading
Description
Preferences
Allows you to set the following General specifications on the
IP phone.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Local Dial Plan (Admin Only)
Send Dial Plan Terminator (Admin Only)
Digit Timeout (Admin Only)
Park Call (not available on 9143i and 53i)
Pickup Parked Call (not available on 9143i and 53i)
Suppress DTMF Playback
Display DTMF Digits
Call Waiting
Play Call Waiting Tone
Stuttered Dial Tone
XML Beep Support
Status Scroll Delay
Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing
Switch Focus to Ringing Line
Preferred Line
Preferred Line Timeout (seconds)
Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call
UPnP Mapping Lines
Message Waiting Indicator Line
DND Key Mode
Call Forward Key Mode
Use LLDP ELIN
This section also allows you to set:
•
•
Incoming Intercom Settings
Outgoing Intercom Settings (Admin Only; Administrator
can enable these for a User if required)
Group Paging RTP Settings
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Key Mapping (Admin Only)
Ring Tones
Priority Alert Settings (Admin Only)
Directed Call Pickup Settings (Admin Only)
Auto Call Distribution Settings (Admin Only)
Time and Date Settings
Language Settings (Only the Admin can specify the
language pack names to load to the phone). Both the
Admin and User can select the language type to display
for the Web UI.
Account Configuration
Allows you to configure DND (Do Not Disturb) and/or Call
Forwarding by specific account or by all accounts. Also
allows you to enable/disable specific states for each
account, specify different phone numbers for call
forwarding, and specify number of rings for a “No Answer”
state.
2-14
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Interface Methods
Configuration Methods
Advanced Settings (Applicable to Administrator Only)
The Advanced Settings section provides the following options:
Heading
Network
Description
Allows you to set Basic Network Settings, Advanced
Network Settings, Type of Service DSCP, and VLAN
settings.
Global SIP
Allows you to set global Basic SIP Authentication Settings,
Basic SIP Network Settings, Advanced SIP Settings,
Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) settings, and Autodial
Settings that apply to all lines on the IP phone.
Lines 1 through 9
Action URI
Allows you to set per-line Basic SIP Authentication Settings,
Basic SIP Network Settings, Advanced SIP Settings,
Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) settings, and Autodial
Settings that apply to specific lines on the IP phone.
Allows an administrator to specify a uniform resource
identifier (URI) that triggers a GET when certain events
occur. An Administrator can also specify a URI to be called,
enable polling for the URI, and specify the interval between
polls.
(Applicable to Administrator Only)
Configuration Server
Allows you to set the protocol to use on the configuration
server (TFTP (default), FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS), configure
automatic firmware and configuration file updates, enable/
disable auto-resync, and assign an XML push server list.
(Applicable to Administrator Only)
Firmware Update
TLS Support
Allows you to manually perform a firmware update on the IP
phone from the configuration server.
(Applicable to Administrator Only)
Allows you to specify the SIP Root and Intermediate
Certificate files to use when the phone uses the TLS
transport protocol to setup a call.
(Applicable to Administrator Only)
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Configuration Methods
Heading
Description
802.1x Support
Allows you to enable/disable the 802.1x Protocol
(Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP)) to use on the IP
phones for authentication purposes. Applicable choices are
EAP-MD5 or EAP-TLS.
(Applicable to Administrator Only)
Troubleshooting
Allows you to perform troubleshooting tasks whereby the
results can be forwarded to Aastra Technical Support for
analyzing and troubleshooting.
(Applicable to Administrator Only)
Enabling/Disabling the Aastra Web UI
The Aastra Web UI is enabled by default on the IP phones. A System
Administrator can disable the Aastra Web UI on a single phone or on all phones if
required using the configuration files. Use the following procedure to enable and
disable the Aastra Web UI.
To disable the Aastra Web UI:
Configuration Files
Step Action
1
Using a text-based editing application, open the <mac>.cfg file if you want to disable the Web UI on a
single phone. Open the aastra.cfg file to disable the Web UI on all phones
2
Enter the following parameter:
web interface enabled: 0
Note: A value of zero (0) disables the Web UI on the phone. A value of 1 enables the Web UI.
Save the changes and close the <mac>.cfg or the aastra.cfg file.
3
4
Restart the phone to apply the changes. The Aastra Web UI is disabled for a single IP phone or for all
phones.
2-16
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Interface Methods
Configuration Methods
Configuration Files (Administrator Only)
A system administrator can enter specific parameters in the configuration files to
configure the IP phones. All parameters in configuration files can only be set by
an administrator.
You can enter specific configuration parameters in either of the following
configuration files:
•
•
aastra.cfg
<mac>.cfg
References
For information about configuration file precedence, see Chapter 1, “Overview.”
For a description of each configuration file parameter, see Appendix A,
“Configuration Parameters.”
Using the Configuration Files
When you use the configuration files to configure the IP phones, you must use a
text-based editing application to open the configuration file (aastra.cfg or
<mac>.cfg).
Use the following procedure to add, delete, or change parameters and their
settings in the configuration files.
Note: Apply this procedure wherever this Administrator Guide refers to
configuring parameters using the configuration files.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration files
Step Action
1
Using a text-based editing application, open the configuration file for the phone, for which you want to
configure the directory list (either aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg or both).
2
Enter the required configuration parameters followed by the applicable value. For example,
directory 1: company_directory
directory 2: my_personal_directory
3
4
Save the changes and close the configuration file.
If the parameter requires the phone to be restarted in order for it to take affect, use the
IP Phone UI or the Aastra Web UI to restart the phone.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3
Administrator Options
About this chapter
Introduction
The IP phones provide specific options on the IP Phone that only an Administrator
can access. These options are password protected and allow an Administrator to
change or set features and configuration information as required. For all models,
an Administrator can use the IP Phone UI, the Aastra Web UI, or the configuration
files to enter and change values.
Note: Specific options are configurable only via the IP Phone UI, and/or
Aastra Web UI, and/or configuration files.
This chapter provides information about the available Administrator options.
Topics
Topic
Page
Administrator Level Options
IP Phone UI Options
Aastra Web UI Options
Configuration File Options
Phone Status
page 3-3
page 3-3
page 3-6
page 3-8
page 3-9
page 3-13
Restarting Your Phone
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
About this chapter
Topic
Page
Set Phone to Factory Defaults/Erase Local Configuration
page 3-15
page 3-19
page 3-34
page 3-36
page 3-69
page 3-70
page 3-71
page 3-73
page 3-82
page 3-83
page 3-87
page 3-90
Basic Settings
Account Configuration
Network Settings
Line Settings
Softkeys, Programmable Keys, Expansion Module Keys
Action URI
Configuration Server Settings
Firmware Update Features
TLS Support
802.1x Support
Troubleshooting
3-2
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Administrator Level Options
Description
There are options on the IP phone that both a User and Administrator can access.
However, there are specific options that an Administrator can access only. These
options allow the Administrator to configure and manage local and/or remote IP
phones in a network.
An Administrator can access and manage these options using the IP Phone UI, the
Aastra Web UI, or the configuration files.
IP Phone UI Options
Using the IP Phone UI, you can access the Administrator options at
Options->Administrator Menu using the default password of "22222"
Options Menu
1. Call Forward
Administrator Menu
2. Preferences
3. Phone Status
4. User Password
5. Administrator Menu
6. Restart Phone
7. Phone Lock
Select
Done
Note: An administrator has the option of enabling and disabling the use
of password protection in the IP phone UI. This is configurable using the
configuration files only. For more information about this feature, see
Appendix A, the section “Password Settings” on page A-14
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
The following are administrator options in the "Options List" on the IP phone UI:
•
Administrator Menu
— Configuration Server
— Network Settings
— SIP Settings
— Factory Default
— Erase Local Config.
For procedures on configuring Administrator Options on the IP phone via the IP
phone UI, see:
Chapter 4, “Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features”
Chapter 5, “Configuring Operational Features”
Chapter 6, “Configuring Advanced Operational Features”
3-4
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Simplified IP Phone UI Options Menu
An Administrator can replace the existing options menu on the Phone UI with a
more simplified options menu. In the configuration files, the “options simple
menu” parameter allows you to display either the full menu (if set to 0), or the
simplified menu (if set to 1). The following table illustrates the differences
between the full menu and the simplified menu.
When setting the “options simple menu” parameter, the menu changes in the
Phone UI only. The Aastra Web UI is not affected.
Full Options Menu
Simplified Options Menu
Call Forward
Call Forward
Preferences
Phone Status
Removed
Preferences
Phone Status
User Password
Administrator Menu
Restart Phone
Phone Lock
Removed
Removed
Phone Lock
Warning: When using the simplified menu, you cannot change the
Network settings from the IP Phone UI. If the network settings become
misconfigured, you must “factory default” the phone and use the full
menu to recover the network settings from the Phone UI OR use the
Aastra Web UI to configure the network settings.
Configuring the Simplified IP Phone UI Options Menu
Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Simplified IP
Phone UI Options Menu” on page A-6.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Aastra Web UI Options
An Administrator can configure specific options using the Aastra Web UI. These
options display after an Administrator logs into the Web UI using a Web browser
and entering the Admin username and password at the login prompt (The default
username is "admin" and the default password is "22222". The IP phones accept
numeric passwords only.) The column on the left side of the screen indicates the
configurable options. A User has limited configuration options as shown in the
following illustrations.
Administrator Web UI Menu
User Web UI Menu
3-6
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
The following are options that an Administrator can configure in the Aastra Web
UI (and are not available for the User to configure):
•
Operation->Reset
— Restore to Factory Defaults
— Remove Local Configuration Settings
Basic Settings->Preferences->General
•
— Local Dial Plan
— Send Dial Plan Terminator
— Digit Timeout (seconds)
•
Basic Settings->Preferences->Outgoing Intercom Settings (User can
configure this via the Aastra Web UI if enabled by an Administrator)
•
•
•
•
•
Basic Settings->Preferences->Key Mapping
Basic Settings->Preferences->Priority Alerting Settings
Basic Settings->Preferences->Directed Call Pickup Settings
Basic Settings->Preferences->Auto Call Distribution Settings
Basic Settings->Preferences->Language Settings
— Language 1 (entering language pack filename)
— Language 2 (entering language pack filename)
— Language 3 (entering language pack filename)
— Language 4 (entering language pack filename)
Advanced Settings
•
— Network
— Global SIP
— Line 1 through 9 Settings
— Action URI
— Configuration Server
— Firmware Update
— TLS Support
— 802.1x Support
— Troubleshooting
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
For information about options available to a User AND Administrator in the
Aastra Web UI, see your Model-specific User Guide.
For procedures to Restart your phone or restore factory defaults, see “Restarting
Your Phone” on page 3-13, and “Set Phone to Factory Defaults/Erase Local
For more information about Advanced Settings for the IP Phone, see Chapter 4,
“Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features.”
For procedures on configuring the Basic Settings for the IP Phone, see Chapter 5,
“Configuring Operational Features.”
Configuration File Options
An Administrator can enter specific parameters in the configuration files to
an administrator.
For a procedure on using the configuration files, see Chapter 2, the section,
“Configuration Files (Administrator Only)” on page 2-1.
For a description of each parameter you can enter in the configuration files, see
Appendix A, “Configuration Parameters.”
3-8
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Phone Status
The Phone Status on the IP Phone displays the network status and firmware
version of the IP phone.
You can display phone status using the IP phone UI or the Aastra Web UI.
Phone Status via IP Phone UI
In the IP phone UI, the Phone Status options are available to the user and the
administrator and do not require a password entry.
The following options display for phone status on the IP phone UI:
Phone Status Screen for 9143i, 51i, 53i Phones
Phone Status
1. IP&MAC Addresses
2. LAN Port
3. PC Port
4. Firmware Info
=Enter
=Next
Phone Status Screen for 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, 57i CT Phones
Phone Status
1. IP&MAC Addresses
2. LAN Port
3. PC Port
4. Firmware Info
Select
Done
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
•
•
IP&MAC Addresses
Displays the IP address and MAC address of the phone.
LAN Port
Displays the Link State, Negotiation Method, Speed, and Duplex Method that
the phone uses on its LAN port.
•
•
PC Port
Displays the Link State, Negotiation Method, Speed, and Duplex Method that
the phone uses on its PC Port.
Firmware Info
Displays information about the firmware that is currently installed on the IP
phone.
Phone Status via Aastra Web UI
The first screen that displays after logging into the Aastra Web UI for a phone is
the Network Status screen. This screen also displays when selecting
Status->System Information. The information on this screen is available to the
user and the administrator as read-only.
3-10
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
The following is a description of the information on the Network Status screen:
•
Network Attributes
Displays the network status of the Ethernet ports at the back of the phone. You
can also view the phone’s IP and MAC addresses. Information in this field
includes Link State, Negotiation, Speed, and Duplex for Port 0 and Port 1.
•
•
Hardware Information
Displays the current IP phone platform and the revision number.
Firmware Information
Displays information about the firmware that is currently installed on the IP
phone. Information in this field includes Firmware Version, Firmware Release
Code, Boot Version, Release Date/Time.
•
SIP Status
Displays information about the SIP registration status of the phone. If there
are accounts configured on the IP Phone, their SIP status displays in this field.
The 51i displays only one status line. All other model phones display the
status of up to 9 lines.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
The following table describes the status conditions that can display for an
account(s).
Status Condition
Description
Registered
Displays this status on accounts that HAVE been registered with the SIP proxy
server.
Example:
Backup
Registrar
Used?
Line SIP Account
Status
1
[email protected]:5060Registered Yes
where
Account Number is “1”
SIP Account is “[email protected]” on port “5060”
Status is “Registered”
Backup registrar is used (“Yes”)
SIP Error Number
Displays on accounts when registration fails with the SIP proxy server.
Example:
Backup
Registrar
Status Used?
Line
SIP Account
4
[email protected]:5060401
No
where
Account Number is “4”
SIP Account is “[email protected]” on port “5060”
Status is “401” - Unregistered if SIP registration fails.
Backup registrar is used (“No”)
Note: The IP Phones can register with multiple server using the same
user name. So the SIP Status information on the Network Status screen
may display the same account with different registrar and proxy IP
addresses. For more information, see
3-12
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Restarting Your Phone
As System Administrator, there may be times when you need to restart a phone.
The Restart option allows you reboot the phone when required. A reset may be
necessary when:
•
•
•
There is a change in your network, OR
To re-load modified configuration files, OR
If the settings for the IP phone on the IP PBX system have been modified.
You can restart the phone using the IP Phone UI or the Aastra Web UI.
Restarting the Phone Using the IP Phone UI
IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
2
3
Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select Restart Phone.
For 9143i. 51i, 53i:
Press # to confirm.
Note: To cancel the Restart, press the 3 key.
For 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, 57i CT:
Press Restart.
Note: To cancel the Restart, press Cancel.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Restarting the Phone Using the Aastra Web UI
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Operation->Reset->Phone.
2
Click
to restart the phone.
3-14
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Set Phone to Factory Defaults/Erase Local Configuration
You can set phones to their factory default setting or remove a local phone’s
configuration using the IP Phone UI or the Aastra Web UI.
Setting Factory Defaults on the Phone
Factory default settings are the settings that reside on the phone after it has left the
factory. The factory default settings on the phone sets the factory defaults for all
of the settings in the aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg, and local configuration. Performing
this action results in losing all user-modified settings.You can reset a phone to
factory defaults using the IP Phone UI or the Aastra Web UI.
Setting Factory Defaults Using the IP Phone UI
IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
2
3
4
Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select Administrator Menu and enter your Administrator Password (default is 22222).
Select Factory Default.
For 9143i, 51i, 53i:
The “Restore Defaults?” prompt displays.
Press # to confirm.
For 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i/57i/57i CT:
The “Reset phone to factory defaults?” prompt displays.
Press Default to confirm.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Settings Factory Defaults Using the Aastra Web UI
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
1 Click on Operation->Reset->Current Settings.
2
In the "Restore to Factory Defaults" field, click
.
This restores all factory defaults, and removes any saved configuration and directory list files.
3-16
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Erasing the Phone’s Local Configuration
You can reset the IP Phone’s local configuration if required. The local
configuration is the last updated configuration you performed using the IP Phone
UI or the Aastra Web UI. Performing this action results in losing all recently
user-modified settings. For more information about local configuration, see
Chapter 1, the section, “Configuration File Precedence” on page 1-38.
Erasing the Phone’s Local Configuration Using the IP Phone UI
IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
2
3
4
Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select Administrator Menu and enter your Administrator Password (default is 22222).
Select Erase Local Config.
For 9143i, 51i, 53i:
The “Erase local config?” prompt displays.
Press # to confirm.
For 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, 57i CT:
The “Erase local config?” prompt displays.
Press Erase to confirm.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Erasing the Phone’s Local Configuration Using the Aastra Web UII
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
1
Click on Operation->Reset->Current Settings.
2
In the "Remove Local Configuration Settings" field, click
.
This removes the last customized configuration settings made on the phone.
3-18
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Basic Settings
An Administrator has access to specific Basic Setting options to configure and
manage the IP Phone in the network. The following sections identify the options
available to an Administrator only, or where indicated, to a User and
Administrator. These tables also identify whether you can configure them using
the Aastra Web UI, IP Phone UI, or the configuration files.
General Settings
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameter in
Configuration Files
Description
Local Dial Plan
sip dial plan
A dial plan that describes the number and pattern of
digits that a user dials to reach a particular telephone
number.
For more information on this feature, see “Local Dial
Plan” on page 5-49.
Send Dial Plan
Terminator
sip dial plan terminator
Allows you to enable or disable a dial plan terminator.
When you configure the dial plan on the phone to use
a dial plan terminator (such as the pound symbol (#)),
the phone waits 4 or 5 seconds after you pick up the
handset or after dialing the number on the keypad
before making the call.
Plan Terminator” on page 5-51.
Digit Timeout
sip digit timeout
Represents the time, in seconds, to configure the
timeout between consecutive key presses.
For more information on this feature, see. “Digit
Timeout” on page 5-51.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameter in
Configuration Files
Description
Park Call
sprecode
The parking of a live call to a specific extension.
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
This feature on the Basic Preferences screen is
available on the 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i
CT only.
To configure the Park feature on a global basis, see
Chapter 5, the section, “Park Calls/Pick Up Parked
Calls” on page 5-55.
To configure the Park feature on a key, see Chapter 5,
the section, “Park/Pick Up Key” on page 5-219.
Pick Up Parked Call
pickupsprecode
Picking up a parked call at the specified extension.
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
This feature on the Basic Preferences screen is
available on the 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i
CT only.
To configure the Pickup feature on a global basis, see
Chapter 5, the section, “Park Calls/Pick Up Parked
Calls” on page 5-55.
To configure the Pickup feature on a key, see Chapter
Suppress DTMF
Playback
suppress dtmf playback Enables and disables suppression of DTMF playback
when a number is dialed from the softkeys or
programmable keys.
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
“Suppressing DTMF Playback” on page 5-59.
Display DTMF Digits
display dtmf digits
call waiting
Enables and disables the display of DTMF digits on
the IP phone display during a connected state.
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
For more information on this feature, see. “Display
DTMF Digits” on page 5-61.
Call Waiting
Enable or disables Call Waiting on the IP Phone.
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
For more information on this feature, see. “Call
Waiting/Call Waiting Tone” on page 5-63.
3-20
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameter in
Configuration Files
Description
Play Call Waiting Tone
call waiting tone
Enable or disables the playing of a call waiting tone
when a caller is on an active call and a new call comes
into the phone.
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
Waiting/Call Waiting Tone” on page 5-63.
Stuttered Dial Tone
stutter disabled
Enable or disables the playing of a stuttered dial tone
when there is a message waiting on the IP phone.
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
For more information on this feature, see. “Stuttered
Dial Tone” on page 5-66.
XML Beep Support
xml beep notification
Enables or disables the playing of a beep to indicate a
status on the phone. When the phone receives a
status message, the BEEP notifies the user that the
message is displaying.
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
Support” on page 5-68.
Status Scroll Delay
(seconds)
xml status scroll delay
Allows you to set the time delay, in seconds, between
the scrolling of each status message on the phone.
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
Scroll Delay” on page 5-70.
Incoming Call Interrupts incoming call interrupts
Enable or disables how the phone handles incoming
calls while the phone is dialing out. For more
information on this feature, see “Incoming Call
Interrupts Dialing” on page 5-72.
Dialing
dialing
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
Switch Focus to Ringing switch focus to ringing
Enables or disables whether or not the UI focus is
switched to a ringing line while the phone is in the
connected state.
Line
line
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
For more information on this feature, see “Switch
Preferred Line
preferred line
Specifies the preferred line to switch focus back to
when incoming or outgoing calls end on the phone.
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
For more information on this feature, see “Preferred
Line and Preferred Line Timeout” on page 5-77.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameter in
Configuration Files
Description
Preferred Line Timeout preferred line timeout
(seconds)
Specifies the time, in seconds, that the phone
switches back to the preferred line after a call
(incoming or outgoing) ends on the phone, or after a
duration of inactivity on an active line.
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
Line and Preferred Line Timeout” on page 5-77.
Goodbye Key Cancels
Incoming Call
goodbye key cancels
incoming call
Enable or disables the behavior of the Goodbye Key
on the IP phone.
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
UPnP Mapping Lines
upnp mapping lines
mwi led line
Enables or disables the use of Universal Plug and
Play (UpnP) on a specific line on the IP phone.
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
For more information on this feature, see “UPnP
Mapping Lines (for remote phones)” on page 5-83.
Message Waiting
Indicator Line
Allows you to enable the Message Waiting Indicator
(MWI) on a single line or on all lines on the phone. For
example, if you set this parameter to 3, the LED
illuminates if a voice mail is pending on line 3. If you
set this parameter to 0, the LED illuminates if a voice
mail is pending on any line on the phone (lines 1
through 9).
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
For more information on this feature, see “Message
Waiting Indicator Line” on page 5-85.
DND Key Mode
dnd key mode
Allows you to configure the DND mode to use on the
phone (Account, Phone, Custom) when the DND key
is pressed. You can configure DND for all accounts or
a specific account.
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
For more information on this feature, see “DND Key
Mode” on page 5-87. Also see Chapter 5, the section,
“Do Not Disturb (DND)” on page 5-199.
3-22
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameter in
Configuration Files
Description
Call Forward Key Mode call forward key mode
Allows you to configure the Call Forward mode to use
on the phone (Account, Phone, or Custom). You can
configure Call Forward for all accounts or a specific
account.
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
For more information on this feature, see “Call
Forward Mode” on page 5-89. Also see Chapter 5, the
section, “Call Forwarding” on page 5-234.
LLDP ELIN
use lldp elin
Enables or disables the use of an Emergency
Location Identification Number (ELIN) received from
LLDP as a caller ID for emergency numbers.
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
Caution: In Release 2.3 and later, LLDP is enabled
by default. If LLDP is enabled on your network, the
phones may come up with different network settings.
For more information on this feature, see “Link Layer
Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices
(LLDP-MED) and Emergency Location Identification
Number (ELIN)” on page 5-93.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Incoming/Outgoing Intercom Calls
The Incoming/Outgoing Intercom Call settings on the IP Phone specify
whether the IP phone or the server is responsible for notifying the recipient that an
Intercom call is being placed. These settings also specify the prefix code for
server-side Intercom calls, and specifies the configuration to use when making the
Intercom call.
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameter in
Configuration Files
Description
Incoming Intercom Settings (all models)
Auto-Answer
sip allow auto answer
Enables or disables the IP phone to allow automatic
answering for an Intercom call. If auto-answer is
enabled on the IP phone, the phone plays a tone to
alert the user before answering the intercom call. If
auto-answer is disabled, the phone rejects the
incoming intercom call and sends a busy signal to the
caller.
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
Microphone Mute
sip intercom mute mic
Enables or disables the microphone on the IP phone
for Intercom calls made by the originating caller.
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
For more information on this feature, see “Incoming/
Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer and Barge In” on
Play Warning Tone
sip intercom warning
tone
Enables or disables a warning tone to play when the
phone receives an incoming intercom call on an active
line.
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
Allow Barge In
sip intercom allow barge Enable or disables how the phone handles incoming
in
intercom calls while the phone is on an active call.
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
For more information on this feature, see “Incoming/
Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer and Barge In” on
page 5-98.
3-24
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameter in
Configuration Files
Description
Outgoing Intercom Settings (9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, 57i CT)
Type
sip intercom type
Determines whether the IP phone or the server is
responsible for notifying the recipient that an Intercom
call is being placed. Applicable settings are
Phone-Side, Server-Side, OFF.
For more information on this feature, see “Incoming/
Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer and Barge In” on
Prefix Code
sip intercom prefix code The prefix to add to the phone number for server-side
outgoing Intercom calls. This parameter is required for
all server-side Intercom calls.
For more information on this feature, see “Incoming/
Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer and Barge In” on
page 5-98.
Line
sip intercom line
Specifies the line for which the IP phone uses the
configuration from, when making the Intercom call.
The IP phone uses the first available line for physically
making the call but uses the configuration from the line
you set for this parameter.
Note: The "sip intercom type" parameter must be set
with the Server-Side option to enable the "sip
intercom line" parameter.
For more information on this feature, see “Incoming/
Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer and Barge In” on
page 5-98.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Group Paging RTP Settings
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameter in
Configuration Files
Description
Paging listen addresses paging addr list
Allows you to specify up to 5 listening multicast
addresses to send/receive a Real Time Transport
Protocol (RTP) stream to/from these pre-configured
multicast address(es) without involving SIP signaling.
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
For more information on this feature, see “Group
Paging RTP Settings” on page 5-103.
Key Mapping
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameter in
Configuration Files
Description
Map Redial Key To
map redial key to
Sets the Redial key as a speeddial key if a value is
entered for this parameter. If you leave this parameter
blank, the Redial key returns to its original
functionality.
Note: If you configure the Redial key for speeddialing
on the 9480i CT or 57i CT Base Stations, the Redial
key on the 9480i CT and 57i CT handsets retain their
original functionality. The Redial key on the handset is
not configured for speeddial.
For more information on this feature, see “Key
Mapping” on page 5-109.
Map Conf Key To
map conf key to
Sets the Conf key as a speeddial key if a value is
entered for this parameter. If you leave this parameter
blank, the Conf key returns to its original functionality.
Note: If you configure the Conf key for speeddialing
on the 9480i CT or 57i CT Base Stations, the Conf key
on the 9480i CT and 57i CT handsets retain their
original functionality. The Conf key on the handset is
not configured for speeddial.
For more information on this feature, see “Key
Mapping” on page 5-109.
3-26
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Ring Tones
Parameter in
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameter in
Configuration Files
Description
Tone Set
Tone Set
tone set
Globally sets a tone set for a
specific country
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
For more information on this
Ring Tone
Global Ring Tone
ring tone
Globally sets the type of ring tone
on the IP phone. Ring tone can
be set to one of six distinct rings.
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
For more information on this
feature, see “Ring Tones and
Tone Sets” on page 5-113.
N/A
LineN
lineN ring tone
Sets the type of ring tone on the
IP phone on a per-line basis.
Ring tone can be set to one of six
distinct rings.
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
For more information on this
feature, see “Ring Tones and
Tone Sets” on page 5-113.
Priority Alerting Settings
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameter in
Configuration Files
Enable Priority Alerting priority alerting enabled Enables and disables distinctive ringing on the IP
phone for incoming calls and call-waiting calls.
Alerting” on page 5-118.
Group
alert group
When an "alert group" keyword appears in the header
of the INVITE request, the configured Bellcore ring
tone is applied to the IP phone.
For more information on this feature, see “Priority
Alerting” on page 5-118.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameter in
Configuration Files
External
alert external
When an "alert external" keyword appears in the
header of the INVITE request, the configured Bellcore
ring tone is applied to the IP phone.
Alerting” on page 5-118.
Internal
alert internal
alert emergency
alert priority
When an "alert-internal" keyword appears in the
header of the INVITE request, the configured Bellcore
ring tone is applied to the IP phone.
Alerting” on page 5-118.
Emergency
Priority
When an "alert emergency" keyword appears in the
header of the INVITE request, the configured Bellcore
ring tone is applied to the IP phone.
Alerting” on page 5-118.
When an "alert priority" keyword appears in the
header of the INVITE request, the configured Bellcore
ring tone is applied to the IP phone.
Alerting” on page 5-118.
Auto Call Distribution
alert auto call distribution When an "alert-acd" keyword appears in the header of
the INVITE request, the configured Bellcore ring tone
is applied to the IP phone.
For more information on this feature, see “Priority
Alerting” on page 5-118.
Community 1 thru
Community 4
alert community 1
alert community 2
alert community 3
alert community 4
When an "alert community-#” keyword appears in the
header of the INVITE request, the configured Bellcore
ring tone is applied to the IP phone. Available Bellcore
tones are:
0
1
2
3
4
5
Bellcore-dr2
Bellcore-dr3
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
Silent
For more information on this feature, see “Priority
Alerting” on page 5-118.
3-28
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Directed Call Pickup (DCP)
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Directed Call Pickup
directed call pickup
Enables or disables the use of "directed call pickup"
feature.
For more information on this feature, see “Directed
Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception)” on
Directed Call Pickup
Prefix
directed call pickup
prefix
Allows you to specify a prefix to use for "directed call
pickup" that you can use with a BLF or BLF List
softkey.
For more information on this feature, see “Directed
Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception)” on
page 5-125.
Play a Ring Splash
play a ring splash
Enables or disables the playing of a short "ring splash
tone" when there is an incoming call on the BLF
monitored extension. If the host tone is idle, the tone
plays a "ring splash".
For more information on this feature, see “Directed
Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception)” on
page 5-125.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Auto Call Distribution (ACD) Settings
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Auto Available
acd auto available
Enables or disables the use of the ACD Auto-Available
Timer.
For more information on this feature, see “Automatic
Auto Available Timer
acd auto available timer Specifies the length of time, in seconds, before the IP
phone status switches back to “available.”
For more information on this feature, see “Automatic
Call Distribution (ACD) (for Sylantro Servers)” on
page 5-176.
Time and Date
Parameter in
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
Time Format
Time Format
time format
This parameter changes the time
to 12 hour or 24 hour format. Use
“0” for the 12 hour format and “1”
for the 24 hour format.
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
For more information on this
feature, see “Time and Date” on
page 5-18.
3-30
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Parameter in
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
Date Format
Date Format
date format
This parameter allows the user to
change the date to various
formats
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
For more information on this
feature, see “Time and Date” on
page 5-18.
Time Zone
N/A
time zone name
This parameter allows the user to
set the time zone code or
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
customize the time zone for their
Custom Parameters: area as required.
•
•
•
time zone minutes
dst minutes
For more information on this
feature, see “Time Zone & DST”
on page 5-19.
dst [start|end]
relative date
dst start month
dst end month
dst start week
dst end week
dst start day
dst end day
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
dst start hour
dst end hour
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Live Dialpad
Parameter in
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
Live Dialpad
N/A
live dialpad
This parameter turns the “Live
Dialpad” feature ON or OFF.
Note: This option can
be set by a User via
the IP Phone UI and
by an Administrator via
the IP Phone UI and
the configuration files.
For more information on this
feature, see “Live Dial Pad*” on
page 5-29.
Language
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameter in
Configuration Files
Description
WebPage Language
language
The language you want to display in the IP Phone UI
and the Aastra Web UI.
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
Valid values for 9143i, 9480i, 51i, 53i, 55i, 57i are:
0 (English)
1 (French)
2 (Spanish)
3 (German)
4 (Italian)
Valid values for 9480i CT and 57i CT handsets are:
0 (English)
1 (French)
2 (Spanish)
the language packs currently loaded to the IP phone.
For more information about loading language packs,
see “Loading Language Packs” on page 5-30.
For more information on specifying a language to use
on the IP Phone, see “Specifying the Language to
Use” on page 5-33.
3-32
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameter in
Configuration Files
Description
Input Language
input language
Allows you to specify the language to use for inputs on
the IP Phone. Entering a language value for this
parameter allows users to enter text and characters in
the IP Phone UI, Aastra Web UI, and in XML
applications via the keypad on the phone, in the
language(s) specified.
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
Valid values are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
English
French
Français
German
Deutsch
Italian
Italiano
Spanish
Español
For more information on this feature, see “Specifying
the Input Language to Use” on page 5-37.
Language 1 thru 4
language N
The language pack you want to load to the IP phone.
Valid values are:
lang_fr.txt
lang_fr_ca.txt
lang_es.txt
lang_es_mx.txt
lang_de.txt
lang_it.txt
Notes:
available language packs from the configuration
server.
2. You must reboot the phone to load a language
pack.
For more information on this feature, see “Loading
Language Packs” on page 5-30.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Account Configuration
The IP phones have a DND and CFWD feature that allows an Administrator and
User to configure “do not disturb” and “call forwarding” by account. You can set
specific modes for the way you want the phone to handle DND and CFWD. The
three modes you can set on the phone for these features are:
•
•
•
Account
Phone
Custom
You can set the modes for DND and CFWD in the Aastra Web UI at the path
Basic Settings->Preferences->General, or using the following parameters in the
configurations files:
•
•
dnd key mode
call forward key mode
The following table describes the behavior of the mode settings for DND and
CFWD.
Modes
DND
CFWD
Account Sets DND for a specific account. A
Sets CFWD on a per account basis. Pressing a
pre-configured DND key toggles the account pre-configured CFWD key applies to the
in focus on the IP Phone UI, to ON or OFF. account in focus
3-34
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Modes
Phone
DND
CFWD
Sets DND ON for all accounts on the phone. A Sets the same CFWD configuration for all
pre-configured DND key toggles all accounts accounts (All, Busy, and/or No Answer). When
on the phone to ON or OFF.
you configure the initial account, the phone
applies the configuration to all other accounts.
(In the Aastra Web UI, only the account you
configured is enabled. All other accounts are
grayed out but set to the same configuration.)
Using the Aastra Web UI, if you make changes
to that initial account, the changes apply to all
accounts on the phone.
Custom
Sets the phone to display custom screens
after pressing a pre-configured DND key, that accounts. You can configure a specific mode
Sets CFWD for a specific account or all
list the account(s) on the phone. The user can (All, Busy, and/or No Answer) for each
select a specific account for DND, turn DND
ON for all accounts, or turn DND OFF for all
accounts
account independently or all accounts. On the
9143i, 51i, and 53i phones, you can set all
accounts to ALL On or ALL Off. On the 9480i,
9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT, you can set all
accounts to All On, All Off, or copy the
configuration for the account in focus to all other
accounts using a CopytoAll softkey.
References
For more information about account configuration of DND and CFWD on the IP
Phones, see Chapter 5, the sections:
For DND:
•
•
“DND Key Mode” on page 5-87.
“Do Not Disturb (DND)” on page 5-199.
For CFWD:
•
•
“Call Forward Mode” on page 5-89.
“Call Forwarding” on page 5-234.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Network Settings
The following paragraphs describe the network parameters you can configure on
the IP phone. Network settings are in two categories:
•
•
Basic network settings
Advanced network settings
Note: Specific parameters are configurable using the Aastra Web UI only
and are indicated where applicable.
3-36
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Basic Network Settings
If Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is enabled, the IP phone
automatically configures all of the Network settings. If the phone cannot populate
the Network settings, or if DHCP is disabled, you can set the Network options
manually.
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
DHCP
DHCP
dhcp
Enables or disables DHCP.
Enabling DHCP populates the
required network information. The
DHCP server serves the network
information that the IP phone
requires. If the IP phone is unable to
get any required information, then
you must enter it manually. DHCP
populates the following network
information:
IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway,
Domain Name Servers (DNS),
TFTP, HTTP HTTPS, and FTP
servers, and Timer Servers.
Note: For DHCP to automatically
populate the IP address or qualified
domain name for the TFTP server,
your DHCP server must support
Option 66. The IP phones also
support Option 60 and 43.
For more information, see “DHCP”
IP Address
IP Address
ip
IP address of the IP phone. To
assign a static IP address, disable
DHCP.
For more information, see
“Configuring Network Settings
Manually” on page 4-20.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
Subnet Mask
Subnet Mask
subnet mask
default gateway
dns1
Subnet mask defines the IP address
range local to the IP phone. To
assign a static subnet mask, disable
DHCP.
For more information, see
“Configuring Network Settings
Manually” on page 4-20.
Gateway
Gateway
The IP address of the network’s
gateway or default router IP
address. To assign a static Gateway
IP address, disable DHCP.
For more information, see
“Configuring Network Settings
Manually” on page 4-20.
Primary DNS
Primary DNS
Primary domain name server IP
address. For any of the IP address
settings on the IP phone a domain
name value can be entered instead
of an IP address. With the help of
the domain name servers the
domain names for such parameters
can then be resolved to their
corresponding IP addresses.
To assign static DNS addresses,
disable DHCP.
Note: If a host name is configured
on the IP phone, you must also set
a DNS.
For more information, see
“Configuring Network Settings
Manually” on page 4-20.
3-38
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
Secondary DNS
Secondary DNS
dns2
A service that translates domain
names into IP addresses. To assign
static DNS addresses, disable
DHCP.
For more information, see
“Configuring Network Settings
Hostname
Hostname
hostname
Specifies the hostname DHCP
Option 12 that the phone sends with
the DHCP Request packet.
For more information, see “Using
Option 12 Hostname on the IP
Phone” on page 4-8.
Ethernet
N/A
The send (TX) and receive (RX)
negotiation to use on the Ethernet
LAN Port and Ethernet PC Port for
transmitting and receiving data over
the LAN or to/from your PC,
respectively.
LAN Port Link
PC Port Link
LAN Port
PC Port
ethernet port 0
ethernet port 1
PC Port Enabled PC Port PassThru
(9143i, 51i, 53i) Enable/Disable
(9143i, 51i, 53i)
pc port passthrough
enabled
The pc port passthrough enabled
parameter applies to the 802.1x
support on the IP Phones.
Enable
PassThru Port
PC Port PassThru
Enable/Disable
For more information on configuring
the LAN and PC port negotiation,
see “Configuring LAN and PC Port
Negotiation” on page 4-20.
(9480i, 9480i CT, (9480i, 9480i CT, 55i,
55i, 57i, 57i CT) 57i, 57i CT)
For more information on configuring
802.1x support, see Chapter 6, the
section, “802.1x Support” on
page 6-31.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Advanced Network Settings
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
DHCP User Class DHCP User Class
dhcp userclass
Specifies the User Class DHCP
Option 77 that the phone sends to
the configuration server with the
DHCP Request packet.
Note: If you specify a value for this
parameter, you must restart your
phone for the change to take affect.
Any change in its value during
start-up results in an automatic
reboot.
For more information, see “Using
Option 77 User Class on the IP
Phone” on page 4-11.
Option Override
DHCP Option
Override
dhcp config option
override
The value specified for this
parameter overrides the
precedence order for determining a
configuration server. The value of
“0” (None) specifies no override. If
set to “0”, the phones uses normal
precedence order of 43, 160, 159,
66.
Notes:
1. If the DHCP server supplies
Options 159 and 160, the phones
will attempt to contact the
configuration server given in these
options.
2. You must restart the IP Phone for
this parameter to take affect.
For more information, see “Using
Options 159 and 160 on the IP
Phone” on page 4-14.
3-40
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
LLDP Support
LLDP
lldp
Enables or disables Link Layer
Discovery Protocol for Media
Endpoint Devices (LLDP-MED) on
the IP Phone.
Caution: In Release 2.3 and later,
LLDP is enabled by default. If LLDP
is enabled on your network, the
phones may come up with different
network settings.
For more information on this
feature, see “Link Layer Discovery
Protocol for Media Endpoint
Devices (LLDP-MED) and
Emergency Location Identification
Number (ELIN)” on page 5-93.
N/A
LLDP Packet Interval lldp interval
The amount of time, in seconds,
between the transmission of LLDP
Data Unit (LLDPDU) packets. The
value of zero (0) disables this
parameter.
Caution: In Release 2.3 and later,
LLDP is enabled by default. If LLDP
is enabled on your network, the
phones may come up with different
network settings.
For more information on this
feature, see “Link Layer Discovery
Protocol for Media Endpoint
Devices (LLDP-MED) and
Emergency Location Identification
Number (ELIN)” on page 5-93.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
UPnP
UPnP
upnp manager
Enables or disables Universal Plug
and Play (UpnP) on the IP phone. If
you set this parameter to “0”, you
can manually configure NAT on the
IP phone and the UPnP manager
will not start.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Universal Plug and Play (UPnP)
(for remote phones)” on page 4-46.
N/A
N/A
upnp gateway
IP address or fully qualified Domain
Name of the Internet gateway or
router. This parameter stores the IP
address of the gateway or router in
the event that only non-default
UPnP gateways get discovered on
the network. The UPnP port
mappings are saved to this IP
address so even if the phone
reboots, it will still have the correct
port mappings.
For more information, see Chapter
NAT IP
NAT IP
sip nat ip
IP address the network device that
enforces NAT.
For more information, see Chapter
NAT SIP Port
NAT SIP Port
sip nat port
Port number of the network device
that enforces NAT.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuring NAT Address and
Port (optional)” on page 4-31.
3-42
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
NAT RTP Port
NAT RTP Port
sip nat rtp port
Indicates the port through which the
RTP packets are sent. This value
must specify the beginning of the
RTP port range on the gateway or
router.
The RTP port is used for sending
DTMF tones and for the audio
stream. Your network administrator
may close some ports for security
reasons. You may want to use this
parameter to send RTP data using a
different port.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuring NAT Address and
Nortel NAT
Nortel NAT Traversal sip nortel nat support
Enabled
Enables or disables the phone to
operate while connected to a
network device that enforces NAT.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuring Nortel NAT
N/A
Nortel NAT Timer
(seconds)
sip nortel nat timer
The interval, in seconds, that the
phone sends SIP ping requests to
the Nortel proxy.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuring Nortel NAT
(optional)” on page 4-28.
N/A
Rport (RFC 3581)
sip rport
Allows you to enable (1) or disable
(0) the use of Rport on the IP
phone.
to request that the server send the
response back to the source IP
address and the port from which the
request came.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “RPORT” on page 4-61.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
N/A
NTP Time Servers
time server disabled
Enables or disables the time server.
This parameter affects the time
server1, time server2, and time
server3 parameters. Setting this
parameter to 0 allows the use of the
configured Time Server(s). Setting
this parameter to 1 prevents the use
of the configured Time Server(s).
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Network Time Servers” on
page 4-63.
N/A
Time Servers 1, 2,
and 3
time server1
time server2
time server3
time server4
The 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th time
server's IP address or qualified
domain name. If the time server is
enabled, the value for time server1
will be used to request the time
from.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Network Time Servers” on
page 4-63.
3-44
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
HTTPS Settings
Advanced Network Settings includes HTTPS settings for the IP Phones.
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
HTTPS
HTTPS Server -
Redirect HTTP to
HTTPS
https redirect http get
Allows or disallows redirection from
the HTTP server to the HTTPS
server.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “HTTPS Client/Server
Configuration” on page 4-36.
XML HTTP POSTs HTTPS Server -
Block XML HTTP
https block http post xml Enables or disables the blocking of
XML scripts from HTTP POSTs.
POSTs
Some client applications use HTTP
POSTs to transfer XML scripts. The
phones’s HTTP server accepts
these POSTs even if server
redirection is enabled, effectively
bypassing the secure connection.
When this parameter is enabled
(blocking is enabled), receipt of an
HTTP POST containing an XML
parameter header results in the
following response:
“403 Forbidden”. This forces the
client to direct the POSTs to the
HTTPS server through use of the
“https://” URL.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “HTTPS Client/Server
Configuration” on page 4-36.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
Client Method
HTTPS Client
Method
https client method
Defines the security method that the
client advertises to the server during
the Secure Socket Layer (SSL)
handshake. Available options are:
TLS 1.0 - Transport Layer Security
version 1 (TLS 1.0) is a protocol that
ensures privacy between
communicating applications and
their users on the Internet. TLS is
the successor to SSL.
SSL 3.0 - Secure Socket Layer
version 3 (SSL 3.0) is a
commonly-used protocol for
managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “HTTPS Client/Server
Configuration” on page 4-36.
3-46
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
Cert Validation
Validate Certificates https validate certificates Enables or disables the HTTPS
validation of certificates on the
phone. When this parameter is set
to 1, the HTTPS client performs
validation on SSL certificates before
accepting them.
Notes:
1. If you are using HTTPS as a
configuration method, and use a
self signed certificate, you must set
this parameter to “0” (disabled)
before upgrading to Release 2.3 or
later of the IP Phones.
2. If you are using HTTPS and the
certificates are not valid or are not
signed by Verisign, Thawte, or
GeoTrust, the phones fail to
download configuration files.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “HTTPS Server Certificate
Validation” on page 4-40.
Check Expires
Check Certificate
Expiration
https validate expires
Enables or disables the HTTPS
validation of the expiration of the
certificates. When this parameter is
set to 1, the HTTPS client verifies
whether or not a certificate has
expired prior to accepting the
certificate.
Note: If the “https validate
expires” parameter is set to
enable, the clock on the phone
must be set for the phone to accept
the certificates.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “HTTPS Server Certificate
Validation” on page 4-40.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Check Hostnames Check Certificate
Hostnames
https validate hostnames Enables or disables the HTTPS
validation of hostnames on the
phone.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “HTTPS Server Certificate
Validation” on page 4-40.
N/A
Trusted Certificates https user certificates
Filename
Specifies a file name for a .PEM file
located on the configuration server.
This file contains the User-provided
certificates in PEM format. These
certificates are used to validate peer
certificates.
Note: You must disable the “https
validate certificates” parameter in
order for the phone to accept the
User-provided certificates.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “HTTPS Server Certificate
Validation” on page 4-40.
3-48
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Type of Service (ToS), DSCP
Advanced Network Settings include Type of Service (ToS) and Differentiated
Services Code Point (DSCP) for the IP phones.
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Type of Service
SIPt
SIP
tos sip
The Differentiated Services Code
Point (DSCP) for SIP packets.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Type of Service (ToS), Quality of
Type of Service
RTP
RTP
tos rtp
The Differentiated Services Code
Point (DSCP) for RTP packets.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Type of Service (ToS), Quality of
Type of Service
RTCP
RTCP
tos rtcp
The Differentiated Services Code
Point (DSCP) for RTCP packets.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Type of Service (ToS), Quality of
Service (QoS), and DiffServ QoS”
on page 4-50.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
VLAN
You can enable or disable VLAN and set specific VLAN IDs and priorities under
Network Settings.
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
Global Settings
VLAN Enable
VLAN Enable
tagging enabled
Enables or disables VLAN on the IP
phones.
For more information, see Chapter
Other Priority
Priority, Non-IP
Packet
priority non-ip
Specifies the priority value for
non-IP packets.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Virtual LAN (optional)” on
page 4-50.
LAN Port Settings (Port 0)
Phone VLAN ID VLAN ID
VLAN id
VLAN is a feature on the IP phone
that allows for multiple logical
Ethernet interfaces to send
outgoing RTP packets over a single
physical Ethernet as described in
IEEE Std 802.3. On the IP phone,
you configure a VLAN ID that
associates with the physical
Ethernet Port 0.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Virtual LAN (optional)” on
page 4-50.
3-50
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
SIP Priority
RTP Priority
RTCP Priority
SIP Priority
RTP Priority
RTCP Priority
tos priority map
This parameter is based on the
Type of Service (ToS), Differentiated
Services Code Point (DSCP) setting
for SIP (tos sip parameter), RTP
(tos rtp parameter) and RTCP (tos
rtcp parameter). It is the mapping
between the DSCP value and the
VLAN priority value for SIP, RTP,
and RTCP packets.
You enter the tos priority map value
as follows:
(DSCP_1,Priority_1)(DSCP_2,Priori
ty_2).....(DSCP_64,Priority_64)
where the DSCP value range is
0-63 and the priority range is 0-7.
Mappings not enclosed in
parentheses and separated with a
comma, or with values outside the
ranges, are ignored.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Virtual LAN (optional)” on
page 4-50.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
PC Port Settings (Port 1)
PC Port VLAN ID
VLAN ID
VLAN id port 1
Specifies the VLAN ID used to pass
packets through to a PC via Port 1.
Note: If you set the PC Port VLAN
ID (Port 1) to 4095, all untagged
packets are sent to this port. The
following is an example of
configuring the phone on a VLAN
where all untagged packets are sent
to the passthrough port.
Example
You enable tagging on the LAN Port
(VLAN id) as normal but set the PC
Port (VLAN id port 1) to 4095. The
following example sets the phone to
be on VLAN 3 on the LAN Port but
the PC Port is configured as
untagged.
tagging enabled: 1
VLAN id: 3
VLAN id port 1: 4095
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Virtual LAN (optional)” on
page 4-50.
PC Port Priority
Priority
QoS eth port 1 priority
Specifies the priority value used for
passing VLAN packets through to a
PC via Port 1.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Virtual LAN (optional)” on
page 4-50.
3-52
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
SIP Settings
The following paragraphs describe the SIP parameters you can configure on the IP
phone. SIP configuration consists of configuring:
•
•
•
•
•
Basic SIP Authentication Settings
Basic SIP Network Settings
Advanced SIP settings
RTP Settings
Autodial Settings
Notes:
1.
Specific parameters are configurable on a global and per-line basis.
You can also configure specific parameters using the IP Phone UI, the
Aastra Web UI, or the configuration files. If you have a proxy server or
have a SIP registrar present at a different location than the PBX server,
the SIP parameters may need to be changed.
2.
The IP phones allow you to define different SIP lines with the same
account information (i.e., same user name) but with different registrar and
proxy IP addresses. This feature works with Registration, Subscription,
and Notify processing. This feature also works with the following types
of calls: incoming, outgoing, Broadsoft Shared Call Appearance (SCA),
Bridged Line Appearance (BLA), conference, transfer, blind transfer.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Basic SIP Authentication Settings
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
Screen Name
Screen Name
sip screen name
(global)
Name that displays on the idle
screen. Valid values are up to 20
alphanumeric characters.
(Global and
Per-Line)
sip lineN screen name
(per-line)
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-67.
N/A
Screen Name 2
sip screen name 2
(global)
Custom text message that displays
on the idle screen. Valid values are
up to 20 alphanumeric characters.
(Global and
Per-Line)
sip lineN screen name 2
(per-line)
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-67.
User Name
Phone Number
sip user name
(global)
User name used in the name field of
the SIP URI for the IP phone and for
registering the phone at the
registrar. Valid values are up to 20
alphanumeric characters.
(Global and
Per-Line)
sip lineN user name
(per-line)
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-67.
Display Name
Caller ID
sip display name
(global)
Name used in the display name
field of the "From SIP" header field.
Some IP PBX systems use this as
the caller’s ID, and some may
overwrite this with the string that is
set at the PBX system. Valid values
are up to 20 alphanumeric
(Global and
Per-Line)
sip lineN display name
(per-line)
characters.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-67.
3-54
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
Auth Name
Authentication Name sip auth name
Authorization name used in the
username field of the Authorization
header field of the SIP REGISTER
request. Valid values are up to 20
alphanumeric characters.
(global)
(Global and
Per-Line)
sip lineN auth name
(per-line)
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-67.
Password
Password
sip password
(global)
Password used to register the IP
phone with the SIP proxy. Valid
values are up to 20 numeric
characters. Passwords are
encrypted and display as asterisks
when entering.
(Global and
Per-Line)
sip lineN password
(per-line)
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-67.
N/A
BLA Number
sip bla number
(global)
Phone number that you assign to
BLA lines that is shared across all
phones (global configuration) or
shared on a per-line basis (per-line
configuration).
(Global and
Per-Line)
sip lineN bla number
(per-line)
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-67.
For more information about BLA,
see Chapter 5, the section, “Bridged
Line Appearance (BLA)” on
page 5-210.
N/A
Line Mode
sip mode
(global)
The mode-type that you assign to
the IP phone. Valid values are
Generic (0), BroadSoft SCA (1),
Nortel (2), or BLA (3). Default is
Generic (0).
(Global and
Per-Line)
sip lineN mode
(per-line)
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-67.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Basic SIP Network Settings
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Proxy Server
Proxy Port
N/A
Proxy Server
sip proxy ip
(global)
IP address of the SIP proxy server.
Up to 64 alphanumeric characters.
(Global and
Per-Line)
sip lineN proxy ip
(per-line)
For more information, see Chapter
Proxy Port
sip proxy port
(global)
SIP proxy server’s port number.
Default is 0.
(Global and
Per-Line)
sip lineN proxy port
(per-line)
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-67.
Backup Proxy Server sip backup proxy server The IP address of the backup SIP
(global)
proxy server for which the IP phone
uses when the primary SIP proxy is
unavailable.
(Global and
Per-Line)
sip lineN backup proxy
server
(per-line)
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-67.
N/A
Backup Proxy Port
sip backup proxy port
(global)
The port number of the backup SIP
proxy server for which the IP phone
uses when the primary SIP proxy
port is unavailable.
(Global and
Per-Line)
sip lineN backup proxy
port
(per-line)
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-67.
3-56
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
N/A
Outbound Proxy
Server
sip outbound proxy
server
(global)
Address of the outbound proxy
server. All SIP messages originating
from the phone are sent to this
server. For example, if you have a
(Global and
Per-Line)
sip lineN outbound proxy Session Border Controller in your
server
(per-line)
network, then you would normally
set its address here. Default is
0.0.0.0.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-67.
N/A
Outbound Proxy Port sip outbound proxy port The proxy port on the proxy server
(global)
to which the IP phone sends all SIP
messages. Default is 0.
(Global and
Per-Line)
sip lineN outbound proxy
port
(per-line)
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-67.
Registrar Server
Registrar Server
sip registrar ip
(global)
IP address of the SIP registrar. Up
to 64 alphanumeric characters.
Enables or disables the phone to be
registered with the Registrar. When
Register is disabled globally, the
phone is still active and you can dial
using username and IP address of
the phone. A message "No Service"
displays on the idle screen and the
LED is steady ON. If Register is
disabled for a single line, no
(Global and
Per-Line)
sip lineN registrar ip
(per-line)
messages display and LEDs are
OFF.
For more information, see Chapter
Registrar Port
Registrar Port
sip registrar port
(global)
SIP registrar’s port number. Default
is 0.
(Global and
Per-Line)
sip lineN registrar port
(per-line)
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-67.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
N/A
Backup Registrar
Server
sip backup registrar ip
(global)
The address of the backup registrar
(typically, the backup SIP proxy) for
which the IP phone uses to send
REGISTER requests if the primary
registrar is unavailable.
(Global and
Per-Line)
sip lineN backup
registrar ip
(per-line)
For more information, see Chapter
N/A
N/A
N/A
Backup Registrar
Port
sip backup registrar port The backup registrar's (typically the
(global)
backup SIP proxy) port number.
(Global and
Per-Line)
sip lineN backup
registrar port
For more information, see Chapter
Registration Period
sip registration period
(global)
The requested registration period,
in seconds, from the registrar.
(Global and
Per-Line)
sip lineN registration
period
(per-line)
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-67.
Conference Server
URI
sip centralized conf
(global)
Globally enables or disables SIP
centralized conferencing for an IP
phone.
(Global and
Per-Line)
sip lineN centralized conf
(per-line)
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Centralized Conferencing (for
Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers)” on
page 5-341.
3-58
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Advanced SIP Settings
In addition to the basic SIP settings, you can also configure the following
advanced SIP parameters. These parameters are configurable via the Aastra Web
UI and the configuration files on a global basis only.
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
Explicit MWI Subscription
sip explicit mwi subscription If the IP phone has a message waiting
subscription with the Service Provider, a
Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) (LED or
display icon) tells the user there is a message
on the IP Phone. You can enable and disable
MWI by setting this parameter to 0 (disable) or
1 (enable) in the configuration files or by
checking the box for this field in the Aastra
Web UI. Default is disabled.
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-80.
Explicit MWI Subscription
Period
sip explicit mwi subscription The requested duration, in seconds, before
period
the MWI subscription times out. The phone
re-subscribes to MWI before the subscription
period ends.
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-80.
Missed Call Summary
Subscription
sip missed call summary
subscription
(global)
Enables or disables the Missed Call Summary
Subscription feature.
This feature allows missed calls that have
been redirected by the server, to be
incremented in the missed calls indicator on
the phone it was initially directed to. Default is
disabled.
(Global and Per-Line)
sip lineN missed call
summary subscription
(per-line)
For more information about this parameter,
see Chapter 6, the section, “Missed Call
Summary Subscription” on page 6-13.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
Missed Call Summary
Subscription Period
sip missed call summary
subscription period
Specifies the amount of time, in seconds, that
the phone uses the Missed Calls Summary
Subscription feature. This parameter is always
enabled with a default value of 86400
seconds. When the phone reaches the limit
set for this parameter, it sends the
subscription again.
For more information about this parameter,
see Chapter 6, the section, “Missed Call
AS-Feature-Event
Subscription
sip as-feature-event
subscription
(global)
Enables or disables the specified line with the
BroadSoft’s server-side DND, CFWD, or ACD
features.
(Global and Per-Line)
sip lineN as-feature-event
subscription
(per-line)
For more information about this parameter,
see Chapter 6, the section, “As-Feature-Event
Subscription” on page 6-17.
AS-Feature-Event
Subscription Period
sip as-feature-event
subscription period
Specifies the amount of time, in seconds,
between resubscribing. If the phone does not
resubscribe in the time specified for this
parameter, it loses subscription.
For more information about this parameter,
see Chapter 6, the section, “As-Feature-Event
Subscription” on page 6-17.
Send MAC Address in
REGISTER Message
sip send mac
Adds an "Aastra-Mac:" header to the SIP
REGISTER messages sent from the phone to
the call server, where the value is the MAC
address of the phone.
For more information about this parameter,
see Chapter 6, the section, “MAC Address/
Line Number in REGISTER Messages” on
page 6-5.
3-60
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
Send Line Number in
REGISTER Message
sip send line
Adds an "Aastra-Line:" header to the SIP
REGISTER messages sent from the phone to
the call server, where the value is the line
number that is being registered.
For more information about this parameter,
see Chapter 6, the section, “MAC Address/
Line Number in REGISTER Messages” on
page 6-5.
Session Timer
sip session timer
The time, in seconds, that the IP phone uses
to send periodic re-INVITE requests to keep a
session alive. The proxy uses these re-INVITE
requests to maintain the status' of the
connected sessions. See RFC4028 for details.
Default is 0.
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-80.
Timer 1 and Timer 2
sip T1 timer
sip T2 timer
These timers are SIP transaction layer timers
defined in RFC 3261. Timer 1 is an estimate,
in milliseconds, of the round-trip time (RTT).
Timer 2 represents the amount of time, in
milliseconds, a non-INVITE server transaction
takes to respond to a request.
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-80.
Transaction Timer
sip transaction timer
The amount of time, in milliseconds that the
phone allows the callserver (registrar/proxy) to
respond to SIP messages that it sends. If the
phone does not receive a response in the
amount of time designated for this parameter,
the phone assumes the message has timed
out.
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-80.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
Transport Protocol
sip transport protocol
The protocol that the Real-Time Transport
Protocol (RTP) port on the IP phone uses to
send out SIP signaling packets.
Notes:
1. If you set the value of this parameter to 4
(TLS), the phone checks to see if the “sips
persistent tls” is enabled. If it is enabled, the
phone uses Persistent TLS on the connection.
If “sips persistent tls” is disabled, then the
phone uses TLS on the connection. If TLS is
used, you must specify the Root and
Intermediate Certificates, the Local Certificate,
the Private Key, and the Trusted Certificates.
2. If the phone uses Persistent TLS, you
MUST specify the Trusted Certificates; the
Root and Intermediate Certificates, the Local
Certificate, and the Private Key are optional.
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-80.
Local SIP UDP/TCP Port
sip local port
Specifies the local source port (UDP/TCP)
from which the phone sends SIP messages.
Notes:
1. It is recommended that you avoid the
conflict RTP port range in case of a UDP
transport.
2. By default, the IP phones use symmetric
UDP signaling for outgoing UDP SIP
messages. When symmetric UDP is enabled,
the IP phone generates and listens for UDP
messages using port 5060.If symmetric UDP
signaling is disabled, the phone sends from
random ports but it listens on the configured
SIP local port.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “SIP and
TLS Source Ports for NAT Traversal” on
page 4-33.
3-62
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
Local SIP TLS Port
sip local tls port
Specifies the local source port (SIPS/TLS)
from which the phone sends SIP messages.
Note: It is recommended that you avoid the
conflict with any TCP ports being used. For
example: WebUI HTTP server on 80/tcp and
HTTPS on 443/tcp.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “SIP and
TLS Source Ports for NAT Traversal” on
Registration Failed Retry
Timer
sip registration retry timer
Specifies the time, in seconds, that the phone
waits between registration attempts when a
registration is rejected by the registrar.
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-80.
Registration Timeout Retry sip registration timeout retry Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that
Timer
timer
the phone waits until it re-attempts to register
after a REGISTER message times out.
If this parameter is set lower than 30 seconds,
the phone uses a minimum timer of 30
seconds.
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-80.
Registration Renewal
Timer
sip registration renewal timer The length of time, in seconds, prior to
expiration, that the phone renews
registrations.
For example, if the value is set to 20, then 20
seconds before the registration is due to
expire, a new REGISTER message is sent to
the registrar to renew the registration.
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-80.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
BLF Subscription Period
sip blf subscription period
Specifies the time period, in seconds, that the
IP phone resubscribes the BLF subscription
service after a software/firmware upgrade or
after a reboot of the IP phone.
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-80.
ACD Subscription Period
sip acd subscription period
Specifies the time period, in seconds, that the
IP phone resubscribes the Automatic Call
Distribution (ACD) subscription service after a
software/firmware upgrade or after a reboot of
the IP phone.
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-80.
BLA Subscription Period
sip bla subscription period
Specifies the amount of time, in seconds, that
the phone waits to receive a BLA subscribe
message from the server. If you specify zero
received from the server. If no value is
specified, the phone uses the default value of
300 seconds.
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-80.
Blacklist Duration
sip blacklist duration
Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that a
failed server remains on the server blacklist.
to a failed server (if another server is
available) for this amount of time.
For more information about Blacklist Duration,
see Chapter 6, the section, “Blacklist
Duration” on page 6-22.
3-64
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
Whitelist Proxy
sip whitelist
This parameter enables/disables the whitelist
proxy feature, as follows:
•
•
Set to 0 to disable the feature.
Set to 1 to enable the feature. When this
feature is enabled, an IP phone accepts
call requests from a trusted proxy server
only. The IP phone rejects any call
requests from an untrusted proxy server.
For more information about Whitelist Proxy
see Chapter 6, the section, “Whitelist Proxy”
on page 6-24.
XML SIP Notify
sip xml notify event
Enables or disables the phone to accept or
reject an aastra-xml SIP NOTIFY message.
Note: To ensure the SIP NOTIFY is coming
from a trusted source, it is recommended that
you enable the Whitelist feature (Whitelist
Proxy parameter) on the IP phone. If enabled,
and the phone receives a SIP NOTIFY from a
server that is NOT on the whitelist (i.e.
untrusted server), the phone rejects the
message.
For more information about XML SIP Notify
see Chapter 6, the section, “XML SIP Notify
Events” on page 5-319.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
RTP Settings
You can configure the following RTP settings.
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
RTP Port Base
RTP Port
sip rtp port
The RTP port is used for sending
DTMF tones and for the audio
stream. Your network administrator
may close some ports for security
reasons. You may want to use this
parameter to send RTP data using a
different port. Default is 3000.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Real-time Transport Protocol
(RTP) Settings” on page 4-89.
N/A
Basic Codecs
(G.711 u-Law,
G.711 a-Law, G.729)
sip use basic codecs
Enables or disables basic codecs.
Enabling this parameter allows the
IP phone to use the basic Codecs
when sending/receiving RTP
packets. Valid values are 0
(disabled) and 1 (enabled). Default
is 0 (disabled).
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Real-time Transport Protocol
(RTP) Settings” on page 4-89.
N/A
Force RFC2833 Out sip out-of-band dtmf
of Band DTMF
Enables or disables out-of-band
DTMF. Enabling this parameter
forces the IP phone to use
out-of-band DTMF according to
RFC2833. Valid values are 0
(disabled) and 1 (enabled). Default
is 1 (enabled).
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Real-time Transport Protocol
(RTP) Settings” on page 4-89.
3-66
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
N/A
Customized Codec
Preference List
sip customized codec
Specifies a customized Codec
preference list which allows you to
use the preferred Codecs for this IP
phone.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Real-time Transport Protocol
(RTP) Settings” on page 4-89.
N/A
DTMF Method
sip dtmf method
(global)
Sets the dual-tone multifrequency
(DTMF) method to use on the IP
phone on a global or per-line basis.
Valid values are 0 (RTP), 1 (SIP
INFO), or 2 (BOTH). Default is 0
(RTP).
(Global and
Per-Line)
sip lineN dtmf method
(per-line)
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Real-time Transport Protocol
(RTP) Settings” on page 4-89.
N/A
RTP Encryption
sip srtp mode
(global)
This parameter determines if SRTP
is enabled on this IP phone, as
follows:
(Global and
Per-Line)
sip lineN srtp mode
(per-line)
•
•
If set to 0, then disable SRTP.
If set to 1 then SRTP calls are
preferred.
•
If set to 2, then SRTP calls only
are generated/accepted.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Real-time Transport Protocol
(RTP) Settings” on page 4-89.
N/A
Silence Suppression sip silence suppression Silence suppression is enabled by
default on the IP phones. The
phone negotiates whether or not to
use silence suppression. Disabling
this feature forces the phone to
ignore any negotiated value.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Real-time Transport Protocol
(RTP) Settings” on page 4-89.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Autodial Settings
You can configure the following Autodial settings.
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
N/A
Autodial Number
sip autodial number
Globally or on a per-line basis,
specifies the SIP phone number that
the IP phone autodials when the
handset is lifted from the phone
cradle. An empty (blank) value
disables autodial on the phone.
(Global and
Per-Line)
sip lineN autodial
number
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Autodial Settings” on page 4-99.
N/A
Autodial Timeout
sip autodial timeout
Globally or on a per-line basis,
specifies the time, in seconds, that the
(Global and
Per-Line)
sip lineN autodial timeout phone waits to dial a preconfigured
number after the handset is lifted from
the IP phone cradle.
If this parameter is set to 0 (hotline),
the phone immediately dials a
preconfigured number when you lift
the handset. If this parameter is set to
a value greater than 0, the phone
waits the specified number of seconds
before dialing the preconfigured
number (warmline) when you lift the
handset.
Default is 0 (hotline).
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Autodial Settings” on page 4-99.
N/A
Use Global Settings N/A
For each line, this parameter specifies
to use the global autodial settings of
“Autodial Number” and “Autodial
Timeout”.
(Per-line
configurations only)
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Autodial Settings” on page 4-99.
3-68
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Line Settings
An administrator can configure multiple lines on the IP phone with the same SIP
network configuration (global) or a different SIP network configuration (per-line).
The following table provides the number of lines available for each IP phone
model.
IP Phone
Model
Available
Lines
9143i
9480i
9480i CT
53i
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
55i
57i
57i CT
On the IP Phones, you can configure the following on a per-line basis using the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI:
•
•
•
•
•
Basic SIP Authentication Settings
Basic SIP Network Settings
Advanced SIP Settings (Missed Call Summary Subscription only)
RTP Settings (DTMF Method and RTP Encryption only)
Autodial Settings (On a per-line basis, you can also enable/disable the “Use
Global Settings” parameter.)
References
•
•
•
•
“Basic SIP Settings” on page 4-67
“Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on page 4-80
“Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) Settings” on page 4-89
“Autodial Settings” on page 4-99
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Softkeys, Programmable Keys, Expansion Module Keys
A user or administrator can assign specific functions to softkeys, programmable
keys, or expansion module keys. The available keys for configuration depend on
the IP phone model as shown in the following table.
Expansion Module
IP Phone Model
9143i
Softkeys
Keys
Programmable Keys
-
6
6
-
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
7
-
9480i
9480i CT
53i
-
36 to 108*
4
(Model 536M)
55i
6
36 to 108*
6
-
-
(Model 536M)
60 to 180**
(Model 560M)
57i
12
12
36 to 108*
(Model 536M)
60 to 180**
(Model 560M)
57i CT
36 to 108* on Base
Station
(Model 536M)
60 to 180** on Base
Station
(Model 560M)
*The 536M expansion module consists of 36 softkeys. You can have up to 3 expansion modules on an IP
phone totaling 108 softkeys. Valid for 53i, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT phones.
**The 560M expansion module consists of 60 softkeys. You can have up to 3 expansion modules on an IP
phone totaling 180 softkeys. Valid for 55i, 57i, and 57i CT phones.
specific function. Available functions depend on the IP phone model.
Reference
For more information about key functions see Appendix A, the section, “Softkey/
Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on
page A-184.
3-70
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Level Options
For information about configuring softkeys, programmable keys, and expansion
module keys, see Chapter 5, the section, “Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature
Keys/Expansion Module Keys” on page 5-137.
Action URI
The IP phones have a feature that allows an administrator to specify a uniform
resource identifier (URI) that triggers a GET when certain XML events occur. The
IP phone XML events that support this feature are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Startup
Successful registration
Incoming call
Outgoing call
Offhook
Onhook
Disconnected
XML SIP Notify
You can set these parameters using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Reference
For more information about setting the Action URIs for XML applications, see
“XML Action URIs” on page 5-310.
Note: The Action URI feature on the IP Phones prevents the phones from
hanging if the Action URIs should fail. The phones also support
transparent, non-blocking, XML post execute item URIs.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Action URI Disconnected
The phones allow an Administrator to specify a URI to allow a disconnect event
connected, or calling) to an idle state.
Reference
For more information about configuring the Action URI Disconnected parameter,
see “Action URI Disconnected” on page 5-316.
XML SIP Notify Events and Action URIs
In order for an XML push to bypass the NAT/firewall, the phone supports a
proprietary SIP NOTIFY event (aastra-xml) with or without XML content.
phone as it is done for an XML PUSH.
Reference
For more information about enabling the XML SIP Notify on the IP Phones, see
Chapter 5, the section, “XML SIP Notify Events” on page 5-319.
Polling Action URIs
Another way to reach a phone behind a NAT/firewall is to have the phone make an
XML call at periodic intervals. An Administrator can use the action uri poll to
command the phone to perform an XML call at configurable intervals.
between polls. Configuration of this feature is dynamic (no reboot required).
Reference
For more information about configuring the polling and polling interval of Action
URIs, see “Polling Action URIs” on page 5-325.
3-72
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Configuration Server Settings
The configuration server stores the firmware images, configuration files, and
software when performing software upgrades to the IP phone. An administrator
can configure the following parameters for the configuration server:
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
Download Protocol Settings
Download Protocol Download Protocol
download protocol
Protocol to use for downloading
new versions of software to the IP
phone. Valid values are:
TFTP
FTP
HTTP
HTTPS
Note: For DHCP to automatically
populate the IP address or domain
name for the download servers,
your DHCP server must support
Option 66. The IP phones also
support Option 60 and 43.
For more information, see Chapter
4, the section, “DHCP” on page 4-4.
For more information about
download protocols on the IP
Phone, see Chapter 4,
“Configuration Server Protocol” on
page 4-104.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
Primary TFTP
TFTP Server
tftp server
The TFTP server’s IP address or
qualified domain name. If DHCP is
enabled and the DHCP server
provides the information, this field is
automatically populated. Use this
parameter to change the IP address
or domain name of the TFTP server.
This will become effective after this
configuration file has been
downloaded into the phone.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-104.
Primary TFTP Path TFTP Path
tftp path
Specifies the path name for which
the configuration files reside on the
TFTP server for downloading to the
IP Phone.
If the IP phone’s configuration and
firmware files are located in a
sub-directory beneath the server’s
root directory, the relative path to
that sub-directory should be entered
in this field.
Note: Enter the path name in the
form folderX\folderX\folderX. For
example, ipphone\57i\configfiles.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-104.
Alternate TFTP
Alternate TFTP
alternate tftp server
The alternate TFTP server’s IP
address or qualified domain name.
This will become effective after this
configuration file has been
downloaded into the phone.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-104.
3-74
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
Alternate TFTP
Path
Alternate TFTP Path alternate tftp path
Specifies the path name for which
the configuration files reside on the
Alternate TFTP server for
downloading to the IP Phone.
If the IP phone’s configuration and
firmware files are located in a
sub-directory beneath the server’s
root directory, the relative path to
that sub-directory should be entered
in this field.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
Select TFTP
Use Alternate TFTP use alternate tftp
Enables or disables the alternate
TFTP server. Valid values are "0"
disabled and "1" enabled.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-104.
FTP Server
FTP Server
ftp server
The FTP server’s IP address or
network host name. This will
become effective after this
configuration file has been
downloaded into the phone.
Optional: You can also assign a
username and password for access
to the FTP server. See the following
parameters for setting username
and password.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-104.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
FTP Path
FTP Path
ftp path
Specifies the path name for which
the configuration files reside on the
FTP server for downloading to the
IP Phone.
If the IP phone’s configuration and
firmware files are located in a
sub-directory beneath the server’s
root directory, the relative path to
that sub-directory should be entered
in this field.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-104.
FTP Username
FTP Username
ftp username
The username to enter for
accessing the FTP server. This will
become effective after this
configuration file has been
downloaded into the phone.
Note: The IP Phones support
usernames containing dots (“.”).
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-104.
FTP Password
FTP Password
ftp password
The password to enter for
accessing the FTP server. This will
become effective after this
configuration file has been
downloaded into the phone.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-104.
3-76
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
HTTP Server
HTTP Server
http server
The HTTP server’s IP address. This
will become effective after this
configuration file has been
downloaded into the phone.
Optional: You can also assign an
HTTP relative path to the HTTP
server. See the next parameter
(http path).
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-104.
HTTP Path
HTTP Path
http path
Specifies the path name for which
the configuration files reside on the
HTTP server for downloading to the
IP Phone.
If the IP phone’s configuration and
firmware files are located in a
sub-directory beneath the server’s
root directory, the relative path to
that sub-directory should be entered
in this field.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-104.
HTTP Port
HTTP Port
http port
Specifies the HTTP port that the
server uses to load the
configuration to the phone over
HTTP.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-104.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
Download Server
HTTPS Server
https server
The HTTPS server’s IP address.
This will become effective after this
configuration file has been
downloaded into the phone.
Optional: You can also assign an
HTTPS relative path to the HTTPS
server. See the next parameter
(https path).
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-104.
Download Path
HTTPS Path
https path
Specifies the path name for which
the configuration files reside on the
HTTPS server for downloading to
the IP Phone.
If the IP phone’s configuration and
firmware files are located in a
sub-directory beneath the server’s
root directory, the relative path to
that sub-directory should be entered
in this field.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-104.
Download Port
HTTPS Port
https port
Specifies the HTTP port that the
server uses to load the
configuration to the phone over
HTTP.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-104.
3-78
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
Auto-Resync Settings
N/A
Mode
auto resync mode
Enables and disables the phone to
be updated automatically once a
day at a specific time in a 24-hour
period. This parameter works with
TFTP, FTP, and HTTP servers.
Notes:
1. If a user is accessing the Aastra
Web UI, they are not informed of
an auto-reboot.
2. Any changes made using the
Aastra Web UI or the IP phone
UI are not overwritten by an
auto-resync update.
Auto-resync affects the
configuration files only.
However, the settings in the
Aastra Web UI take precedence
over the IP phone UI and the
configuration files.
3. The resync time is based on the
local time of the IP phone.
4. If the IP phone is in use (not idle)
at the time of the resync check,
the reboot occurs when the
5. The automatic update feature
works with both encrypted and
plain text configuration files.
For more information, see Chapter
8, the section, “Automatic Update
(auto-resync)” on page 8-6.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
N/A
Time (24-hour)
auto resync time
Sets the time of day in a 24-hour
period for the IP phone to be
automatically updated. This
parameter works with TFTP, FTP,
and HTTP servers.
Notes:
1. The resync time is based on the
local time of the IP phone.
2. The value of 00:00 is 12:00 A.M.
3. When selecting a value for this
parameter in the Aastra Web UI,
the values are in 30-minute
increments only.
4. When entering a value for this
parameter using the
configuration files, the value can
be entered using minute values
from 00 to 59 (for example, the
auto resync time can be entered
as 02:56).
5. Auto-Resync adds up to 15
minutes random time to the
configured time. For example, if
the auto resync time parameter is
set to 02:00, the event takes
place any time between 02:00
and 02:15.
6. When the language on the phone
is set to French or Spanish, you
must enter the time in the format
"00h00" (configuration files only).
For more information, see Chapter
8, the section, “Automatic Update
(auto-resync)” on page 8-6.
3-80
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
XML Push Server List (Approved IP Addresses)
N/A
XML Push Server
List (Approved IP
Addresses)
xml application post list The HTTP server that is pushing
XML applications to the IP phone.
For more information, see Chapter
5, the section, “XML Push
Requests” on page 5-303.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Firmware Update Features
The IP phone uses a TFTP, FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS server (depending on the
protocol configured on the IP phone) to download configuration files and
firmware.
You can download the firmware stored on the configuration server in one of three
ways:
•
•
Manual firmware update using the Aastra Web UI (TFTP only).
Manual update of firmware and configuration files (by restarting the phone
via the IP phone UI or the Aastra Web UI).
Automatic update of firmware, configuration files, or both at a specific time
in a 24-hour period (via the Aastra Web UI or configuration files)
Reference
For more information about firmware update, see Chapter 8, “Upgrading the
Firmware.”
3-82
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
TLS Support
The IP Phones support a transport protocol called Transport Layer Security
(TLS) and Persistent TLS. TLS is a protocol that ensures communication
privacy between the SIP phones and the Internet. TLS ensures that no third party
may eavesdrop or tamper with any message. An Administrator can configure the
following parameters for TLS Support.
Parameter
In
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
N/A
Transport Protocol sip transport protocol
Specifies the protocol that the RTP port on the
IP phone uses to send out SIP signaling
packets. Default is USP.
Notes:
1. If you set the value of this parameter to 4
(TLS), the phone checks to see if the “sips
persistent tls” is enabled. If it is enabled, the
phone uses Persistent TLS on the connection.
If “sips persistent tls” is disabled, then the
phone uses TLS on the connection. If TLS is
used, you must specify the Root and
Intermediate Certificates, the Local Certificate,
the Private Key, and the Trusted Certificates.
MUST specify the Trusted Certificates; the
Root and Intermediate Certificates, the Local
Certificate, and the Private Key are optional.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “Transport Layer Security (TLS)” on
page 6-26.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parameter
In
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
N/A
N/A
sips persistent tls
Enables or disables the use of Persistent
Transport Layer Security (TLS).
Persistent TLS sets up the connection to the
server once and re-uses that connection for all
calls from the phone. The setup connection for
Persistent TLS is established during the
registration of the phone. If the phones are set
to use Persistent TLS, and a call is made from
the phone, this call and all subsequent calls
use the same authenticated connection. This
significantly reduces the delay time when
placing a call.
Notes:
1. Persistent TLS requires the outbound
proxy server and outbound proxy port
parameters be configured in either the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI
(Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Basic SIP
Network Settings). There can be only one
persistent TLS connection created per phone.
The phone establishes the TLS connection to
the configured outbound proxy.
Trusted Certificate file to use. The Root and
Intermediate Certificates, Local Certificate,
and Private Key files are optional.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “Transport Layer Security (TLS)” on
page 6-26.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Parameter
In
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
N/A
Root and
sips root and
intermediate
certificates
Allows you to specify the SIP Root and
Intermediate Certificate files to use when the
phone uses the TLS transport protocol to
setup a call.
Intermediate
Certificates
Filename
The Root and Intermediate Certificate files
contain one root certificate and zero or more
intermediate certificates which must be placed
in order of certificate signing with root
certificate being the first in the file. If the local
certificate is signed by some well known
certificate authority, then that authority
provides the user with the Root and
Intermediate Certificate files (most likely just
CA root certificate).
This parameter is required when configuring
TLS (optional for Persistent TLS.)
“.pem”. To create custom certificate files to use
on your IP phone, contact Aastra Technical
Support.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “Transport Layer Security (TLS)” on
page 6-26.
N/A
Local Certificate
Filename
sips local certificate
Allows you to specify the Local Certificate file
to use when the phone uses the TLS transport
protocol to setup a call.
This parameter is required when configuring
TLS (optional for Persistent TLS.)
Note: The certificate file must use the format
“.pem”. To create specific certificate files to
use on your IP phone, contact Aastra
Technical Support.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “Transport Layer Security (TLS)” on
page 6-26.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Parameter
Parameter in
In
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
Aastra Web UI
IP Phone UI
N/A
Private Key
Filename
sips private key
Allows you to specify a Private Key file to use
when the phone uses the TLS transport
protocol to setup a call.
This parameter is required when configuring
TLS (optional for Persistent TLS.)
Note: The key file must use the format “.pem”.
To create specific private key files to use on
your IP phone, contact Aastra Technical
Support.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “Transport Layer Security (TLS)” on
page 6-26.
N/A
Trusted Certificates sips trusted certificates Allows you to specify the Trusted Certificate
Filename
files to use when the phone uses the TLS
transport protocol to setup a call.
The Trusted Certificate files define a list of
trusted certificates. The phone’s trusted list
must contain the CA root certificates for all the
servers it is connecting to. For example, if the
phone is connecting to server A which has a
certificate signed by CA1, and server B which
has a certificate signed by CA2, the phone
must have CA1 root certificate and CA2 root
certificate in its Trusted Certificate file.
This parameter is required when configuring
TLS or Persistent TLS.
Note: The certificate files must use the format
“.pem”. To create custom certificate files to use
on your IP phone, contact Aastra Technical
Support.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “Transport Layer Security (TLS)” on
page 6-26.
3-86
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
802.1x Support
The IP phones support the IEEE 802.1x Protocol. The 802.1x Protocol is a
standard for passing Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) over a wired or
wireless Local Area Network (LAN).
The 802.1x Protocol on the IP phone facilitates media-level access control, and
offers the capability to permit or deny network connectivity, control LAN access,
and apply traffic policy, based on user or endpoint identity. This feature supports
both the EAP-MD5 and EAP-TLS Protocols.
Note: If configuring 802.1x using the IP Phone UI, the certificates
and private keys must already be configured and stored on the phone.
Use the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI to load certificates
and private keys.
An Administrator can configure the following parameters for the 802.1x Protocol.
Parameter
In
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
EAP-MD5
802.1x
Mode
EAP Type
Identity
eap-type
identity
Specifies the type of authentication to use on
the IP Phone.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “802.1x Support” on page 6-31.
Identity
Specifies the identity or username used for
authenticating the phone.
Note: The value you enter for this parameter
also displays in the Aastra Web UI at the path
Advanced Settings->
802.1x Support->General->Identity
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “802.1x Support” on page 6-31.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Parameter
Parameter in
In
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
Aastra Web UI
IP Phone UI
MD5
Password
MD5 Password
md5 password
Specifies the password used for the MD5
authentication of the phone.
Note: The value you enter for this parameter
also displays in the Aastra Web UI at the path
Advanced Settings->
802.1x Support->EAP-MD5 Settings->MD5
Password. The password displays as “*******”.
section, “802.1x Support” on page 6-31.
Enable
PassThru
Port
PC Port PassThru
Enable/Disable
pc port passthrough
enabled
Enables or disables the PC port on the phone
to be used for 802.1x authentication support.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
EAP-TLS
802.1x
Mode
EAP Type
Identity
eap type
identity
Specifies the type of authentication to use on
the IP Phone.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “802.1x Support” on page 6-31.
Identity
Specifies the identity or username used for
authenticating the phone.
Note: The value you enter for this parameter
also displays in the Aastra Web UI at the path
Advanced Settings->
802.1x Support->General->Identity
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
N/A
Root and
802.1x root and
intermediate
certificates
Specifies the file name that contains the root
and intermediate certificates related to the
local certificate.
Intermediate
Certificates
Filename
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “802.1x Support” on page 6-31.
3-88
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Parameter
In
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
N/A
Local Certificate
Filename
802.1x local certificate Specifies the file name that contains the local
certificate.
section, “802.1x Support” on page 6-31.
N/A
N/A
Private Key
Filename
802.1x private key
Specifies the file name that contains the
private key.
section, “802.1x Support” on page 6-31.
Trusted Certificates 802.1x trusted
Filename
Specifies the file name that contains the
trusted certificates.
certificates
section, “802.1x Support” on page 6-31.
Enable
PassThru
Port
PC Port PassThru
Enable/Disable
pc port passthrough
enabled
Enables or disables the PC port on the phone
to be used for 802.1x authentication support.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “802.1x Support” on page 6-31.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Troubleshooting
The Troubleshooting feature in the Aastra Web UI provides tasks that a system
administrator can perform on the IP phones for troubleshooting purposes. Using
this feature, a system administrator can:
•
•
•
•
•
Assign an IP address and IP port in which to save log files
Filter the logs according to severity that get reported to log files
Save the current local configuration file to a specified location
Save the current server configuration file to a specified location
Show task and stack status (including “Free Memory”and “Maximum
Memory Block Size”)
•
Enable/disable a WatchDog task
Aastra Technical Support can then use the information gathered to perform
troubleshooting tasks.
Reference
For more information about troubleshooting on the IP Phones, see Chapter 9,
“Troubleshooting.”
3-90
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
3-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
About this chapter
Chapter 4
Configuring Network and
Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)
Features
About this chapter
Introduction
This chapter provides the information required to configure the Network and
Global SIP features on the IP Phone. These features are password protected on the
IP Phone UI and the Aastra Web UI. This chapter also includes procedures for
configuring the Network and Global SIP features via the configuration files, the
IP Phone UI, and the Aastra Web UI where applicable.
Note: The IP Phone User Interface (UI) procedures in the remainder of
this Guide use the keys on the 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and/or 57i CT
when configuring Administrator Options. For information on using the
9143i, 51i, and 53i keys to configure the Administrator Options, see
Chapter 2, the section, “Using the Options Key” on page 2-5.
Topics
Topic
Page
Overview
page 4-3
page 4-4
page 4-4
Network Settings
Basic Network Settings
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
About this chapter
Topic
Page
Advanced Network Settings
page 4-26
page 4-66
page 4-67
page 4-80
page 4-89
page 4-99
page 4-104
page 4-104
Global SIP Settings
Basic SIP Settings
Advanced SIP Settings (optional)
Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) Settings
Autodial Settings
Configuration Server Protocol
Configuring the Configuration Server Protocol
4-2
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Overview
Overview
An administrator can configure the IP Phone Network and SIP options from the
options are password protected in both the IP phone UI and the Aastra Web UI.
Note: An administrator has the option of enabling and disabling the use
of password protection in the IP phone UI. This is configurable using the
configuration files only. For more information about this feature, see
Appendix A, the section “Password Settings” on page A-14.
The procedures in this section include configuring from the IP phone UI and the
Aastra Web UI. To configure the IP phones using the configuration files, see
Appendix A, “Configuration Parameters.”
To configure the phone using the IP phone UI, you must enter an administrator
password. To configure the phone using the Aastra Web UI, you must enter an
administrator username and password.
password is "22222".
References
For configuring the IP phone at the Asterisk IP PBX, see Appendix C,
“Configuring the IP Phone at the Asterisk IP PBX.”
For sample configuration files, see Appendix D, “Sample Configuration Files.”
These sample files include basic parameters required to register the IP phone at
the PBX.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
Network Settings
This section describes the basic network settings on the IP phone which include
configuring for:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
DHCP
IP Address (of phone)
Subnet Mask (of phone)
Gateway
Primary DNS
Secondary DNS
LAN Port
PC Port
Basic Network Settings
DHCP
The IP phone is capable of querying a DHCP server, allowing a network
administrator a centralized and automated method of configuring various network
parameters for the phone. If DHCP is enabled, the IP phone requests the following
network information:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Subnet Mask
Gateway (i.e. router)
Domain Name Server (DNS)
Network Time Protocol Server
IP Address
TFTP Server
TFTP Path
FTP Server
4-4
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
FTP Path
HTTP Server
HTTP Path
HTTP Port
HTTPS Server
HTTPS Path
HTTPS Port
The network administrator chooses which of these parameters (if any) are
supplied to the IP phone by the DHCP server. The administrator must configure
the phone manually to provide any required network parameters not supplied by
the DHCP server.
DHCP Options 60, 66, and 43 Server Configurations
Option 66
The IP Phones support download protocols according to RFC2131 and RFC1541
(TFTP, FTP, HTTP,. HTTPS) to support DHCP option 66. Option 66 is part of the
DHCP Offer message that the DHCP server generates to tell the phone which
configuration server it should use to download new firmware and configuration
files.
For DHCP to automatically populate the IP address or domain name for the
servers, your DHCP server must support Option 66. Option 66 is responsible for
forwarding the server’s IP address or domain name to the phone automatically. If
your DHCP server does not support Option 66, you must manually enter the IP
address or domain name for your applicable configuration server into your IP
phone configuration.
Options 60 and 43
The Aastra phones also support Option 60 and Option 43 as per RFC 2132.
Option 60 (Vendor Class Identifier) provides the DHCP server with a unique
identifier for each phone model. This enables a system administrator to send the
phone a customized Server Configuration in option 43.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
The table below lists the identifier values for each phone model.
Model
Identifier Value
9143i
9480i
9480i CT
51i
AastraIPPhone9143i
AastraIPPhone9480i
AastraIPPhone9480iCT
AastraIPPhone51i
AastraIPPhone53i
AastraIPPhone55i
AastraIPPhone57i
AastraIPPhone57iCT
53i
55i
57i
57i CT
The System administrator can use the Vendor Class Identifier to send the phone a
customized Server Configuration in option 43 (Vendor-Specific information).
Note: If Aastra IP Phones receive the server configuration from both
DHCP Option 66 and DHCP Option 43, then Option 43 takes precedence
over Option 66.
Using Option 43 to Customize the IP Phone
A System Administrator can customize the IP Phone(s) in the network by entering
a text string in the phone’s configuration files. The following is an Option 43
example using Linux.
On the startup of the phones, when the DHCP server receives the request with the
information in this example, it allows the 57i phones to use FTP and the 57i CT
phones to use TFTP from the same server.
4-6
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
Linux Example
A System Administrator can enter the following in the Aastra IP Phone
configuration file:
option space AastraIPPhone57i;
option AastraIPPhone57i.cfg-server-name code 02 = text;
option space AastraIPPhone57iCT;
option AastraIPPhone57iCT.cfg-server-name code 02 = text;
Subnet 192.168.1.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 {
class "vendor-class-57i" {
match if option vendor-class-identifier="AastraIPPhone57i";
vendor-option-space AastraIPPhone57i;
option AastraIPPhone57i.cfg-server-name "ftp://
username:[email protected]";
}
class "vendor-class-57iCT" {
match if option vendor-class-identifier="AastraIPPhone57iCT";
vendor-option-space AastraIPPhone57iCT;
option AastraIPPhone57iCT.cfg-server-name "tftp://10.10.10.1";
}
}
Your DHCP server configuration file, such as the dhcpd.conf file, may include one
of these lines to configure the configuration server protocol and the server details.
Protocol
HTTP
Format
Examples
http://<server>/<path>
https://<server>/<path>
option tftp-server-name “http://192.168.1.45”;
option tftp-server-name “http://192.168.1.45/path”;
option tftp-server-name “http://httpsvr.example.com/path”;
option tftp-server-name “https://192.168.1.45”;
HTTPS
option tftp-server-name “https://192.168.1.45/path”;
option tftp-server-name “https://httpssvr.example.com/
path”;
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
Protocol
FTP
Format
Examples
ftp://user:password@ftpserver
option tftp-server-name “ftp://192.168.1.45”;
option tftp-server-name “ftp://ftpsvr.example.com”;
(for anonymous user)
option tftp-server-name “ftp://userID:password@
ftpsvr.example.com”;
TFTP
tftp://tftpserver
option tftp-server-name “192.168.1.45”;
option tftp-server-name “tftpsvr.example.com”;
option tftp-server-name “tftp://tftpsvr.example.com”;
Using Option 12 Hostname on the IP Phone
If you set the phone to use DHCP Option 12, the phone automatically sends this
option to the configuration server. This option specifies the hostname (name of the
client). The name may or may not be qualified with the local domain name (based
on RFC 2132). See RFC 1035 for character set restrictions.
Notes:
1.
The hostname of [<model><MAC address>] automatically
populates the field on initial startup of the phone. For example, for a 53i,
the “Hostname” field is automatically populated as “53i00085D164435”,
where the model number is “53i” and the MAC address is
“00085D164435”.
2.
If the configuration server sends the hostname back to the phone in
a DHCP Reply Packet, the hostname is ignored.
An Administrator can change the “Hostname” for the DHCP Option 12 via the
configuration files, the IP Phone UI, and the Aastra Web UI.
4-8
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
Configuring DHCP Option 12 Hostname on the IP Phone
Use the following procedures to configure DHCP Option 12 Hostname on the IP
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “DHCP Option
Settings” on page A-12.
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
Press Options, and then select Administrator Menu.
On the 51i:
Press Services, and then select Options->Administrator Menu.
Select Network Settings.
2
3
4
Select Hostname.
By default, the “Hostname” field is automatically populated with [<Model><MAC address>] of your
phone (for example, 53i00085D164435).
If you want to change the hostname, enter a hostname for your phone in the “Hostname” field, then
press DONE.
Valid values are up to 64 alpha-numeric characters. You can use a fully qualified domain name if
required.
5
Restart the phone for the change to take affect.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Basic Network Settings.
Hostname
2
By default, the “Hostname” field is automatically populated with [<Model><MAC address>] of your
phone (for example, 53i00085D164435).
If you want to change the hostname, enter a hostname for your phone in the “Hostname” field.
Valid values are up to 64 alpha-numeric characters. You can use a fully qualified domain name if
required.
3
4
Click
to save your changes.
Note: Changing the “Hostname” field requires a reboot of your phone.
Click on Operation->Reset, and click RESTART.
4-10
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
Using Option 77 User Class on the IP Phone
DHCP Option 77 User Class is sent in DHCP request packets from the phone to
the configuration server. This Option 77 defines specific User Class identifiers to
convey information about a phone’s software configuration or about its user's
preferences. For example, you can use the User Class option to configure all
phones in the Accounting Department with different user preferences than the
phones in the Marketing Department. A DHCP server uses the User Class option
to choose the address pool for which it allocates an address from, and/or to select
any other configuration option.
Notes:
1.
If the User Class is not specified (left blank) in the DHCP request
packet, the phone does not send the User Class DHCP Option 77.
2.
3.
Multiple User Classes inside a DHCP Option 77 are not supported.
DHCP Option 77 may affect the precedence of DHCP Options,
dependent on the DHCP Server.
An Administrator can configure the DHCP Option 77 User Class via the
configuration files, the IP Phone UI, and the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring DHCP Option 77 User Class on the IP Phone
Use the following procedures to configure DHCP Option 77 User Class on the IP
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “DHCP Option
Settings” on page A-12.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
Press Options, and then select Administrator Menu.
On the 51i:
Press Services, and then select Options->Administrator Menu.
Select Network Settings.
2
3
4
5
Select DHCP Settings.
Select DHCP User Class.
In the “DHCP User Class” field, enter a DHCP User Class to apply to your phones, then press
DONE.
Valid values are up to 64 alpha-numeric characters. For example, “admin”.
6
Restart the phone for the change to take affect.
4-12
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings.
DHCP User Class
2
3
In the “DHCP User Class” field, enter a DHCP User Class to apply to your phones. For example,
“admin”. Valid values are up to 64 alpha-numeric characters.
Click
to save your changes.
Note: Entering a value in the “DHCP User Class” field requires a reboot of your phone.
Click on Operation->Reset, and click RESTART.
4
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
Using Options 159 and 160 on the IP Phone
In addition to DHCP options 43 and 66 already supported on the IP Phones, the
phones also support DHCP Options 159 and 160. The IP Phones use the following
order of precedence when deriving the configuration server parameters: 43, 160,
159, 66.
In addition, an administrator can override this order of precedence by setting a
configuration parameter called, dhcp config option override. You can set this
parameter via the configuration files, IP Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI. Setting
this parameter results in the phone only using the chosen DHCP option and
ignoring the other options.
Warning: Administrators should review the updated IP phone DHCP
option precedence order and configuration options to avoid potential
impact to existing Aastra IP phone deployments.
Configuring DHCP Option Override on the IP Phones
Use the following procedures to configure DHCP Option Override on the IP
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “DHCP Option
Settings” on page A-12.
4-14
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
Press Options, and then select Administrator Menu.
On the 51i:
Press Services, and then select Options->Administrator Menu.
Select Network Settings.
2
3
4
Select DHCP Settings.
Select Option Override. The following list displays:
•
•
•
•
•
None (default) - no override - uses normal precedence order of 43, 160, 159, 66.
Option 43
Option 66
Option 159
Option 160
5
6
Choose an option that you want to use to override the DHCP normal precedence order, and press
DONE.
Restart the phone for the selection to take affect.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings.
DHCP Options
2
In the “DHCP Option Override” field, select an option to use to override the normal precedence
order. Valid values are:
•
•
•
•
•
None (default) - no override - uses normal precedence order of 43, 160, 159, 66.
Option 43
Option 66
Option 159
Option 160
3
4
Click
to save your changes.
Click on Operation->Reset, and restart the phone for the changes to take affect.
4-16
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
Multiple DHCP Servers
The IP Phones can receive messages from multiple DHCP servers.
After the phone receives its first DHCP message, it listens for a specific time
period, for more DHCP messages. If the first DHCP offer contains configuration
server information (Options 43, 66, 159 or 160), then the phone times out and
continues using the first DHCP offer, without listening for more DHCP offers. If
the first DHCP message contains no configuration server information, the phone
continues to listen for other DHCP messages. If the second DHCP message
contains configuration server information and other conditions, the phone chooses
the second DHCP message over the initial DHCP message.
Note: If the DHCP Option Override parameter is enabled with a value
(Option 43, Option 66, Option 159, or Option 160), the phone checks the
override option setting before timing out.
IMPORTANT NOTE
Users currently using multiple DHCP servers on a single network could be
affected by this feature.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
DNS Caching
The IP phones have the ability to cache DNS requests according to RFC1035 and
RFC2181. The phone caches DNS lookups according to the TTL field, so that the
phone only performs another lookup for an address when the TTL expires.
Configuring DHCP
or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Network
Settings” on page A-7.
IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
2
3
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select Administrator Menu.
Enter your Administrator password.
Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.
4
5
6
7
Select Network Settings.
Select option DHCP.
Press Change to set "Use DHCP?" to "Yes" (enable) or "No" (disable).
Press Done to save the changes.
4-18
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
.
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Basic Network Settings.
2
3
Enable the "DHCP" field by checking the check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the box).
Click
to save your settings.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
Configuring Network Settings Manually
If you disable DHCP on your phone, you need to configure the following network
settings manually:
•
•
•
•
•
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway
Primary DNS
Secondary DNS
Note: If you disable DHCP on the phone, the phone uses the TFTP
protocol as the default server protocol. If you want to specify a different
protocol to use, see “Configuration Server Protocol” on page 4-104.
UI, or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Network
Settings” on page A-7.
IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
2
3
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select Administrator Menu.
Enter your Administrator password.
Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.
4
5
6
Select Network Settings.
Select IP Address and enter the IP address of the phone.
Select Subnet Mask and enter the subnet mask.
4-20
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
IP Phone UI
Step Action
7
8
9
Select Gateway and enter the gateway address.
Select DNS and enter a Primary and/or Secondary DNS server.
Press Done to save the changes.
The IP phone is manually configured.
.
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Basic Network Settings.
2
3
4
5
Enter an IP address of the phone in the IP Address field.
Enter a subnet mask in the Subnet Mask field.
Enter a gateway address in the Gateway field.
Enter a Primary DNS in the Primary DNS field, and/or a secondary DNS in the Secondary DNS
field.
6
Click
The IP phone is manually configured.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
to save your settings.
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
Configuring LAN and PC Port Negotiation
Ethernet is the computer networking technology for local area networks (LANs).
You use the LAN Port to connect to a LAN using a twisted pair 10BASE-T cable
to transmit 10BASE-T Ethernet. You use the PC Port to connect to the
configuration server (your PC).
There are two Ethernet ports on the rear of the IP phones: LAN Port and PC Port.
Using the Aastra Web UI, you can select the type of transmission you want these
ports to use to communicate over the LAN. The IP phones support each of the
following methods of transmission:
•
•
•
Auto-negotiation
Half-duplex (10Mbps or 100 Mbps)
Full-duplex (10Mbps or 100Mbps)
Auto-negotiation
Auto-negotiation is when two connected devices choose common transmission
parameters. In the auto-negotiation process, the connected devices share their
speed and duplex capabilities and connect at the highest common denominator
(HCD). Auto-negotiation can be used by devices that are capable of different
transmission rates (such as 10Mbit/sec and 100Mbit/sec), different duplex modes
(half duplex and full duplex) and/or different standards at the same speed. You can
set the LAN and PC Ports on the IP phones to auto-negotiate during transmission.
Half-Duplex (10Mbps or 100Mbps)
Half-duplex data transmission means that data can be transmitted in both
directions on a signal carrier, but not at the same time. For example, on a LAN
using a technology that has half-duplex transmission, one device can send data on
the line and then immediately receive data on the line from the same direction in
which data was just transmitted. Half-duplex transmission implies a bidirectional
line (one that can carry data in both directions). On the IP phones, you can set the
half-duplex transmission to transmit in 10Mbps or in 100Mbps.
4-22
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
Full-Duplex (10Mbps or 100Mbps)
Full-duplex data transmission means that data can be transmitted in both
directions on a signal carrier at the same time. For example, on a LAN with a
technology that has full-duplex transmission, one device can be sending data on
the line while another device is receiving data. Full-duplex transmission implies a
bidirectional line (one that can move data in both directions). On the IP phones,
you can set the full-duplex transmission to transmit in 10Mbps or in 100Mbps.
Configuring the LAN Port and PC Port
using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Network
Settings” on page A-7.
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
1
2
3
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select Administrator Menu.
Enter your Administrator password.
Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.
4
5
6
Select Network Settings.
Select Ethernet.
Select LAN Port Link.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
7
Select a negotiation method to use on port 0 and press Done. Valid values are:
•
•
•
•
•
AutoNegotiation
FullDuplex 10Mbps
FullDuplex 100Mbps
HalfDuplex 10Mbps
HalfDuplex 100Mbps
Default is AutoNegotiation.
8
9
Select PC Port Link.
Select a negotiation method to use on port 1and press Done. Valid values are:
•
•
•
•
•
AutoNegotiation
FullDuplex 10Mbps
FullDuplex 100Mbps
HalfDuplex 10Mbps
HalfDuplex 100Mbps
Default is AutoNegotiation.
10
11
Press Done (3 times) to finish configuring the configuration server protocol for the IP phone.
Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings.
Select Restart.
4-24
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Basic Network Settings.
2
3
4
In the “LAN Port” field, select a negotiation method to use on port 0. Valid values are:
•
•
•
•
•
Auto Negotiation
Full Duplex, 10Mbps
Full Duplex, 100Mbps
Half Duplex, 10Mbps
Half Duplex, 100Mbps
Default is Auto Negotiation.
In the “PC Port” field, select a negotiation method to use on port 1. Valid values are:
•
•
•
•
•
Auto Negotiation
Full Duplex, 10Mbps
Full Duplex, 100Mbps
Half Duplex, 10Mbps
Half Duplex, 100Mbps
Default is Auto Negotiation.
Click to save your settings.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
Advanced Network Settings
You can set advanced network settings on the IP phone such as, Network Address
Translation (NAT), Nortel NAT, Network Time Protocol (NTP) Time Servers,
Virtual LAN (VLAN), and Quality of Service (QoS), and Universal Plug and Play
(UPnP) using the Aastra Web UI or the configuration files.
Note: The available advanced network parameters via the IP phone UI
are NAT, Nortel NAT, UPnP, VLAN, and QoS only.
Network Address Translation (NAT)
The protocols used by all IP phones do not interoperate completely with Network
Address Translation (NAT). For the IP Phones, specific configuration parameters
allow the phone to operate while connected to a network device that enforces
NAT. The following is a sample network using a NAT proxy and relevant IP
phone configuration parameters.
4-26
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
Nortel Proxy/Registrar
The phone at IP address 10.10.10.10 is configured to register with the proxy at
63.251.195.10. Because it is a Nortel proxy, the configuration must additionally
include the "sip nortel nat support" and "sip nortel nat timer" settings, telling the
firmware to enhance the protocols with Nortel specific content.
Note: This IP phone uses RTP port 3000 (the default value) since an RTP
port was not explicitly configured.
SBC or ALG proxy/registrar
The phone at IP address 10.10.10.20 is configured to register with the proxy at
63.251.195.20. Because the proxy/registrar has session border control (SBC) or
application layer gateway (ALG) functionality, no additional IP phone
configuration is required.
Other proxy/registrars
The phone at IP address 10.10.10.30 is configured to register with the proxy at
63.251.195.30. Because this proxy/registrar is not a Nortel proxy and has no SBC
or ALG functionality, the configuration must additionally include the "sip nat ip"
and "sip nat port" settings that contain the public ip address of the NAT router and
the port used for call signaling messages. This information is embedded in
protocol messages to allow the proxy/registrar to reach the IP phone on the NAT
router private network.
NAT router configuration
You must configure the NAT router to allow signaling or media packets
containing the various UDP port values to flow between the private and public
networks that are separated by the NAT router. In the sample network, the NAT
router must not filter packets using ports 3000, 5060, 6060, 16420, and 16430.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
Nortel Networks NAT
Nortel Networks provides a proprietary solution to support connectivity to their
proxies from phones placed behind devices (such as routers or firewalls) that use
NAT. Nortel uses the SIP ping request/reply between the Nortel proxy and the
phone in order to keep the connection through the router or firewall active. A SIP
Nortel NAT timer is the interval, in seconds (default is 60), that the phone sends
SIP ping requests to the Nortel proxy.
When you use NAT in your network, a network device (usually a router) provides
a “firewall” division between the public network (usually the Internet) and the
private network, to which the IP Phones are connected. The firewall protects the
network by translating port numbers within packets between the public and
private networks. When using NAT, and an RTP packet arrives at the public side
of the firewall, it is expected to have the NAT RTP port within the packet. If the
packet contains the proper port number, the firewall changes the NAT RTP port
number in the packet to the RTP port number that the phone recognizes, and then
forwards it onto the private network. Often the router/firewall automatically
discovers these various port numbers and other information concerning public and
private sides of the network with the use of the Universal Plug and Play (UPnP)
Protocol between the phone and the router/firewall.
Configuring Nortel NAT (optional)
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Network
Address Translation (NAT) Settings” on page A-27.
4-28
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
2
3
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select Administrator Menu.
Enter your Administrator password.
Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.
4
5
6
7
8
Select Network Settings.
Select NAT Settings.
Select Nortel NAT.
Press Change to set either “Enabled” or “Disabled”.
Press Done (3 times) to finish.
Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings.
Select Restart.
9
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
.
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings.
2
3
4
Select Yes (enable) or No (disable) in the "Nortel NAT Traversal Enabled" field to enable or disable
NAT for a Nortel network.
Enter a time, in seconds, in the "Nortel NAT timer" field. Valid values are 0 to 2147483647.
Default is 60.
Click
to save your settings.
4-30
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
Configuring NAT Address and Port (optional)
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Network
Address Translation (NAT) Settings” on page A-27.
IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
2
3
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select Administrator Menu.
Enter your Administrator password.
Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.
4
Select Network Settings.
5
Select Static NAT.
6
Select NAT IP.
7
Enter a public IP address of your NAT device in dotted-decimal format.
Press Done to save the setting.
8
9
Select NAT SIP Port. Default is 51620.
Enter the public SIP signalling port number of your NAT device.
Press Done to save the setting.
10
11
12
13
14
Select NAT RTP Port.
Enter the RTP Port number of your NAT device. Default is 51720.
Press Done (4 times) to finish.
Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings.
Select Restart.
15
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
.
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings.
2
3
4
5
Enter a NAT IP address in the "NAT IP" field. The value must be entered in dotted decimal format.
For example, 0.0.0.0. The “NAT IP” is the public IP address of your NAT device.
Enter a NAT port in the "NAT SIP Port" field. Default is 51620.
The “NAT SIP Port” is the public SIP signalling port number of your NAT device.
Enter a NAT port in the "NAT RTP Port" field. Default is 51720.
The “NAT RTP Port” is the RTP Port number of your NAT device.
Click
to save your settings.
4-32
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
SIP and TLS Source Ports for NAT Traversal
A System Administrator can configure the SIP and TLS source ports on the IP
Phone. Previously, the IP phone used default values (5060 for UDP/TCP and 5061
for TLS). The two new parameters for configuring the SIP and TLS source ports
are:
•
•
sip local port
sip local tls port
You can configure the SIP and TLS source ports using the configuration files or
the Aastra Web UI. After configuring these parameters, you must reboot the
phone.
If NAT is disabled, the port number also shows in the VIA and Contact SIP
headers.
If you enable NAT, the phone uses the NAT port number (and NAT IP address) in
the Via and Contact SIP headers of SIP messages, but still use the configured
source port.
Note: By default, the IP phones use symmetric UDP signaling for
outgoing UDP SIP messages. When symmetric UDP is enabled, the IP
phone generates and listens for UDP messages using port 5060.If
symmetric UDP signaling is disabled, the phone sends from random
ports but it listens on the configured SIP local port.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
Configuring SIP and TLS Source Ports Using the Configuration Files
You use the following parameters to configure SIP and TLS ports for NAT
traversal:
•
•
sip local port
sip local tls port
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the sections:
•
•
“Local SIP UDP/TCP Port Setting” on page A-30.
“Local SIP TLS Port” on page A-30.
4-34
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
Configuring SIP and TLS Source Ports Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to configure SIP and TLS source ports using the
Aastra Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings.
.
“Local SIP TLS Port” Parameter
“Local SIP UDP/TCP Port” Parameter
2
The “Local SIP UDP/TCP Port” field has a default value of 5060. Change this value if required to a
value greater than 1024 and less than 65535.
Note: It is recommended that you avoid the conflict RTP port range in case of a UDP transport.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
Aastra Web UI
3
4
The “Local SIP TLS Port” field has a default value of 5061. Change this value if required to a value
greater than 1024 and less than 65535.
Note: It is recommended that you avoid the conflict with any TCP ports being used. For example:
WebUI HTTP server on 80/tcp and HTTPS on 443/tcp.
Click
to save your changes.
HTTPS Client/Server Configuration
HTTPS is a Web protocol that encrypts and decrypts user page requests as well as
the pages that are returned by the Web server. HTTPS uses Secure Socket Layer
(SSL) or Transport Layer Security (TLS) as a sublayer under its regular HTTP
application layering. SSL is a commonly-used protocol for managing the
security of a message transmission on the Internet. It uses a 40-bit key size
for the RC4 stream encryption algorithm, which is considered an adequate degree
of encryption for commercial exchange. TLS is a protocol that ensures privacy
between communicating applications and their users on the Internet. When a
server and client communicate, TLS ensures that no third party may eavesdrop or
tamper with any message. TLS is the successor to SSL.
Note: HTTPS uses port 443 instead of HTTP port 80 in its interactions
with the TCP/IP lower layer.
When an HTTPS client opens and closes its TCP socket, the SSL software
respectively handshakes upon opening and disconnects upon closing from the
HTTPS server. The main HTTPS client functions are:
•
•
Downloading of configuration files and firmware images.
Downloading of script files based on an “HTTPS://” URL supplied by a
softkey definition.
4-36
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
The HTTPS server provides HTTP functionality over secure connections. It
coexists with the HTTP server but has its own set of tasks. The main HTTPS
server functions are:
•
•
Delivery of web page content to a browser client over a secure connection.
Execution of HTTP GET and POST requests received over a secure
connection.
Using the configuration files, the IP phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI, you can
configure the following regarding HTTPS:
•
•
•
Specify HTTPS security client method to use (TSLv1 or SSLv3)
Enable or disable HTTP to HTTPS server redirect function
HTTPS server blocking of XML HTTP POSTS to the phone
Configuring HTTPS Client and Server Settings
Use the following procedures to configure the HTTPS client and server for
the IP phones.
Note: To enable or disable the IP phones to use the HTTPS protocol as
the configuration server, see the section, “Configuring the Configuration
Server Protocol” on page 4-104.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “HTTPS Client
and Server Settings” on page A-31.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
2
3
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select Administrator Menu.
Enter your Administrator password.
Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.
4
5
Select Configuration Server.
Select HTTPS Settings.
Configure HTTPS Client
6
7
8
Select HTTPS Client.
Select Client Method.
Press Change to select a client method to use for HTTPS. Valid values are:
•
•
SSL 3.0 (default)
TLS 1.0
9
Press Done to save the changes.
Configure HTTPS Server
10
11
12
Select HTTPS Server.
Select HTTP->HTTPS.
Press Change to select “Yes” or “No”. Default is “No”.
Enabling this feature redirects the HTTP protocol to HTTPS.
13
14
15
Press Done to save the changes.
Select XML HTTP POSTs.
Press Change to select “Yes” or “No”. Default is “No”.
Enabling this feature blocks XML HTTP POSTs from the IP Phone.
16
17
Press Done (4 times) to finish.
Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings.
Select Restart.
4-38
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
.
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings.
2
Select an HTTPS client method to use from the HTTPS Client Method field. Valid values are:
SSL 3.0 (default)
TSL 1.0
3
4
Enable HTTP to HTTPS redirect by checking the HTTPS Server - Redirect HTTP to HTTPS field
check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the check box). Default is disabled.
Enable the blocking of XML HTTP POSTs by the HTTPS server by checking the HTTPS Server -
Block XML HTTP POSTs field check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the check box). Default is
disabled.
5
Click
to save your settings.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
HTTPS Server Certificate Validation
The HTTPS client on the IP Phones support validation of HTTPS certificates.
This feature supports the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Verisign, GeoTrust, and Thawte signed certificates
User-provided certificates
Checking of hostnames
Checking of certificate expiration
Ability to disable any or all of the validation steps
Phone displays a message when a certificate is rejected (except on check-sync
operations)
All validation options are enabled by default.
Certificate Management
Aastra Provided Certificates
The phones come with root certificates from Verisign, GeoTrust, and Thawte
pre-loaded.
User Provided Certificates
The administrator has the option to upload their own certificates onto the phone.
The phone downloads these certificates in a file of .PEM format during boot time
after configuration downloads. The user-provided certificates are saved on the
phone between firmware upgrades but are deleted during a factory default. The
download of the User-provided certificates are based on a filename specified in
the configuration parameter, https user certificates (Trusted Certificates
Filename in the Aastra Web UI; User-provided certificates are not configurable
via the IP Phone UI).
Note: Certificates that are signed by providers other than Verisign,
GeoTrust or Thwate do not verify on the phone by default. The user can
overcome this by adding the root certificate of their certificate provider to
the use-provided certificate .PEM file.
4-40
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
Certificate Validation
Certificate validation is enabled by default. Validation occurs by checking that the
certificates are well formed and signed by one of the certificates in the trusted
certificate set. It then checks the expiration date on the certificate, and finally,
compares the name in the certificate with the address for which it was connected.
If any of these validation steps fail, the connection is rejected. Certificate
validation is controlled by three parameters which you can configure via the
configuration files, the IP Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI:
•
•
https validate certificates - Enables/disables validation
https validate hostname - Enables/disables the checking of the certificate
commonName against the server name.
•
https validate expires - Enables/disables the checking of the expiration date
on the certificate.
User Interface
Certificate Rejection
When the phone rejects a certificate, it displays, "Bad Certificate" on the LCD.
An Administrator can configure HTTPS Server Certificate Validation using the
configuration files, the IP Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring HTTPS Server Certificate Validation
Use the following procedures to configure the HTTPS server certificate
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “HTTPS Server
Certificate Validation Settings” on page A-33.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
Press Options, and then select Administrator Menu.
On the 51i:
Press Services, and then select Options->Administrator Menu.
Select Configuration Server.
2
3
Select HTTPS Settings->Cert. Validation.
The following list displays:
•
•
•
Enable
Check Expires
Check Hostnames
Enable/Disable HTTPS Server Certificate Validation
4
5
Select Enable.
Press Change to toggle the “Enable” field to “Yes” or “No”.
Note: If you are using HTTPS as a configuration method, and use a self signed certificate, you
must set this field to “No” before upgrading to Release 2.3 of the IP Phones.
6
Press DONE to save the change and return to the Certificates screen.
Note: This change is immediately applied after pressing DONE.
Enable/Disable HTTPS Validate Certificate Expiration
7
8
Select Check Expires.
Press Change to toggle the “Check Expires” field to “Yes” or “No”.
Notes:
1. This change is immediately applied after pressing DONE.
2. If the “Check Expires” parameter is set to Yes, the clock on the phone must be set for the phone
to accept the certificates.
4-42
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
9
Press DONE to save the change and return to the Certificates screen.
Note: This change is immediately applied after pressing DONE.
Enable/Disable HTTPS Validate Hostnames
10
11
12
Select Check Hostnames.
Press Change to toggle the “Check Hostnames” field to “Yes” or “No”.
Press DONE to save the change and return to the Certificates screen.
Note: This change is immediately applied after pressing DONE.
13
Press
to exit the Options Menu and return to the idle screen.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->HTTPS Settings.
HTTPS Validation
Certificate
Parameters
2
The “Validate Certificates” field is enabled by default. To disable validation of certificates, click
the check mark in the box to clear the check mark.
When this parameter is enabled, the HTTPS client performs validation on SSL certificates before
accepting them.
Notes:
1. This parameter is immediately applied after clicking the SAVE SETTINGS button.
2. If you are using HTTPS as a configuration method, and use a self signed certificate, you
must disable (uncheck) this field before upgrading to Release 2.3 of the IP Phones.
3
The “Check Certificate Expiration” field is enabled by default. To disable validation of certificate
expiration, click the check mark in the box to clear the check mark.
When this parameter is enabled, the HTTPS client verifies whether or not a certificate has expired
prior to accepting the certificate.
Notes:
1. This parameter is immediately applied after clicking the SAVE SETTINGS button.
2. If the “Check Certificates Expiration” parameter is set to Yes, the clock on the phone must be
set for the phone to accept the certificates.
4
The “Check Certificate Hostnames” field is enabled by default. To disable validation of
hostnames, click the check mark in the box to clear the check mark.
Note: This parameter is immediately applied after clicking the SAVE SETTINGS button.
4-44
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
Aastra Web UI
5
If you require the download of User-provided certificates in a .PEM formatted file, enter the file
name in the format <filename.pem> in the “Trusted Certificates Filename” field. For example:
trustedCerts.pem
This parameter specifies a file name for a .PEM file located on the configuration server. This file
contains the User-provided certificates in PEM format. These certificates are used to validate peer
certificates.
Notes:
1. You must disable the “Validate Certificates” field in order for the phone to accept the
User-provided certificates.
2. This parameter requires you restart the phone in order for it to take affect.
6
7
Click
to save your changes.
If you entered a filename in the “Trusted Certificates Filename” field, click on Operation->Reset,
and restart the phone for the changes to take affect.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) (for remote phones)
UPnP is a standard that uses Internet protocols to enable devices to be plugged
into a network and automatically know about each other. With UPnP, when a user
plugs a device into the network, the device configures itself, acquires a TCP IP
address, and uses a discovery protocol based on the Internet's HTTP or HTTPS
URL to announce its presence on the network to other devices.
This method of device discovery on a network is called “Universal Plug and Play”
or UPnP. If you enable UPnP, and the phone is discovered on the network, port
mappings are set up between the phone and the Internet Gateway Device (IGD).
The phone controls the opening, closing, and polling of ports on the IGD. HTTP
and SIP use a single port each. RTP/RTCP uses a range of ports.
The UPnP manager performs its functions when you set the phone to remote
mode. When you switch the phone back to local mode, the UPnP manager
removes any open port mappings and shuts itself down. If you boot the phone in
remote mode, the UPnP manager initializes after the phone obtains an IP address
and before a SIP registration is sent out. If you want to manually configure your
NAT, you must disable UPnP on the remote mode phone.
Note: Enabling UPnP allows the IP phones to access the Internet even if
a firewall has been set on the IGD. This allows the phone to send and
receive SIP calls and XML pushes without interruption. UPnP does not
work with multiple firewalls.
You can enable UPnP on remote IP phones using the configuration files, the IP
Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI. Using the configuration files, you can enable
UPnP using the following parameters:
•
•
•
upnp manager
upnp gateway
sip nat rtp port
The “upnp manager” parameter enables or disables UPnP. The “upnp gateway”
parameter is the IP address or qualified domain name of the Internet gateway or
router that stores the port mappings. In the event a phone using UPnP is rebooted,
it will still have the previously set port mappings on the gateway. The “sip nat rtp
port” parameter specifies the RTP port range on the gateway.
4-46
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
A User or Administrator can specify UPnP on specific lines using the
Reference
For more information about enabling/disabling UPnP Mapping on specific lines,
see Chapter 5, the section, “UPnP Mapping Lines (for remote phones)” on
page 5-83.
Configuring UPnP (optional)
Use the following procedures to configure UPnP on the IP phones.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “UPnP Settings”
on page A-35.
IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
2
3
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select Administrator Menu.
Enter your Administrator password.
Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.
4
5
6
7
Select Network Settings.
Select NAT Settings.
Select UPnP.
Press Change to select “Yes” or “No”. Default is “No”.
This field enables or disables the use of UPnP on the IP Phone.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
IP Phone UI
Step Action
8
Press Done (3 times) to save the changes.
Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings
Select Restart.
9
.
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings.
4-48
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
2
The “UPnP” field is disabled by default. To enable UPnP, place a check in the “Enabled” box.
Uncheck the box to disable this field. This field enables and disable UPnP on the IP phone.
3
Click
to save your settings.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
Virtual LAN (optional)
Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) is a feature on the IP phone that allows for
multiple logical Ethernet interfaces to send outgoing RTP packets over a single
physical Ethernet as described in IEEE Std 802.3. On the IP phone, you configure
a VLAN ID that associates with the physical Ethernet port.
By configuring specific VLAN parameters, the IP phones have the capability of
adding and removing tags, and processing the ID and priority information
contained within the tag.
Note: All latest VLAN functionality is backwards compatible with IP
Phone Releases 1.3 and 1.3.1.
VLAN on the IP phones is disabled by default. When you enable VLAN, the IP
phone provides defaults for all VLAN parameters. If you choose to change these
parameters, you can configure them using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI,
or the Aastra Web UI.
The following sections describe the VLAN features you can configure on the IP
phones.
Type of Service (ToS), Quality of Service (QoS), and DiffServ QoS
ToS is an octet as a field in the standard IP header. It is used to classify the traffic
of the different QoSs.
QoS provides service differentiation between IP packets in the network. This
service differentiation is noticeable during periods of network congestion (for
example, in case of contention for resources) and results in different levels of
network performance.
Port 0 is the Ethernet LAN Port connected to the network. Port 1 is the Ethernet
PC Port used for passthrough to a PC.
Differentiated Service (DiffServ) QoS is class-based where some classes of traffic
receive preferential handling over other traffic classes.
The Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) value is stored in the first six bits
of the ToS field. Each DSCP specifies a particular per-hop behavior that is
applied to a packet.
4-50
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
The following parameters allow an administrator to configure ToS, QoS, and
DiffServ QoS for VLAN:
Parameters in Configuration Files
Parameters in Aastra Web UI
Global
tagging enabled
priority non-ip
LAN Port
VLAN enable
Priority, Non-IP Packet
vlan id
VLAN ID
tos priority map
tos priority map
tos priority map
PC Port
SIP Priority
RTP Priority
RTCP Priority
vlan id port 1
QoS eth port 1 priority
VLAN ID
Priority
Notes:
1. In order for the software to successfully maintain connectivity with a
network using VLAN functionality, the IP phone reboots if you modify
the "tagging enabled" (VLAN Enable in the Web UI), "vlan id", or
"vlan id port 1" parameters.
2. When the LAN Port (vlan id) and the PC Port (vlan id port 1)
parameters have the same value, VLAN functionality is compatible with
earlier IP phone software releases.
If you set the PC Port (vlan id port 1) to 4095, all untagged packets are
sent to this port. For configuring this feature via the Phone UI and the
Aastra Web UI, see “Configuring VLAN (optional)” on page 4-56. For
configuring this feature using the configuration files, see Appendix A, the
section, “Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) Settings” on page A-36.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
DSCP Range/VLAN Priority Mapping
DSCP bits in the ToS field of the IP header are set for RTP, RTCP, and SIP packets
using either the default values or the values configured via the "tos sip", "tos rtp",
and "tos rtcp" parameters.
When the VLAN global configuration parameter, "tagging enabled" is set to 1,
VLAN priority for IP packets is mapped to the DSCP value instead of a single
non-IP packets using the "priority non-ip" parameter.
Since the default DSCP settings for SIP, RTP, and RTCP are 26, 46, and 46
respectively, this results in corresponding default VLAN priorities of 3 for SIP, 4
for RTP, and 4 for RTCP (based on the settings in the table “DSCP Range/VLAN
Priority” on page 4-52).
You can change the default parameters by modifying just the DSCP values, just
the VLAN priority values, or by modifying all values.
The following table shows the DSCP range/VLAN priority mapping.
DSCP Range/VLAN Priority
DSCP
Range
0-7
VLAN Priority
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8-15
16-23
24-31
32-39
40-47
48-55
56-63
4-52
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
The following table identifies the default DSCP of protocols.
Protocol
Name
Default DSCP
Values in the
ToS Field
sip
rtp
26
46
46
rtcp
Configuring Type of Service (ToS)/DSCP (optional)
Use the following procedures to configure ToS/DSCP on the IP phone.
Note: ToS/DSCP is enabled by default. The SIP, RTP, and RTCP
parameters show defaults of 26, 46, and 46, respectively. Use the
following procedures to change these settings if required.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Type of Service
(ToS)/DSCP Settings” on page A-42.
IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
2
3
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select Administrator Menu.
Enter your Administrator password.
Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.
4
5
Select Network Settings.
Select Type of Service DSCP.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
IP Phone UI
Step Action
6
Select Type of Service SIP.
or
Select Type of Service RTP.
or
Select Type of Service RTCP.
7
Enter a value for “Type of Service SIP”. Default is 26.
or
Enter a value for “Type of Service RTP”. Default is 46.
or
Enter a value for “Type of Service RTCP”. Default is 46.
Valid values are 0 to 63.
Note: If you change the ToS/DSCP setting for a Protocol, and VLAN is enabled, you will need to map
the applicable priority to the Protocol setting as shown in the table “DSCP Range/VLAN Priority” on
page 4-52 For more information, see the section “Configuring VLAN (optional)” on page 4-56.
8
9
Press Done (3 times) to save the changes.
Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings
Select Restart.
4-54
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
.
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Type of Service,DSCP.
2
3
Select a Protocol field:
•
“SIP”
or
•
or
•
“RTP”
“RTCP”
Enter a value from 0 to 63. Default values are as follows:
SIP = 26
RTP = 46
RTCP = 46
Note: If you change the ToS/DSCP setting for a Protocol, and VLAN is enabled, you will need to map
the applicable priority to the Protocol setting as shown in the table “DSCP Range/VLAN Priority” on
page 4-56 For more information, see the section “Configuring VLAN (optional)” on page 4-56.
4
Click
to save your settings.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
Configuring VLAN (optional)
Use the following procedures to configure VLAN on the IP phone.
Note: VLAN is disabled by default. When you enable VLAN, the IP
phones use the default settings for each VLAN parameter. You can
change the default settings if required using the following procedure.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Virtual Local
Area Network (VLAN) Settings” on page A-36.
IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
2
3
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select Administrator Menu.
Enter your Administrator password.
Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.
4
Select Network Settings.
Select VLAN Settings.
5
To globally enable/disable VLAN and set priority for non-IP packets:
6
Select VLAN Enable.
7
Press Change to set VLAN Enable to “Yes” to enable or “No” to disable. Default is “No”.
8
Press Done to save the changes.
Select Phone VLAN.
9
10
11
Select VLAN Priority.
Select Other and enter a non-IP priority value from 0 to 7 for non-IP packets.
Default for this field is 5.
12
Press Done (3 times) to return to the VLAN Settings menu.
4-56
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
IP Phone UI
Step Action
To set VLAN ID and priority for LAN Port (Port 0):
13
14
Select Phone VLAN.
Select Phone VLAN ID and enter a value from 1 to 4094 to specify the VLAN ID for the LAN Port.
Default is 1.
15
16
17
Press Done to save the change.
Select VLAN Priority.
Select one of the following VLAN Protocols:
•
•
•
SIP Priority
RTP Priority
RTCP Priority
18
Enter a VLAN priority value from 0 to 7 for the associated Protocol. Default values for each Protocol
are:
SIP Priority = 3
RTP Priority = 5
RTCP Priority = 5
19
Press Done (3 times) to return to the VLAN Settings menu.
To set VLAN ID and priority for PC Port (Port 1):
20
21
22
Select PC Port VLAN.
Select PC Port VLAN ID.
Enter a value from 1 to 4095 to specify the VLAN ID for the PC Port.
Default is 1.
Note: If you set the PC Port VLAN ID (Port 1) to 4095, all untagged packets are sent to this port. The
following is an example of configuring the phone on a VLAN where all untagged packets are sent to
the PC Port (passthrough port).
Example
You enable tagging on the phone port as normal but set the passthrough port (PC Port) to
4095. The following example sets the phone to be on VLAN 3 but the passthrough port is
configured as untagged.
VLAN Settings->VLAN Enable: Yes
VLAN Settings->Phone VLAN->Phone VLAN ID: 3
VLAN Settings->PC Port VLAN->PC Port VLAN ID: 4095
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
IP Phone UI
Step Action
23
24
25
Press Done to save the change.
Select PC Port Priority.
Select a PC Port VLAN priority value from 0 to 7 for the PC Port.
Default is 0.
26
27
Press Done (4 times) to save the changes.
Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings
Select Restart.
4-58
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
.
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->VLAN.
1
To globally enable/disable VLAN and set priority for non-IP packets:
2
Enable VLAN by checking the VLAN Enable field check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the
check box).
3
With VLAN enabled, select the priority (0 to 7) for non-IP packets in the Priority, Non-IP Packet field.
To set VLAN ID and priority for the LAN Port (Port 0):
4
5
Enter a VLAN ID value from 1 to 4094 in the VLAN ID field. Default is 1.
Choose a VLAN Protocol (SIP Priority, RTP Priority, and/or RTCP Priority), and select a priority for
the associated Protocol. Valid values are 0 to 7, Defaults are as follows:
SIP Priority = 3
RTP Priority = 5
RTCP Priority = 5
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
To set VLAN ID and priority for the PC Port (Port 1):
6
Enter a VLAN ID value from 1 to 4095 in the VLAN ID field. Default is 1.
Note: If you set the PC Port VLAN ID (Port 1) to 4095, all untagged packets are sent to this PC Port.
The following is an example of configuring the phone on a VLAN where all untagged packets are sent
to the passthrough port.
Example
You enable tagging as normal, enter a value for the LAN Port VLAN ID, and then set the PC
Port VLAN ID to 4095. The following example sets the phone to be on VLAN 3 but the PC Port
VLAN ID is configured as untagged..
7
8
Select a VLAN priority value from 0 to 7 for the PC Port in the Priority field. Default is 0.
Click
to save your settings.
4-60
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
RPORT
The Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) operates over UDP and TCP. When used
with UDP, responses to requests are returned to the source address from which the
request came, and returned to the port written into the topmost “Via” header of the
request. However, this behavior is not desirable when the client is behind a
Network Address Translation (NAT) or firewall.
A parameter created for the “Via” header called “Rport” in RFC 3581, allows a
client to request that the server send the response back to the source IP address
and the port from which the request came.
When you enable “Rport, the phone always uses symmetric signaling (listens on
the port used for sending requests).
An Administrator can configure “Rport” using the configuration files or the
Aastra Web UI.
Configuring Rport Using the Configuration Files
Use the following parameter to configure Rport on your phone.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Rport Setting” on
page A-29.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
Configuring Rport Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to configure Rport on your phone using the Aastra
Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings.
Rport
Parameter
2
3
In the "Advanced Network Settings" section, enable the "Rport (RFC3581" field by checking the
check box. (Disable Rport by unchecking the box).
“Rport” in RFC 3581, allows a client to request that the server send the response back to the source
IP address and the port from which the request came.
Click
to save your changes.
4-62
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
Network Time Servers
Network Time Protocol (NTP) is a protocol that the IP phone uses to synchronize
the phone clock time with a computer (configuration server) in the network.
To use NTP, you must enable it using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
You can specify up to three time servers in your network.
Note: The IP phones support NTP version 1.
Configuring NTP Servers (optional)
Use the following procedure to enable/disable and configure the NTP servers
using the configuration files.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Time Server
Settings” on page A-43.
Use the following procedure to enable/disable the NTP server using the IP Phone
UI.
IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
2
3
4
5
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select Preferences.
Select Time and Date.
Select Time Server.
Enter your Administrator password.
Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.
6
7
Select Timer Server 1, Timer Server 2, or Time Server 3.
Note: The Time Servers are disabled by default.
To set a Time Server, press Enable. (Press Disable to disable a Time Server.)
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
IP Phone UI
Step Action
8
9
Enter the IP Address (in dotted decimal) or qualified domain name for the Time Server.
Press Done to save the change.
Use the following procedure to enable/disable and configure the NTP Servers
using the Aastra Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings.
2
Enable the "NTP Time Servers" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the box). Default is disabled.
4-64
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
3
Enter an IP address or qualified domain name in the "Time Server 1", "Time Server 2", and/or
"Time Server 3" field(s) to specify the location of the NTP time server.
4
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings
Global SIP Settings
Description
The IP phone uses the information in the Global Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)
settings to register at the IP PBX.
The IP phone configuration defines network and user account parameters that
apply globally to all SIP lines. Since not all SIP lines are necessarily hosted using
the same IP-PBX/server or user account, additional sets of per-line parameters
can also be defined for network and user account.
You configure and modify these parameters and associated values using the
configuration files, the IP phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI. The Aastra Web UI
and configuration file methods configure global and per-line SIP settings on the IP
phone. The IP phone UI configures global SIP settings only.
On the IP Phones, you can configure Basic and Advanced SIP Settings. The Basic
Settings include other features you can configure on the IP Phone.
For more information about Basic SIP Settings (for authentication and network),
see “Basic SIP Settings” on page 4-67.
For more information bout Advanced SIP Settings, see “Advanced SIP Settings
(optional)” on page 4-80.
4-66
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Global SIP Settings
Basic SIP Settings
Specific parameters are configurable on a global and per-line basis. You can also
configure specific parameters using the IP Phone UI, the Aastra Web UI, or the
configuration files. If you have a proxy server or have a SIP registrar present at a
different location than the PBX server, the SIP parameters may need to be
changed.
The IP phones allow you to define different SIP lines with the same account
information (i.e., same user name) but with different registrar and proxy IP
addresses. This feature works with Registration, Subscription, and Notify
processing. This feature also works with the following types of calls: incomint,
outgoing, Broadsoft Shared Call Appearance (SCA), Bridged Line Appearance
(BLA), conference, transfer, blind transfer.
The following tables identify the SIP global and per-line, authentication and
network parameters on the IP phones.
SIP Global Parameters
IP Phone UI Parameters
Aastra Web UI Parameters
Configuration File Parameters
SIP Global Authentication Parameters
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Screen Name
N/A
User Name
Display Name
Auth Name
Password
N/A
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Screen Name
Screen Name 2
Phone Number
Caller ID
Authentication Name
Password
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
sip screen name
sip screen name 2
sip user name
sip display name
sip auth name
sip password
sip bla number
sip mode
BLA Number
Line Mode
N/A
sip vmail
SIP Global Network Parameters
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Proxy Server
Proxy Port
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Registrar Server
Registrar Port
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Proxy Server
Proxy Port
Backup Proxy Server
Backup Proxy Port
Outbound Proxy Server
Outbound Proxy Port
Registrar Server
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
sip proxy ip
sip proxy port
sip backup proxy ip
sip backup proxy port
sip outbound proxy
sip outbound proxy port
sip registrar ip
Registrar Port
sip registrar port
Backup Registrar Server
Backup Registrar Port
Registration Period
Conference Server URI
(see Chapter 5)
sip backup registrar ip
sip backup registrar port
sip registration period
sip centralized conf
(see Chapter 5)
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings
Reference
For more information about centralized conferencing, see Chapter 5, the section,
“Centralized Conferencing (for Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers)” on page 5-341.
SIP Per-Line Parameters
IP Phone UI Parameters
Aastra Web UI Parameters
Configuration File Parameters
SIP Per-Line Authentication Parameters
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Screen Name
N/A
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Screen Name
Screen Name 2
Phone Number
Caller ID
Authentication Name
Password
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
sip lineN screen name
sip lineN screen name 2
sip lineN user name
sip lineN display name
sip lineN auth name
sip lineN password
sip lineN bla number
sip lineN mode
User Name
Display Name
Auth Name
Password
N/A
BLA Number
Line Mode
N/A
sip lineN vmail
SIP Per-Line Network Parameters
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Proxy Server
Proxy Port
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Registrar Server
Registrar Port
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Proxy Server
Proxy Port
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
sip lineN proxy ip
sip lineN proxy port
Backup Proxy Server
Backup Proxy Port
Outbound Proxy Server
Outbound Proxy Port
Registrar Server
sip lineN backup proxy ip
sip lineN backup proxy port
sip lineN outbound proxy
sip lineN outbound proxy port
sip lineN registrar ip
sip lineN registrar port
sip lineN backup registrar ip
sip lineN backup registrar port
sip lineN registration period
(see Chapter 5)
Registrar Port
Backup Registrar Server
Backup Registrar Port
Registration Period
(see Chapter 5)
Reference
For more information about centralized conferencing, see Chapter 5, the section,
“Centralized Conferencing (for Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers)” on page 5-341.
4-68
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Global SIP Settings
Note: The "sip vmail" and "sip lineN vmail" parameters are configurable
using the configuration files only. To configure voicemail see Chapter 5,
the section, “Voicemail (9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT only)” on
page 5-293.
Specific sets of SIP parameters are inter-dependent with each other. To prevent
conflicting parameter values from being applied, per-line values always take
precedence over the corresponding set of global values.
For example, if a parameter value is configured for one of the per-line sets, all
parameters from that set are applied and all parameters from the corresponding
global section are ignored, even if some of the parameters within the global set are
not defined in the per-line set.
SIP Precedence Example
The following example shows the SIP proxy feature and example schema for
storage and parsing of the SIP configuration parameters.
The following SIP configuration is assumed:
# SIP network block
sip proxy ip: 10.30.11.154
sip proxy port: 5060
sip registrar ip: 10.44.122.37
sip registrar port: 4020
sip line3 proxy ip: siparator.vonage.com
sip line3 proxy port: 0
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings
Line3 specifies per-line values for proxy IP address and proxy port, so the phone
uses those parameter values for SIP calls made on that line. However, because
those parameters are part of the SIP network block, the phone does not apply any
of the global SIP network block parameters. So even though the global parameters
configure a SIP registrar, Line3 on the phone ignores all global network block
parameters. Since line3 does not contain a per-line SIP registrar entry, the phone
does not use a registrar for that line.
Note: Global SIP parameters apply to all lines unless overridden by a
per-line configuration.
Per-line settings are configurable for lines 1 through 7.
4-70
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Global SIP Settings
Backup Proxy/Registrar Support
The IP phones support a backup SIP proxy and backup SIP registrar feature. If
the primary server is unavailable, the phone automatically switches to the backup
server allowing the user's phone to remain in service.
How it Works
All SIP registration messages are sent to the primary registrar first. If the server is
unavailable, then a new registration request is sent to the backup registrar. This
also applies to registration renewal messages, which try the primary server before
the backup.
Similarly, any outgoing calls attempt to use the primary proxy first, then the
backup if necessary. In addition, subscriptions for BLF, BLA, and explicit MWI
can also use the backup proxy when the primary fails. Outgoing calls and the
previously mentioned subscriptions behave the same as registrations, where the
primary proxy is tried before the backup.
You can configure the backup SIP proxy on a global or per-line basis via the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
SIP Server (SRV) Lookup
The SIP SRV Lookup feature allows you to configure the IP phone to perform a
DNS server lookup on a SIP proxy, a SIP registrar, or a SIP outbound proxy.
The IP phone performs an SRV lookup when the IP address of the server is FQDN
and the corresponding port is 0.
For example, if the phone is configured with sip proxy ip of "ana.aastra.com",
and sip proxy port of "0", the SRV lookup may return multiple servers, based on
the priorities if one is selected as primary and others are selected as secondary.
However, if the IP address is an FQDN and the corresponding server port is
non-zero, then the phone performs a DNS "A" Name Query to resolve the FQDN
into dot notation form.
If the IP address is a valid dot notation and the port is zero, then a default port
5060 is used.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings
You can configure SRV lookup using the configuration files (aastra.cfg and
<mac>.cfg) only. The parameters to use are:
• sip proxy ip
• sip proxy port
Configuring Basic SIP Network Settings (optional)
You can configure SIP settings using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, or
the Aastra Web UI.
Note: To configure the SIP settings per-line, use the configuration files or
the Aastra Web UI.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “SIP Basic,
Global Settings” on page A-64 or “SIP Basic, Per-Line Settings” on page A-73
Note: You can set global configuration only using the IP Phone UI.
4-72
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Global SIP Settings
IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
2
3
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select Administrator Menu.
Enter your Administrator password.
Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.
4
Select SIP Settings.
Configuring Proxy IP and Proxy Port
5
6
7
Select Proxy IP/Port.
Enter an IP address or fully qualified host name in the Proxy Server field. Default is 0.0.0.0.
Enter a Proxy Port number in the Proxy Port field for accessing the SIP proxy server.
Default is 0.
8
Press Done to save the changes.
Configuring Registrar IP and Registrar Port
9
Select Registrar IP/Port.
10
Enter an IP address or fully qualified host name in the Registrar Server field. Default is 0.0.0.0.
A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables registration. However, the phone is still active and you can dial
using username@ip address of the phone.
If the Registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e, line 1, line 2, etc.), then the
register request is not sent, the "No Service" message does not display, and the message waiting
indicator (MWI) does not come on.
11
12
Enter a Registrar Port number in the Registrar Port field for accessing the SIP registrar server.
Default is 0.
Press Done to save the changes.
Enabling/Disabling the Use of the Registrar Server
13
14
Select SIP Register.
Press Change to set Register to "Yes" (enable) or "No" (disable). Default is “Yes”.
This parameter enables/disables the IP phone to register on the network.
15
Press Done to save the changes.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings
IP Phone UI
Step Action
16
Select User Name to enter the username in the name field of the SIP URI for the IP phone, and for
registering the phone at the registrar.
Note: The IP phones allow usernames containing dots (“.”). You can also enter the same user name
for different registrar and proxy IP addresses.
17
Press Done to save the changes.
18
Select Display Name to enter the name used in the display name field of the "From SIP" header
field.
19
20
21
22
Press Done to save the changes.
Select Screen Name and enter the name to display on the idle screen.
Press Done to save the changes.
Select Authentication Name to enter the authorization name used in the username field of the
Authorization header field of the SIP REGISTER request.
23
Press Done to save the changes.
24
Select Password to enter the password used to register the IP phone with the SIP proxy.
Note: The IP phones accept numeric passwords only.
25
26
Press Done (3 times) to save the changes.
Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings
Select Restart.
4-74
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Global SIP Settings
.
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
For global configuration, click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Basic SIP Settings.
1
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
Or, for per-line configuration, click on Advanced Settings->Line N (1-9).
To configure SIP authentication settings:
2
In the "Screen Name" field, enter the screen name that displays on the idle screen.
4-76
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Global SIP Settings
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
3
In the "Screen Name 2" field, enter the text you want to display on the phone under the “Screen
Name” on the idle screen.
Notes:
1. If other status messages display on the phone, such as “Network Disconnected”, the Screen
Name 2 value does not display.
2. Symbol characters are allowed (such as “#”).
3. If the text is longer than the display width, than the display truncates the text to fit the display.
Figure 1
Services
Icom
9480i,
Dir
9480i CT
55i, 57i
57i CT
Callers
Screen Name
John Smith
Lab Phone
L1
Screen Name 2
Sat Jan 1 12:18am
Figure 2
Screen Name
Screen Name 2
1
John Burns
Lab Phone
Sat Jun 8 2:55pm
9143i,
51i, 53i
4
5
6
In the "Phone Number" field, enter the phone number of the IP phone.
In the "Caller ID" field, enter the phone number of the IP phone.
In the "Authentication Name" field, enter the name used in the username field of the Authorization
header of the SIP REGISTER request.
7
8
In the "Password" field, enter the password used to register the IP phone with the SIP proxy.
Note: The IP phones accept numeric passwords only.
In the "BLA Number" field, enter the Bridge Line Appearance (BLA) number to be shared across all
IP phones.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
9
In the "Line Mode" field, select "Generic" for normal mode, "BroadSoft SCA" for a BroadWorks
network, or "Nortel" for a Nortel network.
To configure SIP network settings:
10
11
12
In the "Proxy Server" field, enter an IP address or fully qualified host name of the SIP proxy server.
In the "Proxy Port" field, enter a port number for accessing the SIP proxy server.
In the "Backup Proxy Server" field, enter an IP address or fully qualified host name for the backup
proxy server.
13
14
In the "Backup Proxy Port" field, enter a port number for accessing the backup proxy server.
In the "Outbound Proxy Server" field, enter the SIP outbound proxy server IP address or fully
qualified domain name. This parameter allows all SIP messages originating from a line on the IP
phone, to be sent to an outbound proxy server.
Note: If you configure an outbound proxy and registrar for a specific line, and you also configure a
global outbound proxy and registrar, the IP phone uses the global configuration for all lines except
line 1. Line 1 uses the outbound proxy and registrar that you configured for that line.
15
16
In the "Outbound Proxy Port" field, enter the port on the IP phone that allows SIP messages to be
sent to the outbound proxy server.
In the "Registrar Server" field, enter an IP address or fully qualified host name for the SIP registrar
server. A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables registration. However, the phone is still active and you can
dial using username@ip address of the phone.
If the Registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e, line 1, line 2, etc.), then the
register request is not sent, the "No Service" message does not display, and the message waiting
indicator (MWI) does not come on.
17
18
In the "Registrar Port" field, enter the port number associated with the Registrar.
In the "Backup Registrar Server" field, enter an IP address or fully qualified host name for the
backup registrar server. A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables registration. However, the phone is still
active and you can dial using username@ip address of the phone.
If the Backup Registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e, line 1, line 2, etc.), then
the register request is not sent, the "No Service" message does not display, and the message waiting
indicator (MWI) does not come on.
19
20
In the "Backup Registrar Port" field, enter the port number associated with the backup registrar.
In the "Registration Period" field, enter the requested registration period, in seconds, from the
registrar.
4-78
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Global SIP Settings
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
21
To enter a value in the “Conference Server URI” field, see Chapter 5, the section, “Centralized
Conferencing (for Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers)” on page 5-341.
22
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings
Advanced SIP Settings (optional)
Advanced SIP Settings on the IP Phone allow you to configure specific features
on the phone. The following table provides a list of Advanced SIP Settings that
you can configure using the Aastra Web UI or the configuration files.
Configuration File Parameters
Explicit MWI Subscription
sip explicit mwi subscription
Missed Call Summary Subscription (global)
Missed Call Summary Subscription (per-line)
sip missed call summary subscription (global)
sip lineN missed call summary subscription
Missed Call Summary Subscription Period
(see Chapter 6)
sip missed call summary subscription period
AS-Feature-Event Subscription (global)
(see Chapter 6)
sip lineN as-feature-event subscription (per-line)
(see Chapter 6)
(see Chapter 6)
Send MAC Address in REGISTER Message
(see Chapter 6)
sip send mac (see Chapter 6)
Send Line Number in REGISTER Message
(see Chapter 6)
sip send line (see Chapter 6)
sip session timer
Session Timer
T1 Timer
T2 Timer
sip T1 timer
sip T2 timer
Transaction Timer
sip transaction timer
Transport Protocol
sip transport protocol
Local SIP UDP/TCP Port (see page 4-33)
Local SIP TLS Port (see page 4-33)
Registration Failed Retry Timer
sip local port (see page 4-33)
sip local tls port (see page 4-33)
sip registration retry timer
Registration Timeout Retry Timer
sip registration timeout retry timer
Registration Renewal Timer
sip registration renewal timer
BLF Subscription Period (see Chapter 5)
sip blf subscription period (see Chapter 5)
4-80
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Global SIP Settings
Aastra Web UI Parameters
Configuration File Parameters
ACD Subscription Period (see Chapter 5)
BLA Subscription Period (see Chapter 5)
Blacklist Duration (see Chapter 6)
Whitelist Proxy (see Chapter 6)
sip acd subscription period (see Chapter 5)
sip acd subscription period (see Chapter 5)
sip blacklist duration (see Chapter 6)
sip whitelist (see Chapter 6)
XML SIP Notify (see Chapter 6)
XML SIP Notify (see Chapter 6)
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings
Refer to Appendix A,“Advanced SIP Settings” on page A-87 for a description of
each of the above parameters.
For more information about Blacklist Duration and Whitelist Proxy, see
Chapter 6, “Configuring Advanced Operational Features.”
Configuring Advanced SIP Settings
Use the following procedures to configure the advanced SIP settings on the IP
phone.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Advanced SIP
Settings” on page A-87.
4-82
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Global SIP Settings
.
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
For Global configuration, click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings.
1
Or for per-line configuration, click on Advanced Settings->Line N (1-9).
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
2
Enable the "Explicit MWI Subscription" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the check box. Default is disabled).
If the IP phone has a message waiting subscription with the Service Provider, a Message Waiting
Indicator (MWI) (LED or display icon) tells the user there is a message on the IP Phone.
3
4
If you enable the “Explicit MWI Subscription” field, then in the “Explicit MWI Subscription Period”
field, enter the requested duration, in seconds, before the MWI subscription times out. The phone
re-subscribes to MWI before the subscription period ends. Default is 86400.
Enable the “Missed Call Summary Subscription” field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the check box. Default is disabled).
This feature allows missed calls that have been redirected by the server, to be incremented in the
missed calls indicator on the phone it was initially directed to.
For more information about this feature, see Chapter 6, the section, “Missed Call Summary
Subscription” on page 6-13.
5
If you enable the “Missed Call Summary Subscription” field, then in the “Missed Call Summary
Subscription Period” field, enter the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone uses the Missed
Calls Summary Subscription feature. Default is 86400.
For more information about this feature, see Chapter 6, the section, “Missed Call Summary
Subscription” on page 6-13.
Note: The “Missed Call Summary Subscription Period” is configurable on a global basis only.
6
Enable the “AS-Feature-Event Subscription” field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the check box. Default is disabled).
This feature enables or disables the specified line with the BroadSoft’s server-side DND, CFWD, or
ACD features.
For more information about this feature, see Chapter 6, the section, “As-Feature-Event Subscription”
on page 6-17.
Note: The “AS-Feature-Event Subscription ” feature is configurable on a global or per-line basis.
4-84
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Global SIP Settings
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
7
If you enable the “AS-Feature-Event Subscription” field, then in the “AS-Feature-Event
Subscription Period” field, enter the amount of time, in seconds, between resubscribing. If the
phone does not resubscribe in the time specified for this parameter, it loses subscription.. Default is
3600.
For more information about this feature, see Chapter 6, the section, “As-Feature-Event Subscription”
8
Enable the “Send MAC Address in REGISTER Message” and the “Send Line Number in
REGISTER Message” fields by checking the check boxes.
(Disable these fields by unchecking the check boxes. Default is disabled for both fields).
For more information about these message features, see Chapter 6, the section, “MAC Address/Line
Number in REGISTER Messages” on page 6-5.
Note: The “AS-Feature-Event Subscription Period” feature is configurable on a global basis only
9
In the "Session Timer" field, enter the time, in seconds, that the IP phone uses to send periodic
re-INVITE requests to keep a session alive. The proxy uses these re-INVITE requests to maintain the
status' of the connected sessions. See RFC4028 for details.
10
In the "Timer 1 and Timer 2" fields, enter a time, in milliseconds, that will apply to an IP phone
session. These timers are SIP transaction layer timers defined in RFC 3261.
Timer 1 is an estimate of the round-trip time (RTT). Default is 500 msec.
Timer 2 represents the amount of time a non-INVITE server transaction takes to respond to a
request. Default is 4 seconds.
11
12
In the "Transaction Timer" field, enter the amount of time, in milliseconds, that the phone allows the
call server (registrar/proxy) to respond to SIP messages that it sends.
Valid values are 4000 to 64000. Default is 4000.
the phone assumes the message has timed out.
In the "Transport Protocol" field, select a transport protocol to use when sending SIP Real-time
Transport Protocol (RTP) packets. Valid values are User Datagram Protocol (UDP) and Transmission
Control Protocol (TCP), UDP, TCP, Transport Layer Security (TLS) or Persistent TLS. The value
“UDP” is the default. For more information about TLS, see “RTP Encryption” on page 4-93 and
Chapter 6, the section, “Transport Layer Security (TLS)” on page 6-26.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
13
In the "Local SIP UDP/TCP Port" field, specify the local source port (UDP/TCP) from which the
phone sends SIP messages. Default is 5060.
Traversal” on page 4-33.
14
In the "Local SIP TLS Port" field, specify the local source port (SIPS/TLS) from which the phone
sends SIP messages. Default is 5061.
For more information about this feature, see the section, “SIP and TLS Source Ports for NAT
Traversal” on page 4-33.
15
16
In the " Registration Failed Retry Timer" field, enter the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone
waits between registration attempts when a registration is rejected by the registrar.
Valid values are 30 to 1800. Default is 1800.
In the " Registration Timeout Retry Timer" field, enter the amount of time, in seconds, that the
phone waits until it re-attempts to register after a REGISTER message times out.
Valid values are 30 to 214748364. Default is 120.
17
In the " Registration Renewal Timer" field, enter the length of time, in seconds, prior to expiration,
that the phone renews registrations.
For example, if the value is set to 20, then 20 seconds before the registration is due to expire, a new
REGISTER message is sent to the registrar to renew the registration.
18
19
The “BLF Subscription Period” field is enabled by default with a value of 3600 seconds.
This feature sets the time period, in seconds, that the IP phone resubscribes the BLF subscription
service after a software/firmware upgrade or after a reboot of the IP phone.
For information about setting the “BLF Subscription Period”, see Chapter 5, the section,
“BLF Subscription Period” on page 5-168.
(For Sylantro Servers) The “ACD Subscription Period” field is enabled by default with a value of
3600 seconds.
This feature sets the time period, in seconds, that the IP phone resubscribes the BLF subscription
service after a software/firmware upgrade or after a reboot of the IP phone.
For information about setting the “ACD Subscription Period”, see Chapter 5, the section,
“ACD Subscription Period” on page 5-186.
4-86
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Global SIP Settings
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
20
The “BLA Subscription Period” field is enabled by default with a value of 300 seconds.
This feature sets the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone waits to receive a BLA subscribe
message from the server. If you specify zero (0), the phone uses the value specified for the BLA
expiration in the subscribe message received from the server. If no value is specified, the phone uses
the default value of 300 seconds.
For information about setting the “BLA Subscription Period”, see Chapter 5, the section,
“BLA Subscription Period” on page 5-186.
21
(For Broadsoft Servers) The “Blacklist Duration” field is enabled by default with a value of 300
seconds (5 minutes). Valid values are 0 to 9999999.
This feature sets the time period, in seconds, that the IP phone resubscribes the BLF subscription
service after a software/firmware upgrade or after a reboot of the IP phone.
Note: The value of “0” disables the blacklist feature.
For information about setting the “Blacklist Duration”, see Chapter 6, the section, “Blacklist Duration”
on page 6-22.
22
Enable the "Whitelist Proxy" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the check box. Default is disabled).
When this feature is enabled, an IP phone accepts call requests from a trusted proxy server only. The
IP phone rejects any call requests from an untrusted proxy server.
For information about setting the “Whitelist Proxy”, see Chapter 6, the section, “Whitelist Proxy” on
page 6-24.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
23
Enable the "XML SIP Notify" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the check box. Default is disabled).
Enabling this parrameter allows the phone to accept or reject an aastra-xml SIP NOTIFY message.
Note: To ensure the SIP NOTIFY is coming from a trusted source, it is recommended that you enable
the Whitelist feature (Whitelist Proxy parameter) on the IP phone. If enabled, and the phone
receives a SIP NOTIFY from a server that is NOT on the whitelist (i.e. untrusted server), the phone
rejects the message.
For information about setting this feature, see Chapter 5, the section, “XML SIP Notify Events” on
page 5-319.
24
Click
to save your changes.
4-88
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Global SIP Settings
Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) Settings
Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) is used as the bearer path for voice packets
sent over the IP network. Information in the RTP header tells the receiver how to
reconstruct the data and describes how the bit streams are packetized (i.e. which
codec is in use). Real-time Transport Control Protocol (RTCP) allows endpoints
to monitor packet delivery, detect and compensate for any packet loss in the
network. Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) and H.323 both use RTP and RTCP for
the media stream, with User Datagram Protocol (UDP) as the transport layer
encapsulation protocol.
Note: If RFC2833 relay of DTMF tones is configured, it is sent on the
same port as the RTP voice packets. The phones support decoding and
playing out DTMF tones sent in SIP INFO requests. The following
DTMF tones are supported:
• Support signals 0-9, #, *
• Support durations up to 5 seconds
You can set the following parameters for RTP on the IP Phones:
Aastra Web UI Parameters
Configuration File Parameters
RTP Port
sip rtp port
Basic Codecs (G.711 u-Law, G.711 a-Law, G.729)
Force RFC2833 Out-of-Band DTMF
Customized Codec Preference List
DTMF Method (global and per-line settings)
RTP Encryption (global and per-line settings)
Silence Suppression
sip use basic codecs
sip out-of-band dtmf
sip customized codec
sip dtmf method (global and per-line settings)
sip srtp mode (global and per-line settings)
sip silence suppression
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings
RTP Port
RTP is described in RFC1889. The UDP port used for RTP streams is traditionally
an even-numbered port, and the RTCP control is on the next port up. A phone call
therefore uses one pair of ports for each media stream.
The RTP port is assigned to the first line on the phone, and is then incremented for
each subsequent line available within the phone to provided each line a unique
RTP port for its own use.
On the IP phone, the initial port used as the starting point for RTP/RTCP port
allocation can be configured using "RTP Port Base". The default RTP base port
on the IP phones is 3000.
For example, if the RTP base port value is 5000, the first voice patch sends RTP
on port 5000 and RTCP on port 5001. Additional calls would then use ports 5002,
5003, etc.
You can configure the RTP port on a global-basis only, using the configuration
files, the IP Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI.
Basic Codecs (G.711 u-Law, G.711 a-Law, G.729)
CODEC is an acronym for COmpress-DECompress. It consists of a set of
instructions that together implement one or more algorithms. In the case of IP
telephony, these algorithms are used to compress the sampled speech data, to
decrease the content's file size and bit-rate (the amount of network bandwidth in
kilobits per second) required to transfer the audio. With smaller file sizes and
lower bit rates, the network equipment can store and stream digital media content
over a network more easily.
Aastra IP phones support the International Telecommunications Union (ITU)
transmission standards for the following CODECs:
•
Waveform CODECs: G.711 pulse code modulation (PCM) with a-Law or
u-Law companding
•
Parametric CODEC: G.729a conjugate structure - algebraic code excited
linear prediction (CS_ACELP).
4-90
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Global SIP Settings
All Codecs have a sampling rate of 8,000 samples per second, and operate and
operate in the 300 Hz to 3,700 Hz audio range. The following table lists the
default settings for bit rate, algorithm, packetization time, and silence suppression
for each Codec, based on a minimum packet size.
Default Codec Settings.
Packetizatio
n Time
Silence
CODEC
G.711 a-law
G.711 u-law
G.729a
Bit Rate
64 Kb/s
64 Kb/s
Algorithm
PCM
Suppression
30 ms
30 ms
30 ms
enabled
enabled
enabled
PCM
8
Kb/s
CS-ACELP
You can enable the IP phones to use a default "basic codec" set, which consists of
the set of codecs and packet sizes shown above.
Or you can instead configure a custom set of codecs and attributes instead of using
the defaults.
Note: The basic and custom codec parameters apply to all calls, and are
configured on a global-basis only using the configuration files or the
Aastra Web UI.
Customized Codec Preference List
You can also configure the IP phones to use preferred Codecs. To do this, you
must enter the payload value (payload), the packetization time in milliseconds
(ptime), and enable or disable silence suppression (silsupp).
Payload is the codec type to be used. This represents the data format carried
within the RTP packets to the end user at the destination. You can enter payload
values for G.711 a-law, G.711 u-law, and G.729a.
Ptime (packetization time) is a measurement of the duration of PCM data within
each RTP packet sent to the destination, and hence defines how much network
bandwidth is used for transfer of the RTP stream. You enter the ptime values for
the customized Codec list in milliseconds. (See table below).
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings
Silsupp is used to enable or disable silence suppression. Voice Activity Detection
(VAD) on the IP phones is used to determine whether each individual packet
contains useful speech data. Enabling silsupp results in decreased network
bandwidth, by avoiding sending RTP packets for any frame where no voice
energy was detected by the VAD.
You must enter the values for this feature in list form as shown in the following
example:
payload=8;ptime=10;silsupp=on,payload=0;ptime=10;silsupp=off
The valid values for creating a Codec preference list are as follows.
Customized Codec Settings
Attribute
payload
Value
0 for G.711 u-Law
8 for G.711 a-Law
18 for G.729a
ptime (in milliseconds)
silsupp
5, 10, 15, 20.......90
on
off
You can specify a customized Codec preference list on a global-basis using the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Out-of-Band DTMF
The IP phones support out-of-band Dual-Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) mode
according to RFC2833. In the Aastra Web UI, you can enable or disable this
feature as required. The "out-of-band DTMF" is enabled by default.
In out-of-band mode, the DTMF audio is automatically clamped (muted) and
DTMF digits are not sent in the RTP packets.
You can configure out-of-band DTMF on a global-basis using the configuration
files or the Aastra Web UI.
4-92
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Global SIP Settings
DTMF Method
A feature on the IP phone allows you to select the DTMF method that the phone
uses to send DTMF digits from the IP phone via INFO messages. You can set the
DTMF method as Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP), SIP info, or both.
You can configure the DTMF method on a global or per-line basis using the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
RTP Encryption
The IP Phones include support for Secure Real-time Transfer Protocol (SRTP),
using Session Description Protocol Security (SDES) key negotiation, for
encryption and authentication of RTP/RTCP messages sent and received by the
Aastra IP phones on your network.
As administrator, you specify the global SRTP setting for all lines on the IP
phone. You can choose among three levels of SRTP encryption, as follows:
•
SRTP Disabled (default): IP phone generates and receives nonsecured RTP
calls. If the IP phone gets called from SRTP enabled phone, it ignores SRTP
tries to answer the call using RTP. If the receiving phone has SRTP only
enabled, the call fails; however, if it has SRTP preferred enabled, it will accept
RTP call.
•
•
SRTP Preferred: IP phone generates RTP secured calls, and accepts both
secured and non-secured RTP calls. If the receiving phone is not SRTP
enabled, it sends non-secured RTP calls instead.
SRTP Only: IP phone generates and accepts RTP secured calls only; all other
calls are rejected (fail).
You can override the global setting as necessary, configuring SRTP support on a
per-line basis. This allows IP phone users to have both secured and unsecured
lines operating on the same phone.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings
If an SRTP enabled IP phone initiates a call, and the receiving phone is also SRTP
enabled, the IP Phone UI displays a “lock” icon, indicating that the call is secure.
If the receiving phone does not support SRTP, the IP phone will send unsecured
RTP messages instead of SRTP encrypted messages. However in this case, the IP
Phone UI does not display the lock icon - indicating a non-secure call.
Note: If you enable SRTP, then you should also enable Transport Layer
Security (TLS). This prevents capture of the key used for SRTP
encryption. To enable TLC, set the Transport Protocol parameter
(located on the Global SIP Settings menu) to TLS.
You can configure SRTP on a global or per-line basis using the configuration files
or the Aastra Web UI.
Silence Suppression
In IP telephony, silence on a line (lack of voice) uses up bandwidth when sending
voice over a packet-switched system. Silence suppression is encoding that starts
and stops the times of silence in order to eliminate that wasted bandwidth.
Silence suppression is enabled by default on the IP phones. The phone negotiates
whether or not to use silence suppression. Disabling this feature forces the phone
to ignore any negotiated value.
You can configure silence suppression on a global-basis using the configuration
files or the Aastra Web UI.
4-94
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Global SIP Settings
Configuring RTP Features
Use the following procedures to configure the RTP features on the IP phone.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set for RTP features in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“RTP, Codec, DTMF Global Settings” on page A-109.
IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
2
3
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select Administrator Menu.
Enter your Administrator password.
Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.
4
5
6
Select SIP Settings.
Select RTP Port Base to change the RTP port base setting. Default is 3000.
Press Done (2 times) to save the change.
Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings
Select Restart.
7
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings
.
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings.
Global Settings.
Click on Advanced Settings->Line <N>->RTP Settings.
Per-Line Settings.
4-96
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Global SIP Settings
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
2
Enter an RTP Port Base in the RTP Port field. Default is 3000.
The RTP Port indicates the port through which the RTP packets are sent. This value must specify the
beginning of the RTP port range on the gateway or router. The RTP port is used for sending DTMF
tones and for the audio stream. Your network administrator may close some ports for security
reasons. You may want to use this parameter to send RTP data using a different port.
Note: The phones support decoding and playing out DTMF tones sent in SIP INFO requests. The
following DTMF tones are supported:
•
•
Support signals 0-9, #, *
Support durations up to 5 seconds
3
Enable the "Basic Codecs (G.711 u-Law, G.711 a-Law, G.729)" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the box. Default is disabled).
Enabling this parameter allows the IP phone to use the basic Codecs when sending/receiving RTP
packets.
4
5
The "Force RFC2833 Out-of-Band DTMF" field is enabled by default. Disable this field by
unchecking the box.
Enabling this parameter forces the IP phone to use out-of-band DTMF according to RFC2833.
Enter a "Customized Codec Preference List". For example,
payload=8;ptime=10;
silsupp=on,
payload=0;ptime=10;
silsupp=off
Valid values are:
Attribute
payload
Value
0 for G.711 u-Law
8 for G.711 a-Law
18 for G.729a
ptime (in milliseconds)
silsupp
5, 10, 15, 20.....90
on
off
For this parameter, you specify a customized codec list which allows you to use the preferred Codecs
for this IP phone. Default for the “Customized Codec Preference List” is blank.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
6
7
8
Select a method to use from the “DTMF Method” list box. Valid values are RTP, SIP Info, Both.
Default is RTP.
Note: You can configure the DTMF Method on a global or per-line basis.
Select the type of RTP encryption to use from the “RTP Encryption” list box. Valid values are SRTP
Disabled, SRTP Preferred, or SRTP Only. Default is SRTP Disabled.
Note: You can configure RTP Encryption on a global or per-line basis.
The “Silence Suppression” field is enabled by default. Disable this field by unchecking the check
box.
When enabled, the phone negotiates whether or not to use silence suppression. Disabling this
feature forces the phone to ignore any negotiated value.
9
Click
to save your changes.
4-98
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Global SIP Settings
Autodial Settings
The IP phones include a feature called “Autodial”. When you configure Autodial
on an IP phone, the phone automatically dials a preconfigured number whenever
it is off-hook. Depending on the configuration you specify, the Autodial functions
as either a “hotline”, or as a “warmline,” as follows:
•
Hotline (default): The IP phone immediately dials a preconfigured number
when you lift the handset.
•
Warmline: The IP phone waits for a specified amount of time after you lift
the handset before dialing a preconfigured number. If you do not dial a
number within the time allotted, then the IP phone begins to dial the number.
By default, the Autodial feature functions as a hotline. If you want Autodial to
function as a warmline, you can use the Autodial “time-out” parameter to specify
the length of time (in seconds) the IP phone waits before dialing a preconfigured
number.
As administrator, you configure Autodial globally, or on a per-line basis, for an IP
phone. The line setting overrides the global setting. For example, you can disable
Autodial on a specific line simply by setting the line’s autodial number parameter
to empty (blank).
Note: IMPORTANT INFORMATION before configuring Autodial on
your IP phone:
•
•
Any speeddial numbers that you configure on an IP phone are not
affected by autodial settings.
If you configure autodial on your IP phone, any lines that function as
hotlines do not accept conference calls, transferred calls, and/or
intercom calls.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings
Configuring AutoDial Using the Configuration Files
You use the following parameters to configure Autodial using the configuration
files:
Global Configuration
• sip autodial number
• sip autodial timeout
Per-Line Configuration
• sip lineN autodial number
• sip lineN autodial timeout
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Autodial
Settings” on page A-114.
4-100
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Global SIP Settings
Configuring Autodial Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to configure Autodial using the Aastra Web UI.
By default, your IP phone uses the global settings you specify for Autodial for all
lines on your IP phone. However, you can also configure Autodial on a per-line
basis.
Aastra Web UI
Global Configuration
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Autodial Settings.
2
3
In the “Autodial Number” field, specify the SIP number that the IP phone dials whenever the IP
phone is off-hook. An empty (blank) value disables autodial on the phone.
For example: 8500
In the “Autodial Timeout” field, specify a value, in seconds, for the timer as follows:
•
If you want the IP phone to autodial the number immediately (hotline) whenever the IP phone is
off-hook, accept the default value of 0.
•
If you want to specify a length of time for the IP phone to wait before dialing the number, enter
the length of time (in seconds). For example: 30
Valid values are 0 to 120.
Click
4
to save your changes.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings
Aastra Web UI
Per-Line Configuration
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Line <1 - 9>->Autodial Settings.
2
Do one of the following actions:
•
•
To allow this line to use the global autodial settings, click on the Use Global Settings parameter
to enable it, then click to save your changes.
To specify a different autodial configuration for this specific line, disable the Use Global
Settings parameter. Then proceed to step 3.
3
In the “Autodial Number” field, specify the SIP number for this line that the IP phone dials
whenever the IP phone is off-hook as follows:
•
•
•
If set to -1, then the global autodial settings for this IP phone to this line.
If set to empty (blank), then disable Autodial on this line.
If set to a valid SIP number, dial the SIP number specified for this line. For example: 8500
4-102
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Global SIP Settings
Aastra Web UI
4
In the “Autodial Timeout” field, specify a value, in seconds, for the timer for this line as follows:
•
•
If you want the IP phone to autodial the number immediately (hotline) whenever the IP phone is
off-hook, accept the default value of 0.
If you want to specify a length of time for the IP phone to wait before dialing the number, enter
the length of time (in seconds). For example: 30
Valid values are 0 to 120.
Click
5
to save your changes.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Configuration Server Protocol
Configuration Server Protocol
You can download new versions of firmware and configuration files from the
configuration server to the IP phone using any of the following types of protocols:
TFTP, FTP, HTTP, and HTTPS. For each Protocol, you can specify the path for
which the configuration files are located on the server. For HTTP and HTTPS,
you can also specify the port number to use for downloading the phone
configuration.
The TFTP setting is the default download protocol. You can configure the type of
protocol that the IP phone uses by setting it in the configuration files, the IP phone
UI, or the Aastra Web UI.
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate the IP address or domain
name for the TFTP, FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS server, your DHCP server
must support download protocol according to RFC2131 and RFC1541 for
Option 66. For more information, see this chapter, the section, “DHCP”
on page 4-4.
Configuring the Configuration Server Protocol
Use the following procedure to configure the configuration server protocol.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Configuration
Server Settings” on page A-17.
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
1
2
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select Administrator Menu.
4-104
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Configuration Server Protocol
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
3
Enter your Administrator password.
Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.
4
5
6
Select Configuration Server.
Select Download Protocol.
Select from the following:
•
•
•
•
Use TFTP
Use FTP
Use HTTP
Use HTTPS
Default is “Use TFTP”.
The IP phone uses the protocol you select to download new firmware and configuration files from
the configuration server.
7
8
Press Done (9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, 57i CT) or Set ( (9143i, 51i, 53i) to save the changes.
From the Configuration Server menu, select from the following. This selection is dependent on the
Download Protocol you selected in step 6.
TFTP Settings
FTP Settings
HTTP Settings
HTTPS Settings
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Configuration Server Protocol
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
9
Enter the IP address of the protocol server (in dotted decimal format).
Use the following table to configure the applicable server.
TFTP Settings
- Select Primary TFTP
- Enter the IP address or fully qualified domain name of the primary TFTP server.
- Press Done or Set to save the change.
- Select Pri TFTP Path.
- Enter the path name for which the configuration files reside on the TFTP server for down-
loading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a sub-directory beneath the
server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this field.
Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For example, ipphone\57i\config-
files.
Optional: You can also configure an Alternate TFTP server and Alternate TFTP Path if
required by selecting the “Alternate TFTP” and the “Alt TFTP Path” parameters.
- From the TFTP Settings menu, select Alternate TFTP and press Enter.
- Enter the IP address or fully qualified domain name of the alternate TFTP server.
- Press Done or Set to save the change.
- Select Alt TFTP Path.
- Enter the path name for which the configuration files reside on the Alternate TFTP server for
downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a sub-directory beneath
the server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this
field. Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For example,
ipphone\57i\configfiles.
FTP Settings
- Select FTP Server.
- Enter the IP address or fully qualified domain name of the FTP server.
- Press Done or Set to save the change.
- Select FTP Path.
- Enter the path name for which the configuration files reside on the FTP server for download-
ing to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a sub-directory beneath the server’s
root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this field. Enter the
path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For example, ipphone\57i\configfiles.
Optional: You can enter a username and password for accessing the FTP server if required:
- Select FTP Username.
- Enter a username for accessing the FTP server.
- Press Done.
- Select FTP Password.
- Enter a password for accessing the FTP server.
- Press Done or Set.
4-106
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Configuration Server Protocol
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
9
(Cont’d)
HTTP Settings
- Select HTTP Server
- Enter the IP address of the HTTP server.
- Press Done or Set.
- Select HTTP Path.
- Enter the path name for which the configuration files reside on the HTTP server for down-
loading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a sub-directory beneath the
server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this field.
Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For example, ipphone\57i\config-
files.
- Select HTTP Port.
- Enter the HTTP port that the server uses to load the configuration to the phone over HTTP.
Default is 80.
- Press Done or Set.
HTTPS Settings
- Select HTTP Client.
- Select Download Server.
- Enter the IP address of the HTTPS server.
- Press Done or Set.
- Select Download Path.
Enter the path name for which the configuration files reside on the HTTPS server for down-
Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For example, ipphone\57i\config-
files.
- Press Done or Set.
- Select Client Method.
- Select the client method to use for downloading the configuration files (SSl 3.0 or TLS 1.0).
For more information about which client method to use, see the section, “HTTPS Client/
Server Configuration” on page 4-36.
- Select Download Port.
- Enter the HTTPS port that the server uses to load the configuration to the phone over
HTTPS. Default is 443.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Configuration Server Protocol
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
9
(Cont’d)
HTTPS Settings (Continued)
- Select HTTPS Server.
- Select HTTP->HTTPS.
- For 9143i, 51i, 53i::
Press Change to select “Do not redirect”or “Redirect”. Default is “Do not redirect”.
Enabling this feature redirects the HTTP protocol to HTTPS.
Press Set.
- For 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, 57i CT:
Press Change to select “Yes” and redirect HTTP to HTTPS. Select “No” to not direct HTTPS
to HTTPS, Default is “No”. Enabling this feature redirects the HTTP protocol to HTTPS.
Press Done.
- Select XML HTTP POSTs.
- For 9143i, 51i, 53i::
Press Change to select “Do not block” or “Block”.
Enabling this feature blocks XML HTTP POSTs from the IP Phone.
- For 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, 57i CT:
Press Change to select “Yes” and block XML HTTP Posts. Select “No” to unblock XML
Phone.
Reference
For more information on configuring the HTTPS security method, HTTP to HTTPS redirect, and
HTTPS server blocking for HTTP XML POSTs, see the section, “HTTPS Client/Server
Configuration” on page 4-36.
10
11
Press Done or Set repeatedly until the session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the
configuration settings.
Select Restart.
4-108
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Configuration Server Protocol
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
Click on Advanced Settings->Configuration Server.
1
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Configuration Server Protocol
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
2
Select the protocol from the "Download Protocol" list box. Valid values are TFTP, FTP, HTTP, and
HTTPS. Default is TFTP.
The IP phone uses the protocol you select to download new firmware and configuration files from the
configuration server. Use the following table to configure the applicable server.
TFTP
- Enter an IP address or fully qualified domain name in the "TFTP Server" field.
- Enter the path name in the “TFTP Path” field for which the configuration files reside on the
TFTP server for downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a
sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory
should be entered in this field. Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For
example, ipphone\57i\configfiles.
Optional: You can also configure an alternate TFTP server if required. If "Use Alternate
TFTP" is enabled, you must also enter an IP address or qualified domain name for the
alternate server in the "Alternate TFTP" field. You can also enter a path name for the alter-
nate TFTP server in the “Alternate TFTP Path” field.
FTP
- Enter an IP address or fully qualified domain name in the "FTP Server" fiel.d.
- Enter the path name in the “FTP Path” field for which the configuration files reside on the
FTP server for downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a
sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory
should be entered in this field. Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For
example, ipphone\57i\configfiles.
Optional: You can enter a username and password for accessing the FTP server if
required.
- Enter a username for a user that will access the FTP server in the "FTP User Name" field.
- Enter a password for a user that allows access to the FTP server in the "FTP Password"
field.
4-110
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Configuration Server Protocol
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
3
HTTP
- Enter an IP address or fully qualified domain name in the "HTTP Server" field.
- Enter the path name in the “HTTP Path” field for which the configuration files reside on the
HTTP server for downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a
sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory
should be entered in this field. Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For
example, ipphone\57i\configfiles.
- Enter the HTTP port number in the “HTTP Port” field that the server uses to load the con-
figuration to the phone over HTTP.
Optional: You can enter a list of users to be authenticated when they access the HTTP
server in the "XML Push Server List (Approved IP Addresses)" field.
HTTPS
- Enter an IP address or fully qualified domain name in the "HTTPS Server" field.
- Enter the path name in the “HTTPS Path” field for which the configuration files reside on the
HTTP server for downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a
sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory
should be entered in this field. Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For
example, ipphone\57i\configfiles.
- Enter the HTTPS port number in the “HTTPS Port” field that the server uses to load the
configuration to the phone over HTTPS.
server in the "XML Push Server List (Approved IP Addresses)" field.
Reference: For more information on configuring the HTTPS security method, HTTP to HTTPS
redirect, and HTTPS server blocking for HTTP XML POSTs, see the section, “HTTPS Client/Server
Configuration” on page 4-36.
4
5
Click
to save your settings.
Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings.
Select Operation->Reset and click
.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
4-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Configuration Server Protocol
4-112
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5
Configuring Operational Features
About this chapter
Introduction
The IP phones have specific operational features you can configure to customize
your IP phone. This chapter describes each feature and provides procedures for
configuring your phone to use these features.
Topics
Topic
Page
Operational Features
page 5-5
User Passwords
page 5-5
Administrator Passwords
Locking/Unlocking the Phone
Defining an Emergency Dial Plan
Time and Date
page 5-9
page 5-10
page 5-16
page 5-18
page 5-19
page 5-26
page 5-29
page 5-30
page 5-45
page 5-46
Time Zone & DST
Backlight Mode (9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT only)
Live Dial Pad*
Language
Locking IP Phone Keys
Locking/Unlocking the SAVE and DELETE keys (53i)
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
About this chapter
Topic
Page
Local Dial Plan
page 5-49
page 5-55
page 5-59
page 5-61
page 5-63
page 5-66
page 5-68
page 5-70
page 5-72
page 5-75
page 5-77
page 5-81
page 5-83
page 5-85
page 5-87
page 5-89
page 5-93
Park Calls/Pick Up Parked Calls
Suppressing DTMF Playback
Display DTMF Digits
Call Waiting/Call Waiting Tone
Stuttered Dial Tone
XML Beep Support
Status Scroll Delay
Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing
Switch Focus to Ringing Line
Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout
Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call
Message Waiting Indicator Line
Call Forward Mode
(LLDP-MED) and Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN)
Incoming/Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer and Barge In
Group Paging RTP Settings
page 5-98
page 5-103
page 5-109
page 5-113
page 5-118
page 5-125
page 5-137
page 5-160
page 5-161
page 5-168
page 5-170
page 5-176
page 5-186
Key Mapping
Ring Tones and Tone Sets
Priority Alerting
Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception)
Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module Keys
Speeddial Prefixes
Busy Lamp Field (BLF)
BLF Subscription Period
BLF/Xfer and Speeddial/Xfer Keys
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) (for Sylantro Servers)
ACD Subscription Period
5-2
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
About this chapter
Topic
BLA Subscription Period
Page
page 5-188
Directed Call Pickup/Group Call Pickup (for Sylantro Servers)
Do Not Disturb (DND)
page 5-190
page 5-199
page 5-210
page 5-217
page 5-219
page 5-230
page 5-234
page 5-273
page 5-279
page 5-280
page 5-282
page 5-293
page 5-296
page 5-296
page 5-302
page 5-302
page 5-308
page 5-310
page 5-316
page 5-319
page 5-325
page 5-327
page 5-333
page 5-334
page 5-335
Bridged Line Appearance (BLA)
BLA Support for Third Party Registration
Park/Pick Up Key
Last Call Return (lcr) (Sylantro Servers)
Call Forwarding
Callers List
Customizable Callers List and Services Keys
Missed Calls Indicator
Directory List
Voicemail (9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT only)
XML Customized Services
Creating Customized XML Services on the IP Phones
Configuring the Phone to use XML
XML Get Timeout
Using the XML Customized Service
XML Action URIs
Action URI Disconnected
XML SIP Notify Events
XML Softkey URI
Web Applications Keys
Services Menu on 51i)
XML Applications and Off-Hook Interaction
XML URI for Key Press Simulation
page 5-337
page 5-337
page 5-338
page 5-339
XML Override for a Locked Phone
Audio Transmit and Receive Gain Adjustments
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
About this chapter
Topic
Page
Centralized Conferencing (for Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers)
page 5-341
page 5-345
Authentication Support for HTTP/HTTPS Download Methods, used
with Broadsoft Client Management System (CMS)
Customizing the Display Columns on the 560M Expansion Module
page 5-348
5-4
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Operational Features
Description
This section describes the operational features managed and configured by a
System Administrator.
User Passwords
A user or an administrator can change the user passwords on the phone using the
configuration files, the IP phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI.
Use the following procedures to change the user password.
Note: The IP phones support numeric characters only in passwords. If
you enter a password with alpha characters, the phone uses the default
password instead.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Password
Settings” on page A-14.
IP Phone UI
1
2
3
4
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select User Password.
Enter the current user password.
Press Enter.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
IP Phone UI
5
Enter the new user password.
Note: The IP phones support numeric characters only in passwords. If you enter a password with
alpha characters, the phone uses the default password instead.
6
7
8
Press Enter.
Re-enter the new user password.
Press Enter.
A message, "Password Changed" displays on the screen.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Operation->User Password.
2
3
In the "Current Password" field, enter the current user password.
In the "New Password" field, enter the new user password.
Note: The IP phones support numeric characters only in passwords. If you enter a password with
alpha characters, the phone uses the default password instead.
4
5
In the "Password Confirm" field, enter the new user password again.
Click
to save your changes.
5-6
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Resetting a User Password
If a user forgets his password, either the user or an administrator can reset it so a
new password can be entered. The reset user password feature resets the password
to the factory default which is blank (no password).
You can reset a user password using the Aastra Web UI only at the path
Operation->Phone Lock. Use the following procedure to reset a user password.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Operation->Phone Lock.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
2
In the “Reset User Password” field, click
.
The following screen displays:
3
4
In the “Current Password” field, leave this blank.
In the “New Password” field, enter a new password for the user.
Note: The IP phones support numeric characters only in passwords. If you enter a password with
alpha characters, the phone uses the default password instead.
5
6
In the “Password Confirm” field, re-enter the new user password.
Click
to save the new user password and perform the next procedure.
5-8
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Administrator Passwords
An administrator can change the administrator passwords on the phone using the
configuration files only.
An administrator can also assign a password for using the Options key on the IP
phone. You turn this feature on and off by entering the "options password
enabled" parameter followed by a valid value in the configuration files. Valid
values are 0 (false; Options key not password protected), or 1 (true; Options key
password protected). If this parameter is set to 1, a user has to enter a password at
the IP phone UI. If the password is entered correctly, the user is allowed to gain
access to the Options Menu and no more password prompts display for other
password protected screens. If the user fails to enter the correct password in three
attempts, access to the Options Menu is denied and the IP phone returns to the idle
screen.
Procedure
Use the following procedure to change the administrator password.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Password
Settings” on page A-14.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Locking/Unlocking the Phone
A user or administrator can lock a phone to prevent it from being used or
configured. Once the phone is locked, the user or administrator can enter their
password to unlock the phone.
You can lock/unlock a phone using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, or the
Aastra Web UI.
You can use any of the following methods to lock/unlock a phone:
•
•
•
Using the IP Phone UI via the “Phone Lock” option in the Options Menu.
Using the Aastra Web UI via the path Operation->Phone Lock.
Using the configuration files to configure a key as “phonelock”, and then
pressing the key to lock/unlock the phone.
•
Using the Aastra Web UI to configure a key as “Phone Lock”, and then
pressing the key to lock/unlock the phone.
Note: All of the methods above configure locking/unlocking of the
phone dynamically. Once configured, the feature takes affect
immediately. To unlock the phone, a user or administrator must enter their
password.
5-10
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Locking/Unlocking the Phone Using the IP Phone UI
Use the following IP Phone UI procedure to lock/unlock an IP phone and prevent
it from being used or configured.
IP Phone UI
Step Action
Lock the phone:
1
2
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select Phone Lock.
The prompt, “Lock the phone?” displays.
Press Lock to lock the phone.
3
Unlock the phone:
1
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
The prompt, “To unlock the phone...Password:”
2
Enter the user or administrator password and press Enter.
The phone unlocks.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Locking/Unlocking the Phone Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following Aastra Web UI procedure to lock/unlock an IP phone and
prevent it from being used or configured.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Operation->Phone Lock.
Lock the phone:
In the “Lock the Phone?” field, click
2
.
The phone locks dynamically and displays the following message:
“Phone is locked”.
Unlock the phone:
3
4
Click on Operation->Phone Lock.
In the “Unlock the Phone?” field, click
.
The phone unlocks dynamically and displays the following message:
“Phone is unlocked”.
5-12
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Configuring a Lock/Unlock Key Using the Configuration Files
Using the configuration files, you can configure a key on the phone (softkey,
programmable key, or expansion module key) to use as a lock/unlock key. In the
configuration files, you assign the function of the key as “phonelock”.
Use the following procedure to configure a key as a lock/unlock key using
Configuration Files
To configure a softkey/programmable key as a lock/unlock key using the configuration files, see Appendix A,
Reference
To use the lock/unlock softkey or programmable key, see “Using the Configured
Lock/Unlock Key on the IP Phone” on page 5-15.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuring a Lock/Unlock Key using the Aastra Web UI
Using the Aastra Web UI, you can configure a key on the phone (softkey,
programmable key, expansion module key) to use as a lock/unlock key. In the
Aastra Web UI, you assign the function of the as “Phone Lock”.
Use the following procedure to configure a key as a lock/unlock key using the
Aastra Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML
or
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys
or
Click on Operation->Expansion Module <N>.
Note: Depending on your phone-model, the key configuration screen displays. The 57i Key Screen is
shown as an example.
2
Select a key you want to configure for locking/unlocking the phone.
5-14
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
3
4
In the “Type” field, select Phone Lock from the list of options.
Click
to save your changes.
Using the Configured Lock/Unlock Key on the IP Phone
After configuring a key as a lock/unlock key, refer to the following procedure to
use the key on the IP phone.
IP Phone UI
Step Action
Lock the phone:
1
Press the LOCK softkey.
The phone locks.
The LED for the softkey AND the Message Waiting Lamp illuminate steady ON.
An “Unlock” label appears next to the softkey you just pressed.
Unlock the phone:
1
Press the UNLOCK softkey.
A password prompt displays.
2
Enter the user or administrator password and press ENTER.
The phone unlocks.
The LED for the softkey AND the Message Waiting Lamp go OFF.
The “Lock” label appears next to the softkey you just pressed.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Defining an Emergency Dial Plan
Public telephone networks in countries around the world have a single emergency
telephone number (emergency services number), that allows a caller to contact
local emergency services for assistance when required. The emergency telephone
number may differ from country to country. It is typically a three-digit number so
that it can be easily remembered and dialed quickly. Some countries have a
different emergency number for each of the different emergency services.
You can specify the digits to dial on the IP phone for contacting emergency
services. Once you specify the emergency number(s) on the phone, you can dial
those numbers directly on the dial pad when required and the phone automatically
dials to those emergency services.
Note: Contact your local phone service provider for available emergency
numbers in your area.
The following table describes the default emergency numbers on the IP phones.
Emergency Number
Description
911
999
112
A United States emergency number
A United Kingdom emergency number
An international emergency telephone
number for GSM mobile phone networks.
In all European Union countries it is also the
emergency telephone number for both
mobile and fixed-line telephones.
110
A police and/or fire emergency number in
Asia, Europe, Middle East, and South
America.
You can set the emergency dial plan via the configuration files or the Aastra Web
UI.
5-16
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Configuring an Emergency Dial Plan
Use the following procedures to specify the numbers to use on your phone for
dialing emergency services in your area.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Emergency Dial
Plan Settings” on page A-15.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Operation->Phone Lock.
2
3
In the “Emergency Dial Plan” field, enter the 3-digit number used in your local area to contact emer-
gency services. For multiple numbers, enter a “|” between each emergency number.
For example:
911|110.
Default for this field is 911|999|112|110.
Click
to save the emergency dial plan to your phone.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Time and Date
In addition to enabling/disabling the time server, you can also set the time and
date, set the time and date format, set the time zone, and set daylight savings time
on the IP phones. You configure these features using the configuration files, the IP
Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI. The following table identifies which method of
configuration applies to each feature.
Feature
Method of configuration
Set Time
IP Phone UI
Set Time Format
Configuration Files
IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Set Date
IP Phone UI
Set Date Format
Configuration Files
IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Set Time Zone
IP Phone UI
Configuration Files
Set Daylight Savings Time
IP Phone UI
Configuration Files
Daylight Savings Time (DST) Information
The Aastra IP Phones incorporate the federally mandated DST observance
change. This change became affective starting in 2007.
The US has made a change to its daylight savings time observance starting in
2007. The Energy Policy Act of 2005 mandates that DST will now begin at 2:00
A.M. on the second Sunday in March and revert to Standard time on the first
Sunday in November.
Note: In previous years, the DST began on the first Sunday of April and
ended on the first Sunday of October.
The changes to daylight savings time applies to the U.S. and Canada, but may
impact other countries outside North America.
5-18
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Time Zone & DST
First Method - You can set a time zone using the Time Zone option in the IP
Phone UI or you can use the “time zone name” parameter in the configuration
files. Both methods allow you to enter a value from the Time Zone table. The list
of time zone names is provided in the table in Appendix A, the section, “Time
Zone Name/Time Zone Code Table” on page A-47. The following is an example:
time zone name: US-Eastern
Second Method - You can use the “time zone name” parameter in the
configuration files, and specify a value of “custom” for this parameter. This
method allows you to customize the time zone for your area using additional
configuration parameters. The following is an example using relative time for
EST:
time zone name: custom
The following table identifies the additional parameters you can enter in the
configuration files if you want to customize your time zone.
Custom Configuration
File Parameter
Description
Example
time zone minutes
The number of minutes the time zone is custom time zone minutes: 300
offset from UTC (Coordinated Universal
Time). This can be positive (West of the
Prime Meridian) or negative (East of the
Prim Meridian). Eastern Standard Time
(EST) has a value of 300.
dst minutes
The number of minutes to add during
Daylight Saving Time. Valid values are a
positive integer between 0 to 60.
dst minutes: 60
dst [start|end] relative date
Specifies how to interpret the start and
end day, month, and week parameters -
absolute (0) or relative (1).
dst [start|end] relative date: 1
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Custom Configuration
File Parameter
Description
Example
Absolute Time (not applicable to Eastern Standard Time (EST))
dst start month
The month that DST starts. Valid values dst start month: 3
are 1 to 12 (January to December).
dst end month
The month that DST ends. Valid values dst end month: 4
are 1 to 12 (January to December).
dst [start |end] week
dst start day
Not applicable to absolute time.
N/A
The day of the month that DST starts.
Valid values are 1 to 31.
dst start day: 15
dst end day
dst start hour
dst end hour
The day of the month that DST ends.
Valid values are 1 to 31.
dst end day: 31
dst start hour: 5
dst end hour: 23
The hour that DST starts. Valid values
are an integer from 0 (midnight) to 23.
The hour that DST ends. Valid values
are an integer from 0 (midnight) to 23.
Relative Time
dst start month
The month that DST starts. Valid values dst start month: 4
are 1 to 12 (January to December).
dst end month
dst start week
The month that DST ends. Valid values dst end month: 5
are 1 to 12 (January to December).
The week in the specified month in
which DST starts. Valid value is a
positive or negative integer from 1 to 5.
dst start week: 2
1 = first full week of month
-1 = last full week of month
2 = second full week of month
.
.
.
-5 -= fifth full week of month
5-20
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Custom Configuration
File Parameter
Description
Example
dst end week
The week in the specified month in
which DST ends. Valid value is a
positive or negative integer from 1 to 5.
dst end week: -1
1 = first full week of month
-1 = last full week of month
2 = second full week of month
.
.
.
-5 -= fifth full week of month
dst start day
The day of the specified week in the
specified month that DST starts on. Valid
values are an integer from 1 to 7.
dst start day: 2
1 = Sunday
2 = Monday
.
.
.
7 = Saturday
dst end day
The day of the specified week in the
specified month that DST ends on. Valid
values are an integer from 1 to 7.
dst end day: 7
1 = Sunday
2 = Monday
.
.
.
7 = Saturday
dst start hour
dst end hour
The hour that DST starts. Valid values
are an integer from 0 (midnight) to 23.
dst start hour: 10
dst end hour: 23
The hour that DST ends. Valid values
are an integer from 0 (midnight) to 23.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Example 1
The following is an example of a custom time zone configuration in the
configuration files using relative time (for EST):
time zone name: custom
dst [start|end] relative date: 1 #relative
time zone minutes: 300
dst minutes: 60
Example 2
The following is an example of a custom time zone configuration in the
configuration files using absolute time:
time zone name: custom
dst [start|end] relative date: 0 #absolute
#start of DST
dst start month: 3 #March
dst start week: 2 #second full week
dst start day: 1 #Sunday
#End of DST
dst end month: 11 #November
dst end week: 1 #first full week
dst end day: 1 #Sunday
Configuring Time and Date Using the Configuration Files
Use the following information to set a time and date, time and date format, time
zone, and daylight savings time using the configuration files..
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Time and Date
Settings” on page A-45.
5-22
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Configuring Time and Date Using the IP Phone UI
Use the following procedure to set a time and date, time and date format, time
zone, and daylight savings time using the IP Phone UI.
IP Phone UI
Step Action
Press
Set Time and Time Format:
1
on the phone to enter the Options List.
2
3
4
5
6
Select Time and Date.
Select Set Time.
Using the keys on the keypad, enter a time to set on the IP phone.
Press Done to save the time you entered.
Select Time Format.
Valid values are 12hr and 24hr.
Note: The default Time Format is 12hr.
7
8
Press Change to toggle between 24hr and 12hr format.
Press Done to save the Time Format you selected.
Set Date and Date Format:
9
Select Set Date.
10
11
12
13
Using the keys on the keypad, enter a date to set on the IP phone.
Press Done to save the date you entered.
Select Date Format.
Select a date format from the list of options.
Valid values are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
WWW MMM DD (default)
DD-MMM-YY
YYYY-MM-DD
DD/MM/YYYY
DD/MM/YY
DD-MM-YY
MM/DD/YY
MMM DD
Note: The default Date Format is WWW MMM DD (Day of Week, Month, Day).
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
IP Phone UI
Step Action
14
Press Done to save the Date Format.
Set Time Zone:
15
16
Select Time Zone.
For 9143i, 51i, 53i:
Press * to display a list of Time Zone options.
17
Select a Time Zone from the list of options.
For valid values, see Appendix A, the section, “Time and Date Settings” on page A-45.
Note: The default Time Zone is US-Eastern.
Press Done to save the Time Zone you selected.
18
Set Daylight Savings Time:
19
20
Select Daylight Savings.
Select a Daylight Savings time from the list of options.
Valid values are:
•
•
•
•
OFF
30 min summertime
1 hr summertime
automatic
Note: The default for Daylight Savings is Automatic.
21
Press Done to save the Daylight Savings value you selected.
5-24
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Configuring Time and Date Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to set a time and date, time and date format, time
zone, and daylight savings time using the Aastra Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Time and Date Setting.
2
3
In the “Time Format” field, select the time format you want to use on your phone. Valid values are:
•
•
12h (12 hour format) (default)
24h (24 hour format).
Note: The time displays on the phone’s idle screen in the format you select for this field.
In the “Date Format” field, select the date format you want to use on your phone. Valid values are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
WWW MMM DD (default)
DD-MMM-YY
YYYY-MM-DD
DD/MM/YYYY
DD/MM/YY
DD-MM-YY
MM/DD/YY
MMM DD
Note: The date displays on the phone’s idle screen in the format you select for this field.
Click to save your changes.
4
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Backlight Mode (9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT only)
The 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT have a backlight feature that allows you
to turn the backlight on the LCD:
•
•
•
On (always on)
Off (always off)
Auto (off after a period of inactivity)
“The Auto” setting sets the phone to turn off the backlighting after a period of
inactivity. The period of time that the phone waits before turning the backlight off
is also configurable.
You can set this backlight feature using the configuration files and the IP Phone
UI.
Configuring the Backlight Mode Using the Configuration Files
Use the following information to set the backlight mode and backlight timer on
the IP Phones.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Backlight Mode
Settings (9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, 57i CT)” on page A-60.
Configuring the Backlight Mode Using the IP Phone UI
Use the following procedure to set the backlight mode and backlight timer on the
IP Phone using the IP Phone UI.
IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
2
3
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select Preferences.
Select Display.
5-26
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
IP Phone UI
Step Action
4 Select Backlight.
Display
1. Contrast Level
2. Backlight
- Select
Done -
5
Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to select the Backlight status for your phone.
Default is “On”. Valid options are:
•
•
•
Off
On (Default)
Auto
Note: Setting the Backlight to “Auto” displays an ADVANCED button for you to set the Auto timer.
Backlight
Off
On
Auto
Cancel -
Done -
6
If you select “On” or “Off”, press Done to save your setting.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
IP Phone UI
Step Action
7
If you select “Auto”, press the Advanced softkey to set the automatic timer.
Backlight
Off
On
Auto
Advanced -
Cancel -
Done -
8
Using the keypad, enter the amount of seconds you want the phone to stay backlit when the phone is
idle. Default is 10 seconds. Valid values are 1 to 30.
When this period of time is reached, the phone turns off the backlight. Use the “Backspace” and/or
“Clear” softkeys to delete entries if required.
Backlight On Time
10 seconds
- Backspace
Cancel -
Done -
- Clear
9
Press Done to save your setting. The setting applies immediately to the phone.
5-28
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Live Dial Pad*
The "Live Dialpad" option on the IP phone turns the Live Dial Pad mode ON or
OFF. With live dial pad ON, the IP phone automatically dials out and turns ON
Handsfree mode as soon as a dial pad key or softkey is pressed. With live dial pad
OFF, if you dial a number while the phone is on-hook, lifting the receiver or
pressing the
initiates a call to that number.
*Availability of feature dependant on your phone system or service provider.
A User can turn the “Live Dialpad” ON and OFF using the IP Phone UI only. A
System Administrator can turn it ON and OFF using the IP Phone UI or the
configuration files.
Enabling/Disabling Live Dialpad Using the Configuration Files
Use the following procedure to enable/disable Live Dialpad on the IP Phones.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Live Dialpad
Settings” on page A-61.
Enabling/Disabling Live Dialpad Using the IP Phone UI
Use the following procedure to enable/disable Live Dialpad on the IP Phones.
IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
2
3
4
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select Preferences.
Select Live Dialpad.
On 9143i, 51i, 53i:
Press the UP and DOWN arrow keys to toggle the live dialpad setting ON or OFF.
On 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, 57i CT:
Press Change to toggle the live dialpad setting ON or OFF.
5
Press Done to save the setting.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Language
The IP phones support several different languages. You can have the IP phone UI
and the Aastra Web UI display in a specific language as required. When you set
the language to use, all of the display screens (menus, services, options,
configuration parameters, etc.) display in that language. The IP phones support
the following languages:
Associated Language File
(included in the firmware file when
downloaded from configuration
server)
Available Language
English
Default (resides on the phone)
German
lang_de.txt
lang_es.txt
(German)*
(Spanish)
Spanish
Mexican Spanish
French
lang_es_mx.txt (Mexican Spanish)
lang_fr.txt
(French)
Canadian French
Italian
lang_fr_ca.txt
lang_it.txt
(Canadian French)
(Italian)*
*German and Italian languages are not applicable to the 57i CT cordless handset.
Loading Language Packs
You make languages available to use on the phone by loading language packs
from the configuration server to the local <MAC>.cfg configuration file. You can
use the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI to perform the download. Each
language pack consists of the IP Phone UI and Aastra Web UI translated in a
specific language.
Loading Language Packs via the Configuration File (<mac>.cfg)
Using the configuration files, you specify a language pack to load in the following
format:
lang_<ISO 639>_<ISO 3166>.txt
or
lang_<ISO 639>.txt
5-30
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational Features
where <ISO 639> is the language code specified in Standard ISO 639
(see Appendix A, the section, Language Codes (from Standard ISO 639) on
page A-157) and <ISO 3166> is the country code specified in Standard ISO 3166
(see Country Codes (from Standard ISO 3166) on page A-157).
The <ISO 3166> attribute is optional.
Note: Adding/changing language packs can only be done at bootup of the
IP phone. The default language (English) cannot be changed or removed.
Example
The following is an example of the parameters you would enter in the <MAC>.cfg
file to load a French, Italian, German, and Spanish language pack to the IP phone.
language 1: lang_fr_ca.txt
language 2: lang_it.txt
language 3: lang_de.txt
language 4: lang_es_mx.txt
The above entries in the <MAC>.cfg file tells the phone which language packs to
load. When the language pack(s) have loaded, you must then use the configuration
use the Aastra Web UI to specify the language to use in the Web UI.
References
For more information about specifying the language to use, see the section,
“Specifying the Language to Use” on page 5-33.
For more information about language codes and country codes, see Appendix A,
the section, “Language Pack Settings” on page A-156.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Loading Language Packs via the Aastra Web UI
Using the Aastra Web UI, you can specify a language pack to load using the
parameters at Basic Settings->Preferences->Language Settings.
You use the following fields in the Aastra Web UI to specify which language
packs to load:
Once the language pack is loaded to the phone, it is available for selection from
either the configuration files, the IP Phone UI or the Aastra Web UI.
5-32
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Specifying the Language to Use
Once the language pack(s) have loaded, you must then specify which language to
use on the phone. After the phone has booted up, you can specify which
language(s) to use. You can use the configuration files and the IP Phone UI to
specify the language for the IP Phone UI. You can use the Aastra Web UI to
specify the files for the Aastra Web UI.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Language
Settings” on page A-154 and “Language Pack Settings” on page A-156.
Notes:
1.
If you specify the language to use on the phone via the
configuration files, you must reboot the phone for the changes to take
affect.
2.
All languages may not be available for selection. The available
languages are dependant on the language packs currently loaded to the IP
phone.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
2
3
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select Language.
Select English (English), Français (French), Español (Spanish), Deutsch (German), Italiano
(Italian).
Notes:
1. Valid values for the 57i CT cordless handset are English, French, and Spanish only.
2. All languages may not be available for selection. The available languages are dependant on the
language packs currently loaded to the IP phone. English is the default language and cannot be
changed or removed. For more information about loading language packs, see “Loading Language
Packs” on page 5-30.
4
Press Done to save the changes.
The change is dynamic. The IP phone UI displays all menu items in the language you chose.
5-34
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Language Settings.
Loading the Language Pack
2
In the “Language N” fields, enter the file name of the language pack you want to use to display a
specific language in the Aastra Web UI. For example, you could enter the following in the
“Language 1”, “Language 2”, “Language 3”, and “Language 4” fields to display the Aastra Web UI in
French, Spanish, German, and Italian:
lang_de.txt
lang_es.txt
lang_es_mx.txt
lang_fr.txt
lang_fr_ca.txt
lang_it.txt
Note: You must have the language pack(s) already loaded to your phone in order to use them. For
more information about loading language packs, see “Loading Language Packs” on page 5-30.
For more information about language codes and country codes, see Appendix A, the section,
“Language Pack Settings” on page A-156.
3
Click
to save your changes.
Specifying the Language to Use in the Aastra Web UI
4
5
After restarting your phone, log back in using the Aastra Web UI.
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Language Settings.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
6
In the “Webpage Language” field, select a language to apply to the Aastra Web UI. The IP phone
supports the following languages:
•
•
•
•
•
English (default)
French (European French and Canadian French)
Spanish (European Spanish and Mexican Spanish)
German
Italian
Notes:
1. Valid values for the 57i CT cordless handset are English, French, and Spanish only.
2. All languages may not be available for selection. The available languages are dependant on the
language packs currently loaded to the IP phone. English is the default language and cannot be
changed or removed.
7
Click
to save your changes.
The Aastra Web UI displays all screens in the language you chose.
5-36
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Specifying the Input Language to Use
The 5i Series phones support text and character inputs in various languages
(English, German, French, Spanish, and Italian).
Inputting textual or character information into the IP Phone UI, Aastra Web UI,
and XML scripts can now be done in various languages using the keypad on the
phone. The System Administrator and User can enable this feature using the
Aastra Web UI or the IP Phone UI. An Administrator can also use the
configuration files to enable this feature. Users can then use text and characters in
a specific language when performing inputs on the phone.
The following tables identify the language characters that a User can enter on the
5i Series phones that support the Input Language feature.
Keypad Input Alphabet Tables
English
Key
0
Uppercase Characters
Lowercase Characters
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
*
1.:;=_,-'&()
ABC2
1.:;=_,-'&()
abc2
DEF3
def3
GHI4
ghi4
JKL5
jkl5
MNO6
PQRS7
TUV8
mno6
pqrs7
tuv8
WXYZ9
* <SPACE>
#/\@
wxyz9
* <SPACE>
#/\@
#
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
French
Key
0
Uppercase Characters
Lowercase Characters
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
*
1.:;=_,-'&()
ABC2ÀÂÇÁÅÆ
DEF3ÉÈÊË
GHI4ÎÏ
1.:;=_,-'&()
abc2àâçáåæ
def3éèêë
ghi4îï
JKL5
jkl5
MNO6ÑÓÒÔÖ
PQRS7
mno6ñóòôö
pqrs7
TUV8ÚÙÛÜ
WXYZ9
tuv8úùûü
wxyz9
* <SPACE>
#/\@
* <SPACE>
#/\@
#
Spanish
Key
0
Uppercase Characters
Lowercase Characters
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
*
1.:;=_,-'&()
ABC2ÁÀÇ
DEF3ÉÈ
GHI4ÏÍ
1.:;=_,-'&()
abc2áàç
def3éè
ghi4ïí
JKL5
jkl5
MNO6ÑÓÒ
PQRS7
mno6ñóò
pqrs7
TUV8ÚÜ
WXYZ9
tuv8úü
wxyz9
* <SPACE>
#/\@
* <SPACE>
#/\@
#
5-38
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
German
Key
Uppercase Characters
Lowercase Characters
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
*
0
0
1.:;=_,-'&()
ABC2ÄÀ
DEF3É
GHI4
1.:;=_,-'&()
abc2äà
def3é
ghi4
JKL5
jkl5
MNO6Ö
PQRS7ß
TUV8Ü
WXYZ9
* <SPACE>
#/\@
mno6ö
pqrs7ß
tuv8ü
wxyz9
* <SPACE>
#/\@
#
Italian
Key
0
Uppercase Characters
Lowercase Characters
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
*
1.:;=_,-'&()
ABC2ÀCÇ
DEF3ÉÈË
GHI4
1.:;=_,-'&()
abc2àcç
def3éèë
ghi4
JKL5
jkl5
MNO6ÓÒ
PQRS7
TUV8Ù
mno6óò
pqrs7
tuv8ù
WXYZ9
* <SPACE>
#/\@
wxyz9
* <SPACE>
#/\@
#
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuring Language Input Using the Configuration Files
An Administrator can specify the input language to use by entering a specific
parameter in the configuration files. An Administrator must enter the following
parameter to enable this feature:
•
input language
Use the following procedures to specify the input language to use on the IP phone.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Language
Settings” on page A-154.
Configuring Language Input Using the IP Phone UI
Once “Language Input” is enabled, an Administrator or User can change the input
language on the phone using the IP Phone UI. The “Input Language” option
appears under the Language option in the IP Phone UI.
Example
Input Language
1. English
2. Français
3. Español
4. Deutsch
5. Italiano
Preferences
1. Tones
2. Contrast Level
3. Speed Dial Edit
4. Live Dialpad
5. Set Audio
Language
1. Screen Language
2. Input Language
6. Time and Date
7. Language
- Select
Done -
- Select
Cancel -
Done -
Done -
Language Option
Input Language Option
Languages Available
5-40
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Use the following procedure to change the input language using the IP
Phone UI.
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
2
3
4
Press the Options key.
Select Language from the Options List.
Select Input Language from the Language List.
Select the language you want to use on the IP phone for inputting text and characters. Valid values
are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
English (default)
Français (French)
Español (Spanish)
Deutsch (German) (not applicable to 57i CT cordless handset)
Italiano (Italian) (not applicable to 57i CT cordless handset)
Note: Available input languages are dependent on the configuration enabled by your System
Administrator.
5
Press Done when you have selected a language.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuring Language Input Using the Aastra Web UI
Once “Language Input” is enabled, an Administrator or User can also change the
input language on the phone using the Aastra Web UI. The “Input Language”
option appears at the path Basic Settings->Preferences->Language Settings.
Use the following procedure to set the input language using the Aastra Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings-> Preferences->Language Settings.
2
Select a language from the "Input Language" field. Setting this field allows you to specify the
language to use when entering text in the Aastra Web UI, IP Phone UI, or in XML applications on the
phone. Valid values are:
•
•
•
•
•
English (default)
Français (French)
Español (Spanish)
Deutsch (German) (not applicable to 57i CT cordless handset)
Italiano (Italian) (not applicable to 57i CT cordless handset)
Note: Available input languages are dependent on the configuration enabled by your System
Administrator.
3
Click
to save your changes.
5-42
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Configuring Language Input for an XML Application
A System Administrator can enable input languages in XML applications using
the <AastraIPPhoneInputScreen> object and the “inputLanguage” attribute.
The “inputLanguage” attribute can have a value of any of the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
English
French
Français
German
Deutsch
Italian
Italiano
Spanish
Español
The following is an example of an XML script using the “inputLanguage”
attribute with a value of “German”.
XML Example:
<AastraIPPhoneInputScreen Beep=Yes inputLanguage=”German”>
<Title>Login Screen</Title>
<Prompt>User ID:</Prompt>
<Prompt>Password:</Prompt>
<URL>http://10.50.10.53/script.pl</URL>
<Parameter>UserID</Parameter>
<Parameter>Password</Parameter>
<Default></Default>
<AastraIPPhoneInputScreen>
XML Screen Example:
LOGON-Schirm
Benutzername: Verwalter
Kennwort: *********
Backspace
Dot
Cancel
Done
The screen above shows the user input of “Verwalter” in German.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Note: If a non-supported value is used with the “inputLanguage”
attribute in the XML script, the phone uses the input language that was
configured using the Aastra Web UI or the IP Phone UI. If the parameters
are not set in the Aastra Web UI or the Phone UI, the phone uses the
default of "English".
UTF- 8 Codec for Multi-National Language Support
The IP Phones and expansion modules include support for ISO 8859-2 (Latin2) of
multi-national languages when displaying and inputing in the IP Phone UI and the
Aastra Web UI.
Note: This feature is not applicable to the handsets on the 57i CT and the
9480i CT.
UTF-8 is also compatible with XML encoding on the IP Phones.
The following table illustrates the Latin 2 character set now used on the IP
Phones.
5-44
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Locking IP Phone Keys
The IP phones allow you to lock or unlock programmable keys, softkeys, hard
keys, cordless handset keys, and expansion keys (for expansion modules). When
key locking is enabled, the phone uses the server settings and ignores any
previous local configuration. A user cannot override the configuration of a locked
key.
You can lock and unlock keys using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, or
the Aastra Web UI. When viewing the locked key via the Aastra Web UI, the key
is grayed out (disabled) and cannot be changed. Locking is dynamic for XML
pushes.
You use the following “locking” parameters in the configuration files to lock the
softkeys and programmable keys on the 9143i, 9480i, 9480i CT, 53i, 55i, 57i, and
57i CT. The locking parameters impact existing softkey and programmable key
parameters as shown in the table below.
Locking Parameter
softkeyN locked
Impacted Parameters
Phone Model Affected
softkeyN type
softkeyN label
softkeyN value
softkeyN line
softkeyN states
9480i
9480i CT
55i
57i
57i CT
topsoftkeyN locked
prgkeyN locked
topsoftkeyN type
topsoftkeyN label
topsoftkeyN value
topsoftkeyN line
57i
57i CT
prgkeyN type
prgkeyN value
prgkeyN line
9143i
53i
55i
featurekeyN locked
featurekeyN type
featurekeyN label
9480i CT
57i CT
expmodX keyN locked
expmodX keyN type
expmodX keyN value
expmodX keyN line
5-series phones only
(not applicable to the 51i)
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Note: The 9143i and 53i IP phones prevent users from setting a speed
dial key via the Phone UI on a key that has been locked.
Locking the IP Phone Keys
Use the following procedures to lock the softkeys and programmable keys on the
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“Locking Softkeys and Programmable Keys” on page A-214.
Reference
For more information about locking/unlocking the phones using the Phone UI and
Aastra Web UI, see your applicable phone-specific User Guide.
Locking/Unlocking the SAVE and DELETE keys (53i)
There are 4 programmable keys on the 53i phone located to the left of the paper
label. Two additional keys (SAVE and DELETE) can be made programmable by
the Administrator, providing a total of 6 programmable keys if required.
Save Key
Delete Key
Directory
Callers List
Transfer
Conference
53i Programmable
Keys
5-46
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
If a System Administrator unlocks the SAVE and DELETE keys, these keys can
be configured with the same functions that are available for the other
programmable keys. Only the System Administrator can unlock these keys.
The Save key allows you to save entries to the Directory and perform a Save-To
from the Callers List. It also allows you to save speeddial information to a
programmable key. You can also use the Save key while using specific XML
applications.
The Delete key allows you to remove entries from the Directory List and Callers
List. (Must enter the Directory or Callers list and select an entry, then press twice
to delete entry).
By default, the Save and Delete keys are locked so that a user can use them for
saving and deleting only. An Administrator can unlock these keys using the
configuration files, allowing the keys to be programmed with other functions if
required. An Administrator can use the following parameters in the configuration
file to lock and unlock the Save and Delete keys:
• prgkey1 locked
• prgkey2 locked
The value of "0" unlocks the keys, and the value of "1" locks the keys. The default
is "1" (lock).
The following is an example of unlocking the Save and Delete keys using the
configuration files:
Example:
• prgkey1 locked: 0
• prgkey2 locked: 0
Once the Save and Delete keys are unlocked, a User can change the function of
the keys using the Aastra Web UI. An Administrator can change the function of
the keys using the Aastra Web UI or the configuration files.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
IMPORTANT: If you change the functions of the Save and Delete keys, and then
an Administrator locks Keys 1 and 2, the functions are automatically set back to
the default settings of "Save" and "Delete".
Note: The Save and Delete functions are limited to Key 1 and Key 2 on
the 53i IP phone only.
Locking and Unlocking the Save and Delete Keys using the
Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Locking the
SAVE and DLETE Keys (53i)” on page A-217.
5-48
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Local Dial Plan
A dial plan describes the number and pattern of digits that a user dials to reach a
particular telephone number. Access codes, area codes, specialized codes, and
combinations of the number of digits dialed are all part of a dial plan. For
instance, the North American Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) uses a
10-digit dial plan that includes a 3-digit area code and a 7-digit telephone number.
Most PBXs support variable length dial plans that use 3 to 11 digits. Dial plans
must comply with the telephone networks to which they connect. Only totally
private voice networks that are not linked to the PSTN or to other PBXs can use
any dial plan.
The IP phones have local dial plan capacity. You configure the SIP Local Dial
Plan using the Aastra Web UI or the configuration files.
The IP phone SIP local dial plan available symbols are as follows:
Symbol
Description
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
;
Digit symbol
Allows a secondary dial tone to be audible before dialing a
number.
X
Match any digit symbol (wildcard)
Other keypad symbol
*, #, .
|
Expression inclusive OR
+
[]
-
0 or more of the preceding digit symbol or [] expression
Symbol inclusive OR
Used only with [], represent a range of acceptable symbols;
For example, [2-8]
;
Used when a secondary dial tone is required on the phone.
(For example, “9;xxxxxx”, when a user has to dial “9” to get
and outside line and needs a secondary dial one presented
Dial Plan Example
An example of a SIP Local Dial Plan is:
[01]XXX|[2-8]XXXX|91XXXXXX
XXXX|X+.|*XX
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
The dial plan in the above example can accept any 4-digit dial strings that begin
with a '0' or '1', any 5-digit dial strings that begin with a '2' up to '8', any 12-digit
dial strings that begin with '91', any non-empty digit string that ends with a '.' or
any 2-digit code that begins with a '*'.
Prefix Dialing
The IP phones support a prefix dialing feature for outgoing calls.
You can manually dial a number or dial a number from a list. The phone
automatically maps the pre-configured prepended digit in the configuration, to the
outgoing number. When a match is found, the prepended digits are added to the
beginning of the dial string and the call is dialed.
Note: The prepend digits are also added if the dialing times-out on a
partial match.
You can enable this feature by adding a prepend digit(s) to the end of the Local
Dial Plan parameter string in the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI at
Basic Settings->Preferences->General.
For example, if you add a prepend map of “[2-9]XXXXXXXXX,91”, the IP
phone adds the digits “91” to any 10-digit number beginning with any digit from 2
to 9 that is dialed out. Other examples of prepend mappings are:
•
1X+#,9 (Prepends 9 to any digit string beginning with “1” and terminated
with “#”.)
•
•
6XXX,579 (Prepends “579” to any 4-digit string starting with “6”.)
[4-6]XXXXXX,78 (Prepends “78” to any 7-digit string starting with “4”, “5”, or “6”.)
Note: You can configure a local dial plan via the configuration files or
the Aastra Web UI.
Example
If you enter the following dial string for a local dial plan:
sip dial plan: 1+#,9
5-50
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
where “9” is the prepended digit, and you dial the following number:
15551212
the IP phone automatically adds the “9” digit to the beginning of the dialed
number before the number is forwarded as 915551212.
Note: You can configure a local dial plan via the configuration files or
the Aastra Web UI.
SIP Dial Plan Terminator
The IP phone allows you to enable or disable the use of the “dial plan terminator”.
When you configure the phone’s dial plan to use a dial plan terminator or timeout
(such as the pound symbol (#)) the phone waits 4 or 5 seconds after you pick up
the handset or after you finish dialing the numbers on the keypad before making
the call.
You can enable or disable the dial plan terminator using Aastra Web UI or the
configuration files.
Digit Timeout
The IP phone allows you to configure a “Digit Timeout” feature on the IP phone.
The Digit Timeout is the time, in seconds, between consecutive key presses on the
IP phone’s keypad. The default for this parameter is 4 seconds. If you press a key
on the phone and wait 4 seconds before pressing the next key, the key times out
and cancels the digit selection. You must press consecutive keys before the
timeout occurs.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Secondary Dial Tone
The IP phones now support a feature that allows the user to dial a predefined dial
string, obtain a dial tone, and continue dialing. A User or Administrator can
configure this using the existing Dial Plan feature on the phone.
You can enter a new character string in the dial plan that allows you to configure
the secondary dial tone. The character string is of the form ".;." , where the period
indicates an arbitrary number of digits and the semicolon indicates that the phone
is to present a dial tone after the previous dialed digit. For example, in the string:
"9;xxxxx"
the user dials “9” to get the outside line, listens for the dial tone, and continues to
dial the applicable number. The “;” tells the phone to present a second dial tone
after the previously dialed digit. “The “xxxxx” in the example tells the phone that
a phone number is dialed after the secondary dial tone is audible.
You can enter the Secondary Dial Tone string in the Dial Plan using the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
You use the following parameter in the configuration files to configure a
secondary dial tone:
•
sip dial plan
Example
sip dial plan: “9;5551313”
5-52
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Configuring the SIP Local Dial Plan, Dial Plan Terminator, and Digit
Timeout
Use the following procedures to configure the SIP Local Dial Plan using the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “SIP Local Dial
Plan Settings” on page A-62.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences.
2
3
In the "Local Dial Plan" field, enter a valid local dial plan (up to 127 alphanumeric characters) for the
IP phone. Default is X+#|XX+*. Enter prepended digits or a “;”to present a secondary dial tone if
required.
Enable the "Send Dial Plan Terminator" field by checking the check box. (Disable this field by
unchecking the box). Default is disabled.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
4
5
In the "Digit Timeout (in seconds)" field, enter a timeout value. This is the length of time, in
seconds, he phone waits before dialing. Default is 4 seconds.
Click
to save your changes.
5-54
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Park Calls/Pick Up Parked Calls
The IP phones (including the 57i CT handset) have a park and pickup call feature
that allows you to park a call and pickup a call when required. There are two ways
a user or administrator can configure this feature:
•
•
Using a static configuration (globally configures park and pickup)
Using a programmable configuration
Note: The IP phones accept both methods of configuration. However, to
avoid redundancy, Aastra Telecom recommends you configure either a
static configuration or a programmable configuration.
The IP phones support the Park/Pickup feature on the Asterisk, BroadWorks,
Sylantro, and ININ PBX servers.
IP phones.
Reference
For information on configuring the park and pickup programmable configuration
(using a key), see “Park/Pick Up Key” on page 5-219.
Park/Pickup Static Configuration (9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, 57i CT only)
Using the static method of configuring park and pickup configures these features
on a global basis for all IP phones connected in the network. You can use the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI to configure a park/pickup static
configuration.
In the configuration files, you use the following parameters to statically configure
park/pickup:
•
•
sprecode:
pickupsprecode:
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
In the Aastra Web UI, you use the following fields at Basic Settings->
Preferences to configure park/pickup statically:
•
•
Park Call
Pickup Call
How It displays on the Phone
On the IP phone UI, the static configuration method displays the following:
•
When a call comes in, and you pickup the handset, the default label of "Park"
displays on the first screen of the Phone UI.
•
After pressing the "Park" softkey to park the call, the default label of
"Pickup" displays on the first screen of the phone UI.
Note: On the 57i CT handset, pressing Ï displays the "Park" and
"Pickup" labels.
The values you enter for the Park/Pickup feature are dependant on your type of
server. The following table provides the values you enter for the “sprecode” and
“pickupsprecode” parameters (configuration files), or "Park Call" and "Pickup
Parked Call" fields (Aastra Web UI).
Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values
Server
Park Values*
Pickup Values*
Aasterisk
Sylantro
BroadWorks
ININ PBX
70
*98
70
*99
*68
*88
callpark
pickup
*Leave "value" fields blank to disable the park and pickup feature.
5-56
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Configuring Park /Pickup using Static Configuration
(9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, 57i CT only)
Use the following procedures to configure the Park/Pickup call feature using the
static configuration method.
Note: Aastra recommends you configure either the static or the
programmable configuration, but not both.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“Park and Pickup Global Settings (9480i, 9480i CT, 57i/57i CT only)” on page A-179.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.
2
3
4
Note: For values to enter in this field, see the table “Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values”
on page 5-56.
Enter a server value in the "Pickup Parked Call" field.
Note: For values to enter in this field, see the table “Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values”
on page 5-56.
Click
to save your changes.
5-58
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Suppressing DTMF Playback
A feature on the IP phones allows users and administrators to enable or disable the
suppression of DTMF playback when a number is dialed from the softkeys and
programmable keys.
When suppression of DTMF playback is disabled, and you press a softkey or
programmable key, the IP phone dials the stored number and displays each digit
as dialed in the LCD window.
When the suppression of DTMF playback is enabled, the IP phone dials the stored
number and displays the entire number immediately in the LCD window, allowing
the call to be dialed much faster.
DTMF playback suppression is disabled by default. Suppressing DTMF playback
can be configured using the Aastra Web UI and the configuration files.
Configuring Suppression of DTMF Playback
Use the following procedures to configure the suppression of DTMF playback on
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Suppress DTMF
Playback Setting” on page A-165.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.
2
3
Enable the "Suppress DTMF Playback" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the box). Default is disabled.
Click
to save your settings.
You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect.
4
5
Click on Operation->Reset.
In the "Restart Phone" field click
to restart the IP phone and apply the changes.
5-60
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Display DTMF Digits
A feature on the IP phones allows users and administrators to enable or disable
DTMF (dual-tone multi-frequency) digits to display to the IP phone when using
the keypad to dial, or when dialing from a softkey or programmable key.
DTMF is the signal sent from the phone to the network that you generate when
you press the phone’s touch keys. This is also known as “touchtone” dialing. Each
key you press on your phone generates two tones of specific frequencies. One
tone is generated from a high-frequency group of tones and the other from a low
frequency group.
If you enable the Display DTMF Digits parameter, the digits you are dialing from
the keypad or from a softkey or programmable key display to the IP phone’s LCD
display. This parameter is disabled by default (no digits display when dialing).
You can enable the “Display DTMF Digits” parameter using the configuration
files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring Display DTMF Digits
Use the following procedures to configure the suppression of DTMF playback on
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Display DTMF
Digits Setting” on page A-166.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.
2
3
Enable the "Display DTMF Digits" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the box). Default is disabled.
Click
to save your settings.
You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect.
4
5
Click on Operation->Reset.
In the "Restart Phone" field click
to restart the IP phone and apply the changes.
5-62
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Call Waiting/Call Waiting Tone
A call waiting feature notifies the user currently on the phone, of a new incoming
call. You can disable this call waiting feature, so that the new incoming call is
automatically rejected by the phone with a busy message. A User or
Administrator can configure this feature.
If you disable call waiting on the phone, and the user is on a call, any further
incoming calls will receive busy unless “Call Forward Busy” or “Call Forward No
Answer and Busy” is configured on the phone. It will then forward the call
according to the rule configured. The phone can only:
•
transfer the currently active call
or
•
accept transferred calls if there is no active calls.
If call waiting is disabled:
•
on the 57i CT bases, and the handset is currently on a call, all additional
incoming calls are rejected on the handset.
•
•
•
intercom calls are treated as regular incoming calls and are rejected.
pre-dialing with live dial pad disabled still accepts incoming calls.
the “Incoming Call Cancels Dialing” parameter is ignored because the
incoming call is automatically rejected.
•
•
the Missed Calls List does not get updated with details of calls.
the Blind Transfer feature on the phone may not work if two calls are made to
the phone at one time.
You can enable/disable call waiting using the configuration files or the Aastra
Web UI.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Call Waiting Tone
You can also enable or disable the playing of a short “Call Waiting Tone" when
there is an incoming call on your phone. This feature is enabled by default. If you
have Call Waiting enabled, and a call comes into the line for which you are on an
active call, a tone is audible to notify you of that incoming call. The tone is also
audible to the caller to indicate to that caller you are currently on another call.
Note: The Call Waiting Tone feature works only if Call Waiting is
enabled.
A User or Administrator can configure this feature. An Administrator can
configure this feature using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring Call Waiting/Call Waiting Tone
Use the following procedures to configure the Call Waiting/Call Waiting Tone
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Call Waiting
Settings” on page A-144.
5-64
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings-> Preferences->General.
2
3
The "Call Waiting" field is enabled by default. To disable this field, uncheck the box. This feature
allows you to enable or disable the call waiting feature on the IP phone.
The "Play Call Waiting Tone" field is enabled by default. To disable this field, uncheck the box. This
feature allows you to enable or disable the call waiting tone on the IP phone.
Note: The Call Waiting Tone feature works only if the “Call Waiting” tone field is enabled.
4
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Stuttered Dial Tone
You can enable or disable the playing of a stuttered dial tone when there is a
message waiting on the IP phone.
You can configure this feature using the configuration files and the Aastra Web
UI.
Configuring Stuttered Dial Tone
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling stuttered dial tone, see
Appendix A, the section, “Stuttered Dial Tone Setting” on page A-143.
5-66
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.
2
3
The "Stuttered Dial Tone" field is enabled by default. To disable this field, uncheck the box.
Click to save your changes.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
XML Beep Support
The IP phones have a feature that allows you to enable or disable a beep on the
phone with it receives a status message from an XML application. This beep can
XML script.
Reference
For more information about enabling/disabling the XML Beep Support in an
XML script, see “XML Customized Services” on page 5-296.
Configuring XML Beep Support
Use the following procedures to enable/disable XML Beep Support.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “XML Settings”
on page A-127.
5-68
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.
2
3
The “XML Beep Support” field is enabled by default. To disable this field, uncheck the box.
Click to save your changes.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Status Scroll Delay
The IP phones have a feature that allows you to specify the time delay, in seconds,
between the scrolling of each status message (including XML status messages) on
the phone. The default time is 5 seconds for each message to display before
files or the Aastra Web UI.
Reference
For more information about configuring the status scroll delay for XML status
messages, see “XML Customized Services” on page 5-296.
Configuring Status Scroll Delay
Use the following procedures to configure Status Scroll Delay.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “XML Settings”
on page A-127.
5-70
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.
2
3
In the “Status Scroll Delay (seconds)” field, enter a value, in seconds, that each XML status
message displays on the phone. Default is 5 seconds. Valid values are 1 to 25.
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing
You can configure whether or not an incoming call interrupts an outgoing call that
is dialing. The “Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing” (Web UI) parameter or
“incoming call cancels dialing” (in config file) parameter controls this feature.
How it Works
When you enable this parameter (1 = enable), an incoming call interrupts the
outgoing call during dialing and allows the phone to ring for the user to answer the
incoming call.
When you disable this parameter (0 = disable), which is the default, the phone
does not interrupt the outgoing call during dialing and the number you were
dialing continues to display in the LCD. The phones sends the incoming call to a
free line on the phone (or sends busy signal if all remaining lines are busy) and the
LED for that line blinks. You have a choice to ignore the incoming call, or answer
the incoming call on another line, via the Ignore and Answer softkeys that
display. If you choose to answer the incoming call, you can answer the call, finish
the call, and then hang up. You can still go back to the original outgoing call and
finish dialing out.
Notes:
1.
On a 9143i, 51i, and 53i, you must use the down arrow key to
ignore the call. To answer the call you must press the line key where the
call is coming in.
2.
For all models, if you disable this parameter (0=disable), and the
phone receives an incoming call while you are dialing an outgoing call,
you can pick up the call and perform transfer or conference as required.
3.
This feature works only if the User selects a line for which to dial
out. It is recommended that the Administrator always keeps Live Dialpad
ON in order for the User to have to select a line before dialing out.
5-72
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Transfer/Conference Call Behavior
If you are dialing the phone to transfer or conference a call, and your phone
receives an incoming call, your dialing is never interrupted (regardless of whether
the “Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing” is enabled or disabled). For Transfer and
Conference, the incoming calls always go to an available line (other than the one
you are using for dialing) and the incoming call’s line LED blinks. The LCD still
displays your dialing screen.
Intercom Behavior
If “Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing” (Web UI) or “incoming call cancels
dialing” (config file) is enabled and you are dialing an outgoing Intercom call, the
enabled interrupt setting takes precedence over an enabled “Allow Barge In”
setting. The incoming call interrupts your dialing on an outgoing intercom call.
On an incoming intercom call, the enabled “Allow Barge In” and
“Auto-Answer” occurs while you are dialing to transfer or conference the call.
However, the incoming call goes to an available idle line, and the LED blinks
while you are dialing the second half of the conference or transfer.
If “Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing” (Web UI) or “incoming call cancels
dialing” (config file) is disabled, an incoming intercom goes to an available idle
line and the LED blinks for that line. The phone answers the call under all
conditions.
Configuring Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing
Use the following procedures to configure how the IP phone handles incoming
calls that interrupt outgoing dialing.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling how the IP phones
handle incoming calls that interrupt outgoing dialing, see Appendix A, the section, “Incoming Call Interrupts
Dialing Setting” on page A-138.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.
2
3
Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing is disabled by default.
If required, enable the "Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing" field by checking the check box.
Click
to save your changes.
5-74
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Switch Focus to Ringing Line
An Administrator or User can control the behavior of the phone when it receives
an incoming call when it is already in a connected call. By default, the phone
switches focus to the ringing line to enable the user to see who is calling them.
You can turn off this functionality so that the phone now stays focused on the
connected call. You can do this using the “switch focus to ringing line”
parameter in the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Note: If you configure the BLF/Xfer key(s) and/or Speeddial/Xfer
key(s) on the phone, you can enable or disable the switching of the
user interface focus to ringing line while the phone is in the connected
state.
Configuring “Switch Focus to Ringing Line”
You use the following procedures to enable or disable “Switch Focus to Ringing
Line”.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling disabling “Switch Focus to Ringing
Line”, see Appendix A, the section, “Switch Focus to Ringing Line” on page A-140.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.
.
“Switch Focus to Ringing Line” Parameter
2
3
The “Switch Focus to Ringing Line” field is enabled by default. To disable this field, uncheck the
box.
Click
to save your changes.
5-76
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout
An Administrator or User can define a preferred line as well as a preferred
timeout. If a preferred line is selected, after a call ends (incoming or outgoing),
the display switches back to the preferred line. Next time you go off-hook, you
pickup on the preferred line. You can specify the number of seconds it takes for
the phone to switch back to the preferred line using the “preferred timeout”
parameter.
An Administrator can configure the “preferred line” and the “preferred
timeout” parameters using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. A User
can configure these parameters using the Aastra Web UI only.
The following table provides the behavior of the preferred line focus feature with
other features on the phone.
Phone Feature
Preferred Line Behavior
call return
The phone switches back to the focused line immediately after
the call ends.
speeddial
conference
transfer
The line is already specified when the speeddial is created. The
phone switches back immediately after the call ends.
For incoming calls, the phone switches back immediately after
the call ends.
For incoming or outgoing calls, the current behavior is that the
same line used to transfer the call does not change. For incoming
calls, the phone switches back immediately after the call
transfers.
blf
The phone switches back immediately after the call ends.
The phone switches back immediately after the call ends.
The phone switches back immediately after the call ends.
The phone switches back immediately after the call ends.
park
voicemail
redial
dialing
For incomplete dialing on a non-preferred line, the focus does not
change if some digits are entered.
If no digits are entered or digits were cleared, the focus changes
to preferred line after the time out has passed without activities.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Phone Feature
Preferred Line Behavior
caller id
If the "Switch UI Focus To Ringing Line" parameter is disabled,
the User is able to see the Caller ID when the phone switches the
focus to the ringing line.
factory default
Factory default and recovery mode clears the "preferred line" and
"preferred line timeout" parameters, and the phone operates in a
non-preferred line mode.
Notes:
1.
If you specify a value of “0” for the preferred line parameter, it
disables the preferred line focus feature.
2.
If you specify a value of “0” for the preferred line timeout
parameter, the phone returns the line to the preferred line immediately.
Configuring the Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout
You use the following procedures to configure the Preferred Line and the
Preferred Line Timeout on the IP Phones.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for configuring the Preferred Line and Preferred
Line Timeout, see Appendix A, the section, “Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout” on page A-141.
5-78
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Use the following parameters to configure preferred line focus using the Aastra
Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.
Preferred Line
Preferred Line
Timeout
2
In the “Preferred Line” field, select a preferred line to switch focus to after incoming or outgoing
calls end on the phone. Valid values are:
•
•
None (disables the preferred line focus feature)
1 to 9
Default is 1.
For example, if you set the preferred line to “1”, when a call (incoming or outgoing) ends on the
phone (on any line), the phone switches focus back to Line 1.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
3
4
In the “Preferred Line Timeout” field, enter the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone
switches back to the preferred line after a call (incoming or outgoing) ends on the phone, or after a
duration of inactivity on an active line. Default is 0. Valid values are:
•
0 to 999
Click
to save your changes.
5-80
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call
You can configure the Goodbye key to drop active calls or ignore incoming calls
using the “goodbye cancels incoming call” parameter. This parameter controls
the behavior of the goodbye key when the phone is on an active call and a second
call is presented to the phone.
How it Works
When you enable this parameter (1 = enable in the configuration files), which is
the default, the Goodbye key rejects the incoming call. When you disable this
parameter (0 = disable in the configuration files), the Goodbye key hangs up the
active call.
For the 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT:
If you enable this parameter, and the phone receives another call when an active
call is already present, the phone displays softkey 1 as “answer” and softkey 2 as
“ignore”. You can press the required softkey as applicable.
For the 9143i, 51i, 53i:
If you enable this parameter, and the phone receives another call when an active
call is already present, the “ignore” option only displays in the LCD window. The
phone ignores the incoming call. If you press the DOWN arrow key, the phone
answers the incoming call.
You can set this parameter using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring the Goodbye Key to Cancel Incoming Calls
Use the following procedures to configure the behavior of the Goodbye Key on
the IP phone.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling the behavior of the
Goodbye Key, see Appendix A, the section, “Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing Setting” on page A-138.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.
2
3
Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing is disabled by default.
If required, enable the "Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing" field by checking the check box.
Click
to save your changes.
5-82
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
UPnP Mapping Lines (for remote phones)
Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a standard that uses Internet protocols to
enable devices to be plugged into a network and automatically know about each
other. With UPnP, when a user plugs a device into the network, the device
configures itself, acquires a TCP IP address, and uses a discovery protocol based
on the Internet's HTTP or HTTPS URL to announce its presence on the network
to other devices.
This method of device discovery on a network is called “Universal Plug and Play”
or UPnP. If you enable UPnP, and the phone is discovered on the network, port
mappings are set up between the phone and the Internet Gateway Device (IGD) in
your network. The phone controls the opening, closing, and polling of ports on the
IGD. HTTP and SIP use a single port each. RTP/RTCP uses a range of ports.
Mapping Lines.
Note: UPnP must be enabled on your remote phone before you can
configure the UPnP mapping lines. For information on enabling/disabling
UPnP see Chapter 4, the section, “Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) (for
remote phones)” on page 4-46.
Configuring UPnP Mapping Lines
Use the following procedures to configure UPnP mapping on specific lines on the
IP phone.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “UPnP Settings”
on page A-35.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.
2
3
The "UPnP Mapping Lines" field is set to 0 by default. If required, change the setting to a specific
line by selecting a line from the list. Valid values are 0 through 10. The line you select is the line that
your remote phone uses to perform Universal Plug and Play on the network you are connecting to.
Click
to save your changes.
5-84
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Message Waiting Indicator Line
A User or Administrator can configure the Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) to
illuminate for a specific line or for all lines. For example, if you configure the
MWI LED on line 3 only, the LED illuminates if a voice mail is pending on line 3.
If you configure the MWI LED for all lines, the LED illuminates if a voice mail is
pending on any line on the phone (lines 1 through 9).
A User can configure the MWI using the Aastra Web UI only. An Administrator
can configure the MWI on single or all lines using the configuration files or the
Aastra Web UI.
Configuring Message Waiting Indicator (MWI)
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Message
Waiting Indicator Settings” on page A-145.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings-> Preferences->General.
2
3
In the “Message Waiting Indicator Line” field, select a single line from 1 to 9, or select “All” for all
lines. If you select a single line, the MWI illuminates when a voice mail message is pending on that
line. If you select all lines, the MWI illuminates when a voice mail message is pending on any line
from 1 to 9.
Click
to save your changes.
5-86
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
DND Key Mode
The IP phones have a feature you can enable called "Do not Disturb (DND). An
Administrator or User can set “do not disturb” based on the accounts on the phone
(all accounts or a specific account). You can set specific modes for the way you
want the phone to handle DND. The three modes you can set on the phone for
DND are:
•
•
•
Account
Phone
Custom
An Administrator or User can set the DND mode using the Aastra Web UI at the
path Basic Settings->Preferences->General->DND Key Mode. An Administrator
can also set the DND Key Mode using the configuration files.
Note: You must configure a DND key on the phone to use this feature.
Reference
For more information about how DND works and how you can use it on the
phones, see the section, “Do Not Disturb (DND)” on page 5-199.
Configuring the DND Key Mode
Use the following procedures to set the DND Key Mode on the phone.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “DND Key Mode
Settings” on page A-146.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.
DND Key Mode
Parameter
2
In the “DND Key Mode” field, select a “do not disturb” (DND) mode to use on the phone.
Valid values are: Account, Phone, Custom. Default is Phone.
•
•
•
account
phone
Sets DND for a specific account. DND key toggles the account in focus on the
IP Phone UI, to ON or OFF.
Sets DND ON for all accounts on the phone. DND key toggles all accounts on the
phone to ON or OFF.
Sets the phone to display custom screens after pressing the DND key, that list the
account(s) on the phone. The user can select a specific account for DND, turn
DND ON for all accounts, or turn DND OFF for all accounts.
custom
Notes:
1. If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the mode setting is ignored and the
phone behaves as if the mode was set to “Phone”.
2. Using the Aastra Web UI, if you change the DND Key Mode to “phone”, all accounts
synchronize to the current setting of Account 1.
5-88
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
3
4
Configure a DND key on the phone using the procedures in the section, “Do Not Disturb (DND)” on
page 5-199.
Click
to save your changes.
The change takes effect immediately without a reboot.
Reference
For more information, see the section, “Do Not Disturb (DND)” on page 5-199.
Call Forward Mode
Call Forward (CFWD) on the IP phone allows incoming calls to be forwarded to
another destination. The phone sends the SIP message to the SIP proxy, which
then forwards the call to the assigned destination.
An Administrator or User can configure CFWD on the phone-side by setting a
mode for the phone to use (Account, Phone, or Custom). Once the mode is set,
you can use the IP Phone UI to use the CFWD feature at Options->Call Forward
or by pressing a configured Call Forward softkey/programmable key/extension
module key.
The following describes the behavior for each CFWD mode.
•
•
Account mode - The account mode allows you to configure CFWD on a per
account basis. Pressing a configured CFWD key applies to the account in
focus.
Phone mode - The Phone mode allows you to set the same CFWD
configuration for all accounts (All, Busy, and/or No Answer). When you
configure the initial account, the phone applies the configuration to all other
accounts. (In the Aastra Web UI, only the account you configured is enabled.
All other accounts are grayed out but set to the same configuration.) Using the
Aastra Web UI, if you make changes to that initial account, the changes apply
to all accounts on the phone.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
•
Custom mode - The Custom mode allows you to configure CFWD for a
specific account or all accounts. You can configure a specific mode (All,
Busy, and/or No Answer) for each account independently or all accounts. On
the 9143i, 51i, and 53i phones, you can set all accounts to ALL On or ALL
Off. On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT, you can set all accounts to
All On, All Off, or copy the configuration for the account in focus to all other
accounts using a CopytoAll softkey.
Note: If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the
mode setting is ignored and the phone behaves as if the mode was set
to “Phone”.
The states you can set for Call Forward are All, Busy, No Answer. You can enable
different call forwarding rules/modes independently (for example, you can set
different phone numbers for Busy, All, and NoAns modes and then turn them on/
phone, or custom) you configure on the phone.
Reference
For more information about how Call Forwarding works and how you can use it
on the IP Phones, see “Call Forwarding” on page 5-234.
Configuring Call Forward Key Mode
Use the following procedures to set the Call Forward key mode on the IP phones.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Call Forward
Key Mode Settings” on page A-122.
5-90
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.
Call Forward
Key Mode
Parameter
Note: If there is no CFWD key configured on the phone or it is removed, you can still configure Call
Forwarding via the IP Phone UI at the path Options->Call Forward.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
2
In the “Call Forward Key Mode” field, select a call forward mode to use on the phone.
Valid values are: Account, Phone, Custom. Default is Account.
•
•
account
The account mode allows you to configure CFWD on a per account basis. Pressing a configured
CFWD key applies to the account in focus.
phone
The Phone mode allows you to set the same CFWD configuration for all accounts (All, Busy,
and/or No Answer). When you configure the initial account, the phone applies the configuration
to all other accounts. (In the Aastra Web UI, only the account you configured is enabled. All other
accounts are grayed out but set to the same configuration.) Using the Aastra Web UI, if you make
changes to that initial account, the changes apply to all accounts on the phone.
custom
•
The Custom mode allows you to configure CFWD for a specific account or all accounts. You can
configure a specific state (All, Busy, and/or No Answer) for each account independently or all
accounts. On the 9143i, 51i, and 53i phones, you can set all accounts to ALL On or ALL Off. On
the 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT, you can set all accounts to All On, All Off, or copy the
configuration for the account in focus to all other accounts using a CopytoAll softkey.
Notes:
1. If there is no CFWD key configured on the phone or it is removed, you can still set the CFWD
modes via the IP Phone UI at the path Options->Call Forward.
2. If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the mode setting is ignored and the
phone behaves as if the mode was set to “Phone”.
3. When configuring a CFWD state (All, Busy, No Answer) for an account, you must configure a
CFWD number for that state in order for the state to be enabled.
3
Click
to save your changes.
The change takes effect immediately without a reboot.
Reference
For more information, see the section, “Call Forwarding” on page 5-234.
5-92
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices (LLDP-MED)
and Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN)
The IP Phones support Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint
Devices (LLDP-MED). LLDP-MED is designed to allow for things such as:
•
•
•
Auto-discovery of LAN policies (such as VLAN, Layer 2 Priority and
Diffserv settings) leading to "plug and play" networking.
Extended and automated power management of Power over Ethernet
endpoints.
Inventory management, allowing network administrators to track their
network devices, and determine their characteristics (manufacturer, software
and hardware versions, serial / asset number).
On the IP Phones, LLDP-MED performs the following:
•
•
Supports the MAC/PHY configuration (e.g. speed rate/duplex mode).
Supports VLAN info from the network policy; this takes precedence over
manual settings.
•
•
Allows you to enable/disable LLDP-MED if required.
Allows you to configure time interval between successive LLDP Data Unit
(LLDPDU) frames.
•
•
Allows LLDP packets to be received from the LAN port.
Allows the phone to use the location information, Explicit Congestion
Notification (ECN) Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN), sent
by the switch, as a caller ID for making emergency calls.
Note: If the phone receives location information in ECN ELIN format
(10 to 25 numeric string), the phone replaces the caller ID SIP header
with the ECN ELIN value and the SIP URI does not change. The phone
determines if this is an emergency number by checking the emergency
dial plan configured on the phone.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
The following table identifies the configuration parameters for LLDP and ELIN
and which method you can use to configure each parameter. This table also
indicates whether the parameters can be configured by an Administrator, a User,
or both.
Parameter
Method of Configuration
Who Can Configure
lldp
Configuration Files
Configuration Files
Configuration Files
IP Phone UI
Administrator
lldp interval
use lldp elin
LLDP Support
LLDP
Administrator
Administrator
Administrator
Aastra Web UI
Aastra Web UI
Aastra Web UI
Administrator
LLDP Packet Interval
LLDP ELIN
Administrator
Administrator and User
Configuring LLDP-MED and ELIN
Use the following procedures to configure LLDP-MED and ELIN on the IP
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “LLDP-MED and
ELIN Settings” on page A-124.
Use the following procedure to enable/disable LLDP-MED using the IP Phone
UI.
Note: You cannot configure the “LLDP Interval” or the “Use LLDP
ELIN” parameters via the IP Phone UI.
5-94
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
1
Press Options, and then select Administrator Menu.
On the 51i:
Press Services, and then select Options->Administrator Menu.
Select Network Settings.
2
3
4
5
Select Ethernet & VLAN.
Select LLDP Support.
Press CHANGE to toggle the LLDP setting to Enabled or Disabled.
This field enables or disables Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices
(LLDP-MED) on the IP Phone.
6
Press DONE to save the change.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Use the following procedure to configure LLDP-MED using the Aastra Web UI:
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings.
LLDP
LLDP Packet Interval
2
3
The “LLDP” field is enabled by default. To disable LLDP, click the check mark in the box to clear
the check mark.
In the “LLDP Packet Interval” field, enter the time, in seconds, between the transmission of
LLDP Data Unit (LLDPDU) packets.
The value of zero (0) disables this parameter. Valid values are 0 to 2147483647. Default is 30.
4
Click
to save your changes.
5-96
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
5
Select Basic Settings->Preferences->General.
Use LLDP ELIN
6
7
The “Use LLDP ELIN” field is enabled by default. To disable LLDP ELIN, click the check mark in
the box to clear the check mark.
This field enables or disables the use of an Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN)
received from LLDP as a caller ID for emergency numbers.
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Incoming/Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer and Barge In
The Intercom feature allows you to press the configured Intercom button on the IP
phone and then enter the number you want to call to initiate an intercom call.
Intercom calls can be controlled either locally (phone-side) or by the SIP server
(server-side).
You can configure incoming and outgoing intercom calls on all phone models. A
User can configure incoming intercom calls only.
Outgoing Intercom Calls
On outgoing intercom calls, an available unused line is found when the Icom
button is pressed. Since this line has no configuration, the phone applies an
existing configuration ("Outgoing Intercom Settings", Line, default is Line 1) to
this line in preparation for placing the intercom call. For example, an outgoing
intercom call can use the configuration of line 1 but places the actual intercom call
using line 9. Only an Administrator can configure outgoing intercom calls.
A phone-side Intercom call indicates the phone is responsible for telling the
recipient that an intercom call is being placed, while a server-side intercom call
means the SIP server is responsible for informing the recipient. Server-side calls
require additional configuration of a prefix code. After pressing the Icom button
and entering the number to call, the phone automatically adds the prefix to the
called number and sends the outgoing call via the server.
For outgoing intercom calls, an administrator can configure the following
parameters:
Configuration File Parameters
Web UI Parameters
•
•
•
sip intercom type
•
•
Type)
sip intercom line
Line
Note: To configure outgoing intercom calls using these parameters, see
“Configuring Intercom Calls Settings” on page 5-100.
5-98
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Incoming Intercom Calls
You can configure how the phone handles incoming intercom calls. You can
receive incoming intercom calls whether or not there are active calls on the phone.
The way the phone handles the call depends on the incoming intercom call
configuration. The following paragraphs describe the configuration parameters for
incoming intercom calls.
Microphone Mute
You can mute or unmute the microphone on the IP phone for intercom calls made
by the originating caller. If you want to mute the intercom call, you enable this
feature. If you want to unmute (or hear the intercom call), you disable this feature.
Auto-Answer/Play Warning Tone
The auto-answer feature on the IP phone allows you to enable or disable
automatic answering for an Intercom call. If “Auto-Answer” is enabled, the phone
automatically answers an incoming intercom call. If “Play Warning Tone” is also
enabled, the phone plays a tone to alert the user before answering the intercom
call. If “Auto-Answer” is disabled, the phone rejects the incoming intercom call
and sends a busy signal to the caller.
“Delay” before Auto-Answer
The IP Phones include support for the "delay" parameter (in the Alert-Info header,
used in conjunction with info=alert-autoanswer) in order to facilitate auto-answer
functionality. When present, the value of the "delay" parameter specifies the
length of time in seconds an IP phone rings before a call is auto-answered. If this
value of the "delay" parameter set to 0 (delay=0), then an incoming call is
immediately auto-answered. The absence of the parameter is considered as ring
forever.
In order for the delay functionality to operate, you must first enable Auto-Answer
on the IP Phone.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Allow Barge In
You can configure whether or not the IP phone allows an incoming intercom call
to interrupt an active call. The “sip intercom allow barge in” parameter controls
this feature. When you enable the sip intercom allow barge in parameter
(1 = enable in the configuration files), which is the default value, an incoming
intercom call takes precedence over any active call, by placing the active call on
hold and automatically answering the intercom call. When you disable this
parameter (0 = disable in the configuration files), and there is an active call, the
phone treats an incoming intercom call like a normal call and plays the call
warning tone. You can set this parameter using the configuration files or the
Aastra Web UI.
For incoming intercom calls, an administrator or user can configure the following
parameters:
Configuration File Parameters
Web UI Parameters
•
•
•
•
sip allow auto answer
•
•
•
Auto-Answer
sip intercom mute mic
sip intercom allow barge in
Microphone Mute
Barge In
Note: To configure incoming intercom calls using these parameters, see
“Configuring Intercom Calls Settings” on page 5-100.
Configuring Intercom Calls Settings
You can configure the Intercom feature using the configuration files or the Aastra
Web UI.
Note: An administrator can configure the incoming and outgoing
Intercom feature. A user can configure the incoming Intercom feature
only.
5-100
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Use the following procedures to configure Intercom calls on the IP phone.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for outgoing Intercom, see Appendix A, the
section, “Outgoing Intercom Settings” on page A-167.
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for incoming Intercom, see Appendix A, the
section, “Incoming Intercom Settings” on page A-169.
Aastra Web UI
Outgoing intercom settings (9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT only):
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Outgoing Intercom Settings.
2
3
Select an Intercom type for outgoing Intercom calls from the Type list box.
Valid values are Phone-Side, Server-Side, Off. Default is Off.
If Server-Side is selected, enter a prefix to add to the phone number in the "Prefix Code" field.
Note: For Sylantro servers, enter *96.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
4
5
If Phone-Side or Server-Side is selected, select a line from the Line list box for which you want the IP
phone to use as its configuration on the Intercom call.
Note: The IP phone uses the configuration from the line you select from this list box. The call itself is
made using the first available line at the time of the call.
Click
to save your changes.
Incoming intercom settings:
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Incoming Intercom Settings.
2
The "Auto-Answer" field is enabled by default. The automatic answering feature is turned on for the
IP phone for answering Intercom calls. To disable this field, uncheck the box.\
Note: If the Auto-Answer field is not checked (disabled), the phone rejects the incoming intercom call
and sends a busy signal to the caller.
3
4
The "Microphone Mute" field is enabled by default. The microphone is muted on the IP phone for
Intercom calls made by the originating caller. To disable this field, uncheck the box.
The "Play Warning Tone" field is enabled by default. If “Auto-Answer” is enabled, the phone plays a
warning tone when it receives in incoming intercom call. To disable this field, uncheck the box.
5-102
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
5
6
The "Allow Barge In" field is enabled by default. If an active line on the phone receives an incoming
intercom call, the active call is put on hold and the phone automatically answers the incoming
intercom call. To disable this field, uncheck the box.
Click
to save your changes.
Group Paging RTP Settings
An Administrator or User can configure a specific key (softkey, programmable
key, or expansion module key) on the phone that allows you to send/receive a
Real Time Transport Protocol (RTP) stream to/from pre-configured multicast
address(es) without involving SIP signaling. This is called Group Paging on the IP
phones. You can specify up to 5 listening multicast addresses.
An Administrator can use the following parameters in the configuration files to set
Group Paging RTP Settings:
•
•
•
•
paging addr list
softkeyN type, topsoftkeyN type, prgkeyN type, or expmodX keyN type
sofkeyN label
softkeyN value, topsoftkeyN value, prgkeyN value, or expmodX keyN
value
An Administrator or User can use the following parameters in the Aastra Web UI
to set Group Paging RTP Settings:
•
Paging Listen Addresses (Path: Basic Settings->Preferences->Group
Paging RTP Settings)
•
<Paging> Key (Operation->Softkeys and XML, Programmable Keys, or
Expansion Module Keys)
Note: The Group Paging RTP Settings are dependant upon the setting for
the “Allow Barge In” parameter.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
How it works
After pressing a configured “Paging” key on the phone, the Phone sends RTP to a
preconfigured multicast address(es) (IP port). Any phone in the local network
then listens for RTP on the preconfigured multicast address(es) (IP port). For both
sending and receiving of the multicast RTP there is no sip signaling involved. The
Phone displays the multicast RTP sent/received address(es) to the user.
Note: Multicast RTP is one way only - from sender to the receiver (i.e.
from sender to the multicast address(es) (receiver)).
The phone uses a preconfigured G711 uLaw CODEC for multicast RTP.
For Paging Systems, the phone only plays RTP traffic; users have the ability to
drop a rogue page. The recipient can drop the incoming page if required. The
recipient can also set Do Not Disturb (DND) to ignore any incoming pages.
Note: For outgoing RTP multicasts, all other existing calls on the phone
are put on hold.
For incoming RTP multicasts, the ringing display is dependant on the “Allow
Barge-In” parameter. If this parameter is disabled, and there is not other call
on the phone, then the paging is automatically played via the preferred
audio device (see the model-specific IP Phone User Guide for setting
Audio Mode on the phone).
If there is an existing call on the phone, the call initially displays in the ringing
state. The user has the option to accept/ignore the call. If the “Allow Barge-In”
parameter is enabled, the RTP multicast call barges in, and any existing calls are
put on hold.
If an RTP multicast session already exists on the phone, and the phone receives
another incoming RTP multicast session, the priority is given to the first multicast
session and the second multicast session is ignored. The behavior for the
incoming calls in this case is also based on the setting for the “Allow Barge-in”
parameter. The incoming call is handled as if there were an existing call already
on the phone.
5-104
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Configuring Group Paging RTP Settings
Use the following procedure to configure Group Paging RTP Settings using the
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Group Paging
RTP Settings” on page A-171.
Use the following procedure to configure RTP streaming for Paging applications
using the Aastra Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Group Paging RTP Settings.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
2
3
In the “Paging Listen Addresses” text box, enter the multicast IP address(es) and port number on
which the phone listens for incoming multicast RTP packets.
Note: Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format (for example,
224.0.0.2:10000,239.0.1.20:15000) If this field is blank, Paging listening capability is disabled on the
phone.
Click on Softkeys and XML.
or
Click on Programmable Keys.
or
Click on Expansion Module Keys.
4
5
Choose a key that you want to assign as the Paging Key and select Paging from the “Type” field.
In the “Label” field, enter a key label to assign to the Paging key (for example, “Group 1”).
5-106
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
6
7
In the “Value” field, enter a multicast IP address(es) and a port number for the Paging key. When you
press this key, the phone initiates an outgoing multicast RTP session to the specified address(es)
using the specified port. (For example, 224.0.0.2:10000).
Note: When you select Paging for the “Type” field, the “Line” field and state fields are disabled.
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Using the Configured Paging Key on the IP Phone
The following procedure describes the use of the Paging key. The procedures
assumes you have already configured the Paging key using the configuration files
or the Aastra Web UI.
Notes:
1.
(DND) to ignore any incoming pages.
2. For incoming Paging, the phones use the Intercom configuration
Recipient of a Paging call can set a global “Do Not Disturb”
settings. The incoming Page is dependant on the “Allow Barge-In”
parameter setting and the “Idling/On Call” state.
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
On the IP Phone, press the key you configured for Paging (labeled as “Group 1” in the following
illustration).
Services
Dir
Icom
Callers
Tues Jan1 10:00am
Group 1
LAB
ACD
The phone opens a multicast RTP session and an outgoing OR incoming phone screen displays as
follows:
Paging
00:01
Drop
Press the Drop key to end the multicast RTP session and return to the idle screen.
Note: If you enable global DND on the phone, the incoming multicast RTP session is dropped.
5-108
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Key Mapping
There are hard keys on your phone, such as Hold, Redial, Xfer, and Conf that are
configured by default for specific call-handling features. (See the product-specific
User Guide for more information about these key functions.
Notes:
1.
On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT the Xfer and Conf
keys are hard-coded by default on keys 5 and 6 to the left of the
LCD display and cannot be reassigned. The Xfer and Conf labels
display when you lift the handset. To disable these keys, see the
next paragraph.
2.
On the 9143i, 51i, and 53i, the Xfer and Conf keys are assigned by
default to keys 5 and 6, respectively. These keys are programmable
keys and can be reassigned if applicable. To disable these keys, see
the next paragraph.
Enabling/Disabling Redial, Xfer, and Conf Keys
You can enable or disable the Redial, Xfer, and Conf keys as required using the
following parameters in the configuration files:
•
•
•
redial disabled
conference disabled
call transfer disabled
Valid values for this parameter are 0 (enabled) and 1 (disabled).
If this parameter is set to 1, the key is not active and is ignored if pressed by the
user. For "redial disabled" the value of 1 does not save the dialed number to the
"Redial List".
If this parameter is set to 0, the key is active and can be pressed by the user.
This feature is configurable via the configuration files only.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Mapping Key
Settings” on page A-181.
Mapping Redial and Conf Keys as Speeddials
You can map the Redial and Conference keys on the IP phone to use as speeddial
keys. When the Redial or Conference key is pressed, the number configured for
the key automatically speed dials. If no number is configured, the Redial and
Conference keys return to their original functionality.
You can configure this feature using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Note: If you configure the Redial and Conference keys for speeddialing
on the 57i CT Base Station, the Redial and Conference keys on the
57i CT handset retain their original functionality. The Redial and
Conference keys on the handset are not configured for speeddial.
Use the following procedures to set the Redial and Conf keys as speeddial keys.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Mapping Key
Settings” on page A-181.
5-110
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences.
2
3
4
In the Key Mapping section, enter a number in the "Map Redial Key To" field, that the IP phone will
use to speeddial when the Redial key is pressed.
Enter a number in the "Map Conf Key To" field, that the IP phone will use to speeddial when the
Conf Key is pressed.
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Using Redial Key for “Last Number Redial”
The IP phones have an enhanced redial user interface that allows a user to
quickly redial the last number that was dialed out from the phone. You can:
•
•
Press the REDIAL key twice to redial the last number dialed.
Press the REDIAL key once, scroll the list of numbers, then press the
REDIAL button again to dial the number that displays on the screen.
The “last number redial” feature for the Redial key is static and is not
configurable.
Note: You can use the Redial key during active calls.
5-112
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Ring Tones and Tone Sets
You can configure ring tones and ring tone sets on the IP phones.
Ring Tones
There are several distinct ring tones a user or administrator can select from to set
on the IP phones. You can enable/disable these ring tones on a global basis or on a
per-line basis.
The following table identifies the valid settings and default values for each type of
configuration method.
Ring Tone Settings Table
Configuration Method
Valid Values
Default Value
Configuration Files
Global:
Global:
0 (Tone1)
1 (Tone 2)
2 (Tone 3)
3 (Tone 4)
4 (Tone 5)
5 (Silent)
0 (tone 1)
Per-Line:
-1 (global)
0 (Tone1)
1 (Tone 2)
2 (Tone 3)
3 (Tone 4)
4 (Tone 5)
5 (Silent)
Per-Line:
-1 (global)
IP Phone UI
Global:
Tone 1
Tone 2
Tone 3
Tone 4
Tone 5
Global:
Tone 1
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuration Method
Valid Values
Default Value
Aastra Web UI
Global:
Global:
Tone 1
Tone 1
Tone 2
Tone 3
Tone 4
Tone 5
Silent
Per-Line:
Global
Tone 1
Tone 2
Tone 3
Tone 4
Tone 5
Silent
Per-Line:
Global
5-114
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Ring Tone Sets
In addition to ring tones, you can configure ring tone sets on a global-basis on the
IP phones. Ring tone sets consist of tones customized for a specific country. The
ring tone sets you can configure on the IP phones are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
US (Default - also used in Canada)
Australia
Europe (generic tones)
France
Germany
Italy
Mexico
United Kingdom (UK)
When you configure the country's tone set, the country-specific tone is heard on
the phone for the following:
- dial tone
- secondary dial tone
- ring tone
- busy tone
- congestion tones
- call waiting tone
- ring cadence pattern
Important: You configure ring tones and tone sets using the Aastra Web UI, IP Phone UI, or configuration
files. However, when using the IP phone UI, you can set global configuration only.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuring Ring Tones and Tone Sets
Use the following procedures to configure ring tones and tone sets on the IP
phones.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for ring tones, see Appendix A, the section,
“Ring Tone and Tone Set Global Settings” on page A-135 or “Ring Tone Per-Line Settings” on page A-137.
IP Phone UI
Step Action
For global configuration only:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select Preferences.
Select Tones.
Select Set Ring Tone.
Select the type of ring tone (Tone 1 through Tone 5, or Silent).
Press Done to save the change.
Select Tone Set.
Select the country for which you want to apply the tone set.
Valid values are Australia, Europe, France, Germany, Italy, Mexico, UK, and US. Default is US.
9
Press Done to save the change.
The ring tone and tone set you select is immediately applied to the IP phone.
5-116
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences.
For global configuration:
2
In the "Ring Tones" section, select a country from the "Tone Set" field.
Valid values are Australia, Europe, France, Germany, Italy, Mexico, UK, and US. Default is US.
3
Select a value from the "Global Ring Tone" field.
For per-line configuration:
4
5
In the "Ring Tone" section, select a line for which you want to set ring tone.
Select a value from the "LineN" field.
Note: See the “Ring Tone Settings Table” on page 5-113 for valid values.
6
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Priority Alerting
Priority alerting on the IP phones is a feature that allows incoming calls to trigger
pre-defined ringing or call waiting alert tones.
You can enable or disable priority alerting on the IP phone for the Asterisk,
Broadworks, and Sylantro servers using the configuration files and the Aastra
Web UI. Configuration of priority alerting is on a global-basis only.
How Priority Alerting Works
When the IP phone detects an incoming call, the phone firmware inspects the
INVITE request in the IP packet for an "Alert-Info" header.
If it contains an "Alert-Info" header, the firmware strips out the URL and keyword
parameter and maps it to the appropriate Bellcore tone.
If there is no keyword parameter in the "Alert-Info" header, or the INVITE
message contains no "Alert-Info" header, then the IP phone firmware uses the
Bellcore standard ring tone.
Asterisk/Broadworks Servers
The ring tone keywords that can display in the "Alert-Info" header for an Asterisk
and Broadworks server are:
Asterisk/Broadworks Server
Ring Tone Keywords
Bellcore-dr2
Bellcore-dr3
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
When the ring tone keywords appear in an "Alert-Info" header from an Asterisk or
Broadworks server, the IP phone maps the keywords to the default ring tone
patterns.
5-118
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Sylantro Servers
The ring tone keywords that can display in the "Alert-Info" header for a Sylantro
server are:
Sylantro Server
Ring Tone Keywords
alert-acd (auto call distribution)
alert-community-1
alert-community-2
alert-community-3
alert-community-4
alert-emergency
alert-external
alert-group
alert-internal
alert-priority
When the ring tone keywords appear in an "Alert-Info" header from a Sylantro
server, the keyword is mapped to the ring tone pattern based on the configuration
you set in the Aastra Web UI or the configuration files.
Ring Tone Patterns
In IP Telephony, different ringing patterns have different frequencies and
cadences. Ring cadence is the ringing pattern heard by the called party, before
they pick up the call.
On the IP phones, if you enable priority alerting when using an Asterisk or
Broadworks server, the IP phone uses the following Bellcore-specified tones by
default:
Ring Tone Pattern (Asterisk/Broadworks Servers)
Call Criteria
Bellcore Tones
Bellcore-dr2
Bellcore-dr3
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
internal calls
external calls
calls with contact list
calls with specific time frames
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
If you enable priority alerting when using a Sylantro server, you can specify the
Bellcore tone to be used for the following configurable criteria:
Ring Tone Pattern (Sylantro Servers)
Call criteria
Bellcore tones for each call criteria
alert-acd (auto call distribution)
alert-community-1
alert-community-2
alert-community-3
alert-community-4
alert-emergency
alert-external
Normal ringing (default)
Bellcore-dr2
Bellcore-dr3
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
Silent
alert-group
alert-internal
alert-priority
A System Administrator can configure the ring tone cadences if required, using
the configuration files. The following table identifies the different Bellcore ring
tone patterns and cadences.
Minimum
Duration
(ms)
Nominal
Duration
(ms)
Maximum
Duration
(ms)
Pattern
ID
Bellcore Tone
(Standard)
Pattern
Cadence
1
Ringing
Silent
2s On
4s Off
1800
3600
2000
4000
2200
4400
Bellcore-dr2
2
Ringing
Silent
Long
630
315
800
400
1025
525
Ringing
Silent
Long
Long
630
3475
800
4000
1025
4400
Bellcore-dr3
3
4
5
Ringing
Silent
Short
315
145
400
200
525
525
Ringing
Silent
Short
315
145
400
200
525
525
Ringing
Silent
Long
Short
630
2975
800
4000
1025
4400
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
Ringing
Silent
200
145
300
200
525
525
Ringing
Silent
Long
Short
800
145
1000
200
1100
525
Ringing
Silent
200
2975
300
4000
525
4400
Ringing
450
500
550
5-120
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Note: If the "Do Not Disturb" (DND) or the "Call Forward" (CFWD)
feature is enabled on the server-side, and the user is still waiting for a call,
the "Bellcore-dr5" is a ring splash tone that reminds the user that these are
enabled.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuring Priority Alerting and Ring Tone Cadences using the
Configuration Files
Use the following procedures to configure priority alerting and ring tone cadences
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the sections,
•
•
“Priority Alert Settings” on page A-147.
“Bellcore Cadence Settings” on page A-152.
Note: You can configure Bellcore cadences using the configuration files
only.
5-122
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Configuring Priority Alerting using the Aastra Web UI.
Use the following procedure to configure Priority Alerting using the Aastra Web
UI.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences.
2
In the "Priority Alerting Settings" section, enable the "Enable Priority Alerting" field by checking the
check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the box).
For Sylantro Servers:
3 Select a ring tone pattern for each of the following fields:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Group
Internal
External
Emergency
Priority
auto call distribution
community-1
community-2
community-3
community-4
4
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Call Waiting Tones
Call Waiting is a feature that tells you if a new caller is trying to contact you when
you are already on the phone. A discreet tone alerts you to the new caller, so you
can answer your second incoming call by putting your first caller on hold.
The IP phones use the following Bellcore-specified call waiting tones.
Minimum
Duration
(ms)
Nominal
Duration
(ms)
Maximum
Duration
(ms)
Bellcore
Call-Waiting Tone
Pattern
ID
Pattern
CallWaitingTone 1
1
2
Tone On
270
300
330
Bellcore-dr2
CallWaitingTone2
Tone On
Tone Off
90
90
100
100
110
110
Bellcore-dr3
CallWaitingTone3
3
4
Tone On
Tone Off
90
90
100
100
110
110
Tone On
Tone Off
Tone On
Tone Off
90
90
90
90
100
100
100
100
110
110
110
110
Bellcore-dr4
CallWaitingTone4
Tone On
Tone Off
270
90
300
100
330
110
For Asterisk and Broadworks servers, call waiting tones are specified by the
default Bellcore tones indicated in the table Ring Tone Pattern (Asterisk/
Broadworks Servers) on page -119.
For Sylantro servers, call waiting tones are specified by the Bellcore tones you
Pattern (Sylantro Servers) on page -120.
Reference
For more information about enable/disabling call waiting on the IP Phone, see the
section, “Call Waiting/Call Waiting Tone” on page 5-63.
5-124
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception)
Directed call pickup is a feature on the phones that allows a user to intercept a call
on a ringing phone which is part of the same interception group. You can use the
Directed call pickup feature on the phone in two ways:
•
With the existing BLF feature on Asterisk, a user can dial “*76” followed by
the extension to pick up a ringing call on another phone. (For more
information about BLF, see “Busy Lamp Field (BLF)” on page -161
•
Using XML, a user can intercept a call by selecting an extension from a list
and then pressing a “Pickup” softkey/programmable key. To use the Directed
call pickup feature from an XML application, you must list all ringing
extensions using the AastraIPPhoneTextMenu XML object in an XML
script. This allows the user to select the ringing extension from a text menu
without having to dial. The following illustration shows an example of how
this feature displays to the LCD from an XML application.:
Ringing Extensions
201
212
225
234
Pickup
Done
(For more information about using the AastraIPPhoneTextMenu object, see
Appendix G, the section, “Text Menu Object (Menu Screens)” on page G-6.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
BLF and XML softkeys/programmable keys monitor the states of an extension.
The extension states can be one of three states: "busy", "ringing" and "idle". If the
monitored extension is in the "ringing" state with an incoming call, and "Directed
call pickup" is enabled, pressing the BLF or XML key can pick up the incoming
call on the monitored extension.
Note: The Asterisk and Epygi Quadro 4x/16x IP PBX servers support
this feature. For details about Asterisk support, contact Aastra Technical
Support.
Directed Call Pickup Prefix (optional)
The optional “directed call pickup prefix” allows you to enter a specific prefix
string (depending on what is available on your server), that the phone
automatically dials when dialing the Directed Call Pickup number. For example,
for Broadsoft servers, you can enter a value of *98 for the “directed call pickup
prefix”. When the phone performs the Directed Call Pickup after pressing a BLF
or BLF/List softkey, the phone prepends the *98 value to the designated extension
of the BLF or BLF/List softkey when dialing out.
How this feature works when Directed Call Pickup is enabled with BLF or
BLF/List
1. Phone A monitors Phone B via BLF/List.
2. Phone C calls Phone B; Phone B rings.
3. If you press the BLF/List softkey on Phone A, it picks up the ringing line on
Phone B.
4. Phone C connects to Phone A.
How this feature works when Directed Call Pickup is disabled with BLF or
BLF/List
1. Phone A monitors Phone B via BLF/List.
2. Phone C calls Phone B; Phone B rings.
3. If you press the BLF/List softkey on Phone A, it performs a speeddial to
Phone B.
4. Phone C and Phone A are ringing Phone B on separate lines (if available).
5-126
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Notes:
1. The default method for the phone to use is Directed Call Pickup over
BLF if the server provides applicable information. If the Directed Call
Pickup over BLF information is missing in the messages to the server, the
Directed Call Pickup by Prefix method is used if a value for the prefix
code exists in the configuration.
2. You can define only one prefix at a time for the entire BLF/List.
3. The phone that picks up displays the prefix code + the extension
number (for example, *981234 where prefix key = *98, extension =
1234).
You can enable/disable “Directed Call Pickup” using the configuration files or the
Aastra Web UI.
Note: The “Directed Call Pickup” feature is disabled by default.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Enabling/Disabling Directed Call Pickup
Use the following procedure to enable or disable the Directed Call Pickup feature
Configuration Files
To enable/disable Directed Call Pickup on the IP phone using the configuration files, see Appendix A, the
section, “Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception) Settings” on page A-176.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Directed Call Pickup Settings.
2
3
Enable the "Directed Call Pickup" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the box). Default is disabled.)
(optional) Enter a prefix in the "Directed Call Pickup Prefix" field. For example, *98.
This prefix is appended to the beginning of the Directed Call Pickup number when dialed from the
BLF or BLF/List softkey.
5-128
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
4
5
Enable the "Play a Ring Splash" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the box). Default is disabled.)
The IP phone plays a short "ring splash" when there is an incoming call on the BLF monitored
extension. If the "Play a Ring Splash" parameter is enabled, and the host tone is idle, the tone plays
a "ring splash".
Click
to save your changes.
Configuring BLF/BLF List for Directed Call Pickup
Use the following procedure to configure BLF/BLF List for Directed Call Pickup
in the configuration files.
Note: You must enable Directed Call Pickup before performing these
procedures. See “Enabling/Disabling Directed Call Pickup” on
page 5-128.
Configuration Files
To set BLF or BLF\List in the configuration files for Directed Call Pickup, see Appendix A, the sections:
•
•
“Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-184.
“BLF List URI Settings” on page A-218.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Use the following procedure to configure BLF or BLF/List for Directed Call
Pickup in the Aastra Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Directed Call Pickup Settings.
2
3
Enable the "Directed Call Pickup" field by checking the check box.
(optional) Enter a prefix in the "Directed Call Pickup Prefix" field. For example, *98.
This prefix is appended to the beginning of the Directed Call Pickup number when dialed from the
BLF or BLF/List softkey.
4
Enable the "Play a Ring Splash" field by checking the check box.
The IP phone plays a short "ring splash" when there is an incoming call on the BLF monitored
extension. If the "Play a Ring Splash" parameter is enabled, and the host tone is idle, the tone plays
a "ring splash".
5-130
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
5
Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML
or
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys
or
Click on Operation->Expansion Module <N>.
Note: Depending on your phone-model, the key configuration screen displays. The 57i Key Screen is
shown as an example.
6
7
Select a softkey or programmable key to configure.
In the "Type" field, select "BLF" (Asterisk), "BLF\List" (BroadSoft BroadWorks).
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
8
For the 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT softkeys:
In the "Label" field, enter the name of the person who’s extension you are monitoring (if “Type” is
BLF).
Note: If BLF\List type is selected, no label value is required. The BroadWorks BLF List name is
configured in the "BLF List URI" field instead.
9
In the "Value" field, enter a value to associate with the softkey or programmable key.
For example, for BLF, the value is the extension you want to monitor.
For BLF\List, the value is an identifier for the list of numbers you are monitoring.
10
11
12
Click
to save your changes.
In the "Line" field, select a line number that is actively registered to the appropriate SIP proxy you are
using.
In the "BLF List URI" field, enter the name of the BLF list defined on the BroadSoft BroadWorks
Busy Lamp field page for your particular user.
For example, [email protected].
Note: The value of the BLF\List URI parameter must match the list name configured. Otherwise, no
values display on the 57i screen and the feature is disabled.
13
14
Select the line state (idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy) that you want to apply to the BLF
softkey or programmable key.
Click
to save your changes.
5-132
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Configuring XML for Directed Call Pickup
Use the following procedure to configure XML for Directed Call Pickup in the
configuration files.
Notes:
1.
Before implementing this procedure, you must create an XML
application that the phone uses when the XML softkey or programmable
key is pressed. This XML application must be entered as a URI in the
“Value” field of the XML key. For information about creating an XML
script, see Appendix G, the section “Text Menu Object (Menu Screens)”
on page G-6.
2.
You must enable Directed Call Pickup before performing these
procedures. See “Enabling/Disabling Directed Call Pickup” on
page 5-128.
Configuration Files
To set XML in the configuration files for Directed Call Pickup, see Appendix A, the section, “Softkey/
Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-184.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Use the following procedure to configure XML for Directed Call Pickup in the
Aastra Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Directed Call Pickup Settings.
2
3
Enable the "Directed Call Pickup" field by checking the check box.
(optional) Enter a prefix in the "Directed Call Pickup Prefix" field. For example, *98.
This prefix is appended to the beginning of the Directed Call Pickup number when dialed from the
BLF or BLF/List softkey.
4
Enable the "Play a Ring Splash" field by checking the check box.
The IP phone plays a short "call waiting tone" when there is an incoming call on the BLF monitored
extension. If the "Play a Ring Splash" parameter is enabled, and the host tone is idle, the tone plays
a "ring splash".
5-134
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
5
Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML
or
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys
or
Click on Operation->Expansion Module <N>.
Note: Depending on your phone-model, the key configuration screen displays. The 57i Key Screen is
shown as an example.
6
7
8
Select a softkey or programmable key to configure.
In the "Type" field, select "XML”.
For the 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT softkeys:
In the "Label" field, enter the name of the person who’s extension you are monitoring.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
9
In the "Value" field, enter the URI that the phone uses to display the XML application to the LCD.
For example, http://65.205.71.13/xml/startup/key.php?user=$$SIPREMOTENUMBER$$.
Note: For more information about creating an XML script to use with Directed Call Pickup, see
Appendix G, the section “Text Menu Object (Menu Screens)” on page G-6.
10
11
Select the line state (idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy) that you want to apply to the XML
softkey or programmable key.
Click
to save your changes.
5-136
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module Keys
You can configure the softkeys, programmable keys (9143i and 53i have
programmable keys only), feature keys, and expansion module keys to perform
specific functions on the IP phones.
Note: When entering definitions for softkeys in the configuration files,
the “#” sign must be enclosed in quotes.
Softkeys (9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, 57i CT)
The 9480i, 9480i CT, and 55i IP phone have 6 softkeys you can configure to
perform specific functions, The 57i and 57i CT IP phones have 12 softkeys you
can configure. With up to 3 Expansion Modules attached to the phone, you can get
an additional 72 softkeys to configure (not all functions apply to Expansion
Module softkeys). The following table provides the number of softkeys you can
configure, and the number of lines available for each type of phone.
Handset
IP Phone
Model
Expansion Module
Keys
Programmable
Keys
Lines
Available
Keys
Softkeys
Available
9480i
9480i CT
55i
6
6
6
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
-
-
9
9
9
-
15
-
36 to 108*
6
(Model 536M)
60 to 180**
(Model 560M)
57i
12
12
36 to 108*
-
-
9
9
-
(Model 536M)
60 to 180**
(Model 560M)
57i CT
36 to 108* on Base
Station
15
(Model 536M)
60 to 180** on Base
Station
(Model 560M)
*The 536M expansion module consists of 36 softkeys. You can have up to 3 expansion modules on an IP
phone totaling 108 softkeys. Valid for 55i, 57i, and 57i CT phones.
**The 560M expansion module consists of 60 softkeys. You can have up to 3 expansion modules on an IP
phone totaling 180 softkeys. Valid for 57i and 57i CT phones only.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
State-Based Softkeys (9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, 57i CT only)
Users and administrators can configure a specific state to display when a softkey
is being used. Available states you can configure for each softkey include:
•
•
•
•
•
idle - The phone is not being used.
connected - The current line is in an active call (or the call is on hold)
incoming - The phone is ringing.
outgoing - The user is dialing a number, or the far-end is ringing.
busy - The current line is busy because the line is in use or the line is set as
“Do Not Disturb”.
The following table identifies the applicable default states for each type of
softkey you can configure on the IP phone.
Softkey Type
Default States
None
All states disabled.
Line
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
idle
Speeddial
DND
BLF
BLF List
Auto Call
Distribution
(ACD)
Directed Call
Pickup (DCP)
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
Group Call
Pickup (GCP)
XML
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
All states disabled.
WebApps
Flash
Sprecode
Park
connected
connected
Pickup
idle, outgoing
5-138
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Softkey Type
Default States
Last Call Return idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
Call Forward
BLF/Xfer
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
All states disabled.
Speeddial/Xfer
Directory
Callers List
Intercom
Services
Phone Lock
Paging
All states disabled.
Empty
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
You can enable or disable the softkey states using the configuration files or the
Aastra Web UI. In the Aastra Web UI, you disable a state by unchecking the box
for that operational state.
In the configuration files, you use the following parameters to enable and disable
operational states:
• softkeyN states
You can enter multiple values (idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy) for
the "softkeyN state" parameter. For example:
softkeyN states: idle connected
You must associate the softkeyN state parameter with a specific softkey. In the
following example, the softkeyN states parameter is associated with softkey 12:
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
softkey12 type: speeddial
softkey12 label: voicemail
softkey12 value *89
softkey12 states: outgoing
Note: The IP phone idle screen condenses the softkeys. So in the
previous example, softkey 12 will appear in position 1 if no other
softkeys are set. A softkey type of "empty" does not display on the idle
screen at all. For more information about the softkey type of "empty" see
Appendix A, the section, “Softkey Settings for 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i,
57i CT” on page A-185.
5-140
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Configuration Example
The following example illustrates the use of the "softkeyN states" parameter, and
the "softkeyN type" parameter with a value of empty. For clarity purposes, only
the "softkeyN type" and "softkeyNstates" parameters are shown.
softkey1 type: line
softkey1 states: idle connected
softkey3 type: dnd
softkey3 states: idle
softkey4 type: line
softkey5 type: empty
softkey5 states: connected
softkey6 type: speeddial
softkey6 states: connected
The following table shows how the keys in the example above would display on
the IP Phone UI.
Note: The "empty" key type allows a softkey to be removed quickly by
deleting the softkey information from the configuration file.
Softkey
softkey1
Idle
Key 1
Connected
Key 2
Notes
Line displays for softkey1.
Key 1 in connected state is the Drop key. Idle
and connected display as applicable.
softkey2
softkey3
(not used)
Key 2
(not used)
(not used)
Softkey2 is not displayed.
DND displays for softkey3. Idle displays as
applicable.
softkey4
Key 3
Key 3
Line displays for softkey4. Default state
values (idle, connected, incoming, outgoing)
display as applicable.
softkey5
softkey6
(not used)
(not used)
Key 4 (blank)
Key 5
A blank displays for softkey5. Connected
displays as applicable.
Speeddial displays for softkey6. Connected
displays as applicable.
Softkeys and programmable keys are configurable using the Aastra Web UI or the
configuration files.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Programmable Keys (9143i, 53i, 55i)
The following table provides the number of softkeys and programmable keys you
can configure, and the number of lines available for each type of phone.
Handset
IP Phone
Model
Expansion Module
Keys
Programmable
Keys
Lines
Available
Keys
Softkeys
Available
9143i
53i
-
-
Not Applicable
7
9
9
-
-
36 to 108*
6**
(Model 536M)
55i
6
36 to 108*
6
9
-
(Model 536M)
60 to 180**
(Model 560M)
*The 536M expansion module consists of 36 softkeys. You can have up to 3 expansion modules on an IP phone totaling
108 softkeys.
**On the 53i, two of the 6 programmable keys are the DELETE and SAVE keys and can be programmed only if
Administrator allows.
Softkey/Programmable Key/Expansion Module Key Functions
You can configure the softkeys and programmable keys on the phones, and any
attached expansion module keys on the 53i, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT to perform
specific functions using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. The
following table identifies the available functions of the softkeys, programmable
keys, and expansion module keys on the IP phones. Available functions may vary
on each model phone.
The following Key Functions Table lists the available functions for the keys on
the IP Phones and Expansion Modules.
Note: These functions apply to the 9143i, 9480i, 9480i CT, 53i, 55i, 57i,
57i CT and Expansion Modules unless specifically stated otherwise. The
51i IP Phone does not have programmable keys or softkeys.
5-142
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Key Functions Table
Softkey/
Programmable
Key Function
Configuration
File Parameter
Aastra Web UI
Parameter
Description
None
none
None
Indicates not setting for the key.
Line
line
Line
Indicates the key is configured for line use.
Speeddial
speeddial
Speeddial
Indicates the key is configured for speeddial
use.
You can configure a softkey to speeddial a
specific number. Optionally, you can also
configure a speeddial key to dial prefix
numbers. With this option, the prefix numbers
automatically dial when you press the softkey,
and the phone waits for you to enter the
remaining numbers to dial out.
For more information about speeddial prefixes,
see “Speeddial Prefixes” on page 5-160.
You can also create speeddial keys and edit
the keys using the IP Phone keypad. For more
information about speeddial keys and editing
speeddial keys, see your Model-specific User
Guide for more information.
Busy Lamp Field
(BLF)
blf
BLF
Indicates the key is configured for Busy Lamp
Field (BLF) use. A user can dial out on a BLF
configured key. You can also set a BLF
subscription period.
For more information about BLF, see the
section “Busy Lamp Field (BLF)” on
page 5-161.
For more information about BLF Subscription
Period, see “BLF Subscription Period” on
page 5-168.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Softkey/
Programmable
Key Function
Configuration
File Parameter
Aastra Web UI
Parameter
Description
Busy Lamp Field
List
list
BLF/List
Indicates the key is configured for BLF list use.
A user can dial out on a BLF\List configured
key.
For more information on BLF, see the section
“Busy Lamp Field (BLF)” on page 5-161.
Auto Call
Distribution (ACD)
acd
Auto Call
Distribution
(For Sylantro Servers) Indicates the key is
configured for automatic call distribution
(ACD). ACD allows the Sylantro Server to
distribute calls from a queue to registered IP
Phones (agents). You can also set an ACD
subscription period.
For more information about ACD, see the
section “Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) (for
Sylantro Servers)” on page 5-176.
For more information about ACD subscription
period, see “ACD Subscription Period” on
page 5-186.
Directed Call
Pickup (DCP)/
Group Call Pickup
(GCP)
dcp
Directed Call
Pickup
(For Sylantro Servers) Indicates the key is
configured for either Directed Call Pickup or
Group Call Pickup. The DCP/GCP feature
allows you to intercept - or pickup - a call on a
monitored extension(s).
For more information about DCP/GCP, see the
Pickup (for Sylantro Servers)” on page 5-190.
Do Not Disturb
(DND)
dnd
Do Not Disturb
Indicates key is configured for "do not disturb"
use.
For more information on DND, see the section
“Do Not Disturb (DND)” on page 5-199.
5-144
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Softkey/
Programmable
Key Function
Configuration
File Parameter
Aastra Web UI
Parameter
Description
ExtensibleMarkup xml
Language) (XML)
XML
Indicates the key is configured to accept an
XML application for accessing customized
XML services. You can also specify a URL for
an XML key.
For more information on XML, see the section
“XML Customized Services” on page 5-296.
WebApps
webapps
WebApps
Indicates the key is pre-programmed to access
an Aastra XML-based application called,
“xml.myaastra.com“.
(Not applicable to
the CT handsets)
On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT
phones, the WebApps softkey displays on
softkey 1 on the idle screen by default. You
can also access Web Apps from the Services
menu on these phones.
On the 9143i and 53i, you can access
WebApps from the Services menu, or from a
configured programmable key. By default,
WebApps displays in the Services menu.
On the 51i phone, you can access WebApps
from the Services menu only.
For more information on the WebApps key,
see the section “Web Applications Keys” on
page 5-333.
Flash
flash
Flash
Indicates the key is set to generate a flash
event when it is pressed, or when a feature
key is pressed on the 57i CT handset. The IP
phone generates flash events only when a call
is connected and there is an active RTP
stream (for example, when the call is not on
hold).
For more information about the Flash key, see
your Model-specific User Guide.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Softkey/
Programmable
Key Function
Configuration
File Parameter
Aastra Web UI
Parameter
Description
Sprecode
sprecode
Sprecode
Indicates the key is set to automatically
activate specific services offered by the server.
For example, if the sprecode value of *82 is
configured, then by pressing the key, *82
automatically activates a service provided by
the server. The value you enter for this field is
dependent on the services provided by the
server.
your Model-specific User Guide.
Park
park
pickup
lcr
Park
Indicates the key is set to be used as a park
key to park an incoming call.
“Park/Pick Up Key” on page 5-219.
Pickup
Pickup
Indicates the key is set to be used as a pickup
key to pick up a parked call.
For more information on pickup, see the
Last Call Return
(LCR)
Last Call Return (For Sylantro Servers) Indicates the key is set
to be used to dial the last call that came in on
that line.
For more information on lcr, see the section
Call Forward
BLF/Xfer
call forward
Call Forward
Call Forward
Indicates the key is set to be used to access
the Call Forward menus on the phone.
For more information about call forwarding,
blf/xfer
Indicates the key is set to be used as a BLF
key AND as a Transfer key.
For more information about the BLF/Xfer
feature, see the section “BLF/Xfer and
Speeddial/Xfer Keys” on page 5-170.
5-146
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Softkey/
Programmable
Key Function
Configuration
File Parameter
Aastra Web UI
Parameter
Description
Speeddial/Xfer
speeddial/xfer
Speeddial/Xfer
Indicates the key is set to be used as a
speeddial key AND as a Transfer key.
For more information about the Speeddial/Xfer
Speeddial/Xfer Keys” on page 5-170.
Callers List
Directory
Icom
callers
directory
icom
Callers List
Directory
Intercom
Indicates the key is set for accessing the
Callers List.
For more information on the Callers List, see
the section “Callers List” on page 5-273.
Indicates the key is set for accessing the
Directory List.
For more information about the Directory List,
see the section “Directory List” on page -282.
Indicates the key is set to be used as the
Intercom key. For more information about
using the Intercom key, see your
model-specific Aastra IP Phone User’s Guide.
For information about other Intercom features,
see “Incoming/Outgoing Intercom with
Auto-Answer and Barge In” on page 5-98.
Conference
conf
Conference
Indicates the key is configured as a
conference key (for local conferencing).
(Applicable to the
53i only)
(For Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers) An
Administrator can also enable centralized
conferencing on the IP Phones.
For more information about using the
Conference key, see your Model-specific
User’s Guide.
For information about enabling centralizing
conferencing, see “Centralized Conferencing
(for Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers)” on
page 5-341.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Softkey/
Programmable
Key Function
Configuration
File Parameter
Aastra Web UI
Parameter
Description
Transfer
xfer
Transfer
Indicates the key is configured as a transfer
key for transferring calls.
(Applicable to the
53i only)
For more information about using the Xfer key,
see your Model-specific User’s Guide.
Services
services
phone lock
paging
Services
Indicates the key is set to access Services,
such as, Directory List, Callers List, Voicemail,
and any other XML applications configured on
the phone.
(Not applicable to
the 53i)
For more information about using the Services
Phone Lock
Phone Lock
Indicates the key is configured as a phone lock
key, allowing you to press this key to lock/
unlock the phone.
(Not applicable to
the 57i CT and the
9480i CT cordless
handsets)
For more information about the lock/unlock
key, see “Locking IP Phone Keys” on
page 5-45.
Paging
Paging
Indicates the softkey is set for Group Paging
on the phone. Pressing this key automatically
sends a Real Time Transport Protocol (RTP)
stream to pre-configured multicast address(es)
without involving SIP signaling.
For more information about the Paging key,
see “Group Paging RTP Settings” on
page 5-103.
Empty
empty
Empty
Indicates the key is configured to force a blank
entry on the IP phone display for a specific
key. If a particular key is not defined, it is
ignored.
(Not applicable to
programmable keys
or expansion
module keys)
For more information about empty keys, see
your Model-specific User’s Guide.
5-148
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Reference
For more information about key functions for your model phone, see your
Model-specific User’s Guide.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuring Softkeys and Programmable Keys
Use the following procedures to configure the softkeys and programmable keys
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the sections,
“Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-184.
5-150
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML
or
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys
or
Click on Operation->Expansion Module <N>.
Depending on your phone-model, the key configuration screen displays. The 57i Key Screen is
shown as an example.
2
Select a key to configure.
For Softkeys and Expansion Module Keys:
3
In the "Type" field, select the type of softkey you want to configure.
Reference: For available type values on each IP phone model, see Appendix A, the section,
“Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-184.
4
If applicable, enter a label in the “Label” field.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
5
If applicable, in the "Value" field, enter a value to associate with the softkey. For example, for a
speeddial value, you can enter a number you want to use for the speeddial key, or 12345+ as a
speeddial prefix.
6
7
If applicable, in the "Line" field, select the line for which you want to associate the softkey.
Some softkey types allow you to configure specific operational states.
Operational states display to the IP phone when a softkey is used.
To enable/disable an operational state, click the "Idle", "Connected", "Incoming", or "Outgoing"
fields to check or uncheck the box.
Note: Operational states are not applicable to expansion modules.
8
Click
For programmable keys:
9
In the “Hard Key” field, select the programmable key type you want to configure.
Reference: For available type values on each IP phone model, see Appendix A, the section,
“Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-184.
10
In the "Value" field, enter a value to associate with the programmable key. For example, for a
speeddial value, you can enter a number you want to use for the speeddial key, or 12345+ as a
speeddial prefix.
11
12
In the "Line" field, select the line for which you want to associate the programmable key.
Click
to save your changes.
5-152
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
57i Cordless (CT) Feature Keys
In addition to the softkeys on the 57i CT, this phone also has handset keys you can
configure with specific features. You can use the Aastra Web UI to configure the
handset keys.
Note: You configure the handset keys using the Aastra Web UI
(Operation->Handset Keys) or by pressing the "F" button on the
handset.
You can program up to 15 feature keys on the 57i CT handset with specific
functions using the Aastra Web UI.
The following table identifies the functions available for all 15 handset keys and
the default functions for each key.
Handset Key
Key Function
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
Icom
Description
1
Line 1 key - Selects line one
2
Line 2 key - Selects line two
3
Line 3 key - Selects line three
4
Line 4 key - Selects line four
5
Icom key – Enter handset list to select handset to call
Directory key – Activate directory feature
Callers key – Activate callers feature
Transfer key - Activate transfer feature
Conference key - Activate conference feature
Public key – Toggle between public & private call mode
No function selected. Line 5 key (if available) - Selects line
five.
6
Dir
7
Callers
Xfer
8
9
Conf
10
11
Public
None
12
13
14
15
None
None
None
None
No function selected. Line 6 key (if available) - Selects line
six.
No function selected. Line 7 key (if available) - Selects line
seven.
No function selected. Line 8 key (if available) - Selects line
eight.
No function selected. Line 9 key (if available) - Selects line
nine.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Feature Key Programming Guidelines
The following are guidelines to use when programming the feature keys on the
handset:
•
All handsets paired with the same Base Station have the same programmed
functions since the web interface applies the functions to all the handsets
paired with that base.
•
A newly registered handset or handset that was out-of-range during the
programming needs to perform an "off-hook and on-hook" sequence in order
for the newly programmed function to be broadcasted to the affected
handsets. Simply press the v key from the idle state to go off-hook. Then,
press the y key to go back on-hook.
•
•
•
Duplicate functions can exist in the feature key as there is no filtering or
duplicate checking done on the handset or the base.
If no line keys are programmed for the feature key, the handset is restricted to
intercom calls only.
If all 12 programmable functions have been programmed to "None", the user
is presented with a List empty message when the feature key is pressed.
List empty
Use web page to
configure
•
•
For security reasons, the user has 180 seconds (3 minutes) to complete the
programming. Otherwise, the phone displays the following error:
** Error **: Session expired, Please reload page.
For security reasons, the user must submit the page from the same browser
that was used to load the page. If the user tries to submit the page from any
other IP address, the following error displays:
** Error ** Session invalid. Different Client IP Addresses. —
Please reload page
5-154
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Handset Feature Key Functions
You can configure the features keys on the 57i CT handset to perform specific
functions using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.The following table
identifies the available functions for the feature keys on the 57i CT handset.
The following Handset Key Functions Table lists the available functions for the
keys on the 57i CT IP Phone.
Handset Key Functions Table
Feature Key
Function
Configuration
File Parameter
Aastra Web UI
Parameter
Description
None
none
None
Indicates the key is disabled.
This option is available from Web UI only.
Indicates the key is configured for line use.
Line
line
Line
(Lines 1 through 9
are available for
selection)
Icom
icom
Icom
Indicates the key is set to be used as the
Intercom key.
For more information about the Icom key, see
your Aastra IP Phone 57i CT User’s Guide.
For information about other Intercom features,
Auto-Answer and Barge In” on page 5-98.
Directory
Callers
dir
Dir
Indicates the key is set for accessing the
Directory List.
see the section “Directory List” on page -282.
callers
Callers
Indicates the key is set for accessing the
Callers List.
For more information on the Callers List, see
the section “Callers List” on page -273.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Feature Key
Function
Configuration
File Parameter
Aastra Web UI
Parameter
Description
Transfer
xfer
Xfer
Indicates the key is configured as a transfer
key for transferring calls.
your Aastra IP Phone 57i CT User’s Guide.
Park
park
Park
Indicates the key is set to be used as a park
key to park an incoming call.
“Park/Pick Up Key” on page 5-219.
Pickup
pickup
conf
PickUp
Conf
Indicates the key is set to be used as a pickup
key to pick up a parked call.
For more information on pickup, see the
section “Park/Pick Up Key” on page 5-219.
Conference
Indicates the key is configured as a
conference key (for local conferencing).
(For Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers) An
Administrator can also enable centralized
conferencing on the IP Phones.
For more information about using the
Conference key, see your Aastra IP Phone 57i
CT User’s Guide.
For information about enabling centralizing
conferencing, see “Centralized Conferencing
(for Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers)” on
page 5-341.
5-156
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Feature Key
Function
Configuration
File Parameter
Aastra Web UI
Parameter
Description
Public
public
Public
Indicates the key is configured to toggle from
public to private mode. A public and private
key can be used when at a line item in the
Directory List. The Private key toggles a
number in the Directory List to private. The
Public key allows a number in the Directory
List to be sent to the handsets. A 57i CT
accepts a maximum of 50 entries with the
public attribute.
For more information about the public/private
keys, see your Aastra IP Phone 57i CT User’s
Guide.
Flash
flash
Flash
Indicates the key is set to generate a flash
event when it is pressed, or when a feature
key is pressed on the 57i CT cordless handset.
The IP phone generates flash events only
when a call is connected and there is an active
RTP stream (for example, when the call is not
on hold).
For more information about the Flash key, see
your Aastra IP Phone 57i CT User’s Guide.
Reference
For more information about features key functions for your 57i CT, see your
Aastra IP Phone 57i CT User’s Guide.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuring Handset Feature Keys
You can program up to 15 feature keys on the 57i CT IP phone using the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Use the following procedure to program
the feature keys on your 57i CT Base Station and all paired handsets.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“Handset Feature Key Settings for the 9480i CT and 57i CT” on page A-206.
5-158
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Operation->Handset Keys.
2
3
4
Select the handset key you want to program.
Select the function for that handset key from the "Key Function" field.
Click to save the function you selected to the handset key.
The key programming information is sent to the 57i Base Station and to all the cordless handsets
associated with that Base Station. Any key programmed to "None" does not appear in the handset’s
list.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Speeddial Prefixes
The normal function of the speeddial option allows you to configure a specific
key on the phone to dial a number quickly by pressing the configured key. For
example, if you had the following speeddial configuration in the configuration
files:
softkey1 type: speeddial
softkey1 label: Office
softkey1 value: 5552345
softkey1 line: 1
after you press softkey1 on the phone, it dials the Office number at 555-2345 on
line 1.
A new feature for the speeddial option allows you to configure a preset string of
numbers followed by a “+”. This feature allows the phone to speeddial a prefix
number and then pause to let you enter the remaining phone number. You can use
this feature for numbers that contain long prefixes. For example, if you had the
following speeddial configuration in the configuration files:
softkey2 type: speeddial
softkey2 label: Europe Office
softkey2 value: 1234567+
softkey2 line: 2
after you press softkey2 on the phone, it dials the prefix number automatically and
pauses for you to enter the remaining number using the keypad on the phone.
You can configure the speeddial prefix using the configuration files or the Aastra
Web UI.
5-160
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Busy Lamp Field (BLF)
The BLF feature on the IP phones allows a specific extension to be monitored for
state changes. BLF monitors the status (busy or idle) of extensions on the IP
phone.
Note: The BLF setting is applicable to the Asterisk server only.
Example
A Supervisor configures BLFs on his phone for monitoring the status of a
worker’s phone use (busy or idle). When the worker picks up his phone to make a
call, a busy indicator on the Supervisor’s phone shows that the worker’s phone is
in use and busy.
BLF Setting (For use with Asterisk)
On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT, the busy and idle indicators show on
the IP phone screen display next to the softkey or programmable key configured
for BLF functionality. When the monitored user is idle, an icon with the handset
on-hook shows next to the BLF softkey or programmable key. When the
monitored user is on an active call, a small telephone icon is shown with the
handset off-hook.
On the 9143i, 51i, and 53i, the LED lights next to each BLF programmable key
illuminate steady to indicate the monitored line is off-hook or unregistered. The
LED goes off when the line is idle.
Note: You can configure a maximum of 50 BLFs on the 536M and 560M
Expansion Modules.
You can configure a BLF key on the IP Phones using the configuration files or the
Aastra Web UI.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
BLF\List Setting
(For use with the BroadSoft Broadworks Rel 13 or higher platform only)
The BLF\List feature on the IP phones is specifically designed to support the
BroadSoft Broadworks Rel 13 Busy Lamp Field feature. This feature allows the
IP phone to subscribe to a list of monitored users defined through the BroadWorks
web portal.
In addition to monitoring the idle and busy state, the BLF\List feature also
supports the ringing state. When the monitored user is idle, there is a small
telephone icon shown with the handset on-hook. When the monitored user is in
ringing state, there is a small bell icon shown. When the monitored user is on an
active call then a small telephone icon is shown with the handset off-hook.
On the 9143i and 53i phone, the LED lights next to each BLF programmable key
illuminate steady to indicate the monitored line is off-hook or unregistered. The
LED goes off when the is idle. When the monitored extension is ringing, the LED
flashes.
Note: The Broadworks BLF feature is not the same as the Broadworks
Shared Call Appearance (SCA) feature and does not permit call control
over the monitored extension.
You can configure a BLF/List key on the IP Phones using the configuration files
or the Aastra Web UI. You can also specify a BLF list URI that the phone uses to
access the required BLF list. You can specify a BLF List URI using the “list uri”
parameter in the configuration files or the BLF List URI field in the Aastra Web
UI at the path Operation->Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Expansion Module
Keys->Services->BLF List URI. For more information about the “list uri”
parameter, see Appendix A, the section, “BLF List URI Settings” on page A-218.
Example
A receptionist has a 57i running Broadsoft firmware that subscribes to a list of
extensions from the BroadWorks Application Server. Each monitored extension
in the list shows up individually on the 57i screen next to a softkey button. The
softkey icons on the screen change depending on the state of the extensions.
5-162
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
On the 9143i, 51i, and 53i running Broadsoft firmware, the programmable key
LEDs illuminate either flashing, solid, or turn off depending on the state of those
extensions.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Asterisk BLF Configuration
You can enable the BLF feature on Asterisk to enable monitoring for specific
extensions. BLF on Asterisk is possible through the “hint” extension parameter.
Add the following in the Asterisk extensions.conf file for each target extension
being monitored.
For example:
exten -> 9995551212,hint,SIP/9995551212
Add the following in the Asterisk sip.conf file for each subscriber if it is not
defined already.
For example:
[9995551212]
Subscribecontext=sip
BroadSoft BLF Configuration
You can enable the BLF feature on BroadSoft BroadWorks Rel 13 or higher
through the BroadWorks Web Portal. Each user must have the Busy Lamp Field
service enabled for their user. The user must add each desired extension to the
“Monitored Users List” on the Busy Lamp Field service page and also enter in a
list name for the monitored users BLF list on the same page.
Changes to the “Monitored Users List” are dynamic and the Aastra IP phones are
automatically updated without requiring a restart.
Reference
For sample BLF configurations, see Appendix E, “Sample BLF Softkey Settings.”
5-164
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Configuring BLFs
Use the following procedures to configure BLF and BLF\List on the IP phone.
Configuration Files
To set BLF or BLF\List in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the sections,
•
•
“Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-184.
“BLF List URI Settings” on page A-218
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML
or
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys
or
Click on Operation->Expansion Module <N>.
Depending on your phone-model, the key configuration screen displays. The 57i Key Screen is
shown as an example.
2
3
Select a softkey, programmable, or expansion module key to configure.
In the "Type" field, select "BLF" (Asterisk), "BLF\List" (BroadSoft BroadWorks).
5-166
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
4
5
For the 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT softkeys:
In the "Label" field, enter the name of the person who’s extension you are monitoring (if “Type” is
BLF).
Note: If BLF\List type is selected, no label value is required. The BroadWorks BLF List name is
configured in the "BLF List URI" field instead.
In the "Value" field, enter a value to associate with the softkey or programmable key.
For example, for BLF, the value is the extension you want to monitor.
For BLF\List, the value is an identifier for the list of numbers you are monitoring.
6
7
8
Click
to save your changes.
In the "Line" field, select a line number that is actively registered to the appropriate SIP proxy you are
using.
In the "BLF List URI" field, enter the name of the BLF list defined on the BroadSoft BroadWorks
Busy Lamp field page for your particular user.
For example, [email protected].
Note: The value of the BLF\List URI parameter must match the list name configured. Otherwise, no
values display on the 57i screen and the feature is disabled.
9
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
BLF Subscription Period
On the IP phones, you can set the time period, in seconds, that the IP phone
resubscribes the BLF subscription service after a software/firmware upgrade or
after a reboot of the IP phone.
In the configuration files, you enter the following parameter with a valid value to
set the BLF subscription period:
sip blf subscription period: <value in seconds>
The minimum value for this 120 seconds (2 minutes). The default is 3600 (1
hour).
Setting this parameter to a value lower than 3600 allows the configured BLF
feature to become active more quickly after a software/firmware upgrade or after
a reboot of the IP phone. If you enter a value lower than 120 for this parameter,
the default value (3600) will be used by the IP phone.
You can configure this feature using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring BLF Subscription Period
Use the following procedures to configure the BLF subscription period on the IP
Configuration Files
To configure the BLF subscription period on the IP phones using the configuration files, see Appendix A, the
section, “Advanced SIP Settings” on page A-87.
5-168
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings.
2
3
Enter a value, in seconds, from 120 (2 min) to 3600 (1 hour) in the "BLF Subscription Period" field.
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
BLF/Xfer and Speeddial/Xfer Keys
The IP Phones have a transfer (Xfer) enhancement feature you can use with the
BLF and Speeddial keys - BLF/Xfer and Speeddial/Xfer.
The BLF key allows one or more extensions to be monitored, and once there is
any state change with those extensions, the key shows the status of the monitored
lines. The Xfer key allows a call to be transferred to other recipients blindly or
consultatively.
The Speeddial key allows a number to be dialed quickly by pressing one key
configured for speeddialing. After answering a call, the recipient can transfer the
call to an extension by:
1. Pressing Xfer key
2. Entering the number of the extension or pressing speeddial or BLF key.
3. Pressing Xfer key again
The BLF and Speeddial transfer enhancement feature provides a simpler way of
transferring calls using the keys called BLF/Xfer and Speeddial/Xfer. The BLF/
Xfer key combines the BLF and Xfer key's functionality together allowing the
user to press one key to speeddial and transfer calls.
Note: It is recommended that you enable the “switch focus to
ringing” parameter when using the BLF and Speeddial transfer key
feature. For more information about this parameter, see “Switch Focus
to Ringing Line” on page 5-75.
5-170
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
BLF/Xfer Key Requirements and Functionality
•
BLF/Xfer and BLF
A BLF/Xfer key can be configured for subscribing to an extension and
monitor the status of the extension, similar to the BLF key functionality.
Changes of the state of the monitored extension are indicated by a LED / Icon.
•
BLF/Xfer and Blind Transfer Calls
When the focused line is in the “Connected” state, pressing the BLF/Xfer key
transfers the call to the extension unconditionally, disregarding the status of
the monitored extension.
If transferring a call to an extension fails, a message “Transfer Failed”
displays on the phone, and you can reconnect the call (get the call back) by
pressing the line key again.
•
•
BLF/Xfer and Call forward
When the focused line is in the “Ringing” state, pressing the BLF/Xfer key
forwards the call to the extension unconditionally, disregarding the status of
the monitored extension.
BLF/Xfer and Speeddial
When the focused line and the monitored extension are idle, pressing the
BLF/Xfer key causes the phone to go offhook and dial the number of the
extension.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Speeddial/Xfer Key Requirements and Functionality
The Speeddial/Xfer key has the following capabilities:
•
Speeddial/Xfer and Speeddial
When the phone is in the “Idle” state, pressing the Speeddial/Xfer key causes
the phone to go offhook and dial the predefined extension.
•
Speeddial/Xfer and Blind Transfer
When the phone is connected to a call, pressing the Speeddial/Xfer key blind
transfers the call to the predefined target.
If transferring a call fails, a message “Transfer Failed” displays, and you can
reconnect the call (get the call back) by pressing the line key again.
•
Speeddial/Xfer and Call Forward
When the phone is in the “Ringing” state, pressing the Speeddial/Xfer key
forwards the call to the predefined extension.
5-172
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Configuring the BLF/Xfer Key and the Speeddial/Xfer Key Using the
Configuration Files
You use the following parameters in the configuration files to configure the
BLF/Xfer key and/or Speeddial/Xfer key on the IP Phone.
Softkey Parameters
Programmable Key Parameters Expansion Module Parameters
softkeyN type
softkeyN label
softkeyN value
softkeyN line
softkeyN states
prgkeyN type
prgkeyN value
prgkeyN line
expmodN keyN type
expmodN keyN label
expmodN keyN value
expmodN keyN line
Top Softkey Parameters
topsoftkeyN type
topsoftkeyN label
topsoftkeyN value
topsoftkeyN line
Examples:
softkey1 type: speeddialxfer
softkey1 label: BX7801
softkey1 value: 7801
softkey1 line: 1
softkey1 states: idle connected incoming outgoing busy
prgkey1 type: blfxfer
prgkey1 value: 35
prgkey1 line: 1
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuring the BLF/Xfer Key and the Speeddial/Xfer Key Using the
Aastra Web UI
You configure the BLF/Xfer key and/or the Speeddial/Xfer Key on the IP phone
similar to configuring a BLF key or speeddial key using the Aastra Web UI. Use
the following procedure to configure BLF/Xfer and/or Speeddial/Xfer.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML.
or
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys.
or
Click on Operation->Expansion Keys.
Bottom Keys Tab (57i example).
5-174
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
Top Keys Tab (57i example)
2
Choose a key that you want to assign the BLF/Xfer key or a Speeddial/Xfer key to, and select BLF/
Xfer or Speeddial/Xfer from the “Type” field.
3
4
5
6
In the “Label” field, enter a key label to assign to the BLF/Xfer key (for example, “BX35”).
In the “Value” field, enter the monitored extension (for example, “35”).
In the “Line” field, select the line for which you want to use the key functionality.
On the Bottom Key tab, in the States field, select the state(s) (idle, connected, incoming, outgoing,
busy) for which you want to use on the key.
Note: States are not applicable to programmable keys.
7
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) (for Sylantro Servers)
The IP phones support an Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) feature for Sylantro
servers. The ACD feature allows the Sylantro server to distribute calls from a
queue to registered IP phone users (agents).
To use the ACD feature on an IP phone, the administrator must first configure an
an ACD softkey or programmable key. When an IP phone user wants to subscribe
to a queue (in order to receive incoming calls), the user presses the ACD key. The
IP phone UI prompts the user to specify the following information:
•
•
•
User ID: the phone number(s) used to login into the queue.
Password: the password used to login to the queue.
Available/unavailable: Shows the current status of the IP phone. Specifies if
the IP phone user is available/unavailable to receive a call from the queue.
This parameter is set to “unavailable” by default.
When the IP phone user is ready to receive calls from the server, the user logs into
a queue. Depending on the server configuration, the IP phone is either in an
“unavailable” or “available” state. If the phone is set to “available” then the server
begins to distribute calls to this phone immediately. If the phone is set to
unavailable, then server waits until the IP phone user manually changes the phone
status to “available” (using the IP phone UI) before distributing calls.
Whenever the IP phone user answers a call, or misses a call, the server
automatically changes the phone’s status to unavailable. The server updates it
The IP phone will remain in this state until:
— the IP phone user makes himself “available” again.
— the ACD auto-availability timer expires. This occurs only if the
administrator has configured an ACD auto-availability timer as described
in “ACD Auto-Available Timer” on page 5-177.
The IP phone user can also choose to manually change the phone status to
unavailable, using the IP Phone UI.
Note: It is recommended you configure no more than a single ACD
softkey or programmable key per IP phone.
5-176
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
ACD Auto-Available Timer
Whenever the IP phone user answers a call, or misses a call, the server
automatically changes the phone’s status to unavailable. The administrator can
control how long the IP phone remains in the unavailable state by configuring an
auto-available timer. When the timer expires, the IP phone status is automatically
changed to available. The default setting for the timer is 60 seconds.
You use the following parameters to configure an ACD Auto-Available Timer in
the configuration files:
• acd auto available
• acd auto available timer
Configuring an Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Key
You can configure an ACD key on softkeys, programmable keys, and extension
module keys. The following table illustrates examples of configuring an ACD key
on the phone.
Programmable Key
Examples
Extension Module
Examples
Softkey Examples
Top Softkey Examples
prgkey1 type: acd
prgkey1 line: 1:
expmod1 key1 type: acd
expmod1 key1 label: sales
expmod1 key 1 line: 1
softkey1 type: acd
softkey1 label: sales topsoftkey1 label: sales
softkey1 line: 1
topsoftkey1 type: acd
topsoftkey1 line: 1
softkey1 states: idle
topsoftkey1 states: idle
Use the following procedures to configure an ACD key n the IP phone.
Configuration Files
To configure an ACD key using the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Softkey/Programmable
Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-184.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuration Files
To configure the ACD Auto-Available Timer using the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “ACD
Auto-Available Timer Settings” on page A-178.
5-178
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Configuring an ACD Key Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to configure an ACD softkey, programmable key, or
expansion module key using the Aastra Web UI. This procedure uses the 55i IP
phone as an example.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML
or
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys
or
Click on Operation->Expansion Module <N>.
Depending on your phone-model, the key configuration screen displays. The 57i Key Screen is
shown as an example.
2
3
In the “Type” field, select Auto Call Distribution.
In the “Label” field, specify a name for this ACD softkey. The Label helps identify which queue you
are subscribing to when you login. (This field does not apply to the 53i and the 9143i.)
For example: Sales
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
4
5
In the “Line” field, select the line which the IP phone uses to subscribe to the queue.
For example: Line 1
Click
to save your changes.
Configuring the ACD Auto-Available Timer Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to configure an ACD auto-available timer using the
Aastra Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Auto Call Distribution Settings.
2
3
In the “Auto Available” check-box, click Enabled.
In the “Auto Available Timer” field, specify the length of time (in seconds) before the IP phone
state is automatically reset to “available.” Valid values are 0 to 120 seconds. Default is 60.
For example: 60
4
Click
to save your changes.
5-180
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Using the ACD Feature on your IP Phone
The ACD feature allows you to login to a phone queue in order to receive
distributed calls on your IP phone. To login to a phone queue, your system
administrator must preconfigure an ACD softkey or programmable key on your
Aastra IP phone.
For models 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, 57i CT, the ACD softkey is labeled
according to your network requirements. Check with your administrator to verify
the label assigned to the ACD softkey on your IP phone. The label usually
describes which phone queue you are accessing when you press the ACD softkey.
For example, suppose the administrator wants to configure an ACD softkey to
allow an IP phone user to log into the Customer Support phone queue. The
administrator assigns the label “Support” to the softkey, so it is easily
recognizable to the IP phone user. When the IP phone user wants to subscribe to
the Customer Support queue, the user presses the Support key and can log in.
Once logged in to the queue, you can make himself “available” or “unavailable”
to take calls by pressing the Available/Unavailable key on the phone UI. The
server monitors your IP phone status. When you set the IP phone to “available,”
the server begins distributing calls to your phone. When you set the IP phone to
“unavailable,” the server temporarily stops distributing calls to your phone.
The icon that appears next to the ACD softkey or programmable key on the IP
Phone UI reflects your current status. In the example shown below, the
shows the current status of this IP phone user as “logged off.”
icon
Services
Dir
Icom
Callers
L1
Mon Jan 2 10:37am
ACD softkey
for this example
o
Support
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
This icon changes when you log on to the phone queue and are available to take
calls. The icon changes again when you are busy with an active call. The table
below describes the meaning of the LED, and each icon, as they may appear on
your IP phone:
Status: Logged In
and Available
Phone Model
Status: Unavailable Logged Out
9143i
Solid Red LED
Blinking red LED
Blinking Red LED
No LED
9480i, 9480i CT
Solid Red LED
icon
No LED
icon
Blinking
icon
53i
Solid Red LED
Blinking red LED
Blinking Red LED
No LED
55i, 57i, 57i CT
Solid Red LED
icon
No LED
icon
Blinking
icon
5-182
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Logging In to a Phone Queue (9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, 57i CT)
Use the following procedure to log into a phone queue from your Aastra IP phone.
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
Press the ACD softkey on your IP phone.
Note: Check with your administrator to verify the label assigned to the ACD softkey on your IP
phone.
The login screen (see below) appears. In this example, the ACD softkey accesses the Customer
Support phone queue and is labelled “Support.”
Services
Dir
Icom
Callers
ACD: Support
User ID:
Password:
Backspace
Log In
Cancel
2
To log into the phone queue, use your IP phone keypad to enter the following information:
User ID: The phone number you use to access the queue.
Password: The password you use to access this queue.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
3
Press the Log In softkey.
You are logged into the phone queue. Once you log in, examine the IP Phone UI, and note the
following information:
•
•
•
If your IP phone status is set to “available” then the server will begin to distribute phone calls from
this queue to your IP phone.
If your IP phone status remains “unavailable” after you log in, then you must manually change the
state to “available” in order to start receiving calls.
To temporarily stop receiving calls, you can switch the IP phone status to “unavailable.”
While you are on a call (or miss a call that has been distributed to your IP phone), your IP phone
status automatically switches to “unavailable.” Your IP phone remains in the unavailable state until
one of the following things occur:
•
•
You use the IP Phone UI to manually switch the IP phone state back to available, or
The availability “timer” for your IP phone expires. This only occurs if your administrator has
configured an auto-availability timer on your IP phone.
4
To Log out of the queue, press the Log Out softkey. The server no longer distributes phone calls to
your IP phone.
5-184
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Logging In To a Phone Queue (53i and 9143i)
Use the following procedure to log into a phone queue from your Aastra IP phone.
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
2
Press the ACD programmable key on your IP phone.
To login to the phone queue, use your IP phone keypad to enter the following information:
User ID: The phone number you use to access the queue.
Password: The password you use to access this queue.
3
Select Login.
You are logged into the phone queue. Once you log in, examine the IP Phone UI, and note the
following information:
•
•
•
If your IP phone status is set to “available” then the server will begin to distribute phone calls from
this queue to your IP phone.
If your IP phone status remains “unavailable” after you log in, then you must manually change the
state to “available” in order to start receiving calls.
To temporarily stop receiving calls, you can switch the IP phone status to “unavailable.”
While you are on a call (or miss a call that has been distributed to your IP phone), your IP phone
status automatically switches to “unavailable.” Your IP phone remains in the unavailable state until
one of the following things occur:
•
•
You use the IP Phone UI to manually switch the IP phone state back to available, or
The availability “timer” for your IP phone expires. This only occurs if your administrator has
configured an auto-availability timer on your IP phone.
4
To Log out of the queue, select Logout.
The server no longer distributes phone calls to your IP phone.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
ACD Subscription Period
On the IP phones, you can set the time period, in seconds, that the IP phone
resubscribes the ACD subscription service after a software/firmware upgrade or
after a reboot of the IP phone.
In the configuration files, you enter the following parameter with a valid value to
set the ACD subscription period:
sip acd subscription period: <value in seconds>
The minimum value for this 120 seconds (2 minutes).
The default is 3600 (1 hour).
Setting this parameter to a value lower than 3600 allows the configured ACD
feature to become active more quickly after a software/firmware upgrade or after
a reboot of the IP phone. If you enter a value lower than 120 for this parameter,
the default value (3600) will be used by the IP phone.
You can configure this feature using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring ACD Subscription Period
Use the following procedures to configure the ACD subscription period on the IP
Configuration Files
To configure the ACD subscription period on the IP phones using the configuration files, see Appendix A, the
section, “Advanced SIP Settings” on page A-87.
5-186
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings.
2
3
Enter a value, in seconds, from 120 (2 min) to 3600 (1 hour) in the "ACD Subscription Period" field.
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
BLA Subscription Period
The IP Phones include a SIP BLA subscription period parameter that allows an
Administrator to set the amount of time, in seconds, of the BLA subscription
period.
If this parameter is set to zero (0), the phone uses the value specified for the BLA
expiration in the subscribe message received from the server. If no value is
specified in the Subscribe message received from the server, the phone uses the
default value of 300 seconds.
You can configure this parameter using the configuration files or the Aastra Web
UI.
Configuring the BLA Subscription Period
Use the following procedures to configure the BLA Subscription Period.
Configuration Files
To configure the BLA subscription period on the IP phones using the configuration files, see Appendix A, the
section, “Advanced SIP Settings” on page A-87.
5-188
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings.
2
3
In the “BLA Subscription Period” field, enter a value, in seconds, that the phone waits to receive
a BLA subscribe message from the server. If you specify zero (0), the phone uses the value
specified for the BLA expiration in the subscribe message received from the server. If no value is
specified, the phone uses the default value of 300 seconds. Valid values are 0 to 3700. Default is
300 seconds.
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Directed Call Pickup/Group Call Pickup (for Sylantro Servers)
Aastra IP phones and any attached Expansion Modules support the Directed Call
Pickup (DCP) and Group Call Pickup (GCP) features.
The Directed Call Pickup/Group Call Pickup feature allows you to intercept - or
pickup - a call on a monitored extension. An Administrator or User can configure
this feature using the Aastra Web UI to create a DCP or GCP softkey on the IP
phone. When you configure a DCP softkey, you specify the extension that you
want to monitor. Then, when the monitored extension receives a call, you press
the DCP softkey to “pickup” (intercept) it. If the monitored extension receives
multiple incoming calls simultaneously, the IP Phone UI displays a list of
incoming calls. You select a call from this list, and are connected to the call.
When you configure a GCP softkey, you specify the ring group that you want to
monitor for incoming calls. For example, suppose an Operator configures a GCP
softkey to monitor incoming calls for a specific ring group (extensions
2200-2210). When an incoming call is received on any of these extensions, the
Operator presses the GCP softkey and is connected to the call. If multiple
incoming calls are received simultaneously, the Operator does the following
actions:
•
Presses the GCP softkey. The Operator Phone UI displays the current list of
incoming calls (see below).
•
•
Selects an extension to “pickup” first.
Presses the Pickup softkey. The Operator is connected to the incoming call.
DCP on line:
Select an extension
1. 2201
= Cancel
= Pickup
Press the Pickup
softkey to intercept
the call
5-190
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Configuring DCP/GCP Using the Configuration Files
(for Sylantro Servers)
Use the following procedures to configure DCP/GCP using the configuration
Configuration Files
To set DCP/GCP in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Softkey/Programmable Key/
Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-184.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuring Directed Call Pickup (DCP) Using the Aastra Web UI
(for Sylantro Servers)
Use the following procedure to configure Directed Call Pickup using the Aastra
5-192
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Web UI. This procedure uses the 57i IP Phone as an example.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML
or
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys
or
Click on Operation->Expansion Module <N>.
Depending on your phone-model, the key configuration screen displays. The 55i Key Screen is
shown as an example.
2
3
Select a key for which to configure Directed Call Pickup.
In the “Type” field, select Directed Call Pickup.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
4
5
6
In the “Label” field, specify a name for this Directed Call Pickup softkey.
For example: DCP2200
In the “Value” field, specify the extension you want to intercept when you press this softkey.
For example: 2200
Click
to save your changes.
5-194
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Configuring Group Call Pickup (GCP) Using the Aastra Web UI
(for Sylantro Servers)
Use the following procedure to configure Group Call Pickup using the Aastra
Web UI.
Note: A ring group must be configured on the Sylantro Server in order
for a GCP softkey to function.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML
or
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys
or
Click on Operation->Expansion Module <N>.
Depending on your phone-model, the key configuration screen displays. The 55i Key Screen is
shown as an example.
2
3
4
Select a key for which to configure Group Call Pickup.
In the “Type” field, select Directed Call Pickup.
In the “Label” field, specify a name for this Directed Call Pickup softkey.
For example: GCP_A
5-196
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
5
6
In the “Value” field, enter groupcallpickup.
Click
to save your changes.
Using Directed Call Pickup/Group Call Pickup
Use the following procedure for the DCP/GCP on your phone.
Note: Before using the DCP/GCP feature on your phone, you must first
configure the DCP or GCP key. You must identify the extension(s) or
phone number(s) you want to monitor when configuring the key.
IP Phone UI
Step Action
Using Directed Call Pickup (DCP)
1
2
When the monitored extension receives a call, press the DCP softkey to pick up the call.
If the monitored extension receives multiple incoming calls simultaneously, the phone displays a list
of incoming calls.
3
Select a call from this list using the UP and DOWN arrow keys.
The call is answered.
Using Group Call Pickup (GCP)
1
When any of the monitored group of extensions receives a call, press the GCP softkey to pick up the
call.
The call is answered.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
IP Phone UI
Step Action
2
If the monitored extension receives multiple incoming calls simultaneously, the phone displays a list
of incoming calls.
3
Select a call from this list using the UP and DOWN arrow keys.
Press the "Pickup" softkey to answer the call you selected.
DCP on line:
Select an extension
1. 2201
= Cancel
= Pickup
Press the Pickup
key to answer
the call
5-198
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Do Not Disturb (DND)
The IP phones have a feature you can enable called "Do not Disturb (DND). An
Administrator or User can set “do not disturb” based on the accounts on the phone
(all accounts or a specific account). You can set specific modes for the way you
want the phone to handle DND. The three modes you can set on the phone for
DND are:
•
•
•
Account
Phone
Custom
DND Account-Based Configuration
An Administrator or User can configure DND on the phone-side by setting a
mode for the phone to use (account, phone, or custom). Once the mode is set,
you can use the IP Phone UI to use the DND feature.
Notes:
1.
If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the
mode setting is ignored and the phone behaves as if the mode was set
to “Phone”.
2.
You must configure a DND key on the phone to be able to use
this feature via the phone’s keypad.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
The following describes the DND key behavior for each DND mode.
•
Account - DND key toggles the account in focus on the IP Phone UI, to ON
or OFF if DND enabled for that account.
•
•
Phone - DND key toggles all accounts on the phone to ON or OFF.
Custom - DND key displays custom screens on the IP Phone UI. User can
select whether to enable/disable DND per account, enable DND on all
accounts, or disable DND on all accounts.
The following table describes the DND key and Message Waiting Indicator
(MWI) LEDs when you enable DND on the IP Phone.
Softkey LED Behavior
for All Modes
MWI LED Behavior
for All Modes
DND key LED RED if current account in
MWI LED ON if current account in focus has
focus has DND ON.
DND ON.
DND key LED OFF when current account MWI LED OFF if current account in focus
in focus has DND disabled. has DND OFF.
You can configure the DND softkey and the DND mode (Account, Phone,
Custom) using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Once you configure
DND, you can access the DND screen on the IP Phone UI.
Important Notes
•
In the Aastra Web UI, the “Account Configuration” page replaces the
previous “Call Forward Settings” page.
•
In the IP Phone UI, the new DND key feature now has new menu screens.
•
If you make changes to the configuration for DND via the IP Phone UI,
you must refresh the Aastra Web UI screen to see the changes.
5-200
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Configuring DND Using the Configuration Files
You use the following parameters to configure DND on the IP Phone:
•
•
•
dnd key mode
softkeyN type, topsoftkeyN type, prgkeyN type, or expmodX keyN type
softkeyN states (optional)
Note: If there is no DND key configured or if it is removed, DND is
disabled on the IP Phone.
Example
The following is an example of configuring the mode for DND in the
configuration files:
dnd key mode: 2
softkey1 type: dnd
softkey1 states: idle connected incoming outgoing busy
In the above example, softkey 1 is configured for DND for line 1 only, with a
“custom” configuration. Pressing softkey 1 displays DND screens for which you
can customize on the phone. For specific screens that display in the IP Phone UI,
see the section, “Using DND Modes via the IP Phone UI” on page 5-205.
Configuration Files
To set DND in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the sections:
•
•
“DND Key Mode Settings” on page A-146.
“Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-184.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuring DND Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to configure DND mode using the Aastra Web UI:
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.
DND Key Mode
Parameter
2
In the “DND Key Mode” field, select a “do not disturb” (DND) mode to use on the phone.
Valid values are: Account, Phone, Custom. Default is Phone.
•
•
•
account
phone
Sets DND for a specific account. DND key toggles the account in focus on the
IP Phone UI, to ON or OFF.
Sets DND ON for all accounts on the phone. DND key toggles all accounts on the
phone to ON or OFF.
Sets the phone to display custom screens after pressing the DND key, that list the
account(s) on the phone. The user can select a specific account for DND, turn
DND ON for all accounts, or turn DND OFF for all accounts.
custom
Notes:
1. If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the mode setting is ignored and the
phone behaves as if the mode was set to “Phone”.
2. Using the Aastra Web UI, if you change the DND Key Mode to “phone”, all accounts
synchronize to the current setting of Account 1.
5-202
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
3
4
Click
to save your changes.
The change takes effect immediately without a reboot.
Click on Basic Settings->Account Configuration.
5
For each account, enable DND by placing a check mark in the box. Disable DND by unchecking the
box.
Notes:
1. If you selected “Account” or “Custom” mode in step 2, you can enable/disable each account or
all accounts as applicable.
If you selected “Phone” mode, the first account allows you to change the DND status for all accounts.
2. Number and name of accounts that display to this screen are dependant on the number and
name of accounts configured on the phone. In the screen in step 4, Screenname1 is configured on
Line 1, Screenname2 is configured on Line 2, and Screenname3 is configured on Line 3. The name
for the account is dependant on the name specified for the “Screen Name” parameter at the path
Advanced Settings->LineN. If you do not specify a value for the “Screen Name” parameter, the
account name is based on the “Phone Number” parameter at the path Advanced Settings->LineN.
If neither the “Screen Name” nor the “Phone Number” parameters are specified, the account name
shows “1”, “2”, “3”, etc. only.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
6
7
Click
to save your changes.
The change takes effect immediately without a reboot.
Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML;
or
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys;
or
Click on Operation->Expansion Module.
Softkeys 1 and 2 configured for DND
Note: If there is no DND key configured or if it is removed, DND is disabled on the IP Phone.
8
Click
to save your changes.
5-204
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Using DND Modes via the IP Phone UI
If you add a DND key using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI, you can
toggle the DND state using the IP Phone UI. Use the following procedure to
enable/disable DND on the IP Phone.
The following procedure assumes you have already configured a DND key AND
assumes there are three accounts configured on the phone.
Notes:
1. If there is no DND key configured or if it is removed, DND is
disabled on the IP Phone.
2. If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the
mode setting is ignored and the phone behaves as if the mode was set
to “Phone”.
3. Using the Aastra Web UI, if you change the DND key mode to
“phone”, all accounts synchronize to the current setting of Account 1.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
.
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
DND in Account Mode
On the 9143i, 51i and 53i:
With the account in focus on the IP Phone UI, press the DND key to toggle DND ON or OFF for the
account. Use the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account.
2
1
Screenname2
Screenname1
DND On
Jan 1 12:96
Jan 1 12:96
3
Screenname3
DND On
Jan 1 12:96
In the above example, Screenname1, Screenname2, and Screenname3, are three accounts
configured on the phone. Only Screenname1 and 3 have DND ON. Screenname 2 has DND OFF.
On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT:
With the account in focus on the IP Phone UI, press the DND key to toggle DND ON or OFF for the
account. Use the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account.
Services
Dir
Services
Dir
Services
Dir
Callers
L2
Callers
L3
Callers
L1
Screenname2
Screenname3
DND On
Tues Jan1 10:00am
Screenname1
DND On
Tues Jan1 10:00am
Tues Jan1 10:00am
- DND
- DND
- DND
In the above example, Screenname1, Screenname2, and Screenname3, are three accounts
configured on the phone. Only Screenname1 and 3 have DND ON. Screenname 2 has DND OFF.
5-206
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
DND in Phone Mode
On the 9143i, 51i and 53i:
Press the DND key to toggle DND ON or OFF for all accounts on the phone. Toggling to ON enables
DND on all accounts on the phone. Toggling to OFF disables DND on all accounts on the phone. Use
the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account.
2
1
Screenname2
DND On
Screenname1
DND On
Jan 1 12:96
Jan 1 12:96
3
Screenname3
DND On
Jan 1 12:96
In the above example, toggling Screenname1 to DND ON, enabled DND for Screenname2 and 3
also.
On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT:
Press the DND key to toggle DND ON or OFF for all accounts on the phone. Toggling to ON enables
DND on all accounts on the phone. Toggling to OFF disables DND on all accounts on the phone. Use
the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account.
Services
Dir
Services
Dir
Services
Dir
Callers
L2
Callers
L3
Callers
L1
Screenname2
DND On
Tues Jan1 10:00am
Screenname3
DND On
Tues Jan1 10:00am
Screenname1
DND On
Tues Jan1 10:00am
- DND
- DND
- DND
In the above example, toggling Screenname1 to DND ON, enabled DND for Screenname2 and 3
also.
Note: Enabling DND in “Phone” mode toggles all accounts on the phone to DND ON.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
DND in Custom Mode
On the 9143i, 51i and 53i:
Press the DND key on the phone. The screen displays a list of the accounts on the phone and allows
you to enable/disable a specific account or all accounts. Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to scroll
through the accounts.
DND
1. Screenname1
ꢀ
Change
Done
DND
4. All Off
Done
Indicates
DND On
Set
Set
DND
2. Screenname2
X
Change
Done
DND
5. All On
Done
Indicates
DND Off
DND
3. Screenname3
Done
ꢀ
Change
In the above example, Screenname1 and 3 have DND ON as indicated by a checkmark ( 3).
Screenname2 has DND off as indicated by an X. Items 4 and 5 allow you to disable or enable DND
on all accounts, respectively.
You use the CHANGE key to enable or disable DND for a specific account. You use the SET key to
enable/disable DND for all accounts. After making the change, you must press DONE and then
Confirm (#) to save the change. Pressing Cancel (0) cancels the attempted change. The following
screen displays after pressing a DONE key:
Apply Changes?
0 Cancel
# Confirm
5-208
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
DND in Custom Mode (continued)
On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT:
Press the DND key on the phone. The screen displays a list of the accounts on the phone and allows
you to enable/disable a specific account or all accounts. Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to scroll
through the accounts.
Services
Dir
Callers
DND
1. Screenname1
2. Screenname2
3. Screenname3
ꢀ
X
ꢀ
Indicates
DND On
- Change
- All On
- All Off
Cancel -
Done -
Indicates
DND Off
In the above example, Screenname1 and 3 have DND ON as indicated by a checkmark ( 3).
Screenname2 has DND off as indicated by an X. The ALL ON and ALL OFF softkeys allow you to
enable or disable DND on all accounts, respectively.
You use the CHANGE key to enable or disable DND for a specific account selected. After making the
change, you must press DONE to save the change.
If DND is configured on the phone, the softkey or programmable key switches
DND ON and OFF. If the phone shares a line with other phones, only the phone
that has DND configured is affected.
The second line on the screen of the IP phone shows when DND is configured.
When a call comes in on the line, the caller hears a busy signal or recorded
message, depending on the server configuration.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Bridged Line Appearance (BLA)
A SIP bridge line appearance (BLA) on the IP phones allows multiple devices to
share a single directory address (DA).
For example, people working at a technical support department could be located
in different places. If their desktop phones are configured for BLA DA, when
customer calls come in, all the phones with the BLA DA would ring but the call
can only be answered by one of them.
Once the call is answered, the rest of the phones reflect the status of the call. If the
call was put on "hold" by the original recipient, any one from the group can pick
up the call.
Note: This feature is dependent on the IP telephony system to which the
IP phone is registered and according to draft-anil-sipping-bla-02.txt.
You can apply BLA on the IP phones as follows:
•
As a single BLA group - One BLA DA is shared among multiple phones.
Only one phone at a time can pick up an incoming call or initiate an outgoing
call on the BLA DA. All phones reflect the usage of the BLA DA. If the call is
put on "hold", any one from the group can pick up the "held" call.
•
•
As a multiple BLA group - On one single phone, multiple BLA DA can be
associated with different line appearances. Every BLA DA is independent
from each other and follows the same rules as "a single BLA group".
As multiple instances of a BLA DA - A "x-line-id" parameter was defined in
draft-anil-sipping-bla-02.txt to present the incoming call to or place an
outgoing call on the specified line appearance instance. The parameter is
carried in "Alert-Info" header field over the request-URI (INVITE e.g.) or in
the NOTIFY messages to report the status of a dialog.
BLA DA can be configured on a global basis or on a per-line basis on the IP
phones using the Aastra Web UI or the configuration files.
5-210
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
The following table shows the number of lines that can be set to BLA for each
model phone.
Possible # of BLA
IP Phone Model
Lines
9143i
9480i
9480i CT
51i
9
9
9
N/A
9
53i
55i
9
57i
9
57i CT
9
Configuring BLA
You can configure BLA on a global or per-line basis using the configuration files
or the Aastra Web UI.
Global BLA
You configure BLA on a global basis in the configuration files using the following
parameters:
sip mode
sip user name
sip bla number
You configure BLA on a global basis in the Aastra Web UI using the following
fields at Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Basic SIP Settings:
•
•
•
Line Mode
Phone Number
BLA Number
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Per-Line BLA
You configure BLA on a per-line basis in the configuration files using the
following parameters:
sip lineN mode
sip lineN username
sip lineN bla number
You configure BLA on a per-line basis in the Aastra Web UI using the following
fields at Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru Line 9:
•
•
•
Line Mode
Phone Number
BLA Number
Sylantro servers and ININ servers require specific configuration methods for
per-line configurations.
For Sylantro Server
When configuring the BLA feature on a per-line basis for a Sylantro server, the
value set for the "sip lineN bla number" parameter shall be the same value set for
the "sip lineN user name" parameter for all the phones in the group. For example,
if sip lineN user name is 1010, you would configure BLA on a per-line basis for
the Sylantro server as follows:
sip line 1 mode: 3
sip line1 user name: 1010 (# for all the phones)
sip line1 bla number: 1010
5-212
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
For ININ Server
When configuring the BLA feature on an ININ server, the value set for the sip
lineN bla number parameter shall be the same value set for the sip lineN user
name parameter without the incremented digit added to the phone #. For example,
if the sip lineN user name for the first phone is 10101, and the sip lineN user name
for the second phone is 10102, etc., you would configure BLA on a per-line basis
for the ININ server as follows:
(# for phone 1 with appearance of phone 3)
sip line1 mode: 3
sip line1 user name: 10101 sip line1 bla number: 1010
(# for phone 2 with appearance of phone 3)
sip line1 mode: 3
sip line1 user name: 10102
sip line1 bla number: 1010
(# for phone 3)
sip line1 mode: 3
sip line1 user name: 1010
sip line1 bla number: 1010
Note: The original phone number which has the bridged line appearance
on other phones, will have the "sip lineN user name" parameter the same
as the "sip lineN bla number" (1010 in the above example on Phone 3).
Use the following procedures to configure BLA on the IP phone.
Configuring Global BLA
Configuration Files
For specific global parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“SIP Basic, Global Settings” on page A-64.
Configuring Per-Line BLA
Configuration Files
For specific per-line parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“SIP Basic, Per-Line Settings” on page A-73.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
For global configuration of BLA:
Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Basic SIP Authentication Settings.
5-214
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
For per-line configuration of BLA:
Click on Advanced Settings->Line N (1-9).
In the "Line Mode" field, select the BLA option.
2
3
In the "Phone Number" field, enter the phone number of the IP phone.
For global configuration of BLA:
In the "BLA Number" field, enter the Bridge Line Appearance (BLA) number to be shared across all
IP phones.
For per-line configuration of BLA:
In the "BLA Number" field, enter the Bridge Line Appearance (BLA) number to be shared on a
specific line.
4
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
BLA Subscription Period
The phones include a SIP BLA subscription period parameter that allows an
Administrator to set the amount of time, in seconds, of the BLA subscription
period.
Reference
For more information about setting the BLA Subscription Period, see the section,
“BLA Subscription Period” on page 5-188.
Using a BLA Line on the IP Phone
If you have either a global or per-line BLA configuration, and you want to share a
call on the line with a BLA group, you need to press the Hold button before
sharing the call with the group.
For example, if line 1 is configured for BLA, and you pick up a call on line 1, you
must press the Hold button to share the call with the BLA group.
If you pick up a call on line 1 configured for BLA, and another call comes in on
line 2, you can pick up line 2 without putting line 1 on hold. The line 1 call will
be on hold automatically; however it is on hold locally only. The line 1 call
cannot be shared with the BLA group.
Note: The Hold button must be pressed for a call on a BLA line to be
shared with the BLA group.
5-216
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
BLA Support for Third Party Registration
BLA allows an Address Of Record (AOR) to be assigned onto different line
appearances for a group of SIP user agents (IP phones). When a call is made to
this BLA number, the call is offered to all user agents that have mapping to this
BLA. To support this, the IP phones need to support third party registration for the
BLA along with the registration for its own primary appearance number. If the IP
phone has the primary appearance as a BLA, then there is no need for third party
registration.
When configuring the BLA feature on a per-line basis for third party registration
and subscription, the third party name must be configured using the “sip lineN bla
number” parameter. For third party registration to work effectively, one of the
lines should register as generic with its own username.
For example, Bob has Alice’s appearance on his phone. Bob’s configuration is as
follows:
#line 1 Bob
sip line1 auth name:4082272203
sip line1 password:
sip line1 mode: 0
sip line1 user name:4082272203
sip line1 display name:Bob
sip line1 screen name:Bob
#line 2 Alice
sip line2 auth name:4082272203
sip line2 password:
#BLA mode 3
sip line2 mode: 3
sip line2 user name:4082272203
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
#Alice phone number
sip line2 bla number:4085582868
sip line2 display name:Alice
sip line2 screen name:Alice
Alice’s configuration is as follows:
#line 1
sip line1 auth name:4085582868
sip line1 password:
sip line1 mode: 3
sip line1 user name:4085582868
sip line1 display name: Alice
sip line1 screen name: Alice
5-218
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Park/Pick Up Key
The IP phones (including the 57i CT and 9480i CT handsets) have a park and
pickup call feature that allows you to park a call and pickup a call when required.
There are two ways a user or administrator can configure this feature:
•
•
Using a static configuration (globally configures park and pickup)
Using a programmable configuration (using a key)
Note: The IP phones accept both methods of configuration. However, to
avoid redundancy, Aastra Telecom recommends you configure either a
static configuration or a programmable configuration.
The IP phones support the Park/Pickup feature on the Asterisk, BroadWorks,
Sylantro, and ININ PBX servers.
The following paragraph describes the configuration of a park and pickup key on
the IP phone. For information about configuring the park and pickup static
configuration method see “Park Calls/Pick Up Parked Calls” on page 5-55.
Park/Pickup Programmable Configuration (using a key)
The programmable method of configuration creates park and pickup keys
(softkeys, programmable keys, expansion module keys) that you can configure on
the IP phones.
For the 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT you can set a key as "Park" or
"Pickup" and then:
•
•
•
•
specify a customized label to display on the Phone UI
specify a value
specify which line to use
specify the state of the park and/or pickup keys
For the 9143i and 53i, you can set a programmable key as "Park" or "Pickup" and
then:
•
•
specify a value
specify a line to use
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
On 9480i/9480i CT and 57i/57i CT
On the IP phone UI, the Park/Pickup feature displays the following:
•
When a call comes in, and you pickup the handset, the custom label that you
configured for the Park softkey displays on the Phone UI.
•
After the call is parked, the label that you configured for the Pickup softkey
displays on other phones in the network. You can then press the "Pickup"
softkey, followed by the applicable value to pickup the call on another phone
in your network.
•
On the Model CTs, the customized labels apply to the base unit only. On the
Model CT handsets, pressing Ï displays the default labels of "Park" and
"Pickup".
Note: On the 9480i/9480i CT and 57i/57i CT, the old softkey labeled
"Pickup" has been renamed to "Answer". This softkey uses the old
functionality - when you pickup the handset, you see a softkey labeled
"Answer". You can then press this key to pick up an incoming call. Do
no confuse this feature with the new Park/Pickup configuration feature.
On 9143i and 53i
•
When a call comes in, and you pickup the handset, you can press the
applicable "Park" programmable key to park the call.
•
After the call is parked, you can press the "Pickup" programmable key,
followed by the applicable value to pickup the call.
You can configure a Park and Pickup key configuration using the configuration
files or the Aastra Web UI.
5-220
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Configuring Park/Pickup Key Using Configuration Files
In the configuration files, you configure Park/Pickup using the key parameters.
You must specify the "softkeyN value", "prgkeyN value", “topsoftkeyN value“, or
“expmodX keyN value”. The following examples show Park/Pickup
configurations using specific servers.
Model 57i/57i CT and 9480i/9480i CT Examples
Server
Asterisk
Park Configuration
softkeyN type: park
Pickup Configuration
softkeyN type: pickup
softkeyN label: parkCall
softkeyN value: asterisk;70
softkeyN line: 1
softkeyN label: pickupCall
softkeyN value: asterisk;70
softkeyN line: 1
softkeyN states: connected*
softkeyN states: idle, outgoing**
Sylantro
softkeyN type: park
softkeyN type: pickup
softkeyN label: parkCall
softkeyN value: sylantro;*98
softkeyN line: 1
softkeyN label: pickupCall
softkeyN value: sylantro;*99
softkeyN line: 1
softkeyN states: connected*
softkeyN states: idle, outgoing**
BroadWorks
ININ PBX
softkeyN type: park
softkeyN type: pickup
softkeyN label: parkCall
softkeyN value: broadworks;*68
softkeyN line: 1
softkeyN label: pickupCall
softkeyN value: broadworks;*88
softkeyN line: 1
softkeyN states: connected*
softkeyN states: idle, outgoing**
softkeyN type: park
softkeyN type: pickup
softkeyN label: parkCall
softkeyN value: inin;callpark
softkeyN line: 1
softkeyN label: pickupCall
softkeyN value: inin;pickup
softkeyN line: 1
softkeyN states: connected*
softkeyN states: idle, outgoing**
*When you configure a softkey as "Park", you must configure the state of the softkey as
"connected".
**When you configure a softkey as "Pickup", you can configure the state of the softkey as "idle,
outgoing", or just "idle", or just "outgoing".
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Model 53i and 9143i Examples
Server
Asterisk
Park Configuration
prgkeyN type: park
prgkeyN value: asterisk;70
prgkeyN line: 1
Pickup Configuration
prgkeyN type: pickup
prgkeyN value: asterisk;70
prgkeyN line: 1
Sylantro
prgkeyN type: park
prgkeyN value: sylantro;*98
prgkeyN line: 1
prgkeyN type: pickup
prgkeyN value: sylantro;*99
prgkeyN line: 1
BroadWorks
ININ PBX
prgkeyN type: park
prgkeyN value: broadworks;*68
prgkeyN line: 1
prgkeyN type: pickup
prgkeyN value: broadworks;*88
prgkeyN line: 1
prgkeyN type: park
prgkeyN value: inin;callpark
prgkeyN line: 1
prgkeyN type: pickup
prgkeyN value: inin;pickup
prgkeyN line: 1
Note: The 53i and 9143i do not allow for the configuration of labels and
states.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“Softkey Settings for 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, 57i CT” on page A-185 and “Programmable Key Settings for
9143i, 53i, and 55i” on page A-194.
5-222
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Configuring a Park/Pickup Key Using Aastra Web UI
On the 57i/57i CT and 9480i/9480i CT, you configure a Park and/or Pickup key at
Operation->Softkeys and XML. You enter a key label, and value for a specific
line on the phone. The default state of the Park configuration is "connected". The
default state of the Pickup configuration is "idle, outgoing".
The 57i CT and 9480i CT handsets use the park/pickup configuration enabled at
Operation->Handset Keys in the Aastra Web UI. If Park or Pickup are enabled
on more than one line on the base unit, the 57i CT and 9480i CT handset uses the
first programmable configuration.
For example, if line 1 and line 6 are configured for park, the 57i CT and 9480i CT
handset uses the configuration set for line 1 to park a call.
On the 53i and 9143i, you configure a Park and/or Pickup key at
Operation->Programmable Keys, and then enter the appropriate value and line.
Note: Applicable values depend on the server in your network (Asterisk,
BroadWorks, Sylantro, ININ PBX. See the table below for applicable
values.
Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values
Server
Park Values*
Pickup Values*
Aasterisk
Sylantro
BroadWorks
ININ PBX
70
*98
70
*99
*68
*88
callpark
pickup
*Leave "value" fields blank to disable the park and pickup feature.
Use the following procedure to configure the Park/Pickup call feature using the
programmable configuration method and the Aastra Web UI.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-223
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
For the 57i/57i CT and 9480i/9480i CT:
1
Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML.
2
3
4
5
Pick a softkey to configure for Parking a call.
In the "Type" field, select Park.
In the "Label" field, enter a label for the Park softkey.
In the "Value" field, enter the appropriate value based on the server in your network.
Note: For values to enter in this field, see the table “Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values”
on page 5-223.
6
7
In the "Line" field, select a line for which to apply the Park configuration.
The park softkey has a default state of “Connected”.
Leave this state enabled or to disable, uncheck the check box.
8
Pick a softkey to configure for Picking up a call.
In the "Type" field, select Pickup.
9
10
In the "Label" field, enter a label for the Pickup softkey.
5-224
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
11
In the "Value" field, enter the appropriate value based on the server in your network.
Note: For values to enter in this field, see the table “Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values”
on page 5-223.
12
13
In the "Line" field, select a line for which to apply the Pickup configuration.
The pickup softkey has a default state of “Idle” and “Outgoing”.
Leave these states enabled or to disable, uncheck the check boxes.
14
Click
to save your changes.
For the 57i CT and 9480i CT Handset:
1
Click on Operation->Handset Keys.
2
3
4
5
6
Pick a handset key to configure for parking a call.
In the "Key Function" field, select Park.
Pick another handset key to configure for picking up a call.
In the "Key Function" field, select Pickup.
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-225
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
For the 53i and 9143i:
1
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys.
53i and 9143i Screen
2
3
4
Pick a hard key (from keys 3 through 6) to configure for Parking a call.
In the "Hard Key" field, select Park.
In the "Value" field, enter the appropriate value based on the server in your network.
Note: For values to enter in this field, see the table “Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values”
on page 5-223.
5
For the 53i and 9143i:
Pick a hard key to configure for Picking up a call.
6
7
8
In the "Hard Key" field, select Pickup.
In the "Value" field, enter the appropriate value based on the server in your network.
Note: For values to enter in this field, see the table “Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values”
on page 5-223.
9
For the 53i and 9143i:
In the "Line" field, select a line for which to apply the Pickup configuration.
5-226
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
10
Click
to save your changes.
You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect.
11
12
Click on Operation->Reset.
In the "Restart Phone" field click
to restart the IP phone and apply the changes.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-227
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Park Call/Pickup Parked Call Feature
Use the following procedures on the IP phones to park a call and pick up a parked
call.
IP Phone UI
Step Action
Parking a Call
1
2
While on a live call, press the "Park" softkey.
Perform the following for your specific server:
For Asterisk Server:
- Server announces the
extension number where the call
has been parked. Once the call is
parked, press the y
key
to complete parking.
For BroadWorks Server:
- After you hear the greeting from
the CallPark server, enter the
extension where you want to
park the call.
For Sylantro Server:
- Enter the extension number
where you want to park the call,
followed by "#" key.
For ININ Server:
- Enter the extension number
where you want to park the call,
followed by "#" key.
If the call is parked successfully, the response is either a greeting voice confirming that the call was
parked, or a hang up occurs. The parked call party will get music on hold.
3
If the call fails, you can pick up the call (using the next procedure) and press the "Park" softkey again
to retry step 2.
Picking up a Parked Call
Pick up the handset on the phone.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
IP Phone UI
Step Action
5
6
Enter the extension number where the call was parked.
Press the "Pickup" softkey.
If the call pick up is successful, you are connected with the parked call.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-229
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Last Call Return (lcr) (Sylantro Servers)
Last call return (lcr) allows an administrator or user to configure a "last call
return" function on a softkey or programmable key. This feature is for
Sylantro servers only.
You can configure the “lcr” softkey feature via the configuration files or the
Aastra Web UI.
How it works
If you configure "lcr" on a softkey or programmable key, and a call comes
into your phone, after you are finished with the call and hangup, you can
press the key configured for “lcr” and the phone dials the last call you received.
When you configure an “lcr” softkey, the label “LCR” displays next to that
softkey on the IP phone. When the Sylantro server detects an “lcr” request, it
translates this request and routes the call to the last caller.
Configuring Last Call Return
Configuration Files
For specific last call return (lcr) parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the
section, “Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-184.
5-230
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
For the 57i/57i CT:
1
Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML.
2
3
4
5
Pick a softkey to configure for Last Call Return.
In the "Type" field, select lcr.
In the "Line" field, select a line for which to apply the last call return configuration.
The lcr softkey has a default state of “Idle”, “Connected”, “Incoming”, “Outgoing”.
Leave these states enabled or to disable, uncheck the check boxes as required.
6
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-231
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
For the 57i CT Handset:
1
Click on Operation->Handset Keys.
2
3
4
Pick a handset key to configure for Last Call Return.
In the "Key Function" field, select lcr.
Click
to save your changes.
5-232
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
For the 53i and 9143i
1
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys.
53i and 9143i Screen
2
3
4
Pick a hard key (from keys 3 through 6) to configure for Last Call Return.
In the "Type" field, select lcr.
For the 53i and 9143i:
In the "Line" field, select a line for which to apply the lcr configuration.
5
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-233
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Call Forwarding
Call Forward (CFWD) on the IP phone allows incoming calls to be forwarded to
another destination. The phone sends the SIP message to the SIP proxy, which
then forwards the call to the assigned destination.
An Administrator or User can configure CFWD on the phone-side by setting a
mode for the phone to use (Account, Phone, or Custom). Once the mode is set,
you can use the IP Phone UI to use the CFWD feature at Options->Call Forward
or by pressing a configured Call Forward softkey/programmable key/extension
module key.
The following describes the behavior for each CFWD mode.
•
•
Account mode - The account mode allows you to configure CFWD on a per
account basis. Pressing a configured CFWD key applies to the account in
focus.
Phone mode - The Phone mode allows you to set the same CFWD
configuration for all accounts (All, Busy, and/or No Answer). When you
configure the initial account, the phone applies the configuration to all other
accounts. (In the Aastra Web UI, only the account you configured is enabled.
All other accounts are grayed out but set to the same configuration.) Using the
Aastra Web UI, if you make changes to that initial account, the changes apply
to all accounts on the phone.
•
Custom mode - The Custom mode allows you to configure CFWD for a
specific account or all accounts. You can configure a specific mode (All,
Busy, and/or No Answer) for each account independently or all accounts. On
the 9143i, 51i and 53i phones, you can set all accounts to ALL On or ALL
Off. On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT, you can set all accounts to
All On, All Off, or copy the configuration for the account in focus to all other
accounts using a CopytoAll softkey.
Note: If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the
mode setting is ignored and the phone behaves as if the mode was set
to “Phone”.
You can enable different call forwarding rules/modes independently (for example,
you can set different phone numbers for Busy, All, and NoAns modes and then
turn them on/off individually).
5-234
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
The following table describes the key and Message Waiting Indicator (MWI)
LEDs when you enable CFWD on the IP Phone.
Key LED Behavior
for All Modes
MWI LED Behavior
for All Modes
CFWD key LED RED if CFWD All, CFWD MWI LED ON if current account in focus has
Busy, or CFWD No Answer is enabled for CFWD ALL enabled.
the account in focus.
MWI LED OFF if CFWD All is disabled.
CFWD key LED OFF if any CFWD mode
is disabled.
You can enable/disable CFWD and set a CFWD key using the configuration files
using the configuration files, Aastra Web UI or IP Phone UI.
Important Notes
•
In the configuration files, the “call forward key mode” parameter in the
section, “Configuring Call Forwarding” on page 5-236 is in addition to the
previous call forward parameter (call forward disabled). You can still use the
previous call forwarding parameter if desired in the configuration files.
•
In the IP Phone UI, you can access the Call Forwarding features at the path
Options->Call Forward or by pressing a configured CFWD key.
•
If you make changes to the configuration for CFWD via the IP Phone UI,
you must refresh the Aastra Web UI screen to see the changes.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-235
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuring Call Forwarding
You use the following parameters to set CFWD on the IP Phone using the
configuration files:
•
•
•
call forward key mode
softkeyN type, topsoftkeyN type, prgkeyN type, or expmodX keyN type
softkeyN states (optional)
Notes:
1.
If there is no CFWD key configured on the phone or it is
removed, you can still set the CFWD modes via the IP Phone UI at the
path Options->Call Forward.
2.
If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the
mode setting is ignored and the phone behaves as if the mode was set
to “Phone”.
3.
When configuring a CFWD mode (All, Busy, No Answer) for
an account, you must configure a CFWD number for that mode in
order for the mode to be enabled.
Use the following procedures to configure Call Forwarding on the IP phones.
Configuration Files
For specific last call forwarding parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the
sections,
•
•
“Priority Alert Settings” on page A-147.
“Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-184.
5-236
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
:
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML;
or
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys;
or
Click on Operation->Expansion Module.
Softkey 2 configured for CFWD
2
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-237
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
3
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.
Call Forward
Key Mode
Parameter
Note: If there is no CFWD key configured on the phone or it is removed, you can still set the CFWD
modes via the IP Phone UI at the path Options->Call Forward.
5-238
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
4
In the “Call Forward Key Mode” field, select a call forward mode to use on the phone.
Valid values are: Account, Phone, Custom. Default is Account.
•
•
account
The account mode allows you to configure CFWD on a per account basis. Pressing a configured
CFWD key applies to the account in focus.
phone
The Phone mode allows you to set the same CFWD configuration for all accounts (All, Busy,
and/or No Answer). When you configure the initial account, the phone applies the configuration
to all other accounts. (In the Aastra Web UI, only the account you configured is enabled. All other
accounts are grayed out but set to the same configuration.) Using the Aastra Web UI, if you make
changes to that initial account, the changes apply to all accounts on the phone.
custom
•
The Custom mode allows you to configure CFWD for a specific account or all accounts. You can
configure a specific state (All, Busy, and/or No Answer) for each account independently or all
accounts. On the 9143i, 51i, and 53i phones, you can set all accounts to ALL On or ALL Off. On
the 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT, you can set all accounts to All On, All Off, or copy the
configuration for the account in focus to all other accounts using a CopytoAll softkey.
Notes:
1. If there is no CFWD key configured on the phone or it is removed, you can still set the CFWD
modes via the IP Phone UI at the path Options->Call Forward.
2. If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the mode setting is ignored and the
phone behaves as if the mode was set to “Phone”.
3. When configuring a CFWD state (All, Busy, No Answer) for an account, you must configure a
CFWD number for that state in order for the state to be enabled.
5
Click
to save your changes.
The change takes effect immediately without a reboot.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-239
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
6
Click on Basic Settings->Account Configuration.
7
For each account, enable CFWD state by placing a check mark in one or more of the following
“State” fields:
•
•
•
All
Busy
No Answer
The “All” option forwards all incoming calls for this account to the specified phone number regardless
of the state of the phone. The phone can be in the Busy or No Answer states, or can be in the idle
state. The phone still forwards all calls to the specified number.
The “Busy” option call forwards incoming calls only if the account is in the busy state. The calls are
forwarded to the specified phone number.
The “No Answer” option call forwards incoming calls only if the account rings but is not answered in
the defined number of rings. The call gets forwarded to the specified number.
Note: You can use the “Busy” and “No Answer” states together using different forwarding phone
numbers. If these states are enabled for an account (the “All” state is disabled), and the phone is in
the busy state when a call comes in, the phone can forward the call to the specified phone number
(for example, voicemail). If there is no answer on the phone after the specified number of rings, the
phone can forward the call to a different specified number, such as a cell phone number.
5-240
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
8
For each account, in the “Number” field, enter the phone number for which you want the incoming
calls to forward to if the phone is in the specified state.
If using the “Account” mode or “Custom” mode, you can enter different phone numbers for each
account.
Notes:
1. If you selected “Account” mode in step 4, you can enable/disable each account or all accounts
as applicable. You can enter different phone number for each enabled state.
If you selected “Custom” mode, you can enable/disable each account or all accounts as applicable.
You can enter different phone numbers for each enabled state.
If you selected “Phone” mode, all accounts are set to the same CFWD configuration (All, Busy, and/
or No Answer) as Account 1 on the phone. (In the Aastra Web UI, only Account 1 is enabled. All
other accounts are grayed out but use the same configuration as Account 1.)
Using the Aastra Web UI, if you make changes to Account 1, the changes apply to all accounts on
the phone. Using the IP Phone UI, if you make changes to any other account other then Account 1,
the changes also apply to all accounts on the phone. When enabling a CFWD state, you must specify
a phone number for the phone to CFWD to. The number you specify applies to all accounts of the
same mode.
2. Number and name of accounts that display to this screen are dependant on the number and
name of accounts configured on the phone. In the screen in step 6, Screenname1 is configured on
Line 1, Screenname2 is configured on Line 2, and Screenname3 is configured on Line 3. The name
for the account is dependant on the name specified for the “Screen Name” parameter at the path
Advanced Settings->LineN. If you do not specify a value for the “Screen Name” parameter, the
account name is based on the “Phone Number” parameter at the path Advanced Settings->LineN.
If neither the “Screen Name” nor the “Phone Number” parameters are specified, the account name
shows “1”, “2”, “3”, etc. only.
9
For the No Answer state, in the “No. Rings” field, enter the number of times that the account rings
before forwarding the call to the specified number. Valid values are 1 through 20. Default is 1.
Note: When using the “Account” mode or “Custom” mode, you can enter a different number of rings
for each account. If you use the Aastra Web UI to change the Call Forward Key Mode to “Phone”, all
accounts synchronize to Account 1.
10
Click
to save your changes.
The change takes effect immediately without a reboot.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-241
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Using CFWD Modes via the IP Phone UI
If you enable/disable CFWD using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI,
you can use the CFWD screens that display to the IP Phone UI. You can access the
CFWD parameters by pressing a configured CFWD key (if previously
configured) OR by pressing Options->Call Forward on the phone’s front panel.
The following procedure assumes you have already configured a CFWD key
AND assumes there are three accounts configured on the phone.
Notes:
1.
If there is no CFWD key configured on the phone or it is
removed, you can still enable CFWD via the IP Phone UI at the path
Options->Call Forward.
2.
If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the
mode setting is ignored and the phone behaves as if the mode was set
to “Phone”.
3.
Using the Aastra Web UI, if you change the CFWD key mode to
“Phone”, all accounts synchronize to the current setting of Account 1.
5-242
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
.
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
CFWD in Account Mode (9143i, 51i, and 53i)
1
Use the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account.
3
2
Screenname3
CFWD Busy
Jan 1 12:96
1
Screenname2
Screenname1
CFWD All
Jan 1 12:96
Jan 1 12:96
In the above example, Screenname1, Screenname2, and Screenname3, are three accounts
configured on the phone. Screenname1 has “CFWD All” enabled, Screenname 2 has CFWD
disabled as indicated by no message displayed, and Screenname3 has “CFWD Busy” enabled.
2
Press the Call Forward key. The Call Forward Mode screen displays. Use the UP and DOWN arrow
keys to scroll through each state type.
Cfwd Mode
1. All
ꢀ
Change
Done
Cfwd Mode
4. All Off
Done
Indicates
CFWD Enabled
Set
Set
Cfwd Mode
2. Busy
Done
!
Indicates
no CFWD
phone number
configured
Change
Cfwd Mode
5. All On
Done
Cfwd Mode
3. NoAns
Done
X
Indicates
CFWD Disabled
Change
In the above example, CFWD All is enabled as indicated by a checkmark ( 3), CFWD Busy is
enabled but no call forward phone number configured as indicated by a !, and CFWD NoAns is
disabled, as indicated by an X.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-243
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
3
Select a state for the account(s) in focus using the UP and DOWN arrow keys.
You can enable/disable any or all of the following states for an account:
•
•
•
All - Enables CFWD All for an account and forwards all incoming calls for that account, to the
specified number.
Busy - Enables CFWD Busy for an account and forwards incoming calls to a specified number if
DND has been enabled for that account OR if the account is currently engaged in another call.
No Answer - Enables CFWD NoAns for an account and forwards incoming calls to a specified
number if the call has not been answered for the specified number of rings.
Note: If CFWD All AND CFWD Busy AND CFWD NoAns are all enabled (and/or if the account has
DND enabled), the CFWD All settings take precedence over CFWD Busy and CFWD NoAns.
You can also use the following keys if required:
All Off - Disables all CFWD states for the current account in focus.
All On - Enables all CFWD states for the current account in focus.
4
Press the CHANGE key for the state you selected in step 3. Scroll to the CFWD State screen. This
displays the current state of the mode you selected. In the following example, the CFWD All state is
ON.
Cfwd State
1. Cfwd All
Use to view
ꢀ
Set
On
Next
Cfwd State
Off
Next
1. Cfwd State
On
Done
CFWD State
Screen
Set
Change
5
Press the CHANGE key in the CFWD State screen. Press NEXT to toggle the state of the CFWD
mode ON or OFF. In the example in Step 4, you press NEXT to change the option to OFF.
6
Press the SET key to save the change.
5-244
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
7
In the CFWD State screen, press the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the CFWD Number screen and
press CHANGE.
1. Cfwd All
Use
to view
1. Cfwd State
On
Done
Change
CFWD Number
Screen
Change
2. Cfwd Number
Done
Cfwd Number
__
Change
Set
Cancel
8
9
Enter a phone number to apply to the current state in focus. When the phone is in the state you
specified, and a call comes into the phone, it forwards the call to the number you specify.
Press SET to save the change.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-245
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
10
For the CFWD No Answer state, In the CFWD Number screen, press the DOWN arrow key to scroll
to the CFWD No. Rings screen and press CHANGE.
1. Cfwd NoAns
Use
to view
1. Cfwd State
On
Done
Change
Change
CFWD No.
Rings Screen
2. Cfwd Number
Done
Change
No. Rings
3. No. Rings
Done
ꢀ
Set
1
Change
Next
11
Press the NEXT key to select the number of rings to apply to the phone for call forwarding incoming
calls. Valid values are 1 to 20. Default is 1.
When the phone receives an incoming call, and call forward is configured on the phone, the phone
rings the number of times you specify in the No. Rings screen, and then forwards the call if there is
no answer.
12
13
Press SET to save the change.
Press DONE to save CFWD All Number, CFWD All State, CFWD Busy Number, CFWD Busy State,
CFWD No Answer Number, CFWD No Answer State, CFWD No Answer Rings.
Each time you press DONE, the following “Apply Changes” screen displays.
Apply Changes?
0 Cancel
# Confirm
5-246
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
14
Press # to confirm the change(s) each time the “Apply Changes” screen displays.
All changes are saved to the phone.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-247
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
CFWD in Phone Mode (9143i, 51i, and 53i)
1
Use the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account.
3
2
Screenname3
CFWD All
Jan 1 12:96
1
Screenname2
CFWD All
Jan 1 12:96
Screenname1
CFWD All
Jan 1 12:96
In the above example, Screenname1, Screenname2, and Screenname3, are three accounts
configured on the phone. All three accounts have CFWD enabled as indicated by the “CFWD All”
message.
Note: In ”Phone” mode, when you change the call forward configuration for an account, the
change applies to all accounts.
5-248
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
2
Press the Call Forward key. The Call Forward Mode screen displays. Use the UP and DOWN arrow
keys to scroll through each state type.
Cfwd Mode
1. All
ꢀ
Change
Done
Indicates
CFWD ALL
enabled
Cfwd Mode
2. Busy
!
Change
Done
Indicates
no CFWD
phone number
configured for
Busy
Cfwd Mode
3. NoAns
Done
ꢀ
Change
Indicates
CFWD NoAns
enabled
Cfwd Mode
4. All Off
Done
Set
Set
Cfwd Mode
5. All On
Done
In the above example, the account has CFWD All and CFWD NoAns enabled as indicated by a
checkmark ( 3). The CFWD Busy setting is enabled but no call forward phone number is configured
as indicated by a !
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-249
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
3
Select a state using the UP and DOWN arrow keys.
You can enable/disable a specific account on the phone with any or all of the following states.
However, the configuration you set will apply to all accounts on the phone.
•
•
All - Enables CFWD All on the phone and forwards all incoming calls to the specified number.
Busy - Enables CFWD Busy on the phone and forwards incoming calls to a specified number if
DND has been enabled OR if the phone is currently engaged in another call.
•
No Answer - Enables CFWD NoAns on the phone and forwards incoming calls to a specified
number if the call has not been answered for the specified number of rings.
Note: If CFWD All AND CFWD Busy AND CFWD NoAns are all enabled (and/or if the account has
DND enabled), the CFWD All settings take precedence over CFWD Busy and CFWD NoAns.
You can also use the following keys if required:
All Off - Disables all CFWD states for the phone.
All On - Enables all CFWD states for the phone.
Note: In “Phone” mode, the initial configuration you set for an account applies to all the
accounts on the phone.
4
Press the CHANGE key for the mode you selected in step 2. Scroll to the CFWD State screen. This
displays the current state of the mode you selected. In the following example, the CFWD All state is
ON.
Cfwd State
1. Cfwd All
Use to view
ꢀ
Set
On
Next
Cfwd State
Off
Next
1. Cfwd State
On
Done
CFWD State
Screen
Set
Change
5-250
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
5
Press the CHANGE key in the CFWD State screen. Press NEXT to toggle the state of the CFWD
state ON or OFF. In the example in Step 4, you press NEXT to change the option to OFF.
6
7
Press the SET key to save the change.
In the CFWD State screen, press the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the CFWD Number screen and
press CHANGE.
1. Cfwd All
Use
to view
1. Cfwd State
On
Done
Change
CFWD Number
Screen
Change
2. Cfwd Number
Done
Cfwd Number
__
Change
Set
Cancel
8
9
Enter a phone number to apply to the current state in focus. When the phone is in the state you
specified, and a call comes into the phone, it forwards the call to the number you specify.
Press SET to save the change.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-251
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
10
For the CFWD No Answer state, in the CFWD Number screen, press the DOWN arrow key to scroll
to the CFWD No. Rings screen and press CHANGE.
1. Cfwd NoAns
Use
to view
1. Cfwd State
On
Done
Change
Change
CFWD No.
Rings Screen
2. Cfwd Number
Done
Change
No. Rings
3. No. Rings
Done
ꢀ
Set
1
Change
Next
11
Press the NEXT key to select the number of rings to apply to the phone for call forwarding incoming
calls. Valid values are 1 to 20. Default is 1.
When the phone receives an incoming call, and call forward is configured on the phone, the phone
rings the number of times you specify in the No. Rings screen, and then forwards the call.
12
13
Press SET to save the change.
Press DONE to save CFWD All Number, CFWD All State, CFWD Busy Number, CFWD Busy State,
CFWD No Answer Number, CFWD No Answer State, CFWD No Answer Rings.
Each time you press DONE, the following “Apply Changes” screen displays.
Apply Changes?
0 Cancel
# Confirm
5-252
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
14
Press # to confirm the change(s) each time the “Apply Changes” screen displays.
All the same changes are saved to all accounts on the phone.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-253
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
CFWD in Custom Mode (9143i, 51i, and 53i)
1
Use the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account.
3
2
Screenname3
CFWD NoAns
Jan 1 12:96
1
Screenname2
CFWD Busy
Jan 1 12:96
Screenname1
CFWD All
Jan 1 12:96
In the above example, Screenname1, Screenname2, and Screenname3, are three accounts
configured on the phone. All three accounts have CFWD enabled as indicated by the “CFWD All”,
“CFWD Busy”, and “CFWD NoAns” messages.
Press the Call Forward key. The CFWD Account screens display. Use the UP and DOWN arrow
keys to scroll through each account.
Call Forward
1. Screenname1
ꢀ
Change
Done
Indicates
CFWD Enabled
Call Forward
2. Screenname2
X
Change
Done
Indicates
CFWD Disabled
Call Forward
3. Screenname3
Done
!
Change
Indicates
no CFWD phone
number
configured
Call Forward
4. All Off
Done
Set
Set
Call Forward
5. All On
Done
In the above example, Screenname1 has one or more CFWD states enabled as indicated by a
checkmark ( 3). Screenname2 has one or more CFWD states disabled as indicated by an X.
Screenname3 has one or more CFWD states configured but a specific state has no call forward
phone number configured as indicated by a !. Items 4 and 5 allow you to disable or enable CFWD on
all accounts, respectively.
5-254
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
2
Select an account to configure. Press the CHANGE key. The CFWD Mode screen displays. Use the
UP and DOWN arrow keys to scroll through each state screen.
Cfwd Mode
1. All
ꢀ
Change
Done
Indicates
CFWD All
enabled
Cfwd Mode
2. Busy
!
Change
Done
Indicates
no CFWD
phone number
configured for
Busy
Cfwd Mode
3. NoAns
Done
ꢀ
Change
Indicates
CFWD NoAns
enabled
Cfwd Mode
4. All Off
Done
Set
Set
Cfwd Mode
5. All On
Done
In the above example, the account has CFWD All and CFWD NoAns enabled as indicated by a
checkmark ( 3). The CFWD Busy setting is enabled for the account but has no call forward phone
number configured as indicated by a !.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-255
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
3
Select a state for the account(s) in focus using the UP and DOWN arrow keys.
You can enable/disable any or all of the following states for a specific account or for all accounts (with
individual configurations):
•
•
All - Enables CFWD All for an account and forwards all incoming calls for that account, to the
specified number. The phone number can be different between accounts.
Busy - Enables CFWD Busy for an account and forwards incoming calls to a specified number if
DND has been enabled for that account OR if that account is currently engaged in another call.
The phone number can be different between accounts.
•
No Answer - Enables CFWD NoAns for an account and forwards incoming calls to a specified
number if the call has not been answered for a specified number of rings. The phone number can
be different between accounts.
Note: If CFWD All AND CFWD Busy AND CFWD NoAns are all enabled (and/or if the account has
DND enabled), the CFWD All settings take precedence over CFWD Busy and CFWD NoAns.
You can also use the following keys if required:
All Off - Disables all CFWD states for the current account in focus or all accounts.
All On - Enables all CFWD states for the current account in focus or all accounts.
4
Press the CHANGE key for the mode you selected in step 2. Scroll to the CFWD State screen. This
displays the current state of the mode you selected. In the following example, the CFWD All state is
ON.
Cfwd State
1. Cfwd All
Use to view
ꢀ
Set
On
Next
Cfwd State
Off
Next
1. Cfwd State
On
Done
CFWD State
Screen
Set
Change
5-256
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
5
Press the CHANGE key in the CFWD State screen. Press NEXT to toggle the state of the CFWD
state ON or OFF. In the example in Step 4, you press NEXT to change the option to OFF.
6
7
Press the SET key to save the change.
In the CFWD State screen, press the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the CFWD Number screen and
press CHANGE.
1. Cfwd All
Use
to view
1. Cfwd State
On
Done
Change
CFWD Number
Screen
Change
2. Cfwd Number
Done
Cfwd Number
__
Change
Set
Cancel
8
9
Enter a phone number to apply to the current state in focus. When the phone is in the state you
specified, and a call comes into the phone, it forwards the call to the number you specify.
Press SET to save the change.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-257
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
10
For the CFWD No Answer state, in the CFWD Number screen, press the DOWN arrow key to scroll
to the CFWD No. Rings screen and press CHANGE.
1. Cfwd NoAns
Use
to view
1. Cfwd State
On
Done
Change
Change
CFWD No.
Rings Screen
2. Cfwd Number
Done
Change
No. Rings
3. No. Rings
Done
ꢀ
Set
1
Change
Next
11
12
Press the NEXT key to select the number of rings to apply to the phone for call forwarding incoming
calls. Valid values are 1 to 20. Default is 1.
When the phone receives an incoming call, and call forward is configured on the phone, the phone
rings the number of times you specify in the No. Rings screen, and then forwards the call.
Press SET to save the change.
5-258
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
13
Press DONE to save CFWD All Number, CFWD All State, CFWD Busy Number, CFWD Busy State,
CFWD No Answer Number, CFWD No Answer State, CFWD No Answer Rings.
Each time you press DONE, the following “Apply Changes” screen displays.
Apply Changes?
0 Cancel
# Confirm
14
Press # to confirm the change(s) each time the “Apply Changes” screen displays.
All changes are saved to the phone for all accounts.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-259
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
.
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
CFWD in Account Mode (9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT)
1
Use the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account.
Services
Dir
Services
Dir
Services
Dir
Callers
L2
Callers
L3
Callers
L1
Screenname2
CFWD Busy
Screenname3
Screenname1
CFWD All
Tues Jan1 10:00am
Tues Jan1 10:00am
Tues Jan1 10:00am
- Call Fwd
- Call Fwd
- Call Fwd
In the above example, Screenname1, Screenname2, and Screenname3, are three accounts
configured on the phone. Screenname1 has “CFWD All” enabled, Screenname2 has “CFWD Busy”
enabled, and Screenname3 has CFWD disabled as indicated by no message displayed.
2
Press the Call Forward key. The Call Forward Mode screen displays for the account you selected.
Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to scroll through each state type.
Services
Dir
Callers
Indicates
CFWD Enabled
Call Forward
Mode Screen
Call Forward Mode
Indicates
no CFWD phone
number configured
1. All
ꢀ
!
2. Busy
X
3. No Answer
- Change
- All Off
- All On
CopytoAll -
Cancel -
Done -
Indicates
CFWD Disabled
In the above example, CFWD All is enabled as indicated by a checkmark ( 3), CFWD Busy is
enabled but no call forward phone number is configured as indicated by a !, and CFWD NoAns is
disabled as indicated by an X.
5-260
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
3
Select a state for the account(s) in focus using the UP and DOWN arrow keys.
You can enable/disable any or all of the following states for an account:
•
•
•
All - Enables CFWD All for an account and forwards all incoming calls for that account, to the
specified number.
Busy - Enables CFWD Busy for an account and forwards incoming calls to a specified number if
DND has been enabled for that account OR if the account is currently engaged in another call.
No Answer - Enables CFWD NoAns for an account and forwards incoming calls to a specified
number if the call has not been answered for the specified number of rings.
Note: If CFWD All AND CFWD Busy AND CFWD NoAns are all enabled (and/or if the account has
DND enabled), the CFWD All settings take precedence over CFWD Busy and CFWD NoAns.
You can also use the following keys if required:
All Off Key- Disables all CFWD states for the current account in focus.
All On Key - Enables all CFWD states for the current account in focus.
CopytoAll Key - Copies the call forward phone number and state of the Call Forward mode (All,
Busy, No Answer) in focus to every Call Forward mode of that account. For example, if you have the
cursor pointing at the “All” state and it is enabled and has a call forward phone number configured,
pressing the CopytoAll Key enables the Busy state and the NoAns state and assigns the same
phone number to both states.
Cancel Key - Cancels any configuration you may have made without saving. To cancel a
configuration, you must press this CANCEL key before pressing the DONE key.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-261
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
4
For the CFWD No Answer state, press the CHANGE key for the mode you selected in step 2. This
displays the Call Forward State screen. In the following example, the CFWD All state is ON.
Services
Services
Dir
Callers
Dir
Callers
Call Forward
Mode NoAns
Call Forward
Mode NoAns
Change
State:
On
Number: 5551212
No. Rings: 1
State:
Off
Number: 5551212
No. Rings: 1
Change the
State
- Change
- Change
Cancel -
Done -
Cancel -
Done -
- AllAccts
- AllAccts
Call Forward
State Screen
Services
Dir
Callers
Call Forward
Mode NoAns
State: Off
Number: 5551212__
No. Rings: 1
Change the
Number
- Backspace
Cancel -
Done -
- AllAccts
Services
Dir
Callers
Call Forward
Mode NoAns
State: Off
Number: 5551212
No. Rings: 3
Change the
No. Rings
- Change
Cancel -
Done -
- AllAccts
Note: You can press the AllAccts key to copy the settings in the current Call Forward Settings
screen for a specific call forward mode, to every account on the phone. Every account will have the
same settings for that call forward mode.
5-262
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
5
Press the CHANGE key in the CFWD State screen. With the cursor in the “State” field, toggle the
state ON and OFF by pressing the CHANGE key.
Note: You can press the AllAccts key to copy the settings in the current Call Forward Settings
screen for a specific call forward mode, to every account on the phone. Every account will have the
same settings for that call forward mode.
6
Use the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the “Number” field. Enter a phone number to apply to the
current state in focus. When the phone is in the state you specified, and a call comes into the phone,
it forwards the call to the number you specify.
Use the BACKSPACE key if required to delete characters.
Note: You can press the AllAccts key to copy the settings in the current Call Forward Settings
screen for a specific call forward mode, to every account on the phone. Every account will have the
same settings for that call forward mode.
7
Use the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the “No. Rings” field. Press the CHANGE key to select the
number of rings to apply to the phone for call forwarding incoming calls. Valid values are 1 to 20.
Default is 1.
When the phone receives an incoming call, and call forward is configured on the phone, the phone
rings the number of times you specify in the No. Rings screen, and then forwards the call.
Note: You can press the AllAccts key to copy the settings in the current Call Forward Settings
screen for a specific call forward mode, to every account on the phone. Every account will have the
same settings for that call forward mode.
8
Press DONE in the CFWD State Screen to save all changes.
Press DONE in the CFWD Mode Screen to save all changes.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-263
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
CFWD in Phone Mode (9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT)
1
Use the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account.
Services
Dir
Services
Dir
Services
Dir
Callers
L2
Callers
L3
Callers
L1
Screenname2
CFWD All
Screenname3
CFWD All
Screenname1
CFWD All
Tues Jan1 10:00am
Tues Jan1 10:00am
Tues Jan1 10:00am
- Call Fwd
- Call Fwd
- Call Fwd
In the above example, Screenname1, Screenname2, and Screenname3, are three accounts
configured on the phone. Screenname1, 2 and 3 have “CFWD All” enabled.
Note: In “Phone” mode, the initial configuration you set for an account applies to all the
accounts on the phone.
2
Press the Call Forward key. The Call Forward Mode screen displays. Use the UP and DOWN arrow
keys to scroll through each state type.
Services
Dir
Callers
Indicates
CFWD Enabled
Call Forward
Mode Screen
Call Forward Mode
Indicates
no CFWD phone
number configured
1. All
ꢀ
!
2. Busy
X
3. No Answer
- Change
- All Off
- All On
CopytoAll -
Cancel -
Done -
Indicates
CFWD Disabled
In the above example, CFWD All is enabled as indicated by a checkmark ( 3), CFWD Busy is
enabled but no call forward phone number is configured as indicated by a !, and CFWD No Answer
is disabled, as indicated by an X.
5-264
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
Select a state for the phone using the UP and DOWN arrow keys.
3
You can enable/disable a specific account on the phone with any or all of the following states.
However, the configuration you set will apply to all accounts on the phone.
•
•
All - Enables CFWD All on the phone and forwards all incoming calls to the specified number.
Busy - Enables CFWD Busy on the phone and forwards incoming calls to a specified number if
DND has been enabled OR if the phone is currently engaged in another call.
•
No Answer - Enables CFWD NoAns on the phone and forwards incoming calls to a specified
number if the call has not been answered for the specified number of rings.
Note: If CFWD All AND CFWD Busy AND CFWD NoAns are all enabled (and/or if the account has
DND enabled), the CFWD All settings take precedence over CFWD Busy and CFWD NoAns.
You can also use the following keys if required:
All Off Key- Disables all CFWD modes.
All On Key - Disables all CFWD modes.
CopytoAll Key - Copies the call forward phone number and state of the Call Forward mode (All,
Busy, No Answer) in focus to every Call Forward mode. For example, if you have the cursor pointing
at the “All” state and it is enabled and has a call forward phone number configured, pressing the
CopytoAll Key enables the Busy state and the NoAns state and assigns the same phone number to
both states.
Cancel Key - Cancels any configuration you may have made without saving. To cancel a
configuration, you must press this CANCEL key before pressing the DONE key.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-265
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
4
In the CFWD No Answer state, press the CHANGE key for the mode you selected in step 2. This
displays the Call Forward State screen. In the following example, the CFWD All state is ON.
Services
Services
Dir
Callers
Dir
Callers
Call Forward
Mode NoAns
Call Forward
Mode NoAns
Change
Change the
State
State:
Off
State:
On
Number: 5551212
No. Rings: 1
Number: 5551212
No. Rings: 1
- Change
- Change
Cancel -
Done -
Cancel -
Done -
Call Forward
State Screen
Services
Dir
Callers
Call Forward
Mode NoAns
State: Off
Number: 5551212__
No. Rings: 1
Change the
Number
- Backspace
Cancel -
Done -
Services
Dir
Callers
Call Forward
Mode NoAns
State: Off
Number: 5551212
No. Rings: 3
Change the
No. Rings
- Change
Cancel -
Done -
5
Press the CHANGE key in the CFWD State screen. With the cursor in the “State” field, toggle the
state ON and OFF by pressing the CHANGE key.
5-266
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
6
Use the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the “Number” field. Enter a phone number to apply to the
current state in focus. When the phone is in the state you specified, and a call comes into the phone,
it forwards the call to the number you specify.
Use the BACKSPACE key if required to delete characters.
7
Use the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the “No. Rings” field. Press the CHANGE key to select the
number of rings to apply to the phone for call forwarding incoming calls. Valid values are 1 to 20.
Default is 1.
When the phone receives an incoming call, and call forward is configured on the phone, the phone
rings the number of times you specify in the No. Rings screen, and then forwards the call.
8
Press DONE in the CFWD State Screen to save all changes.
Press DONE in the CFWD Mode Screen to save all changes.
Note: In “Phone” mode, the configuration applies to all the accounts on the phone.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-267
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
CFWD in Custom Mode (9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT)
1
Use the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account.
Services
Dir
Services
Dir
Services
Dir
Callers
L2
Callers
L3
Callers
L1
Screenname2
CFWD Busy
Screenname3
Screenname1
CFWD All
Tues Jan1 10:00am
Tues Jan1 10:00am
Tues Jan1 10:00am
- Call Fwd
- Call Fwd
- Call Fwd
In the above example, Screenname1, Screenname2, and Screenname3, are three accounts
configured on the phone. Screenname1 has “CFWD All” enabled, Screenname2 has “CFWD Busy”
enabled, and Screenname3 has CFWD disabled as indicated by no message displayed.
2
With the account in focus on the IP Phone UI, press the Call Forward key. The Call Forward Account
screen displays which lists all the accounts on the phone. Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to
scroll through each account.
Services
Dir
Callers
Indicates
CFWD Enabled
Call Forward
Account Screen
Call Forward
Indicates
no CFWD phone
number configured
1. Screenname1
2. Screenname2
3. Screenname3
ꢀ
!
X
- Change
- All Off
- All On
CopytoAll -
Cancel -
Done -
Indicates
CFWD Disabled
In the above example, Screenname1 has one or more CFWD states enabled as indicated by a
checkmark ( 3), Screenname 2 has one or more CFWD states enabled but a specific state has no
call forward phone number configured as indicated by a !, and Screenname3 has one or more
CFWD states disabled as indicated by an X.
5-268
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
3
Select an account using the UP and DOWN arrow keys.
You can also use the following keys if required:
All Off Key- Disables CFWD for all accounts on the phone.
All On Key - Enables CFWD for all accounts on the phone.
CopytoAll Key - Copies all settings for the account you select, to all other accounts on the Call
Forward Account screen. For example, if you have the cursor pointing at Screenname1, and you
press the CopytoAll key, all of the CFWD settings for Screenname1 are copied to Screenname2 and
Screenname3.
Cancel Key - Cancels any configuration you may have made without saving. To cancel a
configuration, you must press this CANCEL key before pressing the DONE key.
4
After selecting an account, press CHANGE.
The Call Forward Mode screen displays for the account you selected. Use the UP and DOWN arrow
keys to scroll through each state type.
Services
Dir
Callers
Indicates
CFWD Enabled
Call Forward
Mode Screen
Call Forward Mode
Indicates
no CFWD phone
number configured
1. All
ꢀ
!
2. Busy
X
3. No Answer
- Change
- All Off
- All On
CopytoAll -
Cancel -
Done -
Indicates
CFWD Disabled
In the above example, CFWD All is enabled as indicated by a checkmark ( 3), CFWD Busy is
enabled but no call forward phone number is configured as indicated by a !, and CFWD No Answer
is disabled, as indicated by an X.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-269
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
5
Select a state for the selected account(s) using the UP and DOWN arrow keys.
You can enable/disable any or all of the following states for a specific account or for all accounts (with
individual configurations):
•
•
All - Enables CFWD All for an account and forwards all incoming calls for that account, to the
specified number. The phone number can be different between accounts.
Busy - Enables CFWD Busy for an account and forwards incoming calls to a specified number if
DND has been enabled for that account OR if that account is currently engaged in another call.
The phone number can be different between accounts.
•
No Answer - Enables CFWD NoAns for an account and forwards incoming calls to a specified
number if the call has not been answered for a specified number of rings. The phone number can
be different between accounts.
Note: If CFWD All AND CFWD Busy AND CFWD NoAns are all enabled (and/or if the account has
DND enabled), the CFWD All settings take precedence over CFWD Busy and CFWD NoAns.
You can also use the following keys if required:
All Off Key- Disables all CFWD states for the selected account.
All On Key - Enables all CFWD states for the selected account.
CopytoAll Key - Copies the call forward phone number and state of the selected Call Forward mode
(All, Busy, No Answer) to every Call Forward mode of that account. For example, if you have the
cursor pointing at the “All” state and it is enabled and has a call forward phone number configured,
pressing the CopytoAll Key enables the Busy state and the NoAns state and assigns the same
phone number to both states.
Cancel Key - Cancels any configuration you may have made without saving. To cancel a
configuration, you must press this CANCEL key before pressing the DONE key.
5-270
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
6
Press the CHANGE key for the mode you selected in step 4. This displays the Call Forward State
screen. In the following example, the CFWD All state is ON.
Services
Services
Dir
Callers
Dir
Callers
Call Forward
Mode NoAns
Call Forward
Mode NoAns
Change
Change the
State
State:
On
Number: 5551212
No. Rings: 1
State:
Off
Number: 5551212
No. Rings: 1
- Change
- Change
Cancel -
Done -
Cancel -
Done -
- AllAccts
- AllAccts
Call Forward
State Screen
Services
Dir
Callers
Call Forward
Mode NoAns
State: Off
Change the
Number
Number: 5551212__
No. Rings: 1
- Backspace
Cancel -
Done -
- AllAccts
Services
Dir
Callers
Call Forward
Mode NoAns
State: Off
Number: 5551212
No. Rings: 3
Change the
No. Rings
- Change
Cancel -
Done -
- AllAccts
Note: You can press the AllAccts key to copy the settings in the current Call Forward Settings
screen for a specific call forward mode, to every account on the phone. Every account will have the
same settings for that call forward mode.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-271
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
7
Press the CHANGE key in the CFWD State screen. With the cursor in the “State” field, toggle the
state ON and OFF by pressing the CHANGE key.
Note: You can press the AllAccts key to copy the settings in the current Call Forward Settings
screen for a specific call forward mode, to every account on the phone. Every account will have the
same settings for that call forward mode.
8
Use the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the “Number” field. Enter a phone number to apply to the
current state in focus. When the phone is in the state you specified, and a call comes into the phone,
it forwards the call to the number you specify.
Use the BACKSPACE key if required to delete characters.
Note: You can press the AllAccts key to copy the settings in the current Call Forward Settings
screen for a specific call forward mode, to every account on the phone. Every account will have the
same settings for that call forward mode.
9
Use the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the “No. Rings” field. Press the CHANGE key to select the
number of rings to apply to the phone for call forwarding incoming calls. Valid values are 1 to 20.
Default is 1.
When the phone receives an incoming call, and call forward is configured on the phone, the phone
rings the number of times you specify in the No. Rings screen, and then forwards the call.
Note: You can press the AllAccts key to copy the settings in the current Call Forward Settings
screen for a specific call forward mode, to every account on the phone. Every account will have the
same settings for that call forward mode.
10
Press DONE in the CFWD State screen to save all changes.
Press DONE in the CFWD Mode screen to save all changes.
Press DONE in the CFWD Account screen to save all changes.
5-272
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Callers List
The IP phones have a "Callers List" feature that store the name, phone number,
and incremental calls, for each call received by the phone.
The following illustrations show the default location of the Callers List Key on
each type of phone model.
Callers List Key under
Services Menu
Callers List Key
Options
Directory
Save
9480i
Hold
Redial
Goodbye
Options
Delete
Conf
Xfer
ABC
DEF
1
2
3
ABC
JKL
DEF
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
JKL
MNO
WXYZ
4
7
5
6
9
GHI
MNO
WXYZ
PQRS
TUV
L3
L2
L1
8
PQRS
TUV
0
#
Xfer
Icom
*
Conf
Services
#
*
Mute
L1
L4
L3
L2
9143i
9480i/9480i CT
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-273
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Callers List Key
53i
55i
57i/57i CT
You can enable and disable the Callers List feature using the configuration files.
When disabled, the Callers List does not display on the IP phone UI and the Caller
List key is ignored when pressed.
When enabled, you can view, scroll, and delete line items in the Callers List from
the IP phone UI. You can also directly dial from a displayed line item in the
Callers List. You can download the Callers List to your PC for viewing using the
Aastra Web UI.
When you download the Callers List, the phone stores the callerlist.csv file to
your computer in comma-separated value (CSV) format.
5-274
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
You can use any spreadsheet application to open the file for viewing. The
following is an example of a Callers List in a spreadsheet application.
The file displays the name, phone number, and the line that the call came in on.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-275
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Enabling/Disabling Callers List
You can enable and disable user access to the Callers List on the IP phones using
the following parameter in the configuration files:
•
callers list disabled
Valid values for this parameter are 0 (enabled) and 1 (disabled). If this parameter
is set to 0, the Callers List can be accessed by all users. If this parameter is set to
1, the IP phone does not save any caller information to the Caller List. For 57i and
57i CT phones, the "Caller List" option on the IP phone is removed from the
Services menu, and the Caller List key is ignored if pressed by the user.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling the Callers List, see
Appendix A, the section, “Callers List Settings” on page A-119.
Using the Callers List
Use the following procedure to access and use the Callers List.
IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
On 9143i, 53i, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT:
Press the “Callers List” key on the phone to enter the Callers List.
On the 9480i, 9480i CT:
Press the “Services” key on the phone, and then select “Callers List” from the list of options.
Use the r and s to scroll through the line items in the Callers List.
2
To the left of a line item, a b icon displays with the handset ON or OFF the receiver. The ON
receiver indicates the call came in as a missed call. The OFF receiver indicates the call came in and
was answered.
5-276
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
IP Phone UI
Step Action
3
To delete all entries in the Callers list, press the 3 Delete key at the "Callers List" header.
To delete a line item from the Callers List, select the line item you want to delete and press the 3
Delete key.
4
5
To cancel a delete function, press the r or the s Scroll keys.
To save a line item to a programmable key for speeddialing, press the 3 Save key and enter the line
number at the "Save to?" prompt that is already configured for speeddialing at a programmable key.
6
7
To dial a displayed entry from the Callers List, pick up the handset, press the d /f handsfree key, or
press a line key.
To exit the Callers List, press the “Callers List” key again or the “Goodbye” key.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-277
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Downloading the Callers List
Use the following procedure to download the Callers List using the Aastra Web
UI.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Operation->Directory.
2
In the Callers List field, click on
.
A “File Download” message displays.
3
4
Click
.
Enter the location on your computer where you want to download the Callers List and click
.
The callerslist.csv file downloads to your computer.
5
Use a spreadsheet application to open and view the Callers List.
5-278
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Customizable Callers List and Services Keys
The IP phones currently have a Callers List key (all 5i Series phones) and a
Services key (9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT). An Administrator can
specify URI overrides for these keys using the following parameters in the
configuration files:
• services script
• callers list script
Specifying URIs for these parameters cause the creation of an XML custom
application instead of the standard function of the Callers List and Services keys.
An Administrator can configure these parameters using the configuration files
only.
Creating Customizable Callers List and Services Keys
Use the following procedure to create customized Callers List and Services keys
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Customize
Callers List and Services Key” on page A-120.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-279
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Missed Calls Indicator
The IP phone has a "missed calls" indicator that increments the number of missed
calls to the phone. This feature is accessible from the IP phone UI only.
You can enable and disable the Missed Calls Indicator feature using the
configuration files. When disabled, the Missed Calls Indicator does not increment
as calls come into the IP phone.
When enabled, the number of calls that have not been answered increment on the
phone’s idle screen as "<number> New Calls". As the number of unanswered
calls increment, the phone numbers associated with the calls are stored in the
Callers List. The user can access the Callers List and clear the call from the list.
Once the user accesses the Callers List, the "<number> New Calls" on the idle
screen is cleared.
Enabling/Disabling Missed Calls Indicator
You can enable (turn on) and disable (turn off) the Missed Calls Indicator on the
IP phones using the following parameter in the configuration files:
•
missed calls indicator disabled
Valid values for this parameter are 0 (enabled) and 1 (disabled). If this parameter
is set to 0, the indicator increments as unanswered calls come into the IP phone. If
set to 1, the indicator does not increment the unanswered calls.
Use the following procedures to enable/disable the Missed Calls Indicator on the
IP phones.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling the Missed Calls
Indicator, see Appendix A, the section, “Missed Calls Indicator Settings” on page A-126.
5-280
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Accessing and Clearing Missed Calls
Use the following procedure to access and clear missed calls from the Callers List.
Once you display the Callers List, the "<number> New Calls" indicator clears.
IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
2
Press the “Callers List” key on the phone to enter the Callers List.
Use the r and s to scroll through the line items in the Callers List to find the line items that have
the b icon with the receiver ON. These are the missed calls to the phone.
3
To clear the line item from the Callers List, select the line item you want to clear and press the 3 ,
Clear, or Delete key (depending on your phone model).
Note: To cancel a delete function, press the r or the s Scroll keys.
The line item deletes from the Callers List.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-281
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Directory List
The IP phones have a "Directory List" feature that allows you to store frequently
used names and numbers on the phone. You can also dial directly from the
directory entry.
The following illustrations show the default location of the Directory Key on each
type of phone model.
Directory Key under
Services Menu
Directory Key
Options
Directory
Save
9480i
Hold
Redial
Goodbye
Options
Delete
Conf
Xfer
ABC
DEF
1
2
3
ABC
JKL
DEF
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
JKL
MNO
WXYZ
4
7
5
6
9
GHI
MNO
WXYZ
PQRS
TUV
L3
L2
L1
8
PQRS
TUV
0
#
Xfer
Icom
*
Conf
Services
#
*
Mute
L1
L4
L3
L2
9143i
9480i/9480i CT
5-282
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Directory Key
Options Key
(Directory is
an option under
Services Menu)
53i
51i
Directory Key
57i/57i CT
55i
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-283
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Directory List Capabilities
In the Directory List a user or administrator can store a maximum of 7 numbers
associated with a unique name. You can apply pre-defined labels to the entry
which include, Office, Home, Cell, and Pager, or create your own labels. Labels
can be up to 14 characters in length.
You can also sort multiple numbers according to preference and perform a
quick-search feature that allows you to enter the first letter that corresponds to a
name in the Directory to find specific line items. The phone displays the first
name with this letter.The quick-search feature in the Directory List works only
when the Directory is first accessed.
Reference
For more detailed information about the Directory Key on your IP phone, and the
Directory List, see your model-specific User Guide.
Administrator/User Functions for Directory List
You can perform the following pertaining to the Directory List:
•
You can enable and disable access to the Directory List using the
configuration files. When disabled, the Directory List does not display on the
IP phone UI and the Directory List softkey is ignored when pressed. This is an
administrator function only.
•
•
If the Directory List is enabled, you can view, add, change, and delete entries
to/from the Directory List using the IP phone UI. You can also directly dial a
number from the Directory List. This is an administrator and user function.
A public and private softkey can be used when at a line item in the Directory
List. The Private key toggles a number in the Directory List to private. The
Public key allows a number in the Directory List to be sent to the handsets. A
57i CT accepts a maximum of 50 entries with the public attribute. This is an
administrator and user function.
•
You can download the Directory List to your PC via the Aastra Web UI. The
phone stores the directorylist.csv file to your PC in comma-separated value
(CSV) format. This is an administrator and user function.
5-284
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
•
You can use any spreadsheet application to open the file for viewing. The
following is an example of a Directory List in a spreadsheet application. This
is an administrator and user function.
The file displays the name, phone number(s), and line number(s) for each
Directory entry.
Enabling/Disabling Directory List
You can enable and disable user access to the Directory List on the IP phones
using the following parameter in the configuration files:
•
directory disabled
Valid values for this parameter are 0 (enabled) and 1 (disabled). If this parameter
is set to 0, the Directory List can be accessed by all users. If this parameter is set
to 1, the Directory List does not display on the IP phone and the Directory key is
disabled. On the 9143i, 51i, and 53i, the "Directory" option is also removed from
the "Services" menu.
Use the following procedures to enable/disable the Directory List on the IP
phones.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling the Directory List, see
Appendix A, the section, “Directory Settings” on page A-118.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-285
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Server to IP Phone Download
You can populate your IP phone Directory List with server directory files. To
activate this feature, you need to add the following parameters to the
configuration files:
•
•
directory 1: company_directory
directory 2: my_personal_directory’
The IP phone recognizes the following characters in a Directory List:
Character
’#’
Description
Pound character; any characters appearing after
the # on a line are treated as a comment
’,’
Comma character; used to separate the name,
URI number, line, and mode fields within each
directory entry.
’"’
Quotation mark; when pound and comma
characters are found between quotes in a name
field or URI number field, they are treated as
regular characters.
A valid directory entry has a name, a URI number, and optional line number, and
an optional mode attribute, all separated by commas. If a line number is not
present, the entry is assigned to line 1. If a mode attribute (public or private) is not
present, the entry is assigned to "Private".
The following directory entries are considered valid:
# our company's directory
# updated 1 jan 2012
# mode = private, by default
#
joe foo bar, 123456789, 6
# line = 1, by default
# mode = private, by default
#
snidley whiplash, 000111222
# the parser ignores the COMMA # in the name
# mode = private, by default
#
"manny, jr", 093666888, 9
# the parser ignores the POUND # chars in the URI number
# mode = private, by default
#
hello dolly, "12#34#7", 2
5-286
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Server to IP Phone Download Behavior
The software that reads directory files from the server, loads the file’s contents
into the phone's NVRAM when the phone is booting. Directory entries in the
NVRAM that originate from a server directory file are 'owned' by the server.
During the boot process both directory files are read, combined into a single list,
and any duplicate entries are deleted from the list. Any entries in this list that are
not already in the phone's NVRAM are added to the NVRAM and flagged as
being owned by the server.
Likewise, any entries in the NVRAM that are owned by the server, but are no
longer in one of the server's directory files, are removed from the NVRAM.
Entries made from the IP phone UI are never touched.
Directory List Limitations
The following table indicates the maximum characters for each line and field in
the Directory List.
Directory List Limitations
Maximum length of a line
255 characters
15 characters
45 characters
200 entries
Maximum length of a name
Maximum length of a URI
Maximum number directory entries in the NVRAM
Maximum number directory entries in the NVRAM
with the "public" attribute
50 entries
(57i CT only)
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-287
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Using the Directory List
Use the following procedures to access and use the Directory List.
Note: In the following procedure, the location of keys (hard keys,
softkeys, and programmable keys) on the phone are dependant on your
specific phone model. See Chapter 1, Overview, for the keys that are
specific to your phone model.
IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
On the 9143i, 53i, 55i, 57i, 57i CT:
Press the DIRECTORY key to enter the Directory List.
On the 9480i, 9480i CT:
Press the Services key, and then select “Directory” from the list of options.
Note: After entering the Directory List, if no key is pressed within 3 seconds, the phone prompts you
to press the first letter in the name of the required directory entry. The phone finds and displays the
first name with this letter.
2
Use the r and s to scroll through the line items in the Directory List.
To dial from an entry in the Directory List:
3
At a line item in the Directory List, pick up the handset, press the d /f key, or press a line key.
The phone automatically dials the Directory List number for you.
To add a new entry to the Directory List:
4
a
Press the SAVE key or ADD NEW softkey (depending on your model phone) at the Directory List
header screen and perform step 4.
or
Press the SAVE key or ADD NEW softkey at a line item and press the DIRECTORY key again.
Enter a phone number, name, and line number and press the SAVE key after each field entry.
b
5-288
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
IP Phone UI
Step Action
To edit an entry in the Directory List:
At a line item in the Directory List, press the 3 key.
5
a
Note: Use the SAVE key to scroll between the number, name and line entries.
b
c
d
e
Edit the phone number if required and press SAVE.
Edit the name if required and press SAVE.
Edit the line if required and press SAVE.
Press SAVE to save the changes and exit the editing function.
To delete an entry from the Directory List:
At a line item in the Directory List, press DELETE. The following prompt displays:
6
a
“DELETE again to erase this item”.
Press DELETE again to delete the entry from the Directory List.
b
Note: To cancel a delete function, press the r or the s scroll keys.
To delete all entries from the Directory List:
7
a
At the Directory List header, press DELETE or DELETE LIST (depending on your phone model).
The following prompt displays:
“DELETE again to erase all items”.
Press DELETE again to delete all entries from the Directory List.
b
Note: To cancel a delete function, press the r or the s scroll keys.
To copy an entry from the Directory List to a speeddial key (for 9143i, and 53i only):
8
At a line item in the Directory List, press the SAVE key.
The "Save to?" prompt displays.
Enter a number from 1 to 9 (associated with the keypad) where you want to save the item as a
speeddial.
Note: You must have a speeddial key previously configured on your phone to use this feature. To
configure a speeddial key, see your Model-specific User’s Guide.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-289
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
IP Phone UI
Step Action
9
To exit the Directory List, press the DIRECTORY key again, the GOODBYE key, or the QUIT key
(depending on your specific phone model).
From the 9480i CT and 57i CT handset:
10
a
Press the Public/Private softkeys to toggle between making the new entry public or private.
Note: The entry is set to Private by default. If the entry is made Public, the entry is sent to the
handsets. A 57i CT accepts a maximum of 50 entries with the public attribute.
b
c
To edit an entry, use the Change softkey.
A screen displays allowing you to edit the name, phone number, and line number, as well as the
public/private setting.
To dial a displayed entry from the Directory List, pick up the handset, press the d /f handsfree
key, or press the Dial softkey.
5-290
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Downloading from the Server to the IP Phone
You can use the configuration files to download the Directory List from the
configuration server to the IP phone..
Note: You must use TFTP to download the Directory List.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for downloading the Directory List, see
Appendix A, the section, “Directory Settings” on page A-118.
Downloading from the IP Phone to the Server
You can use the Aastra Web UI to download the Directory List from the IP phone
to the configuration server.
Note: You must use TFTP to download the Directory List.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-291
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Use the following procedure to configure the download.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Operation->Directory.
2
In the Directory List field, click on
.
A “File Download” message displays.
3
4
Click
.
Enter the location on your computer where you want to download the Directory List and click
.
The directorylist.csv file downloads to your computer.
5
Use a spreadsheet application to open and view the Directory List.
5-292
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Voicemail (9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT only)
The Voicemail feature on the 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i and 57i CT IP phones
allow you to configure lines with phone numbers so the phone can dial out to
connect to a voicemail server. You associate the Voicemail numbers with the
phone numbers configured on each line (1 - 9 lines).
For each assigned Voicemail number, there can be a minimum of 0 or a maximum
of 1 Voicemail access phone number.
The Voicemail list displays a list of phone numbers assigned to the 9480i,
9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT that have registered voicemail accounts associated
with them.
Note: The Voicemail list does not display the voicemail access number.
The phone displays up to 99 voicemails for an account even if the number of
voicemails exceeds the limit.
Registered account numbers/URIs that exceed the length of the screen, either with
or without the voicemail icon and the message count, are truncated with an ellipse
character at the end of the number/URI string.
The end of the Voicemail list displays the number of new voicemail messages (if
any exist).
Configuring Voicemail (9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT only)
You configure Voicemail in the configuration files to dial a specific number to
access an existing voicemail account. The user then follows the voicemail
instructions for listening to voicemails.
Note: The phone must have a registered voicemail account from a server
for this feature to be enabled. When no registered voicemail accounts are
registered to the phone, the display shows "List Empty".
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-293
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
To configure the Voicemail feature on the 9480i/9480i CT and 57i/57i CT, you
must enter the following parameter in the configuration files:
•
sip lineN vmail:
You can enter up to 9 Voicemail numbers associated with each of the 9 lines on the
phone.
For example:
sip line1 vmail: *97
sip line2 vmail: *95
Note: In the above example, the user would dial *97 to access the
voicemail account for line 1, and *95 to access the voicemail account for
line 2.
Use the following procedure to configure voicemail using the configuration files.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Voicemail
Settings” on page A-117.
5-294
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Using Voicemail (9480i, 9480i CT, 57i57i CT only)
Use the following procedure to access and use voicemail.
IP Phone UI
Step Action
For the 9480i, 9480i CT, 57i/57i CT:
1
2
3
4
Press Services on the phone to display the Services menu.
From the Services menu, select "Voicemail".
Use the r and s to scroll through the line items in the Voicemail List.
When you have selected a line item, press the d /f handsfree key, 4 Scroll Right key, or press a
line softkey to make an outgoing call using the voicemail access phone number associated with the
line for which the voicemail account is registered.
From a selected item in the Voicemail list, you can also lift the handset (go offhook) to make an
outgoing call using the voicemail access phone number.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-295
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
XML Customized Services
Extensible Markup Language (XML) is a markup language much like HTML.
HTML was designed to display data and to focus on how data looks. XML was
designed to describe data and to focus on what data is.
The following are characteristics of XML:
•
•
XML tags are not predefined. You must define your own tags.
XML uses a Document Type Definition (DTD) or an XML Schema to
describe the data.
•
•
XML with a DTD or XML Schema is designed to be self-descriptive
XML is a W3C Standard Recommendation
Creating Customized XML Services on the IP Phones
The XML application for the IP phones allows users to create custom services
they can use via the phone’s keyboard and display. These services include things
like weather and traffic reports, contact information, company info, stock quotes,
or custom call scripts.
The IP phone XML application supports the following proprietary objects that
allow for the customization of the IP phone’s display.
XML Object
Description
AastraIPPhoneTextMenu
(for Menu screens)
Creates a numerical list of menu items on
the IP phones.
AastraIPPhoneTextScreen
(for Text screens)
Creates a screen of text that wraps
appropriately.
AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen
(for Text screens)
Creates a formatted screen of text
(specifies text alignment, text size, text
static or scrolling)
AastraIPPhoneInputScreen
(for User Input screens)
Creates screens for which the user can
input text where applicable.
AastraIPPhoneInputScreen Time
and Date Attributes
(for User Input screens)
Allows you to specify US (HH:MM:SS am/
pm and MM/DD/YYYY) or International
(HH:MM:SS and DD/MM/YYYY) time/date
formats for an XML user input screen.
5-296
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
XML Object
Description
AastraIPPhoneDirectory
(for Directory List screen)
Creates an online Directory List that a user
can browse in real-time.
AastraIPPhoneStatus
(for Idle screen)
Creates a screen that displays status
messages when applicable.
AastraIPPhoneExecute
(for executing XML commands)
Allows the phone to execute commands
(i.e., “reset”, “NoOp”, etc.) using XML.
AastraIPPhoneConfiguration
(for pushing a configuration to the phone)
Allows the server to push a configuration to
the phone.(See page -301 for more
information).
AastraIPPhoneImageScreen
(Standard Bitmap Image)
Creates a display with a single bitmap
image according to alignment, height, and
width specifications.
AastraIPPhoneImageMenu
(Menu Image)
Creates a display with a bitmap image as a
menu. Menu selections are linked to keypad
AastraIPPhoneTextMenu (Icon Menu)
(Icon Menu Image)
Creates a display that has a small icon
before each item in the menu.
For more information about creating customized XML applications, see
Appendix G, “Creating and Managing XML Applications.”
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-297
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
You can also use the following attributes/options with the XML objects to further
customize your XML applications:
Attribute/Option
Beep
Description/Usage
Valid Values
Enables or disables a BEEP option to yes | no
indicate a status on the phone.
Default = no
Use with:
Note: This value is
XML object (See Appendix G)
Configuration files (See page -300)
Aastra Web UI (See page -300)
case sensitive.
xml status scroll delay (config files)
Allows you to set the time delay, in
1 to 25
Status Scroll Delay (seconds) (Web UI) seconds, between the scrolling of each Default = 5
status message on the phone.
Use with:
Aastra Web UI (See page -301)
Timeout
Specifies a timeout value for the LCD
screen display.
0, 30, 45, 60
Default =45
Use with:
XML object (See Appendix G)
XML Get Timeout
Specifies a timeout value, in seconds, 0 to 214748364
that the phone waits for the far side to seconds
return a response after accepting the
HTTP GET connection.
Default =0 (never
timeout)
Use with:
Configuration Files (See page -302)
5-298
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Attribute/Option
LockIn
Description/Usage
Valid Values
Specifies whether or not the
yes | no
information on the LCD screen stays
displayed when other events occur
(such as pressing buttons on the
keypad).
Default = no
Use with:
CancelAction
Specifies a URI that the phone
executes a GET on when the user
presses the default CANCEL key.
Fully qualified URI
For example:
cancelAction=
http://
Use with:
XML object (See Appendix G)
10.50.10.117/
ft.xml
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-299
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Enabling/Disabling a Beep for Status Message Displays
You can enable or disable a BEEP option using the Status Message object
(AastraIPPhoneStatus), the configuration files, or the Aastra Web UI.
Note: For enabling/disabling a status message beep using the Status
Message object, see Appendix G, “Creating and Managing XML
Applications.”
When the phone receives a status message, the BEEP notifies the user that the
message is displaying.
You can use the following to enable/disable a status message beep:
•
•
•
AastraIPPhoneStatus object (via XML object; see Appendix G)
xml beep notification (via configuration files)
XML Beep Support (via the Aastra Web UI)
Enabling the beep is an indication to the phone to sound a beep when it receives
an AastraIPPhoneStatus object. If you disable the beep, or no
AastraIPPhoneStatus object appears in the status message, then the default
behavior is no beep is heard when the object arrives to the phone.
The value set in the configuration files and Aastra Web UI override the attribute
you specify for the AastraIPPhoneStatus object.
For example, if the AastraIPPhoneStatus object has the attribute of Beep=”yes”,
and you uncheck (disable) the “XML Beep Support” in the Aastra Web UI, the
phone does not beep when it receives an AastraIPPhoneStatus object.
Setting the BEEP option in the configuration files and the Aastra Web UI applies
to the phone immediately.
Reference
For information about enabling/disabling the XML beep in the Aastra Web UI, see
“XML Beep Support” on page 5-68.
5-300
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Scroll Delay Option for Status Messages
The IP phones support a scroll delay option that allows you to set the time delay,
in seconds, between the scrolling of each status message on the phone. The default
time is 5 seconds for each message to display before scrolling to the next message.
You can configure this option via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
You can use the following to set the scroll delay for status messages:
•
•
xml status scroll delay (via the configuration files)
Status Scroll Delay (seconds) (via the Aastra Web UI)
Changes apply to the phone immediately.
Reference
For more information about configuring status scroll delay, see “Status Scroll
Delay” on page 5-70.
XML Configuration Push from the Server
The IP phones provide an XML feature that allows you to make configuration
changes to the phone that take affect immediately, without having to reboot the
phone. This feature involves creating XML scripts that push the changed
configuration parameter(s) from the server to the IP phones.
You can use the AastraIPPhoneConfiguration object in the XML scripts to
change configuration parameters or configure new parameters. However, since the
IP phone does not save new parameters created in XML scripts to the local.cfg
file, when the phone reboots, it does not save the new parameters on the phone. In
parameters via the user interfaces (Telephone User Interface, Web User Interface,
or configuration files), or reapply the new parameters using the XML scripts after
every boot.
Specific configuration parameters are dynamic on the phone when pushed from
XML scripts on the server. See Appendix G, “Creating and Managing XML
Applications” for more information about XML configuration scripts and
dynamic configuration parameters.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-301
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
For more information about creating XML configuration scripts and for XML
script examples, see Appendix G, “Creating and Managing XML Applications”.
Configuring the Phone to use XML
You can configure the phone to request the XML objects you create by
configuring specific parameters via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Users can access XML applications via softkeys configured on the IP phones.
The phone performs an HTTP GET on the URI configured in the Aastra Web UI
or configuration files.
You configure the following parameters for object requests:
•
•
xml application URI
xml application title
The xml application URI is the application you are loading into the IP phone.
The xml application title is the name of the XML application that displays on the
Services menu in the IP Phone UI (as option #4).
XML Get Timeout
The IP phone has a parameter called, “xml get timeout” that allows you to
specify a timeout value, in seconds, that the phone waits for the far side to return a
GET connection but never returns a response, it blocks the phone until it is
rebooted. If you enter a value greater than 0 for this parameter, the phone times
out and will not be blocked.
For more information about configuring this parameter, see Appendix A, the
section, “XML Settings” on page A-127.
5-302
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
XML Push Requests
In addition to initiating a request to an XML application from a softkey, an HTTP
server can push an XML object to the phone via HTTP Post. When the phone sees
a PUSH request containing an XML object, it tries to authenticate the request. It
does so by checking the IP address or host name of the requesting host against a
list of trusted hosts (or domain names) configured via the Aastra Web UI
is handled by the IP phone accordingly, and displays the information to the screen.
Note: The HTTP Post must contain HTTP packets that have an "xml"
line in the message body. For more information about adding "xml" lines
in HTTP packets, see Appendix G, “Creating and Managing XML
Applications.”.
Example Configuration of XML Application
The following example shows the parameters you enter in the configuration files
to configure an XML application:
xml application URI: http://172.16.96.63/aastra/internet.php
xml application title: Aastra Telecom
xml application post list: 10.50.10.53, dhcp10-53.ana.aastra.com
Configuring for XML on the IP Phone
After creating an XML application, an administrator can configure the IP phone to
use the application using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “XML Settings”
on page A-127.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-303
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
For the 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, 57i CT:
1
Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML.
2
3
4
5
6
Select a key from keys 1 through 20.
In the "Type" field, select XML from the list box.
In the "Label" field, enter a label that displays on the IP phone for the softkey. For example, "XML".
In the "Value" field, enter the IP address or qualified domain name of the XML application.
In the "XML Application URI" field, enter the HTTP server path or qualified domain name of the XML
application you want to load to the IP phone. For example, you could enter an XML application called
"http://172.16.96.63/aastra/internet.php" in the applicable field.
5-304
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
7
8
In the "XML Application Title" field, enter the name of the XML application that you want to display
on the IP phone Services Menu. In the illustration above, the XML Application Title is "Aastra
Telecom".
Click
to save your changes.
The XML application is applied to the IP phone immediately.
When the XML application is pushed to the phone via an HTTP POST, a host IP address or domain
name server is required.
9
Click on Advanced Settings->Configuration Server.
10
11
In the "XML Push Server List (Approved IP Addresses)" field, enter the host IP address and/or
domain name server. You can enter multiple IP address and/or domain name servers (separated by
commas). In the example in Step 8, the illustration shows a host IP address of "10.50.10.53,
10.50.10.54" in the applicable field.
Click
to save your changes.
Note: No posting is performed if a session times out.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-305
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
For the 9143i, 53i
1
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys.
53i and 9143i Screen
2
3
4
5
For the 53i and 9143i, select a key from keys 3 through 6.
In the "Hard Key" field, select XML from the list box.
In the "Value" field, enter the IP address or qualified domain name of the XML application.
Click
to save your changes.
The XML application is applied to the IP phone immediately.
When the XML application is pushed to the phone via an HTTP POST, a host IP address or domain
name server is required.
5-306
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
6
Click on Advanced Settings->Configuration Server.
7
8
In the "XML Push Server List (Approved IP Addresses)" field, enter the host IP address and/or
domain name server. You can enter multiple IP address and/or domain name servers (separated by
commas). In the example in Step 6, the illustration shows a host IP address of "10.50.10.53,
10.50.10.54" in the applicable field.
Click
to save your changes.
Note: No posting is performed if a session times out.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-307
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Using the XML Customized Service
After you create, save, and configure the IP phone with an XML application, the
customized service is ready for you to use.
Use the following procedure to use the XML feature on the IP phone.
IP Phone UI
Step Action
For the 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, 57i CT:
1
2
3
Press the Services key on the phone to display the Services menu.
Select "Custom Features".
Use the r and s to scroll through the line items in a menu-driven and directory "Custom
Features" screen.
Message services display to the screen after selecting the "Custom Features" option.
For user input services, follow the prompts as appropriate.
4
To exit from the "Custom Features" screen, press Exit.
5-308
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
IP Phone UI
Step Action
For the 9143i, 53i:
1
Press the programmable key configured on the phone for XML services.
A "Custom Features" screen displays.
2
3
Use the r and s to scroll through the customized features.
Select a service to display the information for that customized service.
Message services display to the screen after pressing the programmable key.
For user input services, follow the prompts as appropriate.
4
To exit from the "Custom Features" screen, press the XML programmable key again.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-309
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XML Action URIs
The IP phones have a feature that allows an administrator to specify a uniform
resource identifier (URI) that triggers a GET when certain events occur. The IP
phone events that support this feature are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Startup
Successful registration
Incoming call
Offhook
Onhook
Disconnected (For more information, see “Action URI Disconnected” on
page -316.)
•
page 5-319.)
Note: The Action URI feature on the IP Phones prevent the phone from
hanging if the Action URIs should fail. Also, the phones have support for
transparent, non-blocking, XML post execute item URIs. For more
information about the XML execute items, see Appendix G, “Creating
and Managing XML Applications”.
The following table identifies the configurable action URI parameters in the
configuration files and the Aastra Web UI. This table also identifies the variables
that apply to specific parameters.
Action URIs and Associated Variables
Configuration File Aastra Web UI Parameters at
Parameters
Advanced Settings->Action URI
Applicable Variables
action uri startup
Startup
-
action uri registered
Successful Registration
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$SIPAUTHNAME$$
$$PROXYURL$$
$$LINESTATE$$
$$LOCALIP$$
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Configuration File Aastra Web UI Parameters at
Parameters
Advanced Settings->Action URI
Applicable Variables
action uri incoming
Incoming Call
$$REMOTENUMBER$$
$$DISPLAYNAME$$
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$INCOMINGNAME$
$$LINESTATE$$
$$CALLDURATION$$
$$CALLDIRECTION$$
action uri outgoing
Outgoing Call
$$REMOTENUMBER$$
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$LINESTATE$$
action uri offhook
action uri onhook
Offhook
Onhook
$$LINESTATE$$
$$LOCALIP$$
$$CALLDURATION$$
$$CALLDIRECTION$$
action uri
Disconnected
$$LINESTATE$$
disconnected
“Action URI
Disconnected” on
page -316.
action uri xml sip notify XML SIP Notify
For more information, see
“XML SIP Notify Events”
on page 5-319.
Variable Descriptions
The following table provides a description of each variable.
Variable
Description
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
Username associated with:
•
•
•
registered phone
incoming caller
outgoing caller
$$SIPAUTHNAME$$
$$PROXYURL$$
Authentication name associated with:
registered phone
•
Proxy URL associated with:
registered phone
•
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-311
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Variable
Description
$$LINESTATE$$
Current line state associated with:
•
•
•
•
•
•
registered phone
incoming caller
outgoing caller
offhook
onhook
disconnected
$$LOCALIP$$
IP Address associated with:
•
•
registered phone
onhook
Note: This variable allows for
enhanced information in call
records and billing applications.
$$REMOTENUMBER$$
Remote number associated with:
•
•
incoming caller
outgoing caller
$$DISPLAYNAME$$
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
Display name associated with:
incoming caller
•
Username associated with:
•
•
•
registered phone
incoming caller
outgoing caller
$$INCOMINGNAME$$
$$CALLDURATION$$
Name associated with:
incoming caller
•
Duration of last call. This variable is associated
with:
Note: This variable allows for
enhanced information in call
records and billing applications.
•
onhook
$$CALLDIRECTION$$
Specifies whether the current/last call was
incoming or outgoing. This variable is
associated with:
Note: This variable allows for
enhanced information in call
records and billing applications.
•
onhook
5-312
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
How it works
When a startup, successful registration, incoming call, outgoing call,
offhook, or onhook call event occurs on the phone, the phone checks to see if
the event has an action URI configured. If the phones finds a URI configured, any
variables configured (in the form $$VARIABLENAME$$) are replaced with the
value of the appropriate variable. After all of the variables are bound, the phone
executes a GET on the URI. The Action URI binds all variables and is not
dependant on the state of the phone.
For example, if you enter the following string for the action uri outgoing
parameter:
action uri outgoing: http://10.50.10.140/
outgoing.pl?number=$$REMOTENUMBER$$
and you dial out the number 5551212, the phone executes a GET on:
http://10.50.10.140/outgoing.pl?number=5551212
Note: If the phone can’t find the Action URI you specify, it returns a
“NULL” response. For example,
http://10.50.10.140/outgoing.pl?number=
You can configure this feature via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring XML Action URIs
Use the following procedures to configure XML Action URIs using the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Action URI
Settings” on page A-130.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-313
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Action URI.
2
3
Enter an XML URI for a startup event in the “Startup” field. For example:
http://10.50.10.140/startup
This parameter specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when a startup event
occurs.
Enter an XML URI for a successful registration in the “Successful Registration” field. For example:
http://10.50.10.14/registered.php?auth name=$$SIPAUTHNAME$$
This parameter specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when a successful
registration event occurs.
Note: For a successful registration event, use the associated variables indicated in the table “Action
URIs and Associated Variables” on page 5-310.
The “Successful Registration” parameter executes on the first successful registration of each
unique line configured on the phone.
5-314
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
4
5
6
7
Enter an XML URI for an incoming call event in the “Incoming Call” field. For example:
http://10.50.10.140/incoming.php?number=$$REMOTENUMBER$$
This parameter specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an incoming call
event occurs.
Note: For an incoming call event, use the associated variables indicated in the table “Action URIs
and Associated Variables” on page 5-310.
Enter an XML URI for an outgoing call event in the “Outgoing Call” field. For example:
http://10.50.10.140/outgoing.php?number=$$REMOTENUMBER$$
This parameter specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an outgoing call
event occurs.
Note: For an outgoing call event, use the associated variables indicated in the table “Action URIs and
Associated Variables” on page 5-310.
Enter an XML URI for an offhook event in the “Offhook” field. For example:
http://10.50.10.140/offhook.php?state=$$LINESTATE$$
This parameter specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an offhook event
occurs.
Note: For an offhook event, use the associated variables indicated in the table “Action URIs and
Associated Variables” on page 5-310.
Enter an XML URI for an onhook event in the “Onhook” field. For example:
http://10.50.10.140/onhook.php?state=$$LINESTATE$$
occurs.
Note: For an onhook event, use the associated variables indicated in the table “Action URIs and
Associated Variables” on page 5-310.
8
9
To configure a Disconnected event, see the section, “Action URI Disconnected” on page 5-316.
To configure an XML SIP Notify event, see the section, “XML SIP Notify Events” on page 5-319.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-315
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
10
11
(Optional) You can poll a URI at specific intervals on the phones. For more information about polling
Action URIs, see “Polling Action URIs” on page 5-325.
Click
to save your changes.
Action URI Disconnected
The phones have a parameter, “action uri disconnected” that allow a disconnect
event to occur when the phone transitions from any active state (outgoing,
incoming, connected, or calling) to an idle state. This parameter can use the
variable “$$LINESTATE$$”.
Note: The $$LINESTATE$$ variable is optional and not required when
enabling the “action uri disconnected” parameter.
If the Administrator enables this feature (by specifying a disconnect URI),
when a call is disconnected, the phone checks to see if the event has a
Disconnect URI configured. If the phones finds a configured URI with a
$$LINESTATE$$ variable, it replaces the $$LINESTATE$$ variable with the
appropriate line state of the current active line. After all of the variables are
bound, the phone executes a GET on the URI. The following table lists the
applicable values for the $$LINESTATE$$ variable.
$$LINESTATE$$ Value Description
Meaning in a Disconnected URI
IDLE
Phone is idle.
N/A
N/A
DIALING
CALLING
Phone is offhook and ready to dial.
A SIP INVITE was sent but no response Error occurred during the call.
was received.
OUTGOING
INCOMING
CONNECTED
CLEARING
Remote party is ringing.
Call was cancelled.
Call was missed or cancelled.
Call was successful.
N/A
Local phone is ringing.
Parties are talking.
Call was released but not acknowledged.
5-316
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
The Action URI Disconnect feature allows an Administrator to determine the
reason for the disconnect if required.
Note: If you enable the Action URI Disconnect feature by specifying a
URI, the URI is called when any disconnect event occurs including an
intercom call or a conference setup.
Example
If you enter the following string on Phone A for the “action uri disconnected”
parameter:
action uri disconnected: http://fargo.ana.aastra.com/
disconnected.xml?state=$$LINESTATE$$
and then Phone A calls Phone B, Phone B answers and then hangs up, Phone A
executes a GET on:
http://fargo.ana.aastra.com/disconnected.xml?state=CONNECTED
which is what the remote server receives.
Note: If the phone can’t find the Action URI you specify, it returns a
“NULL” response. For example,
http://fargo.ana.aastra.com/disconnected.xml?state=
An Administrator can enable the disconnect feature using the configuration files
or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring the Action URI Disconnected Feature
Use the following procedure to configure the Action URI Disconnected feature on
the phone.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Action URI
Settings” on page A-130.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-317
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Action URI->Event.
2
In the “Disconnected” field, enter a valid URI for which the phone executes a GET on, when it
transitions from the incoming, outgoing, calling, or connected state into the idle state. Leaving this
field empty disables the Action URI Disconnected feature. For example,
http://fargo.ana.aastra.com/disconnected.xml?state=$$LINESTATE$$
The following table lists the applicable values and descriptions for the $$LINESTATE$$.
Meaning in a
$$LINESTATE$$ Value
Description
Disconnected URI
IDLE
Phone is idle.
N/A
N/A
DIALING
CALLING
Phone is offhook and ready
to dial.
A SIP INVITE was sent but
no response was received.
Error occurred during the call.
OUTGOING
INCOMING
CONNECTED
CLEARING
Remote party is ringing.
Local phone is ringing.
Parties are talking.
Call was cancelled.
Call was missed or cancelled.
Call was successful.
N/A
Call was released but not
acknowledged.
3
Click
to save your settings.
5-318
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
XML SIP Notify Events
In order for an XML push to bypass the NAT/firewall, the phone supports a
proprietary SIP NOTIFY event (aastra-xml) with or without XML content. An
Administrator can enable/disable the SIP NOTIFY event using a specific
parameter in the configuration files (sip xml notify event) or the Aastra Web UI
(XML SIP Notify).
If XML content is provided in the SIP NOTIFY, it is processed directly by the
phone as it is done for an XML PUSH.
If the content is empty in the SIP NOTIFY, the phone automatically triggers a new
pre-configured action uri (action uri xml sip notify).
Example of a SIP NOTIFY with XML Content
NOTIFY sip:[email protected]:5060 SIP/2.0
Via: SIP/2.0/UDP 10.30.100.103:5060;branch=z9hG4bK7bbc1fac;rport
From: <sip:[email protected]:5060>;tag=81be2861f3
To: Jacky200 <sip:[email protected]:5060>
Contact: <sip:[email protected]>
Call-ID: 59638f5d95c9d301
CSeq: 4 NOTIFY
Max-Forwards: 70
Event: aastra-xml
Content-Type: application/xml
Content-Length: 115
<AastraIPPhoneExecute><ExecuteItem URI="http://10.30.100.39/XMLtests/
SampleTextScreen.xml"/></AastraIPPhoneExecute>
When the phone receives the SIP NOTIFY, the XML content is processed as any
XML object. In the above example, the phone calls http://10.30.100.39/XMLtests/
SampleTextScreen.xml after reception of the SIP NOTIFY.
Note: The phone supports all the current XML objects with all
the existing limitations. For example if an
AastraIPPhoneExecute is used, the embedded URI(s) can not be
HTTPS based.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-319
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Example of a SIP NOTIFY without XML Content
NOTIFY sip:[email protected]:5060 SIP/2.0
Via: SIP/2.0/UDP 10.30.100.103:5060;branch=z9hG4bK7bbc1fac;rport
From: <sip:[email protected]:5060>;tag=81be2861f3
To: Jacky200 <sip:[email protected]:5060>
Contact: <sip:[email protected]>
Call-ID: 59638f5d95c9d301
CSeq: 4 NOTIFY
Max-Forwards: 70
Event: aastra-xml
Content-Type: application/xml
Content-Length: 0
When the phone receives the SIP NOTIFY, it will trigger the action uri xml sip
notify parameter, if it has been previously configured using the configuration files
or the Aastra Web UI. If the action uri xml sip notify parameter is not
configured, the phone does not do anything.
On the phone side, a System Administrator can enable or disable this SIP
NOTIFY feature using the configuration files or the phone Web UI.
Also to ensure that the SIP NOTIFY is coming from a trusted source, it is
recommended that you enable the Whitelist feature (Whitelist Proxy parameter)
on the IP phone. If enabled, and the phone receives a SIP NOTIFY from a server
that is NOT on the whitelist, the phone rejects the message.
5-320
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Enabling/Disabling XML SIP NOTIFY using the Configuration Files
To enable/disable the SIP NOTIFY event, you can set the following parameter in
the configuration files:
•
sip xml notify event
If the content is missing in the SIP NOTIFY message received by the phone, the
phone automatically uses the value you specify for the following parameter:
action uri xml sip notify
Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Polling Action
URI Settings” on page A-225.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-321
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Enabling/Disabling XML SIP NOTIFY Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to enable/disable the XML SIP NOTIFY feature in
the Aastra Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
Enabling/Disabling the XML SIP NOTIFY Feature
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings.
XML SIP Notify Parameter
Enabling Whitelist Proxy is recommended
5-322
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
2
The “XML SIP Notify" field is disabled by default. To enable this field, check the box.
This field enables or disables the phone to accept or reject an aastra-xml SIP NOTIFY message.
Note: To ensure the SIP NOTIFY is coming from a trusted source, it is recommended that you enable
the Whitelist feature (Whitelist Proxy parameter) on the IP phone. If enabled, and the phone
receives a SIP NOTIFY from a server that is NOT on the whitelist (i.e. untrusted server), the phone
rejects the message.
3
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-323
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuring XML SIP NOTIFY using the Aastra Web UI if an Empty
SIP NOTIFY Message Received by the Phone
Use the following procedure in the Aastra Web UI to configure the XML SIP
NOTIFY parameter when the phone receives an empty SIP NOTIFY message.
Aastra Web UI
1
If the content is missing in the SIP NOTIFY message received by the phone, the phone automatically
uses the value you specify for the Action URI XML SIP Notify parameter at the path Advanced
Settings->Action URI.
Click on Advanced Settings->Action URI.
XML SIP Notify Parameter
2
Specify a URI to be called when an empty XML SIP NOTIFY is received by the phone.
For example:
http://myserver.com/myappli.xml
Note: The sip xml notify event parameter at the path Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced
SIP Settings must be enabled.
3
Click
to save your changes.
5-324
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Polling Action URIs
Another way to reach a phone behind a NAT/firewall is to have the phone make an
XML call at periodic intervals. An Administrator can use the action uri poll
parameter that commands the phone to perform an XML call at configurable
intervals.
An Administrator can specify the URI to be called and specify the interval
between polls using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Configuration of
this feature is dynamic (no reboot required).
Configuring Polling Action URI via the Configuration Files
Use the following parameters to configure the polling Action URI on the IP
Phones.
•
action uri poll
action uri poll interval
Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Polling Action
URI Settings” on page A-225.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-325
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuring Polling Action URI via the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to configure polling Action URI using the Aastra
Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Action URI.
2
3
4
In the “Poll” field, enter a URI to be called every "action uri pool interval" seconds. Enter the value in
a URI format. For example, http://myserver.com/myappli.xml.
In the “Interval” field, enter the interval, in seconds, between calls from the phone to the "action uri
poll". The value of “0” is disabled.
Click
to save your changes.
5-326
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
XML Softkey URI
In addition to specifying variables for the Action URIs, you can also specify
variables in the XML softkey URIs that are bound when the key is pressed. These
variables are the same as those used in the Action URIs.
When an administrator enters an XML softkey URI either via the Aastra Web UI
or the configuration files, they can specify the following variables:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$SIPAUTHNAME$$
$$PROXYURL$$
$$LINESTATE$$
$$LOCALIP$$
$$REMOTENUMBER$$
$$DISPLAYNAME$$
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$CALLDURATION$$
$$CALLDIRECTION$$
Note: For a description of each variable in the above list, see
“Variable Descriptions” on page 5-311.
When the softkey is pressed, if the phone finds a URI configured with variables
(in the form $$VARIABLENAME$$), they are replaced with the value of the
appropriate variable. After all of the variables are bound, the softkey executes a
GET on the URI.
Example
For example, if the administrator specifies an XML softkey with the value:
http://10.50.10.140/script.pl?name=$$SIPUSERNAME$$
This softkey executes a GET on:
http://10.50.10.140/script.pl?name=42512
assuming that the sip username of the specific line is 42512.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-327
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
You can configure the XML softkey URI variables via the configuration files or
the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring XML Softkey URIs
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-184.
5-328
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
For the 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, 57i CT:
1
Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML.
2
3
4
Select a key from keys 1 through 20.
In the "Type" field, select XML from the list box.
In the "Label" field, enter a label that displays on the IP phone for the XML softkey. For example,
"aastra".
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-329
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
5
In the "Value" field, enter the URI that the phone performs a GET on when the key is pressed. For
example:
http://10.50.10.140/script.pl?name=$$SIPUSERNAME$$
Note: You can use the following variables in the URI:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$SIPAUTHNAME$$
$$PROXYURL$$
$$LINESTATE$$
$$LOCALIP$$
$$REMOTENUMBER$$
$$DISPLAYNAME$$
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$INCOMINGNAME$$
$$CALLDURATION$$
$$CALLDIRECTION$$
6
Click
to save your changes.
5-330
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
For the 9143i, 53i:
1
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys.
53i and 9143i Screen
2
3
4
On the 9143i and 53i, select a key from keys 1 through 6.
In the "Type" field, select XML from the list box.
On the 9143i and 53i, in the "Label" field, enter a label that displays on the IP phone for the XML
softkey. For example, "aastra".
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-331
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
5
In the "Value" field, enter the URI that the phone performs a GET on when the key is pressed. For
example:
http://10.50.10.140/script.pl?name=$$SIPUSERNAME$$
Note: You can use the following variables in the URI:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$SIPAUTHNAME$$
$$PROXYURL$$
$$LINESTATE$$
$$LOCALIP$$
$$REMOTENUMBER$$
$$DISPLAYNAME$$
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$INCOMINGNAME$$
$$CALLDURATION$$
$$CALLDIRECTION$$
6
Click
to save your changes.
5-332
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Web Applications Keys
The IP Phones have a feature that allow a User or Administrator to assign a
pre-programmed XML-based application to a softkey, programmable key, or
expansion module key. This pre-programmed key is called, "WebApps", and is
hardcoded on the phone. Pressing this key launches an XML-based application
called, “xml.myaastra.com”. You can assign the WebApps key to any softkey,
programmable key, or expansion module key on the phone.
On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT phones, the WebApps softkey
displays on softkey 1 on the idle screen by default. You can also access Web Apps
from the Services menu on these phones.
On the 9143i and 53i, you can access WebApps from the Services menu, or from a
configured programmable key. By default, WebApps displays in the Services
menu.
On the 51i phone, you can access WebApps from the Services menu only.
Note: The WebApps key is not applicable to the CT handsets.
Reference
For information on configuring a WebApps softkey or programmable key,
see Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module Keys
on page 5-137.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-333
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
XML Key Redirection
The IP phones allow the redirecting of phone-based hard keys to XML scripts.
This allows the server to provide the phone with Redial, Transfer (Xfer),
Conference (Conf), and Intercom (Icom) key features, and the Voicemail option
feature, rather then accessing them from the phone-side. This feature allows you
to access the redirected keys and voicemail option from the server using the IP
Phone’s Services Menu. By default, the server-side keys function the same as the
phone-side key features.
The following table identifies the phone states that apply to each key
redirection.
Hard Keys/Options
Redirects in
Conference (Conf)
Transfer (Xfer)
Redial
the connected state
the connected and dialing states
all states
Intercom (Icom)
Voicemail
all states
all states
Notes:
1. If XML key redirection is enabled on the 51i., the Xfer and Conf
menu items perform redirection.
2. Key remapping takes precedence over redirecting.
3. Disabling the redial, conference, or transfer features on the phone
also disables the redirection of these keys.
The following URI configuration parameters control the redirection of the keys
and the voicemail option:
•
•
•
•
•
redial script
xfer script
conf script
icom script
voicemail script
An Administrator can configure the XML key, redirection URI parameters using
the configuration files only.
5-334
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Configuring XML Redirection of the Redial, Xfer, Conf, and Icom
Keys, and the Voicemail Option
Use the following procedure to configure XML redirection of the Redial, Xfer,
Conf, and Icom keys, and the Voicemail option.
Configuration Files
For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “XML Key
Redirection Settings (for Redial, Xfer, Conf, Icom, Voicemail)” on page A-226.
Options Key Redirection
(for Options Menu on all phones and Services Menu on 51i)
The IP phones allow the redirecting of the Options Key (Options Menu on all
phones and Services Menu on the 51i) to an XML script. This allows the server to
provide the phone with available options, rather then accessing them from the
phone-side. You access the Options Key XML script by pressing the Options Key.
You can still access the Options Menu from the phone-side by pressing and
holding the Options key to display the phone-side Options Menu.
The following URI configuration parameter controls the redirection of the
Options Key:
•
options script
IMPORTANT NOTES
•
•
If no Options URI script is configured, the local Options Menu on the phone
displays as normal.
If you configure password access to the Options Menu, this password is
required when accessing the local Option Menu, but is not required for the
Options Key redirection feature.
•
•
Pressing the Options Menu for redirection from the server does not interfere
with normal operations of the phone (for example, pressing the options menu
when on a call does not affect the call).
If the phone is locked, you must unlock the phone before accessing the
Options Menu redirect feature. After pressing the Options Key, the phone
displays a screen that allows you to unlock the phone before continuing.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-335
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
•
On the 51i, the redirection feature works after selecting “Options” from the
Services Menu. To display the original Options Menu, press and hold the
Services key.
An Administrator can configure the XML Options Key (or Services Key on the
51i), redirection URI parameter using the configuration files only.
Configuring XML Redirection of the Options Key (Services Key on
the 51i)
Use the following procedure to configure XML redirection of the Options key
(Services key on 51i).
Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Options Key
Redirection Setting (Services key on 51i)” on page A-228.
5-336
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
XML Applications and Off-Hook Interaction
A feature on the IP phone allows you to specify whether the phone is prevented
from going into the off-hook/dialing state when the handset is off-hook and the
call ends.
By default, the phone behaves as follows:
You are in a call using the handset and the phone displays an XML application.
The far-end terminates the call, and a new XML application gets pushed/pulled
onto the display. Since the handset is off-hook and in idle mode, the "offhook idle
timer" starts. When this timer expires, the phone applies dial tone and moves to
the off-hook/dialing state, which then destroys the XML application that was
being displayed.
With the “off-hook interaction” feature you can set an “auto offhook” parameter
that determines whether or not the phone is prevented from entering the off-hook/
dialing state, if the handset is off-hook and the call ends.
An Administrator can enable (allow phone to enter the off-hook dialing state) or
disable (prevent the phone from entering the off-hook dialing state) using the
“auto offhook” parameter in the configuration files only.
Configuring the Off-Hook Interaction Feature
Use the following procedure to configure the XML application and off-hook
interaction feature.
Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Off-Hook and
XML Application Interaction Setting” on page A-228.
XML URI for Key Press Simulation
The Phones provide a feature that allow an XML Developer or Administrator to
define XML Key URIs that can send key press events to the phone, just as if the
physical hard key, softkey, or programmable key were pressed on the phone.
For more information about this feature, see Appendix G, the section, “XML URI
for Key Press Simulation” on page G-60.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-337
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
XML Override for a Locked Phone
The IP phones have a feature that allows a locked phone to be overridden when an
XML application is sent to the phone. This feature also allows you to still use any
softkeys/programmable key/Extension Module Keys applicable to the XML
application even though the phone is locked. However, any keys NOT associated
with the XML application cannot be used when the phone is locked.
Also, XML Get Requests override the locked feature on the phone so that any
softkey pressed by the user that initiates a Get Request continues to get sent.
To allow the overriding of the locked phone for XML applications, the System
Administrator must enter the following parameter in the configuration files:
•
xml lock override
Configuring XML Override for a Locked Phone using the
Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “XML Override
for a Locked Phone Setting” on page A-229.
Note: A System Administrator can also lock and unlock a remote phone
using the “lock” and “unlock” commands with the
AastraIPPhoneExecute object in an XML application. For more
information about this feature, see Appendix G, the section, “Using the
Lock and Unlock Commands” on page G-46.
5-338
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Audio Transmit and Receive Gain Adjustments
The audio gain properties for the IP phone handset, headset, and speakerphone is
adjusted to reduce side-tone and echo on the local and far-end equipment. You can
adjust these settings from -10 db to +10 db to best suit your comfort level and
deployment environment by using the following parameters in the configuration
files:
•
•
•
•
•
•
headset tx gain
headset sidetone gain
handset tx gain
handset sidetone gain
handsfree tx gain
audio mode
The default setting for these parameters is 0 (zero).
Note: Aastra Telecom recommends you leave the default of 0 (zero) as
the settings for these parameters.
The following table describes each parameter.
Parameter
Description
Headset tx gain
The increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of signal transmitted from
the headset microphone to t he far-end party.
Headset sidetone gain
Handset tx gain
The increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of sidetone signal from the
headset microphone to the headset speaker.
The increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of signal transmitted from
the handset microphone to the far-end party.
Handset sidetone gain
The increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of sidetone signal from the
handset microphone to the handset speaker.
(continued)
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-339
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Parameter
Description
Handsfree tx gain
The increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of signal transmitted from
the base microphone to the far-end party.
Audio mode
Allows you to configure how the d/f key (handsfree key) works. Audio
mode has 4 options:
0 (Speaker) - Calls can be made or received using the handset or
handsfree speakerphone and can be switched between the two modes by
pressing the d /fkey. When on speaker, you can return to using the
handset by placing the handset on the cradle and picking it up again.
1 (Headset) - Calls can be made or received using the headset. Calls can
be switched between the headset and handset by pressing the d /fkey.
2 (Speaker/Headset) - Incoming calls are sent to the speakerphone. By
pressing the d /fkey, you can switch between the handsfree
speakerphone, the headset, and the handset.
3 (Headset/Speaker) - Incoming calls are sent to the headset. By pressing
the d /fkey, you can switch between the headset, the handsfree
speakerphone, and the handset.
Configuring Audio Transmit and Receive Gain Adjustments
You can configure the audio transmit and gain adjustments using the configuration
files only.
Use the following procedure to configure this feature.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Audio Transmit
and Receive Gain Adjustment Settings” on page A-172.
5-340
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Centralized Conferencing (for Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers)
The IP phones include support for centralized conferencing (Ad-Hoc
conferencing) for Sylantro and Broadsoft servers. This feature provides
centralized conferencing on the SIP server (versus localized, on the phone) and
allows IP phone users to do these tasks:
•
•
•
Conference two active calls together into a conference call.
When on an active conference call, invite another party into the call.
Create simultaneous conference calls on the same IP phone (Sylantro servers
only). For example, the IP phone user at extension 2005 could create these
two conferences, and put one conference on hold while conversing with the
other party:
— Line 1: conference together extensions 2005, 2010, and 2020.
— Line 2: conference together extensions 2005, 2011 and 2021.
When an IP phone user is connected to multiple conference calls, some
outbound proxies have maximum call “hold” time set from 30-90 seconds.
After this time, the call that is on hold is disconnected.
•
Disconnect from an active conference call while allowing the other callers to
remain connected.
•
•
•
Ability to create N-way conference.
Join two active calls together into a conference call.
Incoming or outgoing active call can join any of the existing conferences.
If the administrator does not configure centralized conferencing, then the IP
phone uses localized conferencing by default.
Note: When you configure centralized conferencing globally for an IP
Phone, the global settings apply to all lines. Although, for the global
setting to work on soft lines, the user must configure the lines with the
applicable phone number.
An Administrator can configure centralized conferencing on a global or per-line
basis using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-341
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
To use the centralized conferencing after it is enabled, see your Model-specific IP
Phone User Guide.
Configuring Centralized Conferencing Using the Configuration Files
You use the following parameters to configure centralized conferencing in the
configuration files:
Global Parameter
• sip centralized conf
Per-Line Parameter
sip lineN centralized conf
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Centralized
Conferencing Settings” on page A-84.
5-342
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Configuring Centralized Conferencing Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to configure centralized conferencing using the
Aastra Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
Global Configuration
1 Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP Settings->Basic SIP Network Settings.
2
In the “Conference Server URI” field, do one of the following actions:
•
•
To disable centralized conferencing on the IP phone, leave this field empty (blank).
To enable SIP centralized conferencing on the IP phone, do one of the following actions:
—
If you have specified a proxy server/registrar server, then to reach the media server via the
proxy server, set this field to one of the following:
conf (Sylantro server), or
Conference (Broadsoft server)
By setting this field to conf or Conference, you specify conf@<proxy_server _address>:
<proxy_port>. For example, if the proxy server address is 206.229.26.60 and the port used
is 10060, then by setting this parameter to conf, you are specifying the following:
[email protected]:10060.
—
To reach the media server using a different address/port than that specified by the proxy,
set this field to the following:
conf@<media_server _address>: <media_port>
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-343
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
3
Click
to save your changes.
Per-Line Configuration
1 Click on Advanced Settings->Line <#>->Basic SIP Network Settings
2
In the “Conference Server URI” field, do one of the following actions:
•
•
To disable centralized conferencing on this line, leave this field empty (blank).
To enable SIP centralized conferencing on this line, do one of the following actions:
—
If you have specified a proxy server/registrar server, then to reach the media server via the
proxy server, set this field to one of the following:
conf (Sylantro server), or
Conference (Broadsoft server)
By setting this field to conf or Conference, you specify conf@<proxy_server _address>:
<proxy_port>.
—
To reach the media server using a different address/port than that specified by the proxy,
set this field to the following:
conf@<media_server _address>: <media_port>
3
Click
to save your changes.
5-344
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Authentication Support for HTTP/HTTPS Download Methods, used
with Broadsoft Client Management System (CMS)
The IP phones support HTTP/HTTPS digest authentication as defined in
RFC 2617. (The HTTP client supports digest authentication; the HTTP server
does not; the HTTP server supports basic authentication). This feature allows the
phones to interoperate with Broadsoft’s CMS phone configuration tool.
Using the configuration files, you can enable/disable the following parameter to
display a LOG IN softkey which allows the HTTP/HTTPS server to perform
digest authentication:
•
http digest force login - specifies whether or not to display the LOG IN
softkey on the IP Phone UI screen. Valid values are 0 (disabled) or 1
(enabled). Default is 0 (disabled).
If the “http digest force login” parameter is set to 1 (enabled), after the phone
boots, the LOG IN softkey displays on the phone’s LCD. If the user presses this
softkey, a username/password screen displays, allowing the user to enter the
configured username and password that is sent to the HTTP/HTTPS server for
digest authentication by the server. By default, username is “aastra” and
password is “aastra”. You can enter the username and password in two ways:
•
Using the configuration files, you can change the default values for the
following parameters:
— http digest username - specifies the username to use for HTTP/HTTPS
digest authentication.
— http digest password - specifies the password to use for HTTP/HTTPS
digest authentication.
•
By enabling the “http digest force login” parameter (setting to 1) - the phone
displays the LOG IN key so the user can enter the default username/password
via the IP Phone UI.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-345
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuring Broadsoft CMS Support via the Configuration Files
Configure Broadsoft CMS support on the IP Phone using the following
parameters in the configuration files:
•
•
•
http digest force login
http digest username
http digest password
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “HTTP/HTTPS
Authentication Support for Broadsoft CMS” on page A-86.
Using the IP Phone when Broadsoft CMS is Enabled
If you enable the HTTP/HTTPS digest authentication feature, the phone behaves
as follows with the BroadSoft CMS tool:
1. Factory default the phone.
2. Configure the HTTP or HTTPS server (specify the HTTP or HTTPS server,
path, and port).
3. Restart the phone.
The first time the phone reboots, the phone is challenged by the server. The
phone sends the default username of “aastra” and the default password of
“aastra” to the server.
The server sends the default profile to the phone. This profile includes the
information “http digest force login: 1”.When the phone receives the profile,
it displays the “Log In” key on the IP Phone UI’s idle screen.
5-346
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
4. Press the “Log In" key to displays the username/password screen.
Note: On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT, you use the Log In
softkey to log in. On the 9143i, 51i, and 53i, you press the right arrow
key to log in.
9143i, 51i, and 53i Login Screens
Please Enter:
Username:
Next
471348471
Tues Jan1 10:00am
Submit
Log In
9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT Login Screens
L1
471348471
Please Enter:
Tues Jan1 10:00am
Username:
Password:
Cancel -
Submit -
- Backspace
- abc...
Log In -
5. Enter a username in the “Username” field (up to 40 characters) and a
password in the “Password” field (up to 20 characters).
Note: The “Username” and “Password” fields accept special
characters, such as, @, #, %, =, _, etc. You can also specify domain names
in the Username field (i.e., user@domain).
6. After entering the username and password, press Submit.
The phone attempts to authenticate with the server. If successful, the phone
reboots and loads the user configuration. If unsuccessful, the phone displays
“Authentication Failed”.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-347
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Customizing the Display Columns on the 560M Expansion Module
The 560M Expansion Module screen displays softkeys in column format. The
function keys on the bottom left of the Module allow you to display 3 full screens
of softkeys. Each screen consists of 2 columns with the following default
headings on each page:
Page 1
Page 2
Page 3
"List 1" and "List 2"
"List 3" and "List 4"
"List 5" and "List 6"
List 1
Lock/Unlock
List 2
Softkeys
BLF 200
Home (speeddial)
(Press for page 1)
(Press for page 2)
(Press for page 3)
Function Keys
Page 1 Screen
5-348
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
List 5
List 6
List 3
List 4
Page 2 Screen
Page 3 Screen
To use the 560M, press the function key for the page you want to display to the
LCD (page 1, page2, or page 3), and press the applicable softkey.
You can customize the headings on each 560M Expansion Module screen using
the configuration files. You use the following parameters to customize the column
headings:
Expansion Module 1 (3 pages)
•
•
•
•
•
•
expmod1page1left
expmod1page1right
expmod1page2left
expmod1page2right
expmod1page3left
expmod1page3right
Expansion Module 2 (3 pages)
•
•
•
•
•
•
expmod2page1left
expmod2page1right
expmod2page2left
expmod2page2right
expmod2page3left
expmod2page3right
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-349
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Expansion Module 3 (3 pages)
•
•
•
•
•
•
expmod3page1left
expmod3page1right
expmod3page2left
expmod3page2right
expmod3page3left
expmod3page3right
Example
The following is an example of configuring Expansion Module 1 column
headings.
expmod1page1left: Personnel Ext
expmod1page1right: Operations Ext
expmod1page2left: Marketing Ext
expmod1page2right: Logistics Ext
expmod1page3left: Engineering Ext
expmod1page3right: Shipping Ext
5-350
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
These settings display to the Expansion Module as shown in the following
illustrations.
Marketing Ext Logistics Ext
Personnel Ext Operations Ext
Page 1 Screen
Page 2 Screen
Shipping Ext
Engineering Ext
Page 3 Screen
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“Customizing 560M Expansion Module Column Display” on page A-219.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
5-351
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
5-352
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
Configuring Advanced
Operational Features
About this chapter
Introduction
The IP phones have advanced operational features you can configure using the
configuration files and/or the Aastra Web UI.
This chapter describes each of these features and provides procedures for
configuring each feature.
Topics
Topic
Page
Advanced Operational Features
page 6-3
page 6-5
page 6-7
page 6-8
page 6-9
page 6-10
page 6-11
page 6-13
page 6-17
MAC Address/Line Number in REGISTER Messages
SIP Message Sequence for Blind Transfer
Update Caller ID During a Call
Boot Sequence Recovery Mode
Auto-discovery Using mDNS
Single Call Restriction (57i CT and 9480i CT only)
Missed Call Summary Subscription
As-Feature-Event Subscription
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
6-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
About this chapter
Topic
Page
Blacklist Duration
page 6-22
page 6-24
page 6-26
page 6-31
page 6-43
page 6-44
page 6-45
Whitelist Proxy
802.1x Support
Symmetric UDP Signaling
Removing UserAgent and Server SIP Headers
Multi-Stage Digit Collection (Billing Codes) Support (for Sylantro
Servers)
Configurable DNS Queries
page 6-48
page 6-50
Ignore Out of Sequence Errors
6-2
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Description
This section provides the following information about advanced features of the IP
phones:
Feature
Description
MAC Address/Line Number in REGISTER
Messages
Allows you to enable or disable the sending of the MAC
address and line number from the IP phone to the call
server, in a REGISTER message.
SIP Message Sequence for Blind Transfer
Update Caller ID During a Call
Boot Sequence Recovery Mode
Allows you to enable or disable the phone to use the Blind
Transfer method available in software prior to release 1.4.
Allows you to enable or disable the updating of the Caller ID
information during a call.
Allows you to enable or disable Web recovery mode and set
the maximum boot count on the IP phone.
The IP phones automatically perform an auto-discovery of all
servers on a network using mDNS. When the IP phone
discovers a TFTP server, it is automatically configured by
that TFTP server.
Single Call Restriction (57i CT and 9480i CT Allows you to enable or disable a single call restriction
only)
between the 57i CT base unit and a call server.
Allows missed calls that have been redirected by the server,
to be incremented in the missed calls indicator on the phone
it was initially directed to.
As-Feature-Event Subscription
Blacklist Duration
Allows you to enable or disable a specific line on the phone
with the BroadSoft’s server-side DND, CFWD, or ACD
features.
Allows you to specifies the length of time, in seconds, that a
failed server remains on the server blacklist. The IP phone
avoids sending a SIP message to a failed server (if another
server is available) for this amount of time.
Whitelist Proxy
Allows you to configure the phone to either accept or reject
call requests from a trusted proxy server.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Feature
Description
Transport Layer Security (TLS)
Allows you to enable or disable the use of Persistent
Transport Layer Security (TLS).
Persistent TLS sets up the connection to the server once
and re-uses that connection for all calls from the phone. The
setup connection for Persistent TLS is established during the
registration of the phone. If the phones are set to use
Persistent TLS, and a call is made from the phone, this call
and all subsequent calls use the same authenticated
connection. This significantly reduces the delay time when
placing a call.
802.1x Support
Allows you to enable or disable the 802.1x Protocol support
on the IP Phones.
Symmetric UDP Signaling
Allows you to enable or disable the phone to use port 5060
to send SIP UDP messages.
Removing UserAgent and Server SIP
Headers
Allows you to enable or disable the addition of the
User-Agent and Server SIP headers in the SIP stack.
Multi-Stage Digit Collection (Billing Codes)
Support (for Sylantro Servers)
IP Phones support Sylantro Server features, like mandatory
and optional billing codes that require the application server
to notify the phone to collect more digits before completing
the call. The IP phone is able to collect digits in two stages to
support the billing code feature.
Configurable DNS Queries
Allows you to specify the Domain Name Service (DNS)
query method to use when the phone performs a DNS
lookup.
Ignore Out of Sequence Errors
Allows you to configure the phone to ignore CSeq number
errors on all SIP dialogs on the phone.
6-4
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
MAC Address/Line Number in REGISTER Messages
The IP phones can send the MAC address and line number in the REGISTER
packets making it easier for the call server when a user configures the phones via
the Aastra Web UI or the IP Phone UI. The following two configurable headers
send this information to the call server:
Aastra-Mac: <mac address>
Aastra-Line: <line number>
The MAC address is sent in uppercase hex numbers, for example,
00085D03C792. The line number is a number between 1 and 9.
The following parameters allow you to enable/disable the sending of MAC
address and line number to the call server:
•
•
sip send mac
sip send line
These parameters are disabled by default. The parameters are configurable via the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling MAC address and line
number, see Appendix A, the section, “Advanced Operational Parameters” on page A-221.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
.
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Setting.
2
3
4
Enable the "Send MAC Address in REGISTER Message" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the box).
Enable the "Send Line Number in REGISTER Message" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the box).
Click
to save your settings.
Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings.
Select Operation->Reset and click
5
.
6-6
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
SIP Message Sequence for Blind Transfer
The SIP message sequence for Blind Transfer avoids the transfer target having
two simultaneous calls. Prior to release 1.4, a CANCEL message was sent to the
transfer target (if it was in a ringing state) after sending a REFER to the transferee
to complete the transfer. In the 1.4 and later releases, the CANCEL is now sent
before the REFER message.
The following parameter allows the system administrator to force the phone to use
the Blind Transfer method available in software versions prior to 1.4:
sip cancel after blind transfer
This parameter is configurable via the configuration files only.
Configuring SIP Message Sequence for Blind Transfer
Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling the blind transfer
method, see Appendix A, the section, “Blind Transfer Setting” on page A-221.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Update Caller ID During a Call
It is possible for a proxy or call server to update the Caller ID information that
displays on the phone during a call, by modifying the SIP Contact header in the
re-INVITE message. The phone displays the updated name and number
information contained within the Contact header.
The following parameter allows the system administrator to enable or disable this
feature:
sip update callerid:
This parameter is configurable via the configuration files only.
Configuring Update Caller ID During a Call
Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling the update of caller ID
during a call, see Appendix A, the section, “Update Caller ID Setting.” on page A-221.
6-8
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Boot Sequence Recovery Mode
You can force the IP phone into recovery mode by pressing the 1 and # keys
during boot up when the logo displays. This feature is enabled by default on the IP
phone.
You can disable this feature using the following parameter in the configuration
files:
•
force web recovery mode disabled
Valid values for this parameter are 0 (false) and 1 (true). Default is 0 (false).
A boot counter increments after each faulty boot. When the counter reaches a
predetermined value, it forces Web recovery mode. The counter is reset to zero
upon a successful boot.
The predetermined value is set using the following parameter in the configuration
files:
•
max boot count
A zero (0) value disables this feature. The default value is 10.
You can configure the boot sequence recovery mode parameters using the
configuration files only.
Configuring Boot Sequence Recovery Mode
Configuration Files
For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for boot sequence recovery mode, see
Appendix A, the section, “Boot Sequence Recovery Mode Settings.” on page A-222.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Auto-discovery Using mDNS
The IP phones can perform an auto-discovery of all servers on a network using
mDNS. When the IP phone discovers a TFTP server, it is automatically
configured by that TFTP server.
An unconfigured phone (phone right out of the box) added to a network, attempts
to auto-discover a configuration server on the network without any end-user
intervention. When it receives DHCP option 66 (TFTP server), it automatically
gets configured by the TFTP server.
An already configured phone (either previously configured by auto-discovery or
manually configured) added to a network, uses its predefined configuration to
boot up.
Notes:
1. Configuration parameters received via DHCP do not constitute
configuration information, with the exception of a TFTP server.
Therefore, you can plug a phone into a DHCP environment, still use the
auto-discovery process, and still allow the use of the TFTP server
parameter to set the configuration server.
2. DHCP option 66 (TFTP server details) overrides the mDNS phase of
the auto-discovery. Therefore, the DHCP option takes priority and the
remaining process of auto-discovery continues.
3. As the phone performs auto-discovery, all servers in the network
(including the TFTP server), display in the phone window. However, only
the server configured for TFTP automatically configures the phone.
6-10
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Single Call Restriction (57i CT and 9480i CT only)
On the 57i CT and 9480i CT, an administrator can enable or disable a single call
restriction between the 57i CT and 9480i CT base unit and a call server.
When this feature is enabled (set to 1), you can make separate active calls from
the 57i CT and 9480i CT base unit and from the cordless handset. If this feature is
disabled (set to 0), only one call can be active at a time either from the base unit or
from the handset. When this feature is disabled, and you make an active call on
either the base unit or the handset, any other attempt to make an active call is put
on hold. Also, when this feature is disabled, more than one call can negotiate
complex audio codecs since only a single call is decoding audio at a time.
You can configure this feature via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring Single Call Restriction.
Configuration Files
For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for single call restriction on the 57i CT and
9480i CT, see Appendix A, the section, “Single Call Restriction Setting” on page A-223.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings.
2
3
Enable the "Two Call Support" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the box).
Click
to save your settings.
Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings.
Select Operation->Reset and click
4
.
6-12
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Missed Call Summary Subscription
The “Missed Call Summary Subscription” feature allows missed calls that have
been redirected by the server, to be incremented in the missed calls indicator on
the phone it was initially directed to. This feature is called the Missed Call
Summary Subscription and can be set with a timer that allows the phone to use the
feature for a period of time before the timer expires. For this feature to work, you
must configure voicemail on the phone that the call was initially directed to.
For example, phones A, B, and C are connected to the server. You configure the
server to direct calls coming into phone B (which has voicemail configured) to be
forwarded to phone C. When phone A calls phone B, the server forwards the call
to phone C. With this feature, phone B receives notification from the server that
the call was forwarded and the missed calls indicator is incremented on phone B.
3KRQHꢀ$
3KRQHꢀ&
%ꢀIRZDUGVꢀFDOOꢀWRꢀ&
$ꢀFDOOVꢀ%
3KRQHꢀ%
0LVVHGꢀFDOOVꢀLQGLFDWRUꢀLQFUHPHQWVꢀRQꢀSKRQHꢀ%ꢁ
ꢀꢁ9RLFHPDLOꢀPXVWꢀEHꢀFRQILJXUHGꢀRQꢀSKRQHꢀ%ꢁ
1RWHꢂ
An Administrator can configure this feature on a global or per-line basis, using the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Configuring Missed Call Summary Subscription using the
Configuration Files
In addition to enabling/disabling the Misses Call Summary Subscription, You can
also configure the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone uses this feature.
The timer is configurable on a global basis only.
You use the following parameters to configure Missed Call Summary
Subscription feature on a global basis:
Global Parameters
• sip missed call summary subscription
• sip missed call summary subscription period
Use the following parameters to configure Missed Call Summary Subscription
feature on a per-line basis:
Per-Line Parameter
Configuration Files
For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for Missed Call Summary Subscription, see
Appendix A, the section, “Missed Call Summary Subscription Settings” on page A-96.
6-14
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Configuring Missed Call Summary Subscription using the
Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to configure the Missed Call Summary Subscription
feature using the Aastra Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
Global Configuration
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
2
The "Missed Call Summary Subscription" field is disabled by default. To enable this field, check
the box.
This feature allows missed calls that have been redirected by the server, to be incremented in the
missed calls indicator on the phone it was initially directed to. For example, phones A, B, and C are
connected to the server. You configure the server to direct calls coming into phone B (which has
voicemail configured) to be forwarded to phone C. When phone A calls sip missed call summary
subscription parameter, phone B receives notification from the server that the call was forwarded
and the missed calls indicator is incremented on phone B.
Note: You must configure voicemail on the phone that the call was initially directed to (phone B in the
above example).
3
4
The "Missed Call Summary Subscription Period" field is enabled with a default value of 86400. To
disable this field, enter zero (0), or leave the field blank.
Click
to save your changes.
Per-Line Configuration
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Line <N>->Advanced SIP Settings.
2
Click
to save your changes.
6-16
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
As-Feature-Event Subscription
The IP phones support server-side Do Not Disturb (DND), Call Forward
(CFWD), and Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) feature events.This feature is
called “as-feature-event” and works with the DND, CFWD, and ACD keys.
Notes:
1. The 51i supports server-side DND and CFWD only.
2. The DND, CFWD, and ACD server-side feature is not applicable to
the CT handset.
This feature is configurable using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
How it Works on the Phone UI
CFWD, and/or ACD key, pressing the key performs as follows:
•
•
•
If the key is configured for an account on the phone, the server applies DND,
CFWD or ACD to that account. (For information about CFWD and DND
on page 3-34).
If the key is “custom” configured, a screen displays on the phone allowing the
user to choose the account to apply DND or CFWD. (For information about
CFWD and DND custom configuration, see Chapter 3, the section, “Account
Configuration” on page 3-34).
A solid “Message Waiting Indicator” (MWI) indicates if one line/account has
DND or CFWD enabled, and the LED next to the DND/CFWD key is ON. A
status displays on the LCD that indicates the status of the line in focus (for
example, the status of CFWD could be “Call Forward Busy” (CFWDB) or
“Call Forward No Answer” (CFWDNA).
Note: If the ACD key is configured on the phone, and the
“as-feature-event” is not enabled, the phones uses the ACD icons and
LED behavior from a Sylantro server instead.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
When you press the DND, CFWD, or ACD key, only one attempt is made to
enable/disable the “as-feature-event” feature on the server. The message “Trying”
displays on the phone’s LCD after pressing the key. If the attempt is successful,
the idle screen displays. If the attempt is unsuccessful, the message “Failed”
displays. The user can press the softkey again to re-attempt the feature if required.
The following screen displays on the IP Phone UI for server-side call forwarding:
Call Forward
Mode: CFA
Next
Done
For server-side ACD, when you press the ACD softkey, the screen that displays is
dependant on the state of the ACD subscription. Possible state for ACD are::
•
•
Logged Out - User has the option of logging in.
Logged In - User has the option of logging out or making the phone
unavailable.
•
Unavailable - User has the option of logging out or making the phone
available.
ACD Screen for 9143i, 51i, 53i
ACD
ACD
Unavail
Logged In
Log Out
Logged Out
Log In
ACD
Unavailable
Avail
Log Out
ACD Screen for 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT
ACD
ACD
ACD
Logged In
Logged Out
Unavailable
- Log Out
- Log In
- Log Out
- Unavailable
- Available
Cancel -
Cancel -
Cancel -
6-18
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Note: IMPORTANT!
If DND and CFWD are configured to use “Account” mode on the IP
Phone, pressing the DND and CFWD keys apply to the account in focus
as described in Chapter 3, the section, “Account Configuration” on
page 3-34.
If ACD is configured on the phone, the ACD softkey applies to the line
for which the key is configured. The ACD softkey must be configured for
the first line of an account. For example, if account 2 has line 3 and line 4
you must configure the ACD softkey for line 3.
Configuring As-Feature-Event Subscription Using the Configuration
Files
If the phone-side features of the DND, CFWD, and ACD keys are enabled, the
phone uses the existing parameter values for these keys. If the server-side features
are enabled, the phone saves the state of the features from the server on the phone.
Use the following parameters to enable/disable the server-side “as-feature-event”
on the IP Phone:
•
sip lineN as-feature-event subscription
Configuration Files
For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“As-Feature-Event Subscription Settings” on page A-99.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
6-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Configuring As-Feature-Event Subscription Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to enable/disable the server-side “as-feature-event”
on the IP Phone using the Aastra Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Advanced Settings->LineN->Advanced SIP Settings.
2
3
In the “Advanced SIP Settings” section, enable the "As--Feature-Event Subscription" field, by
checking the check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the box).
Click
to save your changes.
6-20
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
4
Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings.
As-Feature-Event
Subscription
Period
5
6
In the “Advanced SIP Settings” section, in the “As-Feature-Event Subscription Period” field, enter
the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone waits after sending a SUBSCRIBE, to receive a
NOTIFY response from the server side.
Default is 3600. Valid values are
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
6-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Blacklist Duration
The Blacklist Duration feature helps to reduce unnecessary delays during proxy/
registrar server failures, caused by the IP phone repeatedly sending SIP messages
to a failed server. If you enable this feature, then whenever the IP phone sends a
SIP message to a server, and does not get a response, the phone automatically
adds the server to the blacklist. The IP phone avoids sending messages to any
servers on the blacklist. If all servers are on the blacklist, then the IP phone
attempts to send the message to the first server on the list.
You can specify how long failed servers remain on the blacklist in the IP phone’s
configuration file or in the Aastra Web UI. The default setting is 300 seconds. If
you set the duration to 0 seconds, then you disable the blacklist feature.
Configuring Blacklist Duration Using the Configuration Files
Use the following parameter to configure the Blacklist Duration in the
configuration files:
Configuration Files
For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for setting Blacklist Duration, see Appendix
A, the section, “Blacklist Duration Setting” on page A-224.
6-22
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Configuring a Server Blacklist Using the Aastra Web UI
You use the following procedure to configure Blacklist Duration using the Aastra
Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings
2
3
In the “Blacklist Duration” field, specify the length of time, in seconds, that a failed server remains
on the server blacklist. The IP phone avoids sending a SIP message to a failed server (if another
server is available) for this amount of time. Valid values are 0 to 9999999. Default is 300 seconds (5
minutes).
For example: 600
Note: The value of “0” disables the blacklist feature.
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
6-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Whitelist Proxy
To protect your IP phone network, you can configure a “Whitelist Proxy” feature
that screens incoming call requests received by the IP phones. When this feature is
enabled, an IP phone accepts call requests from a trusted proxy server only. The IP
phone rejects any call requests from an untrusted proxy server
Configuring Whitelist Proxy Using the Configuration Files
You use the following parameter to configure the whitelist proxy feature using the
configuration files:
Configuration Files
For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for setting Whitelist Proxy, see Appendix A,
the section, “Whitelist Proxy Setting” on page A-224.
6-24
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Configuring Whitelist Proxy Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to configure the Whitelist Proxy feature using the
Aastra Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings
2
3
The "Whitelist Proxy" field is disabled by default. To enable this field, check the box.
When this feature is enabled, an IP phone accepts call requests from a trusted proxy server only. The
IP phone rejects any call requests from an untrusted proxy server.
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
6-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Transport Layer Security (TLS)
The IP Phones support a transport protocol called Transport Layer Security
(TLS) and Persistent TLS. TLS is a protocol that ensures communication
privacy between the SIP phones and the Internet. TLS ensures that no third party
may eavesdrop or tamper with any message.
TLS is composed of two layers: the TLS Record Protocol and the TLS handshake
protocol. The TLS Record Protocol provides connection security with some
encryption method such as the Data Encryption Standard (DES). The TLS
Handshake Protocol allows the server and client to authenticate each other and to
negotiate an encryption algorithm and cryptographic keys before data is
exchanged. TLS requires the use of the following security certificate files to
perform TLS handshake:
•
•
•
•
Root and Intermediate Certificates
Local Certificate
Private Key
Trusted Certificate
When the phones use TLS to authenticate with the server, each individual call
must setup a new TLS connection. This can take more time when placing each
call. Thus, the IP phones also have a feature that allows you to setup the
connection to the server once and re-use that one connection for all calls from the
phone. It is called Persistent TLS. The setup connection for Persistent TLS is
established during the registration of the phone. If the phones are set to use
Persistent TLS, and a call is made from the phone, this call and all subsequent
calls use the same authenticated connection. This significantly reduces the delay
time when placing a call.
6-26
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Notes:
1. Persistent TLS requires the outbound proxy server and outbound
proxy port parameters be configured in either the configuration files or
the Aastra Web UI (Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Basic SIP Network
Settings). There can be only one persistent TLS connection created per
phone. The phone establishes the TLS connection to the configured
outbound proxy.
2.
If you configure the phone to use Persistent TLS, you must also
specify the Trusted Certificate file to use. The Root and Intermediate
Certificates, Local Certificate, and Private Key files are optional.
On the IP phones, an Administrator can configure TLS and Persistent TLS on a
global-basis only, using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
SIP Asserted Identity (for Sylantro Servers)
The IP Phones support a private extension to the SIP, Asserted Identity (SAI)
within Trusted Networks (as defined in RFC 3325), inside the User Agent Server
(UA) in the Aastra IP phones.
Note: The phones support PAI header in the UPDATE message,
according to draft-ietf-sipping-update-pai-00. This feature is always
enabled.
If an UPDATE is received with a PAI header from a trusted source, the
phone updates the display with this information. The phone ignores any
PAI received from untrusted entities
This feature allows a network of trusted SIP servers to assert the identity of
authenticated users, and verify that phone messages originate from a Trusted
Identity. Upon receiving a message from a caller in the Trust Network, the IP
phone reads the contents of the P-Asserted-Identity (PAI) header field and
displays it on the phone UI. This field contains a more accurate description of the
caller identity (extension/phone number) than is contained in the SIP message.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
6-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
When an IP phone receives an incoming call, the IP phone does the following
actions:
•
•
Checks to see if the incoming call is from a registered proxy server.
If the call is forwarded via a registered proxy server, then the message has
already been verified and authenticated by the server. The caller is part of the
Trust Network. The IP phone UI displays the caller information contained in
the PAI header.
•
If the call is not forwarded via a registered proxy server - and therefore is not
a “Trusted Entity” - the IP phone UI does not display any trust information
contained in the PAI header.
Configuring TLS Using the Configuration Files
You use the following parameters to configure TLS in the configuration files:
• sip transport protocol
• sips persistent tls
• sips root and intermediate certificates
• sips local certificate
• sips private key
Configuration Files
For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for setting TLS, see Appendix A, the
section, “Transport Layer Security (TLS) Settings” on page A-100.
6-28
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Configuring TLS Using the Aastra Web UI
To configure TLS using the Aastra Web UI, you must enable TLS or Persistent
TLS first. Then you must define the TLS certificate file names that you want the
phone to use. Use the following procedure to configure TLS using the Aastra Web
UI.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings.
2
3
In the "Transport Protocol" field, select TLS or Persistent TLS.
Note: If configuring Persistent TLS, you must go to Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Basic Network
Settings and configure the “Outbound Proxy Server” and “Outbound Proxy Port” parameters.
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
6-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
4
Click on Advanced Settings->TLS Support.
5
Enter the certificate file names and the private key file name in the appropriate fields.
The Root and Intermediate Certificate files contain one root certificate and zero or more intermediate
certificates which must be placed in order of certificate signing with root certificate being the first in
the file. If the local certificate is signed by some well known certificate authority, then that authority
provides the user with the Root and Intermediate Certificate files (most likely just CA root certificate).
The Trusted Certificate files define a list of trusted certificates. The phone’s trusted list must contain
the CA root certificates for all the servers it is connecting to. For example, if the phone is connecting
to server A which has a certificate signed by CA1, and server B which has a certificate signed by
CA2, the phone must have CA1 root certificate and CS2 root certificate in its Trusted Certificate file.
Notes:
1. If configuring TLS, you must specify the files for Root and Intermediate Certificates, the Local
Certificate, the Private Key, and the Trusted Certificates in order for the phone to receive calls.
2. If configuring Persistent TLS, you must specify the Trusted Certificates (which contains the trusted
certificate list). All other certificates and the Private Key are optional.
3. The certificate files and Private Key file names must use the format “.pem”.
4. To create custom certificate files and private key files to use on your IP phone, contact Aastra
Technical Support.
6
Click
to save your changes.
6-30
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
802.1x Support
The IP phones support the IEEE 802.1x protocol. The 802.1x protocol is a
standard for passing Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) over a wired or
wireless Local Area Network (LAN).
The 802.1x protocol on the IP phone facilitates media-level access control, and
offers the capability to permit or deny network connectivity, control LAN access,
and apply traffic policy, based on user or endpoint identity. This feature supports
both the EAP-MD5 and EAP-TLS protocols.
If 802.1x on the phone is enabled, the following screen displays during startup of
the phone.
>> 10%
802.1x Authenticating....
If the 802.1x failed to authenticate with the server, the phone continues it's normal
startup process using DHCP. However, the network port on the phone may or may
not be disabled, depending on the switch configuration.
Certificates and Private Key Information
•
If the certificates and private key are NOT stored in the phone:
— the phone connects to an open unauthenticated VLAN and the certificates
are downloaded.
or
— the phone connects using EAP-MD5 to a restricted VLAN and the
certificates are downloaded.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
6-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
•
•
If the certificates and private key ARE stored in the phone, the phone uses
them during the authentication process.
If the phone uses EAP-TLS for successful authentication, after the phone
reboots, it downloads the latest certificates and private key files to the phone.
•
•
The private key uses AES-128 to encrypt the private key file.
Switch Supplicant Mode - The switch supports the following 2 modes:
— Single supplicant - This mode enables the port once any machine
connected to this port is authenticated. For security reasons, the IP phone
has the option to disable the pass-through port.
— Multiple supplicants - Using this mode, the switch can support multiple
clients connected to same port. The switch distinguishes between the
clients based on their MAC address.
•
Factory default and recovery mode deletes all certificates and private keys,
and sets the EAP type to disabled.
You can configure the 802.1x feature on the IP phone using the configuration
files, the IP Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI.
Note: If configuring 802.1x using the IP Phone UI, the certificates
and private keys must already be configured and stored on the phone.
Use the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI to load certificates
and private keys.
6-32
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Configuring the 802.1x Protocol Using the Configuration Files
You use the following parameters to configure the 802.1x Protocol on your phone
using the configuration files.
For EAP-MD5 use:
•
•
•
•
eap type
identity
md5 password
pc port passthrough enabled
For EAP-TLS use:
•
•
•
eap type
identity
802.1x root and intermediate certificates
(use 1 root and 0 or 1 intermediate certificates)
•
•
•
•
802.1x local certificate
(use 1 local certificate)
802.1x private key
(1 private key that corresponds to local certificate)
802.1x trusted certificates
(0 or more trusted certificates (a maximum of 2))
Configuration Files
For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for setting 802.1x support, see Appendix A,
the section, “802.1x Support Settings” on page A-104.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
6-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Configuring the 802.1x Protocol Using the IP Phone UI
Use the following procedure to configure the 802.1x Protocol on your phone
using the IP Phone UI.
Note: If configuring 802.1x using the IP Phone UI, the
certificates and private keys must already be configured and
stored on the phone. Use the configuration files or the Aastra
Web UI to load certificates and private keys.
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
2
Press
to enter the Options List.
Select Administrator Menu and enter your Administrator password.
6-34
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
On 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT:
3
Select Network Settings->Ethernet->Enable PassThru Port.
On the 9143i, 51i, 53i:
Select Network Settings->Ethernet->PC Port Enabled.
1. LAN Port Link
Next
10. Ethernet
Ethernet Link
Enter
Enter
Enter
Next
1. LAN Port Link
2. PC Port Link
3. Enable PassThru Port
4. 802.1x Settings
9143i, 51i, 53i
2. PC Port Link
Next
- Select
Done -
3. PC Port Enabled
Yes
Change
Next
9480i, 9480i CT,
55i, 57i, 57i CT
4. 802.1x Settings
Next
Enter
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
6-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
4
The PC PassThru Port is enabled by default.
Enable PassThru Port
Enable PassThru Port
Yes
- Change
Cancel -
Done -
Note: The PC PassThru Port must be enabled to use the 802.1x Protocol.
5
Press Done (on 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, 57i CT).
or
Press Next (on 9143i, 51i, 53i).
6
7
Select 802.1x Settings.
Select 802.1x Mode.
802.1x Settings
1. 802.1x Mode
Next
1. 802.1x Mode
2. EAP-MD5 Settings
Enter
2. EAP-MD5 Settings
Yes
- Select
Enter
Next
Done -
6-36
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
8
Select EAP-MD5 to configure the phone to use MD5 authentication;
or
Select EAP-TLS to configure the phone to use TLS authentication.
4. 802.1x Settings
Next
1. 802.1x Mode
Next
802.1x Mode
Disabled
Next
ꢀ
Set
802.1x Mode
Enter
Enter
802.1x Mode
EAP-MD5
Next
Disabled
EAP-MD5
EAP-TLS
Set
Set
802.1x Mode
EAP-TLS
Next
Cancel -
Done -
Note: The 802.1x Protocol is disabled by default. If you select EAP-TLS authentication, you must use
the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI to configure the certificates and private key for the phone.
9
Press Done (on 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, 57i CT)
or
Press Set (on 9143i, 51i, 53i).
10
11
To configure MD5, select EAP-MD5 Settings.
Select Identity.
1. EAP-MD5 Settings
Enter
1. Identity
Next
User Name
|
Cancel
Next
Enter
Enter
Set
Set
EAP-MD5 Setting
1. Identity
2. MD5 Password
2. MD5 Password
Next
Password
|
Cancel
- Select
Done -
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
6-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
12
Enter the identity or username used for authenticating the phone.
1. EAP-MD5 Settings
Enter
1. Identity
Next
User Name
|
Cancel
Next
Enter
Enter
Set
Set
Username
Username:
|
2. MD5 Password
Next
Password
|
Cancel
- Backspace
- ABC
Nextspace -
Cancel -
Done -
13
14
Use the keys as applicable while entering the username; then press Done (9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i,
57i CT).
or
Press Set (9143i, 51i, 53i).
Enter the password used for authenticating the phone.
1. EAP-MD5 Settings
Enter
1. Identity
Next
User Name
|
Cancel
Password
Next
Enter
Enter
Set
Set
Password:
|
2. MD5 Password
Next
Password
|
Cancel
- Backspace
- ABC
Nextspace -
Cancel -
Done -
6-38
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step Action
15
Use the keys as applicable while entering the password; then press Done (9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i,
57i CT).
or
Press Set (9143i, 51i, 53i).
16
Press the
key to save your settings and exit from the IP Phone UI.
Configuring the 802.1x Protocol Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to configure the 802.1x Protocol on your phone
using the Aastra Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Advanced Settings->802.1x Support.
To configure EAP-MD5:
2
In the “EAP Type” field, select EAP-MD5.
Valid values are: Disabled (Default), EAP-MD5, and EAP-TLS.
3
In the “Identify” field, enter an Identity for the IP phone for which you are configuring 802.1x.
For example, phone1.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
6-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
4
5
6
In the “MD5 Password” field, enter a password used for the MD5 authentication of the phone.
For example, password1.
Click
to save your changes.
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Basic Network Settings.
PC Port PassThru
Enable/Disable
7
8
The “PC Port PassThru Enable/Disable” field is enabled by default. To disable this field, uncheck
the box.
Note: The PC Port PassThru Enable Disable field must be enabled to use the 802.1x Protocol.
Click
to save your changes.
6-40
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
To configure EAP-TLS:
1
Click on Advanced Settings->802.1x Support.
1
2
3
In the “EAP Type” field, select EAP-TLS.
Valid values are: Disabled (Default), EAP-MD5, and EAP-TLS.
In the “Identity” field, enter an Identity for the IP phone for which you are configuring 802.1x.
For example, phone1.
In the “Root and Intermediate Certificates Filename” field, enter the filename that contains the root
and intermediate certificates related to the local certificate. For example:
root_Intermed_certifi.pem.
4
5
In the “Local Certificate Filename” field, enter the filename that contains the local certificate. For
example: localcertificate.pem.
In the “Private Key Filename” field, enter the filename that contains the private key. For example:
privatekey.pem.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
6-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
6
7
8
In the “Trusted Certificates Filename” field, enter the filename that contains the trusted certificates.
For example: trusted_certificates.pem.
Click
to save your changes.
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Basic Network Settings.
PC Port PassThru
Enable/Disable
9
The “PC Port PassThru Enable/Disable” field is enabled by default. To disable this field, uncheck
the box.
Note: The PC Port PassThru Enable Disable field must be enabled to use the 802.1x Protocol.
10
Click
to save your changes.
6-42
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Symmetric UDP Signaling
By default, the IP phones use symmetric UDP signaling for outgoing UDP SIP
messages. When symmetric UDP is enabled, the IP phone generates and listens
for UDP messages using port 5060.
You can manually disable symmetric UDP signaling using the IP phone’s
configuration file. When you disable symmetric UDP signaling, then the IP phone
chooses a random source port for UDP messages.
The IP phone also chooses a random source port for UDP messages if you
configure a backup proxy server, registrar server, or outbound proxy server.
An Administrator can configure symmetric UDP signaling using the configuration
files only.
Configuring Symmetric UDP Signaling Using the Configuration Files
You use the following parameter to enable or disable Symmetric UDP Signaling
in the configuration files:
Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “RTP, Codec,
DTMF Global Settings” on page A-109.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
6-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Removing UserAgent and Server SIP Headers
Currently, the phone always configures the SIP UserAgent/Server headers to
contain:
Aastra <PhoneModel>/<FirmwareVersion>
You can suppress the addition of these headers by using the following parameter
in the configuration files:
•
sip user-agent
Setting this parameter allows you to enable or disable the addition of the
User-Agent and Server SIP headers from the SIP stack.
You can configure this feature using the configuration files only.
Configuring UserAgent/Server SIP Headers
You use the following parameter to specify whether the UserAgent and Server SIP
header is added to the SIP stack.
Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “User-Agent
Setting” on page A-230.
6-44
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Multi-Stage Digit Collection (Billing Codes) Support (for Sylantro
Servers)
The IP Phones support Multi-Stage Digit Collection (billing codes) for Sylantro
Servers. Sylantro Server features, like mandatory and optional billing codes,
requires that the application server notify the phone to collect more digits before
completing the call. The IP phone is able to collect digits in two stages to support
the billing code feature.
Aastra IP Phone users are prompted to enter the correct billing code when they
dial these numbers:
•
•
External numbers.
Eternal numbers dialed using a Speeddial key.
Billing Codes Implementation Notes
Note the following implementation information:
•
•
•
•
•
IP phone users may enter a 2-9 digit billing code. Billing codes may not start
with either 0 (Operator) or 9 (external calls).
When using Sylantro Click-to-Call, IP phone users select a billing code from
a pull-down menu.
When placing a call, a secondary dial tone alerts IP phone users to enter the
billing code. The IP phone UI also displays a “Enter Billing Code” message.
If an IP phone user redials a number, they do not have to re-enter the billing
code. The billing code information is maintained and processed accordingly.
If an IP phone user enters an invalid billing code, the call fails.
Mandatory versus Optional Billing Codes
This release of the Aastra IP phones supports two types of billing codes:
Mandatory and Optional. The Sylantro server configuration determines which
type of billing code is used on the IP phones.
•
Mandatory billing codes: Calls are not connected until the user enters a valid
billing code. The user dials the phone number. When prompted for billing
codes, user dials the billing code.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
6-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
For example, suppose the IP phone user is using billing code 300, and dialing
the external number 617-238-5500. The IP user then enters the number using
the following format:
6172385000#300
Using mandatory billing codes, if the user is configuring a Speeddial number,
then they enter the number using the following format:
<phonenumber>%23<billingcode>
To use this format with the default dial plan terminator (#), the # sign required
by Sylantro as a delimiter should be represented as an escaped character by
using the sequence %23. The speed dial format for an external number that
includes a mandatory billing code becomes:
<phonenumber>%23<billing code>
•
Optional billing codes: The user dials an optional billing code by dialing
*50, followed by the billing code digits. When prompted for additional digits,
user enters the phone number.
For example, suppose the IP phone user is using billing code 500, and dialing
the external number 617-238-5000. The IP user then enters the number using
the following format:
*50500#6172385000
If the user is dialing configuring a Speeddial number, then they enter the
number using the following format:
*50<billingcode>#<phonenumber>
To use this format with the default dial plan terminator (#), the # sign
required by Sylantro as a delimiter should be represented as an escaped
character by using the sequence %23. The speed dial format for an
external number that includes an optional billing code becomes:
*50<billing code>%23<phone number>
6-46
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Numbers Not Requiring Billing Codes
Billing codes are not required for the following two types of calls:
•
•
Emergency calls (E911)
Calls between extensions
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
6-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Configurable DNS Queries
The domain name system (DNS) is the way that Internet domain names are
located and translated into Internet Protocol addresses. A domain name is a
meaningful and easy-to-remember identifier for an Internet address.
The lists of domain names and IP addresses are distributed throughout the Internet
in a hierarchy of authority within a database of records. There is usually a DNS
server within close proximity to your geographic location that maps the domain
names in your Internet requests or forwards them to other servers in the Internet.
The IP Phones support three methods of DNS lookups allowing it to adapt to
various deployment environments: eNone, eSRV, and eNAPTR&SRV. (See the
following table for a description of each method). When the IP Phone accesses the
Internet, it sends out a DNS query to the proxy to lookup the IP address and the
port, and then waits for a response from the proxy.
You can configure the phone to use any one of these methods by entering the
applicable value in the configuration files:.
Configuration DNS Server
Description
File Value
Method Used
0
A only
The phone sends “A” (Host IP Address) lookup for the IP address
and uses the default port number of 5060.
1
2
SRV & A
The phone sends “SRV” (Service Location Record) lookup to get
the port number. Most often, the IP address is included in the
response from the DNS server to avoid extra queries. If there is no
IP address returned in the response, the phone sends out the “A”
DNS lookup to find the IP address.
NAPTR & SRV & A First, the phone sends "NAPTR" (Naming Authority Pointer) lookup
to get the “SRV” pointer and service type (such as "aastra.com
SIP+2DT .... _sip.tcp.aastra.net", which means the service prefers
to use TCP and "_sip.tcp.aastra.net" for the SRV query instead of
the default "_sip._tcp.aastra.com"). If the NAPTR record is
returned empty then the default value is used, so in the same case,
the phone will use "_sip._udp.aastra.com" for the next step lookup.
Next, the phone does SRV lookup to get the IP address and port
number. If there is no IP address in the SRV response then it
sends out and “A” lookup to get it.
6-48
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Note: On the phone side, if you configure the phone with a Fully-
Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) proxy and specified port, the phone
always sends “A only” lookups to find the Host IP Address of the proxy.
Configuring the DNS Query Method
You can configure the DNS query method for the phone to use for performing
DNS lookups using the following parameter in the configuration files:
•
Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “DNS Query
Setting” on page A-231.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
6-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Ignore Out of Sequence Errors
An Administrator can configure the phone via the “sip accept out of order
requests” parameter to ignore CSeq number errors on all SIP dialogs on the
phone. When this parameter is enabled, the phone no longer verifies that the
sequence numbers increase for each message within a dialog, and does not report
a "CSeq Out of Order" error if they do not increase.
Note: As the default Asterisk configuration does not fully track dialogs
through a reboot, it is recommended that this parameter be enabled when
using the BLF feature with an Asterisk server. If you do not enable this
feature, then rebooting the Asterisk server may cause BLF to stop
working. With this parameter enabled, the BLF key starts working again
when the phone re-subscribes, which by default, are one hour apart.
An Administrator can enable/disable this feature using the configuration files
only.
Enabling/Disabling “Out of Order SIP Requests”
Use the following procedure to enable/disable “out of order SIP requests”.
Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Ignore Out of
Order SIP Requests” on page A-232.
6-50
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7
Encrypted Files on the IP Phone
About this chapter
Introduction
This chapter provides information about encryption on the IP phones and provides
methods an administrator can use to store encrypted files to a server.
Topics
Topic
Page
Encrypted Files on the IP Phone
page 7-2
page 7-2
page 7-4
page 7-6
Configuration File Encryption Method
Procedure to Encrypt Configuration Files
Vendor Configuration File Encryption
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
7-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Encrypted Files on the IP Phone
Encrypted Files on the IP Phone
An encryption feature for the IP phone allows Service Providers the capability of
storing encrypted files on their server to protect against unauthorized access and
tampering of sensitive information (i.e., user accounts, login passwords,
registration information). Service Providers also have the capability of locking a
phone to use a specific server-provided configuration only.
Configuration File Encryption Method
Only a System Administrator can encrypt the configurations files for an IP Phone.
System Administrators use a password distribution scheme to manually
pre-configure or automatically configure the phones to use the encrypted
configuration with a unique key.
From a Microsoft Windows command line, the System Administrator uses an
Aastra-supplied encryption tool called "anacrypt.exe" to encrypt the <MAC>.tuz
file.
Note: Aastra also supplies encryption tools to support Linux platforms
(anacrypt.linux) and Solaris platforms (anacrypt.sunos) if required.
This tool processes the plain text <mac>.cfg and aastra.cfg files and creates
triple-DES encrypted versions called <mac>.tuz and aastra.tuz. Encryption is
performed using a secret password that is chosen by the administrator.
The encryption tool is also used to create an additional encrypted tag file called
security.tuz, which controls the decryption process on the IP phones. If
security.tuz is present on the TFTP/FTP/HTTP server, the IP phones download it
and use it locally to decrypt the configuration information from the aastra.tuz and
<mac>.tuz files. Because only the encrypted versions of the configuration files
need to be stored on the server, no plain-text configuration or passwords are sent
across the network, thereby ensuring security of the configuration data.
7-2
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Encrypted Files on the IP Phone
Encrypted Files on the IP Phone
To make changes to the configuration files, the System Administrator must save
the original files.
Note: If the use of encrypted configuration files is enabled (via
security.tuz or pre-provisioned on the IP phone) the aastra.cfg and
<mac>.cfg files are ignored, and only the encrypted equivalent files
aastra.tuz and <mac>.tuz are read.
The security feature described above prevents unauthorized parties from reading
or writing the contents of the <MAC>.tuz file. It also provides the following:
•
Prevents users from using the <MAC>.tuz file that does not match the user’s
phone MAC address.
•
•
•
Renders the <MAC>.tuz file invalid if the user renames the file.
Works with IP phone releases prior to Release 2.2.
Provides compatibility between the previous encryption routine and the new
decryption routine.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Encrypted Files on the IP Phone
Procedure to Encrypt Configuration Files
To encrypt the IP phone configuration files:
1. Open a command line window application (i.e., DOS window).
2. At the prompt, enter anacrypt.exe and press <Return>.
C:\> anacrypt.exe -h
Provides encryption of the configuration files used for the family of Aastra IP
phones, using 56bit triple-DES and site-specific keys.
Copyright (c) 2008, Aastra Technologies, Ltd.
Copyright (c) 1999, Philip J. Erdelsky
Usage:
anacrypt {infile.cfg|-d <dir>} [-p password] [-m] [-i] [-v] [-h]
Anacrypt Switch
Description
{infile.cfg | -d <dir>} Specifies that all .cfg files in <dir> should be encrypted
[-p password]
-m
Specifies password used to generate keys
Generate MAC.tuz files that are phone specific. This switch generates files that are
only usable for phones with firmware version 2.2.0 and above.
-i
Generate security.tuz file
-v
Specifies the version of encryption that the anacrypt tool uses. Use version 1 encryption
(i.e., -v1) to generate firmware that is readable by all model phones. Without the -v1
switch, the anacrypt tool generates files that are only readable by phones with
firmware 2.2.0 and above.
-h
Display program help text
Note: Incorrect password produces garbage. For site-specific keyfile
security.cfg the plaintext must match password.
7-4
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Encrypted Files on the IP Phone
Encrypted Files on the IP Phone
Examples
The following examples illustrate the use of the anacrypt.exe file.
Example 1
Generating a security.tuz file with password 1234abcd
For firmware version 2.2.0 and up:
C:\>anacrypt -i -p 1234abcd
For any firmware version:
C:\>anacrypt -i -p 1234abcd -v1
Example 2
Encrypting a single aastra.cfg file with password 1234abcd
C:\>anacrypt aastra.cfg -p 1234abcd
Example 3
Encrypting a <mac>.cfg file with password 1234abcd
C:\>anacrypt 00085d000000.cfg -p 1234abcd
Example 4
Encrypting a <mac>.cfg file with password 1234abcd using the new MAC
encryption (-m is only supported for firmware version 2.2.0 and up)
C:\>anacrypt 00085d000000.cfg -m -p 1234abcd
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Encrypted Files on the IP Phone
Example 5
Encrypting all cfg files in C:\data with password 1234abcd using the new MAC
encryption and generating a security.tuz file at the same time.(2.2.0 and up)
C:\>anacrypt -d C:\data -p 1234abcd -m -i
Example 6
Encrypting all cfg files in C:\data with password 1234abcd using the and
generating a security.tuz file at the same time for all firmware versions.(any
version)
C:\>anacrypt -d C:\data -p 1234abcd -i -v1
Vendor Configuration File Encryption
Some vendors can have specific methods to encrypt files on their configuration
servers. For each phone, the configuration server can generate a random hex string
(encryption key) that is used to encrypt the phone’s MAC-specific configuration
file.
The encryption key is placed in a plain text MAC-specific configuration file that
the server downloads to the phone. After the phone receives the file, it updates the
encryption key.
This method of encryption does not affect the implementation of the Aastra
method of file encryption.
Note: The aastra.cfg file is not encrypted with this feature.
You can set the phone-specific encryption key using the configuration files only.
For more information about configuration file encryption, contact Aastra
Technical Support.
7-6
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Encrypted Files on the IP Phone
Encrypted Files on the IP Phone
Configuring Vendor Configuration File Encryption
Use the following procedure to configure vendor configuration file encryption on
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for automatic update, see Appendix A, the
section, “Configuration Encryption Setting” on page A-232.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Encrypted Files on the IP Phone
7-8
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
Upgrading the Firmware
About this chapter
Introduction
This chapter provides information about upgrading the IP phone firmware.
Topics
Topic
Page
Upgrading the Firmware
page 8-2
page 8-2
page 8-4
page 8-6
Manual Firmware Update (TFTP only)
Manual Firmware and Configuration File Update
Automatic Update (auto-resync)
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
8-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Upgrading the Firmware
Upgrading the Firmware
The IP phone uses a TFTP, FTP, or HTTP server (depending on the protocol
configured on the IP phone) to download configuration files and firmware.
The configuration server should be ready and be able to accept connections. For
information on setting up the configuration server, see Chapter 1, the section,
“Configuration Server Requirement” on page 1-35.
You can download the firmware stored on the configuration server in one of three
ways:
•
•
Manual firmware update using the Aastra Web UI (TFTP only).
Manual update of firmware and configuration files (by restarting the phone
via the IP phone UI or the Aastra Web UI).
•
Automatic update of firmware, configuration files, or both at a specific time
in a 24-hour period (via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI).
Manual Firmware Update (TFTP only)
Use the following procedure to activate a firmware download using TFTP.
Warning: Do not reset or turn off the phone until the download is
complete.
Note: This procedure allows you to download the <phone model.st> file
from a TFTP server even if your phone is configured to use HTTP or FTP.
8-2
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Upgrading the Firmware
Upgrading the Firmware
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Firmware Update.
2
3
Enter the TFTP server IP address or qualified domain name in the "TFTP Server IP" field.
Enter the firmware file name (<phone model>.st) that you want to download to your IP phone in the
"File Name" field. For example, 53i.st.
This file name must match the actual name of the firmware file residing on your configuration server.
4
Click
.
This starts the upgrade process. If the upgrade is successful the following message displays on the
screen: "Firmware Upgrade Successful".
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Upgrading the Firmware
Manual Firmware and Configuration File Update
Restarting the phone forces the phone to check for both firmware and
configuration files stored on the configuration server.
Warning: Do not reset or turn off the phone until the download is
complete.
Restarting the Phone Using the IP Phone UI
IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
2
3
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select Restart Phone.
For 9143i, 51i, 53i:
Press # to confirm.
Note: To cancel the Restart, press the 3 key.
For 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, 57i CT:
Press Restart.
Note: To cancel the Restart, press Cancel.
8-4
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Upgrading the Firmware
Upgrading the Firmware
Restarting the Phone Using the Aastra Web UI
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Operation->Reset->Phone.
2
Click
to restart the phone.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
8-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Upgrading the Firmware
Automatic Update (auto-resync)
The auto-resync feature on the IP phones allows an administrator to enable the
phone to be updated automatically once a day at a specific time in a 24-hour
period if the files on the server have changed. This feature works with TFTP, FTP,
and HTTP servers. An administrator can enable this feature using the Aastra Web
UI or using the configuration files (aastra.cfg and <mac>.cfg).
Note: The automatic update feature works with both encrypted and plain
text configuration files.
When configuring via the Aastra Web UI, the administrator sets the following
parameters:
Mode Time
The Mode parameter determines the type of update that the IP phone performs:
configuration file only, firmware only, or both.
The Time parameter sets the period of time for which the IP phone is
automatically updated.
When configuring via the configuration files, the following parameters must be
set:
•
•
auto-resync mode
auto-resync time
8-6
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Upgrading the Firmware
Upgrading the Firmware
Configuring Automatic Update
Use the following procedures to configure automatic update of the IP phone
firmware, configuration files, or both.
Notes:
1. If a user is accessing the Aastra Web UI, they are not informed of an
auto-reboot.
2. Any changes made using the Aastra Web UI or the IP phone UI are
not overwritten by an auto-resync update. Auto-resync affects the
configuration files only. However, the settings in the Aastra Web UI take
precedence over the IP phone UI and the configuration files.
3. If the IP phone is in use (not idle) at the time of the resync check, the
reboot occurs when the phone becomes idle.
4. The resync time is based on the local time of the IP phone.
5. Auto-Resync adds up to 15 minutes random time to the configured
time. For example, if the auto resync time parameter is set to 02:00, the
event takes place any time between 02:00 and 02:15. This prevents
several phones from accessing the server at the exact same time.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for automatic update, see Appendix A, the
section, “Configuration Server Settings” on page A-17.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
8-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Upgrading the Firmware
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Configuration Server->Auto-Resync.
2
3
Select the auto-resync mode from the Mode field.
Valid values are None, Configuration Files, Firmware, Both. Default is None.
Select the time from the Time (24-hour) field that you want the update to take place.
Valid values are 00:00 to 23:30 (in 30 minute increments).
8-8
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Upgrading the Firmware
Upgrading the Firmware
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
4
Click
to save your settings.
These changes are not dynamic.
You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect.
5
6
Click on Operation->Reset.
In the "Restart Phone" field click
to restart the IP phone and apply the update.
The update performs automatically at the time you designated.
Reference
For more information about setting automatic update on the IP phone, see the
"auto resync mode" and "auto resync time" parameters, see Appendix A, the
section, “Configuration Server Settings” on page A-17.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
8-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
About this chapter
Chapter 9
Troubleshooting
About this chapter
Introduction
This chapter describes tasks that a system administrator can perform on the IP
phones for troubleshooting purposes. It also includes answers to questions you
may have while using the IP phones.
Topics
Topic
Page
Troubleshooting
Log Settings
page 9-3
page 9-3
page 9-4
page 9-7
page 9-12
page 9-15
page 9-15
page 9-16
page 9-16
page 9-17
Module/Debug Level Settings
Support Information
WatchDog Task Feature
Why does my phone display the “No Service” message?
Why does my phone display "Bad Encrypted Config"?
Why is my phone not receiving the TFTP IP address from the DHCP
Server?
How do I restart the IP phone?
page 9-18
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
9-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
About this chapter
Topic
Page
How do I set the IP phone to factory default?
page 9-19
page 9-20
page 9-21
page 9-23
How do I erase the phone’s local configuration?
How to reset a user’s password?
How do I lock and unlock the phone?
9-2
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
This section describes tasks that a system administrator can perform on the IP
phones for troubleshooting purposes. Using the Aastra Web UI, a system
administrator can:
•
•
•
•
•
Assign an IP address and IP port in which to save log files
Filter the logs according to severity that get reported to log files
Save the current local configuration file to a specified location
Save the current server configuration file to a specified location
Show task and stack status (including “Free Memory”and “Maximum
Memory Block Size”)
Aastra Technical Support can then use the information gathered to perform
troubleshooting tasks.
Log Settings
Using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI, you can specify the location
for which to save files for troubleshooting purposes.
In the configuration files, you use the following parameters to configure log
settings:
•
•
•
log server ip - The IP address for which to save log files for troubleshooting
purposes.
log server port - The IP port to use to save log files for troubleshooting
purposes.
log level - The severity level of the logs to be reported to a log file. Log Level
default is Error (3). (Changes to this parameter via the Aastra Web UI require
a reboot).
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
9-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting
In the Aastra Web UI, you use the following parameters to configure log
settings:
•
Log IP - The IP address for which to save log files for troubleshooting
purposes.
•
Log Port - The IP port to use to save log files for troubleshooting purposes.
For more information about the log setting configuration parameters, see
Appendix A, the section, “Troubleshooting Parameters” on page A-233.
For information about configuring the log settings using the Aastra Web UI, see
“Performing Troubleshooting Tasks” on page 9-8.
Module/Debug Level Settings
The Aastra IP phones provide blog module support that allows enhanced severity
filtering of log calls sent as blog output.
The blog, as used on the IP phones, is a an online debugging tool that can be
frequently updated and intended for technical support analyzation. Blogs are
defined by their format: a series of entries posted to a single page in
reverse-chronological order. The IP Phone blogs are separated into modules
which allow you to log specific information for analyzing.
The following table identifies the blog modules you can set.
Aastra Web UI Parameters
Configuration File Parameters
LINMGR (Line Manager information)
UI (User Interface (UI) related)
MISC (Miscellaneous)
log module linemgr
log module user interface
log module misc
log module sip
SIP (Call control SIP stack)
DIS (Display drivers)
log module dis
DSTORE (Delayed storage)
EPT (Endpoint module)
log module dstore
log module ept
IND (Indicator module)
log module ind
9-4
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Aastra Web UI Parameters
Configuration File Parameters
KBD (Keyboard module)
log module kbd
log module net
log module provis
log module rtpt
log module snd
log module prof
log module xml
NET (Network module)
PROVIS (Provisioning module)
RTPT (Realtime Transport module)
SND (Sound module)
PROF (Profiler module)
XML (Extension Markup Lanaguage)
STUN (Simple Traversal of User Datagram log module stun
Protocol (UDP) through Network Address
Translation (NAT)
Setting Values for the Module/Debug Levels
There are 6 debug levels for the modules. Each debug level has a value you can
use to turn individual levels ON and OFF. The following table identifies these
debug levels and their values. The value of “1” (fatal errors) is the default setting
for all modules.
Debug Level
Value
Fatal Errors
Errors
1 (default)
2
Warnings
Init
4
8
Functions
Info
16
32
0
All debug levels
OFF
All Debug Levels
ON
65535
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
9-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting
Example 1
To turn two or more debug levels on at the same time, you add the value
associated with each level. For example,
Fatal Errors + Errors + Warnings = 1 + 2 + 4 = 7
log module linemgr: 7
log module user interface: 7
log module sip: 7
In the above example, fatal errors, general errors, and warnings are logged for the
line manager, user interface, and SIP call control modules.
Example 2
Functions and Info = 16 + 32 = 48
log module dis: 48
log module net: 48
log module snd: 48
In the above example, functions and general information are logged for the
display drivers, network, and sound modules.
Example 3
log module rtpt: 0
log module ind: 65535
In the above example, all debug levels are OFF for the Real Time Transport
module. All debug levels are ON for the indicator module.
Web UI.
For more information about the debug level configuration parameters, see
Appendix A, the section, “Troubleshooting Parameters” on page A-233.
For information about configuring the log settings using the Aastra Web UI, see
“Performing Troubleshooting Tasks” on page 9-8.
9-6
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Support Information
You can save the local and/or server configuration files of the IP phone to the
location specified in the "Log Settings" section.
Performing this task allows Aastra Technical Support to view the current
configuration of the IP phone and troubleshoot as necessary.
In the “Support Information” section, you can:
•
•
•
Get local.cfg
Get server.cfg
Show Task and Stack Status
Aastra Technical Support uses this support information for troubleshooting the IP
phone when required.
Using the Aastra Web UI and selecting “Show Task and Stack Status” displays
the tasks and stack status on the IP phone. This screen also displays the Free
Memory and the Max Block Free Memory currently on the phone as shown in
the following illustration. This information is for troubleshooting purposes only.
.
Free Memory
Max Memory Block Size
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
9-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting
Performing Troubleshooting Tasks
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Log Settings” on
page A-233.
9-8
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
Click on Advanced Settings->Troubleshooting.
1
To set log settings:
2
3
In the "Log IP" field, enter the IP address of where you want log files to be stored.
In the "Log Port" field, enter the port number associated with the IP address specified in the "Log IP"
field. This port passes the information from the IP phone to the IP address location.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
9-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
4
Click
to save your settings.
5
6
Click on Operation->Reset.
In the "Restart Phone" field click
to restart the IP phone.
To set blog modules:
7
8
Select a module for which you want to have log files created, and sent to a blog.
Enter a debug level value in the “Debug Level” field for a module. Valid values are:
Debug Level
Value
Fatal Errors
Errors
1 (default)
2
Warnings
Init
4
8
Functions
Info
16
32
0
All debug
levels OFF
All Debug
Levels ON
65535
The value of “0” turns all debug levels OFF for a module. The value of “65535” turns all debug levels
ON for a module.
To turn two or more debug levels on at the same time, you add the value associated with each level.
For example, Fatal Errors + Errors + Warnings = 1 + 2 + 4 = 7
log module linemgr: 7
log module user interface: 7
log module sip: 7
In the above example, fatal errors, general errors, and warnings are logged for the line manager, user
interface, and SIP call control modules.
9
Click
to save your settings.
9-10
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
10
11
Click on Operation->Reset.
In the "Restart Phone" field click
to restart the IP phone.
To perform support tasks:
12
13
14
To store the local configuration file to the specified location, click on
local.cfg" field.
in the "Get
To store the server configuration file to the specified location, click on
"Get server.cfg" field.
in the
To display task and stack status information, as well as Free Memory and Maximum Block Free
Memory on the phone, click on in the "Show Task and Stack Status" field.
Note: The local and server configuration file information and the task and stack status information is
Reference
For information that describes solutions to most common problems using the IP
phones, see the next section, “Troubleshooting Solutions” on page 9-15.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
9-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting
WatchDog Task Feature
The IP Phones include a troubleshooting feature called the “WatchDog” task that
monitors the status of the phones and provides the ability to get stack traces from
the last time the phone failed. When the phone detects a failure (i.e., a crash), it
automatically reboots. You can view a WatchDog crash file using the Aastra Web
UI at the path, Advanced Settings->Troubleshooting. You can enable/disable the
WatchDog task using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Enabling/Disabling WatchDog
Use the following procedure to enable/disable the WatchDog.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “WatchDog
Settings” on page A-236.
9-12
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Use the following procedure to enable/disable the WatchDog task for the IP
Phones using the Aastra Web UI. You can also view the “Crash Log” generated by
the WatchDog task using the Aastra Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Troubleshooting.
View Crash Log
Enable/Disable WatchDog
Enable/Disable WatchDog Task
2
The “WatchDog” field is enabled by default. To disable the WatchDog task, click in the “Enabled”
box to clear the check mark.
3
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
9-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting
Aastra Web UI
View the Crash Log
4
To view a crash log, in the “Get a Crash Log” field, click the SAVE AS button. You can open the
file immediately, or you can save the Crash Log to your PC.
9-14
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Solutions
Troubleshooting Solutions
Description
This section describes solutions to some most common problems that can occur
while using the IP phones.
Why does my phone display “Application missing”?
If you have experienced networking issues while the phone was downloading the
application from the TFTP server, it is possible that the phone can no longer
retrieve the required firmware file. In the event that the phone is no longer able to
communicate with the TFTP server in its attempt to re-download the firmware and
the phone cannot locate the application locally, the message "Application
missing" displays.
The phone also displays the following: “Recovery web-client at: <IP Address>”.
The IP Address displayed is the IP address of the phone. If the phone is unable to
receive an IP from the DHCP server or has lost its record of its static IP, the phone
auto-assigns itself the default IP 192.168.0.50.
To recover the firmware for your phone in this circumstance, please perform the
following:
1. Launch your web browser on your computer.
Note: Your computer needs to be on the same network as your IP Phone.
2. In the URL, type: “http://<IP Address>” (where IP Address is the IP Address
displayed on the phone). Your browser launches the Aastra IP Phone
Firmware Recovery page.
3. Call Customer Support and request a <phone model>.st file.
4. Copy the file to your TFTP server.
5. Enter the <phone model>.st file that is ready for download.
6. Enter the IP address or qualified domain name of the TFTP server.
7. Press the Download Firmware button.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
9-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting Solutions
Please ensure that the TFTP server is running and accessible on the network. If the
firmware file is correctly located on the running TFTP server, the phone will
locate the file and reload the application onto the phone.
Why does my phone display the “No Service” message?
The phone displays the “No Service” message if the SIP settings have not been set
up correctly.
The Registrar server could be set to 0.0.0.0. A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables
registration. However, the phone is still active and you can dial using
username@ip address of the phone. The phone displays "No Service".
If the Registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e, line 1, line 2,
etc.), then the register request is not sent, the "No Service" message does not
display, and the message waiting indicator (MWI) does not come on.
Check that the "Registrar Server" IP address in the Aastra Web UI at Advanced
Settings->Global SIP is correct. Check the "sip registrar ip" parameter in the
configuration files is correct.
Why does my phone display "Bad Encrypted Config"?
The IP phone displays "Bad Encrypted Config" because encrypted configuration
files are enabled but the decryption process has failed. Specific cases where
decryption fails are:
Reason:
The site-specific password in security.tuz does not match the password used to
encrypt the <mac>.tuz or aastra.tuz files.
Fix:
Encrypt the .cfg files to .tuz using the correct password, or replace the security.tuz
with the correct encrypted file.
9-16
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Solutions
Reason:
Neither of the <mac>.tuz and aastra.tuz files are present on the configuration
server (TFTP/FTP/HTTP).
Fix:
Create the encrypted files using anacrypt.exe and copy them to the configuration
server.
Reason:
The encrypted <mac>.tuz or aastra.tuz file is encrypted using a different version
of anacrypt.exe than the phone firmware.
Fix:
Run "anacrypt.exe -v" and confirm that the correct version is reported, compared
to the phone firmware version.
Why is my phone not receiving the TFTP IP address from the DHCP
Server?
For DHCP to automatically populate the IP address or qualified domain name for
the TFTP server, your DHCP server must support Option 66. Option 66 is
responsible for forwarding the TFTP server IP address or domain name to the
manually enter the IP address or qualified domain name for the TFTP server into
your IP phone configuration.
For procedures on configuring the TFTP server using the IP phone UI and the
Aastra Web UI, see Chapter 4, the section, “Configuring the Configuration Server
Protocol” on page 4-104.
For specific protocol parameters you can set in the configuration files, see
Appendix A, the section, “Configuration Server Settings” on page A-17.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
9-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting Solutions
How do I restart the IP phone?
IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
2
3
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select Restart Phone.
For 9143i, 51i, 53i:
Press # to confirm.
Note: To cancel the Restart, press the 3 key.
For 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, 57i CT:
Press Restart.
Note: To cancel the Restart, press Cancel.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Operation->Reset->Phone.
2
Click
to restart the phone.
9-18
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Solutions
How do I set the IP phone to factory default?
IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
2
3
4
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select Administrator Menu and enter your Administrator Password (default is 22222).
Select Factory Default.
For 9143i, 51i, 53i:
The “Restore Defaults?” prompt displays.
Press # to confirm.
For 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i/57i/57i CT:
The “Reset phone to factory defaults?” prompt displays.
Press Default to confirm.
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
1 Click on Operation->Reset->Current Settings.
2
In the "Restore to Factory Defaults" field, click
.
This restores all factory defaults, and removes any saved configuration and directory list files.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
9-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting Solutions
How do I erase the phone’s local configuration?
IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
2
3
4
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select Administrator Menu and enter your Administrator Password (default is 22222).
Select Erase Local Config.
For 9143i, 51i, 53i:
The “Erase local config?” prompt displays.
Press # to confirm.
For 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, 57i CT:
The “Erase local config?” prompt displays.
Press Erase to confirm.
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
1
Click on Operation->Reset->Current Settings.
2
In the "Remove Local Configuration Settings" field, click
.
This removes the last customized configuration settings made on the phone.
9-20
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Solutions
How to reset a user’s password?
IP Phone UI
1
2
3
4
5
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select User Password.
Enter the current user password.
Press Enter.
Enter the new user password.
Note: The IP phones support numeric characters only in passwords. If you enter a password with
alpha characters, the phone uses the default password instead.
6
7
8
Press Enter.
Re-enter the new user password.
Press Enter.
A message, "Password Changed" displays on the screen.
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
1
Click on Operation->User Password.
2
3
In the "Current Password" field, enter the current user password.
In the "New Password" field, enter the new user password.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
9-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting Solutions
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
4
5
In the "Confirm Password" field, enter the new user password again.
Click to save your changes.
9-22
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Solutions
How do I lock and unlock the phone?
IP Phone UI
Step Action
Lock the phone:
1
2
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select Phone Lock.
The prompt, “Lock the phone?” displays.
Press Lock to lock the phone.
3
Unlock the phone:
1
2
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
The prompt, “To unlock the phone...Password:”
Enter the user or administrator password and press Enter.
The phone unlocks.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
9-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting Solutions
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Operation->Phone Lock.
Lock the phone:
In the “Lock the Phone?” field, click
2
.
The phone locks dynamically and displays the following message:
“Phone is locked”.
Unlock the phone:
3
4
Click on Operation->Phone Lock.
In the “Unlock the Phone?” field, click
.
The phone unlocks dynamically and displays the following message:
“Phone is unlocked”.
9-24
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Releaes 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About this appendix
Appendix A
Configuration Parameters
About this appendix
Introduction
This appendix describes the parameters you can set in the configuration files for
the IP phones. The configuration files include <mac.cfg> and config.cfg.
Topic
Page
Setting Parameters in Configuration Files
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Simplified IP Phone UI Options Menu
Network Settings
page A-5
page A-6
page A-6
page A-7
page A-12
page A-14
page A-15
page A-16
page A-17
page A-27
DHCP Option Settings
Password Settings
Emergency Dial Plan Settings
Aastra Web UI Settings
Configuration Server Settings
Network Address Translation (NAT) Settings
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
About this appendix
Topic
Page
Rport Setting
page A-29
page A-30
page A-30
page A-31
page A-33
page A-35
page A-36
page A-42
page A-43
page A-45
page A-51
page A-60
page A-61
page A-62
page A-64
page A-73
page A-84
page A-86
page A-87
page A-96
page A-99
page A-100
page A-104
page A-109
page A-114
page A-117
page A-118
page A-119
page A-120
page A-121
page A-122
Local SIP UDP/TCP Port Setting
Local SIP TLS Port
HTTPS Client and Server Settings
HTTPS Server Certificate Validation Settings
UPnP Settings
Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) Settings
Type of Service (ToS)/DSCP Settings
Time Server Settings
Time and Date Settings
Custom Time Zone and DST Settings
Backlight Mode Settings (9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, 57i CT)
Live Dialpad Settings
SIP Local Dial Plan Settings
SIP Basic, Global Settings
SIP Basic, Per-Line Settings
Centralized Conferencing Settings
HTTP/HTTPS Authentication Support for Broadsoft CMS
Advanced SIP Settings
Missed Call Summary Subscription Settings
As-Feature-Event Subscription Settings
Transport Layer Security (TLS) Settings
802.1x Support Settings
RTP, Codec, DTMF Global Settings
Autodial Settings
Voicemail Settings
Directory Settings
Callers List Settings
Customize Callers List and Services Key
Call Forward Settings
Call Forward Key Mode Settings
A-2
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About this appendix
Page
Topic
LLDP-MED and ELIN Settings
page A-124
page A-126
page A-127
page A-130
page A-134
page A-135
page A-137
page A-138
page A-140
page A-141
page A-142
page A-143
page A-144
page A-145
page A-146
page A-147
page A-152
page A-154
page A-156
page A-165
page A-166
page A-167
page A-171
page A-172
page A-176
page A-178
page A-179
page A-181
page A-184
page A-185
page A-194
Missed Calls Indicator Settings
XML Settings
Action URI Settings
XML SIP Notify Settings
Ring Tone and Tone Set Global Settings
Ring Tone Per-Line Settings
Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing Setting
Switch Focus to Ringing Line
Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout
Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call
Stuttered Dial Tone Setting
Call Waiting Settings
Message Waiting Indicator Settings
DND Key Mode Settings
Priority Alert Settings
Bellcore Cadence Settings
Language Settings
Language Pack Settings
Suppress DTMF Playback Setting
Display DTMF Digits Setting
Intercom, Auto-Answer, and Barge In Settings
Group Paging RTP Settings
Audio Transmit and Receive Gain Adjustment Settings
Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception) Settings
ACD Auto-Available Timer Settings
Park and Pickup Global Settings (9480i, 9480i CT, 57i/57i CT only)
Mapping Key Settings
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters
Softkey Settings for 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, 57i CT
Programmable Key Settings for 9143i, 53i, and 55i
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
About this appendix
Topic
Page
page A-199
page A-206
57i CT)
Locking Softkeys and Programmable Keys
page A-214
page A-217
page A-218
page A-219
page A-219
page A-221
page A-221
page A-221
page A-222
page A-223
page A-224
page A-224
page A-225
page A-226
page A-228
page A-228
page A-229
page A-229
page A-230
page A-231
page A-232
page A-232
page A-233
page A-233
page A-236
Locking the SAVE and DLETE Keys (53i)
BLF List URI Settings
Customizing 560M Expansion Module Column Display
Expansion Module 1 through 3
Advanced Operational Parameters
Blind Transfer Setting
Update Caller ID Setting.
Boot Sequence Recovery Mode Settings.
Single Call Restriction Setting
Blacklist Duration Setting
Whitelist Proxy Setting
Polling Action URI Settings
XML Key Redirection Settings (for Redial, Xfer, Conf, Icom, Voicemail)
Options Key Redirection Setting (Services key on 51i)
Off-Hook and XML Application Interaction Setting
XML Override for a Locked Phone Setting
Symmetric UDP Signaling Setting
User-Agent Setting
DNS Query Setting
Ignore Out of Order SIP Requests
Configuration Encryption Setting
Troubleshooting Parameters
Log Settings
WatchDog Settings
A-4
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Parameters in Configuration Files
Setting Parameters in Configuration Files
You can set specific configuration parameters in the configuration files for
configuring you IP phone. The aastra.cfg and <mac>.cfg files are stored on the
server. The aastra.cfg file stores global IP phone configuration settings. The
<mac>.cfg file stores configuration settings specific to the IP phone with that
MAC address. When you restart the IP phone, these files are downloaded to the
phone.
If you make changes to the phone configuration, the changes are stored in a local
configuration on the phone (not on the server).
Configuration changes made to the <mac>.cfg file override the configuration
settings in the aastra.cfg file.
Note: Configuration parameters that you enter in the configuration files
Reference
•
•
•
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters
on page A-184
•
•
Advanced Operational Parameters on page A-221
Troubleshooting Parameters on page A-233
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
The following sections provide the configuration parameters you can configure on
the IP phone. Each parameter table includes the name of the parameter, a
description, the format, default value, range, and example. The table also provides
the method for which the parameters can be configured (IP phone UI, Aastra Web
UI, or configuration files).
Simplified IP Phone UI Options Menu
Parameter –
options simple menu
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Allows you to enable a simplified options menu or enable the full menu on
the IP Phone UI.
Full Options Menu
Simplified Options Menu
Call Forward
Call Forward
Preferences
Preferences
Only the following display:
Services (9143i, 51i, and 53i)
Tones
Contrast Level
Live Dialpad
Set Audio (9480i, 9480i CT, 55i,
57i, 57i CT only)
Handset Pairing (9480i CT and
57i CT)
Phone Status
Phone Status
Removed
User Password
Administrator Menu
Restart Phone
Phone Lock
Removed
Removed
Phone Lock
Warning: When using the simplified menu, you cannot change the
Network settings from the IP Phone UI. If the network settings become
misconfigured, you must “factory default” the phone and use the full menu
to recover the network settings from the Phone UI OR use the Aastra
Web UI to configure the network settings.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (full options menu)
0 (full options menu)
1 (simplified options menu)
Example
options simple menu: 1
A-6
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Network Settings
Parameter –
dhcp
IP phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Network->
Basic Network Settings
DHCP
(in Web UI)
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Enables or disables DHCP. Enabling DHCP populates the required
network information. The DHCP server serves the network information
that the IP phone requires. If the IP phone is unable to get any required
information, then you must enter it manually. DHCP populates the
following network information:
IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway,, Domain Name Servers (DNS),
TFTP, HTTP, HTTP Port, HTTPS, HTTPS Port, and FTP servers, and
Timer Servers.
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate the IP address or qualified
domain name for the TFTP server, your DHCP server must support
Option 66.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
1 (enabled)
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
Example
dhcp: 1
Parameter –
ip
IP phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Network->
Basic Network Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Ip Address
(in Web UI)
Description
This parameter assigns a static IP address to the IP phone device.
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP
server must support Option 66.
Format
IP address
Default Value
Range
0.0.0.0
Not Applicable
ip: 192.168.0.25
Example
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
subnet mask
IP phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Network->
Basic Network Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Subnet Mask
(in Web UI)
Description
Subnet mask defines the IP address range local to the IP phone.
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP
server must support Option 66.
Format
IP address
Default Value
Range
255.255.255.0
Not Applicable
Example
subnet mask: 255.255.255.224
Parameter –
default gateway
IP phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Network->
Basic Network Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Gateway
(in Web UI)
Description
The IP address of the network’s gateway or default router IP address.
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP
server must support Option 66.
Format
IP address
Default Value
Range
1.0.0.1
Not Applicable
default gateway: 192.168.0.1
Example
A-8
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
dns1
IP phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Network->
Basic Network Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Primary DNS
(in Web UI)
Description
Primary domain name server IP address. For any of the IP address
settings on the IP phone a domain name value can be entered instead of
an IP address. With the help of the domain name servers the domain
names for such parameters can then be resolved to their corresponding
IP addresses.
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP
server must support Option 66.
Format
IP address
Default Value
Range
0.0.0.0
Not Applicable
dns1: 192.168.0.5
Example
Parameter –
dns2
IP phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Network->
Basic Network Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Secondary DNS
(in Web UI)
Description
A service that translates domain names into IP addresses. To assign
static DNS addresses, disable DHCP.
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP
server must support Option 66.
Format
IP address
Default Value
Range
0.0.0.0
Not Applicable
dns2: 192.168.0.6
Example
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
ethernet port 0
IP phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Network->
Basic Network Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
LAN Port
(in Web UI)
Description
The send (TX) and receive (RX) method to use on Ethernet port 0 to
transmit and receive data over the LAN.
Format
Integer
0
Default Value
Range
0 - auto-negotiate
1 - full-duplex, 10Mbps
2 - full-duplex, 100Mbps
3 - half-duplex, 10Mbps
4 - half-duplex, 100Mbps
Example
lan port: 1
Parameter –
ethernet port 1
IP phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Network->
Basic Network Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
PC Port
(in Web UI)
Description
The send (TX) and receive (RX) method to use on Ethernet port 1 to
transmit and receive data over the LAN.
Format
Integer
0
Default Value
Range
0 - auto-negotiate
1 - full-duplex, 10Mbps
2 - full-duplex, 100Mbps
3 - half-duplex, 10Mbps
4 - half-duplex, 100Mbps
Example
ethernet port 1: 2
A-10
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
pc port passthru enabled
IP phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->Ethernet Link
Advanced Settings->Network->
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Enables or disables the PC port on the phone to be used for 802.1x
authentication support.
Note: For more information about configuring 802.1x support on the IP
phones, see “802.1x Support Settings” on page A-104.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
1 (enable)
0 (disable)
1 (enable)
Example
pc port passthru enabled: 1
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
DHCP Option Settings
Option 12
Parameter–
hostname
Configuration Files
IP Phone UI
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->Hostname
Advanced Settings->Network->
Basic Network Settings
Hostname
(in Web UI)
Aastra Web UI
Description
Specifies the hostname DHCP Option 12 that the phone sends with the
DHCP Request packet.
Note: If you change this parameter, you must restart your phone for the
change to take affect.
Format
String
Default Value
Range
[<model><MAC IP Address>]
Up to 64 alpha-numeric characters
Note: The value for this parameter can also be a fully qualified domain
name.
Example
hostname: aastra4
Option 77
Parameter–
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
dhcp userclass
IP Phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->DHCP Settings->
DHCP User Class
DHCP User Class
(in Web UI)
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Network->
Advanced Network Settings
Description
Specifies the User Class DHCP Option 77 that the phone sends to the
configuration server with the DHCP Request packet.
Note: If you specify a value for this parameter, you must restart your phone
for the change to take affect. Any change in its value during start-up results
in an automatic reboot.
Format
String
Default Value
Range
““
Up to 64 alpha-numeric characters
dhcp userclass: admin
Example
A-12
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Options 159 and 160 - DHCP Option Override
Parameter–
dhcp config option
override
Configuration Files
IP Phone UI
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->DHCP Settings->
Option Override
DHCP Option Override
(in Web UI)
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Network->
Advanced Network Settings
Description
The value specified for this parameter overrides the precedence order for
determining a configuration server.
Note: You must restart the IP Phone for this parameter to take affect.
Integer
Format
Default Value
Range
0 (None - no override - uses normal precedence order of 43, 160, 159, 66)
0
43
66
159
160
Example
dhcp config option override: 66
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Password Settings
Parameter –
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
admin password
Description
Allows you to set a new administrator password for the IP phone.
Note: The IP phones support numeric characters only in passwords. If you
enter a password with alpha characters, the phone uses the default
password instead.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
22222
0 to 4294967295
admin password: 1234567890
Example
Parameter –
user password
IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Options->User Password
Operation->User Password
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Current Password
(in Web UI)
Description
Allows you to set a new user password for the IP phone.
Note: The IP phones support numeric characters only in passwords. If you
enter a password with alpha characters, the phone uses the default
password instead.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
Default value is an empty string ““ (left blank)
0 to 4294967295
Example
user password: 123
A-14
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Emergency Dial Plan Settings
Parameter –
emergency dial plan
Configuration Files
Aastra Web UI
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Operation->Phone Lock
Description
Allows you to specify an emergency number to use on your IP phone so a
caller can contact emergency services in the local area when required.
The default emergency numbers on the IP phones is 911, 999, 112, and
110.
911 - A United States emergency number.
999 - A United Kingdom emergency number.
112 - An international emergency telephone number for GSM mobile
phone networks. In all European Union countries it is also the
emergency telephone number for both mobile and fixed-line
telephones.
110 - A police and/or fire emergency number in Asia, Europe, Middle
East, and South America.
Note: Contact your local phone service provider for available emergency
numbers in your area.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
911|999|112|110
Up to 128 characters
emergency dial plan: 911|999
Example
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
options password enabled
Description
Enables or disables password protection of the Options key on the IP
phone. If enabled, upon pressing the Options key, a user has to enter a
password at the IP phone UI. If the password is entered correctly, the user
is allowed to gain access to the Options Menu and no more password
prompts display for other password protected screens. If the user fails to
enter the correct password in three attempts, access to the Options Menu
is denied and the IP phone returns to the idle screen.
Note: The password to enter is the administrator password configured for
that phone.
Format
Boolean
0
Default Value
Range
0 (false; not password protected)
1 (true; password protected)
Example
options password enabled: 1
Aastra Web UI Settings
Parameter –
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
web interface enabled
Description
Enables or disables the Aastra Web UI for a single IP phone when this
parameter is entered in the <mac>.cfg file.
Enables or disables the Aastra Web UI for all phones when this parameter
is placed in the aastra.cfg file.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Example
web interface enabled: 1
A-16
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Configuration Server Settings
Parameter –
download protocol
IP phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Download Protocol
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
Protocol to use for downloading new versions of software to the IP phone.
Text
Default Value
Range
TFTP
TFTP
FTP
HTTP
HTTPS
Example
download protocol: HTTPS
Parameter –
IP phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
tftp server
Network Settings->TFTP Server->Primary TFTP
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
TFTP Server
(in Web UI)
Description
The TFTP server’s IP address or qualified domain name. If DHCP is
enabled and the DHCP server provides the information, this field is
automatically populated. Use this parameter to change the IP address or
domain name of the TFTP server. This will become effective after this
configuration file has been downloaded into the phone.
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP
server must support Option 66.
Format
IP address or qualified domain name
0.0.0.0
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
tftp server: 192.168.0.130
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
tftp path
Aastra Web UI
IP Phone UI
Advanced Settings->
Configuration Server->Settings
Options->Administrator Menu->
Configuration Server->TFTP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Specifies the path name for which the configuration files reside on the
TFTP server for downloading to the IP Phone.
Note: Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For
example, ipphone\57i\configfiles.
Format
String
Default Value
Range
N/A
Up to 64 alphanumeric characters
tftp path: configs\tftp
Example
Parameter –
alternate tftp server
IP phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->TFTP Server->
Alternate TFTP
Alternate TFTP
(in Web UI)
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
The alternate TFTP server’s IP address or qualified domain name. This
will become effective after this configuration file has been downloaded into
the phone.
Format
IP address or qualified domain name
0.0.0.0
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
alternate tftp server: 192.168.0.132
A-18
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
alternate tftp path
Aastra Web UI
IP Phone UI
Advanced Settings->
Configuration Server->Settings
Options->Administrator Menu->
Configuration Server->TFTP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Specifies a path name for which the configuration files reside on an
alternate TFTP server for downloading to the IP Phone.
Note: Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For
example, ipphone\57i\configfiles.
Format
String
Default Value
Range
N/A
Up to 64 alphanumeric characters
alternate tftp path: configs\alternate
Example
Parameter –
IP phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
use alternate tftp
Network Settings->TFTP Server->Select TFTP
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Use Alternate TFTP
(in Web UI)
Description
Enables or disables the alternate TFTP server. Valid values are "0"
disabled and "1" enabled.
Format
Not Applicable
Default Value
Range
0
0 or 1
Example
use alternate tftp: 1
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
ftp server
IP phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->FTP Server
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
FTP Server
(in Web UI)
Description
The FTP server’s IP address or network host name. This will become
effective after this configuration file has been downloaded into the phone.
Optional: You can also assign a username and password for access to the
FTP server. See the following parameters for setting username and
password.
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP
server must support Option 66.
Format
IP address or fully qualified Domain Name
0.0.0.0
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
ftp server: 192.168.0.131
Parameter –
ftp path
Aastra Web UI
IP Phone UI
Advanced Settings->
Configuration Server->Settings
Options->Administrator Menu->
Configuration Server->FTP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Specifies a path name for which the configuration files reside on an FTP
server for downloading to the IP Phone.
Note: Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For
example, ipphone\57i\configfiles.
Format
String
Default Value
Range
N/A
Up to 64 alphanumeric characters
ftp path: configs\ftp
Example
A-20
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
ftp username
IP phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->FTP Server
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
FTP User Name
(in Web UI)
Description
The username to enter for accessing the FTP server. This will become
effective after this configuration file has been downloaded into the phone.
Note: The IP Phones support usernames containing dots (“.”).
Format
Text
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Up to 63 alphanumeric characters
ftp username: 57iaastra
Example
Parameter –
ftp password
IP phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->FTP Server
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
FTP Password
(in Web UI)
Description
The password to enter for accessing the FTP server. This will become
effective after this configuration file has been downloaded into the phone.
Format
Text
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Up to 63 alphanumeric characters
ftp password: 1234
Example
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
http server
IP phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->HTTP Server
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
HTTP Server
(in Web UI)
Description
The HTTP server’s IP address. This will become effective after this
configuration file has been downloaded into the phone.
Optional: You can also assign an HTTP relative path to the HTTP server.
See the next parameter (http path).
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP
server must support Option 66.
Format
IP address or fully qualified Domain Name
0.0.0.0
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
http server: 192.168.0.132
Parameter –
http path
IP phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->HTTP Server
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
HTTP Path
(in Web UI)
Description
The HTTP path name to enter.
If the IP phone’s configuration and firmware files are located in a
sub-directory beneath the server’s HTTP root directory, the relative path
to that sub-directory should be entered in this field.
Format
dir/dir/dir
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Up to 63 alphanumeric characters
http path: ipphones/57i
Example
A-22
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
http port
IP Phone UI:
Options->Administrator Menu->
Configuration Server->HTTP Settings
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server->
Settings
Aastra Web UI:
HTTP Port
(in Web UI)
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Specifies the HTTP port that the server uses to load the configuration to
the phone over HTTP.
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP
server must support Option 66.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
80
1 through 65535
http port: 1025
Example
Parameter –
https server
IP phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->HTTPS->
HTTPS Client->Download Server
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
HTTPS Server
(in Web UI)
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Description
The HTTPS server’s IP address. This will become effective after this
configuration file has been downloaded into the phone.
Optional: You can also assign an HTTPS relative path to the HTTPS
server. See the next parameter (https path).
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP
server must support Option 66.
Format
IP address or fully qualified Domain Name
0.0.0.0
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
https server: 192.168.0.143
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
https path
IP phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->HTTPS->
HTTPS Client->Download Path
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
HTTPS Path
(in Web UI)
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Description
The HTTPS path name to enter.
If the IP phone’s configuration and firmware files are located in a
sub-directory beneath the server’s HTTPS root directory, the relative path
to that sub-directory should be entered in this field.
Format
dir/dir/dir
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Up to 63 alphanumeric characters
https path: ipphones/55i
Example
Parameter –
https port
IP Phone UI:
Options->Administrator Menu->
Configuration Server->HTTPS Settings
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server->
Settings
Aastra Web UI:
HTTPS Port
(in Web UI)
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Specifies the HTTPS port that the server uses to load the configuration
to the phone over HTTPS.
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP
server must support Option 66.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
443
1 through 65535
https port: 1025
Example
A-24
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
auto resync mode
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server->
Auto-Resync
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Mode
(in Web UI)
Description
Enables and disables the phone to be updated automatically once a day
at a specific time in a 24-hour period. This parameter works with TFTP,
FTP, and HTTP servers.
Valid values are:
None (0) - Disable auto-resync
Configuration Files (1) - Updates the configuration files on the IP phone
automatically at the specified time if the files on the server have changed.
Firmware (2) - Updates the firmware on the IP phone automatically at the
specified time if the files on the server have changed.
Both (3) - Updates the configuration files and firmware automatically at
the specified time if the files on the server have changed.
Notes:
1. If a user is accessing the Aastra Web UI, they are not informed of an
auto-reboot.
2. Any changes made using the Aastra Web UI or the IP phone UI are not
overwritten by an auto-resync update. Auto-resync affects the
configuration files only. However, the settings in the Aastra Web UI
take precedence over the IP phone UI and the configuration files.
3. The resync time is based on the local time of the IP phone.
4. If the IP phone is in use (not idle) at the time of the resync check, the
reboot occurs when the phone becomes idle.
5. The automatic update feature works with both encrypted and plain text
configuration files.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Aastra Web UI
None
Configuration Files
0
Range
Aastra Web UI
None
Configuration Files
Firmware
Both
Configuration Files
0 (none)
1 (configuration files only)
2 (firmware only)
3 (configuration files and firmware)
Example
auto resync mode: 1
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
auto resync time
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server->
Auto-Resync
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Time (24-hour)
(in Web UI)
Description
Sets the time of day in a 24-hour period for the IP phone to be
automatically updated. This parameter works with TFTP, FTP, and HTTP
servers.
Notes:
1. The resync time is based on the local time of the IP phone.
2. The value of 00:00 is 12:00 A.M.
3. When selecting a value for this parameter in the Aastra Web UI, the
values are in 30-minute increments only.
4. When entering a value for this parameter using the configuration files,
the value can be entered using minute values from 00 to 59 (for
example, the auto resync time can be entered as 02:56).
5. Auto-Resync adds up to 15 minutes random time to the configured
time. For example, if the auto resync time parameter is set to 02:00,
the event takes place any time between 02:00 and 02:15.
6. When the language on the phone is set to French or Spanish, you must
enter the time in the format "00h00" (configuration files only).
Format
hh:mm
00h00 (for French and Spanish configuration files)
Default Value
Aastra Web UI
00:00
Configuration Files
00:00
Range
Aastra Web UI
00:00 to 23:30 (in 30 minute increments)
Configuration Files
hh = 00 to 23
mm = 00 to 59
Example
auto resync time: 03:24
A-26
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Network Address Translation (NAT) Settings
Parameter –
sip nat ip
IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Network
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
NAT IP
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
IP address of the network device that enforces NAT.
IP Address
Default Value
Range
0.0.0.0
Not Applicable
sip nat ip: 192.245.2.1
Example
Parameter –
IP phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings
sip nat port
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Network
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
NAT SIP Port
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
Port number of the network device that enforces NAT.
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Not Applicable
sip nat port: 51620
Example
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip nat rtp port
IP Phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
SIP Settings->RTP Port Base
Advanced Settings->Network->
Advanced Network Settings
Aastra Web UI
NAT RTP Port
(in Phone UI and Web UI)
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Indicates the port through which the RTP packets are sent. This value
must specify the beginning of the RTP port range on the gateway or
router.
The RTP port is used for sending DTMF tones and for the audio stream.
Your network administrator may close some ports for security reasons.
You may want to use this parameter to send RTP data using a different
port.
Note: The phones support decoding and playing out DTMF tones sent
in SIP INFO requests. The following DTMF tones are supported:
•
•
Support signals 0-9, #, *
Support durations up to 5 seconds
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
51720
Not Applicable
sip nat rtp port: 51730
Example
Parameter –
sip nortel nat support
IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Network
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Nortel NAT Traversal
Enabled
(in Web UI)
Description
Enables or disables the phone to operate while connected to a network
device that enforces NAT.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0 (disabled)
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
Example
sip nortel nat support: 1
A-28
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip nortel nat timer
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Network
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Nortel NAT Timer
(in Web UI)
Description
The interval, in seconds, that the phone sends SIP ping requests to the
Nortel proxy.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
30
0 to 2147483647
sip nortel nat timer: 60
Example
Rport Setting
Parameter –
sip rport
Aastra Web UI:
Advanced Settings->Network->
Advanced Network Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Allows you to enable (1) or disable (0) the use of Rport on the IP phone.
“Rport” in RFC 3581, allows a client to request that the server send the
response back to the source IP address and the port from which the
request came.
Format
Boolean
0
Default Value
Range
0 (disable)
1 (enable)
Example
sip rport: 1
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Local SIP UDP/TCP Port Setting
Parameter –
sip local port
Aastra Web UI:
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Specifies the local source port (UDP/TCP) from which the phone sends
SIP messages.
Format
Numeric
Default Value
Range
5060
Greater than 1024 and less than 65535
Notes:
1. It is recommended that you avoid the conflict RTP port range in case
of a UDP transport.
2. By default, the IP phones use symmetric UDP signaling for outgoing
UDP SIP messages. When symmetric UDP is enabled, the IP phone
generates and listens for UDP messages using port 5060.If symmetric
UDP signaling is disabled, the phone sends from random ports but it
listens on the configured SIP local port.
Example
sip local port: 5060
Local SIP TLS Port
Parameter –
sip local tls port
Aastra Web UI:
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Specifies the local source port (SIPS/TLS) from which the phone sends
SIP messages.
Format
Numeric
Default Value
Range
5061
Greater than 1024 and less than 65535
Note: It is recommended that you avoid the conflict with any TCP ports
being used. For example: WebUI HTTP server on 80/tcp and HTTPS
on 443/tcp.
Example
sip local tls port: 5061
A-30
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
HTTPS Client and Server Settings
Parameter –
https client method
IP Phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->HTTPS->HTTPS Client
Advanced Settings->Network->
Advanced Network Settings
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
HTTPS Client Method
(in Web UI)
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Defines the security method that the client advertises to the server during
the Secure Socket Layer (SSL) handshake. Available options are:
TLS 1.0 - Transport Layer Security version 1 (TLS 1.0) is a protocol that
ensures privacy between communicating applications and their users on
the Internet. TLS is the successor to SSL.
SSL 3.0 - Secure Socket Layer version 3 (SSL 3.0) is a commonly-used
protocol for managing the security of a message transmission on the
Internet.
Format
Alphanumeric characters
SSL 3.0
Default Value
Range
TLS 1.0
SSL 3.0 (default)
Example
https client method: TLS 1.0
Parameter –
https redirect http get
IP Phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->HTTPS->
HTTPS Server->Redirect
Advanced Settings->Network->
Advanced Network Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
HTTPS Server - Redirect
HTTP to HTTPS
(in Web UI)
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Description
Allows or disallows redirection from the HTTP server to the HTTPS
server.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
1 (enables redirection)
0 (disables redirection)
1 (enables redirection)
Example
https redirect http get: 0
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
https block http post xml
IP Phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->HTTPS->
HTTPS Server->XML
HTTPS Server - Block XML
HTTP POSTs
(in Web UI)
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Network->
Advanced Network Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
Description
Enables or disables the blocking of XML scripts from HTTP POSTs.
Some client applications use HTTP POSTs to transfer XML scripts. The
phones’s HTTP server accepts these POSTs even if server redirection is
enabled, effectively bypassing the secure connection. When this
parameter is enabled (blocking is enabled), receipt of an HTTP POST
containing an XML parameter header results in the following response:
“403 Forbidden”. This forces the client to direct the POSTs to the HTTPS
server through use of the “https://” URL.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (disables blocking of XML HTTP POSTs)
0 (disables blocking of XML HTTP POSTs)
1 (enables blocking of XML HTTP POSTs)
Example
https block http post xml: 1
A-32
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
HTTPS Server Certificate Validation Settings
Parameter–
https validate certificates
Configuration Files
IP Phone UI
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Options->Administrator Menu->
Configuration Server->HTTPS Settings->
Cert Validation
Validate Certificates
(in Web UI)
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Network->HTTPS Settings
Description
Enables or disables the HTTPS validation of certificates on the phone.
When this parameter is set to 1, the HTTPS client performs validation on
SSL certificates before accepting them.
Note: If you are using HTTPS as a configuration method, and use a self
signed certificate, you must set this parameter to “0” (disabled) before
upgrading to Release 2.3 of the IP Phones.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
1 (enabled)
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
Example
https validate certificates: 0
Parameter–
https validate expires
Configuration Files
IP Phone UI
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Options->Administrator Menu->
Configuration Server->HTTPS Settings->
Cert Validation->Check Expires
Check Certificate
Expiration
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Network->HTTPS Settings
(in Web UI)
Description
Enables or disables the HTTPS validation of the expiration of the certificates.
When this parameter is set to 1, the HTTPS client verifies whether or not a
certificate has expired prior to accepting the certificate.
Note: If the “https validate expires” parameter is set to enable, the clock on
the phone must be set for the phone to accept the certificates.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
1 (enabled)
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
Example
https validate expires: 0
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter–
https validate hostnames
Configuration Files
IP Phone UI
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Options->Administrator Menu->
Configuration Server->HTTPS Settings->
Cert Validation->Check Hostnames
Advanced Settings->Network->HTTPS Settings
Check Certificate
Hostnames
(in Web UI)
Aastra Web UI
Description
Format
Enables or disables the HTTPS validation of hostnames on the phone.
Boolean
Default Value
Range
1 (enabled)
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
Example
https validate hostnames: 0
Parameter–
https user certificates
Configuration Files
Aastra Web UI
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Advanced Settings->Network->HTTPS Settings
Trusted Certificates
Filename
(in Web UI)
Description
Specifies a file name for a .PEM file located on the configuration server. This
file contains the User-provided certificates in PEM format. These certificates
are used to validate peer certificates.
Note: You must disable the “https validate certificates” parameter in order
for the phone to accept the User-provided certificates.
Format
Alphanumeric string in the format <filename.pem>
Not applicable
Default Value
Range
Not applicable
Example
https user certificates: trustedCerts.pem
A-34
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
UPnP Settings
Parameter –
upnp manager
IP phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->UPnP
Advanced Settings->Network->
Advanced Network Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
UPnP
(in Web UI)
Description
Enables or disables Universal Plug and Play (UpnP) on the IP phone. If
you set this parameter to “0”, you can manually configure NAT on the IP
phone and the UPnP manager will not start.
Format
Boolean
0 (false)
Default Value
Range
0 (false)
1 (true)
Example
upnp manager: 1
Parameter –
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
upnp gateway
Description
IP address or fully qualified Domain Name of the Internet gateway or
router. This parameter stores the IP address of the gateway or router in
the event that only non-default UPnP gateways get discovered on the
network. The UPnP port mappings are saved to this IP address so even if
the phone reboots, it will still have the correct port mappings.
Format
IP address or fully qualified Domain Name
0.0.0.0
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
upnp gateway: 120.400.003.2
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
upnp mapping lines
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Preferences->General
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
UPnP Mapping Lines
(in Web UI)
Description
Enables or disables the use of Universal Plug and Play (UpnP) on a
specific line on the IP phone.
Note: For this feature to work, UPnP must be enabled on the phone
(upnp manager and upnp gateway must be set).
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0 (UPnP is not mapped to a specific line)
0 to 10
Example
upnp mapping lines: 5
This example indicates that line 5 allows UPnP mapping.
Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) Settings
Global Parameters
Parameter –
IP phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
tagging enabled
Network Settings->VLAN->VLAN Enable
Advanced Settings->Network->VLAN->Global
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
VLAN Enable
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
Enables or disables VLAN on the IP phones. This is a global setting.
Boolean
0 (false)
Default Value
Range
0 (false)
1 (true)
Example
tagging enabled: 1
A-36
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
priority non-ip
IP phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->VLAN->Phone->Priority
->Other
Priority, Non-IP Packet
(in Web UI)
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Network->VLAN->Global
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Format
Specifies the priority value for non-IP packets. This is a global setting.
Integer
Default Value
Range
5
0 to 7
Example
priority non-ip: 7
LAN Port (Ethernet Port 0) Parameters
Parameter –
IP phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
vlan id
Network Settings->VLAN->Phone->VLAN ID
Advanced Settings->Network->VLAN->Port 0
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
VLAN ID
(for LAN Port in
Web UI)
Description
VLAN is a feature on the IP phone that allows for multiple logical Ethernet
interfaces to send outgoing RTP packets over a single physical Ethernet
as described in IEEE Std 802.3. On the IP phone, you configure a VLAN
ID that associates with the physical Ethernet Port 0.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
1
1 to 4094
VLAN id: 300
Example
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
tos priority map
IP phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->VLAN->Phone->
Priority->SIP
SIP Priority
RTP Priority
RTCP Priority
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->VLAN->Phone->
Priority->RTP
(for LAN Port in
Web UI)
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->VLAN->Phone->
Priority->RTCP
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Network->VLAN->Port 0
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
This parameter is based on the Type of Service (ToS), Differentiated
Services Code Point (DSCP) setting for SIP (tos sip parameter), RTP (tos
rtp parameter) and RTCP (tos rtcp parameter). It is the mapping between
the DSCP value and the VLAN priority value for SIP, RTP, and RTCP
packets.
You enter the tos priority map value as follows:
(DSCP_1,Priority_1)(DSCP_2,Priority_2).....(DSCP_64,Priority_64)
where the DSCP value range is 0-63 and the priority range is 0-7.
Mappings not enclosed in parentheses and separated with a comma, or
with values outside the ranges, are ignored.
Format
Integer
Default Value
3 (based on the default ToS DSCP SIP setting of 26)
5 (based on the default ToS DSCP RTP setting of 46)
5 (based on the default ToS DSCP RTCP setting of 46)
Range
0 to 63 (for DSCP)
0 to 7 (for SIP, RTP, and RTCP priorities)
Example
tos priority map: (26,7)
A-38
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
The following table identifies the default DSCP-to-priority mapping structure.
DSCP
Range
DSCP Priority
0-7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8-15
16-23
24-31
32-39
40-47
48-55
56-63
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
PC Port (Ethernet Port 1) Parameters
Parameter –
vlan id port 1
IP phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->VLAN->
Passthrough->VLAN ID
VLAN ID
(for PC Port in
Web UI)
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Network->VLAN->Port 1
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Specifies the VLAN ID used to pass packets through to a PC via Port 1.
Note: If you set the VLAN id port 1 (passthrough port) to 4095, all
untagged packets are sent to this port. The following is an example of
configuring the phone on a VLAN where all untagged packets are sent to
the passthrough port.
Example
You enable tagging on the phone port as normal but set the
passthrough port (VLAN id port 1) to 4095. The following example
sets the phone to be on VLAN 3 but the passthrough port is
configured as untagged.
tagging enabled: 1
VLAN id: 3
VLAN id port 1: 4095
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
1
1 to 4095
Example
VLAN id port 1: 3
A-40
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
QoS eth port 1 priority
IP phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->VLAN->Passthrough
->Priority
Priority
(for PC Port in
Web UI)
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Network->VLAN->Port 1
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Specifies the priority value used for passing VLAN packets through to a
PC via Port 1.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
0 to 7
Example
QoS eth port 1 priority: 3
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Type of Service (ToS)/DSCP Settings
Parameter –
tos sip
IP phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->Type of Service->SIP
Advanced Settings->Network->
Type of Service,DSCP
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
SIP
(in Web UI)
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Format
The Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) for SIP packets.
Integer
26
Default Value
Range
0 to 63
tos sip: 3
Example
Parameter –
tos rtp
IP phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->Type of Service->RTP
Advanced Settings->Network->
Type of Service,DSCP
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
RTP
(in Web UI)
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Format
The Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) for RTP packets.
Integer
46
Default Value
Range
0 to 63
tos rtp: 2
Example
Parameter –
tos rtcp
IP phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->Type of Service->RTCP
Advanced Settings->Network->
Type of Service,DSCP
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
RTCP
(in Web UI)
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Format
The Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) for RTCP packets.
Integer
46
Default Value
Range
0 to 63
tos rtcp: 3
Example
A-42
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Time Server Settings
Parameter –
time server disabled
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Network->
Advanced Network Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
NTP Time Servers
(in Web UI)
Description
Enables or disables the time server. This parameter affects the time
server1, time server2, and time server3 parameters. Setting this
parameter to 0 allows the use of the configured Time Server(s). Setting
this parameter to 1 prevents the use of the configured Time Server(s).
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP
server must support Option 66.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0 (disabled)
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
Example
time server disabled: 0
Parameter –
time server1
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Network->
Advanced Network Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
Time Server 1
(in Web UI)
Description
The primary time server's IP address or qualified domain name. If the
time server is enabled, the value for time server1 will be used to request
the time from.
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP
server must support Option 66.
Format
IP address or qualified domain name
0.0.0.0
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
time server1: 192.168.0.5
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
time server2
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Network->
Advanced Network Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Time Server 2
(in Web UI)
Description
The secondary time server's IP address or qualified domain name. If the
time server is enabled, and the primary time server is not configured or
cannot be accessed the value for time server2 will be used to request
the time from.
Format
IP address or qualified domain name
0.0.0.0
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
time server2: 192.168.0.5
Parameter –
time server3
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Network->
Advanced Network Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Time Server 3
(in Web UI)
Description
The tertiary time server's IP address or qualified domain name. If the
time server is enabled, and the primary and secondary time servers are
not configured or cannot be accessed the value for time server3 will be
used to request the time from.
Format
IP address or qualified domain name
0.0.0.0
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
time server3: 192.168.0.5
A-44
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Time and Date Settings
Parameter –
IP phone UI
Options->Time and Date->Time Format
time format
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Time Format
(in Phone UI)
Description
This parameter changes the time to 12 hour or 24 hour format. Use “0”
for the 12 hour format and “1” for the 24 hour format.
Format
Integer
0
Default Value
Range
0 (12 hr format))
1 (24 hr format)
Example
time format: 0
Parameter –
IP phone UI
Options->Time and Date->Date Format
date format
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Date Format
(in Phone UI)
Description
Format
This parameter allows the user to change the date to various formats.
Integer
0
Default Value
Range
0 (WWW MMM DD) (default)
1 (DD-MMM-YY)
2 (YYYY-MM-DD)
3 (DD/MM/YYYY)
4 (DD/MM/YY)
5 (DD-MM-YY)
6 (MM/DD/YY)
7 (MMM DD)
Example
date format: 7
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
IP phone UI
Options->Time and Date->Daylight Savings
dst config
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Daylight Savings
(in Phone UI)
Description
Format
Enables/disables the use of daylight savings time.
Integer
3
Default Value
Range
0 - OFF
1 - 30 min summertime
2 - 1 hr summertime
3 - automatic
Example
dst config: 0
Parameter –
IP phone UI
Options->Time and Date->Time Zone
time zone name
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Time Zone
(in Phone UI)
Description
Format
Assigns a time zone name to the time server.
Text
Default Value
Range
US-Eastern
See “Time Zone Name/Time Zone Code Table” below.
time zone name: US-Central
Example
A-46
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Time Zone Name/Time Zone Code Table
Time Zone Name
Time Zone Code
AD-Andorra
CET
AE - United Arab Emirates (Dubai) GST
AG-Antigua
AI-Anguilla
AL-Tirane
AST
AST
CET
AST
ART
BST
CET
LHS
EST
EST
EST
CST
EST
EST
CST
CST
WST
AST
AZT
AN-Curacao
AR-Buenos Aires
AS-Pago Pago
AT-Vienna
AU-Lord Howe
AU-Tasmania
AU-Melbourne
AU-Sydney
AU-Broken Hill
AU-Brisbane
AU-Lindeman
AU-Adelaide
AU-Darwin
AU-Perth
AW-Aruba
AZ - Azerbaijan (Baku)
BA-Sarajevo
BB-Barbados
BE-Brussels
BG-Sofia
BM-Bermuda
BO-La Paz
BR-Noronha
BR-Belem
BR-Fortaleza
BR-Recife
BR-Araguaina
BR-Maceio
BR-Sao Paulo
BR-Cuiaba
BR-Porto Velho
BR-Boa Vista
BR-Manaus
BR-Eirunepe
BR-Rio Branco
BS-Nassau
BY-Minsk
EET
AST
CET
EET
AST
BOT
FNT
BRT
BRT
BRT
BRS
BRT
BRS
AMS
AMT
AMT
AMT
ACT
ACT
EST
EET
CST
BZ-Belize
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Time Zone Name
Time Zone Code
CA-Newfoundland
CA-Atlantic
CA-Eastern
CA-Saskatchewan
CA-Central
CA-Mountain
CA-Pacific
CA-Yukon
NST
AST
EST
EST
CST
MST
PST
PST
CET
CKS
CLS
EAS
CST
COS
CST
CST
EES
CET
CH-Zurich
CK-Rarotonga
CL-Santiago
CL-Easter
CN-China
CO-Bogota
CR-Costa Rica
CU-Havana
CY-Nicosia
CZ-Prague
DE-Berlin
CET
CET
AST
AST
DK-Copenhagen
DM-Dominica
DO-Santo Domingo
EE-Tallinn
ES-Madrid
ES-Canary
EET
CET
WET
FI-Helsinki
FJ-Fiji
FK-Stanley
FO-Faeroe
FR-Paris
EET
NZT
FKS
WET
CET
GB-London
GB-Belfast
GMT
GMT
AST
GET
GFT
CET
AST
EET
GST
CST
CST
GYT
GD-Grenada
GE - Georgia (Tbilisi)
GF-Cayenne
GI-Gibraltar
GP-Guadeloupe
GR-Athens
GS-South Georgia
GT-Guatemala
GU-Guam
GY-Guyana
A-48
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Time Zone Code
Time Zone Name
HK-Hong Kong
HN-Tegucigalpa
HR-Zagreb
HT-Port-au-Prince
HU-Budapest
HKS
CST
CET
EST
CET
IE-Dublin
IS-Reykjavik
IT-Rome
GMT
GMT
CET
JM-Jamaica
JP-Tokyo
EST
JST
KY-Cayman
EST
LC-St Lucia
LI-Vaduz
LT-Vilnius
LU-Luxembourg
LV-Riga
AST
CET
EET
CET
EET
MC-Monaco
MD-Chisinau
MK-Skopje
MQ-Martinique
MS-Montserrat
MT-Malta
MU - Mauritius
MX-Mexico City
MX-Cancun
CET
EET
CET
AST
AST
CET
MUT
CST
CST
CST
CST
MST
MST
MST
PST
MX-Merida
MX-Monterrey
MX-Mazatlan
MX-Chihuahua
MX-Hermosillo
MX-Tijuana
NI-Managua
NL-Amsterdam
NO-Oslo
NR-Nauru
NU-Niue
CST
CET
CET
NRT
NUT
NZS
CHA
NZ-Auckland
NZ-Chatham
OM - Oman (Muscat)
GST
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Time Zone Name
Time Zone Code
PA-Panama
PE-Lima
PL-Warsaw
PR-Puerto Rico
PT-Lisbon
PT-Madeira
PT-Azores
PY-Asuncion
EST
PES
CET
AST
WET
WET
AZO
PYS
RO-Bucharest
RU-Kaliningrad
RU-Moscow
RU-Samara
RU-Yekaterinburg
RU-Omsk
RU-Novosibirsk
RU-Krasnoyarsk
RU-Irkutsk
EET
EET
MSK
SAM
YEK
OMS
NOV
KRA
IRK
RU-Yakutsk
YAK
VLA
SAK
MAG
PET
ANA
RU-Vladivostok
RU-Sakhalin
RU-Magadan
RU-Kamchatka
RU-Anadyr
SE-Stockholm
SG-Singapore
SI-Ljubljana
SK-Bratislava
SM-San Marino
SR-Paramaribo
SV-El Salvador
CET
SGT
CET
CET
CET
SRT
CST
TR-Istanbul
TT-Port of Spain
TW-Taipei
EET
AST
CST
UA-Kiev
EET
EST
CST
MST
PST
AKS
HAS
HST
UYS
US-Eastern
US-Central
US-Mountain
US-Pacific
US-Alaska
US-Aleutian
US-Hawaii
UY-Montevideo
A-50
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Time Zone Code
Time Zone Name
VA-Vatican
CET
CET
YU-Belgrade
Custom Time Zone and DST Settings
Parameter –
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
time zone minutes
Description
The number of minutes the timezone is offset from UTC (Coordinated
Universal Time). This can be positive (West of the Prime Meridian) or
negative (East of the Prim Meridian). Eastern Standard Time (EST) has
a value of 300.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
N/A
Any positive or negative Integer
time zone minutes: 300
Example
Parameter –
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
dst minutes
Description
The number of minutes to add during Daylight Saving Time. Valid values
are a positive integer between 0 to 60.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
N/A
0 to 60
Example
dst minutes: 60
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
dst [start|end] relative date
Description
Specifies how to interpret the start and end day, month, and week
parameters - absolute (0) or relative (1).
Format
Boolean
N/A
Default Value
Range
0 (absolute)
1 (relative)
Example
dst [start|end] relative date: 1
Absolute Time
Parameter –
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
dst start month
Description
The month that DST starts. Valid values are 1 to 12 (January to
December).
Format
Integer
N/A
Default Value
Range
1 (January)
2 (February)
3 (March)
4 (April)
5 (May)
6 (June)
7 (July)
8 (August)
9 (September)
10 (October)
11 (November)
12 (December)
Example
dst start month: 7
A-52
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
dst end month
Description
The month that DST ends. Valid values are 1 to 12 (January to
December).
Format
Integer
N/A
Default Value
Range
1 (January)
2 (February)
3 (March)
4 (April)
5 (May)
6 (June)
7 (July)
8 (August)
9 (September)
10 (October)
11 (November)
12 (December)
Example
dst end month: 6
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
dst start day
Description
Format
The day of the month that DST starts. Valid values are 1 to 31.
Integer
Default Value
Range
N/A
1 to 31
Example
dst start day: 1
Parameter –
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
dst end day
Description
Format
The day of the month that DST ends. Valid values are 1 to 31.
Integer
Default Value
Range
N/A
1 to 31
Example
dst end day: 31
Parameter –
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
dst start hour
Description
The hour that DST starts. Valid values are an integer from 0 (midnight)
to 23.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
N/A
0 (midnight) to 23
dst start hour: 0
Example
A-54
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
dst end hour
Description
The hour that DST ends. Valid values are an integer from 0 (midnight) to
23.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
N/A
0 (midnight) to 23
dst end hour: 23
Example
Relative Time
Parameter –
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
dst start month
Description
The month that DST starts. Valid values are 1 to 12 (January to
December).
Format
Integer
N/A
Default Value
Range
1 (January)
2 (February)
3 (March)
4 (April)
5 (May)
6 (June)
7 (July)
8 (August)
9 (September)
10 (October)
11 (November)
12 (December)
Example
dst start month: 6
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
dst end month
Description
The month that DST ends. Valid values are 1 to 12 (January to
December).
Format
Integer
N/A
Default Value
Range
1 (January)
2 (February)
3 (March)
4 (April)
5 (May)
6 (June)
7 (July)
8 (August)
9 (September)
10 (October)
11 (November)
12 (December)
Example
dst end month: 12
A-56
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
dst start week
Description
The week in the specified month in which DST starts. Valid value is a
positive or negative integer from 1 to 5.
Format
Integer
N/A
Default Value
Range
1 = first full week of month
-1 = last full week of month
2 = second full week of month
-2 = last full week of month
3 = third full week of month
-3 = last full week of month
4 = fourth full week of month
-4 = last full week of month
5 = fifth full week of month
-5 = last full week of month
Example
dst start week: 1
Parameter –
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
dst end week
Description
The week in the specified month in which DST ends. Valid value is a
positive or negative integer from 1 to 5.
Format
Integer
N/A
Default Value
Range
1 = first full week of month
-1 = last full week of month
2 = second full week of month
-2 = last full week of month
3 = third full week of month
-3 = last full week of month
4 = fourth full week of month
-4 = last full week of month
5 = fifth full week of month
-5 = last full week of month
Example
dst end week: 5
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
dst start day
Description
The day of the specified week in the specified month that DST starts on.
Valid values are an integer from 1 to 7.
Format
Integer
N/A
Default Value
Range
1 (Sunday)
2 (Monday)
3 (Tuesday)
4 (Wednesday)
5 (Thursday)
6 (Friday)
7 (Saturday)
Example
dst start day: 1
Parameter –
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
dst end day
Description
The day of the specified week in the specified month that DST ends on.
Valid values are an integer from 1 to 7.
Format
Integer
N/A
Default Value
Range
1 (Sunday)
2 (Monday)
3 (Tuesday)
4 (Wednesday)
5 (Thursday)
6 (Friday)
7 (Saturday)
Example
dst end day: 7
A-58
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
dst start hour
Description
The hour that DST starts. Valid values are an integer from 0 (midnight)
to 23.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
N/A
0 (midnight) to 23
dst start hour: 0
Example
Parameter –
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
dst end hour
Description
The hour that DST ends. Valid values are an integer from 0 (midnight) to
23.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
N/A
0 (midnight) to 23
dst end hour: 23
Example
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Backlight Mode Settings (9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, 57i CT)
Parameter –
IP phone UI
Options->Preferences->Display->Backlight
backlight mode
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Backlight
(in Phone UI)
Description
Allows you to turn the backlight on the LCD, On, Off, or Auto. “The Auto”
setting sets the phone to turn off the backlighting after a period of
inactivity.
Format
Integer
On
Default Value
Range
0
1
2
(On - Turns the backlight on constant)
(Off - Turns the backlight off constant)
(Auto - Turns the backlight off after a period of inactivity.)
Example
backlight mode: 2
Parameter –
IP phone UI
Options->Preferences->Display->Backlight
bl on time
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Backllight On Time
(in Phone UI)
Description
Allows you to set the amount of time, in seconds, that the backlight
stays ON before turning OFF because of inactivity. This settings is
applicable to the “Auto” mode only.
Format
Integer
10
Default Value
Range
1 to 30
Example
bl on timer: 15
A-60
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Live Dialpad Settings
Parameter –
IP phone UI
Options->Preferences->Live Dialpad
live dialpad
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Live Dialpad
(in Phone UI)
Description
Turns the “Live Dialpad” feature ON or OFF.
With live dial pad ON, the IP phone automatically dials out and turns ON
Handsfree mode as soon as a dial pad key or softkey is pressed. With
live dial pad OFF, if you dial a number while the phone is on-hook, lifting
the receiver or pressing the
initiates a call to that number.
Format
Boolean
0 (Off)
Default Value
Range
0 (Off)
1 (On)
Example
live dialpad: 1
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
SIP Local Dial Plan Settings
Parameter –
sip dial plan
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Preferences
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Local Dial Plan
(in Web UI)
Description
A dial plan describes the number and pattern of digits that a user dials to
reach a particular telephone number. The SIP local dial plan is as follows:
Symbol
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
Description
Digit symbol
X
*, #, .
Match any digit symbol (wildcard)
Other keypad symbol; # can terminate
a dial string
|
+
Expression inclusive OR
0 or more of the preceding digit symbol
or [] expression
[]
-
Symbol inclusive OR
Used only with [], represent a range of
acceptable symbols; For example, [2-8]
In the configuration files, enter the sip dial
plan value using quotes.
“,” (open/close quotes)
.;.
Used when a secondary dial tone is
required on the phone. (For example,
“9;xxxxxx”, when a user has to dial “9” to get
and outside line and needs a secondary dial
tone presented.
Note: You can configure prefix dialing by adding a prepend digit to the
dial string. For example, if you add a prepend map of
“[2-9]XXXXXXXXX,91”, the IP phone adds the digits “91” to any 10-digit
number beginning with any digit from 2 to 9 that is dialed out. Other
examples of prepend mappings are:
•
1X+#,9 (Prepends 9 to any digit string beginning with “1” and
terminating with “#”.)
•
•
6XXX,579 (Prepends “579” to any 4-digit string starting with “6”.)
[4-6]XXXXXX,78 (Prepends “78” to any 7-digit string starting with “4”,
“5”, or “6”.
Format
Alphanumeric characters
X+#|XX+*
Default Value
Range
Up to 127 alphanumeric characters
sip dial plan: "X+#|XXX+*"
Example
A-62
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip dial plan terminator
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Preferences
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Send Dial Plan Terminator
(in Web UI)
Description
Allows you to enable or disable a dial plan terminator. If you enable the
use of this parameter, when you configure the IP phone’s dial plan with a
dial plan terminator or timeout (such as the pound symbol (#)), the phone
waits 4 or 5 seconds after you pick up the handset or after to finish
dialing the number on the keypad before making the call.
Format
Boolean
0
Default Value
Range
0 (Disable)
1 (Enable)
Example
sip dial plan terminator: 1
Parameter –
sip digit timeout
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Preferences
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Digit Timeout
(in Web UI)
Description
Represents the time, in seconds, between consecutive key presses on
the IP phone. The default for this parameter is 4 seconds. If you press a
key on the phone and wait 4 seconds before pressing the next key, the
key times out and cancels the digit selection. You must press consecutive
keys before the timeout occurs.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
4
Not Applicable
sip digit timeout: 6
Example
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
SIP Basic, Global Settings
SIP Global Authentication Settings
Parameter –
sip screen name
IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
Screen Name
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
(in Web UI)
Description
Used to display text on the screen of the phone. You may want to set
this parameter to display the user’s name of the phone.
Format
Text
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
sip screen name: Joe Smith
Example
Parameter –
sip screen name 2
IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
Screen Name 2
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
(in Web UI)
Description
Used to display text on a second line on the screen of the phone.
Notes:
1. If other status messages display on the phone, such as “Network
Disconnected”, the Screen Name 2 value does not display.
2. Symbol characters are allowed (such as “#”).
3. If the text is longer than the display width, than the display truncates
the text to fit the display.
Format
Alphanumeric characters.
Not Applicable
Default Value
Range
Up to 20 alphanumeric characters.
sip screen name 2: Lab Phone
Example
A-64
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip user name
IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
Phone Number
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
(in Web UI)
Description
Used in the name field of the SIP URI for the IP phone and for registering
the IP phone at the registrar.
Note: The IP Phones support Usernames containing dots (“.”).
Format
Text
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
sip user name: 1010
Example
Parameter –
sip display name
IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
Caller ID
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
(in Web UI)
Description
Used in the display name field of the From SIP header field. Some IP
PBX systems use this as the caller’s ID and some may overwrite this
with the string that is set at the PBX system.
Format
Text
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
sip display name: Joe Smith
Example
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip auth name
IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Options->Administrator Menu->>SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
Authentication Name
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
(in Web UI)
Description
Used in the username field of the Authorization header field of the SIP
REGISTER request.
Format
Text
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
sip auth name: 5553456
Example
Parameter –
sip password
IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
Password
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
The password that will be used to register at the registrar.
Text
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
sip password: 12345
Example
A-66
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip bla number
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
BLA Number
(in Web UI)
Description
Allows you to assign a phone number that is shared across all IP
phones.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
sip bla number: 1010
Example
Parameter –
sip mode
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Line mode
(in Web UI)
Description
Allows you to configure the mode of the line. Applicable values are:
•
•
Generic - Normal line
BroadSoft SCA - Shared Call/Line Appearances (SCA) line for
BroadWorks network (call activity can go to more than one phone)
Nortel - Conference line for Nortel Networks (private - all call activity
goes to one phone)
•
•
BLA - Bridged Line Appearance (BLA) line.
Format
Integer
0
Default Value
Range
Valid values are:
0 - Generic
1 - BroadSoft SCA
2 - Nortel
3 - BLA
Example
sip mode: 2
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
SIP Global Network Settings.
Parameter –
sip proxy ip
IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
Proxy Server
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
(in Web UI)
Description
The IP address of the SIP proxy server for which the IP phone uses to
send all SIP requests.
A SIP proxy is a server that initiates and forwards requests generated by
the IP phone to the targeted user.
Format
IP address or fully qualified Domain Name
0.0.0.0
Default Value
Range
Not applicable
Example
sip proxy ip: 192.168.0.101
Parameter –
sip proxy port
IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
Proxy Port
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
The proxy server's port number.
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Not Applicable
Example
sip proxy port: 5060
A-68
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip backup proxy ip
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Network Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Backup Proxy Server
(in Web UI)
Description
The IP address of the backup SIP proxy server for which the IP phone
uses when the primary SIP proxy is unavailable.
Format
IP address or fully qualified Domain Name
0.0.0.0
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
sip backup proxy ip: 192.168.0.102
Parameter –
sip backup proxy port
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Network Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
Backup Proxy Port
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
The backup proxy’s port number.
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Not Applicable
Example
sip backup proxy port: 5060
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
sip outbound proxy
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
outbound proxy server
(in Web UI)
Description
This is the address of the outbound proxy server. All SIP messages
originating from the phone are sent to this server. For example, if you
have a Session Border Controller in your network, then you would
normally set its address here.
Format
IP Address or fully qualified Domain Name
0.0.0.0
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
sip outbound proxy: 10.42.23.13
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip outbound proxy port
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
outbound proxy port
(in Web UI)
Description
The proxy port on the proxy server to which the IP phone sends all SIP
messages.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Not Applicable
Example
sip outbound proxy port: 5060
Parameter –
sip registrar ip
IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
Registrar Server
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
(in Web UI)
Description
The address of the registrar for which the IP phone uses to send
REGISTER requests.
A SIP registrar is a server that maintains the location information of the
IP phone.
A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables registration. However, the phone is still
active and you can dial using username@ip address of the phone.
If the Registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e, line 1,
line 2, etc.), then the register request is not sent, the "No Service"
message does not display, and the message waiting indicator (MWI)
does not come on.
Format
IP address or fully qualified Domain Name
0.0.0.0
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
sip registrar ip: 192.168.0.101
A-70
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip registrar port
IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
Registrar Port
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
The registrar's port number.
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Not Applicable
Example
sip registrar port: 5060
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
sip backup registrar ip
Basic SIP Network Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
Backup Registrar Server
(in Web UI)
Description
The address of the backup registrar (typically, the backup SIP proxy) for
which the IP phone uses to send REGISTER requests if the primary
registrar is unavailable.
A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables backup registration. However, the
phone is still active and you can dial using username@ip address of the
phone.
If the backup registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e,
line 1, line 2, etc.), then the backup register request is not sent, the "No
Service" message does not display, and the message waiting indicator
(MWI) does not come on.
Format
IP address or fully qualified Domain Name
0.0.0.0
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
sip backup registrar ip: 192.168.0.102
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip backup registrar port
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Network Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
Backup Registrar Port
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
The backup registrar's (typically the backup SIP proxy) port number.
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Not Applicable
Example
sip backup registrar port: 5060
Parameter –
sip registration period
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Network Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
Registration Period
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
The requested registration period, in seconds, from the registrar.
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
0 to 2147483647
Example
sip registration period: 3600
A-72
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
SIP Basic, Per-Line Settings
The following parameters are SIP per-line settings. The value of "N" is 1 - 9 for
9143i, 9480i, 9480i CT, 53i, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT.
SIP Per-Line Authentication Settings
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
sip lineN screen name
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Screen Name
(in Web UI)
Description
Used to display text on the screen of the phone. You may want to set
this parameter to display the phone user's name.
Format
Text
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
sip line1 screen name: Joe Smith
Example
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
sip lineN screen name 2
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Screen Name 2
(in Web UI)
Description
Used to display text on a second line on the screen of the phone.
Notes:
1. If other status messages display on the phone, such as “Network
Disconnected”, the Screen Name 2 value does not display.
2. Characters are allowed (such as “#”).
3. If the text is longer than the display width, than the display truncates
the text to fit the display.
Format
Alphanumeric characters
Not Applicable
Default Value
Range
Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
sip line1 screen name 2: Lab Phone
Example
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
sip lineN user name
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Phone Number
(in Web UI)
Description
Used in the name field of the SIP URI for the IP phone and for registering
the IP phone at the registrar.
When configuring per-line BLA on an ININ server, the username must be
incremented as shown in the example for the "sip lineN bla number"
parameter on page A-76.
Note: The IP Phones support Usernames containing dots (“.”).
Format
Text
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
sip line1 user name: 1010
Example
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
sip lineN display name
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Caller ID
(in Web UI)
Description
Used in the display name field of the From SIP header field. Some IP
PBX systems use this as the caller’s ID and some may overwrite this
with the string that is set at the PBX system.
Format
Text
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
sip line1 display name: Joe Smith
Example
A-74
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
sip lineN auth name
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Authentication Name
(in Web UI)
Description
Used in the username field of the Authorization header field of the SIP
REGISTER request.
Format
Text
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
sip line1 auth name: 5553456
Example
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
sip lineN password
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Password
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
The password that will be used to register at the registrar.
Text
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
sip line1 password: 12345
Example
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip lineN bla number
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
BLA Number
(in Web UI)
Description
Allows you to assign a phone number that is shared on specific lines on
the IP phone.
For Sylantro Server:
When configuring the BLA feature on a Sylantro server, the value set for
the sip lineN bla number parameter shall be the same value set for the
sip lineN user name parameter for all the phones in the group. For
example, if sip lineN user name is 1010, you would configure BLA on a
per-line basis for the Sylantro server as follows:
sip line1 user name: 1010(# for all the phones)
sip line1 bla number: 1010
For ININ Server:
When configuring the BLA feature on an ININ server, the value set for the
sip lineN bla number parameter shall be the same value set for the sip
lineN user name parameter without the incremented digit added to the
phone #. For example, if the sip lineN user name for the first phone is
10101, and the sip lineN user name for the second phone is 10102, etc.
you would configure BLA on a per-line basis for the ININ server as
follows:
sip line1 user name: 10101(# for phone 1 with)
sip line1 bla number: 1010appearance of phone 3)
sip line1 user name: 10102(# for phone 2 with)
sip line1 bla number: 1010appearance of phone 3)
sip line1 user name: 1010(# for phone 3)
sip line1 bla number: 1010
Note: The original phone number which has the bridged line appearance
on other phones, will have the "sip lineN user name" parameter the same
as the "sip lineN bla number" (1010 in the above example on Phone 3).
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Example
Sylantro Server:
sip line1 bla number: 1010
ININ Server:
sip line 1 bla number: 1010
A-76
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip lineN mode
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Line Mode
(in Web UI)
Description
Allows you to configure the mode of the line. Applicable values are:
•
•
Generic - Normal line
BroadSoft SCA - Shared Call/Line Appearances (SCA) line for
BroadWorks network (call activity can go to more than one phone)
Nortel - Conference line for Nortel Networks (private - all call activity
goes to one phone)
•
•
•
BLA - Bridged Line Appearance (BLA) line.
If the softkeys on the 57i/57i CT or the programmable keys on the 53i
are set as line keys, and you configure that line key for BLA, the key
is configured to use BLA.
Format
Integer
0
Default Value
Range
Valid values are:
0 - Generic
1 - BroadSoft SCA
2 - Nortel
3 - BLA
Example
sip line1 mode: 2
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
SIP Per-Line Network Settings.
Parameter –
sip lineN proxy ip
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Proxy Server
(in Web UI)
Description
The IP address of the SIP proxy server for which the IP phone uses to
send all SIP requests.
A SIP proxy is a server that initiates and forwards requests generated by
the IP phone to the targeted user.
Format
IP address or fully qualified Domain Name
0.0.0.0
Default Value
Range
Not applicable
Example
sip line1 proxy ip: 192.168.0.101
Parameter –
sip lineN proxy port
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Proxy Port
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
The proxy server's port number
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Not Applicable
Example
sip line1 proxy port: 5060
A-78
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip linex backup proxy ip
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Backup Proxy Server
(in Web UI)
Description
The IP address of the backup SIP proxy server for which the IP phone
uses when the primary SIP proxy is unavailable.
Format
IP address or fully qualified Domain Name
0.0.0.0
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
sip line1 backup proxy ip: 192.168.0.102
Parameter –
sip linex backup proxy port
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Backup Proxy Port
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
The backup proxy’s port number.
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Not Applicable
Example
sip line1 backup proxy port: 5060
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip lineN outbound proxy
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Outbound Proxy Server
(in Web UI)
Description
This is the address of the outbound proxy server. All SIP messages
originating from the phone are sent to this server. For example, if you
have a Session Border Controller in your network, then you would
normally set its address here.
Format
IP Address or fully qualified Domain Name
0.0.0.0
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
sip outbound proxy: 10.42.23.13
Parameter –
sip lineN outbound proxy port
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Outbound Proxy Port
(in Web UI)
Description
The proxy port on the proxy server to which the IP phone sends all SIP
messages.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Not Applicable
Example
sip outbound proxy port: 5060
A-80
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip lineN registrar ip
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Registrar Server
(in Web UI)
Description
The address of the registrar for which the IP phone uses to send
REGISTER requests.
A SIP registrar is a server that maintains the location information of the
IP phone.
A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables registration. However, the phone is still
active and you can dial using username@ip address of the phone.
If the Registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e, line 1,
line 2, etc.), then the register request is not sent, the "No Service"
message does not display, and the message waiting indicator (MWI)
does not come on.
Format
IP address or fully qualified Domain Name
0.0.0.0
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
sip line1 registrar ip: 192.168.0.101
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip lineN registrar port
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Registrar Port
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
The registrar's port number
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Not Applicable
Example
sip line1 registrar port: 5060
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->LineN->
sip linex backup registrar ip
Basic SIP Network Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
Backup Registrar Server
(in Web UI)
Description
The address of the backup registrar (typically, the backup SIP proxy) for
which the IP phone uses to send REGISTER requests if the primary
registrar is unavailable.
A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables backup registration. However, the
phone is still active and you can dial using username@ip address of the
phone.
If the backup registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e,
line 1, line 2, etc.), then the backup register request is not sent, the "No
Service" message does not display, and the message waiting indicator
(MWI) does not come on.
Format
IP address or fully qualified Domain Name
0.0.0.0
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
sip line1 backup registrar ip: 192.168.0.102
A-82
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip linex backup registrar port
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->LineN->
Basic SIP Network Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Backup Registrar Port
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
The backup registrar's (typically the backup SIP proxy) port number.
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Not Applicable
Example
sip line1 backup registrar port: 5060
Parameter –
sip lineN registration period
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Registration Period
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
The requested registration period, in seconds, from the registrar.
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
0 to 2147483647
Example
sip line1 registration period: 3600
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Centralized Conferencing Settings
Global Settings
Parameter –
sip centralized conf
Aastra Web UI
Advanced->Global SIP Settings->
Basic SIP Network Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Conference Server URI
(in Web UI)
Description
Globally enables or disables SIP centralized conferencing for an IP
phone as follows:
•
•
To disable centralized conferencing, leave this field empty (blank).
To enable SIP centralized conferencing, then do one of the following
actions:
— If you have specified a proxy server/registrar server, then to
reach the media server via the proxy server, set this field to
one of the following:
conf (Sylantro server), or
Conference (Broadsoft server)
By setting this field to conf, you specify conf@<proxy_server
_address>: <proxy_port>. For example, if the proxy server address is
206.229.26.60 and the proxy port used is 10060, then by setting this
parameter to conf, you are specifying the following:
[email protected]:10060
—
To reach the media server using a different address/port than
that specified by the proxy, set this field to the following:
conf@<media_server _address>: <media_port>
Format
String
Blank
sip centralized conf: conf
Default Value
Example
A-84
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Per-Line Settings
Parameter –
sip lineN centralized conf
Aastra Web UI
Advanced->Line <1 thru 9>->
Basic SIP Network Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Conference Server URI
(in Web UI)
Description
Enable or disable per-line SIP centralized conferencing for an IP phone
as follows:
•
•
To disable centralized conferencing, leave this field empty (blank).
To enable SIP centralized conferencing on a specific line, do one of
the following actions:
—
If you have specified a proxy server/registrar server, then to
reach the media server via the proxy server, set this field to
one of the following:
conf (Sylantro server), or
Conference (Broadsoft server)
By setting this field to conf, you specify conf@<proxy_server
_address>: <proxy_port>. For example, if the proxy server address
is 206.229.26.60 and the proxy port used is 10060, then by setting
this parameter to conf, you are specifying the following:
[email protected]:10060.
—
To reach the media server using a different address/port than
that specified by the proxy, set this field to the following:
conf@<media_server _address>: <media_port>
Format
String
Blank
Default Value
Examples
sip line3 centralized conf: conf
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
HTTP/HTTPS Authentication Support for Broadsoft CMS
Parameter –
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
http digest username
Description
Specifies the username to use for HTTP/HTTPS digest authentication.
The server uses this username for authentication purposes when loading
configuration to the phone over HTTP/HTTPS. This parameter initiates a
“Username/Password” screen after pressing the Log In softkey.
Notes:
1. The Username field accepts special characters, such as, @, #, %, =,
_, etc. You can also specify domain names (i.e., user@domain).
2. You must reboot the phone after setting the HTTP/HTTPS digest
authentication parameters.
Format
String
Default Value
Range
N/A
Up to 40 alphanumeric characters
http digest username: mysuername
Example
Parameter –
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
http digest password
Description
Specifies the password to use for HTTP/HTTPS digest authentication.
The server uses this password for authentication purposes when loading
configuration to the phone over HTTP/HTTPS. This parameter initiates a
“Username/Password” screen after pressing the Log In softkey.
Notes:
1. The Password field accepts special characters, such as, @, #, %, =,
_, etc.
2. You must reboot the phone after setting the HTTP/HTTPS digest
authentication parameters.
Format
String
Default Value
Range
N/A
Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
http digest password: mypassword
Example
A-86
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
http digest force login
Description
Enables and disables the display of a LOGIN key on the phone’s idle
screen.
Note: After the server has authenticated the phone, this parameter must
be set to “0” in order for the server to send the default profile to the phone.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (disable)
0 (disable)
1 (enable)
Example
http digest force login: 1
Advanced SIP Settings
Parameter –
sip explicit mwi subscription
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Explicit MWI Subscription
(in Web UI)
Description
If the IP phone has a message waiting subscription with the Service
Provider, a Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) (LED or display icon) tells
the user there is a message on the IP Phone. You can enable and
disable MWI by setting this parameter to the following:
"0" to disable
"1" to enable
Format
Boolean
0
Default Value
Range
0 (disable)
1 (enable)
Example
sip explicit mwi subscription: 1
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip explicit mwi subscription
period
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Explicit MWI Timeout
(in Web UI)
Description
The requested duration, in seconds, before the MWI subscription times
out. The phone re-subscribes to MWI before the subscription period
ends.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
86400
30 - 214748364
Example
sip explicit mwi subscription period: 30
.
Parameter –
sip send mac
Aastra Web UI:
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Send MAC Address in
REGISTER Message
(in Web UI)
Description
Adds an "Aastra-Mac:" header to the SIP REGISTER messages sent
from the phone to the call server, where the value is the MAC address of
the phone.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (disabled)
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
Example
sip send mac: 1
A-88
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip send line
Aastra Web UI:
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Send Line Number in
REGISTER Message
(in Web UI)
Description
Adds an "Aastra-Line:" header to the SIP REGISTER messages sent
from the phone to the call server, where the value is the MAC address of
the phone.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (disabled)
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
Example
sip send line: 1
Parameter –
sip session timer
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Session Timer
(in Web UI)
Description
The time, in seconds, that the IP phone uses to send periodic
re-INVITE requests to keep a session alive. The proxy uses these
re-INVITE requests to maintain the status' of the connected sessions.
See RFC4028 for details.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Not Applicable
Example
sip session timer: 30
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip T1 timer
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
T1 Timer
(in Web UI)
Description
This timer is a SIP transaction layer timer defined in RFC 3261.
Timer 1 is an estimate, in milliseconds, of the round-trip time (RTT).
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
500
Not Applicable
sip T1 timer: 600
Example
Parameter –
sip T2 timer
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
T2 Timer
(in Web UI)
Description
This timer is a SIP transaction layer timer defined in RFC 3261.
Timer 2 represents the amount of time, in milliseconds, a non-INVITE
server transaction takes to respond to a request.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Not Applicable
sip T2 timer: 8
Example
A-90
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip transaction timer
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Transaction Timer
(in Web UI)
Description
The amount of time, in milliseconds that the phone allows the callserver
(registrar/proxy) to respond to SIP messages that it sends. If the phone
does not receive a response in the amount of time designated for this
parameter, the phone assumes the message has timed out.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
4000
4000 to 64000
sip transaction timer: 6000
Example
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip transport protocol
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Transport Protocol
(in Web UI)
Description
The protocol that the Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP) port on the IP
phone uses to send out SIP signaling packets.
Notes:
1. If you set the value of this parameter to 4 (TLS), the phone checks
to see if the “sips persistent tls” is enabled. If it is enabled, the phone
uses Persistent TLS on the connection. If “sips persistent tls” is
disabled, then the phone uses TLS on the connection. If TLS is used,
you must specify the Root and Intermediate Certificates, the Local
Certificate, the Private Key, and the Trusted Certificates.
2. If the phone uses Persistent TLS, you MUST specify the Trusted
Certificates; the Root and Intermediate Certificates, the Local
Certificate, and the Private Key are optional.
For more information about Persistent TLS, see “Transport Layer
Security (TLS) Settings” on page A-100.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
1 - UDP
Valid values are:
0 - User Datagram Protocol (UDP) and
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)
1 - UDP
2 - TCP
4 - Transport Layer Security (TLS)
Example
sip transport protocol: 4
A-92
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip registration retry timer
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Registration Failed Retry
Timer
(in Web UI)
Description
Specifies the time, in seconds, that the phone waits between registration
attempts when a registration is rejected by the registrar.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
1800 (30 minutes)
30 to 1800
Example
sip registration retry timer: 30
Parameter –
sip registration timeout retry
timer
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Registration Timeout Retry
Timer
(in Web UI)
Description
Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that the phone waits until it
re-attempts to register after a REGISTER message times out.
If this parameter is set lower than 30 seconds, the phone uses a
minimum timer of 30 seconds.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
120
30 to 214748364
Example
sip registration timeout retry timer: 150
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip registration renewal timer
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Registration Renewal Timer
(in Web UI)
Description
The length of time, in seconds, prior to expiration, that the phone renews
registrations.
For example, if the value is set to 20, then 20 seconds before the
registration is due to expire, a new REGISTER message is sent to the
registrar to renew the registration.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
15
0 to 214748364
The value set for this parameter should be between 0 and the value set
for the registration period.
Example
sip registration renewal timer: 10
Parameter –
sip blf subscription period
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP
->Advanced SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
BLF Subscription Period
(in Web UI)
Description
Specifies the time period, in seconds, that the IP phone resubscribes the
BLF subscription service after a software/firmware upgrade or after a
reboot of the IP phone.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
3600
120 (2 minutes is the minimum value)
sip blf subscription period: 2000
Example
A-94
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip acd subscription period
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP
->Advanced SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
ACD Subscription Period
(in Web UI)
Description
Specifies the time period, in seconds, that the IP phone resubscribes the
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) subscription service after a software/
firmware upgrade or after a reboot of the IP phone.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
3600
120 (2 minutes is the minimum value)
sip acd subscription period: 2000
Example
Parameter–
sip bla subscription
period
Configuration Files
Aastra Web UI
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
BLA Subscription Period
(in Web UI)
Description
Specifies the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone waits to receive a
BLA subscribe message from the server. If you specify zero (0), the phone
uses the value specified for the BLA expiration in the subscribe message
received from the server. If no value is specified, the phone uses the default
value of 300 seconds.
Format
Integer
300
Default Value
Range
0 to 3700
Note: When set to zero (0), the phone uses BLA expiry value specified in
subscribe message.
Example
sip bla subscription period: 0
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Missed Call Summary Subscription Settings
Global Parameters
Parameter –
sip missed call summary
subscription
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
Missed Call Summary
Subscription
(in Web UI)
Description
Enables or disables the Missed Call Summary Subscription feature.
This feature allows missed calls that have been redirected by the server,
to be incremented in the missed calls indicator on the phone it was initially
directed to.
For example, phones A, B, and C are connected to the server. You
configure the server to direct calls coming into phone B (which has
voicemail configured) to be forwarded to phone C. When phone A calls
sip missed call summary subscription parameter, phone B receives
notification from the server that the call was forwarded and the missed
calls indicator is incremented on phone B.
Note: You must configure voicemail on the phone that the call was initially
directed to (phone B in the above example).
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (disabled)
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
Example
sip missed call summary subscription: 1
A-96
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip missed call summary
subscription period
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
Missed Call Summary
Subscription Period
(in Web UI)
Description
Specifies the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone uses the Missed
Calls Summary Subscription feature. This parameter is always enabled
with a default value of 86400 seconds. When the phone reaches the limit
set for this parameter, it sends the subscription again.
To disable this parameter, leave the field blank or set the field to zero (0).
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
86400
0 to 99999999
Example
sip missed call summary subscription period: 70000
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Per-Line Parameter
Parameter –
sip lineN missed call
summary subscription
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
Missed Call Summary
Subscription
(in Web UI)
Description
Enables or disables the Missed Call Summary Subscription feature.
This feature allows missed calls that have been redirected by the server,
to be incremented in the missed calls indicator on the phone it was initially
directed to.
For example, phones A, B, and C are connected to the server. You
configure the server to direct calls coming into phone B (which has
voicemail configured) to be forwarded to phone C. When phone A calls
phone B, the server forwards the call to phone C. If you enable the sip
missed call summary subscription parameter, phone B receives
notification from the server that the call was forwarded and the missed
calls indicator is incremented on phone B.
Note: You must configure voicemail on the phone that the call was initially
directed to (phone B in the above example).
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (disabled)
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
Example
sip line1 missed call summary subscription: 1
A-98
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
As-Feature-Event Subscription Settings
Parameter –
sip lineN as-feature-event
subscription
Aastra Web UI:
Advanced Settings->LineN->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Enables or disables the specified line with the BroadSoft’s server-side
DND, CFWD, or ACD features.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (disable)
0 (disable)
1 (enable)
Example
sip line1 as-feature-event subscription: 1
Parameter –
sip as-feature-event
subscription period
Aastra Web UI:
Basic Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Specifies the amount of time, in seconds, between resubscribing. If the
phone does not resubscribe in the time specified for this parameter, it
loses subscription.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
3600
5 to 2147483648
Example
sip as-feature-event subscription period: 600
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Transport Layer Security (TLS) Settings
To configure TLS, you must enter the “sip transport protocol” parameter with a
value of “4” (TLS). See the “sip transport protocol” description on page A-92.
Also enter the following parameters in the configuration files to configure TLS:
Parameter –
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
sips persistent tls
Description
Enables or disables the use of Persistent Transport Layer Security (TLS).
Persistent TLS sets up the connection to the server once and re-uses that
connection for all calls from the phone. The setup connection for
Persistent TLS is established during the registration of the phone. If the
phones are set to use Persistent TLS, and a call is made from the phone,
this call and all subsequent calls use the same authenticated connection.
This significantly reduces the delay time when placing a call.
Notes:
1. Persistent TLS requires the outbound proxy server and outbound
proxy port parameters be configured in either the configuration files or the
Aastra Web UI (Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Basic SIP Network
Settings). There can be only one persistent TLS connection created per
phone. The phone establishes the TLS connection to the configured
outbound proxy.
2. If you configure the phone to use Persistent TLS, you must also
specify the Trusted Certificate file to use. The Root and Intermediate
Certificates, Local Certificate, and Private Key files are optional.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (disabled)
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
Example
sips persistent tls: 1
A-100
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sips root and intermediate
certificates
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->TLS Support
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Root and Intermediate
Certificates Filename
(in Web UI)
Description
Allows you to specify the SIP Root and Intermediate Certificate files to use
when the phone uses the TLS transport protocol to setup a call.
The Root and Intermediate Certificate files contain one root certificate and
zero or more intermediate certificates which must be placed in order of
certificate signing with root certificate being the first in the file. If the local
certificate is signed by some well known certificate authority, then that
authority provides the user with the Root and Intermediate Certificate files
(most likely just CA root certificate).
This parameter is required when configuring TLS (optional for Persistent
TLS.)
Note: The certificate files must use the format “.pem”. To create custom
certificate files to use on your IP phone, contact Aastra Technical Support.
Format
<file name>.pem
Default Value
Range
N/A
N/A
Example
sips root and intermediate certificates: cacert_openser.pem
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sips local certificate
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->TLS Support
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Local Certificate Filename
(in Web UI)
Description
Allows you to specify the Local Certificate file to use when the phone uses
the TLS transport protocol to setup a call.
This parameter is required when configuring TLS (optional for Persistent
TLS.)
Note: The certificate file must use the format “.pem”. To create specific
certificate files to use on your IP phone, contact Aastra Technical Support.
Format
<file name>.pem
Default Value
Range
N/A
N/A
Example
sips local certificate: phonesLocalCert.pem
Parameter –
sips private key
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->TLS Support
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Private Key Filename
(in Web UI)
Description
Allows you to specify a Private Key file to use when the phone uses the
TLS transport protocol to setup a call.
This parameter is required when configuring TLS (optional for Persistent
TLS.)
Note: The key file must use the format “.pem”. To create specific private
key files to use on your IP phone, contact Aastra Technical Support.
Format
<file name>.pem
Default Value
Range
N/A
N/A
Example
sips private key: phone-privkey.pem
A-102
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sips trusted certificates
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->TLS Support
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Trusted Certificates
Filename
(in Web UI)
Description
Allows you to specify the Trusted Certificate files to use when the phone
uses the TLS transport protocol to setup a call.
The Trusted Certificate files define a list of trusted certificates. The phone’s
trusted list must contain the CA root certificates for all the servers it is
connecting to. For example, if the phone is connecting to server A which
has a certificate signed by CA1, and server B which has a certificate
signed by CA2, the phone must have CA1 root certificate and CA2 root
certificate in its Trusted Certificate file.
This parameter is required when configuring TLS or Persistent TLS.
Note: The certificate files must use the format “.pem”. To create custom
certificate files to use on your IP phone, contact Aastra Technical Support.
Format
<file name>.pem
Default Value
Range
N/A
N/A
Example
sips trusted certificates: trustedCert.pem
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
802.1x Support Settings
Use the following parameters to configure the 802.1x Protocol on your phone
using the configuration files.
For EAP-MD5 use:
•
•
•
•
eap type
identity
md5 password
pc port passthrough enabled
For EAP-TLS use:
•
•
•
eap type
identity
802.1x root and intermediate certificates
(use 1 root and 0 or 1 intermediate certificates)
•
•
•
•
802.1x local certificate
(use 1 local certificate)
802.1x private key
(1 private key that corresponds to local certificate)
802.1x trusted certificates
(0 or more trusted certificates (a maximum of 2))
pc port passthrough enabled
A-104
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
pc port passthru enabled
IP phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->Ethernet Link
Advanced Settings->Network->
Basic Network Settings
Aastra Web UI
PC Port PassThru Enable/
Disable
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
(in Web UI)
Description
Enables or disables the PC port on the phone to be used for 802.1x
authentication support.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
1 (enable)
0 (disable)
1 (enable)
Example
pc port passthru enabled: 1
Parameter –
IP Phone UI:
Options->Administrator Menu->
eap type
Network Settings->Ethernet Link->
802.1x Settings->802.1x Mode
EAP Type
Aastra Web UI:
Advanced Settings->802.1x Support->General
(in Web UI)
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Format
Specifies the type of authentication to use on the IP Phone.
Integer
Default Value
Range
0 (disable)
0 (disable)
1 (MD5)
2 (TLS)
Example
eap type: 1
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
IP Phone UI:
Options->Administrator Menu->
identity
Network Settings->Ethernet Link->
802.1x Settings->EAP-MD5 Settings
Advanced Settings->802.1x Support->General
Identity
Aastra Web UI:
(in Web UI)
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Specifies the identity or username used for authenticating the phone.
Note: The value you enter for this parameter also displays in the Aastra
Web UI at the path Advanced Settings->
802.1x Support->General->Identity.
Format
String
Default Value
Range
N/A
N/A
Example
identity: phone1
Parameter –
md5 password
IP Phone UI:
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->Ethernet Link->
802.1x Settings->EAP-MD5 Settings
Advanced Settings->802.1x Support->
EAP-MD5 Settings
MD5 Password
(in Web UI)
Aastra Web UI:
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Specifies the password used for the MD5 authentication of the phone.
Note: The value you enter for this parameter also displays in the Aastra
Web UI at the path Advanced Settings->
802.1x Support->EAP-MD5 Settings->MD5 Password. The password
displays as “*******”.
Format
String
Default Value
Range
N/A
N/A
Example
md5 password: password1
A-106
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
802.1x root and intermediate
certificates
Aastra Web UI:
Advanced Settings->802.1x Support->
EAP-TLS Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Root and Intermediate
Certificates
(in Web UI)
Description
Specifies the file name that contains the root and intermediate
certificates related to the local certificate.
Format
String
Default Value
Range
N/A
N/A
Example
802.1x root and intermediate certificates: filename.pem
Parameter –
802.1x local certificate
Aastra Web UI:
Advanced Settings->802.1x Support->
EAP-TLS Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Local Certificate
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
Specifies the file name that contains the local certificate.
String
Default Value
Range
N/A
N/A
Example
802.1x local certificate: filename.pem
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
802.1x private key
Aastra Web UI:
Advanced Settings->802.1x Support->
EAP-TLS Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Private Key
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
Specifies the file name that contains the private key.
String
Default Value
ANDN/A
Range
N/A
Example
802.1x private key: filename.pem
Parameter –
802.1x trusted certificates
Aastra Web UI:
Advanced Settings->802.1x Support->
EAP-TLS Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Trusted Certificates
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
Specifies the file name that contains the trusted certificates.
String
Default Value
Range
N/A
N/A
Example
802.1x trusted certificates: filename.pem
A-108
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
RTP, Codec, DTMF Global Settings
Global Settings
Parameter –
IP Phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
sip rtp port
SIP Settings->RTP Port Base
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings
RTP Port Base
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
(in IP Phone UI)
RTP Port
(in Web UI)
Description
Indicates the port through which the RTP packets are sent. This value
must specify the beginning of the RTP port range on the gateway or
router.
The RTP port is used for sending DTMF tones and for the audio stream.
Your network administrator may close some ports for security reasons.
You may want to use this parameter to send RTP data using a different
port.
Note: The phones support decoding and playing out DTMF tones sent
in SIP INFO requests. The following DTMF tones are supported:
•
•
Support signals 0-9, #, *
Support durations up to 5 seconds
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
3000
Not Applicable
sip rtp port: 3000
Example
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings
sip use basic codecs
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Basic Codecs
(in Web UI)
Description
Enables or disables basic codecs. Enabling this parameter allows the IP
phone to use the basic Codecs when sending/receiving RTP packets.
Format
Boolean
0
Default Value
Range
0 - Disable
1 - Enable
Example
sip use basic codecs: 1
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings
sip out-of-band dtmf
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Force RFC2833 Out-of-Band
DTMF
(in Web UI)
Description
Enables or disables out-of-band DTMF. Enabling this parameter forces
the IP phone to use out-of-band DTMF according to RFC2833.
Format
Boolean
1
Default Value
Range
0 - Disable
1 - Enable
Example
sip out-of-band dtmf: 0
A-110
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings
sip customized codec
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Customized Codec Preference
List
(in Web UI)
Description
Specifies a customized Codec preference list which allows you to use
the preferred Codecs for this IP phone.
Format
Comma-separated list of semicolon-separated values
Not Applicable
Default Value
Range
Valid values for the syntax are:
payload
0 for G.711 m-Law
8 for G.711 a-Law
18 for G.729a
ptime (in milliseconds)
5, 10, 15, 20........90
on, off
silsupp
Example
sip customized codec:
payload=8;ptime=10;silsupp=on,payload=0;ptime=10;
silsupp=off
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings
sip dtmf method
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
DTMF Method
(in Web UI)
Description
Sets the Dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) method to use on the IP
phone.
Format
Boolean
0 (RTP)
Default Value
Range
0 (RTP)
1 (SIP INFO)
2 (BOTH)
Example
sip dtmf method: 1
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip srtp mode
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
RTP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
RTP Encryption
(in Web UI)
Description
This parameter determines if SRTP is enabled on this IP phone, as
follows:
•
•
•
If set to 0, then disable SRTP.
If set to 1 then SRTP calls are preferred.
If set to 2, then SRTP calls only are generated/accepted.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0 (SRTP Disabled)
0 (SRTP Disabled)
1 (SRTP Preferred)
2 (SRTP Only)
Example
sip srtp mode: 1
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings
sip silence suppression
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Silence Suppression
(in Web UI)
Description
Silence suppression is enabled by default on the IP phones. The phone
negotiates whether or not to use silence suppression. Disabling this
feature forces the phone to ignore any negotiated value.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
1 (enabled)
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
Example
sip silence suppression: 0
A-112
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Per-Line Settings
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings
sip lineN dtmf method
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
DTMF Method
(in Web UI)
Description
Sets the Dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) method to use on the IP
phone for a specific line.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0 (RTP)
0 (RTP)
1 (SIP INFO)
2 (BOTH)
Example
sip line1 dtmf method: 1
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Line <1-9>->RTP Settings
sip lineN srtp mode
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
This parameter determines if SRTP is enabled on this line, as follows:
•
If set to -1, then use the global setting for this line. (This is the
default setting.)
•
•
•
If set to 0, then disable SRTP.
If set to 1 then SRTP calls are preferred.
If set to 2, then SRTP calls only are generated/accepted.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0 (disabled)
-1
0
1
2
Example
sip line1 mode: 1
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Autodial Settings
Global Settings
Parameter –
sip autodial number
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Autodial Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Autodial Number
(in Web UI)
Description
Globally specifies the SIP phone number that the IP phone autodials
when the handset is lifted from the phone cradle. An empty (blank)
value disables autodial on the phone.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
Blank
Any valid SIP number
sip autodial number: 8500
Examples
A-114
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip autodial timeout
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Autodial Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Autodial Timeout
(in Web UI)
Description
Globally specifies the time, in seconds, that the phone waits to dial a
preconfigured number after the handset is lifted from the IP phone
cradle.
If this parameter is set to 0 (hotline), the phone immediately dials a
preconfigured number when you lift the handset. If this parameter is set
to a value greater than 0, the phone waits the specified number of
seconds before dialing the preconfigured number (warmline) when you
lift the handset.
Default is 0 (hotline).
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
0 to 120
Examples
sip autodial timeout: 30
Per-Line Settings
Parameter –
sip lineN autodial number
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Advanced Settings->LineN->Autodial Settings
Autodial Number
(in Web UI)
Description
On a per-line basis, this parameter specifies the SIP phone number that
the IP phone autodials when the handset is lifted from the phone cradle.
Valid values can be:
-1
(Default) The phone uses the global
autodial setting for this line.
Blank
(Empty field) Disables autodial on this line.
Valid SIP Number Dials the SIP number specified for this line.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
-1
Any valid SIP number.
Examples
sip line1 autodial number: 8500
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->LineN->Autodial Settings
sip lineN autodial timeout
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
AutoDial Timeout
(in Web UI)
Description
On a per-line basis, this parameter specifies the time, in seconds, that
the phone waits to dial a preconfigured number after the handset is
lifted from the IP phone cradle.
If this parameter is set to 0 (hotline), the phone immediately dials a
preconfigured number when you lift the handset. If this parameter is set
to a value greater than 0, the phone waits the specified number of
seconds before dialing the preconfigured number (warmline) when you
lift the handset.
Default is 0 (hotline).
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
0 to 120
Examples
sip line1 autodial timeout: 30
A-116
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Voicemail Settings
Parameter –
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
sip lineN vmail
Note: The value of "N" is 1 - 9
for 9143i, 9480i, 9480i CT, 53i,
55i, 57i, 57i CT.
Description
Use this parameter in the <mac>.cfg file to configure the phone to dial a
specific number to access an existing voicemail account on a Service
Provider’s server. The user then follows the voicemail instructions for
listening to voicemails.
Note: The phone must have a registered voicemail account from a
server for this feature to be enabled.
When no registered voicemail accounts are registered to the phone, the
display shows "List Empty".
The phone displays up to 99 voicemails for an account even if the
number of voicemails exceeds the limit.
Registered account numbers/URIs that exceed the length of the screen,
either with or without the voicemail icon and the message count, are
truncated with an ellipse character at the end of the number/URI string.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
0 to 99
Example
sip line1 vmail: *97
Note: In the above example, the user would dial *97 to access the
voicemail account.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Directory Settings
Parameter –
directory 1
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Operation->Directory
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Directory List
(in Web UI)
Description
The name of a directory list that you can download from the configuration
server.
Format
Alphanumeric characters
Not Applicable
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
directory 1: companylist.csv
Parameter –
directory 2
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Operation->Directory
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Directory List
(in Web UI)
Description
The name of a directory list that you can download from the configuration
server.
Format
Alphanumeric characters
Not Applicable
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
directory 2: personallist.csv
A-118
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
directory disabled
Description
Enables or disables the Directory on the IP phone.
If this parameter is set to 0, users can access the Directory List via the IP
phone UI. If this parameter is set to 1, the Directory List does not display
on the IP phone and the Directory key is disabled. On the 57i and 57i CT
the "Directory" option is also removed from the "Services" menu.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (false)
0 (false), 1 (true)
directory disabled: 1
Example
Callers List Settings
Parameter –
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
callers list disabled
Description
Enables or disables the Callers List.
If this parameter is set to 0, the Callers List can be accessed by all users.
If this parameter is set to 1, the IP phone does not save any caller
information to the Caller List. For 57i and 57i CT phones, the "Caller List"
option on the IP phone is removed from the Services menu, and the Caller
List key is ignored if pressed by the user.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (false)
0 (false), 1 (true)
callers list disabled: 1
Example
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Customize Callers List and Services Key
Parameter –
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
services script
Description
Allows you to specify a specific URI for accessing services after
pressing the Services key. When this parameter is set, it overrides the
standard function of the Services key.
Format
Alphanumeric characters
Default Value
Range
N/A
N/A
Example
services script: http://10.50.100.234/test.xml
Parameter –
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
callers list script
Description
Allows you to specify a specific URI for accessing the Callers List after
pressing the Callers List key. When this parameter is set, it overrides
the standard function of the Callers List key.
Format
Alphanumeric characters
Default Value
Range
N/A
N/A
Example
callers list script: http://10.50.100.234/test.xml
A-120
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Call Forward Settings
Parameter –
IP Phone UI
Options->Call Forward
call forward disabled
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Account Configuration
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Enables or disables the ability to configure Call Forwarding. If this
parameter is set to 0, a user and administrator can configure Call
Forwarding via the Aastra Web UI and the IP Phone UI using the "Call
Forward" options. If this parameter is set to 1, all "Call Forward" options
are removed from the Aastra Web UI and the IP Phone UI, preventing the
ability to configure Call Forwarding.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (false)
0 (false), 1 (true)
call forward disabled: 1
Example
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Call Forward Key Mode Settings
Parameter –
call forward key mode
Aastra Web UI:
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Basic Settings->Preferences->General
Description
Sets the mode for how the phone uses “call forwarding” (CFWD)
•
account
The account mode allows you to configure CFWD on a per account
basis. Pressing a configured CFWD key applies to the account in
focus.
•
phone
The Phone mode allows you to set the same CFWD configuration
for all accounts (All, Busy, and/or No Answer). When you
configure the initial account, the phone applies the configuration to
all other accounts. (In the Aastra Web UI, only the account you
configured is enabled. All other accounts are grayed out but set to
the same configuration.) Using the Aastra Web UI, if you make
changes to that initial account, the changes apply to all accounts on
the phone.
•
custom
The Custom mode allows you to configure CFWD for a specific
account or all accounts. You can configure a specific mode (All,
Busy, and/or No Answer) for each account independently or all
accounts. On the 9143i, 51i, and 53i phones, you can set all
accounts to ALL On or ALL Off. On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i,
and 57i CT, you can set all accounts to All On, All Off, or copy the
configuration for the account in focus to all other accounts using a
CopytoAll softkey.
Notes:
1. If there is no CFWD key configured on the phone or it is removed,
you can still set the CFWD modes via the IP Phone UI at the path
Options->Call Forward.
2. If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the
mode setting is ignored and the phone behaves as if the mode was set
to “Phone”.
3. When configuring a CFWD mode (All, Busy, No Answer) for an
account, you must configure a CFWD number for that mode in order for
the mode to be enabled.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0 (account)
0 (account)
1 (phone)
2 (custom)
Example
call forward key mode: 2
A-122
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Example
The following is an example of configuring the CFWD key mode in the
configuration files:
call forward key mode: 2
softkey1 type: call forward
softkey1 states: idle connected incoming outgoing busy
In the above example, softkey 1 is configured for CFWD on line 1 (account 1)
with a “custom” configuration. Pressing softkey 1 displays CFWD screens for
which you can customize on the phone.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
LLDP-MED and ELIN Settings
Parameter–
lldp
Configuration Files
IP Phone UI
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->Ethernet&VLAN->
LLDP Support
LLDP Support
(IP Phone UI)
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Network->
Advanced Network Settings
LLDP
(in Web UI)
Description
Enables or disables Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint
Devices (LLDP-MED) on the IP Phone.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
1 (enabled)
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
Example
lldp: 0
Parameter–
lldp interval
Configuration Files
Aastra Web UI
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Advanced Settings->Network->
Advanced Network Settings
LLDP Packet Interval
(in Web UI)
Description
The amount of time, in seconds, between the transmission of LLDP Data
Unit (LLDPDU) packets. The value of zero (0) disables this parameter.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
30
0 to 2147483647
lldp interval: 60
Example
A-124
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter–
use lldp elin
Configuration Files
Aastra Web UI
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Basic Settings->Preferences->General
Use LLDP ELIN
(in Web UI)
Description
Enables or disables the use of an Emergency Location Identification Number
(ELIN) received from LLDP as a caller ID for emergency numbers.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
1 (enabled)
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
Example
use lldp elin: 0
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Missed Calls Indicator Settings
Parameter –
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
missed calls indicator
disabled
Description
Enables or disables the Missed Calls Indicator. If the "missed calls
indicator disabled" parame.ter is set to 0, the indicator increments as
unanswered calls come into the IP phone. If the "missed calls indicator
disabled" parameter is set to 1, the indicator is disabled and will NOT
increment as unanswered calls come into the IP phone.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (false)
0 (false), 1 (true)
missed calls indicator disabled: 1
Example
A-126
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
XML Settings
Parameter –
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
xml get timeout
Description
Allows you to specify a timeout value, in seconds, that the phone waits
for the far side to return a response after accepting the HTTP GET
connection. If the far side accepts the GET connection but never returns
a response, it blocks the phone until it is rebooted. If you enter a value
greater than 0 for this parameter, the phone times out and will not be
blocked.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0 (never timeout)
0 to 214748364 seconds
xml get timeout: 20
Example
Parameter –
xml application URI
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Operation->Softkeys and XML->Services
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
XML Application URI
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
This is the XML application you are loading into the IP phone configuration.
HTTP server path or fully qualified Domain Name
Not Applicable
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
xml application URI: http://172.16.96.63/aastra/internet.php
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
xml application title
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Operation->Softkeys and XML->Services
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
XML Application Title
(in Web UI)
Description
This parameter allows you to rename the XML application in the IP phone
UI (Services->4. Custom Feature). By default, when you load an XML
application to the IP phone, the XML application title is called "Custom
Feature". The "xml application title" parameter allows you to change that
title.
For example, if you are loading a traffic report XML application, you could
change this parameter title to "Traffic Reports", and that title will display in
the IP phone UI as Services->4. Traffic Reports.
Format
Alphanumeric characters
Not Applicable
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
xml application title: Traffic Reports
Parameter –
xml application post list
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
XML Push Server List
(Approved IP Addresses)
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
The HTTP server that is pushing XML applications to the IP phone.
IP address in dotted decimal format and/or Domain name address
Not Applicable
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
xml application post list: 10.50.10.53,
dhcp10-53.ana.aastra.com
A-128
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI
Basic Settings->Preferences
xml beep notification
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
XML Beep Support
(in Web UI)
Description
Enables or disables a BEEP notification on the phone when a status
message object (AastraIPPhoneStatus) containing a “beep” attribute
arrives to the phone.
Changes to this parameter are applied immediately.
Format
Boolean
1 (ON)
Default Value
Range
0 (OFF)No beep is audible even if the beep attribute is present in
the XML object.
1 (ON)The phone beeps when an XML object with the “beep”
attribute arrives to the phone.
Example
xml beep notification: 0
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI
Basic Settings->Preferences
xml status scroll delay
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Status Scroll Delay (seconds)
(in Web UI)
Description
Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that each XML status
message displays on the phone.
Note: Changes to this parameter are applied immediately.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
5
1 to 25
Example
xml status scroll delay: 3
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Action URI Settings
Parameter –
action uri startup
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Action URI
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Startup
(in Web UI)
Description
Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when a startup
event occurs.
Format
Fully qualified URI
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Up to 128 ASCII characters
action uri startup: http://10.50.10.140/startup
Example
Parameter –
action uri registered
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Action URI
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Successful Registration
(in Web UI)
Description
Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when a
successful registration event occurs. This parameter can use the
following variables:
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$SIPAUTHNAME$$
$$PROXYURL$$
$$LINESTATE$$
$$LOCALIP$$
Note: The “action uri registered” parameter executes on the first
successful registration of each unique line configured on the phone.
Format
Fully qualified URI
Not Applicable
Default Value
Range
Up to 128 ASCII characters
Example
action uri registered: http://10.50.10.14/registered.php?auth
name=$$SIPAUTHNAME$$
A-130
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
action uri incoming
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Action URI
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Incoming Call
(in Web UI)
Description
Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an
incoming call event occurs. This parameter can use the following
variables:
$$REMOTENUMBER$$
$$DISPLAYNAME$$
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$INCOMINGNAME$
$$LINESTATE$$
$$CALLDURATION$$
$$CALLDIRECTION$$
Format
Fully qualified URI
Not Applicable
Default Value
Range
Up to 128 ASCII characters
Example
action uri incoming: http://10.50.10.140/
incoming.php?number=$$REMOTENUMBER$$
Parameter –
action uri outgoing
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Action URI
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Outgoing Call
(in Web UI)
Description
Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an
outgoing call event occurs. This parameter can use the following
variables:
$$REMOTENUMBER$$
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$LINESTATE$$
Format
Fully qualified URI
Not Applicable
Default Value
Range
Up to 128 ASCII characters
Example
action uri outgoing: http://10.50.10.140/
outgoing.php?number=$$REMOTENUMBER$$
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
action uri offhook
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Action URI
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Offhook
(in Web UI)
Description
Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an
offhook event occurs. This parameter can use the following variable:
$$LINESTATE$$
Format
Fully qualified URI
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Up to 128 ASCII characters
action uri offhook: http://10.50.10.140/offhook
Example
Parameter –
action uri onhook
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Action URI
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Onhook
(in Web UI)
Description
Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an
onhook event occurs. This parameter can use the following variable:
$$LOCALIP$$
$$CALLDURATION$$
$$CALLDIRECTION$$
$$LINESTATE$$
Note: The “LocalIP”, “CallDuration”, and “CallDirection” variables allow
for enhanced information in call records and billing applications.
Format
Fully qualified URI
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Up to 128 ASCII characters
action uri onhook: http://10.50.10.140/onhook
Example
A-132
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter–
action uri disconnected
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Action URI->Event
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Specifies the URI that the phone executes a GET on, when it transitions from
the incoming, outgoing, calling, or connected state into the idle state.
This parameter uses the following variable to determine the state of the line:
$$LINESTATE$$
Format
String
Default Value
Range
No Applicable
Any valid URI
Example
action uri disconnected: http://fargo.ana.aastra.com/
disconnected.xml?state=$$LINESTATE$$
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
XML SIP Notify Settings
Parameter –
sip xml notify event
Aastra Web UI:
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Enables or disables the phone to accept or reject an aastra-xml SIP
NOTIFY message.
Note: To ensure the SIP NOTIFY is coming from a trusted source, it is
recommended that you enable the Whitelist feature (Whitelist Proxy
parameter) on the IP phone. If enabled, and the phone receives a SIP
NOTIFY from a server that is NOT on the whitelist (i.e. untrusted
server), the phone rejects the message.
Format
Boolean
0
Default Value
Range
0 - disabled
1 - enabled
Example
sip xml notify event: 1
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI:
Advanced Settings->Action URI
action uri xml sip notify
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Specifies the URI to be called when an empty XML SIP NOTIFY is
received by the phone.
Note: The sip xml notify event parameter must be enabled.
Format
HTTP(s) server path or Fully Qualified Domain Name
Default Value
Range
N/A
N/A
Example
action uri xml sip notify: http://myserver.com/myappli.xml
A-134
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Ring Tone and Tone Set Global Settings
Parameter –
IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI:
Configuration Files
Options->Tones->Set Ring Tone
Basic Settings->Preferences->Ring Tones
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
ring tone
Global Ring Tone
(in Web UI)
Description
Globally sets the type of ring tone on the IP phone. Ring tone can be set
to one of six distinct rings.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Aastra Web UI:
IP Phone UI:
Tone 1
Tone 1
Configuration Files: 0 (Tone 1)
Range
Aastra Web UI & IP Phone UI
Tone 1
Tone 2
Tone 3
Tone 4
Tone 5
Silent
Configuration Files
0 (Tone 1)
1 (Tone 2)
2 (Tone 3)
3 (Tone 4)
4 (Tone 5)
5 (Silent)
Example
ring tone: 3
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI:
Configuration Files
Options->Tones->Tone Set
Basic Settings->Preferences->Ring Tones
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
tone set
Tone Set
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
Globally sets a tone set for a specific country.
Text
US
Default Value
Range
Australia
Europe (generic tones)
France
Germany
Italy
Mexico
United Kingdom (UK)
US (also used in Canada)
Example
tone set: Germany
A-136
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Ring Tone Per-Line Settings
Parameter –
lineN ring tone
Aastra Web UI:
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Preferences->Ring Tones
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
N=1 through 9
Line N
(in Web UI)
Description
Sets the type of ring tone on the IP phone on a per-line basis. Ring tone
can be set to one of six distinct rings.
Note: LineN is applicable to lines 1 through 9. Not applicable to the 51i.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Aastra Web UI:
Global
Configuration Files:
-1 (Global)
Range
Aastra Web UI
Global
Tone 1
Tone 2
Tone 3
Tone 4
Tone 5
Silent
Configuration Files
-1 (Global)
0 (Tone 1)
1 (Tone 2)
2 (Tone 3)
3 (Tone 4)
4 (Tone 5)
5 (Silent)
Example
line1 ring tone 3
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing Setting
Parameter –
incoming call cancels dialing
Aastra Web UI:
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Preferences->General
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Incoming Call Interrupts
Dialing
(in Web UI)
Description
Enables or disables how the phone handles incoming calls while the
phone is dialing out.
When you enable this parameter (1 = true), an incoming call interrupts the
outgoing call during dialing and allows the phone to ring for the user to
answer the incoming call.
When you disable this parameter (0 = disable), which is the default, the
phone does not interrupt the outgoing call during dialing and the number
you were dialling continues to display in the LCD. The phones sends the
incoming call to a free line on the phone (or sends busy signal if all
remaining lines are busy) and the LED for that line blinks. You have a
choice to ignore the incoming call, or answer the incoming call on another
line, via the Ignore and Answer softkeys that display. If you choose to
answer the incoming call, you can answer the call, finish the call, and then
hang up. You can still go back to the original outgoing call and finish
dialing out.
Notes:
1. On a 9143i, 51i, and 53i, you must use the up and down arrow keys to
ignore or answer the call.
2. On all phone models, if you disable this parameter (0=disable), and the
phone receives an incoming call while you are dialing an outgoing call,
you can pick up the call and perform transfer or conference as required.
After enabling or disabling this feature, it takes affect on the phone
immediately.
A-138
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Description (Cont’d)
Transfer/Conference Call Behavior
If you are dialing the phone to transfer or conference a call, and your
phone receives an incoming call, your dialing is never interrupted
(regardless of whether the “Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing” is enabled or
disabled). For Transfer and Conference, the incoming calls always go to
an available line (other than the one you are using for dialing) and the
incoming call’s line LED blinks. The LCD still displays your dialing screen.
Intercom Behavior
If “Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing” (or incoming call cancels dialing
in config files) is enabled and you are dialing an outgoing Intercom call,
the enabled interrupt setting takes precedence over an enabled “Allow
Barge In” setting. The incoming call interrupts your dialing on an outgoing
intercom call. On an incoming intercom call, the enabled “Allow Barge
In” and “Auto-Answer” occurs while you are dialing to transfer or
conference the call. However, the incoming call goes to an available idle
line, and the LED blinks while you are dialing the second half of the
conference or transfer.
If “Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing” (or incoming call cancels dialing
in config files) is disabled, an incoming intercom goes to an available idle
line and the LED blinks for that line. The phone answers the call under all
conditions.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (disable)
0 (disable)
1 (enable)
Example
incoming call cancels dialing: 1
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Switch Focus to Ringing Line
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI:
Basic Settings->Preferences->General
switch focus to ringing line
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Specifies whether or not the UI focus is switched to a ringing line while
the phone is in the connected state.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
1 (enable)
0 (disable)
1 (enable)
Example
switch focus to ringing line: 1
A-140
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout
Parameter–
preferred line
Configuration Files
Aastra Web UI
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Basic Settings->Preferences->General
Preferred Line
(in Web UI)
Description
Specifies the preferred line to switch focus to when incoming or outgoing
calls end on the phone.
Format
Integer
1
Default Value
Range
0 (none - disables the preferred line focus feature)
1 to 9
Example
preferred line: 2
Parameter–
preferred line timeout
Configuration Files
Aastra Web UI
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Basic Settings->Preferences->General
Preferred Line Timeout
(seconds)
(in Web UI)
Description
Specifies the time, in seconds, that the phone switches back to the preferred
line after a call (incoming or outgoing) ends on the phone, or after a duration
of inactivity on an active line.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0 (the phone returns the line to the preferred line immediately)
0 to 999
Example
preferred line timeout: 30
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call
Parameter –
goodbye cancels incoming
call
Aastra Web UI:
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Preferences->General
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Goodbye Key Cancels
Incoming Call
(in Web UI)
Description
Enable or disables the behavior of the Goodbye Key on the IP phone.
When you enable this parameter (1 = enable), the Goodbye key rejects
the incoming call. When you disable this parameter (0 = disable), the
Goodbye key hangs up the active call.
For the 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT:
If you enable this parameter, and the phone receives another call when
an active call is already present, the phone displays softkey 1 as
“answer” and softkey 2 as “ignore”. You can press the required softkey
as applicable.
For the 9143i, 51i, 53i:
If you enable this parameter, and the phone receives another call when
an active call is already present, the “ignore” option only displays in the
LCD window. The phone ignores the incoming call. If you press the
DOWN arrow key, the phone answers the incoming call.
Note: After enabling or disabling this feature, it takes affect on the phone
immediately.
Format
Boolean
1 (true)
Default Value
Range
0 (false)
1 (true)
Example
goodbye cancels incoming call: 0
A-142
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Stuttered Dial Tone Setting
Parameter –
stutter disabled
Aastra Web UI:
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Preferences->General
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Stuttered Dial Tone
(in Web UI)
Description
Enable or disables the playing of a stuttered dial tone when there is a
message waiting on the IP phone.
Format
Boolean
0 (false)
Default Value
Range
0 (false)
1 (true)
Example
stuttered disabled: 1
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Call Waiting Settings
Parameter –
call waiting
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Preferences->General
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Call Waiting
(in Web UI)
Description
Allows you to enable or disable Call Waiting on the IP phone.
If you enable call waiting (default), the user has the option of accepting a
second call while currently on the first call. If you disable call waiting, and
a user is currently on a call, a second incoming call is automatically
rejected by the phone with a busy message.
If you disable call waiting on the phone, and the user is on a call, any
further incoming calls will receive busy unless “Call Forward Busy” or “Call
Forward No Answer and Busy” is configured on the phone. It will then
forward the call according to the rule configured. The phone can only:
•
-transfer the currently active call
or
•
accept transferred calls if there is no active calls.
If call waiting is disabled:
•
on the 57i CT base, and the handset is currently on a call, all additional
incoming calls are rejected on the handset.
•
•
•
intercom calls are treated as regular incoming calls and are rejected.
pre-dialing with live dial pad disabled still accepts incoming calls.
the “Incoming Call Cancels Dialing” parameter is ignored because the
incoming call is automatically rejected.
•
•
the Missed Calls List does not get updated with details of calls.
the Blind Transfer feature on the phone may not work if two calls are
made to the phone at one time.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
1 (enabled)
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
Example
call waiting: 0
A-144
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
call waiting tone
Aastra Web UI:
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Preferences->General
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Play Call Waiting Tone
(in Web UI)
Description
Enable or disables the playing of a call waiting tone when a caller is on an
active call and a new call comes into the phone.
Note: The Call Waiting Tone feature works only if the Call Waiting
parameter is enabled.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
1 (enabled)
0 (disable)
1 (enabled)
Example
call waiting tone: 0
Message Waiting Indicator Settings
Parameter –
mwi led line
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Preferences->General
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Message Waiting Indicator
Line
(in Web UI)
Description
Allows you to enable the Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) on a single
line or on all lines on the phone. For example, if you set this parameter to
3, the LED illuminates if a voice mail is pending on line 3. If you set this
parameter to 0, the LED illuminates if a voice mail is pending on any line
on the phone (lines 1 through 9).
Note: To enable MWI for all lines in the configuration files, set this
parameter to zero (0). The enable MWI for all lines in the Aastra Web UI,
select “All” in the “Message Waiting Indicator Line” field.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0 (all lines)
0 to 9
Example
mwi led line: 3
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
DND Key Mode Settings
Parameter –
dnd key mode
Aastra Web UI:
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Basic Settings->Preferences->General
Description
Sets the mode for how the phone uses “do not disturb” (DND):
•
•
•
account
Sets DND for a specific account.
DND key toggles the account in focus on the
IP Phone UI, to ON or OFF.
phone
Sets DND ON for all accounts on the phone.
DND key toggles all accounts on the phone to ON or
OFF.
Sets the phone to display custom screens after
pressing the DND key, that list the account(s)
on the phone. The user can select a specific
account for DND, turn DND ON for all accounts,
or turn DND OFF for all accounts.
custom
Notes:
1. If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the mode
setting is ignored and the phone behaves as if the mode was set to
“Phone”.
2. You must configure a DND key on the phone to use this feature. To
configure a DND key, see “Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/
Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-184.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
1 (phone)
0 (account)
1 (phone)
2 (custom)
Example
dnd key mode: 2
Example
The following is an example of configuring the mode for DND in the
configuration files:
dnd key mode: 2
softkey1 type: dnd
softkey1 states: idle connected incoming outgoing busy
In the above example, softkey 1 is configured for DND for line 1 only, with a
“custom” configuration. Pressing softkey 1 displays DND screens for which you
can customize on the phone.
A-146
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Priority Alert Settings
Parameter –
priority alerting enabled
Aastra Web UI:
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Priority Alerting Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
Enable Priority Alerting
(in Web UI)
Description
Enables and disables distinctive ringing on the IP phone for incoming
calls and call-waiting calls.
Format
Boolean
1 (true)
Default Value
Range
0 (false)
1 (true)
Example
priority alerting enabled: 0
For Sylantro Server only
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI:
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Priority Alerting Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
alert auto call distribution
Configuration Files
auto call distribution
(in Web UI)
Description
When an "alert-acd" keyword appears in the header of the INVITE
request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Normal ringing
0
1
2
3
4
5
Normal ringing (default)
Bellcore-dr2
Bellcore-dr3
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
Silent
Example
alert auto call distribution: 2
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI:
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Priority Alerting Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
alert community 1
Configuration Files
community-1
(in Web UI)
Description
When an "alert community-1” keyword appears in the header of the
INVITE request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP
phone.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Normal ringing
0
1
2
3
4
5
Normal ringing (default)
Bellcore-dr2
Bellcore-dr3
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
Silent
Example
alert community 1: 3
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI:
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Priority Alerting Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
alert community 2
Configuration Files
community-2
(in Web UI)
Description
When an "alert community-2” keyword appears in the header of the
INVITE request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP
phone.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Normal ringing
0
1
2
3
4
5
Normal ringing (default)
Bellcore-dr2
Bellcore-dr3
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
Silent
Example
alert community 2: 4
A-148
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
alert community 3
Aastra Web UI:
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Priority Alerting Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
community-3
(in Web UI)
Description
When an "alert community-3” keyword appears in the header of the
INVITE request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP
phone.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Normal ringing
0
1
2
3
4
5
Normal ringing (default)
Bellcore-dr2
Bellcore-dr3
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
Silent
Example
alert community 3: 1
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI:
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Priority Alerting Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
alert community 4
Configuration Files
community-4
(in Web UI)
Description
When an "alert community-4” keyword appears in the header of the
INVITE request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP
phone.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Normal ringing
0
1
2
3
4
5
Normal ringing (default)
Bellcore-dr2
Bellcore-dr3
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
Silent
Example
alert community 4: 2
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI:
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Priority Alerting Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
alert external
Configuration Files
alert external
(in Web UI)
Description
When an "alert external" keyword appears in the header of the INVITE
request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Normal ringing
0
1
2
3
4
5
Normal ringing (default)
Bellcore-dr2
Bellcore-dr3
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
Silent
Example
alert external: 4
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI:
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Priority Alerting Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
alert emergency
Configuration Files
alert emergency
(in Web UI)
Description
When an "alert emergency" keyword appears in the header of the INVITE
request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Normal ringing
0
1
2
3
4
5
Normal ringing (default)
Bellcore-dr2
Bellcore-dr3
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
Silent
Example
alert emergency: 4
A-150
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI:
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Priority Alerting Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
alert group
Group
(in Web UI)
Description
When an "alert group" keyword appears in the header of the INVITE
request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Normal ringing
0
1
2
3
4
5
Normal ringing (default)
Bellcore-dr2
Bellcore-dr3
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
Silent
Example
alert group: 4
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI:
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Priority Alerting Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
alert internal
Configuration Files
alert internal
(in Web UI)
Description
When an "alert-internal" keyword appears in the header of the INVITE
request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Normal ringing
0
1
2
3
4
5
Normal ringing (default)
Bellcore-dr2
Bellcore-dr3
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
Silent
Example
alert internal: 4
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI:
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Priority Alerting Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
alert priority
Configuration Files
alert priority
(in Web UI)
Description
When an "alert priority" keyword appears in the header of the INVITE
request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Normal ringing
0
1
2
3
4
5
Normal ringing (default)
Bellcore-dr2
Bellcore-dr3
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
Silent
Example
alert priority: 4
Bellcore Cadence Settings
Parameter–
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
bellcore cadence dr2
Description
Sets the cadence for Bellcore-dr2.
Note: You can define up to 8 cadence rings. The value of -1 indicates “do not
repeat”.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
800,400, 800,4000
N/A
Example
bellcore cadence dr2: 800, 400, 800, 4000
A-152
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter–
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
bellcore cadence dr3
Description
Sets the cadence for Bellcore-dr3.
Note: You can define up to 8 cadence rings. The value of -1 indicates “do not
repeat”.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
400,200,400,200,800,4000
N/A
Example
bellcore cadence dr3: 400,200,400,200,800,4000
Parameter–
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
bellcore cadence dr4
Description
Sets the cadence for Bellcore-dr4.
Note: You can define up to 8 cadence rings. The value of -1 indicates “do not
repeat”.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
300,200,1000,200,300,4000
N/A
Example
bellcore cadence dr4: 300,200,1000,200,300,300,200,4000
Parameter–
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
bellcore cadence dr5
Description
Sets the cadence for Bellcore-dr5.
Note: You can define up to 8 cadence rings. The value of -1 indicates “do not
repeat”.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
500,-1
N/A
Example
bellcore cadence dr5: 500,-1
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Language Settings
Parameter –
IP Phone UI
Options->Language
language
Aastra Web UI
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Language Settings->Webpage Language
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Webpage Language
Configuration File
(in Web UI)
Description
The language you want to display in the IP Phone UI and the Aastra Web
UI.
Valid values for 9143i, 9480i, 51i, 53i, 55i, 57i are:
0 (English)
1 (French)
2 (Spanish)
3 (German)
4 (Italian)
Valid values for 9480i CT and 57i CT cordless handsets are:
0 (English)
1 (French)
2 (Spanish)
Note: All languages may not be available for selection. The available
languages are dependant on the language packs currently loaded to the
IP phone. For more information about loading language packs, see
“Loading Language Packs” on page -30.
Format
Integer
0
Default Value
Range
0 to 4 (for 9143i, 9480i, 51i, 53i, 55i, 57i)
0 to 2 (for 9480i CT and 57i CT)
Example
language: 2
language: 3
language: 4
A-154
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter–
IP Phone UI:
Language->Input Language
input language
Aastra Web UI:
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Preferences->Language Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Input Language
(in Web UI)
Description
Allows you to specify the language to use for inputs on the IP Phone.
Entering a language value for this parameter allows users to enter text and
characters in the IP Phone UI, Aastra Web UI, and in XML applications via
the keypad on the phone, in the language(s) specified.
Format
Text
Default Value
Range
English
Valid values are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
English
French
Français
German
Deutsch
Italian
Italiano
Spanish
Español
Example
input language: French
input language: Español
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Language Pack Settings
Parameter –
language N
Aastra Web UI
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Language Settings
<mac>.cfg
Configuration File
Language N
(in Web UI)
Where “N” can be 1, 2, 3, or
4
Description
The language pack you want to load to the IP phone.
Valid values are:
lang_de.txt
lang_es.txt
(German)*
(Spanish)
lang_es_mx.txt (Mexican Spanish)
lang_fr.txt (French)
lang_fr_ca.txt (Canadian French)
lang_it.txt
(Italian)
Notes:
1. The languages packs you load are dependant on available language
packs from the configuration server. For more information about loading
language packs, see “Loading Language Packs” on page -30.
Format
lang_<ISO 639>_<ISO 3166>.txt
or
lang_<ISO 639>.txt
Note: For valid values for <ISO 639> and <ISO 3166>, see “Language
Codes (from Standard ISO 639)” on page A-157 and “Country Codes
(from Standard ISO 3166)” on page A-157.
Default Value
Range
N/A
N/A
Example
language 1: lang_fr_ca.txt
language 2: lang_es_mx.txt
language 3: lang_de.txt
language 4: lang_it.txt
A-156
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
The following table identifies the language code to use for the IP phone language
packs.
Language Codes (from Standard ISO 639)
Language
Language Code
English
en
European French
French Canadian
European Spanish
Mexican Spanish
German
fr
fr_ca
es
es_mx
de
Italian
it
The following table identifies the country codes to use for the IP phone language
packs.
Country Codes (from Standard ISO 3166)
Country
Country Code
AFGHANISTAN
ÅLAND ISLANDS
ALBANIA
AF
AX
AL
DZ
ALGERIA
AMERICAN SAMOA
ANDORRA
ANGOLA
ANGUILLA
AS
AD
AO
AI
ANTARCTICA
ANTIGUA AND BARBUDA
ARGENTINA
ARMENIA
ARUBA
AUSTRALIA
AQ
AG
AR
AM
AW
AU
AT
AUSTRIA
AZERBAIJAN
AZ
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Country
Country Code
BAHAMAS
BAHRAIN
BANGLADESH
BARBADOS
BELARUS
BELGIUM
BELIZE
BENIN
BS
BH
BD
BB
BY
BE
BZ
BJ
BERMUDA
BHUTAN
BOLIVIA
BOSNIA AND HERZEGOVINA
BOTSWANA
BOUVET ISLAND
BRAZIL
BRITISH INDIAN OCEAN TERRITORY
BRUNEI DARUSSALAM
BULGARIA
BM
BT
BO
BA
BW
BV
BR
IO
BN
BG
BF
BI
BURKINA FASO
BURUNDI
CAMBODIA
CAMEROON
CANADA
CAPE VERDE
CAYMAN ISLANDS
CENTRAL AFRICAN REPUBLIC
CHAD
CHILE
CHINA
CHRISTMAS ISLAND
COCOS (KEELING) ISLANDS
COLOMBIA
COMOROS
CONGO
KH
CM
CA
CV
KY
CF
TD
CL
CN
CX
CC
CO
KM
CG
CD
CK
CR
CI
CONGO, THE DEMOCRATIC REPUBLIC OF THE
COOK ISLANDS
COSTA RICA
CÔTE D'IVOIRE
CROATIA
CUBA
CYPRUS
HR
CU
CY
CZ
CZECH REPUBLIC
A-158
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Country Code
Country
DENMARK
DJIBOUTI
DK
DJ
DOMINICA
DOMINICAN REPUBLIC
DM
DO
ECUADOR
EGYPT
EL SALVADOR
EQUATORIAL GUINEA
ERITREA
EC
EG
SV
GQ
ER
EE
ET
ESTONIA
ETHIOPIA
FALKLAND ISLANDS (MALVINAS)
FAROE ISLANDS
FIJI
FK
FO
FJ
FINLAND
FI
FRANCE
FR
GF
PF
TF
FRENCH GUIANA
FRENCH POLYNESIA
FRENCH SOUTHERN TERRITORIES
GABON
GAMBIA
GA
GM
GE
DE
GH
GI
GR
GL
GD
GP
GU
GT
GEORGIA
GERMANY
GHANA
GIBRALTAR
GREECE
GREENLAND
GRENADA
GUADELOUPE
GUAM
GUATEMALA
GUERNSEY
GUINEA
GG
GN
GW
GY
GUINEA-BISSAU
GUYANA
HAITI
HT
HM
VA
HN
HK
HU
HEARD ISLAND AND MCDONALD ISLANDS
HOLY SEE (VATICAN CITY STATE)
HONDURAS
HONG KONG
HUNGARY
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Country
Country Code
ICELAND
INDIA
INDONESIA
IRAN, ISLAMIC REPUBLIC OF
IS
IN
ID
IR
IQ
IE
IM
IL
IRAQ
IRELAND
ISLE OF MAN
ISRAEL
ITALY
IT
JAMAICA
JAPAN
JERSEY
JORDAN
JM
JP
JE
JO
KAZAKHSTAN
KENYA
KIRIBATI
KZ
KE
KI
KOREA, DEMOCRATIC PEOPLE'S REPUBLIC OF
KOREA, REPUBLIC OF
KUWAIT
KP
KR
KW
KG
KYRGYZSTAN
LAO PEOPLE'S DEMOCRATIC REPUBLIC
LATVIA
LEBANON
LESOTHO
LIBERIA
LIBYAN ARAB JAMAHIRIYA
LIECHTENSTEIN
LITHUANIA
LA
LV
LB
LS
LR
LY
LI
LT
LU
LUXEMBOURG
A-160
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Country
Country Code
MACAO
MO
MACEDONIA, THE FORMER YUGOSLAV REPUBLIC OF
MADAGASCAR
MALAWI
MALAYSIA
MALDIVES
MALI
MALTA
MARSHALL ISLANDS
MARTINIQUE
MAURITANIA
MAURITIUS
MK
MG
MW
MY
MV
ML
MT
MH
MQ
MR
MU
YT
MAYOTTE
MEXICO
MX
FM
MD
MC
MN
ME
MS
MA
MZ
MM
MICRONESIA, FEDERATED STATES OF
MOLDOVA, REPUBLIC OF
MONACO
MONGOLIA
MONTENEGRO
MONTSERRAT
MOROCCO
MOZAMBIQUE
MYANMAR
NAMIBIA
NAURU
NEPAL
NETHERLANDS
NETHERLANDS ANTILLES
NEW CALEDONIA
NEW ZEALAND
NICARAGUA
NIGER
NIGERIA
NIUE
NORFOLK ISLAND
NORTHERN MARIANA ISLANDS
NORWAY
NA
NR
NP
NL
AN
NC
NZ
NI
NE
NG
NU
NF
MP
NO
OMAN
OM
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Country
Country Code
PAKISTAN
PALAU
PALESTINIAN TERRITORY, OCCUPIED
PANAMA
PAPUA NEW GUINEA
PARAGUAY
PERU
PHILIPPINES
PITCAIRN
PK
PW
PS
PA
PG
PY
PE
PH
PN
PL
POLAND
PORTUGAL
PUERTO RICO
PT
PR
QATAR
QA
RÉUNION
ROMANIA
RUSSIAN FEDERATION
RWANDA
RE
RO
RU
RW
A-162
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Country Code
Country
SAINT HELENA
SAINT KITTS AND NEVIS
SAINT LUCIA
SAINT PIERRE AND MIQUELON
SAINT VINCENT AND THE GRENADINES
SAMOA
SAN MARINO
SAO TOME AND PRINCIPE
SAUDI ARABIA
SENEGAL
SERBIA
SEYCHELLES
SIERRA LEONE
SINGAPORE
SH
KN
LC
PM
VC
WS
SM
ST
SA
SN
RS
SC
SL
SG
SK
SI
SLOVAKIA
SLOVENIA
SOLOMON ISLANDS
SOMALIA
SOUTH AFRICA
SB
SO
ZA
SOUTH GEORGIA AND THE SOUTH SANDWICH ISLANDS
SPAIN
SRI LANKA
SUDAN
SURINAME
SVALBARD AND JAN MAYEN
SWAZILAND
SWEDEN
SWITZERLAND
SYRIAN ARAB REPUBLIC
GS
ES
LK
SD
SR
SJ
SZ
SE
CH
SY
TAIWAN, PROVINCE OF CHINA
TAJIKISTAN
TW
TJ
TANZANIA, UNITED REPUBLIC OF
THAILAND
TIMOR-LESTE
TZ
TH
TL
TOGO
TOKELAU
TONGA
TRINIDAD AND TOBAGO
TUNISIA
TG
TK
TO
TT
TN
TR
TM
TC
TV
TURKEY
TURKMENISTAN
TURKS AND CAICOS ISLANDS
TUVALU
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Country
Country Code
UGANDA
UKRAINE
UG
TA
UNITED ARAB EMIRATES
UNITED KINGDOM
UNITED STATES
UNITED STATES MINOR OUTLYING ISLANDS
URUGUAY
AE
GB
US
TM
UY
UZ
UZBEKISTAN
VANUATU
VU
Vatican City State
VENEZUELA
VIET NAM
VIRGIN ISLANDS, BRITISH
VIRGIN ISLANDS, U.S.
see HOLY SEE
VE
VN
VG
VI
WALLIS AND FUTUNA
WESTERN SAHARA
WF
EH
YEMEN
Zaire
YE
see CONGO, THE DEMOCRATIC
REPUBLIC OF THE
ZAMBIA
ZIMBABWE
ZM
ZW
A-164
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Suppress DTMF Playback Setting
Parameter –
suppress dtmf playback
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Preferences
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Suppress DTMF Playback
(in Web UI)
Description
Enables and disables suppression of DTMF playback when a number is
dialed from the softkeys or programmable keys.
When you disable the suppression of DTMF playback and you press a
softkey or programmable key, the IP phone dials the stored number and
displays each digit as dialed in the LCD window. When you enable the
suppression of DTMF playback, the IP phone dials the stored number and
displays the entire number immediately in the LCD window, allowing the
call to be dialed faster.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (disabled)
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
Example
suppress dtmf playback: 1
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Display DTMF Digits Setting
Parameter –
display dtmf digits
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Preferences->General
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Display DTMF Digits
(in Web UI)
Description
Enables and disables the display of DTMF digits when dialing on the IP
phone.
DTMF is the signal sent from the phone to the network that you generate
when you press the phone’s touch keys. This is also known as “touchtone”
dialing. Each key you press on your phone generates two tones of specific
frequencies. One tone is generated from a high-frequency group of tones
and the other from a low frequency group.
If enabled, this parameter displays the digits on the IP phone display if you
are dialing from the keypad, or from a softkey or programmable key. This
parameter is disabled by default (no digits display when dialing).
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (disabled)
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
Example
display dtmf digits: 1
A-166
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Intercom, Auto-Answer, and Barge In Settings
Outgoing Intercom Settings
Parameter –
sip intercom type
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Outgoing Intercom Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Type
(in Web UI)
Description
Determines whether the IP phone or the server is responsible for notifying
the recipient that an Intercom call is being placed.
Format
Integer
Default Value
For Aastra Web UI:
Off
For Configuration Files:
3 - Off
Range
For Aastra Web UI:
Phone-Side
Server-Side
Off
For Configuration Files:
1 - Phone-Side
2 - Server-Side
3 - Off
Example
sip intercom type: 1
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip intercom prefix code
Aastra Web UI
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Outgoing Intercom Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
Prefix Code
(in Web UI)
Description
The prefix to add to the phone number for server-side outgoing Intercom
calls. This parameter is required for all server-side Intercom calls.
Note: The example below shows *96 for the prefix code which is used for
Sylantro servers.
Format
String
Default Value
Range
N/A
N/A
Example
sip intercom prefix code: *96
Parameter –
sip intercom line
Aastra Web UI
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Outgoing Intercom Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
Line
(in Web UI)
Description
Specifies the line for which the IP phone uses the configuration from,
when making the Intercom call. The IP phone uses the first available line
for physically making the call but uses the configuration from the line you
set for this parameter.
Note: The "sip intercom type" parameter must be set with the Server-Side
option to enable the "sip intercom line" parameter.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
1
Line 1 through 9
sip intercom line: 1
Example
A-168
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Incoming Intercom Settings
Parameter –
sip allow auto answer
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Incoming Intercom Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Auto-Answer
(in Web UI)
Description
Enables or disables the IP phone to allow automatic answering for an
Intercom call. If auto-answer is enabled on the IP phone, the phone plays
a tone to alert the user before answering the intercom call. If auto-answer
is disabled, the phone rejects the incoming intercom call and sends a busy
signal to the caller.
Format
Boolean
1 (true)
Default Value
Range
0 (false - do not allow auto-answer)
1 (true - allow auto-answer)
Example
sip allow auto answer: 0
Parameter –
sip intercom mute mic
Aastra Web UI
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Incoming Intercom Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
Microphone Mute
(in Web UI)
Description
Enables or disables the microphone on the IP phone for Intercom calls
made by the originating caller.
Format
Integer
1 (true)
Default Value
Range
0 (false - microphone is not muted)
1 (true - microphone is muted)
Example
sip intercom mute mic: 1
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip intercom warning tone
Aastra Web UI
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Incoming Intercom Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
Play Warning Tone
(in Web UI)
Description
Enables or disables a warning tone to play when the phone receives an
incoming intercom call on an active line.
Format
Integer
1 (true)
Default Value
Range
0 (false - warning tone will not play)
1 (true - warning tone will play)
Example
sip intercom warning tone: 0
Parameter –
sip intercom allow barge in
Aastra Web UI:
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Incoming Intercom Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
Allow Barge In
(in Web UI)
Description
Enable or disables how the phone handles incoming intercom calls while
the phone is on an active call.
When you enable this parameter (1 = enable), which is the default value,
an incoming intercom call takes precedence over any active call, by
placing the active call on hold and automatically answering the intercom
call.
When you disable this parameter (0 = disable), and there is an active call,
the phone treats an incoming intercom call like a normal call and plays the
call warning tone.
Note: After enabling or disabling this feature, it takes affect on the phone
immediately.
Format
Boolean
1 (true)
Default Value
Range
0 (false)
1 (true)
Example
sip intercom allow barge in: 0
A-170
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Group Paging RTP Settings
Parameter –
paging addr list
Aastra Web UI:
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Group Paging RTP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Specifies the multicast address(es) and the port on which the phone
listens for incoming multicast RTP packets.
Note: If this field is blank, Paging listening capability is disabled on the
phone.
Format
IP Address in dotted decimal format/Port #
Default Value
Range
N/A
N/A
Example
paging addr list: 224.0.0.2:10000,239.0.1.20:15000 0
Example
The following is an example of configuring RTP streaming for Paging
applications using the configuration files:
paging addr list: 224.0.0.2:10000,239.0.1.20:15000
softkey1 type: multicast
softkey1 label: Group 1
softkey1 value: 224.0.0.2:10000,239.0.1.20:15000
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Audio Transmit and Receive Gain Adjustment Settings
Parameter –
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
headset tx gain
Description
This is the increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of signal
transmitted from the headset microphone to t he far-end party. The amount
of Tx gain in the IP phone firmware has been reduced to avoid side-tone
and echo on the local and far-end equipment. This parameter allows you
to adjust the Tx gain settings to best suit your comfort level and
deployment environment.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
-10 db to +10 db
headset tx gain: -5
Example
Parameter –
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
headset sidetone gain
Description
This is the is the increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of sidetone
signal from the headset microphone to the headset speaker. The amount
of sidetone gain in the IP phone firmware has been reduced to avoid
side-tone and echo on the local and far-end equipment. This parameter
allows you to adjust the sidetone gain settings to best suit your comfort
level and deployment environment.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
-10 db to +10 db
Example
headset sidetone gain: -1
A-172
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
handset tx gain
Description
This is the increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of signal
transmitted from the handset microphone to the far-end party. The amount
of Tx gain in the IP phone firmware has been reduced to avoid side-tone
and echo on the local and far-end equipment. This parameter allows you
to adjust the Tx gain settings to best suit your comfort level and
deployment environment.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
-10 db to +10 db
handset tx gain: -5
Example
Parameter –
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
handset sidetone gain
Description
This is the increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of sidetone signal
from the handset microphone to the handset speaker. The amount of
sidetone gain in the IP phone firmware has been reduced to avoid
side-tone and echo on the local and far-end equipment. This parameter
allows you to adjust the sidetone gain settings to best suit your comfort
level and deployment environment.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
-10 db to +10 db
Example
handset sidetone gain: -1
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
handsfree tx gain
Description
This is the increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of signal
transmitted from the base microphone to the far-end party. The amount of
Tx gain in the IP phone firmware has been reduced to avoid side-tone and
echo on the local and far-end equipment. This parameter allows you to
adjust the Tx gain settings to best suit your comfort level and deployment
environment.
Note: The example below increases the speakerphone mic transmit gain
by 10 db.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
-10 db to +10 db
Example
handsfree tx gain: 10
A-174
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
IP Phone UI
Options->Set Audio
audio mode
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Format
Allows you to configure how the "handsfree" key on the IP phone operates.
Integer
0
Default Value
Range
0
Speaker - Calls can be made or received using the handset or
handsfree speakerphone and can be switched between the two
modes by pressing the d /fkey. When on speaker, you can return to
using the handset by placing the handset on the cradle and
picking it up again.
1
2
3
Headset - Calls can be made or received using the headset. Calls
can be switched between the headset and handset by pressing the d
/fkey.
Speaker/headset - Incoming calls are sent to the speakerphone. By
pressing the d /f key, you can switch between the handsfree
speakerphone, the headset, and the handset.
Headset/speaker - Incoming calls are sent to the headset. By
pressing the d /fkey, you can switch between the headset, the
handsfree speakerphone, and the handset.
Example
audio mode: 2
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception) Settings
Parameter –
directed call pickup
Aastra Web UI
Basic Settings->Preferences
->Directed Call Pickup Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
Directed Call Pickup
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
Enables or disables the use of "directed call pickup" feature.
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (disabled)
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
Example
directed call pickup: 1
Parameter –
directed call pickup prefix
Aastra Web UI
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Directed Call Pickup Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Directed Call Pickup by Prefix
(in Web UI)
Description
Allows you to enter a specific prefix string (depending on what is
available on your server), that the phone automatically dials when
dialing the Directed Call Pickup number.
For example, for Broadsoft servers, you can enter a value of *98 for the
“directed call pickup prefix”. When the phone performs the Directed
Call Pickup after pressing a BLF or BLF/List softkey, the phone
prepends the *98 value to the designated extension of the BLF or BLF/
List softkey when dialing out.
Notes:
1. The default method for the phone to use is Directed Call Pickup over
BLF if the server provides applicable information. If the Directed Call
Pickup over BLF information is missing in the messages to the server,
the Directed Call Pickup by Prefix method is used if a value for the prefix
code exists in the configuration.
2. You can define only one prefix at a time for the entire BLF/List.
3. The phone that picks up displays the prefix code + the extension
number (for example, *981234 where prefix key = *98, extension =
1234).
4. Symbol characters are allowed (for example “*”).
A-176
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Example
directed call pickup prefix: *98
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI
Basic Settings->Preferences
play a ring splash
->Directed Call Pickup Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
Play a Ring Splash
(in Web UI)
Description
Enables or disables the playing of a short "call waiting tone" when there is
an incoming call on the BLF monitored extension. If the host tone is idle,
the tone plays a "ring splash".
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (disabled)
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
Example
play a ring splash: 1
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
ACD Auto-Available Timer Settings
Parameter –
acd auto available
Aastra Web UI
Basic Settings->Preferences
->Auto Call Distribution Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
Auto Available
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
Enables or disables the use of the ACD Auto-Available Timer.
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (disabled)
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
Example
acd auto available: 1
Parameter –
acd auto available timer
Aastra Web UI
Basic Settings->Preferences
->Auto Call Distribution Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
Auto Available Timer
(in Web UI)
Description
Specifies the length of time, in seconds, before the IP phone status
switches back to “available.”
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
60 (seconds)
0 to 120 (seconds)
acd auto available timer: 60
Example
A-178
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Park and Pickup Global Settings (9480i, 9480i CT, 57i/57i CT only)
Parameter –
sprecode
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Preferences
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Park Call
(in Web UI)
Description
Specifies the code to enter before entering the extension for where you
want to park an incoming call. The applicable value is dependant on the
type of server in the network:
Server
Park Values*
Asterisk
Sylantro
BroadWorks
ININ PBX
70
*98
*68
callpark
*Leave "value" fields blank to disable the park and pickup feature.
Format
Alphanumeric characters
<Blank>
Default Value
Range
See applicable values in the table above.
sprecode: *68
Example
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
pickupsprecode
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Preferences
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Pick Up Parked Call
(in Web UI)
Description
Specifies the code to enter before entering the extension for where you
want to pickup a parked call. The applicable value is dependant on the
type of server in the network:
Server
Pickup Values*
Asterisk
70
Sylantro
*99
BroadWorks
ININ PBX
*88
pickup
*Leave "value" fields blank to disable the park and pickup feature.
Alphanumeric characters
Format
Default Value
Range
<Blank>
See applicable values in the table above.
pickupsprecode: *88
Example
A-180
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Mapping Key Settings
This section provides the hard key settings you can use to enable and disable the
Redial, Conf, and Xfer keys on the IP phone.
Parameter –
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
redial disabled
Description
Enables or disables the Redial key on the IP phone. If this parameter is set
to 0, the key is active and can be pressed by the user. If this parameter is
set to 1, pressing the Redial key is ignored, and the dialed number is not
saved to the "Redial List".
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (false)
0 (false), 1 (true)
redial disabled: 1
Example
Parameter –
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
conference disabled
Description
Enables or disables the Conf key on the IP phone. If this parameter is set
to 0, the key is active and can be pressed by the user. If this parameter is
set to 1, pressing the Conf key is ignored.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (false)
0 (false), 1 (true)
conference disabled: 1
Example
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
call transfer disabled
Description
Enables or disables the Xfer key on the IP phone. If this parameter is set
to 0, the key is active and can be pressed by the user. If this parameter is
set to 1, pressing the Xfer key is ignored.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (false)
0 (false), 1 (true)
call transfer disabled: 1
Example
Parameter –
map redial key to
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Preferences->Key Mapping
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Map Redial Key To
(in Web UI)
Description
Sets the Redial key as a speeddial key if a value is entered for this
parameter. If you leave this parameter blank, the Redial key returns to its
original functionality.
Note: If you configure the Redial key for speeddialing on the 57i CT Base
Station, the Redial key on the 57i CT handset retains its original
functionality. The Redial key on the handset is not configured for
speeddial.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
N/A
N/A
Example
map redial key to: 5551234
A-182
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
map conf key to
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Preferences->Key Mapping
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Map Conf Key To
(in Web UI)
Description
Sets the Conf key as a speeddial key if a value is entered for this
parameter. If you leave this parameter blank, the Conf key returns to its
original functionality.
Note: If you configure the Conf key for speeddialing on the 57i CT Base
Station, the Conf key on the 57i CT handset retains its original
functionality. The Conf key on the handset is not configured for speeddial.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
N/A
N/A
Example
map conf key to: 5551267
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/
Expansion Module Key Parameters
This section provides the softkey, programmable key, feature key, and expansion
module key parameters you can configure on the IP phones. The following table
provides the number of keys you can configure for each model phone and
expansion module, and the number of lines available for each type of phone.
Handset
IP Phone
Model
Expansion Module
Keys
Programmable
Keys
Lines
Available
Keys
Softkeys
Available
9143i
9480i
-
6
6
-
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
7
-
9
9
9
9
-
-
9480i CT
53i
-
15
-
36 to 108*
6***
(Model 536M)
55i
6 Bottom Keys
36 to 108*
6 Top Keys
9
9
9
-
(Model 536M)
60 to 180**
(Model 560M)
57i
12 Top and
36 to 108*
-
-
-
Bottom Softkeys
(Model 536M)
60 to 180**
(Model 560M)
57i CT
12 Top and
36 to 108* on Base
Station
15
Bottom Softkeys
60 to 180** on Base
Station
(Model 560M)
*The 536M expansion module consists of 36 softkeys. You can have up to 3 expansion modules on an IP
phone totaling 108 softkeys. Valid for 53i, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT phones.
**The 560M expansion module consists of 60 softkeys. You can have up to 3 expansion modules on an IP
phone totaling 180 softkeys. Valid for 55i, 57i, and 57i CT phones.
***On the 53i, two of the 6 programmable keys are the DELETE and SAVE keys and can be programmed
only if Administrator allows.
Note: When entering definitions for softkeys, the “#” sign must be
enclosed in quotes.
A-184
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters
Softkey Settings for 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, 57i CT
The value of "N" for the following parameters is dependent on the number of
softkeys available on the 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT models. See the
table above for applicable values.
Parameter –
softkeyN type
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Operation->Softkeys and XML
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Type
(in Web UI)
Description
The type of softkey to configure. Valid types are:
•
•
•
none - Indicates softkey key is disabled.
line - Indicates softkey is configured for line use.
speeddial - Indicates softkey is configured for speeddial use.
Speeddial is applicable to the 536M and 560M also. You can
configure a softkey to speeddial a specific number by pressing that
softkey. Optionally, you can also configure a speeddial key to dial
prefix numbers. With this option, the prefix numbers automatically dial
when you press the softkey, and the phone waits for you to enter the
remaining numbers to dial out.
Note: When there is an active call, the speeddial keys send DTMF
digits through the active voice path. To dial out, you have to first put
the active call on hold and then press the speeddial key.
dnd - Indicates softkey is configured for do not disturb on the phone.
set the DND key mode. See
blf - Indicates softkey is configured for Busy Lamp Field (BLF) use.
User can dial out on a BLF configured key. Maximum of 50 BLFs are
applicable to the 536M and 560M also.
list - Indicates softkey is configured for BLF list use. (This option is
BLF/List in the Aastra Web UI). User can dial out on a BLF List
configured key. You can also use the “BLF List URI” parameter to
specify a URI for the phone to access for the BLF List.
•
•
•
•
•
acd - (for Sylantro Servers only) Indicates the programmable key is
configured for auto call distribution (called “Auto call distribution” in
the Aastra Web UI). The ACD feature allows the Sylantro server to
distribute calls from a queue to registered IP phone users (agents).
dcp - (for Sylantro Servers only) Indicates the programmable key is
configured for either directed call pickup or group call pickup (called
“Directed Call Pickup” in the Aastra Web UI). The Directed Call
Pickup/Group Call Pickup feature allows you to intercept or pickup a
call on a monitored extension or a group of monitored extensions.
xml - Indicates the softkey is configured to accept an XML application
for accessing customized XML services. You can also specify an XML
softkey URL for this option.
•
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters
•
webapps - Indicates the softkey is hardcoded to access an Aastra
XML-based application (xml.myaastra.com). By default, Softkey 1 is
assigned as the WebApps key on the 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and
57i CT. (Not applicable to the CT handsets). Also accessible from the
Services menu on these phones.
•
•
flash - Indicates the softkey is set to generate a flash event when it is
pressed, or a feature key is pressed on the CT handsets. The IP
phone generates flash events only when a call is connected and there
is an active RTP stream (for example, when the call is not on hold).
sprecode - Indicates the softkey is configured to automatically
activate specific services offered by the server. For example, if the
sprecode value of *82 is configured, then by pressing the softkey, *82
automatically activates a service provided by the server.
park - Indicates the softkey is configured to park incoming calls when
pressed.
•
•
•
•
pickup - Indicates the softkey is configured to pick up parked calls
when pressed.
lcr - Indicates the softkey is configured for “last call return” when
pressed.
call forward - Indicates the softkey is configured for accessing the
Call Forward features on the phone. A Call Forwarding Mode must be
enabled to use this softkey. “Account” mode is the default.
blf/xfer - Indicates the softkey is configured to transfer calls AND
configured for BLF on a single key.
speeddial/xfer - Indicates the softkey is configured to transfer calls
AND configured for speeddialing to a specific number.
directory - Indicates the softkey is set for accessing the Directory
List.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
callers - Indicates the softkey is set for accessing the Callers List.
icom - Indicates the softkey is set to be used as the Intercom key.
services - Indicates the softkey is set to be used as the Services key.
phonelock - Indicates the softkey is set to be used to lock/unlock the
phone.
•
paging - Indicates the softkey is set for Group Paging on the phone.
Pressing this key automatically sends a Real Time Transport Protocol
(RTP) stream to pre-configured multicast address(es) without
involving SIP signaling.
•
empty - Indicates the softkey is configured to force a blank entry on
the IP phone display for a specific softkey.
The softkeys are added in order (from softkey1 to softkey20) after any
hard-coded keys have been added. If a particular soft key is not defined,
it is ignored.
Format
Text
Default Value
none
A-186
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters
Range
none
line
speeddial
dnd ("do not disturb" in the Aastra Web UI)
blf
list ("BLF\List" in the Aastra Web UI)
acd (“Auto call distribution” in the Aastra Web UI)
dcp (“Directed Call Pickup” in the Aastra Web UI)
xml
webapps
flash
sprecode
park
pickup
lcr
call forward
BLF/Xfer
Speeddial/Xfer
callers (“Callers List” in Aastra Web UI)
directory
icom
services
phonelock
paging
empty
Example
softkey1 type: line
softkey2 type: speeddial
softkey3 type: lcr
softkey4 type: xml
Directed Call Pickup on Extension 2200
softkey2 type: dcp
softkey2 label: dcp2200
softkey2 value: 2200
softkey2 states: incoming outgoing idle connected
Group Call Pickup on group_A
softkey3 type: dcp
softkey3 label: gcp_A
softkey3 value: groupcallpickup
softkey3 states: incoming outgoing idle connected
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters
Parameter –
softkeyN label
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Operation->Softkeys and XML
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Label
(in Web UI)
Description
The text label that displays on the IP phone for the softkey.
The “softkeyN label” parameter can be set for the following softkey types
only:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
speeddial
BLF
acd
dcp
XML
WebApps
Flash
sprecode
Park
Pickup
BLF/Xfer
Speeddial/Xfer
Directory
Callers List
Icom
Services
Paging
Notes:
1. For the 9480i, 9480i CT, 57i, and 57i CT phones, an icon appears
beside the soft key label that indicates the status of the line.
2. If the softkeyN type parameter is set to "flash", and no label value is
entered for the softkeyN label parameter, the label of "Flash" is used.
Format
Text
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
For line, blf types - Up to 9 characters.
For speeddial type - Up to 11 characters.
Example
softkey1 label: “Line 9”
softkey2 label: “info”
softkey3 label: flash
softkey4 label: “johnsmith”
A-188
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters
Parameter –
softkeyN value
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Operation->Softkeys and XML
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Value
(In Web UI)
Description
This is the value you assign to the softkey.
The “softkeyN value” parameter can be set for the following softkey types
only:
•
speeddial (you can enter a speeddial number for this field;
optionally, you can also enter a prefix for the
speeddial value to allow the phone to dial the prefix
after you press the speeddial softkey; you then
enter the rest of the number from the keypad on the
phone.)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
BLF
sprecode
Park
Pickup
dcp
XML
BLF/Xfer
Speeddial/Xfer
Paging
Notes:
number to enter for the softkey.
2. For blf - Value is the extension you want to monitor.
3. For sprecode - Value is dependent on services offered by server.
4. For Park, Pickup - For valid values, see Chapter 5, the section,
“Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values” on page -223. For
Park/Pickup examples, see Chapter 5, the section, “Model 57i/57i CT
and 9480i/9480i CT Examples” on page -221.
5. For xml - You can specify a URI to use for this XML softkey. The
variables you can use with the XML softkey URI are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$SIPAUTHNAME$$
$$PROXYURL$$
$$LINESTATE$$
$$LOCALIP$$
$$REMOTENUMBER$$
$$DISPLAYNAME$$
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$INCOMINGNAME$$
$$CALLDURATION$$
$$CALLDIRECTION$$
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
N/A
Example
softkey1 value: 9
softkey2 value: 411
softkey4 value: http://10.50.10.140 script.pl?name=$$SIPUSERNAME$$
softkey5 value: 123456+ (example of a speeddial prefix)
A-190
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters
Parameter –
softkeyN line
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Operation->Softkeys and XML
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Line
(in Web UI)
Description
This is the line associated with the softkey you are configuring. The
number of applicable lines available is dependent on the specific IP
phone model.
The “softkeyN line” parameter can be set for the following softkey types
only:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
speeddial
BLF
BLF/List
acd
dcp
Park
Pickup
lcr
BLF/Xfer
Speeddial/Xfer
Format
Integer
1
Default Value
Range
1 through 9
Example
softkey1 line: 1
softkey2 line: 5
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters
Parameter –
softkeyN states
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Operation->Softkeys and XML
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Idle, Connected, Incoming,
Outgoing, Busy
(in Web UI)
Description
Displays the status of the phone when a softkey is pressed. You can
enter multiple values (idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy) for
the "softkeyN state" parameter.
You must associate the softkeyN state parameter with a specific softkey.
In the following example, the softkeyN states parameter is associated
with softkey 12:
softkey12 type: speeddial
softkey12 label: voicemail
softkey12 value *89
softkey12 states: outgoing
Note: The IP phone idle screen condenses the softkeys. So in the
previous example, softkey 12 will appear in position 1 if no other softkeys
are set. A softkey type of "empty" does not display on the idle screen at
all.
Format
Text
Default Value
For softkey type - None:
All states disabled
For softkey types - Line, DND, speeddial, BLF, BLF List, dcp, XML,
WebApps, lcr, Call Forward, BLF/Xfer, Speeddial/Xfer, Directory,
Callers List, Icom, Services, empty:
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing
For softkey type - Flash:
All states disabled
For softkey type - Sprecode, Park:
connected
For softkey type - Pickup:
idle, outgoing
For softkey type - acd:
idle
A-192
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters
Range
Valid values are:
idle
The phone is not being used.
connected
The line currently being displayed is
in an active call (or the call is on hold)
The phone is ringing.
The user is dialing a number, or the
far-end is ringing.
incoming
outgoing
busy
The current line is busy because the line is in use or
the line is set as “Do Not Disturb”
Note: For softkey type, Pickup, values can be: just idle, just outgoing, or
idle outgoing.
Example
softkey1 states: idle incoming outgoing
softkey2 states: connected
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters
Programmable Key Settings for 9143i, 53i, and 55i
•
The value of "N" for the following parameters is dependent on the number of
programmable keys available on the phone models. See the table on page 184
for the applicable values.
Parameter –
prgkeyN type
Aastra Web UI
Operation->Programmable Keys
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Type
(in Web UI)
Description
The type of programmable key to configure. Valid types are:
•
•
•
none - Indicates no setting for programmable key.
line - Indicates programmable key is configured for line use.
speeddial - Indicates programmable key is configured for speeddial
use. You can configure a programmable key to speeddial a specific
number by pressing that key. Optionally, you can also configure a
speeddial key to dial prefix numbers. With this option, the prefix
numbers automatically dial when you press the programmable key,
and the phone waits for you to enter the remaining numbers to dial.
Note: When there is an active call, the speeddial keys send DTMF
digits through the active voice path. To dial out, you have to first put
on the phone. This option is "Do Not Disturb" in the Aastra Web
UI).
•
•
•
blf - Indicates programmable key is configured for Busy Lamp Field
(BLF) use. User can dial out on a BLF configured key.
list - Indicates programmable key is configured for BLF list use.
User can dial out on a BLF List configured key. You can also use the
“BLF List URI” parameter to specify a URI for the phone to access
for the BLF List.
•
•
acd - (for Sylantro Servers only) Indicates the programmable key is
configured for auto call distribution (called “Auto Call Distribution”
in the Aastra Web UI). The ACD feature allows the Sylantro server
to distribute calls from a queue to registered IP phone users
(agents).
dcp - (for Sylantro Servers only) Indicates the programmable key is
configured for either directed call pickup or group call pickup (called
“Directed Call Pickup” in the Aastra Web UI). The Directed Call
Pickup/Group Call Pickup feature allows you to intercept or pickup a
call on a monitored extension or a group of monitored extensions.
xml - Indicates programmable key is configured to accept an XML
application for accessing customized XML services. You can also
specify an XML softkey URL for this option.
•
•
webapps - Indicates the key is hardcoded to access an Aastra
XML-based application (xml.myaastra.com). This option is also
accessible from the Services menu on the 51i, 53i, and 9143i.
A-194
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters
•
•
flash - Indicates programmable key is set to generate a flash event
when it is pressed. The IP phone generates flash events only when
a call is connected and there is an active RTP stream (for example,
when the call is not on hold).
sprecode - Indicates programmable key is configured to
automatically activate specific services offered by the server. For
example, if the sprecode value of *82 is configured, then by
pressing the softkey, *82 automatically activates a service provided
by the server.
•
•
•
•
park - Indicates programmable key is configured to park incoming
calls when pressed.
pickup - Indicates programmable key is configured to pick up
parked calls when pressed.
lcr - Indicates programmable key is configured for “last call return”
when pressed.
call forward - Indicates the softkey is configured for accessing the
Call Forward features on the phone. A Call Forwarding Mode must
be enabled to use this softkey. “Account” mode is the default.
blf/xfer - Indicates the softkey is configured to transfer calls AND
configured for BLF on a single key.
speeddial/xfer - Indicates the softkey is configured to transfer calls
AND configured for speeddialing to a specific number.
directory - Indicates programmable key is configured to access the
Directory List.
•
•
•
•
•
callers - Indicates programmable key is configured to access the
Callers List.
conference - Indicates programmable key is configured as a
conference key. Enter as “conf” in configuration files.
transfer - Indicates programmable key is configured as a Transfer
key for transferring calls. Enter as “xfer” in configuration files.
phonelock - Indicates the programmable key is set to be used to
lock/unlock the phone.
paging - Indicates the softkey is set for Group Paging on the phone.
Pressing this key automatically sends a Real Time Transport
Protocol (RTP) stream to pre-configured multicast address(es)
without involving SIP signaling.
•
•
•
•
empty - Indicates programmable key is configured to force a blank
entry on the IP phone display for a specific programmable key.
Format
Text
Default Value
Not Applicable
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters
Range
none
line
speeddial
dnd ("do not disturb" in the Aastra Web UI)
blf
list (“BLF/List” in the Aastra Web UI)
acd (“Auto call distribution” in the Aastra Web UI)
dcp (“Directed Call Pickup” in the Aastra Web UI)
xml
webapps
flash
sprecode
park
pickup
lcr
call forward
directory
callers(“Callers List” in Aastra Web UI)
conf
xfer
BLF/Xfer
Speeddial/Xfer
phonelock
paging
empty
Example
prgkey3 type: speeddial
A-196
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters
Parameter –
prgkeyN value
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Operation->Programmable Keys
Value
(in Web UI)
Description
This is the value you assign to the programmable key.
The “prgkeyN value” parameter can be set for the following softkey types
only:
•
speeddial (you can enter a speeddial number for this field;
optionally, you can also enter a prefix for the
speeddial value to allow the phone to dial the prefix
after you press the speeddial programmable key;
you then enter the rest of the number from the
keypad on the phone.)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
line
BLF
sprecode
dcp
XML
Park
Pickup
BLF/Xfer
Speeddial/Xfer
Paging
Notes:
1.
For speeddial - Value is the phone number, extension, or prefix
number to enter for the programmable key.
2.
3.
4.
5.
For line - Value is optional; for example L4.
For blf - Value is the extension you want to monitor.
For sprecode - Value is dependent on services offered by server.
For xml - You can specify a URI to use for this XML softkey. The
variables you can use with the XML softkey URI are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$SIPAUTHNAME$$
$$PROXYURL$$
$$LINESTATE$$
$$REMOTENUMBER$$
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$INCOMINGNAME$$
$$CALLDURATION$$
$$CALLDIRECTION$
6.
For Park, Pickup - For valid values, see Chapter 5, the section,
“Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values” on page -223. For
Park/Pickup examples, see Chapter 5, the section “Model 53i and
9143i Examples” on page -222.
Format
Integer
N/A
Default Value
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters
Range
N/A
Example
prgkey3 value: 411
prgkey4 value: 123456+ (example of a speeddial prefix)
Parameter–
Aastra Web UI
Operation->Programmable Keys
prgkeyN line
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Line
(in Web UI)
Description
This is the line associated with the programmable key you are
configuring.
The “prgkeyN line” parameter can be set for the following softkey types
only:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
speeddial
BLF
BLF/List
acd
dcp
Park
Pickup
lcr
BLF/Xfer
Speeddial/Xfer
Format
Integer
1
Default Value
Range
1 through 9
Example
prgkey3 line: 1
prgkey4 line: 5
A-198
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters
Top Softkey Settings for 57i and 57i CT
Parameter –
topsoftkeyN type
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Operation->Softkeys and XML
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Top Softkeys->Type
(in Web UI)
Description
The type of softkey to configure. Valid types are:
•
•
•
none - Indicates softkey is disabled.
line - Indicates softkey is configured for line use.
speeddial - Indicates softkey is configured for speeddial use.
You can configure a softkey to speeddial a specific number by
pressing that softkey. Optionally, you can also configure a speeddial
key to dial prefix numbers. With this option, the prefix numbers
automatically dial when you press the softkey, and the phone waits
for you to enter the remaining numbers to dial out.
Note: When there is an active call, the speeddial keys send DTMF
digits through the active voice path. To dial out, you have to first put
the active call on hold and then press the speeddial key.
dnd - Indicates softkey is configured for do not disturb on the phone.
This option is "Do Not Disturb" in the Aastra Web UI).
blf - Indicates softkey is configured for Busy Lamp Field (BLF) use.
User can dial out on a BLF configured key.
list - Indicates softkey is configured for BLF list use. (This option is
BLF/List in the Aastra Web UI). User can dial out on a BLF List
configured key. You can also use the “BLF List URI” parameter to
specify a URI for the phone to access for the BLF List.
•
•
•
•
•
acd - (for Sylantro Servers only) Indicates the programmable key is
configured for auto call distribution (called “Auto call distribution” in
the Aastra Web UI). The ACD feature allows the Sylantro server to
distribute calls from a queue to registered IP phone users (agents).
dcp - (for Sylantro Servers only) Indicates the programmable key is
configured for either directed call pickup or group call pickup (called
“Directed Call Pickup” in the Aastra Web UI). The Directed Call
Pickup/Group Call Pickup feature allows you to intercept or pickup a
call on a monitored extension or a group of monitored extensions.
xml - Indicates the softkey is configured to accept an XML application
for accessing customized XML services. You can also specify an XML
softkey URL for this option.
webapps - Indicates the softkey is hardcoded to access an Aastra
XML-based application (xml.myaastra.com). By default, Softkey 1 is
assigned as the WebApps key on the 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and
57i CT. (Not applicable to the CT handsets). Also accessible from the
Services menu on these phones.
•
•
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters
•
•
flash - Indicates the softkey is set to generate a flash event when it is
pressed, or a feature key is pressed on the CT handsets. The IP
phone generates flash events only when a call is connected and there
is an active RTP stream (for example, when the call is not on hold).
sprecode - Indicates the softkey is configured to automatically
activate specific services offered by the server. For example, if the
sprecode value of *82 is configured, then by pressing the softkey, *82
automatically activates a service provided by the server.
park - Indicates the softkey is configured to park incoming calls when
pressed.
pickup - Indicates the softkey is configured to pick up parked calls
when pressed.
lcr - Indicates the softkey is configured for “last call return” when
pressed.
call forward - Indicates the softkey is configured for accessing the
Call Forward features on the phone. A Call Forwarding Mode must be
enabled to use this softkey. “Account” mode is the default.
blf/xfer - Indicates the softkey is configured to transfer calls AND
configured for BLF on a single key.
speeddial/xfer - Indicates the softkey is configured to transfer calls
AND configured for speeddialing to a specific number.
callers - Indicates the softkey is set for accessing the Callers List.
directory - Indicates the softkey is set for accessing the Directory
List.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
icom - Indicates the softkey is set to be used as the Intercom key.
services - Indicates the softkey is set to be used as the Services key.
phonelock - Indicates the softkey is set to be used to lock/unlock the
phone.
•
paging - Indicates the softkey is set for Group Paging on the phone.
Pressing this key automatically sends a Real Time Transport Protocol
(RTP) stream to pre-configured multicast address(es) without
involving SIP signaling.
•
empty - Indicates the softkey is configured to force a blank entry on
the IP phone display for a specific softkey. The soft keys are added in
order (from softkey1 to softkey20) after any hard-coded keys have
been added. If a particular soft key is not defined, it is ignored.
Format
Text
Default Value
none
A-200
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters
Range
none
line
speeddial
dnd
blf
list ("BLF\List" in the Aastra Web UI)
acd (“Auto call distribution” in the Aastra Web UI)
dcp (“Directed Call Pickup” in the Aastra Web UI)
xml
webapps
flash
sprecode
call forward
park
pickup
BLF/Xfer
Speeddial/Xfer
lcr
callers (“Callers List” in Aastra Web UI)
directory
icom
services
phonelock
paging
empty
Example
topsoftkey1 type: line
topsoftkey2 type: speeddial
topsoftkey3 type: lcr
topsoftkey4 type: xml
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters
Parameter –
topsoftkeyN label
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Operation->Softkeys and XML
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Top Softkeys->Label
(in Web UI)
Description
The text label that displays on the IP phone for the softkey.
The “topsoftkeyN label” parameter can be set for the following softkey
types only:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
speeddial
BLF
acd
dcp
XML
WebApps
Flash
sprecode
Park
Pickup
BLF/Xfer
Speeddial/Xfer
Paging
Directory
Callers List
Icom
Services
Notes:
1. For the 57i and 57i CT phones, an icon appears beside the soft key
label that indicates the status of the line.
2. If the topsoftkeyN type parameter is set to "flash", and no label value
is entered for the topsoftkeyN label parameter, the label of "Flash" is
used.
Format
Text
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
For line, blf types - Up to 9 characters.
For speeddial type - Up to 11 characters.
Example
topsoftkey1 label: “Line 9”
topsoftkey2 label: “info”
topsoftkey4 label: “johnsmith”
A-202
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters
Parameter –
topsoftkeyN value
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Operation->Softkeys and XML
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Top Softkeys->Value
(In WEb UI)
Description
This is the value you assign to the softkey.
The “topsoftkeyN value” parameter can be set for the following softkey
types only:
•
speeddial (you can enter a speeddial number for this field;
optionally, you can also enter a prefix for the
speeddial value to allow the phone to dial the prefix
after you press the speeddial programmable key;
you then enter the rest of the number from the
keypad on the phone.)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
BLF
sprecode
Park
Pickup
dcp
XML
BLF/Xfer
Speeddial/Xfer
Paging
Notes:
number to enter for the softkey.
2. For blf - Value is the extension you want to monitor.
3. For sprecode - Value is dependent on services offered by server.
4. For Park, Pickup - For valid values, see Chapter 5, the section,
“Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values” on page -223. For
Park/Pickup examples, see Chapter 5, the section, “Model 57i/57i CT
and 9480i/9480i CT Examples” on page -221.
5. For xml - You can specify a URI to use for this XML softkey. The
variables you can use with the XML softkey URI are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$SIPAUTHNAME$$
$$PROXYURL$$
$$LINESTATE$$
$$LOCALIP$$
$$REMOTENUMBER$$
$$DISPLAYNAME$$
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$INCOMINGNAME$$
$$CALLDURATION$$
$$CALLDIRECTION$$
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
N/A
Example
topsoftkey1 value: 9
topsoftkey2 value: 411
topsoftkey4 value: http://10.50.10.140 script.pl?name=$$SIPUSERNAME$$
topsoftkey5 value: 12345+ (example of a speeddial prefix)
A-204
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters
Parameter –
topsoftkeyN line
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Operation->Softkeys and XML
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Top Softkeys->Line
(in Web UI)
Description
This is the line associated with the softkey you are configuring. The
number of applicable lines available is dependent on the specific IP
phone model.
The “topsoftkeyN line” parameter can be set for the following softkey
types only:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
speeddial
BLF
BLF/List
acd
dcp
Park
Pickup
lcr
BLF/Xfer
Speeddial/Xfer
Format
Integer
1
Default Value
Range
1 through 9
Example
topsoftkey1 line: 1
topsoftkey2 line: 5
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters
Handset Feature Key Settings for the 9480i CT and 57i CT
Parameter –
featurekeyN type
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Operation->Handset Keys
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Type
(in Web UI)
Description
The type of feature key to configure. Valid types are:
•
•
•
•
none - Indicates feature key is disabled.
line - Indicates the feature key is configured for line use.
transfer- Indicates feature key is configured for transferring a call.
conference - Indicates feature key is configured for conference
calling.
•
public - Indicates feature key is configured to toggle from public to
private mode. A public and private softkey can be used when at a line
item in the Directory List. The Private key toggles a number in the
Directory List to private. The Public key allows a number in the
Directory List to be sent to the handsets. A 57i CT accepts a
maximum of 50 entries with the public attribute.
icom - Indicates the feature key is set to be used to make an
intercom call.
•
•
directory - Indicates the feature key is set for accessing the Directory
List.
•
•
callers - Indicates the feature key is set for accessing the Callers List.
park- Indicates the feature key is configured to park incoming calls
when pressed.
•
•
pickup- Indicates the feature key is configured to pick up parked calls
when pressed.
flash - Indicates the feature key is set to generate a flash event when
it is pressed CT handsets. The IP phone generates flash events only
when a call is connected and there is an active RTP stream (for
example, when the call is not on hold).
Format
Text
Default Value
None
A-206
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters
Range
none
line
transfer
conference
public
icom
directory
callers (“Callers List” in Aastra Web UI)
park
pickup
flash
Example
featurekey1 type: line
featurekey2 type: public
featurekey3 type: park
featurekey4 type: pickup
Parameter –
featurekeyN label
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Operation->Handset Keys
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Label
(in Web UI)
Description
The text label that displays on the IP phone for the feature key.
Notes:
1. For the 57i CT phones, an icon appears beside the feature key label
that indicates the status of the line.
2. If a feature key is configured but no label is set, the IP phone sets the
label to the English, French, or Spanish translation of the chosen
action. The language used is based on the current language of the
cordless handset.
Format
Text
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Example
featurekey1 label: Line 9
featurekey2 label: Public
featurekey4 label: John Smith
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters
Expansion Module Key Settings for 536M (53i, 55i, 57i, 57i CT)
and 560M (for 55i, 57i, 57i CT)
Parameter –
expmodX keyN type
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Operation->Expansion Module N
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Type
(in Web UI)
Description
The type of softkey to configure. Valid types are:
•
•
•
none - Indicates softkey is disabled.
line - Indicates softkey is configured for line use.
speeddial - Indicates softkey is configured for speeddial use.
You can configure a softkey to speeddial a specific number by
pressing that softkey. Optionally, you can also configure a speeddial
key to dial prefix numbers. With this option, the prefix numbers
automatically dial when you press the softkey, and the phone waits
for you to enter the remaining numbers to dial out.
Note: When there is an active call, the speeddial keys send DTMF
digits through the active voice path. To dial out, you have to first put
the active call on hold and then press the speeddial key.
dnd - Indicates softkey is configured for do not disturb on the phone.
This option is "Do Not Disturb" in the Aastra Web UI).
blf - Indicates softkey is configured for Busy Lamp Field (BLF) use.
User can dial out on a BLF configured key.
list - Indicates softkey is configured for BLF list use. (This option is
BLF/List in the Aastra Web UI). User can dial out on a BLF List
configured key. You can also use the “BLF List URI” parameter to
specify a URI for the phone to access for the BLF List.
•
•
•
•
•
acd - (for Sylantro Servers only) Indicates the programmable key is
configured for auto call distribution (called “Auto call distribution” in
the Aastra Web UI). The ACD feature allows the Sylantro server to
distribute calls from a queue to registered IP phone users (agents).
dcp - (for Sylantro Servers only) Indicates the programmable key is
configured for either directed call pickup or group call pickup (called
“Directed Call Pickup” in the Aastra Web UI). The Directed Call
Pickup/Group Call Pickup feature allows you to intercept or pickup a
call on a monitored extension or a group of monitored extensions.
xml - Indicates the softkey is configured to accept an XML application
for accessing customized XML services. You can also specify an XML
softkey URL for this option.
•
•
•
webapps - Indicates the key is hardcoded to access an Aastra
XML-based application (xml.myaastra.com).
flash - Indicates the softkey is set to generate a flash event when it is
pressed, or a feature key is pressed on the CT handsets. The IP
phone generates flash events only when a call is connected and there
is an active RTP stream (for example, when the call is not on hold).
A-208
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters
Format
•
sprecode - Indicates the softkey is configured to automatically
activate specific services offered by the server. For example, if the
sprecode value of *82 is configured, then by pressing the softkey, *82
automatically activates a service provided by the server.
park - Indicates the softkey is configured to park incoming calls when
pressed.
•
•
pickup - Indicates the softkey is configured to pick up parked calls
when pressed.
•
•
lcr - Indicates the softkey is configured for “last call return” when
pressed.
call forward - Indicates the softkey is configured for accessing the
Call Forward features on the phone. A Call Forwarding Mode must be
enabled to use this softkey. “Account” mode is the default.
blf/xfer - Indicates the softkey is configured to transfer calls AND
configured for BLF on a single key.
speeddial/xfer - Indicates the softkey is configured to transfer calls
AND configured for speeddialing to a specific number.
callers - Indicates the softkey is set for accessing the Callers List.
directory - Indicates the softkey is set for accessing the Directory
List.
•
•
•
•
•
•
icom - Indicates the softkey is set to be used as the Intercom key.
services - (not available on the 53i) Indicates the softkey is set to be
used as the Services key.
•
•
phonelock - Indicates the softkey is set to be used to lock/unlock the
phone.
paging - Indicates the softkey is set for Group Paging on the phone.
Pressing this key automatically sends a Real Time Transport Protocol
(RTP) stream to pre-configured multicast address(es) without
involving SIP signaling.
•
empty - Indicates the softkey is configured to force a blank entry on
the IP phone display for a specific softkey. The soft keys are added in
order (from softkey1 to softkey20) after any hard-coded keys have
been added. If a particular soft key is not defined, it is ignored.
Default Value
none
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters
Range
none
line
speeddial
dnd
blf
list ("BLF\List" in the Aastra Web UI)
acd (“Auto call distribution” in the Aastra Web UI)
dcp (“Directed Call Pickup” in the Aastra Web UI)
xml
webapps
flash
sprecode
park
pickup
lcr
call forward
BLF/Xfer
Speeddial/Xfer
callers (“Callers List” in Aastra Web UI)
directory
icom
services (not available on the 53i)
phonelock
paging
empty
Example
expmod1 key1 type: line
expmod1 key2 type: speeddial
expmod1 key3 type: blf
expmod1 key4 type: list
A-210
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters
Parameter –
expmodX keyN label
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Operation->Expansion Module N
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Label
(in Web UI)
Description
The text label that displays on the softkey for the Expansion Module.
The “expmodX keyN label” parameter can be set for the following
softkey types only:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
speeddial
BLF
acd
dcp
XML
WebApps
flash
sprecode
park
pickup
Directory
Callers List
Icom
Services
BLF/Xfer
Speeddial/Xfer
Paging
Notes:
1. For the 9480i, 9480i CT, 57i, and 57i CT phones, an icon appears
beside the soft key label that indicates the status of the line.
Format
Text
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
For line, blf types - Up to 9 characters.
For speeddial type - Up to 11 characters.
Example
expmod1 key1 label: “Line 9”
expmod2 key1 label: “info”
expmod3 key1 label: “johnsmith”
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters
Parameter –
expmodX keyN value
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Operation->Expansion Module N
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Value
(In WEb UI)
Description
The text label that displays on the IP phone for the softkey on the
Expansion Module.
The “expmodX keyN value” parameter can be set for the following
softkey types only:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
speeddial
blf
dcp
XML
sprecode
park
pickup
directory
callers (“Callers List” in Aastra Web UI)
Icom
Services (not available on 53i)
BLF/Xfer
Speeddial/Xfer
Paging
Notes:
1. For the 57i and 57i CT phones, an icon appears beside the soft key
label that indicates the status of the line.
2. For blf - Value is the extension you want to monitor.
3. For xml - You can specify a URI to use for this XML softkey. The
variables you can use with the XML softkey URI are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$SIPAUTHNAME$$
$$PROXYURL$$
$$LINESTATE$$
$$LOCALIP$$
$$REMOTENUMBER$$
$$DISPLAYNAME$$
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$INCOMINGNAME$$
$$CALLDURATION$$
$$CALLDIRECTION$$
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
N/A
Example
expmod1 key1 value: 9
expmod1 key2 value: 411
expmod1 key3 value: 123456+ (example of a speeddial prefix)
A-212
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters
Parameter –
expmodX keyN line
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Operation->Expansion Module N
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Line
(in Web UI)
Description
This is the line associated with the softkey you are configuring on the
Expansion Module. The number of applicable lines available is
dependent on the specific IP phone model.
The “expmodX keyN line” parameter can be set for the following softkey
types only:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
speeddial
BLF
BLF/List
acd
dcp
lcr
park
pickup
BLF/Xfer
Speeddial/Xfer
Format
Integer
1
Default Value
Range
1 through 9
Example
expmod1 key1 line: 1
expmod1 key2 line: 5
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters
Locking Softkeys and Programmable Keys
Parameter–
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
softkeyN locked
Description
Locks the specified softkey on the 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, or 57i CT IP
phone. Locking the key prevents a user from changing or configuring the
softkey. When a key is locked, the phone uses the server settings and
ignores any previous local configuration.
Affects the following parameters:
•
•
•
•
•
softkeyN type
softkeyN label
softkeyN value
softkeyN line
softkeyN states
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (disable)
0 (disable)
1 (enable)
Example
softkey1 locked: 1
Parameter–
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
topsoftkeyN locked
Description
Locks the specified top softkey on the 57i or 57i CT IP phone. Locking the
key prevents a user from changing or configuring the softkey. When a key
is locked, the phone uses the server settings and ignores any previous
local configuration.
Affects the following parameters:
•
•
•
•
topsoftkeyN type
topsoftkeyN label
topsoftkeyN value
topsoftkeyN line
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (disable)
0 (disable)
1 (enable)
Example
topsoftkey1 locked: 1
A-214
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters
Parameter–
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
prgkeyN locked
Description
Locks the specified top softkey on the 9143i, 53i, or 55i IP phone. Locking
the key prevents a user from changing or configuring the programmable
key. When a key is locked, the phone uses the server settings and
ignores any previous local configuration.
Affects the following parameters:
•
•
•
prgkeyN type
prgkeyN value
prgkeyN line
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (disable)
0 (disable)
1 (enable)
Example
prgkey1 locked: 1
Parameter–
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
featurekeyN locked
Description
Locks the specified top softkey on the 57i CT IP phone. Locking the key
prevents a user from changing or configuring the feature key. When a key
is locked, the phone uses the server settings and ignores any previous
local configuration.
Affects the following parameters:
•
•
featurekeyN type
featurekeyN label
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (disable)
0 (disable)
1 (enable)
Example
featurekey1 locked: 1
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parameter–
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
expmodX keyN locked
Description
Locks the specified top softkey on the 5-Series Expansion Module
attached to the IP phone. Locking the key prevents a user from changing
or configuring the softkey on the expansion module. When a key is
locked, the phone uses the server settings and ignores any previous local
configuration.
Affects the following parameters:
•
•
•
expmodX keyN type
expmodX keyN value
expmodX keyN line
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (disable)
0 (disable)
1 (enable)
Example
expmod1 key4 locked: 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters
Locking the SAVE and DLETE Keys (53i)
Parameter–
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
prgkey1 locked
Description
Allows you to lock or unlock the Save key on the 53i IP Phone. When the
Save key is unlocked, a User can change the function of the key using the
Aastra Web UI. An Administrator can change the function of the key using
the Aastra Web UI or the configuration files.
Note:
1. The save function on the 53i IP Phone is limited to Key 1 only.
2. Changing the function from the Save key to another function, removes
the ability to save items on the IP phone.
Format
Boolean
1 (lock)
Default Value
Range
0 (unlock)
1 (lock)
Example
prgkey1 locked: 0
Parameter–
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
prgkey2 locked
Description
Allows you to lock or unlock the Delete key on the 53i IP Phone. When the
Delete key is unlocked, a User can change the function of the key using the
Aastra Web UI. An Administrator can change the function of the key using
the Aastra Web UI or the configuration files.
Note:
1. The delete function on the 53i IP Phone is limited to Key 2 only.
2. Changing the function from the Delete key to another function, removes
the ability to delete items on the IP phone.
Format
Boolean
1 (lock)
Default Value
Range
0 (unlock)
1 (lock)
Example
prgkey2 locked: 0
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters
BLF List URI Settings
Parameter–
list uri
Aastra Web UI
Operation->Softkeys and XML->Services
Operation->Programmable Keys->Services
Operation->Expansion Module Keys->Services
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
BLF List URI
Configuration Files
(in Web UI)
Description
Specifies the URI that the phone uses to access the BLF list on the Broadsoft
server when the BLF list key is pressed. When you specify a URI for this
parameter, the phone uses the Internet to access the BLF list on the
Broadsoft server.
Format
HTTP server path or Fully Qualified Domain Name
Not Applicable
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
list uri: [email protected]
A-218
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing 560M Expansion Module Column Display
Customizing 560M Expansion Module Column
Display
Expansion Module 1 through 3
Parameter–
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
expanmodXpageNleft
Description
Allows you to specify a customized heading for the 560M expansion
module, in the left column of a specific page. You can specify the following
options for this parameter:
Expansion Module 1
expanmod1page1left (Expansion Module 1, Page 1, left column)
expanmod1page2left (Expansion Module 1, Page 2, left column)
expanmod1page3left (Expansion Module 1, Page 3, left column)
Expansion Module 2
expanmod2page1left (Expansion Module 2, Page 1, left column)
expanmod2page2left (Expansion Module 2, Page 2, left column)
expanmod2page3left (Expansion Module 2, Page 3, left column)
Expansion Module 3
expanmod3page1left (Expansion Module 3, Page 1, left column)
expanmod3page2left (Expansion Module 3, Page 2, left column)
expanmod3page3left (Expansion Module 3, Page 3, left column)
Format
Text String
Default Value
Range
N/A
N/A
Example
expanmod1page1left: Personnel Ext
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Customizing 560M Expansion Module Column Display
Parameter–
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
expanmodXpageNright
Description
Allows you to specify a customized heading for the 560M expansion
module, in the right column of a specific page. You can specify the
following options for this parameter:
Expansion Module 1
expanmod1page1right (Expansion Module 1, Page 1, right column)
expanmod1page2right (Expansion Module 1, Page 2, right column)
expanmod1page3right (Expansion Module 1, Page 3, right column)
Expansion Module 2
expanmod2page1right (Expansion Module 2, Page 1, right column)
expanmod2page2right (Expansion Module 2, Page 2, right column)
expanmod2page3right (Expansion Module 2, Page 3, right column)
Expansion Module 3
expanmod3page1right (Expansion Module 3, Page 1, right column)
expanmod3page2right (Expansion Module 3, Page 2, right column)
expanmod3page3right (Expansion Module 3, Page 3, right column)
Format
Text String
Default Value
Range
N/A
N/A
Example
expanmod1page1right: Operations Ext
A-220
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operational Parameters
Advanced Operational Parameters
The following parameters in this section allow the system administrator to set
advanced operational features on the IP phones.
Blind Transfer Setting
Parameter –
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
sip cancel after blind transfer
Description
Forces the phone to use the Blind Transfer method available in software
prior to release 1.4. This method sends the CANCEL message after the
REFER message when blind transferring a call.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (disabled)
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
Example
sip cancel after blind transfer: 1
Update Caller ID Setting.
Parameter –
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
sip update callerid
Description
Enables or disables the updating of the Caller ID information during a
call.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (disabled)
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
Example
sip update callerid: 1
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Parameters
Boot Sequence Recovery Mode Settings.
Parameter –
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
force web recovery mode
disabled
Description
Enables or disables the forcing web recovery mode feature. If this
parameter is set to "1", you cannot force web recovery. If this parameter
is set to "0", press 1 and # keys during boot up when the logo displays to
force the web recovery mode.
Format
Boolean
0 (false)
Default Value
Range
0 (false)
1 (true)
Example
force web recovery mode disabled: 1
Parameter –
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
max boot count
Description
Specifies the number of faulty boots that occur before the phone is forced
into Web recovery mode.
Format
Integer
10
Default Value
Range
0 to 32767
Zero (0) disables the max boot count feature.
max boot count: 0
Example
A-222
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operational Parameters
Single Call Restriction Setting
Parameter –
two call support
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Two Call Support
(in Web UI)
Description
Enables or disables the single media path restriction between the
57i CT and 9480i CT base unit and the handset.
When this feature is enabled (set to 1), you can make separate active
calls from the 57i CT and 9480i CT base unit and from the cordless
handset. If this feature is disabled (set to 0), only one call can be active at
a time either from the base unit or from the handset.
When this feature is disabled, and you make an active call on either the
base unit or the handset, any other attempt to make an active call is put
on hold. Also, when this feature is disabled, more than one call can
negotiate complex audio codecs since only a single call is decoding
audio at a time.
Format
Boolean
1
Default Value
Range
0 - Disable
1 - Enable
Example
two call support: 0
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-223
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Parameters
Blacklist Duration Setting
Parameter –
sip blacklist duration
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP Settings->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Blacklist Duration
(Aastra Web UI)
Description
Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that a failed server remains on
the server blacklist. The IP phone avoids sending a SIP message to a
failed server (if another server is available) for this amount of time.
Note: The value of “0” disables the blacklist feature.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
300 (5 minutes)
0 to 9999999
Example
sip blacklist duration: 600
Whitelist Proxy Setting
Parameter –
sip whitelist
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Whitelist Proxy
(Aastra Web UI)
Description
This parameter enables/disables the whitelist proxy feature, as follows:
•
•
Set to 0 to disable the feature.
Set to 1 to enable the feature. When this feature is enabled, an IP
phone accepts call requests from a trusted proxy server only. The IP
phone rejects any call requests from an untrusted proxy server.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (disabled)
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
Example
sip whitelist: 1
A-224
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operational Parameters
Polling Action URI Settings
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Action URI
action uri poll
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Format
Specifies the URI to be called every "action uri pool interval" seconds.
HTTP(s) server path or Fully Qualified Domain Name
Default Value
Range
N/A
N/A
Example
action uri poll: http://myserver.com/myappli.xml
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Action URI
action uri poll interval
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Specifies the interval, in seconds, between calls from the phone to the
"action uri poll".
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0 (disabled)
N/A
Example
action uri poll interval: 60
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-225
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Parameters
XML Key Redirection Settings (for Redial, Xfer, Conf, Icom, Voicemail)
Parameter–
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
redial script
Description
Specifies a redial script for the phone to use. When this parameter is set,
pressing the Redial key GETs the specified URI from the server to use in
performing the redial action.
Format
String
Default Value
Range
empty
Any valid URI
Example
redial script: http://bluevelvet.ana.aastra.com/redial.php
Parameter–
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
xfer script
Description
Specifies an Xfer script for the phone to use. When this parameter is set,
pressing the Xfer key GETs the specified URI from the server instead of
starting the transfer action.
Format
String
Default Value
Range
empty
Any valid URI
Example
xfer script: http://bluevelvet.ana.aastra.com/xfer.php
Parameter–
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
conf script
Description
Specifies an Conf script for the phone to use. When this parameter is set,
pressing the Conf key GETs the specified URI from the server to use in
performing the conference action.
Format
String
Default Value
Range
empty
Any valid URI
Example
conf script: http://bluevelvet.ana.aastra.com/conf.php
A-226
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operational Parameters
Parameter–
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
icom script
Description
Specifies an Icom script for the phone to use. When this parameter is set,
pressing the Icom key GETs the specified URI from the server to use in
performing the Intercom action.
Format
String
Default Value
Range
empty
Any valid URI
Example
icom script: http://bluevelvet.ana.aastra.com/icom.php
Parameter–
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
voicemail script
Description
Specifies an Voicemail script for the phone to use. When this parameter is
set, selecting the voicemail option from the Services Menu GETs the
specified URI from the server instead of starting the Voicemail application.
Format
String
Default Value
Range
empty
Any valid URI
Example
voicemail script: http://bluevelvet.ana.aastra.com/voicemail.php
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-227
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Parameters
Options Key Redirection Setting (Services key on 51i)
Parameter–
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
options script
Description
Specifies an Options script for the phone to use. When this parameter is set,
pressing the Options Key (or Services Key on the 51i) GETs the specified
URI from the server.
Note: Pressing and holding the Options key (or the Services Key on the 51i)
displays the local Options Menu on the phone.
Format
String
Default Value
Range
empty
Any valid URI
Example
options script: http://fargo.ana.aastra.com/options.xml
Off-Hook and XML Application Interaction Setting
Parameter–
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
auto offhook
Description
Specifies whether or not the phone is prevented from entering the off-hook/
dialing state, if the handset is off-hook for more than 2 seconds, and the call
ends.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (disabled)
0 (disabled - phone is prevented from entering the off-hook dialing state)
1 (enabled - allows phone to enter the off-hook dialing state)
Example
auto offhook: 1
A-228
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operational Parameters
XML Override for a Locked Phone Setting
Parameter–
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
xml lock override
Description
Specifies the method to use for overriding a locked phone when XML
applications are sent to the phone. There are three settings for this
parameter:
0
1
Phone prevents XML POSTs and XML GETs from being received or sent.
Phone allows XML POSTs; however, XML GETs by pressing the XML
keys (softkeys/programmable keys/extension module keys) are not
allowed.
2
Phone allows XML POSTs to the phone as well as XML GETs to/from the
phone by pressing the XML keys (softkeys/programmable keys/
extension module keys).
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
0 to 2
Example
xml lock override: 1
Symmetric UDP Signaling Setting
Parameter –
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
sip symmetric udp signaling
Description
Allows you to enable or disable the phone to use port 5060 to send SIP
UDP messages. The value “1” (which is the default) enables the phone
to use port 5060. The value “0” (zero) disables the phone from using
port 5060 and allows the phone to choose a random port to send SIP
UDP messages.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
1 (enabled)
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
Example
sip symmetric udp signaling: 0
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-229
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Parameters
User-Agent Setting
Parameter –
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
sip user-agent
Description
Allows you to enable or disable the addition of the User-Agent and
Server SIP headers in the SIP stack.
The value of “0” prevents the UserAgent and Server SIP header from
being added to the SIP stack. The value of “1” allows these headers to
be added.
Format
Boolean
1 (true)
Default Value
Range
0 (false)
1 (true)
Example
sip user-agent: 0
A-230
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operational Parameters
DNS Query Setting
Parameter–
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
sip dns query type
Description
Specifies the Domain Name Service (DNS) query method to use when the
phone performs a DNS lookup.
Format
Integer
1
Default Value
Range
0
A only - The phone sends “A” (Host IP Address) lookup for the IP
address and uses the default port number of 5060.
1
SRV & A - The phone sends “SRV” (Service Location Record) lookup
to get the port number. Most often, the IP address is included in the
response from the DNS server to avoid extra queries. If there is no IP
address returned in the response, the phone sends out the “A” DNS
lookup to find the IP address.
2
NAPTR & SRV & A - First, the phone sends "NAPTR" (Naming
Authority Pointer) lookup to get the “SRV” pointer and service type
(such as "aastra.com SIP+2DT .... _sip.tcp.aastra.net", which means
the service prefers to use TCP and "_sip.tcp.aastra.net" for the SRV
query instead of the default "_sip._tcp.aastra.com"). If the NAPTR
record is returned empty then the default value is used, so in the same
case, the phone will use "_sip._udp.aastra.com" for the next step
lookup.
Next, the phone does SRV lookup to get the IP address and port
number. If there is no IP address in the SRV response then it sends out
and “A” lookup to get it.
Note: On the phone side, if you configure the phone with a Fully- Qualified
Domain Name (FQDN) proxy and specified port, the phone always sends “A
only” lookups to find the Host IP Address of the proxy.
Example
sip dns query type: 2
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-231
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Parameters
Ignore Out of Order SIP Requests
Parameter–
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
sip accept out of order
requests
Description
Enables a workaround for non-compliant SIP devices (for example, Asterisk)
which do not increment the CSeq numbers in SIP requests sent to the
phone.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (disabled)
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
Example
sip accept out of order requests: 1
Configuration Encryption Setting
Parameter–
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
config encryption key
Description
Specifies the phone-specific encryption key that the configuration server
uses to encrypt in a MAC-specific configuration file.
Format
String
Default Value
Range
Not applicable
String length of 4 to 32 alphanumeric characters
config encryption key: 123abcd
Example
A-232
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Parameters
Troubleshooting Parameters
The following parameters in this section allow the system administrator to set
logging and support settings for troubleshooting purposes.
Log Settings
Parameter –
log server ip
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Troubleshooting->
Log Settings
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Log IP
(in Web UI)
Description
Specifies the IP address for which to save log files for troubleshooting
purposes.
Format
IP address
Default Value
Range
0.0.0.0
Not Applicable
log server ip: 192.168.3.2
Example
Parameter –
log server port
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Troubleshooting->
Log Settings
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Log Port
(in Web UI)
Description
Specifies the IP port to use to save log files for troubleshooting purposes.
This is the IP port that transmits information from the IP phone to the IP
address location.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Any valid IP port
log server port: 2
Example
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-233
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting Parameters
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Troubleshooting->
Module/Debug Level
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Parameters –
log module <module name>
Configuration Files
Module/Debug Level
(in Web UI)
Description
Allows enhanced severity filtering of log calls sent as blog output.
The blog, as used on the IP phones, is a an online debugging tool that
can be frequently updated and intended for technical support analyzation.
Blogs are defined by their format: a series of entries posted to a single
page in reverse-chronological order. The IP Phone blogs are separated
into modules which allow you to log specific information for analyzing:
Module Name (configuration files)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
linemgr (line manager information)
user interface
misc (miscellaneous)
sip (call control SIP stack)
dis (display driver)
dstore (delayed storage)
ept (endpoint)
ind (indicator)
kbd (keyboard)
net (network)
provis (provisioning)
rtpt (Real Time Transport)
snd (sound)
prof (profiler)
xml (Extension Markup Language)
stun (Simple Traversal of User Datagram Protocol (UDP) through
Network Address Translation (NAT)
Format
Integer
Default Value
1 (fatal errors)
A-234
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Parameters
Range
Debug Level
Value
Fatal Errors
Errors
1 (default)
2
Warnings
Init
4
8
Functions
Info
16
32
0
All debug
levels OFF
All Debug
Levels ON
65535
Examples
Enter a debug level value in the “Debug Level” field for a module.
Example 1
To turn two or more debug levels on at the same time, you add the value
associated with each level. For example,
Fatal Errors + Errors + Warnings = 1 + 2 + 4 = 7
log module linemgr: 7
log module user interface: 7
log module sip: 7
In the above example, fatal errors, general errors, and warnings are
logged for the line manager, user interface, and SIP call control modules.
Example 2
Functions and Info = 16 + 32 = 48
log module dis: 48
log module net: 48
log module snd: 48
In the above example, functions and general information are logged for
the display drivers, network, and sound modules.
Example 3
log module rtpt: 0
log module ind: 65535
In the above example, all debug levels are OFF for the Real Time
Transport module. All debug levels are ON for the indicator module.
You can set the Module/Debug Levels using the configuration files or the
Aastra Web UI.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
A-235
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting Parameters
WatchDog Settings
Parameter–
watchdog enable
Configuration Files
Aastra Web UI
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Advanced Settings->Troubleshooting
WatchDog
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
Enables/disables the use of the WatchDog task for the IP Phones.
Boolean
Default Value
Range
1 (enabled)
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
Example
watchdog enable: 0
A-236
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B
Configuration Server Setup
About this appendix
Introduction
This appendix describes how to setup the TFTP protocol configuration server in
your network.
Topics
Topic
Page
Configuration Server Protocol Setup
TFTP Server Set-up
page B-2
page B-2
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
B-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Configuration Server Protocol Setup
Configuration Server Protocol Setup
TFTP Server Set-up
There are a number of TFTP servers available. PumpKIN is one of such
TFTP servers. Use the keywords “pumpkin TFTP server” on Google and
you should get the web site where you can download the software
from. Installing PumpKIN is straightforward. To configure the directory
from where you would be serving the files, click on the Options button
on PumpKIN’s main window as shown in the following figure.
It is important to select the “Give all files” radio button under the “Read Request
Behavior” category. This makes the files to be served without any manual
intervention when requested.
B-2
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Server Protocol Setup
If you want to prevent users from writing files to the directory select
the “Deny all requests” in the “Write Request Behavior” category. Click
the OK button after you have entered all the required information. All the
firmware files should be in the file system root directory. Currently we
do not support downloads from files present in sub-directories. Consult
PumpKIN’s documentation if you need more information on how to set-up the
TFTP server.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
B-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C
Configuring the IP Phone
at the Asterisk IP PBX
About this appendix
Introduction
This appendix describes how to setup a user’s phone with an extension to make
and receive calls using the Asterisk as the PBX.
Topics
This appendix covers the following topics:
Topic
Page
IP Phone at the Asterisk IP PBX
page C-2
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
C-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone at the Asterisk IP PBX
IP Phone at the Asterisk IP PBX
The following configuration illustrates how to create a user with an extension to
make and receive calls using the Asterisk as the PBX. This configuration is
defined in the sip.conf file present along with the other configuration files that are
created when Asterisk is installed. Usually, the configuration files can be found at
the /etc/asterisk directory.
;This is used in the “extensions.conf” file to identify this
;physical phone when issuing Dial commands.
[phone1]
;The type to use for the 57i is “friend”.
;”Peer” is used when the Asterisk is contacting a proxy,
;”user” is used for phones that can only make calls
;and “friend” acts as both a peer and a user.
type=friend
;If your host has an entry in your DNS then you just enter the
;machines name in the host= field.
host=dynamic
defaultip=192.168.1.1 ;default IP address that the phone is
;configured to
;The password that phone1 will use to register with this PBX
secret=1234
dtmfmode=rfc2833;Choices are inband, rfc2833, or info
mailbox=1000 ;Mailbox for message waiting indicator
;If a phone is not in a valid context you will not be
C-2
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone at the Asterisk IP PBX
;able to use it. In this example' sip' is used. You can use
;whatever you like, but make sure they are the same, you will
;need to make an entry in your extensions.conf file (which we
;will get to later)
context=sip
callerid="Phone 1" <1234>
After this is defined in the “sip.conf” file, some information has to be entered in
the “extensions.conf” file present in the same directory as the “sip.conf” file. The
following definition in the file under the [sip]section/context completes defining
the extension for the 57i phone.
Table 1:
exten -> 1234,1,Dial(SIP/phone1,20)
This definition completes configuring the 57i phone at the IP PBX system.
To verify whether the extension has been successfully registered at the IP PBX
system, enter the Asterisk console and reload Asterisk. Use the command “sip
show peers” at the console. This will display the extensions that are registered at
the IP PBX system.
Table 2:
Name/username Host
Mask
Port
Status
phone1/phone1192.168.1.1(D) 255.255.255.255 5060
Unmonitored
This completes the basic set-up for the 57i phone with 1234 extension at
the Asterisk IP PBX system. Refer to Asterisk documentation for set-up on
extended or advanced features such as voice mail and call forwarding, etc.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
C-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D
Sample Configuration Files
About this appendix
Introduction
This appendix provides sample configuration files for the 57i, 57i CT, and 53i.
This appendix covers the following topics:
Topics
Topic
Page
Sample Configuration Files
page D-2
page D-2
page D-12
page D-29
57i Sample Configuration File
57i CT Sample Configuration File
53i Sample Configuration File
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
D-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files
Sample Configuration Files
This section consists of the sample configuration files necessary to configure the
IP phones. The general format is similar to configuration files used by several
Unix-based programs. Any text following a number sign (#) on a line is
considered to be a comment, unless the # is contained within
double-quotes. Currently, Boolean fields use 0 for false and 1 for true.
57i Sample Configuration File
# Sample Configuration File
# ===========================
# Date: October 20th, 2005
# Phone Model: 57i
# Notes:
#
# The general format used here is similar to configuration files
# used by several UNIX-based programs. Any text following a number
# sign (#) is considered to be a comment, unless the number sign is
# contained within double-quotes ("#") where it is considered to be
# a pound. For Boolean fields, 0 = false, 1 = true.
# Comments:
#
# This file contains sample configurations for the "aastra.cfg" or
# "<mac>.cfg" file. The settings included here are examples only.
# You should change/comment the values to suit your requirements.
#
# Not all possible paramters are shown, refer to the admin guide for
# the full list of supported parameters, their defaults and valid
# ranges.
#
D-2
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample Configuration Files
# The Aastra 57i, 57iCT, and 53i phones will download 2
# configuration files from the TFTP server while restarting, the
# "aastra.cfg" file and the "<mac>.cfg" file. These two configuration
# files can be used to configure all of the settings of the phone with
# the exception of assigning a static IP address to a phone and line
# settings, which should only be set in the "<mac>.cfg" file.
#
# The "aastra.cfg" file configures the settings server wide, while
# the "<mac>.cfg" file configures only the phone with the MAC address
# for which the file is named (for example, "00085d0304f4.cfg"). The
# settings in the "aastra.cfg" file will be overridden by settings
# which also appear in the "<mac>.cfg" file.
#------------------------------------------------------------------
# DHCP Setting
# ==============
#dhcp: 1 # DHCP enabled.
# DHCP:
# 0 = false, means DHCP is disabled.
# 1 = true, means DHCP is enabled.
#
# Notes:
#
# DHCP is normally set from the Options list on the phone or
# the web interface
#
# If DHCP is disabled, the following network settings will
# have to be configured manually either through the configuration
# files, the Options List in the phone, or the Web Client: IP
# Address (of the phone), Subnet Mask, Gateway, DNS, and TFTP
# Server.
#-------------------------------------------------------------------
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
D-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files
# Network Settings
## = = = = = = = =
# Notes: If DHCP is enabled, you do not need to set these network
# settings. Although depending on you DHCP server configuration you
# may still have to set the dns address.
#ip:
# This value is unique to each phone on a server
# and should be set in the "<mac>.cfg" file if
# setting this manually.
#subnet mask:
#default gateway:
#dns1:
#dns2:
# Time Server Settings
## =====================
#time server disabled: 1 # Time server disabled.
#time server1:
#time server2:
#time server3:
# Enable time server and enter at
# least one time server IP address or
# qualified domain name
# Time Server Disabled:
# 0 = false, means the time server is not disabled.
# 1 = true, means the time server is disabled.
# NAT Settings
# ===============
# Option 1:
#
# If you are connecting to a Nortel MCS call server and there is a
D-4
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample Configuration Files
# NAT device between the server and the phone, then you must set the
# following two parameters for the phone to function correctly.
#sip nortel nat support: 1
#sip nortel nat timer: 60
# 1 = enabled
# seconds between keep alive messages
# Option 2:
#
# If you are using a session border controller, you should set the
# outbound proxy to the session border controller address
#sip outbound proxy: sbc.aastra.com
#sip outbound proxy port: 0
# a value of 0 enables SRV
# lookups for the address of
# the proxy.
# Option 3:
#
# If you know the public IP address of your NAT device and and have
# opened up a port for the SIP messages then you can statically
# assign this information.
#sip nat ip: 67.123.122.90
#sip nat port: 5890
# Additional Network Settings
# =============================
#sip rtp port: 3000
# Eg. RTP packets are sent to port 3000.
#-------------------------------------------------------------------
# Configuration Server Settings
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
D-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files
## = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
# Notes: This section defines which server the phone retrieves new
# firmware images and configuration files from. Three protocols are
# supported TFTP, FTP and HTTP
download protocol: TFTP # valid values are TFTP, FTP and HTTP
## TFTP server settings
tftp server: 192.168.0.130
#alternate tftp server:
#use alternate tftp server: 1
# If your DHCP server assigns
# a TFTP server address which
# you do not use, you can use
# the alternate tftp server.
## FTP server settings
#ftp server: 192.168.0.131 # can be IP or FQDN
#ftp username: aastra
#ftp password: 57iaastra
## HTTP server settings (for http://bogus.aastra.com/firmware/)
#http server: bogus.aastra.com # can be IP or FQDN
#http path: firmware
#-------------------------------------------------------------------
# Dial Plan Settings
# =====================
#
# Notes:
#
# As you dial a number on the phone, the phone will initiate a call
# when one of the following conditions are meet:
D-6
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample Configuration Files
#
# (1) The entered number is an exact match in the dial plan
# (2) The "#" symbol has been pressed
# (3) A timeout occurs
#
# The dial plan is a regular expression that supports the following
# syntax:
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,*,# : matches the keypad symbols
x
+
: matches any digit (0...9)
: matches 0 or more repetitions of the
: previous expression
[]
: matches any number inside the brackets
: can be used with a "-" to represent a
: range
()
|
: expression grouping
: either or
# If the dialled number doesn't match the dial plan then the call
# is rejected.
sip digit timeout: 3
# set the inter-digit timeout in seconds
# Example dial plans
sip dial plan: "x+#|xx+*" # this is the default dial string, note
# that is must be quoted since it contains
# a '#' character
#sip dial plan: [01]xxx|[2-8]xxxx|91xxxxxxxxxx
# accecpt any 4 digit number beginning
# with a 0 or 1, any 5 digit number
# beginning with a number between 2 and 8
# (inclusive) or a 12 digit number
# beginning with 91
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
D-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files
#sip dial plan terminator: 1 # enable sending of the "#" symbol to
# to the proxy in the dial string
#------------------------------------------------------------------
# General SIP Settings
# = = = = = = = = = = =
#sip session timer: 30
# enable support of RFC4028, the default
# value of 0 disables this functionality
#sip transport protocol: 0 # use UDP (1), TCP (2) or both (0) for sip
# messaging
#sip use basic codecs: 1
#sip out-of-band dtmf: 0
# limit codecs to G711 and G729
# turn off support for RFC2833 (on by
# default)
# Global SIP User Settings
# ==========================
#
# Notes:
# These settings are used as the default configuration for the hard
# key lines on the phone. That is:
#
#
#
#
L1 to L4 on the 57i and 57iCT
L1 to L3 on the 53i
# These can be over-ridden on a per-line basis using the per-line
# settings.
#
# See the Admin Guide for a detailed explaination of how this works
D-8
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample Configuration Files
sip screen name: Joe Smith
sip user name: 4256
# the name display on the phone's screen
# the phone number
sip display name: Joseph Smith # the caller name sent out when making
# a call.
sip vmail: *78
# the number to reach voicemail on
sip auth name: jsmith
sip password: 12345
# account used to authenticate user
# password for authentication account
sip mode: 0
# line type:
# 0 - generic,
# 1 - BroadSoft SCA line
# 2 - Nortel line
sip proxy ip: proxy.aastra.com # IP address or FQDN of proxy
sip proxy port: 5060
# port used for SIP messages on the
# proxy. Set to 0 to enable SRV
# lookups
sip registrar ip: aastra.com # IP address or FQDN of registrar
sip registrar port: 0 # as proxy port, but for the registrar
sip registration period: 3600 # registration period in seconds
# Per-line SIP Settings
# ======================
# configure line 3 as the support Broadsoft SCA line
# - the proxy and registrar settings are taken from the global
#
settings above
sip line3 screen name: Support
sip line3 user name: 4000
sip line3 display name: Aastra Support
sip line3 auth name: support
sip line3 password: 54321
sip line3 mode: 1
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
D-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files
sip line3 vmail: *78
# configure line 5 (a soft key line) as an ordinary line
# of a test server
sip line5 screen name: Test 1
sip line5 user name: 5551001
sip line5 display name: Test 1
sip line5 auth name: 5551001
sip line5 password: 5551001
sip line5 mode: 0
sip line5 proxy ip: 10.50.10.102
sip line5 proxy port: 5060
sip line5 registrar ip: 10.50.10.102
sip line5 registrar port: 5060
sip line5 registration period: 60
#-------------------------------------------------------------------
# Softkey Settings
#
# Softkeys can be set either server wide or unique to each phone.
# Setting softkeys as line/call appearances should be done in the
# "<mac>.cfg" file, since these are unique to each phone.
# Notes:
#
# There are a maximum of 18 softkeys that can be configured on the
# 57i or 57iCT phone. These can be set up through either of the 2
# configuration files, depending on whether this is to be server wide
# ("aastra.cfg") or phone specific ("<mac>.cfg"). Each softkey needs
# to be numbered from 1 - 18, for example "softkey12 type:
# speeddial". Softkeys can be set up as speeddials or as additional
# call/line appearances and have a type, label and value associated
D-10
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample Configuration Files
# with it as seen here in the default softkey settings.
# SOFTKEY TYPES: "line", "speeddial", "blf", "list", "dnd"
# SOFTKEY LABEL: Alpha numeric name for the softkey. The maximum
#
#
number of characters for this value is 10 for
speeddials and dnd, 9 chars for lines, blf
# SOFTKEY VALUE: If softkey type is a speeddial, any DTMFs (from
#
#
#
#
0 - 9, *, "#") or a comma (,) for 500ms pause and
'E' for On-hook can be set for the value.
If softkey type is blf it is the extension you want
to monitor.
# SOFTKEY LINE: This is line associated with the softkey. For line
#
#
#
softkeys the value must be between 5 and 9 (1 - 4
are already hardcoded as the L1, L2, L3 and L4 hard
key line/call appearances)
# Speed Dials
softkey1 type: speeddial
softkey1 label: "Ext Pickup"
softkey1 value: *8
softkey2 type: speeddial
softkey2 label: "Call Return"
softkey2 value: *69
# DND Key
softkey4 type: dnd
softkey4 label: DND
# Line appearance
softkey6 type: line
softkey6 label: Test 1
softkey6 line: 5
# blf
softkey8 type: blf
softkey8 label: Jane Doe
softkey8 value: 4559
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
D-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files
softkey8 line: 1
# list
softkey11 type: list
softkey12 type: list
57i CT Sample Configuration File
# Sample Configuration File
# =========================
# Date: October 26th, 2005
# Phone Model: 57iCT
# Notes:
#
# The general format used here is similar to configuration files
# used by several UNIX-based programs. Any text following a number
# sign (#) is considered to be a comment, unless the number sign is
# contained within double-quotes ("#") where it is considered to be
# a pound. For Boolean fields, 0 = false, 1 = true.
# Comments:
#
# This file contains sample configurations for the "aastra.cfg" or
# "<mac>.cfg" file. The settings included here are examples only.
# You should change/comment the values to suit your requirements.
#
# Not all possible paramters are shown, refer to the admin guide for
# the full list of supported parameters, their defaults and valid
# ranges.
#
# The Aastra 57i, 57iCT, and 53i phones will download 2
# configuration files from the TFTP server while restarting, the
D-12
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample Configuration Files
# "aastra.cfg" file and the "<mac>.cfg" file. These two configuration
# files can be used to configure all of the settings of the phone with
# the exception of assigning a static IP address to a phone and line
# settings, which should only be set in the "<mac>.cfg" file.
#
# The "aastra.cfg" file configures the settings server wide, while the
# "<mac>.cfg" file configures only the phone with the MAC address for
# which the file is named (for example, "00085d0304f4.cfg"). The
# settings in the "aastra.cfg" file will be overridden by settings
# which also appear in the "<mac>.cfg" file.
#-------------------------------------------------------------------
# DHCP Setting
# ============
#dhcp: 1 # DHCP enabled.
# DHCP:
# 0 = false, means DHCP is disabled.
# 1 = true, means DHCP is enabled.
#
# Notes:
#
# DHCP is normally set from the Options list on the phone or
# the web interface
#
# If DHCP is disabled, the following network settings will
# have to be configured manually either through the configuration
# files, the Options List in the phone, or the Web Client: IP
# Address (of the phone), Subnet Mask, Gateway, DNS, and TFTP
# Server.
#-------------------------------------------------------------------
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
D-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files
# Network Settings
# ================
# Notes: If DHCP is enabled, you do not need to set these network
# settings. Although depending on you DHCP server configuration you
# may still have to set the dns address.
D-14
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample Configuration Files
#ip:
# This value is unique to each phone on a server
# and should be set in the "<mac>.cfg" file if
# setting this manually.
#subnet mask:
#default gateway:
#dns1:
#dns2:
# Time Server Settings
# ====================
#time server disabled: 1 # Time server disabled.
#time server1:
#time server2:
#time server3:
# Enable time server and enter at
# least one time server IP address or
# qualified domain name
# Time Server Disabled:
# 0 = false, means the time server is not disabled.
# 1 = true, means the time server is disabled.
# NAT Settings
#=============
# Option 1:
#
# If you are connecting to a Nortel MCS call server and there is a
# NAT device between the server and the phone, then you must set the
# following two parameters for the phone to function correctly.
#sip nortel nat support: 1
# 1 = enabled
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
D-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files
#sip nortel nat timer: 60
# seconds between keep alive messages
# Option 2:
#
# If you are using a session border controller, you should set the
# outbound proxy to the session border controller address
#sip outbound proxy: sbc.aastra.com
#sip outbound proxy port: 0
# a value of 0 enables SRV
# lookups for the address of
# the proxy.
# Option 3:
#
# If you know the public IP address of your NAT device and and have
# opened up a port for the SIP messages then you can statically
# assign this information.
#sip nat ip: 67.123.122.90
#sip nat port: 5890
# Additional Network Settings
#============================
#sip rtp port: 3000
# Eg. RTP packets are sent to port 3000.
#------------------------------------------------------------------
# Configuration Server Settings
# =============================
D-16
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample Configuration Files
# Notes: This section defines which server the phone retrieves new
# firmware images and configuration files from. Three protocols are
# supported TFTP, FTP and HTTP
download protocol: TFTP # valid values are TFTP, FTP and HTTP
## TFTP server settings
tftp server: 192.168.0.130
#alternate tftp server:
#use alternate tftp server: 1
# If your DHCP server assigns
# a TFTP server address which
# you do not use, you can use
# the alternate tftp server.
## FTP server settings
#ftp server: 192.168.0.131 # can be IP or FQDN
#ftp username: aastra
#ftp password: 57iaastra
## HTTP server settings (for http://bogus.aastra.com/firmware/)
#http server: bogus.aastra.com # can be IP or FQDN
#http path: firmware
#------------------------------------------------------------------
# Dial Plan Settings
# ==================
#
# Notes:
#
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
D-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files
# As you dial a number on the phone, the phone will initiate a call
# when one of the following conditions are meet:
#
# (1) The entered number is an exact match in the dial plan
# (2) The "#" symbol has been pressed
# (3) A timeout occurs
#
# The dial plan is a regular expression that supports the following
# syntax:
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,*,# : matches the keypad symbols
x
+
: matches any digit (0...9)
: matches 0 or more repetitions of the
: previous expression
[]
: matches any number inside the brackets
: can be used with a "-" to represent a
: range
()
|
: expression grouping
: either or
# If the dialled number doesn't match the dial plan then the call
# is rejected.
sip digit timeout: 3
# Example dial plans
# set the inter-digit timeout in seconds
sip dial plan: "x+#|xx+*" # this is the default dial string, note
# that is must be quoted since it contains
# a '#' character
#sip dial plan: [01]xxx|[2-8]xxxx|91xxxxxxxxxx
# accecpt any 4 digit number beginning
D-18
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample Configuration Files
# with a 0 or 1, any 5 digit number
# beginning with a number between 2 and 8
# (inclusive) or a 12 digit number
# beginning with 91
#sip dial plan terminator: 1 # enable sending of the "#" symbol to
# to the proxy in the dial string
#-------------------------------------------------------------------
# General SIP Settings
# ====================
#sip session timer: 30
# enable support of RFC4028, the default
# value of 0 disables this functionality
#sip transport protocol: 0 # use UDP (1), TCP (2) or both (0) for sip
# messaging
#sip use basic codecs: 1
#sip out-of-band dtmf: 0
# limit codecs to G711 and G729
# turn off support for RFC2833 (on by
# default)
# Global SIP User Settings
# ========================
#
# Notes:
# These settings are used as the default configuration for the hard
# key lines on the phone. That is:
#
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
D-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files
#
#
#
L1 to L4 on the 57i and 57iCT
L1 to L3 on the 53i
# These can be over-ridden on a per-line basis using the per-line
# settings.
#
# See the Admin Guide for a detailed explaination of how this works
sip screen name: Joe Smith
sip user name: 4256
# the name display on the phone's screen
# the phone number
sip display name: Joseph Smith # the caller name sent out when making
# a call.
sip vmail: *78
# the number to reach voicemail on
sip auth name: jsmith
sip password: 12345
# account used to authenticate user
# password for authentication account
sip mode: 0
# line type:
# 0 - generic,
# 1 - BroadSoft SCA line
# 2 - Nortel line
sip proxy ip: proxy.aastra.com # IP address or FQDN of proxy
sip proxy port: 5060
# port used for SIP messages on the
# proxy. Set to 0 to enable SRV
# lookups
sip registrar ip: aastra.com # IP address or FQDN of registrar
sip registrar port: 0 # as proxy port, but for the registrar
sip registration period: 3600 # registration period in seconds
# Per-line SIP Settings
# =====================
D-20
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample Configuration Files
# configure line 3 as the support Broadsoft SCA line
# - the proxy and registrar settings are taken from the global
#
settings above
sip line3 screen name: Support
sip line3 user name: 4000
sip line3 display name: Aastra Support
sip line3 auth name: support
sip line3 password: 54321
sip line3 mode: 1
sip line3 vmail: *78
# configure line 5 (a soft key line) as an ordinary line
# of a test server
sip line5 screen name: Test 1
sip line5 user name: 5551001
sip line5 display name: Test 1
sip line5 auth name: 5551001
sip line5 password: 5551001
sip line5 mode: 0
sip line5 proxy ip: 10.50.10.102
sip line5 proxy port: 5060
sip line5 registrar ip: 10.50.10.102
sip line5 registrar port: 5060
sip line5 registration period: 60
#-------------------------------------------------------------------
# Softkey Settings
# ================
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
D-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files
# Softkeys can be set either server wide or unique to each phone.
# Setting softkeys as line/call appearances should be done in the
# "<mac>.cfg" file, since these are unique to each phone.
# Notes:
#
# There are a maximum of 18 softkeys that can be configured on the
# 57i or 57iCT phone. These can be set up through either of the 2
# configuration files, depending on whether this is to be server wide
# ("aastra.cfg") or phone specific ("<mac>.cfg"). Each softkey needs
# to be numbered from 1 - 18, for example "softkey12 type:
# speeddial". Softkeys can be set up as speeddials or as additional
# call/line appearances and have a type, label and value associated
# with it as seen here in the default softkey settings.
# SOFTKEY TYPES: "line", "speeddial", "blf", "list", "dnd"
# SOFTKEY LABEL: Alpha numeric name for the softkey. The maximum
#
#
number of characters for this value is 10 for
speeddials and dnd, 9 chars for lines, blf
# SOFTKEY VALUE: If softkey type is a speeddial, any DTMFs (from
#
#
#
#
0 - 9, *, "#") or a comma (,) for 500ms pause and
'E' for On-hook can be set for the value.
If softkey type is blf it is the extension you want
to monitor.
# SOFTKEY LINE: This is line associated with the softkey. For line
#
#
#
softkeys the value must be between 5 and 9 (1 - 4
are already hardcoded as the L1, L2, L3 and L4 hard
key line/call appearances)
# Speed Dials
softkey1 type: speeddial
softkey1 label: "Ext Pickup"
softkey1 value: *8
D-22
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample Configuration Files
softkey2 type: speeddial
softkey2 label: "Call Return"
softkey2 value: *69
# DND Key
softkey4 type: dnd
softkey4 label: DND
# Line appearance
softkey6 type: line
softkey6 label: Test 1
softkey6 line: 5
# blf
softkey8 type: blf
softkey8 label: Jane Doe
softkey8 value: 4559
softkey8 line: 1
# list
softkey11 type: list
softkey12 type: list
#-------------------------------------------------------------------
# Cordless Handset Feature Keys
# =============================
# Notes:
#
# In addition to the configuration parameters that exist on the 57i
# phone, following are the parameters specific to the 57i Cordless
# phones' handset. These parameters can be defined either int the
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
D-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files
# aastra.cfg or the <mac>.cfg files.
#
# The feature keys are displayed when the user presses the F button
# on the cordless phone's hand set. If any changes to the features
# keys are made using these parameters the feature keys that exist on
# the hand set have to be refreshed. To refresh the feature keys
# simply open a new line or press one of the feature keys that are
# available from the hand set. After a couple of seconds the cordless
# should get the new list from the base set. There are 15 feature
# keys that can be configured for the cordless hand set. Each feature
# key has the following settings. N corresponds to the feature key
# that is being configured for and ranges from 0-14. Feature key N
# En label: "String" Feature key N Fr label: "Fr-String" Feature key
# N Sp label: "Sp-String" Feature key N control: 1
#Takes an
# integer value Feature key N hs event: 1 #Takes an integer value
# Feature key N base event: 1 #Takes an integer value
#key list version: 1
# The parameter value has to be incremented by one whenever the
# parameters that carry the feature keys change. The range is from
# 1-254. After reaching 254 start over from 1.
#Feature key 0 En label: "Line 1"
# English label for the key. Displayed when the phone's language is
# set to use English
#Feature key 0 Fr label: "Fr-Line 1"
# French label for the key. Displayed when the phone's language
# is set to use French
#Feature key 0 Sp label: "Sp-Line 1"
# Spanish label for the key. Displayed when the phone's language
# is set to use Spanish
D-24
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample Configuration Files
Feature key 0 Gr label: "Gr-Line 1"
# German label for the key. Displayed when the phone's language
# is set to use German
Feature key 0 It label: "It-Line 1"
# Italian label for the key. Displayed when the phone's language
# is set to use Italian
#Feature key 0 control: 1
# 1 - Make the key configurable by the user through the phone and
#
the phone's web client
# 2 - Locks the key from user modifications. User cannot modify
this key from the handset or the phone's web client.
# 4 - Hide this key. Do not show it in the Feature keys list in the
cordless handset
# 6 - Lock and hide this key. Do not show it in the Feature keys
#
#
#
#
list in the cordless handset and do not let the user modify
this key using the phone or the web client.
#Feature key 0 hs event: 7
# These events are for handset specific events. Events can be local
# to the handset like directory/caller's list, intercom etc. or may
# be an event that is sent to the base set for fruther processing.
# When this key is configured as a base event then the base set
# will process the value of this key in conjunction with the value
# configured for the "Feature key N base event". Where N is the
# feature key is being configured for.
# In addition to the values listed below the valid values are
# [7-23]. The values [7-23] indicate generic handset events. If
# you are using values within this range make sure to use the value
# only once.
# The events local to the handset are as follows:
#
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
D-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
58 - Menu (Options)
59 - Feature Key
60 - Redial
61 - Directory
62 - Callers' list
63 - Services
86 - Icom
#Feature key 0 base event: 1
# Indicates a corresponding action to perform on the base set when
# the "Feature key N hs event" is set to any value between 7-23.
#
# 1 - Seize base set's line1
# 2 - Seize base set's line2
# 3 - Seize base set's line3
# 4 - Seize base set's line4
# 5 - Seize base set's line5
# 6 - Seize base set's line6
# 7 - Seize base set's line7
# 8 - Seize base set's line8
# 9 - Seize base set's line9
# 10 - Seize base set's line0
# 11 - Send the base set's transfer event
# 12 - Send the base set's conference event
# 13 - Make feature list public
# Example configuration
key list version: 1
Feature key 0 En label: "Line 1"
Feature key 0 Fr label: "Fr-Line 1"
Feature key 0 Sp label: "Sp-Line 1"
Feature key 0 control: 0
D-26
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample Configuration Files
Feature key 0 hs event: 7
Feature key 0 base event: 1
Feature key 1 En label: "Conf."
Feature key 1 Fr label: "Fr-Conf."
Feature key 1 Sp label: "Sp-Conf."
Feature key 1 control: 1
Feature key 1 hs event: 8
Feature key 1 base event: 12
Feature key 2 En label: "Xfer"
Feature key 2 Fr label: "Fr-Xfer."
Feature key 2 Sp label: "Sp-Xfer."
Feature key 2 control: 2
Feature key 2 hs event: 9
Feature key 2 base event: 11
Feature key 3 En label: "Icom"
Feature key 3 Fr label: "Fr-Icom"
Feature key 3 Sp label: "Sp-Icom"
Feature key 3 control: 1
Feature key 3 hs event: 86
Feature key 3 base event: 13
Feature key 4 En label: "Opt"
Feature key 4 Fr label: "Fr-Opt"
Feature key 4 Sp label: "Sp-Opt"
Feature key 4 hs event: 58
Feature key 4 control: 1
Feature key 4 base event: 13
Feature key 5 En label: "Callers"
Feature key 5 Fr label: "Fr-Callers"
Feature key 5 Sp label: "Sp-Callers"
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
D-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files
Feature key 5 hs event: 62
Feature key 5 control: 1
Feature key 5 base event: 13
Feature key 6 En label: "Top"
Feature key 6 Fr label: "Fr-Top"
Feature key 6 Sp label: "Sp-Top"
Feature key 6 hs event: 17
Feature key 6 control: 1
Feature key 6 base event: 13
Feature key 7 En label: "Redial"
Feature key 7 Fr label: "Fr-Redial"
Feature key 7 Sp label: "Sp-Redial"
Feature key 7 hs event: 60
Feature key 7 control: 4
Feature key 7 base event: 13
Feature key 8 En label: "Dir."
Feature key 8 Fr label: "Fr-Dir."
Feature key 8 Sp label: "Sp-Dir."
Feature key 8 hs event: 61
Feature key 8 control: 2
Feature key 8 base event: 13
Feature key 9 En label: "Services"
Feature key 9 Fr label: "Fr-Services"
Feature key 9 Sp label: "Sp-Services"
Feature key 9 hs event: 63
Feature key 9 control: 1
Feature key 9 base event: 13
D-28
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample Configuration Files
53i Sample Configuration File
# Sample Configuration File
#= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
# Date: October 26th, 2005
# Phone Model: 53i
# Notes:
#
# The general format used here is similar to configuration files
# used by several UNIX-based programs. Any text following a number
# sign (#) is considered to be a comment, unless the number sign is
# contained within double-quotes ("#") where it is considered to be
# a pound. For Boolean fields, 0 = false, 1 = true.
# Comments:
#
# This file contains sample configurations for the "aastra.cfg" or
# "<mac>.cfg" file. The settings included here are examples only.
# You should change/comment the values to suit your requirements.
#
# Not all possible paramters are shown, refer to the admin guide
# for the full list of supported parameters, their defaults and
# valid ranges.
#
# The Aastra 57i, 57iCT, and 53i phones will download 2
# configuration files from the TFTP server while restarting, the
# "aastra.cfg" file and the "<mac>.cfg" file. These two
# configuration files can be used to configure all of the settings
# of the phone with the exception of assigning a static IP address
# to a phone and line settings, which should only be set in the "<mac>.cfg" file.
#
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
D-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files
# The "aastra.cfg" file configures the settings server wide, while
# the "<mac>.cfg" file configures only the phone with the MAC
# address for which the file is named (for example,
# "00085d0304f4.cfg"). The settings in the "aastra.cfg" file will
# be overridden by settings which also appear in the "<mac>.cfg" file.
#-----------------------------------------------------------------
# DHCP Setting
# =============
#dhcp: 1 # DHCP enabled.
# DHCP:
# 0 = false, means DHCP is disabled.
#1 = true, means DHCP is enabled.
#
# Notes:
#
# DHCP is normally set from the Options list on the phone or
# the web interface
#
# If DHCP is disabled, the following network settings will
# have to be configured manually either through the configuration
# files, the Options List in the phone, or the Web Client: IP
# Address (of the phone), Subnet Mask, Gateway, DNS, and TFTP
# Server.
#-----------------------------------------------------------------
# Network Settings
# = = = = = = = = =
# Notes: If DHCP is enabled, you do not need to set these network
# settings. Although depending on you DHCP server configuration
# you may still have to set the dns address.
D-30
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample Configuration Files
#ip:
# This value is unique to each phone on a server
# and should be set in the "<mac>.cfg" file if
# setting this manually.
#subnet mask:
#default gateway:
#dns1:
#dns2:
# Time Server Settings
# =====================
#time server disabled: 1 # Time server disabled.
#time server1:
#time server2:
#time server3:
# Enable time server and enter at
# least one time server IP address or
# qualified domain name.
# Time Server Disabled:
# 0 = false, means the time server is not disabled.
# 1 = true, means the time server is disabled.
# NAT Settings
# = = = = = = =
# Option 1:
#
# If you are connecting to a Nortel MCS call server and there is a
# NAT device between the server and the phone, then you must set
# the following two parameters for the phone to function
# correctly.
#sip nortel nat support: 1
# 1 = enabled
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
D-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files
#sip nortel nat timer: 60
# seconds between keep alive messages
D-32
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample Configuration Files
# Option 2:
#
# If you are using a session border controller, you should set the
# outbound proxy to the session border controller address
#sip outbound proxy: sbc.aastra.com
#sip outbound proxy port: 0
# a value of 0 enables SRV
# lookups for the address of
# the proxy.
# Option 3:
#
# If you know the public IP address of your NAT device and and have
# opened up a port for the SIP messages then you can statically
# assign this information.
#sip nat ip: 67.123.122.90
#sip nat port: 5890
# Additional Network Settings
# ============================
#sip rtp port: 3000
# Eg. RTP packets are sent to port 3000.
#-----------------------------------------------------------------
# Configuration Server Settings
# = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
# Notes: This section defines which server the phone retrieves new
# firmware images and configuration files from. Three protocols
# are supported TFTP, FTP and HTTP
download protocol: TFTP # valid values are TFTP, FTP and HTTP
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
D-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files
D-34
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample Configuration Files
## TFTP server settings
tftp server: 192.168.0.130
#alternate tftp server:
#use alternate tftp server: 1 # If your DHCP server assigns
# a TFTP server address which
# you do not use, you can use
# the alternate tftp server.
## FTP server settings
#ftp server: 192.168.0.131 # can be IP or FQDN
#ftp username: aastra
#ftp password: 57iaastra
## HTTP server settings (for http://bogus.aastra.com/firmware/)
#http server: bogus.aastra.com # can be IP or FQDN
#http path: firmware
#----------------------------------------------------------------
# Dial Plan Settings
# ====================
#
# Notes:
#
# As you dial a number on the phone, the phone will initiate a call
# when one of the following conditions are meet:
#
# (1) The entered number is an exact match in the dial plan
# (2) The "#" symbol has been pressed
# (3) A timeout occurs
#
# The dial plan is a regular expression that supports the
# following:
# syntax:
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
D-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files
#
D-36
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample Configuration Files
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,*,# : matches the keypad symbols
x
+
: matches any digit (0...9)
: matches 0 or more repetitions of the
: previous expression
[]
: matches any number inside the brackets
: can be used with a "-" to represent a
: range
()
|
: expression grouping
: either or
# If the dialled number doesn't match the dial plan then the call
# is rejected.
sip digit timeout: 3
# Example dial plans
# set the inter-digit timeout in seconds
sip dial plan: "x+#|xx+*" # this is the default dial string, note
# that is must be quoted since it contains
# a '#' character
#sip dial plan: [01]xxx|[2-8]xxxx|91xxxxxxxxxx
# accecpt any 4 digit number beginning
# with a 0 or 1, any 5 digit number
# beginning with a number between 2 and 8
# (inclusive) or a 12 digit number
# beginning with 91
#sip dial plan terminator: 1 # enable sending of the "#" symbol to
# to the proxy in the dial string
#-----------------------------------------------------------------
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
D-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files
# General SIP Settings
# ======================
#sip session timer: 30
# enable support of RFC4028, the default
# value of 0 disables this functionality
#sip transport protocol: 0 # use UDP (1), TCP (2) or both (0) for
# sip messaging
#sip use basic codecs: 1
#sip out-of-band dtmf: 0
# limit codecs to G711 and G729
# turn off support for RFC2833 (on by
# default)
# Global SIP User Settings
# ==========================
#
# Notes:
# These settings are used as the default configuration for the
# hard key lines on the phone. That is:
#
#
#
#
L1 to L4 on the 57i and 57iCT
L1 to L3 on the 53i
# These can be over-ridden on a per-line basis using the per-line
# settings.
#
# See the Admin Guide for a detailed explaination of how this
# works
sip screen name: Joe Smith # the name display on the phone's screen
sip user name: 4256
# the phone number
sip display name: Joseph Smith # the caller name sent out when making
# a call.
sip vmail: *78
# the number to reach voicemail on
D-38
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample Configuration Files
sip auth name: jsmith
sip password: 12345
# account used to authenticate user
# password for authentication account
sip mode: 0
# line type:
# 0 - generic,
# 1 - BroadSoft SCA line
# 2 - Nortel line
sip proxy ip: proxy.aastra.com # IP address or FQDN of proxy
sip proxy port: 5060
# port used for SIP messages on the
# proxy. Set to 0 to enable SRV
# lookups
sip registrar ip: aastra.com # IP address or FQDN of registrar
sip registrar port: 0 # as proxy port, but for the registrar
sip registration period: 3600 # registration period in seconds
# Per-line SIP Settings
# =======================
# configure line 3 as the support Broadsoft SCA line
# - the proxy and registrar settings are taken from the global
#
settings above
sip line3 screen name: Support
sip line3 user name: 4000
sip line3 display name: Aastra Support
sip line3 auth name: support
sip line3 password: 54321
sip line3 mode: 1
sip line3 vmail: *78
# configure line 5 (a soft key line) as an ordinary line
# of a test server
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
D-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files
sip line5 screen name: Test 1
sip line5 user name: 5551001
sip line5 display name: Test 1
sip line5 auth name: 5551001
sip line5 password: 5551001
sip line5 mode: 0
sip line5 proxy ip: 10.50.10.102
sip line5 proxy port: 5060
sip line5 registrar ip: 10.50.10.102
sip line5 registrar port: 5060
sip line5 registration period: 60
#-----------------------------------------------------------------
# Programmable Key Settings
# ===========================
# Programmable keys can be set either server wide or unique to each
# phone.
# Setting programmable keys as line/call appearances should be done
# in the "<mac>.cfg" file, since these are unique to each phone.
# Notes:
#
# There are a maximum of 7 programmable keys that can be configured
# on the 53i phone, and only 2 on the phone. These can be
# set up through either of the 2 configuration files, depending on
# whether this is to be server wide ("aastra.cfg") or phone
# specific ("<mac>.cfg"). Each prgkey needs to be numbered from
# 1 - 7, for example "prgkey2 type:
# speeddial". Programmable keys can be set up as speeddials or as
# additional call/line appearances or as feature keys and have a
# type, value and line associated with it as seen here in the
# default programmable settings.
# PRGKEY TYPES: "line", "speeddial", "blf", "list", "dnd"
D-40
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample Configuration Files
# PRGKEY VALUE: If prgkey type is a speeddial, any DTMFs (from
#
#
#
#
0 - 9, *, "#") or a comma (,) for 500ms pause and
'E' for On-hook can be set for the value.
If prgkey type is blf it is the extension you want
to monitor.
# PRGKEY LINE: This is line associated with the prgkey. For line
#
#
#
prgkeys the value must be between 4 and 9 (1 - 3
are already hardcoded as the L1, L2 and L3 hard
key line/call appearances).
# Speed Dials
prgkey1 type: speeddial
prgkey1 value: *8
prgkey2 type: speeddial
prgkey2 value: *69
# DND Key
prgkey3 type: dnd
# Line appearance
prgkey4 type: line
prgkey4 line: 5
# blf
prgkey5 type: blf
prgkey5 value: 4559
prgkey5 line: 1
# list
prgkey6 type: list
prgkey7 type: list
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
D-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix E
Sample BLF Softkey Settings
About this appendix
Introduction
This appendix provides sample BLF softkey settings for both the Asterisk server
and the BroadSoft BroadWorks server.
Topics
Topic
Page
Sample BLF Softkey Settings
Asterisk BLF
page E-2
page E-2
page E-3
BroadSoft BroadWorks BLF
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
E-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample BLF Softkey Settings
Sample BLF Softkey Settings
Asterisk BLF
The following are sample softkey and programmable key configurations to enable
Asterisk BLF support on Aastra IP phones.
57i and 57i CT Configuration Parameters for Asterisk BLF
softkey1 type: blf
softkey1 value: 9995551212
softkey1 label: John
softkey1 line: 1
53i Configuration Parameters for Asterisk BLF
prgkey1 type: blf
prgkey1 value: 9995551212
prgkey1 label: John
prgkey1 line: 1
prgkey7 type: blf
prgkey7 value: 9995551313
prgkey7 label: Jane
prgkey7 line: 1
E-2
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample BLF Softkey Settings
BroadSoft BroadWorks BLF
The following are sample softkey and programmable key configurations to enable
Broadsoft BroadWorks Busy Lamp Field support on Aastra IP phones.
57i and 57i CT Configuration Parameters for Broadsoft BroadWorks BLF
Note: One softkey must be defined of type “list” for EACH monitored
user. So if there are 2 users being monitored, 2 softkeys must be defined
of type list.
softkey1 type: list
softkey1 label:
softkey1 value:
softkey1 line: 1
softkey2 type: list
softkey2 label:
softkey2 value:
softkey2 line: 1
list uri: sip:[email protected]
53i Configuration Parameters for Broadsoft BroadWorks BLF
Note: One prgkey must be defined of type “list” for each monitored user.
So if there are 2 users being monitored, 2 prgkeys must be defined of type
list.
prgkey6 type: list
prgkey6 label:
prgkey6 value: 1
prgkey7 type: list
prgkey7 label:
prgkey7 value: 1
list uri: sip:[email protected]
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
E-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix F
Sample Multiple Proxy Server
Configuration
About this appendix
Introduction
This appendix provides a sample multiple proxy server configuration.
This appendix covers the following topics:
Topics
Topic
Page
Multiple Proxy Server Configuration
page F-2
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
F-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Multiple Proxy Server Configuration
Multiple Proxy Server Configuration
Multiple proxy servers can be configured in the aastra.cfg file or the <mac>.cfg
file. In the example below, the default proxy setting is used if no specific setting is
specified in the line configuration. Line2 and line3 are used for the global proxy
configurations, while line1 and line4 use their own specific settings.
#sip settings
sip proxy ip: #.#.#.#
sip proxy port: 5060
sip registrar ip: #.#.#.#
sip registrar port: 5060
sip registration period:3600
sip nortel nat support:0
sip nortel nat timer:0
sip broadsoft talk:0
sip broadsoft hold:0
sip broadsoft conference:0
sip dial plan: "x+#""
#line info
# Fill in all necessary information below carefully. Populate all
lines even if there is only
# one account
#line 1
sip line1 auth name:
sip line1 password:
sip line1 mode: 0
sip line1 user name:
sip line1 display name:
sip line1 screen name:
sip line1 proxy ip: &.&.&.&
sip line1 proxy port: 5060
sip line1 registrar ip: #.#.#.#
sip line1 registrar port: 5060
sip registration period:600
sip nortel nat support:1
sip nortel nat timer:120
sip broadsoft talk:0
sip broadsoft hold:0
sip broadsoft conference:0
Continued.....
#line 2
sip line2 auth name:
sip line2 password:
F-2
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multiple Proxy Server Configuration
sip line2 mode: 0
sip line2 user name:
sip line2 display name:
sip line2 screen name:
#line 3
sip line3 auth name:
sip line3 password:
sip line3 mode: 0
sip line3 user name:
sip line3 display name:
sip line3 screen name:
#line 4
sip line4 auth name:
sip line4 password:
sip line4 mode: 0
sip line4 user name:
sip line4 display name:
sip line4 screen name:
sip line4 proxy ip: %.%.%.%
sip line4 proxy port: 5060
sip line4 registrar ip: %.%.%.%
sip line4 registrar port: 5060
sip registration period:500
sip nortel nat support:0
sip nortel nat timer:0
sip broadsoft talk:1
sip broadsoft hold:1
sip broadsoft conference:1
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
F-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix G
Creating and Managing
XML Applications
About this appendix
Introduction
This appendix provides information required to create an XML application for use
on the IP phones.
Topics
Topic
Page
Creating an XML Application
XML format
page G-3
page G-3
page G-4
page G-5
page G-6
page G-14
page G-24
page G-39
page G-41
Creating XML Objects
Creating Custom Softkeys
Text Menu Object (Menu Screens)
Text Screen Object (Text Screens)
UserInput Object (User Input Screens)
Directory Object (Directory List Screen)
Status Message Object (Idle Screen)
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
About this appendix
Topic
Page
Execute Commands Object (for executing XML commands)
page G-43
page G-60
page G-64
page G-68
page G-43
page G-82
page G-85
page G-88
page G-88
page G-88
page G-89
XML URI for Key Press Simulation
Dynamic Configuration Object (to push a configuration to the phone)
XML Image Objects (9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i/57i CT only)
Attributes/Options to Use with XML Objects
HTTP Post
XML Schema File
Managing XML Applications
Support of Virtual Web Servers
Non-Blocking HTTP Connections
XML SIP Notify
G-2
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
Creating an XML Application
Overview
This section describes how to create an XML application for your IP phones. This
•
•
•
•
•
XML format
Creating XML Objects
Creating Custom Softkeys
HTTP Post
XML Schema File
XML format
The text in the Aastra XML objects must be compliant with XML
recommendations and special characters must be escape encoded. The default
character set for the XML API is ISO-8859-1.
Table 1:
Character
Description
Ampersand
Escape Sequence
&
&
"
Quote
"
'
<
’
Apostrophe
Left angle bracket
<
>
Right angle bracket >
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Creating an XML Application
Creating XML Objects
This section describes how to create XML objects.
•
Text Menu Object (Menu Screens)
•
•
Text Screen Object (Text Screens)
Status Message Object (Idle Screen)
•
•
•
— Using the Reset Command
— Using the NoOp Command
— Using the FastReboot Command
— Using the LED Commands (for Softkey or Programmable Key LED
•
Dynamic Configuration Object (to push a configuration to the phone)
•
UI)
•
•
•
•
Scroll Delay Option (configurable via config files and Aastra Web UI only)
Timeout Attribute (configurable via XML objects only)
LockIn Attribute (configurable via XML objects only)
CancelAction Attribute (configurable via XML objects only)
G-4
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
Creating Custom Softkeys
Developers can link arbitrary URIs to softkeys in the XML screens and can
invoke softkey behavior to each XML screen type (Text Menu, Text Screen, User
Input, Directory). A developer can define up to six softkeys before the closing tag
of any object on the 9480i/9480i CT and 57i/57i CT.
The following softkey functionality is available to the developer for the purpose
of reordering or preserving the default functionality of the XML screens. The
"Dial" function is available to screens that allow input. The dial string for the
"Dial" function is taken from the menu items URI on the Menu Screen, and from
the editor field input on the Input Screen.
ExistingAction
Keys
Text
Screen
Menu
Screen
Input
Screen
Select
X
X
X
X
X
Done
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Cancel
Exit
X
Dial
Submit
Backspace
Nextspace
Dot
ChangeCase
Numeric/Alpha
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Creating an XML Application
Text Menu Object (Menu Screens)
The Text Menu object allows application developers to create a numerical list of
menu items on the IP phones. The go-to line support, arrow indicator, and scroll
key support are built into these objects, along with the "Select" and "Done" soft
keys. You can also turn off automatic numbering of menu items using the
style=”none" attribute or use bullets for lists instead of numbers using the
style=”bullet”.
The Text Menu object allows users to navigate the application, by linking HTTP
requests to menu items.
Implementation
The following is how you would implement the Text Menu object.
Note: For all available parameters you can use for the Text Menu object,
and for an explanation of each parameter, see Aastra Telecom’s
"XML Developer’s Guide".
Softkeys:
•
•
1=Select
6=Done
XML Description:
<AastraIPPhoneTextMenu
defaultIndex = "some integer"
destroyOnExit = "yes/no">
<Title>Menu Title</Title>
<MenuItem base ="http://base/">
<Prompt>First Choice</Prompt>
<URI>http://somepage.xml</URI>
<Selection></Selection>
</MenuItem>
<!-Additional Menu Items may be added -->
<!-Additional Softkey Items may be added -->
</AastraIPPhoneTextMenu>
G-6
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
XML example:
<AastraIPPhoneTextMenu>
<Title>Phone Services</Title>
<MenuItem base = "http://10.50.10.53/">
<Prompt>Traffic Reports</Prompt>
<URI> rss_to_xml.pl</URI>
</MenuItem>
<MenuItem>
<Prompt>Employee List</Prompt>
<URI>employees.xml</URI>
</MenuItem>
<MenuItem base ="">
<Prompt>Weather</Prompt>
<URI>http://10.50.10.52/weather.pl</URI>
</MenuItem>
</AastraIPPhoneTextMenu>
XML Screen Example:
Phone Services
1.Traffic Reports
2.Employee List
3.Weather
Select
Done
Note: The maximum number of items to be included in a Text Menu
object is 15.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Creating an XML Application
Turning Off Automatic Numbering of Menu Items
When implementing the AastraIPPhoneTextMenu object, you can turn off
automatic numbering of the items in a list using the style=”none" attribute.
XML Description:
You use this attribute as follows.
<AastraIPPhoneTextMenu style=”none”>
<Title>Example</Title>
<MenuItem>
<Prompt>Item 1</Prompt>
<URI>http://somepage.xml</URI>
</MenuItem>
</AastraIPPhoneTextMenu>
XML example:
The following is an example of using the "style=none" attribute with the
AastraIPPhoneText Menu object.
<AastraIPPhoneTextMenu style=”none”>
<Title>Phone Services</Title>
<MenuItem base = "http://10.50.10.53/">
<Prompt>Traffic Reports</Prompt>
<URI> rss_to_xml.pl</URI>
</MenuItem>
<MenuItem>
<Prompt>Employee List</Prompt>
<URI>employees.xml</URI>
</MenuItem>
<MenuItem base ="">
<Prompt>Weather</Prompt>
<URI>http://10.50.10.52/weather.pl</URI>
</MenuItem>
</AastraIPPhoneTextMenu>
G-8
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
XML Screen Example:
The following example shows the items in the Text Menu without the item
numbering.
Phone Services
Traffic Reports
Employee List
Weather
Select
Done
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Creating an XML Application
Using Bullets in Menu Items
When implementing the AastraIPPhoneTextMenu object, you can use bullets to
list items using the style=”bullet" attribute.
XML Description:
You use this attribute as follows.
<AastraIPPhoneTextMenu style=”bullet”>
<Title>Example</Title>
<MenuItem>
<Prompt>Item 1</Prompt>
<URI>http://somepage.xml</URI>
</MenuItem>
</AastraIPPhoneTextMenu>
XML example:
The following is an example of using the "style=bullet" attribute with the
AastraIPPhoneText Menu object.
<AastraIPPhoneTextMenu style=”bullet”>
<Title>Phone Services</Title>
<MenuItem base = "http://10.50.10.53/">
<Prompt>Traffic Reports</Prompt>
<URI> rss_to_xml.pl</URI>
</MenuItem>
<MenuItem>
<Prompt>Employee List</Prompt>
<URI>employees.xml</URI>
</MenuItem>
<MenuItem base ="">
<Prompt>Weather</Prompt>
<URI>http://10.50.10.52/weather.pl</URI>
</MenuItem>
</AastraIPPhoneTextMenu>
G-10
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
XML Screen Example:
The following example shows the items in the Text Menu without the item
numbering.
Phone Services
Traffic Reports
Employee List
Weather
Select
Done
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Creating an XML Application
Text Wrap for XML TextMenu Items
The AastraIPPhoneTextMenu object supports text wrapping on two lines for its
items. This is done using a new attribute called "wrapList". This attribute allows
you to specify the text wrapping to an additional line rather than truncating and
dropping the text.
Note: If the menu item begins with more than one large word (with no
spaces or hyphens), the first full word displays on the first line truncated
and the next full word displays on the next line.
The example below illustrates the IP Phone text wrapping prior to Release 2.2,
and the new text wrapping in Release 2.2 and later.
Top Stories
Top Stories
DNA shows Columbian
Blurry-eyed front-ru
Analysis: Iowa is ov
Fed to lend $60 bil
DNA shows Columbian
captor fathered boy
Blurry-eyed front-
runners take first
9480i, 9480i CT,
55i, 57i, and 57i CT
- Select
- Select
Done -
Done -
1 DNA shows Colo
1 DNA shows
9143i, 51i and 53i
Columbian capt
Next
Next
Enter
Enter
Text Wrapping
Prior to Release 2.2
Text Wrapping
in Release 2.2
You can use the RIGHT arrow key to scroll the screen to the right to view
additional text.
G-12
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
Configuring the Text Wrapping Parameter
You use the following parameter with the XML AastraIPPhoneTextMenu object:
wrapList
•
Example
<AastraIPPhoneTextMenu destroyOnExit’”yes” wrapList=”yes”....
.....
<AastraIPPhoneTextMenu>
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Creating an XML Application
Text Screen Object (Text Screens)
You use the AastraIPPhoneTextScreen object to display text to the LCD screen
on the IP Phone. The screen text wraps appropriately and can scroll to display a
message longer then four lines.
After implementing this object, text displays to the LCD on the IP phone.
A user can scroll through the screens as required. If you use the
“destroyOnExit” attribute in the XML script, when the user exits the
XML screeens, the screens are destroyed. You can also allow specific text
screens to redisplay for redirection to a new page by using the
“doneAction” attribute and specifying the new page to go to in the XML
script.
Notes:
1. You can use the “destroyOnExit” attribute with any XML object as
required.
2. You can use the “doneAction” attribute with the
AastraIPPhoneTextScreen and AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen
objects only.
3. For all available parameters you can use for the Text Screen object, and
for an explanation of each parameter, see Aastra Telecom’s
"XML Developer’s Guide".
Implementation
The following is how you would implement the Text Screen object.
Softkey:
•
6=Done
XML Description:
<AastraIPPhoneTextScreen destroyOnExit = "yes/no">
<Title>Screen Title</Title>
<Text>The screen text goes here</Text>
</AastraIPPhoneTextScreen>
or
<AastraIPPhoneTextScreen doneAction=”HTTP address”>
<Title>Screen Title</Title>
<Text> The screen text goes here</Text>
</AastraIPPhoneTextScreen>
G-14
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
XML Example 1:
<AastraIPPhoneTextScreen destroyOnExit = "yes">
<Title>Screen Object</Title>
<Text>The screen object can be implemented similar to the firmware
info screen. Note that white space is preserved in XML so the
display should word-wrap appropriately. Only three lines can
display at a time.</Text>
</AastraIPPhoneTextScreen>
Note: This example displays text that you can scroll through on the LCD
screen. As you scroll the screen, the previous text is destroyed.
XML Screen Example 1:
Screen Object
The screen object can
be implemented
similar to the
Done
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Creating an XML Application
XML Example 2:
<AastraIPPhoneTextScreen doneAction=”http://10.50.10.117/
test.xml”>
<Title>Screen Object</Title>
<Text>For more information about this test, press Done.</Text>
</AastraIPPhoneTextScreen>
Note: This example displays text that you can scroll through on the LCD
screen. As you scroll the screen, and then press DONE (9480i, 9480i CT,
55i, 57i, 57i CT) or the RIGHT ARROW key (9143i and 53i), the screen
redirects you to the location specified in the script. After pressing DONE
or the RIGHT ARROW key, the phone checks if a “doneAction” exists
in the XML script. If it does, the screen gets redirected to the location
specified. If it does not exist, then the scrolled screens use the
“destroyOnExit” attribute and destroy the screens.
XML Screen Example 2:
Screen Object
For more information about
this test, press DONE.
Done
TEST
This screen displays the HTTP
screen that you have been
redirected to.
Done
G-16
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
XML Support for Answer and Ignore Softkeys
When the IP phone receives an XML application (either via a post or an incoming
action URI) while a call is coming into the phone, the user can either answer or
ignore the call with new softkeys that display (9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i
CT), or press the left and right arrow keys (9143i and 53i), without canceling the
XML application.
For a 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT, an Administrator can use the
“Answer” and “Ignore” attributes in an XML script to implement this feature.
For a 9143i and 53i, an Administrator can use the “allowAnswer” attribute with
the AastraIPPhoneTextScreen XML object. Valid values for the “allowAnswer”
attribute are “yes” or “no” (default).
For 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT:
•
The Answer and Ignore softkeys display on the LCD when the phone has an
incoming call at the same time it receives an XML application.
•
XML applications are destroyed if the phone receives a call after the XML
has been rendered.
When the Answer softkey displays, you can press it to answer the incoming call
without disturbing the current XML application. When you answer the call, the
softkey disappears from the LCD. Pressing the Ignore softkey ignores the
incoming call without disturbing the current XML application.
Implementation (9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, 57i CT)
Softkeys:
•
•
1=Answer
2=Ignore
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Creating an XML Application
XML Example:
<SoftKey index="1">
<Label>Answer</Label>
<URI>SoftKey:Answer</URI>
</SoftKey>
<SoftKey index="2">
<Label>Answer</Label>
<URI>SoftKey:Ignore</URI>
</SoftKey>
XML Screen Example:
,ꢀ
*OHN 3MITH
!N 8-, APPLICATION CAN
DISPLAY HERE WHILE A CALL
IS COMING INꢁ
ꢂ !NSWER
ꢂ )GNORE
For 9143i, 53i:
•
An <Ignore Answer> line displays on the LCD when the phone receives an
incoming call at the same time it receives an XML application.
•
XML applications are destroyed if the phone receives a call after the XML
has been rendered.
When the <Ignore Answer> line displays, you can press the Right Arrow key
(Answer) to answer the incoming call without disturbing the current XML
application. When you answer the call, the <Ignore Answer> line disappears from
the LCD. Pressing the Left Arrow key ignores the incoming call without
disturbing the current XML application.
G-18
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
Implementation (9143i, 53i)
XML Example:
<AastraIPPhoneTextScreen allowAnswer = "yes">
<Title>Screen Object</Title>
<Text>The screen object can be implemented similar to the firmware
info screen. Note that white space is preserved in XML so the
display should word-wrap appropriately. Only three lines can
display at a time.</Text>
</AastraIPPhoneTextScreen>
XML Screen Example:
!N 8-, APPLICATION CAN DISPLAY
HERE WHILE A CALL IS COMING INꢁ
,JQRUH $QVZHU
Text Screen Format Object (for Text Screens)
The AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen object allows you to specify a format
for the text that displays in the LCD window on the phone. Using this object, you
can specify the following for the text that displays:
•
•
alignment (using the “Align” attribute and specifying right, left, or center )*
height)*
•
display type (using the “Line” or “Scroll” attributes to specify static or
scrolling)*
*See the AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen structure example on page G-20.
The phone’s LCD screen allows up to a total of 5 lines for displaying text. The
formatted text displays in three distinct blocks in the order it is written in the XML
object:
•
The first block displays text at the top of the LCD window. By default, this
text block is static. This block can contain as many lines as the XML object
specifies and can range from zero (0) up to the LCD screen size.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Creating an XML Application
•
•
The second block displays below the first block. By default, the second text
block displays as scrolling text. This block takes up as many lines as the XML
developer specifies, up to the LCD screen size.
The third block displays below the second block. By default, the third block
displays static text, and takes up whatever lines remain blank on the LCD
screen.
Note: Any of the three blocks can be set as static text or scrolling text but
the text displays on a total of 5 lines only. Any lines that display after line
5 are lost.
Using the AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen object, the display truncates a line
after the last word in that line and continues to wrap the text to the next line.The
phone ignores any lines that display after the 5th line on the LCD screen.
AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen Structure
The AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen object describes the structure of the
XML document that you can use to format the text that displays on the phone’s
LCD screen. The default structure of the AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen
object is:
<AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen>
<Line Size="<normal/double>" Align="<right/left/center>">A line of
static text</Line>
<Scroll Height=n>
<Line Size="<normal/double>" Align="<right/left/center>">
Scrolling text</Line>
<Line>Another line of Scrolling Text</Line>
<Line>Yet another scrolling line</Line>
</Scroll>
<Line>Some static footer text</Line>
</AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen>
Note: The text in bold in the above structure indicate the options you can
use for text size (normal, double), alignment (right, left, center), and
scrolling height (from 1 to 5 lines). Setting a scrolling height less than “1”
automatically sets the scroller height to “1”.
G-20
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
XML Example:
The following is an example of using the AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen
object with a static line at the top and bottom blocks and 2 scrolling lines in the
middle block.
<AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen>
<Line Size="double" Align="left">A line of static text</Line>
<Scroll Height=2>
<Line Size="normal" Align="right"> Scrolling text</Line>
<Line>Another line of Scrolling Text</Line>
<Line>Yet another scrolling line</Line>
</Scroll>
<Line>Some static footer text</Line>
</AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen>
XML Screen Examples:
IP Phones 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT
A line of static text
This block can scroll
using the down arrow
on the navigation keys.
A line of static text
Done
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Creating an XML Application
IP Phone 9143i, 51i, 53i
A line of static text
This block can scroll
Note: You can view all 5 lines at once on the 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i
and 57i CT IP phones. You can view only 2 lines at a time (up to 5 lines)
on the 9143i, 51i, 53i IP phone.
Dialpad Passthrough for Objects
On the IP Phones, an XML Developer can control digit passthrough while the
phone is in the connected state. (This feature is only applicable to phones in the
connected state). This can be done by setting the new “allowDTMF” attribute
with the XML objects AastraIPPhoneTextScreen,
AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen, and AastraIPPhoneImageScreen.
Setting this attribute to “yes” allows dialpad events to pass through the XML
applications.
Note: The default behavior for this feature is to suppress dialpad events
when an XML object is in focus (same as in previous releases). Other
XML objects ignore this attribute.
Examples
•
The following is an example of setting the allowDTMF attribute to allow
dialpad events to pass through the XML applications.
<AastraIPPhoneTextScreen allowDTMF="yes">
<Title>Test</Title>
<Text>Digits should pass through this object</Text>
</AastraIPPhoneTextScreen>
G-22
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
•
The following is an example of setting the allowDTMF attribute to prevent
dialpad events from passing through the XML applications (this is the default
setting).
<AastraIPPhoneTextScreen allowDTMF="no">
<Title>Test</Title>
<Text>Digits do not pass through this object</Text>
</AastraIPPhoneTextScreen>
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Creating an XML Application
UserInput Object (User Input Screens)
The AastraIPPhoneInputScreen object allows application developers to create
screens for which the user can input text where applicable. (Line 1 is a title, Line 4
is an input prompt, and Line 5 is an input field). The IP phones support three
parameter types: IP Addresses, Numbers (integers), and Strings. Each parameter
has a URL tag that is used to send information back to the HTTP server. The label
GET.
For User input screens, you can also create the following:
•
Time and Date Format User input screens. For more information, see “Time
and Date Formats (User Input Screens)” on page G-31.
•
Multiple input fields per AastraIPPhoneInputScreen object. For more
information, see “Multiple Input Fields (User Input Screens)” on page G-34.
Implementation (IP Addresss)
The following is how you would implement the AastraIPPhoneInputScreen
object using an IP Address.
Note: For all available parameters you can use for the
AastraIPPhoneInputScreen object, and for an explanation of each
parameter, see Aastra Telecom’s "XML Developer’s Guide".
Softkeys:
•
•
•
•
•
•
1=Backspace
2=Dot
3=ChangeCase
4=Numeric/Alpha
5=Cancel
6=Done
G-24
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
XML Description:
<AastraIPPhoneInputScreen type = "IP/string/number" password =
"yes/no" destroyOnExit = "yes/no">
<!-password attribute is optional and set to "no" by defaultà
<!-destroyOnExit is optional and "no" by default à
<Title>Title string, usually same as menu title</Title>
<Prompt>Enter IP address or host name</Prompt>
<URL>Target receiving the input</URL>
<Parameter>parameter added to URL</Parameter>
<Default />
<SoftKey index = "1">
<Label> Backspace </Label>
<URI>SoftKey:Exit</URI>
</Softkey>
<SoftKey index = "2">
<Label> Dot </Label>
<URI>SoftKey:Exit</URI>
</Softkey>
<SoftKey index = "3">
<Label> ChangeCase </Label>
<URI>SoftKey:Exit</URI>
</Softkey>
<SoftKey index = "4">
<Label> Numeric/Alpha </Label>
<URI>SoftKey:Exit</URI>
</Softkey>
<SoftKey index = "5">
<Label> Cancel </Label>
<URI>SoftKey:Exit</URI>
</Softkey>
<SoftKey index = "6">
<Label> Done </Label>
<URI>SoftKey:Exit</URI>
</Softkey>
</AastraIPPhoneInputScreen>
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Creating an XML Application
XML Example:
<AastraIPPhoneInputScreen type = "IP">
<Title>Proxy Server</Title>
<Prompt>Server IP:</Prompt>
<URL>http://10.50.10.53/script.pl</URL>
<Parameter>proxy</Parameter>
<Default></Default>
<AastraIPPhoneInputScreen>
XML Screen Example:
Proxy Server
Server IP:
Backspace
Dot
Cancel
Done
G-26
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
Implementation (Number)
The following is how you would implement the UserInput object using Numbers.
Softkeys:
•
•
•
1=Backspace,
5=Cancel,
6=Done
XML Example:
<AastraIPPhoneInputScreen type = "number">
<Title>Proxy Port</Title>
<Prompt>Port:</Prompt>
<URL>http://10.50.10.53/script.pl</URL>
<Parameter>port</Parameter>
<Default>5060</Default>
<AastraIPPhoneInputScreen>
XML Screen Example:
Proxy Port
Port: 5060
Backspace
Cancel
Done
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Creating an XML Application
Implementation (String)
The following is how you would implement the UserInput object using Strings in
XML.
Softkeys:
•
•
•
•
•
•
1=Backspace,
2=Dot,
3=Tri-Mode key,
4=Nextspace,
5=Cancel,
6=Done
XML Example:
<AastraIPPhoneInputScreen type = "string" password = "yes">
<Title>SIP Settings</Title>
<Prompt>Enter something</Prompt>
<URL>http://10.50.10.53/script.pl</URL>
<Parameter>passwd</Parameter>
<Default></Default>
<AastraIPPhoneInputScreen>
XML Screen Example::
SIP Settings
Enter Password:
******
Backspace
Dot
ABC
Nextspace
Cancel
Done
Note: In the above example, if the user entered 12345, then the URL sent
back to the server is http://10.50.10.53/script.pl?passwd=12345.
G-28
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
XML Softkey for Special Characters
(User Input Screens for 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT only)
The IP Phone can dynamically receive a Symbol List when it receives the
AastraIPPhoneInputScreen XML object. You can have a single symbol
specified for the softkey, or you can have a list of symbols. When there is only one
symbol in the list, the symbol displays with no delay. When there is a list of
symbols, you can keep pressing the symbol softkey to cycle through the list of
symbols to select the one you want to use.
To display a list of customized symbols to the phone’s softkey, the server must
include the list of characters in the URI field of the XML softkey script. The URI
must be in the format:
SymbolList=”<Symbol List content>”
The content of the Symbol List must be encapsulated by quotes. You can specify
multiple symbols in one URI. For example, the SymbolList="@#” specifies the
@ and # symbols.
Note: You can have multiple Symbol List softkeys with different lists of
symbols. The maximum length of the data in a Symbol List is 230
characters.
There are some special characters that needed to be encoded due to XML
limitations. The following table specifies these characters.
Symbol
XML Encoding
single quote (‘)
'
"
>
double quote (“)
greater-than sign (>)
less-than sign (<)
ampersand (&)
<
&
The following is an example XML URI using the characters in the table above:
SymbolList="@#&><"
The Symbol List content for this URI is @, #, &, >, <.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Creating an XML Application
Implementation
Softkeys:
•
1 = <Single Symbol or Symbol List>
XML Softkey Example:
<SoftKey index="1">
<Label>Symbols</Label>
<URI>SoftKey:SymbolList="@#=&"</URI>
</SoftKey>
XML Object and Softkey Example:
<AastraIPPhoneInputScreen type = "IP">
<Title>Email</Title>
<SoftKey index="1">
<Label>Symbols</Label>
<URI>SoftKey:SymbolList="@"</URI>
</SoftKey>
<SoftKey index = "2">
<Label> Backspace </Label>
<URI>SoftKey:Exit</URI>
</Softkey>
<SoftKey index = "3">
<Label> Dot </Label>
<URI>SoftKey:Exit</URI>
</Softkey>
<Prompt>Email Address:</Prompt>
<URL>http://myserver.com/myscript.com</URL>
<Parameter>email</Parameter>
<Default></Default>
<AastraIPPhoneInputScreen>
XML Screen Example:
%MAIL
%MAIL !DDRESSꢃ
ꢂ 3YMBOLS
ꢂ "ACKSPACE
ꢂ $OThꢁv
G-30
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
Time and Date Formats (User Input Screens)
The AastraIPPhoneInputScreen object allows you to specify US ( (HH:MM:SS
am/pm and MM/DD/YYYY) or International (HH:MM:SS and DD/MM/YYYY)
time/date formats for an XML user input screen on the IP phone.
Note: You use this time/date format in an XML script that displays in an
XML window. This time/date format does NOT affect the time/date
format configured under the Options Menu on the phone.
Using this AastraIPPhoneInputScreen object, you can specify the following
attributes for date/time format to create the user input screen:
•
•
•
•
“timeUS”
“timeInt”
“US Date”
“Int Date”
You can use these XML attributes in an application that requires the user to
specify a time or a date, for example, when scheduling a meeting. The user could
press a softkey that gets the XML script asking you to enter a time/date. This time/
date is then forwarded to a script that schedules the meeting or reports a conflict.
XML Examples:
The following example illustrates the AastraIPPhoneInputScreen object using the
time/date attributes.
United StatesTime
<AastraIPPhoneInputScreen type="timeUS">
<Title>US Time</Title>
<Prompt>Enter Current Time:</Prompt>
<Parameter>Time</Parameter>
</AastraIPPhoneInputScreen>
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Creating an XML Application
IP Phones 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i/57i CT
IP Phone 9143i, 53i
Enter Current Time:
12:00:00am
US Time
Enter Current Time:
12:00:00am
=Enter
=Cancel
Cancel
Done
International Time
<AastraIPPhoneInputScreen type="timeInt">
<Title>Int Time</Title>
<Prompt>Enter Current Time:</Prompt>
<Parameter>Time</Parameter>
<Default>14:23:22</Default>
</AastraIPPhoneInputScreen>
IP Phones 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i/57i CT
IP Phone 9143i, 53i
Enter Current Time:
12:23:22
Int Time
Enter Current Time:
14:23:22
=Enter
=Cancel
Cancel
Done
Note: If you don’t specify a time, the XML script uses the following
default values:
- 12:00:00am (US)
- 00:00:00 (International)
G-32
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
United States Date
<AastraIPPhoneInputScreen type="dateUS">
<Title>US Date</Title>
<Prompt>Enter Birthday:</Prompt>
<Parameter>Date</Parameter>
<Default>12/22/1980</Default>
</AastraIPPhoneInputScreen>
IP Phones 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i/57i CT
IP Phone 9143i, 53i
Enter Birthday:
US Date
12/22/1980
Enter Birthday:
12/22/1980
=Enter
=Cancel
Cancel
Done
International Date
<AastraIPPhoneInputScreen type="dateInt">
<Title>Int Date</Title>
<Prompt>Enter Birthday:</Prompt>
<Parameter>Date</Parameter>
</AastraIPPhoneInputScreen>
IP Phones 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i/57i CT
IP Phone 9143i, 53i
Enter Birthday:
Int Date
26/5/2006
Enter Birthday:
26/5/2006
=Enter
=Cancel
Cancel
Done
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Creating an XML Application
Note: If you don’t specify a date, the XML script uses the current date in
the specified format.
Multiple Input Fields (User Input Screens)
You can have multiple input fields per AastraIPPhoneInputScreen object.The
following specifications apply to this feature:
•
Multiple input fields are applicable to 9480i. 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT
IP phones only.
•
•
Each AastraIPPhoneInputScreen object can support up to 6 input fields.
Each input field supports its own set of custom softkeys (these take
precedance over any softkeys configured outside of the <InputField> tags.
•
•
The phone treats softkey information specified outside of the <InputField>
tags as a default value.
Each AastraIPPhoneInputScreen object supports only 1 URL.
The following tags support this feature.
Tags for Multiple Input Fields
<InputField>.......</InputField> New tags within the <InputField>
tags:
Note: This tag supports the type, <Prompt>
password, and editable
attributes. If specified, they
override the default values
provided in the root tag.
<Parameter>
<Default>
<Softkey>
Note: These tags override the values
specified outside of the <InputField>
tags.
<Selection>.......</Selection>
Any data specified between the
<Selection> tags is appended to the
URI in the form Selection = <DATA>.
G-34
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
You use the following attributes to create multiple input fields using the
AastraIPPhoneInputScreen object.
New AastraIPPhoneInputScreen Attributes
defaultIndex
Allows you to set an integer value from 1 - 6 that specifies which
input field the edit cursor starts in. Default is 1.
displayMode
Allows you to set a specific display mode for the screen: “normal”
or “condensed”.
Default is “normal” mode.
Normal Mode - Prompts and inputs each appear on separate lines
on the display. The user can scroll through the lines.
Notes:
1. An <InputField> tag with a type set to “empty” creates two blank
lines in “normal” mode.
2. All inputs fields are left justfied in “normal” mode.
Condensed Mode - Prompts and inputs appear on the same line
(up to 5 inputs on a single screen).
Notes:
1. Title tag wrapping limits the number of fields per screen to 1 or 3
in condensed mode.
2. An <InputField> tag with a type set to “empty” creates a blank
line in “condensed” mode.
Example
The following is an example AastraIPPhoneInputScreen script using the multiple
input field feature:
<AastraIPPhoneInputScreen type="string">
<Title>Test</Title>
<URL>http://10.50.10.117/test.pl</URL>
<Default/>
<InputField>
<Prompt>Name:</Prompt>
<Parameter>name</Paramter>
<Default>Robert</Default>
<SoftKey index="3">
<Label>NameDone</Label>
<URI>Softkey:Submit</URI>
</SoftKey>
</InputField>
<InputField type="timeUS">
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Creating an XML Application
<Prompt>Time:</Prompt>
<Parameter>time</Paramter>
<Default>10:50:24AM</Default>
</InputField>
<InputField type="dateUS>
<Prompt>Date:</Prompt>
<Parameter>date</Paramter>
<Default>01/24/07</Default>
<SoftKey index="5">
<Label>DateDone</Label>
<URI>Softkey:Submit</URI>
</SoftKey>
</InputField>
</AastraIPPhoneInputScreen>
Posting the above AastraIPPhoneInputScreen XML script displays the following
screens on the IP phone.
Screen 1
Test
Cursor
Name:
Robert |
Time:
10:50:24 AM
____________________
- NameDone
Screen 1 Note: Notice that the cursor is active within the first element field and
that the phone is displaying the InputField #1 softkey.
G-36
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
Scolling down changes to the next input field.
Screen 2
Test
Name:
Robert
Time:
10:50:24 AM
____________________
Cancel -
Done -
Screen 2 Note: Notice that the softkeys change to reflect the new input type,
timeUS.
Scrolling down again goes to the next page of inputs.
Screen 3
Test
Date
11/24/07
____________________
DateDone -
Screen 3 Note: Notice that the softkeys change again to reflect the current input
item on the screen (Date).
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Creating an XML Application
Condensed Mode Screen
If you use the attribute “displayMode = “condensed” in the root tag (Screen 4),
the display changes to have prompt and inputs on the same line. The behavior of
the screens using “condensed” mode is the same as Screens 1 through 3 but
without the scrolling.
Screen 4
Test
Name: Robert |
Time: 10:50:24 AM
Date: 11/24/07
____________________
- NameDone
G-38
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
Directory Object (Directory List Screen)
The Directory object allows you to browse an online directory in real time. It
displays an automatically numbered list of contacts. By selecting a contact with
the cursor, the contact can be dialed directly by pressing the "Dial" softkey or
picking up the receiver. The Directory object has the optional softkeys of
"Previous" and "Next" which can be linked to other XML objects.
Implementation
The following is how you would implement the Directory object in XML.
Note:
1. For all available parameters you can use for the Directory object, and
for an explanation of each parameter, see Aastra Telecom’s
"XML Developer’s Guide".
2. If the URI entry contains a "?" the phone appends an "&" instead.
Softkeys:
•
•
•
•
1=Dial,
6= Done,
2=Previous (optional),
5=Next (optional)
XML Description:
<AastraIPPhoneDirectory destroyOnExit="no" next="uri"
previous="uri">
<!-Attributes are optionalà
<Title>Directory Title</Title>
<Menu Item>
<Prompt>Contact Name</Prompt>
<URI>number</URI>
</Menu Item>
<!-Additional Menu Items may be added -->
</AastraIPPhoneDirectory>
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Creating an XML Application
XML Example:
<AastraIPPhoneDirectory next="more.xml" previous="back.xml">
<Title>My Directory</Title>
<MenuItem>
<Prompt>57i - John Doe 1</Prompt>
<URI> 10.50.10.49</URI>
</MenuItem>
<MenuItem>
<Prompt>53i - John Doe 2</Prompt>
<URI>4326</URI>
</MenuItem>
<MenuItem>
<Prompt>57i CT - John Doe 3</Prompt>
<URI>9982691234</URI>
</MenuItem>
</AastraIPPhoneDirectory
XML Screen Example::
My Directory (1/6)
1. 480i John Doe 1
2. 9133i John Doe 2
3. 480iCT John Doe 3
Dial
Previous
Next
Cancel
Note: The maximum number of items to be included in a Directory
object is 15 per page. In this example, there are six pages.
G-40
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
Status Message Object (Idle Screen)
The IP phones support an XML AastraIPPhoneStatus object for displaying
status messages on a single designated line on the phone’s idle screen. The
messages display when the server pushes XML information to the phone.
The 57i/57i CT phones display messages on the second line in the phone window.
(where “No Service” would display if there was no service. If there is no service
on the phone, the “No Service” message overrides the XML object message). The
53i phone displays messages on the first line (overriding the DisplayName). The
phone truncates long messages that are wider then the phone screen.
If the phone receives multiple messages, the first message received displays first
and the remaining messages scroll consecutively one at a time. Messages remain
AastraIPPhoneStatus object feature is always enabled.
Note: You can set the amount of time, in seconds, that a message displays
to the phone before scrolling to the next message. For more information
about this feature, see “Scroll Delay Option (configurable via config files
and Aastra Web UI only)” on page G-78.
AastraIPPhoneStatus Structure
The AastraIPPhoneStatus object describes the structure of the XML document
that you can use to send status messages to the phone. The basic structure of the
AastraIPPhoneStatus object is:
<AastraIPPhoneStatus>
<Session>My session ID</Session>
<Message index="Msg index">Message</Message>
<! -- Additional status messages may be added under new Message tags-->
<AastraIPPhoneStatus/>
The ”My Session ID” attribute must be unique to the application sending the
XML object to the phone. The application generates the session ID, which could
be a combination of letters and numbers. There is a maximum of one <Session>
tag per PhoneStatus object, so the <Session> tag is optional.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Creating an XML Application
XML Examples
Example 1: The following is an example of using the AastraIPPhoneStatus
object:
<AastraIPPhoneStatus>
<Session>abc12345</Session>
<Message index="3">Server side call forwarding disabled</Message>
<AastraIPPhoneStatus/>
In this example, the AastraIPPhoneStatus object sends the default behavior with
the status message (i.e., the status message is added to the scroll list).
Example 2: You can also use the AastraIPPhoneStatus object to remove status
messages from the display, by setting an empty tag for the <Message index> tag.
The following example removes the status message that was posted to the phone
in Example 1.
<AastraIPPhoneStatus>
<Session>abc12345</Session>
<Message index="3"/>
<AastraIPPhoneStatus/>
G-42
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
Execute Commands Object (for executing XML commands)
An AastraIPPhoneExecute object on the IP phones allows the phone to execute
commands using XML. The phones support the following execute object
commands:
•
•
•
Reset - This command waits until the phone is idle and then executes a reset.
You can use this command in an XML script to enable the server to force
phone firmware changes and/or for troubleshooting purposes.
NoOp - This command has no affect on the IP phone. It is made up of a blank
URI. You can use this feature when you need to press a key on the phone to
access a feature, and it is not necessary to display anything.
FastReboot - This command allows an administrator to perform a fast reboot
of the IP phone when required.
Note: For FastReboot commands, you must set the XML push server list
in the Aastra Web UI from where the XML HTTP post is being sent.
•
XML Softkey/Programmable Key LED Behavior - The URI=”Led:
<softkey or programmable key type>=<execute command>”/ controls the
behavior of XML softkey or programmable key LEDs. The softkey or
programmable key must be configured for XML before you enable this
feature.
The following paragraphs describe the AastraIPPhoneExecute object and the
commands you can use with this object.
AastraIPPhoneExecute Object Structure
The AastraIPPhoneExecute object describes the structure of the XML document
that you can use to send a command to the phone. It delivers multiple execution
requests to the phone. The basic structure of the AastraIPPhoneExecute object is:
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
<ExecuteItem URI ="the URL or URI to be executed"/>
<! -- Additional execution items may be added under new ExecuteItem tag-->
</AastraIPPhoneExecute>
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Creating an XML Application
Using the Reset Command
The <ExecuteItem URI =""/> tag can be entered with the command the phone
should execute. Upon receiving an AastraIPPhoneExecute object, the phone
begins executing the URL or URI specified.
The following example shows an AastraIPPhoneExecute object using the Reset
command:
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
<ExecuteItem URI="Command: Reset"/>
</AastraIPPhoneExecute>
Note: If you specify a command as a URI attribute (instead of a URL),
the keyword "Command" must be prepended in the value of the URI
attribute so that the phone recognizes it as a URI attribute value. If you
enter a URI and leave out the “Command” keyword, the phone interprets
the value in the URI attribute as a URL containing network resources.
The following example shows the AastraIPPhoneExecute object using a URL:
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
<ExecuteItem URI="http://aastraserver/message.xml"/>
</AastraIPPhoneExecute>
When the phone receives this object, it displays the specified XML URI page.
Using the NoOp Command
You can use the AastraIPPhoneExecute object as an object to create a blank
display (it has no affect on the IP phone). It is made up of a blank URI. You can
use this feature when you need to press a key on the phone to access a feature, and
it is not necessary to display anything. You can also use the
AastraIPPhoneExecute object and this command with other objects in an XML
script.
The following example shows an AastraIPPhoneExecute object using a blank
URI:
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
<ExecuteItem URI=””/>
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
G-44
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
Using the FastReboot Command
Using an XML post, the FastReboot feature forces a phone to reboot in the idle
state. It does not check for new firmware and only downloads language packs if
there is a change in the supported filenames of the language packs. The phone
DOES do a DHCP lookup on every “fast reboot”. It also only downloads the
Directory files if the names have changed.
Note: For FastReboot commands, you must set the XML push server list
in the Aastra Web UI from where the XML HTTP post is being sent.
The following example shows an AastraIPPhoneExecute object using the
FastReboot command.
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
<ExecuteItem URI=“Command:FastReboot”/>
</AastraIPPhoneExecute>
Using the LED Commands (for Softkey or Programmable Key LED
Behavior)
You can control the behavior of XML softkey or programmable key LEDs using
the command URI=”Led: <softkey or programmable key type>=<execute
command>”/ with the AastraIPPhoneExecute object.
This LED feature is applicable to XML softkeys (top or bottom), programmable
keys, and expansion module softkeys. The softkey or programmable key must be
configured for XML before you enable this feature.
The following table describes the behaviors you can assign to the XML key
LEDs, and the attribute you enter in the AastraIPPhoneExecute script.
LED Behavior
XML Attribute
on
URI = “Led: <softkey type>= on”/
URI = “Led: <softkey type>=off”/
off
fastFlash
slowFlash
URI = “Led: <softkey type>=fastflash”/
URI = “Led: <softkey type>=slowflash”/
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Creating an XML Application
The command for LED control is sent using the XML HTTP post from one of the
XML push server lists. The following example shows an XML LED command in
an AastraIPPhoneExecute script.
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
<ExecuteItem URI=”Led: topsoftkey20=on”/>
<ExecuteItem URI=”Led: softkey1=off”/>
<ExecuteItem URI=”Led: prgkey2=fastflash”/>
<ExecuteItem URI=”Led: expmod2 key20=slowflash”/>
</AastraIPPhoneExecute>
Notes:
1.
from where the XML HTTP post is being sent.
2. The LED states specified in the AastraIPPhoneExecute script are
Using the Aastra Web UI, you must set the XML push server list
not saved after a reboot.
Using the Lock and Unlock Commands
There are two XML Execute Commands that allow a remote phone to be locked
or unlocked.
•
•
Lock - This command locks a remote phone.
Unlock - This command unlocks a remote phone, allowing an Administrator
to update its configuration if required.
The following examples use the “Lock” and “Unlock” attributes with the Execute
Command.
Example 1:
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
<ExecuteItem URI="Command: Unlock"/>
</AastraIPPhoneExecute>
The phone gets unlocked.
Example 2:
Server sends XML Execute to the phone using HTTP POST.
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
<ExecuteItem URI="Command: Lock"/>
</AastraIPPhoneExecute>
The phone gets locked.
G-46
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
Example 3:
Phone is getting booted.
Startup Action URI is called.
Server responses with:
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
<ExecuteItem URI="Command: Unlock"/>
<ExecuteItem URI="http://server:port/pathtosoftkeyconfig"/>
</AastraIPPhoneExecute>
The phone gets unlocked and the second URL gets loaded.
Using RTP and Multicast RTP Commands
The IP Phones have RTP and Multicast RTP XML commands that an
Administrator can use with the “AastraIPPhoneExecute” object. These
commands allow the phone to send/recieve an RTP stream to/from given
multicast/unicast addresses (without involving SIP signaling). The RTP and
Multicast RTP XML commands are:
•
RTPRx (Receive (Rx) a Unicast RTP stream or stop receiving a Unicast/
Multicast RTP streams)
•
RTPTx (Transmit (Tx) a Unicast RTP stream or stop transmitting a Unicast/
Multicast RTP streams)
•
•
RTPMRx (Receive (Rx) a Multicast RTP stream)
RTPMTx (Transmit (Tx) a Multicast RTP stream)
The phones support the following RTP stream format:
•
•
G.711 mu-law CODEC
20 ms packet size
Note: If one of the previous commands is sent to the phone which is
already in a call, the phone places the current call on hold and the RTP
streaming commands are performed using a new audio path.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Creating an XML Application
RTPRx
The RTPRx URI instructs the phone to receive a Unicast RTP stream or stop
receiving Unicast or Multicast RTP streams. The RTPRx formats to use with the
AastraIPPhoneExecute object in the URI are:
•
•
RTPRx:i:p:v
RTPRx:Stop
Where
i
Specifies the IP Address from which the stream is coming.
p
Specifies the UDP port on which to receive the RTP stream.
Ensure that this is a number greater than 3100.
v
Indicates the optional volume setting that controls the volume of the stream
(optional) playout. The supplied value is an offset to the current volume setting. After the
initial volume level gets set and the stream starts, you can manually change
the volume level as required using this “v” option. If you do not specify the
optional volume parameter, the phone uses the current volume setting on the
phone as the default.
Stop
Specifies to stop any active RTP stream from being received on channel one.
Example: This example receives a unicast RTP stream from 10.30.100.20 at UDP port
21000 with the voice settings at 3 levels more than the current offset.
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
<ExecuteItem URI = ”RTPRx:10.30.100.20:21000:3”>
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
Example:
This example receives a unicast RTP stream from 10.30.100.20 at UDP port 21000 with
the voice settings as used in the previous RTP stream.
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
<ExecuteItem URI = ”RTPRx:10.30.100.20:21000”>
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
Example:
This example stops an incoming active multicast/unicast RTP stream.
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
<ExecuteItem URI=”RTPRx:Stop”>
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
G-48
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
Note: Once the RTPRx command in the URI is sent to the phone, it stops
the phone from listening to any previous RTPRx or RTPMRx commands.
The phone starts listening based on the most recent RTPRx command
received. This behavior also applies to the RTPRx:Stop and
RTPMRx:Stop commands as well but does not enable any further
listening.
RTPTx
The RTPTx URI instructs the phone to transmit a Unicast RTP stream or to stop
transmitting Unicast or Multicast RTP streams. The RTPTx formats to use with
the AastraIPPhoneExecute object in the URI are:
•
•
RTPTx:i:p
RTPTx:Stop
Where
i
Specifies the IP Address to which an RTP stream is transmit ed.
p
Specifies the UDP port on which to transmit the RTP stream.
Ensure that this is a number greater than 3100.
Stop
Specifies to stop any active RTP stream from being transmitted on channel
one.
Example: This example sends a unicast RTP stream to 10.30.100.20 on UDP port
21000.
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
<ExecuteItem URI = ”RTPTx:10.30.100.20:21000”>
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
Example:
This example stops an outgoing active multicast/unicast RTP stream.
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
<ExecuteItem URI=”RTPTx:Stop”>
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Creating an XML Application
RTPMRx
The RTPMRx URI instructs the phone to receive a Multicast RTP stream. The
RTPMRx format to use with the AastraIPPhoneExecute object in the URI is:
•
RTPMRx:i:p:v
Where
i
Specifies the multicast IP Address from which to receive an RTP stream.
p
Specifies the UDP port on which to receive the RTP stream.
Ensure that this is a number greater than 3100.
v
Indicates the optional volume setting that controls the volume of the stream
(optional) playout. The supplied value is an offset to the current volume setting. After the
initial volume level gets set and the stream starts, you can manually change
the volume level as required using this “v” option. If you do not specify the
optional volume parameter, the phone uses the current volume setting on the
phone as the default.
Example: This example receives a multicast RTP stream from 239.0.1.20 on UDP port
21000 with the voice settings at -3 levels less than the current offset.
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
<ExecuteItem URI = ”RTPMRx:239.0.1.20:21000:-3”>
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
Example:
This example receives a multicast RTP stream from 239.0.1.20 at UDP port 21000 with
the voice settings as used in the previous RTP stream.
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
<ExecuteItem URI = ”RTPMRx:239.0.1.20:21000”>
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
Note: Once the RTPMRx command in the URI is sent to the phone, it
stops the phone from listening to any previous RTPRx or RTPMRx
commands. The phone starts listening based on the most recent RTPMRx
command received. This behavior also applies to the RTPRx:Stop and
RTPMRx:Stop commands as well, but tbe “Stop” command does not
enable any further listening.
G-50
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
RTPMTx
The RTPMTx URI instructs the phone to transmit a Multicast RTP stream. The
RTPMTx format to use with the AastraIPPhoneExecute object in the URI is:
•
RTPMTx:i:p
Where
i
Specifies the Multicast IP Address to which an RTP stream is transmitted.
p
Specifies the UDP port on which to transmit the RTP stream.
Ensure that this is a number greater than 3100.
Example: This example sends a multicast RTP stream to 239.0.1.20 from UDP port
21000.
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
<ExecuteItem URI = ”RTPMTx:239.0.1.20:21000”>
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Creating an XML Application
Using RTP Recording and Simultaneous Playing
(not supported on 51i)
The IP Phones allow for RTP recording and simultaneous playing of an audio file
via XML Execute commands. An Administrator can use the RTP and multicast
RTP commands (RTPTx, RTPRx, RTPMTx, RTPMRx) with the
“AastraIPPhoneExecute” object to initiate this feature.
The RTP and multicast RTP commands allow the phone to send/receive an RTP
stream to/from given multicast/unicast addresses (without involving SIP
signaling). An Administrator can use the following two options appended to the
RTP commands for recording and simultaneously playing of an audio file:
•
mix - When appended to an RTP command, “mix” enables RTP recording and
simultaneous playing of an audio file.
•
disableIcon - When appended to an RTP command, “disableIcon” disables
the display of the mixed call icons on the LCD of the phones.
Note: This feature is not supported on the 51i. Also, if the cordless
handset (CT) and the base phone are connected (Models 9480i CT and
57i CT), this feature is not supported.
Sending RTP
When a phone receives a request for sending RTP:
•
and there is an existing call on the phone, no new audio session is created; the
existing RTP call (incoming or outgoing) is sent to the receiving party.
•
•
and the phone is already in a 3-way conference, the request is declined.
and there is no existing call on the phone, a new audio session is created and
the RTP call is sent to the receiving party.
G-52
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
The following scenarios assume that a request for sending mixed RTP is initiated.
Phone State
Action When RTP Transmitting
Phone is in idle state.
The phone initiates a new RTP session on
the paging line and the paging line displays.
There is an existing voice call on the
phone.
The phone starts sending the mixed RTP
stream, paging line does not display.
The phone is in conference.
The request for sending RTP is declined.
The request for sending RTP is declined.
The phone is not in conference;
however, both voice and conference
streams are busy (cordless handset).
The phone is in a call using the
conference stream and the voice
stream is free.
Paging call is initiated using the voice
stream with the mixed audio from the
conference stream; paging line does not
display.
The active voice call is dropped.
(Mixed RTP stream was being sent
using this voice call).
RTP stream is dropped.
A new call comes in while an active
voice call is put on hold. (Mixed RTP
stream was being sent using this voice
call).
RTP mixed stream is sent for the currently
active call.
The phone is sending the mixed RTP Localized conference request is declined,
stream, and there is an existing voice and the focus is given back to the initiating
call on the phone. A request for
initiating localized conference is
initiated.
line.
Note: When an RTP stream is being sent with RTP recording and
simultaneous playing (mix), the IP Phone LCD displays an icon with an
‘m’ on top to indicate that a mixed RTP stream is being sent.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Creating an XML Application
Receiving RTP
When a phone receives a request for receiving RTP:
•
if there is an existing audio path, (handset, headset, or speakerphone), the
phone uses it to play the incoming RTP stream on top of the existing one.
•
•
if the phone is already in a 3-way conference, the request is declined.
if there is no existing audio path, the phone creates a new one (speakerphone)
to play the incoming RTP stream
The following scenarios assume that a request for receiving mixed RTP is
initiated.
Phone State
Action When RTP Receiving
Phone is in idle state.
The phone initiates a new RTP session on
the paging line and the paging line displays.
There is an existing voice call on the
phone.
The phone starts playing the incoming RTP
stream on top of the existing call. Paging
line does not display.
The phone is in conference.
The request for receiving RTP is declined.
The request for receiving RTP is declined.
The phone is not in conference;
however, both voice and conference
streams are busy (cordless handset).
The phone is in a call using the
conference stream and the voice
stream is free.
Incoming RTP stream is played on top of
the existing voice stream. Paging line does
not display.
The active voice call is dropped. (RTP RTP stream is dropped.
stream was being played on top of this
voice call).
A new call comes in while an active
voice call is put on hold. (RTP stream currently active call.
was being played on top of this voice
call).
RTP mixed stream is played on top of the
The active voice call is dropped
RTP stream is dropped.
Note: When RTP stream is being received with RTP recording and
simultaneous playing (mix), you can use the volume controls on the IP
phone to adjust the volume (increase or decrease) to your specifications.
G-54
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
Examples
The following are examples of using the “mix” and “disableIcon” execute
commands with the AastraIPPhoneExecute object. These commands apply to
both the RTP and multicast RTP XML commands (RTPTx, RTPRx, RTPMTx,
RTPMRx).
•
Send mix unicast RTP stream (if there is existing voice call) to
10.30.100.20:21000. Mix icon is displayed on the phone’s call screen.
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
<ExecuteItem URI="RTPTx:10.30.100.20:21000:mix">
</AastraIPPhoneExecute>
•
Receive unicast RTP stream from 10.30.100.20 at port 21000 with the egress
voice settings at 3 levels more than the current offset and play on top of the
existing voice stream (if any).
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
<ExecuteItem URI="RTPRx:10.30.100.20:21000:3:mix">
</AastraIPPhoneExecute>
•
Receive unicast RTP stream from 10.30.100.20 at port 21000 with the voice
settings as used earlier and play on top of the existing voice call (if any). Also,
the mixing icon is not shown on the call screen.
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
<ExecuteItem URI="RTPRx:10.30.100.20:21000:mix:disableIcon">
</AastraIPPhoneExecute>
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Creating an XML Application
Using Commands for Playing a WAV File
The IP Phones allow a WAV file to be played or stopped via XML Execute
commands. A WAV file is an audio file format standard for storing an audio bit
stream on a system in raw, uncompressed format or compressed format to reduce
the file size.
A WAV file can be streamed to the phone using the HTTP protocol.
The WAV feature supports the following:
•
•
Streaming of the WAV file to allow it to be locally played
Allows you to abort the audio streaming by pressing the Goodbye key on the
phone.
•
•
•
Supports the HTTP file download protocol
Supports the aLaw and uLaw codecs
Calls “Action URI INCOMING” when the audio WAV starts, and
“Action URI ONHOOK” when the WAV file playing has completed. The
name of the WAV file is inserted into the Action URI.
•
•
Plays the WAV file only if the phone is idle.
Aborts streaming if another line is selected for dialing out, or if the current
line is accepting an incoming call.
•
•
WAV audio file starts only when 4 seconds of the audio data (or the complete
file) has been accumulated.
Follows the standard phone behavior of speaker/head set/hand set.
An Administrator can use two new XML Execute commands with the
AastraIPPhoneExecute object to allow the phones to play a WAV file:
•
•
Wav.Play - This command initiates the streaming of a WAV file to the phone.
Wav.Stop - This command aborts a WAV streaming.
G-56
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
XML Command: Wav.Play
The Wav.Play XML Execute command starts the streaming of a WAV file. You
enter this command with the AastraIPPhoneExecute object in the following
format:
Wav.Play:http://[username[:password]@]<host>[/<path>]/<file>
The following are examples of using the wav.play command with the XML
Execute object.
Examples
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
<ExecuteItem URI="Wav.Play:http://10.30.101.26/wavfiles/example.wav" />
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
<ExecuteItem URI="Wav.Play:http://user:[email protected]/example.wav" />
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
XML Command: Wav.Stop
The Wav.Stop Execute command aborts a WAV streaming currently in progress.
You enter this command with the AastraIPPhoneExecute object in the following
format:
Wav.Stop:
Example
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
<ExecuteItem URI="Wav.Stop:" />
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
IP Phone UI Screens During WAV Streaming
The 9143i, 51i, and 53i LCD screens display the following during WAV
streaming.
Streaming
00:10
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Creating an XML Application
The 9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT screens display the following during
WAV streaming.
Streaming
00:10
To abort the WAV streaming, a user can press any of the following:
•
•
•
Goodbye key
Drop softkey
Line key (not applicable to the 51i)
You can also place the handset (if in use) on hook.
G-58
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
Using Commands to Reset Local Data on the Phone
The phones allow XML commands that you can use to delete and reset the
phone’s directory, callers list, redial list, and the local.cfg file. You use these
commands with the AastraIPPhoneExecute object. The following table
identifies the XML commands to reset data on the phone.
XML Command
Description
Command: ClearLocal
•
•
Deletes the local.cfg file
Displays a "Resetting" message to the
IP Phone UI
•
Resets the phone
Command: ClearCallersList
•
•
Deletes the Callers List
Clears any missed call messages
Command: ClearDirectory
Command: ClearRedialList
•
•
Deletes the Directory
Deletes the Redial List
Examples
The following examples illustrate the use of the new XML commands to delete
and reset data on the phone. The command is shown in bold.
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
<ExecuteItem URI="Command: ClearLocal"/>
</AastraIPPhoneExecute>
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
<ExecuteItem URI="Command: ClearCallersList"/>
</AastraIPPhoneExecute>
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
<ExecuteItem URI="Command: ClearDirectory"/>
</AastraIPPhoneExecute>
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
<ExecuteItem URI="Command: ClearRedialList"/>
</AastraIPPhoneExecute>
Note: The XML commands to reset local data on the phone are not
applicable to the Model CT handsets.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Creating an XML Application
XML URI for Key Press Simulation
The phones provide a feature that allow an XML Developer or Administrator to
define XML Key URIs that can send key press events to the phone, just as if the
physical hard key, softkey, or programmable key were pressed on the phone.
When the Key URI event is sent from the server to the phone, the phone initiates
the event as if the key was physically pressed. If the key is not present on the
phone (hard key) or not available (softkey or programmable key), when the phone
receives the URI, the event is discarded. If you are in the process of changing the
softkey or programmable key setting, or the key is disabled while the event is
being processed, the request is discarded. The phone maps key events to it’s
physical keys and not to it’s mapped logical keys.
The following table identifies the XML URIs for pressing buttons on the phone..
XML Key URI
Description
Line Keys
Key:Line1 to Key:Line4
Line 1 to 4 Keys
Note: The phone ignores URI line keys 5 to
9 since it does not have Line 5 to 9 physical
keys.
Keypad Keys
Key:KeyPad0 to Key:KeyPad9
Key:KeyPadStar
Numeric Keypad Keys 0-9
* - Star Key
Key:KeyPadPound
Softkeys
# Hash Key
Key:SoftKey1 to Key:SoftKey<n>
Softkey 1 to <n> (valid softkeys depend on
the number of physical softkeys on the
phone)
Key:TopSoftKey1 to Key:TopSoftKey<n>
top
Top softkeys 1 to <n> ((valid top softkeys
depend on the number of physical top
softkeys on the phone)
Programmable Keys
Key:PrgKey1 to Key:PrgKey<n>
Programmable keys 1 to <n> (valid
programmable keys depend on the number
of physical programmable keys on the
phone)
G-60
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
XML Key URI
Description
Expansion Module Keys
Key:ExpMod1SoftKey1 to
Key:ExpMod1SoftKey60
Expansion module 1 softkeys 1 to 60
Note: The phone ignores URI expansion
module key events if the keys are not
physically present on the expansion
module.
Key:ExpMod2SoftKey1 to
Key:ExpMod2SoftKey60
Expansion module 2 soft keys 1 to 60
Key:ExpMod3SoftKey1 to
Key:ExpMod3SoftKey60
Expansion module 3 soft keys 1 to 60
Volume Key
Key:VolDwn
Key:VolUp
Volume Decrease Key
Volume Increase Key
Feature Keys
Key:Xfer
Transfer Key
Conference Key
Services Key
Intercom Key
Headset Key
Key:Conf
Key:Services
Key:Intercom
Key:Headset
Note: For Headset URI key, the behavior
will be as if the "speaker/headset" key is
pressed; and does not switch to headset for
headset key event or to speaker for speaker
key event.
Key:Speaker
Speaker Key
Note: For Speaker URI key, the behavior
will be as if the "speaker/headset" key is
pressed; and does not switch to headset for
headset key event or to speaker for speaker
key event.
Key:Mute
Key:Hold
Mute Key
Hold Key
Key:Redial
Key:Callers
Redial Key
Callers Key
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Creating an XML Application
XML Key URI
Description
Key:Directory
Key:Options
Key:Save
Directory Key
Options Key
Save Key
Key:Delete
Delete Key
Swap Key
Key:Swap
Key:Goodbye
Navigation Keys
Key:NavUp
GoodBye Key
Navigation Up Key
Navigation Down Key
Navigation Left Key
Navigation Right Key
Key:NavDwn
Key:NavLeft
Key:NavRight
Function Keys (only if physically configured on the phone or expansion module)
KeyPark
Park Softkey
KeyPickup
Pickup Softkey
Notes:
1. If the URI key is a valid key, the phone executes the key regardless
of the current state on the phone.
2. Park and Pickup XML URI softkeys are available ONLY if these
features are physically configured on the phone or expansion module.
Examples
There are two ways to format the XML key URI:
For XML Post Messages
<ExecuteItem URI="<XML Key URI>" />
Example:
<ExecuteItem URI="Key: Line1" />
G-62
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
For XML Key Scripts
<URI><XML Key URI></URI>
Example:
<URI>Key: Line1</URI>
<SoftKey index="1">
<Label>Keypad1</Label>
<URI>Key: Line1</URI>
</SoftKey>
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Creating an XML Application
Dynamic Configuration Object (to push a configuration to the phone)
The IP phones provide an XML feature that allows you to make configuration
changes to the phone that take affect immediately, without having to reboot the
phone. This feature involves creating XML scripts that push the changed
configuration parameter(s) from the server to the IP phones.
You can use the AastraIPPhoneConfiguration object in the XML scripts to
change configuration parameters or configure new parameters. However, since the
IP phone does not save new parameters created in XML scripts to the local.cfg
file, when the phone reboots, it does not save the new parameters on the phone. In
parameters via the user interfaces (Telephone User Interface, Web User Interface,
or configuration files), or reapply the new parameters using the XML scripts after
every boot.
Specific configuration parameters are dynamic on the phone when pushed from
XML scripts on the server. See “Dynamic Configuration Parameters” on
page G-66 for more information about dynamic configuration parameters.
AastraIPPhoneConfiguration Object Structure
The AastraIPPhoneConfiguration object describes the structure of the XML
document that you can use to push the configuration to the IP phone. The basic
structure of the AastraIPPhoneConfiguration object is:
<AastraIPPhoneConfiguration>
<ConfigureItem>
<Parameter>Parameter name</Parameter>
<Value>Parameter value</Value>
</ConfigureItem>
<ConfigureItem>
<Parameter>Parameter name</Parameter>
<Value>Parameter value</Value>
</ConfigureItem>
.
.
.
<AastraIPPhoneConfiguration>
G-64
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
Note: You can add more configuration items as applicable. There is a
limit of 5000 bytes (less than 5k) on the size of XML configuration
objects.
XML Example:
The following is an example of an XML configuration script that creates a softkey
you can press on the IP phone to push the configuration from the server to the
phone:
<AastraIPPhoneConfiguration>
<ConfigureItem>
<Parameter>softkey1 label</Parameter>
<Value>John Doe</Value>
</ConfigureItem>
<ConfigureItem>
<Parameter>softkey1 type</Parameter>
<Value>speeddial</Value>
</ConfigureItem>
<ConfigureItem>
<Parameter>softkey1 value</Parameter>
<Value>5551234</Value>
</ConfigureItem>
</AastraIPPhoneConfiguration>
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Creating an XML Application
Dynamic Configuration Parameters
The following table identifies which configuration parameters change
dynamically when using XML configuration scripts to push the configuration to
the phone.
Dynamic Configuration Parameters
softkeyN type*
softkeyN label*
softkeyN value*
softkeyN line*
softkeyN states*
prgkeyN type*
prgkeyN name*
prgkeyN value*
prgkeyN line*
live dialpad
line7 ring tone
line8 ring tone
line9 ring tone
suppress dtmf playback
redial disabled**
call transfer disabled
conference disabled
directory disabled**
callers list disabled**
options password enabled
time server disabled
time reserved
tone setv
ring tone
audio mode
dst config
language
time server1
ringback timeout
headset tx gain
headset sidetone gain
handset tx gain
handset sidetone gain
handsfree tx gain
line1 ring tone
line2 ring tone
line3 ring tone
line4 ring tone
line5 ring tone
line6 ring tone
dst start hour
time server2
time server3
time format
date format
time zone name
time zone code
time zone minutes
dst minutes
dst start relative date
dst start month
dst start day
dst start week
sip intercom line
sip allow auto answer
dst end relative date
G-66
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
Dynamic Configuration Parameters
dst end month
sip silence suppression
dst end day
sip send mac
dst end week
sip send line
dst end hour
xml application URI
xml application title
xml beep notification
action uri registered
action uri incoming
action uri outgoing
action uri onhook
action uri offhook
action uri startup
play a ring splash
map redial key to
map conf key to
download protocol
ftp server
tftp server
alternate tftp server
use alternate tftp server
admin password
user password
sip nat ip
sip nat port
sip dial plan
sip dial plan terminator
sip digit timeout
sip blf subscription period
sip registration retry timer
sip forward number
sip forward mode
sip ring number
ftp username
ftp password
sip vmail
http server
sip dtmf method
sip lineN forward number
sip lineN forward mode
sip lineN ring number
sip lineN vmail
http path
directory 1***
directory 2***
directory script
auto resync time
auto resync mode
sip lineN dtmf method
sip intercom type
sip intercom prefix code
sip intercom mute mic
*Changes to subscriptions (BLF or BLA) require a reboot.
**This parameter is dynamic so a user can’t access it or add to it. However, you need to
reboot the phone to clear the list.
*** You need to reboot the phone to download new directories.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Creating an XML Application
XML Image Objects (9480i, 9480i CT, 55i, 57i/57i CT only)
The 9480i/9480i CT, 55i, and 57i/57i CT IP phones provide an XML feature that
allows you to load images in XML applications that display to the LCD screen.
The following table describes the three types of image objects that you can use in
an XML script:
XML Image Object
Image Type
Description
AastraIPPhoneImageScreen
Standalone Bitmap
Image
Displays a single bitmap image
according to alignment, height, and
width specifications.
AastraIPPhoneImageMenu
Menu Image
Displays a bitmap image as a menu.
Menu selections are linked to keypad
keys (0-9, *, #).
This entire box is
a bitmap image.
AastraIPPhoneTextMenu (Icon Menu)
Icon Menu Image
Displays a small icon before each item
in the menu.
G-68
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
You can include images with an XML object in two ways:
•
•
Using pixel data stored with specified tags
Using an internal bitmap loaded via a specified URI
Note: The actual resolution of the image on the LCD screen is dependent
on the phone model. The 55i screen has a resolution of 144 x 75 pixels.
The 57i/57i CT screens have a resolution of 144 x 128 pixels. However,
the display of the image is limited to 40 x 144 pixels high.
The following paragraphs describe each of the image objects and how you can use
them in the XML scripts.
AastraIPPhoneImageScreen Object
The AastraIPPhoneImageScreen object displays an image as a single bitmap
image on the LCD screen. You can specify the placement of the image on the
screen by setting the following attributes:
•
•
•
•
verticalAlign
horizontalAlign
height
width
The image is specified as a series of hexadecimal characters. Two hex characters
map to one byte of pixel data, where each bit represents a pixel. The image data
describes the bitmap from left to right and top to bottom. The data is padded on
an 8-bit boundary, so if the height and width do not match the pixel information,
then the image will not display correctly. The character strings map to the middle
and four corners of the screen. If desired, you can specify an integer as an absolute
pixel for customized displays.
Note: A special URI of "Image:Logo" is used to load the current logo
bitmap for the phone (Aastra or branded). In this case, the height and
width can be ignored.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Creating an XML Application
XML Example:
The XML script for the AastraIPPhoneImageScreen object is as follows:
<AastraIPPhoneImageScreen>
<ImageverticalAlign ="top,middle,bottom,'pixel'",
horizontalAlign = "left,middle,right,'pixel'"
height="'integer'", width="'integer'">
FF00F800FF00FFFFFFFFFFFF00FF00FF00FFF8F200
</Image>
<!-vertical and horizontal default to "middle" ->
<!-height and width must match the image data ->
</AastraIPPhoneImageScreen>
Note: This object supports the destroyOnExit attribute.
XML Screen Example:
G-70
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
AastraIPPhoneImageMenu
The AastraIPPhoneImageMenu object allows you to use a bitmap image to
display as a menu. Each menu item is linked to a keypad key (0-9, *, #). You can
use this type of image object when you want to display menu choices as a
non-ASCII character set or with pictures only. You can specify the placement of
the image on the screen by setting the following attributes:
•
•
•
•
verticalAlign
horizontalAlign
height
width
The image is specified as a series of hexadecimal characters. Two hex characters
map to one byte of pixel data, where each bit represents a pixel. The image data
describes the bitmap from left to right and top to bottom. The data is padded on
an 8-bit boundary, so if the height and width do not match the pixel information,
then the image will not display correctly. The character strings map to the middle
and four corners of the screen. If desired, you can specify an integer as an absolute
pixel for customized displays.
XML Example:
The XML script for the AastraIPPhoneImageMenu object is as follows:
<AastraIPPhoneImageMenu>
<ImageverticalAlign ="top,middle,bottom,'pixel'",
horizontalAlign = "left,middle,right,'pixel'"
height="'integer'", width="'integer'">
FF00F800FF00FFFFFFFFFFFF00FF00FF00FFF8F200
</Image>
<!-Base attribute is optional-->
<URIList base = "http://someserver/">
<URI key = "0">link1.php</URI>
<URI key = "1">link2.php</URI>
<URI key = "#">link3.php</URI>
</URIList>
</AastraIPPhoneImageMenu>
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Creating an XML Application
Each URI is appended to the “base” URI if one exists. The default softkey is a
“Done” key at the bottom right position. It is a parse error if two URIs specify the
same index.
Note: This object supports the destroyOnExit attribute.
XML Screen Example:
This entire box is
a bitmap image.
G-72
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
AastraIPPhoneTextMenu (Icon Menu)
The AastraIPPhoneTextMenu (Icon Menu) object is identical to the “Text Menu
Object (Menu Screens)” described on page G-6, except a small icon image
appears after the menu number and before the text item. The Text Menu object
allows application developers to create a numerical list of menu items on the IP
phones. The AastraIPPhoneTextMenu (Icon Menu) object allows users to
navigate the application, by linking HTTP requests and icons to menu items.
XML Example:
The XML script for the AastraIPPhoneTextMenu (Icon Menu) object is as
follows:
<AastraIPPhoneTextMenu>
<Title> Icon Menu </Title>
<MenuItem base = http://someserver/,
icon="1">
<Prompt> Voicemail </Prompt>
<URI>scripts/voicemail.php</URI>
</MenuItem>
<MenuItem icon="2">
<Prompt> Horoscope</Prompt>
<URI> scripts/horoscope.php </URI>
</MenuItem>
<IconList>
<Icon index = "1"> Icon:Envelope </Icon>
<Icon index = "2"> FFFF0000FFFF0000 </Icon>
</AastraIPPhoneTextScreen>
The “icon=1” attribute in the above example tells the phone to display the icon
specified in the IconList called “<Icon index = “1”> Icon:Envelope </Icon>”.
For more information about the “IconList”, see “Using the <IconList>” on
page G-74.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Creating an XML Application
XML Screen Example:
Using the <IconList>
You can incorporate the use of an <IconList> attribute in the XML script to
define the images you will use with the AastraIPPhoneTextMenu object. After
you define the icons in the <IconList>, you can then call those icons as you need
them throughout the script. This also allows you to assign the icons to softkeys on
the phone.
You can load images in the <IconList> in two ways:
•
By specifying the image after a special prefix called “Icon:”
For example:
<IconList>
<Icon index = “1”> Icon:Envelope </Icon>)
<IconList>
•
By specifying the image in hexidecimal format
For example:
<IconList>
<Icon index = “2”> FF00F3 </Icon>)
<IconList>
G-74
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
Note: For a list of icons that are internal to the IP phone when specifying
the “Icon:<uri name>”, see the section “IP Phone Internal Icon Images”
on page G-76.
You can use one or both ways to load images within the same XML script. The
softkey icons display at the edge of the screen. Any XML object that supports
softkeys can support the optional <IconList> tag.
XML Example:
The following example illustrates the use of the <IconList> attribute to create
images for softkey prompts.
<AastraIPPhoneTextScreen>
<Title> Directory List </Title>
<Text> Welcome to the Directory. </Text>
<SoftKey index = "4" icon="2">
<Label> Listing </Label>
<URI> http://server/page.php </URI>
</SoftKey>
<SoftKey index = "3" icon="1">
<Label> Exit </Label>
<URI> http://server/otherpage.php </URI>
</SoftKey>
<IconList>
<Icon index = "1"> FF00F3 </Icon>
<Icon index = "2"> Icon:ArrowRight </Icon>
</IconList>
</AastraIPPhoneTextScreen>
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Creating an XML Application
XML Screen Example:
ArrowRight Icon
Exit Icon
IP Phone Internal Icon Images
The IP phones have internal icon images you can use when specifying the
“Icon:<uri name>” attribute in the <IconList>. The following table lists the
internal icons you can specify.
URI Name
Displays this:
PhoneOnHook
PhoneOffHook
PhoneRinging
DND
None
ArrowRight
ArrowLeft
Speaker
G-76
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
URI Name
Displays this:
ArrowUp
ArrowDown
ArrowsUpandDown
FilledCircle
EmptyCircle
Envelope
Prohibit
Square
Ellipse
TailArrowUp
TailArrowDown
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Creating an XML Application
Attributes/Options to Use with XML Objects
Beep Attribute
(configurable via XML objects, config files, or Aastra Web UI)
the Status Message object (AastraIPPhoneStatus), the configuration files, or the
Aastra Web UI.
Note: For enabling/disabling a status message beep using the
configuration files and the Aastra Web UI, see Chapter 5, the section,
“Enabling/Disabling a Beep for Status Message Displays.”.
When the phone receives a status message, the BEEP notifies the user that the
message is displaying. The following attribute in the AastraIPPhoneStatus object
enables/disables the BEEP from being heard:
< AastraIPPhoneStatus Beep="yes|no">
(case sensitive)
This attribute is optional. If notification is required, the attribute must be in the
ROOT. If the BEEP attribute is set to "yes" (i.e. Beep="yes") then it is an
indication to the phone to sound a beep when it receives the object. If the Beep
attribute is set to "no" (i.e. Beep="no") or not present, then the default behavior is
no beep is heard when the object arrives to the phone.
Note: The value set in the configuration files and Aastra Web UI override
the attribute you specify for the AastraIPPhoneStatus object.
Scroll Delay Option
(configurable via config files and Aastra Web UI only)
The IP phones support a scroll delay option that allows you to set the time delay,
in seconds, between the scrolling of each status message on the phone. The default
You can configure this option via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Changes are dynamic and apply to the phone immediately.
Note: For more information about setting the scroll delay option, see
Chapter 5, the section, “Scroll Delay Option for Status Messages.”
G-78
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
Timeout Attribute
(configurable via XML objects only)
The XML “Timeout” attribute allows you to specify a timeout value for the LCD
screen display. You must use the “Timeout” aattribute in the ROOT. When the
phone receives an XML object with this attribute, it overrides the default 45
second timeout specified for custom applications. Setting the “Timeout” attribute
to zero (0) disables this feature.
XML Example:
The following example illustrates the use of the “Timeout” attribute with the
AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen object. The result would cause the LCD
screen to timeout in 30 seconds.
<xs:element name="AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen">
<xs:attribute name="Beep" default="no">
<xs:simpleType>
<xs:restriction base="xs:string>
<xs:pattern value="yes|no"/>
</xs:restriction>
</xs:simpleType>
</xs:attribute>
<xs:attribute name="DestroyOnExit" default="no">
<xs:simpleType>
<xs:restriction base="xs:string>
<xs:pattern value="yes|no"/>
</xs:restriction>
</xs:simpleType>
</xs:attribute>
<xs:AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen Timeout= “30" default = “45”>
<xs:simpleType>
<xs:restriction base="xs:number/>
</xs:simpleType>
</xs:attribute>
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Creating an XML Application
LockIn Attribute
(configurable via XML objects only)
The XML “LockIn” attribute allows you to specify whether or not the
information on the LCD screen stays displayed when other events occur (such as
pressing buttons on the keypad).
Note: This attribute is ignored during incoming calls. If this attribute is
set, and the phone receives an incoming call, the LCD screen exits the
XML information and displays the information about the incoming call.
You must use the “LockIn” aattribute in the ROOT. The settings for the LockIn
attribute are “Yes” for enabled, and “No” for disabled.
XML Example:
The following example illustrates the use of the “LockIn” attribute with the
AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen object. The result would cause the LCD
screen to lock in the display of the XML information even if other events occur
(except for an incoming call).
<xs:element name="AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen">
<xs:attribute name="Beep" default="no">
<xs:simpleType>
<xs:restriction base="xs:string>
<xs:pattern value="yes|no"/>
</xs:restriction>
</xs:simpleType>
</xs:attribute>
<xs:attribute name="DestroyOnExit" default="no">
<xs:simpleType>
<xs:restriction base="xs:string>
<xs:pattern value="yes|no"/>
</xs:restriction>
</xs:simpleType>
</xs:attribute>
<xs:AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen LockIn= “yes” default="no">
<xs:simpleType>
<xs:restriction base="xs:string>
<xs:pattern value="yes|no"/>
</xs:restriction>
</xs:simpleType>
</xs:attribute>
G-80
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
CancelAction Attribute
(configurable via XML objects only)
The XML “cancelAction” attribute allows you to specify a URI that a GET is
executed on when the user presses the default CANCEL key.
Note: The URI must be fully qualified.
You can add this optional feature at the end of any of the XML objects. The
format is:
<Hardkey action="Cancel">
<Label>Label to Display</Label>
<URI>URI to Get</Label>
</Hardkey>
XML Example:
The following illustrates the AastraIPPhoneTextScreen object using the “Cancel”
attribute:
<AastraIPPhoneTextScreen cancelAction=”http://10.50.10.117/
ft.xml”>
<Title>Test</Title>
<Text>This is a test of the cancel action</Text>
</AastraIPPhoneTextScreen>
When this XML script is sent to the phone, and the user presses the default
CANCEL key, the script executes a GET on http://10.50.10.117/ft.xml.
Note: If the “cancelAction” attribute was not used in the above script,
then pressing the CANCEL key would simply cancel the current screen.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Creating an XML Application
HTTP Post
In addition to initiating a request to an XML application from the Services menu,
an HTTP server can push an XML object to the phone via HTTP Post. The phone
parses this object immediately upon receipt and displays the information to the
screen.
The HTTP post packet must contain an "xml=" line in the message body. The
string to parse is located after the equals sign in the message. HTML forms that
post objects to the phone must use a field named "xml" to send their data. See the
following examples (Example 1 and Example 2) for a sample HTTP post packet
and php source code.
Example 1:
POST / HTTP/1.1
Accept: image/gif, image/x-xbitmap, image/jpeg, image/pjpeg,
application/vnd.ms-powerpoint,
application/vnd.ms-excel, application/msword,
application/x-shockwave-flash, */*
Referer: http://10.50.10.53
Accept-Language: en-us..Content-Type: application/
x-www-form-urlencoded
Accept-Encoding: gzip, deflate..User-Agent: Mozilla/4.0
(compatible;MSIE 6.0;
Windows NT 5.0; .NET CLR 1.1.4322)
Host: 10.50.10.49
Content-Length: 194..Connection: Keep-Alive
Cache-Control: no-cache..Authorization: Basic YWRtaW46MjIyMjI=
xml=%3CAastraIPPhoneTextScreen%3E%
%3CTitle%3E57i+Tester%3C%2FTitle%3E
%3CText%3EMessage+to+go+on+phone.++Limit+to+512+bytes.%3C%2FText%3E
%2FAastraIPPhoneTextScreen%3E%
Note: The XML object cannot be larger than 2150 bytes. The phone
denies any posts larger than this limit.
G-82
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
Example 2:
Below is a sample php source code which sends an XML object to an Aastra
phone.
<?php
#
function push2phone($server,$phone,$data)
{
# url-encode the xml object
$xml = "xml=".urlencode($data);
$post = "POST / HTTP/1.1\r\n";
$post .= "Host: $phone\r\n";
$post .= "Referer: $server\r\n";
$post .= "Connection: Keep-Alive\r\n";
$post .= "Content-Type: application/x-www-form-urlencoded\r\n";
$post .= "Content-Length: ".strlen($xml)."\r\n\r\n";
$fp = @fsockopen ( $phone, 80, $errno, $errstr, 5);
if($fp)
{
@fputs($fp, $post.$xml);
flush();
fclose($fp);
}
}
##############################
$xml = "<AastraIPPhoneTextScreen>\n";
$xml .= "<Title>Push test</Title>\n";
$xml .= "<Text>This is a test for pushing a screen to a phone </
Text>\n";
$xml .= "</AastraIPPhoneTextScreen>\n";
push2phone("172.16.96.63',"172.16.96.75",$xml);
?>
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Creating an XML Application
HTTP Refresh Header
You can use an HTTP refresh header with the XML screen objects on the IP
phones. This feature provides the following:
•
All current XML screen objects have the ability to be refreshed by adding a
Refresh and URL setting to the HTTP headers. (see Refresh setting format
below)
•
The Refresh setting is set by the XML application and it is up to the
application to decide which objects it wants to refresh.
Note: This HTTP refresh header feature only applies to objects that
display to the screen.
The Refresh setting must be included in the HTTP header. The XML application
decides which objects it wants to use with this setting. The phone recognizes this
setting when parsing the HTTP header. If the setting is present, then it passes
along the refresh timeout and the URL to the ParserData object, which all XML
screen objects inherit from. The ParserData class also has a timer, which must be
set to expire at the next refresh time. When the timer expires (time to refresh the
screen), the phone requests the URL again and displays the refreshed screen.
Refresh Setting Format
The following is the Refresh setting format for the HTTP header:
Refresh: <timeout>; URL=<page to load>
The following example is a Refresh setting for use in an HTTP header:
Refresh: 3; URL=http://10.50.10.140/cgi-bin/update.xml
Note: You must use the Refresh and URL parameters in order for this
feature to work in the HTTP header.
G-84
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
HTTP Language Header
You can use an HTTP language header with the XML screen objects on the IP
phones. By including the language information in the HTTP header, the HTTP
GET includes the phone model, the firmware and the MAC address of the phone.
When the user selects a language on the phone, the selected language is sent to the
XML application and the application displays to the screen in that language.
Note: This HTTP language header feature only applies to objects that
display to the screen.
XML Schema File
After creating an XML application for your IP phone, you can validate the XML
objects using the Schema file provided in this section. This helps you find any
parsing errors that may exist, and verify that your XML objects conform to the
Aastra API.
can perform validation using the schema file.
XML Schema
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="ISO-8859-1" ?>
<xs:schema xmlns:xs="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema">
<xs:element name="AastraIPPhoneTextScreen">
<xs:complexType>
<xs:sequence>
<xs:element name="Title" type="xs:string" />
<xs:element name="Text">
<xs:simpleType>
<xs:restriction base="xs:string">
<xs:minLength value="1" />
<xs:maxLength value="1000" />
</xs:restriction>
</xs:simpleType>
</xs:element>
</xs:sequence>
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Creating an XML Application
<xs:AastraIPPhoneTextScreen LockIn="yes" default="no">
<xs:simpleType>
<xs:restriction base="xs:string>
<xs:pattern value="yes|no"/>
</xs:restriction>
</xs:simpleType>
</xs:attribute>
<xs:AastraIPPhoneTextScreen Timeout="30" default="45">
<xs:simpleType>
</xs:complexType>
</xs:element>
<xs:element name="AastraIPPhoneTextMenu">
<xs:complexType>
<xs:sequence>
<xs:element name="Title" type="xs:string" />
<xs:element name="MenuItem" minOccurs="1" maxOccurs="15">
<xs:complexType>
<xs:sequence>
<xs:element name="Prompt" type="xs:string" />
<xs:element name="URI" type="xs:string" />
</xs:sequence>
<xs:attribute name="base" type="xs:string" />
</xs:complexType>
</xs:element>
</xs:sequence>
<xs:attribute name="destroyOnExit" default="no">
<xs:simpleType>
<xs:restriction base="xs:string">
<xs:pattern value="yes|no" />
</xs:restriction>
</xs:simpleType>
</xs:attribute>
</xs:complexType>
</xs:element>
<xs:element name="AastraIPPhoneInputScreen">
<xs:complexType>
<xs:sequence>
<xs:element name="Title" />
<xs:element name="Prompt" />
<xs:element name="URL" />
<xs:element name="Parameter" />
<xs:element name="Default" />
</xs:sequence>
<xs:attribute name="type">
<xs:simpleType>
G-86
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
<xs:restriction base="xs:string">
<xs:pattern value="IP|string|number" />
</xs:restriction>
</xs:simpleType>
</xs:attribute>
<xs:attribute name="password" default="no">
<xs:simpleType>
<xs:restriction base="xs:string">
<xs:pattern value="yes|no" />
</xs:restriction>
</xs:simpleType>
</xs:attribute>
<xs:attribute name="destroyOnExit" default="no">
<xs:simpleType>
<xs:restriction base="xs:string">
<xs:pattern value="yes|no" />
</xs:restriction>
</xs:simpleType>
</xs:attribute>
</xs:complexType>
</xs:element>
<xs:element name="AastraIPPhoneDirectory">
<xs:complexType>
<xs:sequence>
<xs:element name="Title" type="xs:string" />
<xs:element name="MenuItem" minOccurs="1" maxOccurs="15">
<xs:complexType>
<xs:sequence>
<xs:element name="Prompt" type="xs:string" />
<xs:element name="URI" type="xs:string" />
</xs:sequence>
</xs:complexType>
</xs:element>
</xs:sequence>
<xs:attribute name="destroyOnExit" default="no">
<xs:simpleType>
<xs:restriction base="xs:string">
<xs:pattern value="yes|no" />
</xs:restriction>
</xs:simpleType>
</xs:attribute>
<xs:attribute name="next" type="xs:string" />
<xs:attribute name="previous" type="xs:string" />
</xs:complexType>
</xs:element>
</xs:schema>
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Managing XML Applications
Managing XML Applications
Description
This section provides information on managing XML applications on the Aastra
IP Phones.
Support of Virtual Web Servers
The IP phones support the configuration of a web sever to host multiple websites
with different content. With this feature, the webserver looks at the Host header in
the incoming HTTP request sent by the browser to determine which website the
phone is trying to access.
Non-Blocking HTTP Connections
The IP Phones support a non-blocking HTTP connection feature. This feature
allows the user to continue using the phone when there is a delay during an
HTTP connection while the phone is waiting for the HTTP server to
respond. This feature also allows a user to abort the connection and perform other
operations on the phone (which will abort the HTTP connection automatically). A
user can also abort the HTTP loading by pressing the GOODBYE key while the
phone is displaying “Loading Page.......”.
Note: This feature impacts only the HTTP calls triggered by a phone key
(softkey or programmable key); the HTTP calls performed by action
URIs are still blocking.
G-88
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing XML Applications
XML SIP Notify
In order for an XML push to bypass the NAT/firewall, the phone supports a
proprietary SIP NOTIFY event (aastra-xml) with or without XML content.
If XML content is provided in the SIP NOTIFY, it is processed directly by the
phone as it is done for an XML PUSH.
If the content is empty in the SIP NOTIFY, the phone automatically triggers a new
pre-configured action uri (action uri xml sip notify).
Example of a SIP NOTIFY with XML Content
NOTIFY sip:[email protected]:5060 SIP/2.0
Via: SIP/2.0/UDP 10.30.100.103:5060;branch=z9hG4bK7bbc1fac;rport
From: <sip:[email protected]:5060>;tag=81be2861f3
To: Jacky200 <sip:[email protected]:5060>
Contact: <sip:[email protected]>
Call-ID: 59638f5d95c9d301
CSeq: 4 NOTIFY
Max-Forwards: 70
Event: aastra-xml
Content-Type: application/xml
Content-Length: 115
<AastraIPPhoneExecute><ExecuteItem URI="http://10.30.100.39/XMLtests/
SampleTextScreen.xml"/></AastraIPPhoneExecute>
When the phone receives the SIP NOTIFY, the XML content is processed as any
XML object. In the above example, the phone calls http://10.30.100.39/XMLtests/
SampleTextScreen.xml after reception of the SIP NOTIFY.
Note: The phone supports all the current XML objects with all
the existing limitations. For example if an
AastraIPPhoneExecute is used, the embedded uri(s) can not be
HTTPS based.
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
G-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Managing XML Applications
Example of a SIP NOTIFY without XML Content
NOTIFY sip:[email protected]:5060 SIP/2.0
Via: SIP/2.0/UDP 10.30.100.103:5060;branch=z9hG4bK7bbc1fac;rport
From: <sip:[email protected]:5060>;tag=81be2861f3
To: Jacky200 <sip:[email protected]:5060>
Contact: <sip:[email protected]>
Call-ID: 59638f5d95c9d301
CSeq: 4 NOTIFY
Max-Forwards: 70
Event: aastra-xml
Content-Type: application/xml
Content-Length: 0
When the phone receives the SIP NOTIFY, it will trigger the action uri xml sip
notify parameter,if it has been previously configured using the configuration files
or the Aastra Web UI. If the action uri xml sip notify parameter is not
configured, the phone does not do anything.
On the phone side, a System Administrator can enable or disable this SIP
NOTIFY feature using the configuration files or the phone Web UI.
Also to ensure that the SIP NOTIFY is coming from a trusted source, it is
recommended that you enable the Whitelist feature (Whitelist Proxy parameter)
on the IP phone. If enabled, and the phone receives a SIP NOTIFY from a server
that is NOT on the whitelist, the phone rejects the message.
Reference
For information on enabling/disabling XMLSIP Notify, see Chapter 6, the section,
“XML SIP Notify Events.”
G-90
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Limited Warranty
Aastra Telecom warrants this product against defects and malfunctions during a
one (1) year period from the date of original purchase. If there is a defect or
malfunction, Aastra Telecom shall, at its option, and as the exclusive remedy,
either repair or replace the telephone set at no charge, if returned within the
warranty period.
If replacement parts are used in making repairs, these parts may be refurbished, or
may contain refurbished materials. If it is necessary to replace the telephone set, it
may be replaced with a refurbished telephone of the same design and color. If it
should become necessary to repair or replace a defective or malfunctioning
telephone set under this warranty, the provisions of this warranty shall apply to the
repaired or replaced telephone set until the expiration of ninety (90) days from the
date of pick up, or the date of shipment to you, of the repaired or replacement set,
or until the end of the original warranty period, whichever is later. Proof of the
original purchase date is to be provided with all telephone sets returned for
warranty repairs.
Exclusions
Aastra Telecom does not warrant its telephone sets to be compatible with the
equipment of any particular telephone company. This warranty does not extend to
damage to products resulting from improper installation or operation, alteration,
accident, neglect, abuse, misuse, fire or natural causes such as storms or floods,
after the telephone is in your possession.
Aastra Telecom shall not be liable for any incidental or consequential damages,
including, but not limited to, loss, damage or expense directly or indirectly arising
from the customers use of or inability to use this telephone, either separately or in
combination with other equipment. This paragraph, however, shall not apply to
consequential damages for injury to the person in the case of telephones used or
bought for use primarily for personal, family or household purposes.
This warranty sets forth the entire liability and obligations of Aastra Telecom with
respect to breach of warranty, and the warranties set forth or limited herein are the
sole warranties and are in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied,
including warranties or fitness for particular purpose and merchantability.
41-001160-01, Rev 00. Release 2.3
Warranty-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Warranty Repair Services
Should the set fail during the warranty period:
In North America, please call 1-800-574-1611 for further information.
Outside North America, contact your sales representative for return instructions.
You will be responsible for shipping charges, if any. When you return this
telephone for warranty service, you must present proof of purchase.
After Warranty Service
Aastra Telecom offers ongoing repair and support for this product. This service
provides repair or replacement of your Aastra Telecom product, at Aastra
Telecom's option, for a fixed charge. You are responsible for all shipping charges.
For further information and shipping instructions:
In North America, contact our service information number: 1-800-574-1611.
Outside North America, contact your sales representative.
Repairs to this product may be made only by the manufacturer and its authorized
agents, or by others who are legally authorized. This restriction applies during and
after the warranty period. Unauthorized repair will void the warranty.
Warranty-2
41-001160-01, Rev 00. Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
802.1x Support 6-31
802.1x local certificate 3-89
802.1x private key 3-89
auto-answer 5-99, A-169
about 5-98
802.1x root and intermediate certificates 3-88
802.1x trusted certificates 3-89
certificates and private key info 6-31
configuring using the Aastra Web UI 6-39
configuring using the config files 6-33
configuring using the IP Phone UI 6-34
eap-type 3-87
B
barge in 5-100, A-170
identity 3-87
md5 password 3-88
Basic Preferences 3-19
Basic settings
pc port passthrough enabled 3-88
Call Forward Mode 3-23
call waiting 3-20
digit timeout 3-19
A
display dtmf digits 3-20
DND key mode 3-22
goodbye key cancels incoming call 3-22
incoming call interrupts dialing 3-21
LLDP ELIN 3-23
Aastra Web UI
operation description 2-12
status description 2-12
local dial plan 3-19
MWI Line 3-22
account mode 3-34
custom mode 3-35
phone mode 3-35
park call (sprecode) (global setting) 3-20
pickup parked call (pickupsprecode global
setting) 3-20
play call waiting tone 3-21
preferred line 3-21
preferred line timeout 3-22
send dial plan terminator 3-19
status scroll delay 3-21
stuttered dial tone 3-21
suppress dtmf playback 3-20
switch focus to ringing line 3-21
UPnP mapping lines 3-22
xml beep support 3-21
ACD
subscription period 5-186
action URIs 3-71, 5-310
action URIs, configuring 5-313
Administration Guide, for IP phone 1-xviii
administrator options 3-1, 4-1
auto call distribution
acd auto available 3-30
acd auto available timer 3-30
subscription period 5-186
beep, for xml applicaton 5-298
beeping, status message G-78
BLA subscription period 5-216
Auto Call Distribution (ACD) key 5-144
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Index-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
blacklist duration 6-22
Conference softkey 1-26, 1-30
BLF
config server
configuring 5-165
directed call pickup 5-125
on BroadSoft 5-164
overview 5-161
setting 5-161
alternate TFTP 3-74
auto resync mode 3-79
auto resync time 3-80
download path (HTTPS path) 3-78
download port (HTTPS port) 3-78
download protocol 3-73
download server (HTTPS sserver) 3-78
FTP password 3-76
FTP path 3-76
FTP server 3-75
FTP username 3-76
HTTP path 3-77
HTTP port 3-77
HTTP server 3-77
primary TFTP 3-74
select TFTP 3-75
BLF key 5-143
BLF List,setting 5-162
BLF subscription period 5-168
BLF/List key 5-144
BLF/Xfer key 5-146
Bridged Line Appearance (BLA)
about BLA 5-210
TFTP path 3-74, 3-75
configuring 5-211
configuration
C
file precedence 1-38
cadences, configuring 5-122
call forward key 5-146
call forwarding 5-234
configuration file, description of 1-36
configuration files
installing 1-39
using 2-17
call waiting 5-63
configuration server 4-104
configuring 4-104
call waiting tone 5-64
call waiting tones 5-124
callers list
D
downloading to phone 5-278
enabling/disabling 5-276
default gateway 3-38
delete key 1-8, 1-22
using on phone 5-276
DHCP 3-37, 4-4
configuring 3-5, 4-18
not using 1-33
using 1-33
Codecs 4-90
DHCP option override 3-40
dhcp user class 3-40
customized preference list of 4-91
conf key 5-147, 5-156
dial plan
conference key 1-7
configuring 5-53
enabling/disabling 5-109
mapping as speeddial 5-110
dial plan, emergency 5-16
Index-2
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
dial plans
overview 5-49
empty key 5-148
encryption
Dial softkey 1-26, 1-30
methods for 7-2
overview 7-2
dial tones, stuttered
about 5-66
Ethernet cable 1-4
DiffServ QoS 4-50
expansion module, 536M 1-5
Directed call pickup
configuring 5-128
description of 5-125
A-219
directed call pickup
enable/disable 3-29
play ring splash 3-29
prefix setting 3-29
F
feature keys 5-137
configuring 5-153, A-206
Directory key 1-25, 1-30
feature keys, configuring 5-158
firmware
directory list
description of 1-36
installation considerations 1-33
installation methods 1-33
installing 1-39
download behavior 5-287
using 5-288
firmware updates 3-82
flash key 5-145, 5-157
DND
account-based 5-199
configuring 5-191
G
DND key 5-144
DNS1 3-38
General Preferences 3-19
Goodbye Key
DNS2 3-39
DSCP 3-49, 4-52
goodbye key 1-7
DTMF digits
configuring display of 5-61, 5-64
displaying 5-61
H
DTMF methods 4-93
DTMF, out-of-band 4-92
handsfree key 1-8
hold key 1-7
DTMF, suppressing playback 5-59
hostname 3-39
HTTP and HTTPS support 2-6
HTTP/HTTPS and Broadsoft CMS 2-8
E
emergency dial plan, defining 5-16
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Index-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HTTPS
client functions 2-7
key mapping
map conf key to 3-26
map redial key to 3-26
security method for A-31, A-32
server functions 2-7
key mapping, enable/disable Redial, Xfer, Conf
Keys 5-109
using via Aastra Web UI 2-9
key press simulation G-60
HTTPS certificate hostname 3-48
HTTPS client method 3-46
key redirection (redial, conf, xfer, icom,
voicemail) 5-334
HTTPS Server block XML HTTP posts 3-45
HTTPS server redirect 3-45
L
LAN Port 3-39
HTTPS validate certificates 3-47
Language
language 1 thru 4 3-33
language
I
overview 5-30
specifying on IP phone 5-33
WebPage Language 3-32, 3-33
Icom key 5-147
icom key 5-155
language pack settings A-156
language settings A-154
Installation Guide, for IP phone 1-xviii
language, input 5-37
specifying using the IP Phone UI 5-40
intercom feature
configuring 5-100
incoming calls 5-99
outgoing calls 5-98
last call return (lcr)
configuring 5-230
Intercom key 1-30
intercom settings, incoming
allow barge in 3-24
lcr key 5-146
auto-answer 3-24
microphone mute 3-24
line key 5-143, 5-155
line settings 3-69
intercom settings, outgoing
line 3-25
line/call appearance keys 1-8
LLDP 3-41
prefix code 3-25
type 3-25
lldp packet interval 3-41
LLDP-MED and ELIN 5-93
intercom warning tone A-170
IP phone UI 2-2
local dial plan
dial plan terminator 5-51
secondary dial tone 5-52
K
lockIn, for xml applications 5-299
locking keys, on the IP phone 5-45
key descriptions 1-11
Index-4
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
locking keys, procedures 5-46
HTTPS certificate hostname 3-48
HTTPS Client Method 3-46
HTTPS redirect 3-45
HTTPS trusted certificates filename 3-48
LLDP packet interval 3-41
LLDP support 3-41
A-219
locking/unlocking the phone 5-10
M
NAT IP 3-42
NAT RTP port 3-43
NAT SIP Port 3-42
missed calls indicator
accessing and clearing 5-281
enabling/disabling 5-280
overview 5-280
Nortel NAT 3-43
NTP time servers 3-43, 3-44
UPnP 3-42
Model 51i 1-15
upnp gateway 3-42
Model 53i 1-20
network settings, basic 3-37, 4-4
DHCP 3-37
Model 55i 1-23
Model 57i 1-27
Ethernet (PC Port and LAN Port) 3-39
gateway 3-38
hostname 3-39
Model 57i Cordless Handset 1-31
Model 57i CT 1-27
Model 9143i 1-6
IP Address 3-37
primary DNS 3-38
secondary DNS 3-39
subnet mask 3-38
Model 9480i 1-10
Model 9480i CT 1-10
none key 5-143, 5-155
N
Nortel NAT timer 3-43
Nortel Proxy 4-27
NAP SIP port 3-42
NAT
NTP time servers 3-44
configuring 4-28
Nortel Networks 4-28
overview 4-26
O
operational features 5-5
router configuration 4-27
configuring line number 6-5
configuring message sequence for blind
transfer 6-7
NAT IP 3-42
NAT RTP port 3-43
navigation keys 1-7
network configuration 4-4
network parameters A-7
options
via Aastra Web UI 3-6
via Configuration Files 3-8
via IP Phone UI 3-3
network settings, advanced 3-40, 3-45, 4-26
DHCP option override 3-40
DHCP user class 3-40
HTTPS block XML HTTP Posts 3-45
HTTPS certificate expiration 3-47
options key 1-8
Options key redirection 5-335
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Index-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
options menu, simplified A-6
global ring tone settings A-135
global SIP A-64
out of sequence errors, ignoring 6-50
goodbye key cancels incoming call A-142
group paging RTP settings A-171
handset feature keys A-206
P
HTTP/HTTPS authentication with Broadsoft
CMS A-86
HTTPS client and server settings A-31
HTTPS server certificate validation A-33
incoming call interrupts dialing A-138
incoming intercom A-169
paging
Paging key 5-148
paging RTP
paging listen addresses 3-26
Intercom settings A-167
language A-154
language pack A-156
live dialpad A-61
LLDP ELIN A-124
parameters
55i, 57i, 57i CT softkeys A-185
802.1x support settings A-104
Aastra Web UI A-16
acd auto-available timer A-178
ACD subscription period A-95
Action URIs A-130
local SIP TLS port A-30
local SIP UDP/TCP port A-30
locking SAVE and DELTE keys (53i) A-217
locking softkeys and programmable keys A-214
MAC Address/Line Number A-88
mapping key A-181
message waiting indicator A-145
missed call summary subscription period A-97
missed call summary subscription, global A-96
missed call summary subscription, per-line A-98
Missed Calls Indicator settings A-126
NAT A-27
advanced SIP A-87
as-feature-event subscription A-99
audio transmit and receive adjustment
settings A-172
auto-answer settings A-167
backlight mode (55i, 57i, 57i CT) A-60
blacklist duration A-224
BLF list URI A-218
BLF subscription period A-94
blind transfer setting A-221
boot sequence recover mode A-222
call forward key mode A-122
call forward settings A-121
call waiting settings A-144
Callers List settings A-119
centralized conferencing A-84
configuration encryption setting A-232
configuration server A-17
custom time zone and dst settings A-51
customized callers list and services keys A-120
dial plan A-62
directed call pickup A-176
directory settings A-118
DND key mode A-146
dns query setting A-231
DSCP A-42
DTMF digits A-166
emergency dial plan A-15
expansion module keys A-208
out of order SIP requests A-232
outgoing intercom A-167
park and pickup global settings A-179
password A-14
per-line ring tone settings A-137
per-line SIP A-73
polling action URIs A-225
preferred line A-141
preferred line timeout A-141
priority alert settings A-147
programmable keys (53i, 55i) A-194
rport A-29
RTP, Codec, DTMF global settings A-109
silence suppression settings A-112
single call restriction setting A-223
SIP registration retry timer A-93
softkeys, programmable keys, feature keys A-184
stuttered dial tone setting A-143
Suppress DTMF Playback A-165
switch focus to ringing line A-140
Index-6
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
symmetric UDP signaling A-229
time and date A-45
time server A-43
top softkeys A-199
ToS A-42
PoE 1-4
preferred line 5-77
preferred line timeout 5-77
Transport Layer Security (TLS) A-100
updating caller ID A-221
UPnP A-35
priority alerting
about 5-118
configuring 5-122
user-agent setting A-230
VLAN A-36
voicemail A-117
whitelist proxy A-224
XML key redirection (redial, xfer, conf, icom,
voicemail) A-226
XML settings A-127
priority alerting settings
auto call distribution 3-28
community 1 thru 4 3-28
emergency 3-28
enabling 3-27
external 3-28
group 3-27
internal 3-28
priority 3-28
XML SIP notify A-134
parameters, list of configurable A-6
time server settings A-43
configuring 5-150
park key 5-146, 5-156
public key 5-157
park/pickup
Q
about parked/pickup calls 5-55, 5-219
configuring a static configuration 5-57
configuring programmable configuration using
config files 5-221
configuring programmable configuration using Web
UI 5-223
QoS 4-50
R
redial key 1-7
static configuration of 5-55
using on the IP phone 5-228
enabling/disabling 5-109
repair 0-2
pass-thru port 3-39
requirements, IP phone 1-34
restarting IP phone 3-13
password, resetting user’s 5-7
passwords
ring tone
for a user 5-5
PC Port 3-39
phone lock key 5-148
configuring 5-116
Phone Status
Firmware Version 3-10
IP&MAC Address 3-10
LAN Port 3-10
ring tones 5-113
configuring 5-116
ring tone 3-27
tone set 3-27
PC Port 3-10
phone status settings 3-9
pickup key 5-146, 5-156
Rport 3-43
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Index-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
rport, configuring 4-61
local SIP UDP/TCP Port 3-62, 3-63
missed call summary subscription 3-59
missed call summary subscription period 3-60
registration failed retry timer 3-63
registration renewal timer 3-63
registration timeout retry timer 3-63
send line number in REGISTER message 3-61
send MAC address in REGISTER message 3-60
session timer 3-61
transaction timer 3-61
whitelist proxy 3-65
RTP
basic codecs for 4-90
configuring 4-89, 4-95
out-of-band DTMF 4-92
RTP port 4-90
silence suppression 4-94
rtp encryption 4-93
RTP port 4-90
RTP settings 3-66, 3-68
SIP settings, basic 3-54
auth name 3-55
S
BLA number 3-55
caller ID 3-54
display name 3-54
line mode 3-55
save key 1-8, 1-22
scroll delay 5-298
password 3-55
phone number 3-54
screen name 3-54
screen name 2 3-54
user name 3-54
scrolling, status message G-78
Services key 1-25, 1-30
SIP settings, network
services key 5-148
backup proxy port 3-56
backup proxy server 3-56
backup registrar port 3-58
backup registrar server 3-58
outbound proxy port 3-57
outbound proxy server 3-57
proxy port 3-56
proxy server 3-56
registrar port 3-57
registrar server 3-57
registration period 3-58
silence suppression 4-94
SIP
advanced settings 4-80
configuring 4-72
overview of 4-66
parameter precedence 4-69
SIP settings
autodial number 3-68
autodial timeout 3-68
autodial, use global settings 3-68
RTP port 3-66
SIP Settings, RTP
Basic Codecs 3-66
Force RFC2833 Out of Band DTMF 3-66
RTP encryption 3-67
RTP port 3-66
SIP settings, advanced 3-59
acd subscription period 3-64
as-feature-event subscription 3-60
as-feature-event subscription period 3-60
bla subscription period 3-64
blacklist duration 3-64
silence suppression 3-67
BLF subscription period 3-64
explicit mwi subscription 3-59
explicit mwi subscription period 3-59
Softkey settings A-184
softkeys 5-137
Index-8
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
configuring 5-150
Softkeys and Programmable Keys
locking 5-46, 5-351
troubleshooting 9-3
log settings for A-233
softkeys and programmable keys
locking A-214
Tx/Rx adjustments
about 5-339
softkeys, state-based 5-138
speeddial key 5-143
configuring 5-340
Speeddial/Xfer key 5-147
sprecode key 5-146
type of service
RTCP 3-49
RTP 3-49
SIP 3-49
status message beep
configuring in configuration files and Web
UI 5-300
U
status message scrolling G-78
configuring in configuration files and Web
UI 5-301
upgrading, firmware 8-2
UPnP
configuring 4-47, A-35
description of 4-46
subnet mask 3-38
upnp gateway 3-42
upnp manager 3-42
T
User Guide, for IP phone 1-xviii
time and date
usernames
date format 3-31
time format 3-30
administrator 2-11, 3-6, 4-3
configuring for FTP server 4-110
configuring for SIP authentication 4-74
for FTP A-21
for SIP authentication 4-67, 4-68, A-65, A-74
time and date, configuring 5-22
time servers, configuring 4-63
time zone and dst settings, custom 5-19, A-51
absolute A-52
per-line BLA 5-212
user 2-11
relative time A-55
SIP asserted identify (Sylantro Servers) 6-27
V
VLAN 3-50
TLS support
configuring 4-50
DSCP Range 4-52
sips private key 3-86
sips root and intermediate certificates 3-85
sips trusted certificates 3-86
global priority non-IP packet 3-50
global VLAN enable 3-50
LAN Port SIP, RTP, RTCP Priority 3-51
LAN Port VLAN ID 3-50
PC Port priority 3-52
PC Port VLAN ID 3-52
priority mapping 4-52
ToS 4-50
ToS, DSCP 3-49
transfer key 1-7
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Index-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
voicemail
configuring 5-293
overview 5-293
using 5-295
volume key 1-7
W
warranty 0-1
WebApps key 5-145
whilte list proxy 6-24
X
xfer key 5-148, 5-156
XML
action URIs 5-310
configuring on IP phone 5-302
configuring SIP Notify for empty message 5-324
creating customized services 5-296
customized services 5-296
disconnected action URI 5-316
enabling/disabling SIP Notify 5-321
key redirection 5-334
off-hook interaction with XML applications 5-337
Options key redirection (Services key on
51i) 5-335
override for a locked phone 5-338
polling action URIs 5-325
procedure for configuring 5-303
push from the server 5-301
push requests 5-303
scroll delay for status messages 5-301
SIP Notify events 5-319
softkey URIs 5-327
URI for key press simulation G-60
using customized services 5-308
WebApps key 5-333
xml beep support 5-68, 5-70
XML Get timeout 5-298
XML key 5-145
Index-10
41-001160-01, Rev 00, Release 2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SIP IP Phone Administrator Guide
Models 9143i, 9480i, 9480i CT, and 5i Series
© 2008 Aastra Telecom Inc.
If you’ve read this owner’s manual and consulted the Troubleshooting section and
still have problems, please visit our website at www.aastratelecom.com or call 1-800-574-1611
for technical assistance.
41-001160-01, Rev 00
Release 2.3
June 2008
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|